JP2024078604A - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine with improved performance. [Solution] The invention has a credit number storage area capable of storing credit data, and when gaming medals are paid out, the number of gaming medals is added one by one to a credit number display that displays the number of credits linked to the credit number storage area, and the addition interval for adding one to the credit number storage area is longer than the interruption period. [Selected Figure] Fig. 90

Description

Regarding gaming machines.

In a slot machine, a game starts when a start command device (start lever) is operated after a predetermined number of game medals are inserted, and multiple rows of reels with multiple symbols arranged on the outer periphery rotate. When the reels are stopped by using a reel stop device (stop button) to stop the rotation, and a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, a winning combination such as "777") is lined up on an active line, the machine generally transitions to a special game state (a game state in which the probability of winning a small role or the like is higher than usual) that is more profitable for the player than the normal game state. In a slot machine, various effects are performed in addition to such basic games, thereby improving the overall entertainment value.
In addition, when the game medals are paid out, a payout sound is output, the number of medals won is displayed, and a backlight is turned on, allowing the player to recognize that the game medals have been paid out appropriately.

JP 2019-217068 A

There is a demand for improved performance in this type of gaming machine.

a game medium number storage means capable of storing the number of game media;
a game medium number display means capable of displaying the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means,
The lighting and extinguishing of each segment constituting the game media number display means can be controlled by an interrupt process that can be executed at a predetermined cycle;
when a predetermined number of payout processes are executed in a certain game, a predetermined number of game media can be added one by one to the game media number storage means, and the number of game media displayed on the game media number display means can be updated every time the game medium is added one by one to the game media number storage means,
A gaming machine in which an interval at which a predetermined number of game media are added one by one to a game media number storage means when a predetermined number of payout processes are executed in a certain game is longer than a predetermined cycle of an interrupt process.

This invention can improve the performance of gaming machines.

FIG. 2 is an external perspective view of the cabinet of the slot machine PS1. A diagram showing the back surface of the front panel PS2. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the inner surface of the cabinet PS3. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing functional blocks. 13 is a flowchart showing a program start process. 13 is a flowchart showing a power-off process. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 11 is a flowchart showing a power interruption recovery process. 13 is a flowchart showing the main game progress. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting change process. 1 is a diagram illustrating a reel arrangement in the present embodiment. 11 is a diagram illustrating the pattern combinations in this embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating the pattern combinations in this embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating the pattern combinations in this embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating the pattern combinations in this embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating the pattern combinations in this embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating the pattern combinations in this embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a condition device in the present embodiment. A diagram explaining the internal lottery placement number in this embodiment. A diagram explaining the internal lottery placement number in this embodiment. A diagram explaining the internal lottery placement number in this embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a case where the MAX bet switch is not operated to insert a coin after the payout process is completed. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a case where an insert operation is performed using the MAX bet switch after the payout process is completed. 13 is a diagram illustrating a case where a settlement operation is performed using a settlement switch after the dispensing process is completed. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a case where a gaming medal is not inserted after the settlement process is completed. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the case where a gaming medal is inserted after the settlement process is completed. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a case where a payout is performed normally. 13 is a diagram for explaining a case where dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a case where dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs). FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a payout has been normally performed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs). A figure showing an example of a push order navigation image. A figure showing an example of a push order navigation image displayed on a liquid crystal display. A figure showing an example in which a specified error occurs while a push order navigation image is being displayed. This is a time chart for when the MAX bet switch is not used to insert a bet after the payout process based on the winning push order role is completed. This is a time chart when the MAX bet switch is used to insert a bet after the payout process based on the winning push order role has been completed. This is a time chart for when the MAX BET switch is not operated after the payout process based on the winning of the Cherry role is completed. This is a time chart when a MAX BET switch is operated after the payout process based on the winning of the Cherry combination is completed. This is a time chart for when no gaming medal is inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed. This is a time chart when a gaming medal is inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed. This is a time chart when the settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the payout process based on the winning push order role is completed. This is a time chart when a settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed. This is a time chart when a normal payout is not made after a cherry win (when a hopper empty error occurs). This is a time chart when a payout is not made normally after a cherry win (when a hopper retention error occurs). 2 is a diagram showing each area stored in a main control ROM; FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an interrupt initial setting area and automatic allocation according to the priority order of the interrupt initial setting area. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the relationship between power-on processing and interrupt vector addresses of timer interrupt processing; 11 is a diagram showing the relationship between the interrupt vector addresses of the power-on process and the timer interrupt process and other programs. FIG. A figure showing an example of ball output specifications that span advantageous zones. A figure showing an example of ball output specifications that span advantageous zones. A figure showing an example of ball output specifications that span advantageous zones. A flowchart showing a favorable zone clear counter management process corresponding to the favorable zone difference counter. A flowchart showing a favorable zone clear counter management process corresponding to the favorable zone difference counter. 13 is a flowchart showing a stoppage monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing a stoppage monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing a stoppage monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing a stoppage monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing a stoppage monitoring process. A figure showing an example of the presentation of the operation advance notification state and the end notification state. A diagram showing an example of the configuration of the bet number display lamp 25 and the payout number display. A diagram showing an example of the configuration of the bet number display lamp 25 and the payout number display. A diagram showing an example of the configuration of the bet number display lamp 25 and the payout number display. This figure shows the positional relationship when the medal selector 34, the chute member, and the return member are attached to the back surface of the front panel PS2. A diagram explaining the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member. A diagram explaining the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member. This figure shows the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, and the positional relationship with the hopper 44 when the front panel PS2 is closed. This figure shows the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, and the positional relationship with the hopper 44 when the front panel PS2 is closed. 13 is a diagram illustrating the position and dimensions of a fastening part (screw) that fastens the chute member when the fastening part of the chute member is fastened to the front panel PS2 by the fastening part. FIG. A figure showing another aspect of the positional relationship when the medal selector 34, the chute member and the return member are attached to the back surface of the front panel PS2. FIG. 13 illustrates an example of an error history screen. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an error history screen when the front door is opened and closed while the error history screen is displayed. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a time setting screen. This is a list of display patterns of error history when multiple errors occur. A figure showing an example of a presentation when the notification state related to the limit is the "normal state." A figure showing an example of a presentation when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notice state." A figure showing an example of a presentation when the notification state related to the limit is the "operation notification state." FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the transition of notification states related to a cutoff. 13 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the difference in the number of gaming media related to the cap in the bonus gaming state and the temporary cap flag. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an advance notification image in the bonus game state. FIG. This figure explains the notification state related to termination when the power is cut off and then restored while the notification state related to termination is in the operation preview state. This figure explains the notification state related to termination when the power is cut off and then restored while the notification state related to termination is in the operation preview state. This figure explains the notification state related to termination when the power is cut off and then restored while the notification state related to termination is in the operation preview state. This figure explains the notification state related to termination when the power is cut off and then restored while the notification state related to termination is in the operation preview state. This figure explains the notification state related to termination when the power is cut off and then restored while the notification state related to termination is in the operation preview state. 13 is a diagram illustrating an error image that is displayed when an error occurs during automatic settlement. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an error image that is displayed when an error occurs during automatic settlement. FIG. A figure showing an example of ball output specifications that span advantageous zones. A figure showing an example of ball output specifications that span advantageous zones. 11 is a diagram showing the progress of a game and the lighting state of a bet lamp. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the progress of a game and the lighting state of a bet lamp. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the progress of a game and the lighting state of a bet lamp. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the progress of a game and the lighting state of the bet lamp. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the performance volume in each situation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a dangerous installation situation of the gaming machine. 13 is a diagram showing the movement of the selector when the gaming machine is in a normal installation state and a dangerous installation state. FIG. This is a view of the gaming machine with the left side facing down, seen from behind the front door. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the gaming machine as viewed from the front, illustrating the configuration around the speaker. This is a front view of the front door from the back side. FIG. 13 is a view of the selector as seen from the right side.

<Terminology>
"Medals (number of medals)", "game media (number of game media)", and "game value" are synonymous. "Bet", "BET", and "insertion" regarding game media are synonymous, and all are acts of betting (putting) game media. When expressing a hexadecimal number, it is written as "0x00" or "00h", and when expressing a binary number, it is written as "00000000b" or "00000000B", and if there is no special notation before or after the number, it is expressed in decimal. "Reel" may be called "rotor", and all are synonymous. "Storage means" may be called "RWM", "RAM", or "storage area", and all are synonymous. "Grant" used in "grant of game media" or "grant of points" may be called "payout" or "acquisition", and all are synonymous. The "setting/reset switch" may be referred to as a "setting change switch" or a "reset switch" depending on its function, but in both cases, they refer to the same switch. The "setting change switch" and the "reset switch" may each be provided as different switches. When a small symbol with a high payout or a small symbol with a low payout stops depending on the operation mode, the small symbol with a high payout may be referred to as a high symbol (high symbol bell, high symbol small symbol are also synonymous), and the small symbol with a low payout may be referred to as a low symbol (low symbol bell, low symbol small symbol are also synonymous). When a symbol combination with no payout stops at this time, it may be referred to as a spill symbol (synonymous spill symbol).

Below, an embodiment of the present invention (hereinafter referred to as the present embodiment) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Explanation of Slot Machine PS1>
The components of the slot machine PS1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

The slot machine PS1 is roughly divided into a front panel PS2 side and a cabinet PS3 side, with the necessary parts and circuit boards attached to each side. The sides of the front panel PS2 and cabinet PS3 of the slot machine PS1 are joined by a hinge device and a locking device, and the locking device side can be opened by inserting a lock key into the locking device provided on the front panel PS2 and rotating it in a specific direction. In other words, the front panel PS2 functions as a door to the cabinet PS3.

<Front panel PS2>
The front panel PS2 (also referred to as the front door PS2, front surface door PS2, or front door PS2, or simply the front door) is a plate-like member with a design, and on the front side (player side) there are provided a middle panel (including a display window 4, operation indicator lamps 24, etc.), an operation panel 11 (including a bet number display lamp 25, credit number display 26, number of won coins display 27, etc.), a lower panel 5 (also referred to as the lower panel 5), upper or both side performance lamps, etc., and on the back side there are provided a medal selector 34 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as the "selector"), a display device 32, a sub-control board 1000, various boards, etc., and a setting display LED (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the setting value display LED, setting display device, setting value display device, setting value display device).

<Display window 4>
The display window 4 is an area provided in the front panel PS2, and when the front panel PS2 is closed, the symbols drawn on the reels are visible. The symbols printed on the outer periphery of each reel tape fixed to each reel rim of the left reel 8a, the center reel 8b, and the right reel 8c are configured to be visible from the front side (the player side) through the display window 4. When the reels are stopped, three consecutive symbols out of 21 symbols (20 or 16 symbols may be freely designed depending on the specifications) are visible. That is, a total of nine symbols (3 symbols x 3 reels) are visible from the display window 4. Here, among the stop positions at which the left reel 8a, the center reel 8b, and the right reel 8c stop three symbols, the uppermost stop position is called the upper row, the central stop position is called the middle row, and the lowermost stop position is called the lower row.

<Valid line>
The pay line is a symbol combination line that is the target of the winning judgment process (described later) when the left reel 8a, the center reel 8b, and the right reel 8c are stopped. In this embodiment, the pay line is visible through the display window 4 and is composed of a symbol combination line (middle horizontal line) that passes through the middle of each reel. When the winning judgment process determines that the symbol combination stopped on the pay line corresponds to any role, a process corresponding to the stopped symbol combination is performed. As an example, when it is determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a minor role such as a bell has stopped, a payout process of game medals (hereinafter sometimes referred to as medals, game media, or game value) or a credit addition process is performed, and when it is determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has stopped, an automatic bet process is performed.

Depending on the slot machine PS1, the effective lines may be set to five lines, including an upper horizontal line, a middle horizontal line, a lower horizontal line, a line rising to the right, and a line falling to the right, or to six or more lines, including non-straight, roughly mountain-shaped (lower left reel 8a, upper middle reel 8b, lower right reel 8c), roughly valley-shaped (upper left reel 8a, lower middle reel 8b, upper right reel 8c), roughly L-shaped (upper left reel 8a, lower middle reel 8b, lower right reel 8c), or set so that the effective lines change depending on the number of coins bet, and can be freely designed according to the specifications of the slot machine PS1. Also, straight lines other than the effective lines may be called inactive lines.

<Operation indicator lamp 24>
The operation indicator lamps 24 are provided around the display window 4, and indicate the operation sequence of the stop switches 13 (described later) to the player when the left reel 8a, the center reel 8b, and the right reel 8c are spinning. That is, when the left operation indicator lamp 24a is lit (the center operation indicator lamp 24b and the right operation indicator lamp 24c are off), it indicates that the left stop switch 13a should be operated, when the center operation indicator lamp 24b is lit (the left operation indicator lamp 24a and the right operation indicator lamp 24c are off), it indicates that the center stop switch 13b should be operated, and when the right operation indicator lamp 24c is lit (the left operation indicator lamp 24a and the center operation indicator lamp 24b are off), it indicates that the right stop switch 13c should be operated.

<Bet number display lamp 25>
The bet number display lamp 25 (also called the bet number display lamp 25, the bet number display lamp 25, the bet number display lamp 25, or the bet number display lamp 25) is provided on the operation panel 11 and has a function of displaying the number of bets made by the player's operation. It is also composed of a 1 bet lamp 25a (not shown), a 2 bet lamp 25b (not shown), and a 3 bet lamp 25c (not shown). When one medal is bet, the 1 bet lamp 25a lights up, when a total of two medals are bet, the 1 bet lamp 25a and the 2 bet lamp 25b light up, and when a total of three medals are bet, the 1 bet lamp 25a, the 2 bet lamp 25b, and the 3 bet lamp 25c light up. In addition, although not shown, after the symbol combination related to the replay is displayed, when the automatic bet process is executed, the bet number display lamp 25 corresponding to the number of bets used in the game in which the replay was won is turned on, and the replay lamp is turned on. The timing of lighting the bet number display lamp 25 and the timing of lighting the replay lamp may be simultaneous, or one of them may be configured to light up first.

<Credit Number Display 26>
The credit number display 26 (also called credit, medal number display, medal number display device, game media number display device, game media number display device) is provided on the operation panel 11 and is composed of a segment display 26a (not shown) which is composed of a total of eight segments, seven segments and decimal points (DP), and mainly displays the upper digits of the credit number, and a segment display 26b (not shown) which is composed of a total of eight segments, seven segments and decimal points (DP), and mainly displays the lower digits of the credit number. The credit number means the number of medals credited (electrically stored) in the slot machine PS1, and can be stored up to a maximum of 50. In addition, when an error is detected and normal play cannot proceed, a display related to the error may be displayed.

<Acquired coin count indicator 27>
The acquired coin number display 27 (also called acquired coin number display, acquired number display, payout coin number display, or payout number display) is provided on the operation panel 11 and is composed of a segment display 27a (not shown) which is composed of a total of eight segments, seven segments and decimal points (DP), and mainly displays the upper digits of the acquired coin number, and a segment display 27b (not shown) which is composed of a total of eight segments, seven segments and decimal points (DP), and mainly displays the lower digits of the acquired coin number. The acquired coin number means the number of medals paid out to the player (including the number of medals stored in the credit number display 26) according to the results of the game in the slot machine PS1. In addition, when an error is detected and normal game play cannot proceed, a display related to the error may be displayed.

The credit number display 26 and the acquired coin number display 27 display each piece of information using the segment displays 26a, 26b, 27a, and 27b, and may also display information other than the credit number information or the acquired coin number information depending on whether the DP is lit or not. For example, information indicating that the player is in a favorable zone (described later) or that a specific external signal is being output may be notified by lighting the DP of one of the segment displays. The acquired coin number display 27 may also have the ability to notify the player of the order of pressing using the display section for the upper digits and the display section for the lower digits. When the acquired coin number display 27 is used to notify the order of pressing, the acquired coin number display 27 may be referred to as an instruction monitor.

<Operation panel 11>
The operation panel 11 is provided at approximately the center of the front panel PS2. The operation panel 11 is provided in a stepped shape with a horizontal section that is approximately horizontal and a vertical section that extends approximately vertically downward from the tip of the horizontal section, and a start switch 12 and a stop switch 13, which will be described later, are provided on the vertical section, and a medal insertion slot 17, which will be described later, a plurality of bet switches (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), a sub switch 20, a sub cross key switch 21, an eject switch 22, a settlement switch (not shown), and a performance switch (not shown) are provided on the horizontal section.

<Start switch 12>
The start switch (also called start lever) 12 is provided on the vertical part of the operation panel 11. It is a lever-shaped operation part, and the start switch sensor is ON when not operated, and the mechanism is such that the start switch is determined to have been operated when the start switch sensor is OFF when operated. The operation of the start switch 12 becomes effective when the number of bets reaches a specified number, and when the operation of the start switch 12 is accepted, an internal lottery process, a process related to the instruction function, a reel rotation process, or the like is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, since the input signal is low active, when the start switch sensor is ON when not operated, the start switch input signal is OFF, and when the start switch sensor is changed from ON to OFF when operated, the start switch input signal is ON. Not limited to this, the start switch input signal may be ON when the start switch sensor is ON. In other words, the specified number refers to the number of bets required to start a game.

In the following, when it is simply stated that "the start switch is ON" or "the start switch is operated," it means that the start switch sensor has changed from ON to OFF, and the start switch input signal has changed from OFF to ON.

<Stop switch 13>
The stop switch 13 is provided on the operation panel 11. In this embodiment, the left stop switch 13a corresponds to the left reel 8a, the middle stop switch 13b corresponds to the middle reel 8b, and the right stop switch 13c corresponds to the right reel 8c. When the stop switch 13 can be operated, the color of the lamp provided on the main body of the stop switch 13 or the lamps around it is changed to indicate that the stop switch 13 is active. For example, when the stop switch 13 can be operated, the lamp is lit in blue, and when the stop switch 13 cannot be operated, the lamp is lit in red. When the stop switch 13 can be operated, the lamp is lit, and when the stop switch 13 cannot be operated, the lamp is turned off.

<Medal slot 17>
The medal insertion port 17 is provided on the operation panel 11. It has an opening for inserting medals into the medal insertion port, and restricts the insertion of medals larger than the standard size. A number of different medal insertion ports 17 are manufactured according to the standard sizes of a number of different medals, but the installation standards for the various medal insertion ports 17 are made the same so that they can be installed on the operation panel 11 in a common manner.

Regarding the insertion of gaming media, the gaming media is not limited to the medals mentioned above, but may be, for example, gaming balls (so-called Parrots) used in pachinko gaming machines, or gaming medium information stored in an electrical storage medium such as a magnetic card or flash memory, which is input into the gaming machine, and the number of bets is set and added when a win is made based on the input gaming medium information.

<Bet Switch (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19)>
The bet switch is provided on the operation panel 11. When the bet switch is operated while there are medals stored in the credit, a bet process is executed and a process of setting the number of bets is performed equivalent to the act of inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 17. However, even if the bet switch is operated when there are no medals stored in the credit, the bet process is invalid (the operation of the bet switch is not accepted). The MAX bet switch 18 is composed of a push-down part operated by the player, a detection part that detects the operation of the push-down part, and a light-emitting part (also called a MAX bet lamp) that lights up the push-down part, and the 1 bet switch 19 is composed of a push-down part operated by the player and a detection part that detects the operation of the push-down part (the 1 bet switch 19 does not have a light-emitting part).

The MAX BET lamp informs the player that betting can be performed when the MAX BET switch is operated, and various notification modes are possible, such as lighting the MAX BET lamp in a specified color or blinking the MAX BET lamp at a specified interval. Conversely, when the MAX BET switch is operated but betting cannot be performed, possible modes include lighting the MAX BET lamp in a specific color or not lighting the MAX BET lamp.

Also, the slot machine PS1 is provided with a MAX bet switch 18 that allows the user to bet the maximum number of coins (3 coins in this embodiment) set for each slot machine PS1, and a 1 bet switch 19 that allows the user to bet 1 coin. The MAX bet process is executed when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated, and the 1 bet process is executed when the 1 bet switch 19 is operated. The MAX bet process can be executed when the sum of the number of credits and the number of bets currently betted is 3 or more, and the number of bets currently betted is less than 3. The MAX bet process cannot be executed when the sum of the number of credits and the number of bets currently betted is less than 3 (in other words, when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated, the number of bets is less than 3) or when 3 bets have already been made. The 1 bet process can be executed when the number of credits is 1 or more, and the number of bets currently betted is less than 3, and cannot be executed when 3 bets have already been made.

In addition, the 1 bet switch 19 executes one bet process each time it is operated, and when no bets have been placed, operating the 1 bet switch 19 three times results in three bets, and three operations of the 1 bet switch 19 are equivalent to one operation of the MAX bet switch 18.

In addition, although an embodiment has been described in which the 1 bet switch 19 is disabled when 3 bets have been made, the system may be configured so that when 3 bets have been made and the 1 bet switch 19 is operated once, the 1 bet state is established and 2 cards are returned to the credits.

In addition, although an embodiment has been described in which the MAX bet process executed by operating the MAX bet switch 18 is not executed when the number of bets is less than 3, a process in which the maximum number that can currently be bet is bet can also be considered. In other words, a process in which 2 credits are bet when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated when no bet has been made and the number of credits is 2 can also be considered.

The maximum number of coins that can be betted may be configured to differ depending on the game state, and may be configured such that the maximum number of coins that can be betted during non-bonus play is 3 coins, and the maximum number of coins that can be betted during bonus play is 2 coins.

<Sub switch 20>
The sub-switch 20 is provided on the operation panel 11, and is composed of a push-down part made of a translucent material for direct operation by the player, a detection part for detecting that the push-down part has been operated, and a sub-switch lamp for illuminating the push-down part of the sub-switch. This sub-switch 20 is a switch for mainly displaying a menu screen (sometimes called a user menu screen) on the display device 32 described later. In addition to the sub-switch 20 as an input means managed by the sub-control board 1000, a sub-cross key switch 21 (up switch, down switch, left switch, right switch) and a performance switch (a switch operated by an instruction during a game) are provided. The sub-switch 20 can also function as a trigger for starting a linkage system with a mobile terminal (hereinafter also referred to as a mobile linkage system) described later. Although the sub-switch 20 is divided into a menu display function and the performance switch is divided into a switch for operation during a game, they may be common switches.

The menu screen displays role configuration items, reel arrangement items, volume adjustment items, light intensity adjustment items, and items related to the mobile linkage system, and the cursor selecting an item is controlled to move up and down by operating the up switch or down switch of the sub cross key switch 21. In addition, when the sub switch 20 is operated while the cursor is on any of the items, details of that item are displayed. For example, when the sub switch 20 is operated while the cursor is on the volume adjustment item, the volume adjustment screen is displayed, and the player volume can be adjusted by operating the left switch or right switch of the sub cross key switch 21.

Note that the volume that can be changed using the volume adjustment item on the menu screen is the volume of game sounds, and the volume of system sounds cannot be changed. Game sounds are sounds that can be output during play or when waiting to play, such as bet sounds, wait sounds, reel start sounds, and other sounds related to effects. System sounds are sounds that can be output mainly when play is not possible, such as error sounds, complete function operation sounds, and other sounds related to the system. Each game sound has a set effect volume, and even if the player volume is the same, not all game sounds are output at the same volume. For example, when the player volume is at level 5 out of 10, the volume of the bet sounds is 30 decibels, and the volume of the wait sounds is 20 decibels.

The menu screen can also be displayed by operating the sub-switch 20 when no bets have been placed after the end of a game. The menu screen is displayed by operating the sub-switch 20 regardless of whether the presentation state at this time is normal presentation, continuous presentation, AT presentation, or demo screen (a screen that appears 60 seconds after the end of a game, and which displays the manufacturer's name and a presentation introduction in the form of a moving image). However, this is not limited to the embodiment, and the menu screen may not be displayed even if the sub-switch 20 is operated during continuous presentation or AT presentation.

The volume may be changed using a rotary switch provided inside the cabinet. Because the rotary switch is provided inside the cabinet, it cannot be operated by the player. The rotary switch is a switch operated by an administrator, and can set the standard value of the volume that can be set by the player. For example, if the volume that can be set by the player is eight levels, the volume that can be set by the rotary switch is also eight levels, and if the volume setting of the rotary switch is "2", the initial volume of the volume adjustment item on the menu screen where the player volume can be adjusted will be "2". Also, other rotary switch configurations may be used that allow the player to set the volume within the range of volume levels set by the rotary switch.

<Switch for performance>
The effect switch is provided on the operation panel 11, and is composed of a push-down part made of a translucent material for direct operation by the player, a detection part for detecting that the push-down part has been operated, and an effect switch lamp for lighting up the push-down part of the effect switch. When the effect switch is operated in a situation where operation of the effect switch is valid, an effect based on the operation is executed. For example, when a continuous effect is being executed on the display device (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "liquid crystal") 32, a "success" display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "successful effect") meaning that a bonus is given in the final game of the continuous effect, or a "failure" display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "failure effect") meaning that a bonus is not given, the effect switch may be operated to display "success" or "failure".

In addition, when the operation of the effect switch is valid, the effect switch lamp lights up, making it possible to inform the player that the operation of the effect switch is valid. The lighting mode of the effect switch can be such that it is unlit when the operation of the effect switch is invalid, and is lit when the operation of the effect switch is valid. Another lighting mode when the operation of the effect switch is valid may be such that it is repeatedly lit and turned off at a fixed cycle.

In addition, in a situation where the operation of the performance switch is valid, a display simulating the performance switch is displayed on the LCD to notify the user that the operation of the performance switch is valid. When a display simulating the performance switch is displayed on the LCD, it is displayed based on a command received from the main control means 100. For example, a display simulating the performance switch may be displayed based on a start switch reception command, or a display simulating the performance switch may be displayed based on a command to stop all reels.

In addition, by pressing the performance switch, the detectable piece provided on the performance switch can be moved to a detection position (on position) where it is detected by a sensor provided on the performance switch, and by releasing the performance switch while the sensor is detecting the detectable piece (an operation in which the spring provided on the performance switch is returned to its natural length by the force of its extension), the detectable piece can be moved to a non-detection position (off position) where it is not detected by the sensor.

The performance switch has been described as a push-type switch, but it is not limited to this and may be a switch with a jog dial structure. Any other structure may also be used as long as it can detect the on and off positions.

<Settlement switch>
The settlement switch is provided on the operation panel 11. By operating the settlement switch after the game is finished, a process (settlement process) is executed to pay out the number of game media bet and the number of game media stored in the credit to the player. Note that in this embodiment, when the settlement switch is operated under a situation where a bet has been made and game media are stored in the credit, the bet game media are paid out first, and then the game media stored in the credit are paid out. However, this is not limited to this, and a process of paying out the game media stored in the credit only when the number of game media bet is 0 may be executed. In other words, when the settlement switch is operated under a situation where a bet has been made, only the bet game media are paid out, and then when the settlement switch is operated again, the game media stored in the credit are paid out.

<Lower Panel 5>
The lower panel 5 is provided below the front panel PS2. It is made of two sheets of transparent resin joined together, with a design sheet sandwiched between the two sheets of resin, and the design sheet is printed with a design that represents the characteristic color of each slot machine PS1.

<Medal payout outlet 45>
The medal payout outlet 45 is provided below the lower panel 5. It is an outlet for discharging medals paid out from a hopper 44 (described later) to the outside of the slot machine PS1 (to the tray 28). It also serves as a return port for discharging medals rejected by a medal selector 34 (described later) to the outside of the slot machine PS1.

<Tray 28>
The tray 28 (also called the "lower tray") is provided below the lower panel 5. It has a generally concave structure so that it can receive and store the medals released from the medal payout opening 45, and is provided so as to protrude towards the player so that the player can check the stored medals.

Other functions of the tray 28 include a cigarette ashtray 29 and a seal storage section 30 with an opening that can store a resin sheet with a union license seal, patent seal, and model seal attached, and display them to the player.

<Speaker S>
The speakers S are provided at the top and bottom of the front panel PS2. They are connected to the sub-control board 1000 by a harness (not shown), and output sound effects in accordance with the performance, as well as error sounds and warning sounds that notify the user of the occurrence of an error.

<Display Device 32>
The display device 32 is provided above the front panel PS2. It is a device capable of displaying images, and various devices such as a liquid crystal display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, and a projector can be used. It is electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000, and displays various performance images, as well as game instruction images that indicate the order in which the stop switch 13 is pressed and the position to be pressed during a game (when only the order of pressing is displayed, it is called a push order navigation image (also called a push order image, an operation sequence image, or an operation order image), when only the position to be pressed is displayed, it is called a push order navigation image (also called a push image or an operation position image), or when both the order of pressing and the position to be pressed are displayed and it is called an operation mode navigation image (also called an operation mode image) as a higher concept than the order of pressing and the position to be pressed), an error image when an error occurs, etc. In addition, some models of slot machines PS1 do not have a display device 32. In addition, some models of slot machines PS1 have multiple display devices 32. Even when multiple display devices 32 are provided, the display device 32 refers to any one of the multiple display devices 32, or multiple display devices 32, unless otherwise specified.

<Other performance devices such as dot displays and movable props>
Other performance devices such as a dot display and movable accessories are provided at any position on the front panel PS2, such as around the display window 4, on the middle panel, or on the lower panel 5. The other performance devices are electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000, and display and operate various performance images and performance operations, as well as game instruction images and operations that indicate the order of pressing the stop switch 13 and the position to press during a game, and error images when an error occurs. The other performance devices are installed arbitrarily according to the type of slot machine PS1. In addition, various devices such as a liquid crystal display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, and a projector can be used as other performance devices. In particular, in a gaming machine that is equipped with a liquid crystal as an auxiliary performance device, the display device 32 may be called the main display device, and the liquid crystal as the other performance device may be called the sub-display device. In this case, the main display device is configured to have a larger display area than the sub-display device.

<Medal Selector 34>
The medal selector 34 is located inside the gaming machine on the rear side of the front panel PS2, and is provided in the flow passage below the medal insertion port 17. The medal selector 34 has a medal counting function that counts the number of medals inserted by the player using a sensor provided on the flow passage, a medal removal function that guides inserted medals that do not meet the specifications to a receiving tray 28, an ejection function that removes medals that have become stuck in the medal selector 34 when an eject switch provided on the front side of the front panel PS2 is operated, and a blocker function that removes medals inserted at times other than when medals are accepted from the flow passage using an electrically driven blocking member (also called a blocker). If a medal inserted when medals are accepted is a regular medal, the medal selector 34 discharges the medal to a hopper 44 located downstream.

The various sensors in the medal selector consist of a passage sensor, insertion sensor 1, insertion sensor 2, and chute sensor. The passage sensor is the first sensor to detect medals inserted through the medal insertion port, and is provided to count the number of inserted and ejected medals. Insert sensor 1 and insertion sensor 2 are located downstream of the passage sensor and blocker, and are provided to determine the passage time of medals passing insertion sensor 1 and insertion sensor 2 to determine whether they pass normally or abnormally. Insert sensor 2 is located downstream of insertion sensor 1. The chute sensor is located downstream of insertion sensor 2, and is provided to count the number of inserted and ejected medals. The passage sensor and chute sensor have overlapping functions, so only one of them may be provided.

The passage sensor, insertion sensor 1, insertion sensor 2, or chute sensor may directly detect medals, etc. (medals or illegal devices) using an optical sensor, or a physical movable piece may move when it comes into contact with a medal, etc., and the moved movable piece may be detected by a proximity sensor.

When the blocker in the medal selector is ON, it allows the game medals to pass through, and when it is OFF, it does not allow the game medals to pass through. Allowing the game medals to pass through means that the game medals inserted through the medal insertion port are guided to the hopper 44, and not allowing the game medals to pass through means that the game medals inserted through the medal insertion port are not guided to the hopper 44.

The following describes the components of the cabinet PS3 in the slot machine PS1.

<Cabinet PS3>
Cabinet PS3 is configured in a rectangular box shape with an opening on one side, and is provided inside with a reel unit 6, a hopper 44, an auxiliary tank 46, a setting key switch 37, a reset/setting switch 38 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as the "reset switch" or the "setting switch"), a power supply 39, a main control board 100, an external output terminal board 47, etc. Also, it is composed of a bottom plate, side plates (right side plate, left side plate), a top plate, and a back plate.

<Main control board 100>
The main control board 100 is housed in the internal space created when the main control board case body and the main control board case cover are fitted together, and the main control board case body and the main control board case cover are caulked together so that they cannot be easily opened or closed (sealed). The main control board 100 is fixed to a main control board case bracket inside the cabinet PS3.

<Reel unit 6>
The reel unit 6 is mainly composed of a reel frame, a left reel 8a, a center reel 8b, and a right reel 8c. The reel unit 6 is attached to a reel base 7 in the center of the cabinet PS3 and fixed by locking members (screws or rivets).

The reels (left reel 8a, center reel 8b, right reel 8c) are composed of a reel base, a reel tape with multiple types of patterns attached to the outer circumference of the reel base, a stepping motor axially supported by the reel base, and a motor fixing base to which the stepping motor is fixed, which is generally considered to be the reel unit. A different pattern arrangement is drawn on the reel tape for each reel.

When the start switch 12 is operated by the player, the reels are accelerated, and after reaching a constant speed (approximately 80 rotations per minute), the stepping motor moves one step each time a timer interrupt process (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as interrupt process) is executed, maintaining a constant speed rotation state (constant speed rotation), and then, in response to the player's operation of the stop switch 13, the corresponding reel is moved at a constant speed rotation to a stop position determined for each stop operation reception position, and after the reel has been moved to the stop position, the brakes are applied (a four-phase excitation signal is output), stopping the reel rotation and terminating the excitation output.

In addition, an index is provided on the spoke part provided at the reel base of each reel, and an index sensor provided on the motor fixing base of each reel detects the index to determine the position of the reference pattern (also called the initial pattern) during each rotation. In this embodiment, the stepping motor, which is the driving source of the reel, has 336 steps, and during constant speed rotation, one rotation is completed with 336 timer interrupt processes. During constant speed rotation, a rotation failure detection counter is incremented every time the timer interrupt process is executed twice, and if the counter value of the rotation failure detection counter reaches 180, it is determined that there is a rotation failure. In other words, if the reel does not rotate once even after executing the timer interrupt process 360 times, it is determined that there is a rotation failure. The rotation failure detection counter is set to 0 when the index is detected, so that if the constant speed rotation process is normal, the rotation failure detection counter will reach 0 before it reaches 180.

In this embodiment, a determination is made as to whether an index has been detected during constant speed processing, and a determination is not made as to whether an index has been detected during acceleration processing, but this is not limiting, and a determination as to whether an index has been detected during constant speed processing and acceleration processing may also be made. With this configuration, it is possible to more quickly bring the player into a state where stop acceptance is possible.

In addition, a back lamp unit is provided on the motor fixing base of each reel, which is turned on to highlight the stopped symbols after the reel has stopped, and to improve the visibility of the symbols while the reel is spinning.

<Hopper 44>
The hopper 44 is a device that mainly stores medals inserted by a player. The hopper 44 is placed by engaging with a rail provided on the bottom plate of the cabinet PS3, and can slide back and forth along the rail. The hopper 44 is composed of a storage tank section that receives and stores medals guided from the medal selector 34 to the inside of the gaming machine, a hopper motor that is driven by a drive signal input from the hopper drive means, a turntable that is supported by the hopper motor and that aligns the medals in the storage tank section, a medal payout section that is provided with a discharge mechanism for discharging medals one by one into the tray 28 by rotating the turntable, a medal discharge port that discharges medals by the medal payout section, and a payout sensor that detects medals discharged from the medal discharge port.

<Auxiliary tank 46>
The auxiliary tank 46 is configured to be able to store medals, and medals stored in excess of the capacity of the storage tank section of the hopper 44 are stored in the auxiliary tank 46 through a downwardly inclined rail section provided in the storage tank section. The auxiliary tank 46 has a rectangular box structure, and when installed in the cabinet PS3, two full detection electrodes attached to the cabinet PS3 are provided so as to be exposed in the auxiliary tank 46 from through holes provided in at least one side, and when a certain amount or more of medals inserted from the medal insertion port are stored, the two full detection electrodes are energized through the medals, and it is determined that the hopper 44 and the auxiliary tank 46 are full. The number of full detection electrodes is not limited to two, and the number of full detection electrodes may be changed, for example, to three. The method of full detection is not limited to the method using full detection electrodes, and full detection may be possible by a sensor provided at a predetermined position detecting medals.

<Setting key switch 37>
The setting key switch 37 is provided in a setting key switch unit that has an opening/closing door on the front side provided inside the slot machine PS1. After opening the front panel PS2, access is possible by opening the opening/closing door of the setting key switch unit. To turn on the setting key switch 37, insert the setting key and rotate it 90 degrees to the right. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in a state in which medals can be accepted, the current setting value can be confirmed, and if it is determined that the setting key switch 37 is on during the power-off recovery process (also called the power-on process) when the power is turned on, a setting change process is executed.

<Power supply device 39>
The power supply unit 39 is provided at the lower left when viewed from the front of the cabinet PS3. The power supply unit 39 has a rectangular box structure, has a power switch 40 provided on the outside, and has a power supply board that generates voltage provided inside. The power supply unit 39 is individually connected to the reel device board and the sub-control board 1000 via a harness (not shown), and is further connected from the reel device board to the main control board 100 via a harness to supply power to the main control board 100.

When the power switch 40 is turned on, the power supply device 39 is configured to take in power from outside the slot machine PS1, generate a predetermined voltage, and cause the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 1000 to take in the predetermined voltage, and when the power switch 40 is turned off, it is configured not to take in power from outside the slot machine PS1.

<External output terminal board 47>
The external output terminal board 47 (also called the external centralized terminal board 47) is generally attached inside the cabinet PS3 of the slot machine PS1, and converts the signal related to the game result output from the main control board 100 into a signal of a predetermined format and transmits it to the outside of the slot machine PS1. The contents of the game result include the number of coins inserted, the number of coins paid out, the number of bonuses (the number of big bonuses, the number of regular bonuses), a door opening signal, etc. Other conditions for transmitting a signal to the outside can be set based on predetermined information controlled by the main control board 100, such as when the AT state is reached, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, when the value of a counter related to the game reaches a predetermined value, etc.

<Function block diagram>
A functional block diagram of the slot machine PS1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

<Main control board 100>
The slot machine PS1 of this embodiment is capable of data communication by being electrically connected from a main control board 100 (also referred to as main control means 100, main control board 100, or main control means 100) that controls the general flow of the game to a sub-control board 1000 (also referred to as sub-control means 1000, sub-control board 1000, or sub-control means 1000), a door relay board (also referred to as central display board), a reel device board, a reset/setting switch 38, a setting key switch, etc. However, two-way communication is not possible between the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 1000, and data communication is possible by one-way communication from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 1000.

The main control board 100 is equipped with a main control chip. The main control chip allows data communication between the main control CPU, main control ROM, main control RAM, etc. via a bus. The main control chip also has a main control built-in register, and the main control built-in register and the main control CPU can communicate data with each other via a bus. The main control chip also has general-purpose registers (e.g., A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register) that the main control CPU can use for calculations, etc., a PC register that stores the program (return address) after a return command (e.g., RET command) after executing a program by a call command (e.g., CALL command), and an interrupt register (e.g., IFF1 register, IFF2 register) that manages the enable and disable states of maskable interrupts.

By controlling the main control chip, data communication is performed to various boards for the role selection (also called internal selection), reel drive control (also called reel control), payout control, etc. as appropriate. In addition, when a selected role (also called AT role, AT target role, push order role, eye push role, or operation procedure role including both push order role and eye push role) is won as a result of the internal selection, the sub-control board 1000 transmits selected role information (selected role group information, information regarding the display of selected roles) to enable the sub-control board to notify information regarding the display of selected roles (push order, operation timing) when the main control means 100 notifies the sub-control board. In addition, all processing related to the AT, such as transition to AT, extension of the number of AT plays, and push order notification, is sometimes referred to as processing related to the instruction function. The push order role is a condition device in which the stopping symbol combination and the game medals awarded to the player differ depending on the order in which the reels are stopped (push order), and the eye-pressing role is a condition device in which the stopping symbol combination and the game medals awarded to the player differ depending on the timing at which the stop button is operated.

The main control ROM mounted on the main control board 100 has a storage capacity of "16 KB or less", and has a usage area (also called the first program area) of "7.5 KB or less" and the rest outside the usage area (also called the second program area). The usage area has a control area (also called the first control area) of "4.5 KB or less" in which the programs executed by the main control board 100 are stored, and a data area (also called the first data area) of "3.0 KB or less" in which only information other than the programs (for example, internal lottery table information) is stored or will be stored. The outside of the usage area has a control area (also called the second control area) and a data area (also called the second data area) similar to the usage area. The usage area stores programs related to the progress of the game, and the outside of the usage area stores programs related to anti-fraud measures and programs used for gaming machine testing.

The main control RAM mounted on the main control board 100 has a memory capacity of "1024B or less," and has a usable area of "512B or less" (also called the first working area) and a non-usable area (also called the second working area). The first working area is a memory area that can be rewritten as the game progresses, and the second working area is a memory area that can be rewritten when programs for anti-fraud measures and gaming machine testing are executed.

The main control RAM built into the main control chip has storage areas for switch status flags indicating the on/off state of the play stop switch and the on/off state of the automatic settlement switch, a storage area for setting value information indicating one of the values 1 to 6 that is set, a storage area for RT state information indicating which of multiple RT states the RT state is in, a storage area for specific condition devices indicating the winning state of specific condition devices such as bonuses, a storage area for game information that stores other information necessary to progress the game, an unused storage area, a storage area for a stack area in which data saved from registers is stored, and a storage area for a temporary stack area that is set when the power is turned on.

The main control RAM is initialized when the setting change process is performed by the setting change means (sometimes called "when the setting change device is activated" or "when the setting change mode is switched on"), when the power is turned off and back on, and at the start of each game, and the range of the main control RAM's memory area that is initialized varies depending on the case.

If power recovery cannot be performed normally during the setting change process, or if the power is not recoverable (an unrecoverable error has occurred), data 0 is set (initialized) to the RAM area excluding the storage area for the switch status flag. In other words, only the switch status flag carries over the state before the setting change; for example, the RT status and condition device flags are cleared and not carried over. However, this is not limited to the above, and all RWM areas including the switch status flag may be initialized.

Also, during the setting change process, if the power recovery can be performed normally or if the state is not unrecoverable, that is, if the setting change process is performed normally, data 0 is set in the RAM area excluding the areas storing the switch state flag, the setting value information, the RT state information, and the specific condition device. In other words, the RT state, setting value data, and condition device flag are inherited so that the game can be played with the setting value after the setting change while maintaining the game state before the setting change. The setting value data inherits the information before the setting change, and a new setting value is set in the subsequent setting change process, so it is used in the sub-control board 1000 to determine whether the setting has been changed.

In addition, when the power is restored, data 0 is set to unused memory areas in the RAM area at the start of each game, and data 0 is set to memory areas in the stack area excluding the maximum used area when the RAM is initialized when the power is restored.

The main control internal register built into the main control chip is used to control the operation settings and functions of each peripheral circuit (e.g., timer circuit, etc.) built into the main control chip.

For example, by writing (also called setting or storing) data to a specified memory area of the main control built-in register using a program stored in the main control ROM, it is possible to make settings (timer circuit settings) related to maskable interrupt processing (e.g. timer interrupt processing), which is one of the programs stored in the main control ROM.

<Sub-control board 1000>
The sub-control board 1000 is equipped with a sub-control chip. The sub-control chip allows the sub-control CPU, sub-control ROM, sub-control RAM, etc. to communicate data with each other via a bus. The sub-control board 1000 is capable of two-way communication with the performance control board, and transmits data specifying the performance to be output to the speaker S, LED lamps, sub-switches 20, performance switches, etc. Data for the display device 32 is transmitted to the image control board. The sub-control board 1000 is also supplied with power directly from the power supply board.

<Reel device board>
The reel device board is a relay board that performs data communication between the reel motor, reel sensor, door switch, payout sensor, external output terminal board 47 (also called external centralized terminal board 47), etc. and the main control board 100. The reel motor controls the drive of the reel. The reel sensor is a sensor that judges whether the reel is operating normally, and transmits data to the reel device board when a protruding piece (also called an index) passes the sensor. The door switch is a sensor that judges whether the front door PS2 is opened or not. The payout sensor is a sensor that judges whether the medals pass properly when being paid out from the hopper 44. The external centralized terminal board is a relay board for transmitting data to a hall computer outside the gaming machine. In addition, the reel device board is directly supplied with power from the power supply board.

<Door relay board>
The door relay board receives input information from various sensors in the selector (insertion sensor 1, insertion sensor 2, passage sensor, shoot sensor), bet switch information, stop switch information, and settlement switch information, and outputs information from the selector, credit number information, bet number information, replay symbol combination display information, and payout number information. The door relay board is electrically connected to the selector, bet switch, stop switch, settlement switch, credit number display 26, payout number display, replay lamp, 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, 3 bet lamp, start lamp, medal insertion possible lamp, and advantageous zone lamp.

<Performance control board>
The performance control board (also referred to as the performance control means) is electrically connected to the sub-switch 20, the sub-cross key switch 21, the performance switch, the movable parts, the speaker S, the back lamp, the LED lamp provided on the front panel PS2, and the image control board which controls the display content of the display device 32.

The performance control means is configured to be capable of two-way communication with the sub-control means 1000, and controls the performance output to the performance device based on the performance commands received from the sub-control means 1000.

The performance control means selects the performance content based on the result of the lottery by the internal lottery means. In this embodiment, multiple types of performance content are prepared in advance, and the performance control means selects the performance content by lottery using software random numbers after the lottery by the internal lottery means has drawn the role at the start of a game, etc.

In addition, there are multiple types of presentation content depending on not only the results of the role selection but also the results of the freeze selection and the game state (RT state, freeze state), etc. Specifically, there are multiple types of presentation content corresponding to when a bonus is won, when a small role is won, when a replay is won, when a non-win is won, etc.

The presentation content determines what kind of presentation will be output (how the lamp will be turned on, blinking, or turned off, what kind of sound will be output from the speaker S, what kind of image will be displayed on the display device 32, etc.) and at what timing (when the start switch 12 or each stop switch 13 is operated, etc.) as the game progresses.

It is also possible to generate effects output by the effect control means in response to the player's operation. For example, it is possible to generate effects by the effect control means of the sub-control board 1000 based on sub-control commands transmitted from the main control board 100 in response to operation signals from the start switch 12, stop switch 13, medal slot 17, bet switch (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), settlement switch, etc., whose operation signals are input to the main control board 100, or to generate effects directly from the sub-control board 1000 in response to sub-input switch operation means, such as the sub-switch 20, sub-cross key switch 21, and effect switch, whose operation signals are input to the sub-control board 1000. Also, although the sub-control board 1000 and the effect control board are separate boards, they may be configured as a single board. In this case, the sub-control board 1000 has the functions and processing of the performance control board, and the sub-switch 20, sub-cross key switch 21, performance switch, movable props, speaker S, back lamp, LED lamps provided on the front panel PS2, and an image control board that controls the display content of the display device 32 may be electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000.

<Image control board>
The image control board (also referred to as image control means) is provided with an image control ROM, a sound ROM, a cooling fan, etc. for specifically displaying the performance contents on the display device 32.

<Additional information on board configuration>
The sub-control board and the performance control board may be configured as one (one) board, or the sub-control board, the performance control board, and the image control board may be configured as one board. When the sub-control board and the performance control board are configured as one board, two sub-control CPUs and two performance control CPUs may be provided, or one CPU may be provided. The same applies when the sub-control board, the performance control board, and the image control board are configured as one board.

<Power supply board>
In the slot machine PS1 of this embodiment, power is supplied from the power supply board to the reel device board and the sub-control board based on the operation of the power switch 40. The power supplied to the reel device board is then supplied to the main control board 100 and the door relay board. The supplied power is then supplied to each component, which then becomes electrically connected. The power supplied to the sub-control board 1000 is then supplied to the performance control board, which then becomes the image control board. The supplied power is then supplied to each component, which then becomes electrically connected.

Next, we will explain the control of the main control board 100, which controls the game on the gaming machine.

<Error type>
Errors are broadly divided into recoverable errors and unrecoverable errors.

<Recoverable error>
The recoverable errors are errors related to the selector (medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passing time error), errors related to the hopper 44 (hopper retention error, hopper empty error, abnormality detection error), door open error, harness coming loose error, etc. When a recoverable error is set, if the cause of the various recoverable errors is removed and the reset switch is operated, the machine is configured to be able to return to play without having to turn the power back on. During a recoverable error, information about the error that has occurred is displayed on the display device 32, payout number indicator, and various lamps to inform the player of what error has occurred.

If a recoverable error is detected during play, the game may be stopped at the time of detection, or may be stopped after the game in which the recoverable error was detected ends. By stopping game progress during a recoverable error, damage to the amusement center manager can be reduced even if the recoverable error occurred due to fraud. The condition for recovering from a recoverable error state may be configured to automatically recover by removing the cause of the error, and an error that can be recovered from without turning the power back on is called a recoverable error.

<Unrecoverable error>
In the slot machine PS1 of this embodiment, when an irreversible error occurs, interrupts are prohibited, the output of the output port is cleared, and other measures are taken to restrict the progress of the game, and the fact that an irreversible state is reached is notified by displaying a message on the credit number display 26 according to the type of error.

In addition, when a recoverable error is set, the recoverable error is cleared when a reset switch (not shown) is operated, but once an irrecoverable error is set, the irrecoverable error cannot be cleared by simply accepting a reset switch operation or by turning the power back on. In this case, the device is configured to clear the irrecoverable error by performing a setting change process. When the power is turned back on in the event of an irrecoverable error, after part of the power outage recovery process is executed, the device is controlled so that subsequent game processing is not executed by repeatedly displaying the irrecoverable error.

Examples of unrecoverable errors include when the number of coins bet at the time of the winning combination is other than the specified number, when the value is not within the normal range in the setting value error check, when it is determined that the power cut process was not performed normally when the power was restored after a power cut (sometimes called an "RWM (RAM) abnormality" or "RWM (RAM) error"), when a random number abnormality is detected such as an abnormality in the crystal oscillator frequency, or when a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination that is not on a winning line is stopped during the winning determination process.

In addition, if an unrecoverable error occurs, game progress will be halted regardless of whether the game is in progress or on standby (from the end of a game to the start of the next game).

<How to play, game flow>
To play the slot machine PS1, first, medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 17, or medals stored in advance are bet (MAX BET switch 18, 1 BET switch 19) to set a predetermined number of medals to be bet (also called a prescribed number). In this embodiment, the prescribed number is set to three medals. By setting the number of medals to be bet, the pay line is set to be valid, and the game becomes available.

When the number of medals bet is set to the upper limit and a new medal is inserted through the medal insertion slot, the number of game medals stored in the credits increases. The maximum number of medals that can be stored in the credits is limited to 50. When medals that exceed the upper limit of the number of medals bet (3 medals) and the upper limit of the number of medals stored (50 medals) are inserted through the medal insertion slot (the 54th medal), the blocker of the medal selector is turned off (a state that prevents medals from being inserted into the gaming machine) and the medals are returned to the tray. In other words, when the number of medals bet is at the upper limit and the number of stored credits is at the upper limit, the blocker is turned off (a path to the hopper 44 in the selector is not formed).

When medals are inserted, the bet number is added when the bet number is less than three (less than the maximum bet number in the game state when the medals are inserted). When medals are inserted, the credits can be saved when the bet number is three (the maximum bet number in the game state when the medals are inserted) and the credits are less than 50 (less than the upper limit that can be saved in the credits). In other words, when the sum of the bet number and the saved credits is less than 53, the medals will enter the gaming machine when inserted from the medal insertion slot. In addition, a condition for a medal to enter the gaming machine when inserted is that it is in standby mode (the period from the end of a game to the start of the next game). For example, the medal insertion requirement is met even during standby mode after a symbol combination related to a replay is displayed and an automatic bet process is executed. In this case, three medals have been bet in the automatic bet, so if the saved credits are less than 50, the medal insertion requirement is met.

Next, when operation of the start switch 12 is accepted, an internal lottery process is executed, and after determining the result of the internal lottery process (also called the role lottery result or condition device number), it is determined whether or not the minimum play time (also called the wait time (period) or 4.1 second timer) has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, the reels begin to spin, and if the wait time has not elapsed, the reels wait without spinning until the wait time has elapsed.

Next, when an operation (stop operation) of any of the stop switches 13 (left stop switch 13a, middle stop switch 13b, right stop switch 13c) is accepted, the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13 stops according to the result of the role selection and the timing when the stop operation was accepted. When all reels stop (also called full stop), it is determined whether or not each of the stopped symbols determined at the time of acceptance of the stop of each reel is abnormal, and if they are not abnormal, a search is performed to determine which symbol combination has stopped, and depending on the symbol combination that corresponds to the search result, processing such as the payout of medals (including addition to credits), setting of replay (automatic bet processing), setting of bonus state, ending of bonus state, setting of RT state, ending of RT state, etc. is performed, and one game is completed.

<Freeze processing>
The freeze process (also called freeze effect) that temporarily stops the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time and delays it includes, for example, temporarily stopping functions related to the progress of the game, such as the reception of game media, the reception of the operation of the bet switch for determining the number of game media to be bet on credited in advance, the reception of the operation of the start switch 12 for starting the game, or the reception of the operation to stop the reels. The freeze process (freeze effect) is a process controlled by the main control board 100.

The freeze effect may temporarily halt all of the functions related to the game progress described above, or may temporarily halt only some of the functions.

Examples of ways to temporarily halt game progress include not performing control processes based on the player's operation (processing to form a path through which medals are guided to the hopper 44 using blocker control, processing to set the number of coins to bet based on the operation of the bet switch, processing to spin the reels or internal lottery processing based on the operation of the start switch 12, and processing to stop the reels based on the operation of the stop switch 13).

When an input signal based on a player's operation is issued during the period when game progress is paused by the freeze effect, the game will not perform control processing based on the input signal, will not accept the input signal, or will delay sending the input signal until a specified period has passed, thereby delaying the timing of the end of one game compared to when the freeze effect is not performed.

The freeze effect that is performed based on the operation of the start switch 12 may be performed in the following cases: when the start switch 12 is operated, the reels are not rotated for a specified period of time, and then the reels are rotated after the specified period has elapsed; when the start switch 12 is operated, an internal drawing is performed for a specified period of time, and the reels are not rotated for a specified period of time, and then the internal drawing is performed and the reels are rotated after the specified period of time; when the start switch 12 is operated, an internal drawing is performed for a specified period of time, but the reels are not rotated, and then the reels are rotated after the specified period of time; when the start switch 12 is operated and an internal drawing is performed, a specified period is set, and the reels are rotated or stopped during the specified period; when the start switch 12 is operated and an internal drawing is performed and the reels are rotated, a specified period is set, and then the stop switch 13 is disabled for the specified period of time.

Regarding the freeze effect that is performed based on the operation of the stop switch 13, the control process for the freeze effect is different between the freeze effect that is performed based on the acceptance of the operation of the stop switch 13 and the freeze effect that is performed based on the stop display of a specific symbol on the reel as a result of the operation of the stop switch 13.

As an example of the control process for the freeze effect that is performed based on the acceptance of the operation of the stop switch 13, when the left stop switch 13a is operated to freeze while all reels are rotating, the stop acceptance of the middle stop switch 13b and the right stop switch 13c can be disabled after the left reel corresponding to the left stop switch 13a stops. This means that for a specified period of time, the player cannot stop the spinning middle and right reels, but after the specified period has elapsed, the stop acceptance of the middle stop switch 13b and the right stop switch 13c is enabled, so the timing until the end of one game can be delayed.

Control processing for freeze effects that is performed based on a specific symbol being displayed frozen on a reel as a result of accepting the operation of a stop switch 13 may include disabling the acceptance of the stop of the last stop switch 13 when a specific symbol is displayed frozen on each reel as a result of accepting the operation of a stop switch 13 other than the last stop switch 13, or not performing control processing such as setting the number of bets based on the operation of a bet switch to start the next game, detecting the insertion of gaming media using a passing sensor, or automatic betting processing that is performed when a replay stops on an active line, based on the fact that a specific symbol is displayed frozen on each reel as a result of accepting the operation of the last stop switch 13.

During the specified period when the freeze effect is performed, the game progress control based on the player's operation is temporarily halted, but game machine operations that are not related to the progress of the game can be executed. For example, even if the stop control process based on the operation of the stop switch 13 is not performed, the reel rotation pattern can be set arbitrarily, such as rotating in the normal rotation pattern, or rotating at a slower or faster speed than normal.

The reel rotation patterns during a specified period of time may include rotating the reels in the opposite direction to normal rotation (so-called reverse rotation), rotating the reels a specified number of times and then stopping a specific combination of symbols, stopping a specified reel among multiple reels and allowing the other reels to spin, changing the reel rotation speed, or changing the reel operation due to the player's operation.

The specified period during which the freeze effect is performed can be changed according to specified conditions. Here, the specified conditions include the detection of a signal based on the operation acceptance status of various switches by the player (operation status of the start switch 12, bet switch, stop switch 13, settlement switch, etc.) and the result of a freeze lottery. In addition, examples of changing the period include shortening or lengthening the specified period during which the freeze effect is performed, during which the game progress is temporarily stopped, and switching the rotation mode of the reels.

Examples of control processes that shorten the pause period include forcibly terminating the pause period or rewriting it to a period shorter than the pause period. Examples of control processes that lengthen the pause period include adding another period after the pause period or rewriting the pause period to a longer period. In addition, the pause period based on the freeze effect does not need to have an upper limit, and may continue until a certain result is reached based on the result of the operation reception.

The pause period during which the freeze effect is performed may be set after the wait period has elapsed, or may be set to include the wait period. If the wait period is included, the wait period is compared with the freeze effect period, and if the freeze effect ends during the wait period, the freeze effect is executed during the wait period. If the freeze effect does not end during the wait period, the freeze effect period is set after the wait period, or the remaining wait period is resumed after the freeze effect ends. Also, if the freeze effect period is longer than the wait period, it is possible to omit the process of comparing the wait period with the freeze effect period and start the freeze effect after the start switch 12 is operated (after the internal lottery process).

As a freeze effect, it is also possible to perform a freeze effect (also called pseudo play) during the acceleration process as if normal play was in progress. In pseudo play, the start switch 12 is operated, and a pseudo play period is determined during the acceleration process of the reels after the internal lottery is performed. During the pseudo play period, reel rotation control is performed as in normal play (reel rotation control is performed based on the operation of the start switch based on the start of the pseudo play), and reel stop control is performed based on the operation of the stop switch 13. It may also be configured so that the reels are rotated again by operating the start switch 12 during the pseudo play period. However, internal lottery processing based on the operation of the start switch 12 and winning determination processing or payout control processing based on the operation of the stop switch 13 are not performed.

In addition, in pseudo-games, when the reels stop as a result of the operation of the stop switch 13, or when the reels stop automatically as a reel effect, the stopped reels are made to swing up and down (so-called swing fluctuation). This allows the player to determine whether they are playing a normal game or a pseudo-game when they operate the stop switch 13.

In addition, when an acceleration process is executed to start the real game (sometimes called the "main game") after the pseudo game has ended, a random delay process is executed to randomize the timing at which each reel starts spinning. For example, if a seven-symbol combination is stopped during a pseudo game and the main game is started with the same symbol position relationship, it would be easier to line up seven symbols in the main game (a so-called aid to eye-pressing). To prevent this from happening, the timing at which each reel starts spinning is randomized using the random delay process to spread out the symbol combinations that stopped in the pseudo game.

The random delay process sets a timer for each reel to wait for the reel to start spinning, updates the timer value each time the timer update process of the interrupt process occurs, and starts spinning from the reel whose timer value has reached 0. If the random delay process determines that the timer values for all reels have reached 0 and that all reels are spinning at a constant speed, it becomes possible to accept the stop switch operation for the reel.

In addition, if random delay processing is not incorporated, the symbol combination before the start of the pseudo game may be stored, and the symbol positions may be returned to that symbol combination before the start of the actual game, and then the reels may begin to spin.

<Pattern combinations that do not require technical intervention>
A symbol combination that does not require technical intervention means a symbol combination that can always stop and display the winning symbol combination on the pay line, no matter when the stop switch 13 is operated while the reels are spinning. For example, when bell symbols are arranged every three symbols on all reels, bell-bell-bell always stops (100% pull rate), so it can be said to be a symbol combination that does not require technical intervention. Hereinafter, a pull rate of 100% will be referred to as PB=1, and a winning symbol combination with a pull rate of 100% for all reels may be referred to as PB=1 symbol.

Conversely, PB ≠ 1 means that the winning symbol combination will not stop depending on the timing of when the stop switch 13 stops while the reels are spinning. For example, if there is a location within the pull-in range where there are no symbols related to a winning symbol (e.g., 5 symbols apart), then PB ≠ 1, and the winning symbol may be referred to as a PB ≠ 1 symbol.

<Small win priority control, bonus priority control>
The small prize priority control means that when a small prize and a bonus are won at the same time, or when a small prize is won within a bonus, if both a symbol related to a small prize and a symbol related to a bonus can be drawn in, the symbol related to the small prize is drawn in.

Bonus priority control means that when a small win and a bonus are both won, or when a small win within a bonus occurs, if both a symbol related to a small win and a symbol related to a bonus can be drawn in, the symbol related to the bonus is drawn in.

In addition, since replays have the highest priority and cannot be missed, when the condition device flags for replay and minor win, or replay and bonus are on at the same time, the replay-related symbols will always be drawn.

<Normal section>
The normal section is a section in which processing related to the instruction function cannot be performed. When the push order role is won in the normal section, a process is executed to send masked information (performance group number) indicating which push order was won to the sub-control means 1000. Also, when the push order role is won in the normal section, the notification of the push order (both correct push order and incorrect push order) is not displayed on the instruction monitor. As a result, in the normal section, even if the push order role is won, both the main control means 100 and the sub-control means 1000 do not notify the push order, so that even if the push order role is won in the normal section, it is not always clear whether it is correct or incorrect. In other words, it is a game section that does not enter the AT state.

<Advantageous Zone>
The advantageous zone is a zone in which processing related to the instruction function can be executed, and is provided to suppress excessive medal acquisition by the AT. If you win the advantageous zone transition lottery executed in the normal zone, you can transition to the advantageous zone. In the advantageous zone, a transition lottery to the AT can be held, and there are cases where the AT state can be entered, but in order to suppress the excessive medal acquisition mentioned above, the advantageous zone is designed to end based on certain conditions and transition to the normal zone.
in particular,
1) When 1500 games have been played since the next game after the transition to the first advantageous zone; 2) When more than 2400 medals have been won since the next game after the transition to the first advantageous zone; and 3) When any condition is met. These can prevent excessive medal acquisition. The 1500 games in 1) may be 4000 games, or may be 65535 games, which is the maximum number that can be stored in a 2-byte memory area, or the advantageous zone may be configured not to end after a predetermined number of games. In addition, the arbitrary condition in 3) may be, for example, when the first AT ends, or when a specific symbol combination is displayed.

If it is an advantageous zone, information indicating that it is an advantageous zone (also called advantageous zone type) is stored in a specified RAM area. If the value stored in the RAM area is 0 (if the advantageous zone type is 0), it indicates that it is a normal zone, and if the value stored in the RAM area is 1 (if the advantageous zone type is 1), it indicates that it is an advantageous zone.

<Advantageous Zone Lamp>
The advantageous zone lamp is provided as information indicating that the player is in the advantageous zone on the main side. This allows the player to easily determine whether or not the player is in the advantageous zone by checking whether the advantageous zone lamp is on or off. Specifically, when the DP of the credit number display 26 is on, it indicates that the player is in the advantageous zone, and when the DP of the credit number display 26 is not on, it indicates that the player is not in the advantageous zone. The advantageous zone lamp may be lit after all reels have stopped, after the bet switch operation is accepted, when the first medal inserted by the player is detected, when the second medal inserted by the player is detected, when the third medal inserted by the player is detected, after the start switch is accepted, or after the selection role is won by the internal lottery. In addition, the condition for always lighting the lamp may be when the player is in the advantageous zone, when the operation procedure information of the selection role is announced, and when the ball payout rate (maximum ball payout rate) of the announcement game exceeds 1 (when it increases).

In addition, the machine is configured to light up the advantageous zone lamp even when it is notifying the player of the push order sequence to transition to an RT where the payout rate does not exceed 1 but the replay probability is high, since the machine does not have a push order minor feature due to its specifications. This is to inform the player that the advantageous zone lamp is in an advantageous state, and to prevent players from suffering losses due to not understanding the machine's specifications.

In addition, if the conditions for turning on the favorable zone lamp as described above are not met, the timing for turning on the favorable zone lamp after moving to a new favorable zone can be arbitrary.

In addition, once the advantageous zone lamp is lit, it will remain lit until the advantageous zone ends, and will be turned off before the start switch operation for the next game after the game in which the advantageous zone ends is accepted (after all reels have stopped, after the bet switch operation is accepted, when the first medal inserted for maintenance is detected, when the second medal inserted for maintenance is detected, or when the third medal inserted for maintenance is detected).

By configuring it in this way, even if the advantageous zone lamp is not lit, it may be an advantageous zone, and the player can be given a sense of expectation that the processing related to the instruction function will be executed even if the advantageous zone lamp is not lit. As a result, in the past, if it was a normal zone, the game was simply waiting for the transition to the advantageous zone, but with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the advantageous zone lamp is not lit, there is a possibility that an AT transition lottery or the like is being held, making it possible to maintain motivation to play.

Also, when the advantageous zone type is 1, it does not necessarily mean that the zone is advantageous. This is because in a game in which the advantageous zone type is 0 and the advantageous zone transition lottery is won, causing the advantageous zone type to become 1, the advantageous zone type is 1 but the game state is still in the normal zone because it has not yet transitioned to the advantageous zone. When executing the process to send whether the zone is advantageous or normal as a test signal, if the advantageous zone type is referenced, a signal for the advantageous zone will be sent even though the zone is in the normal zone, and a signal different from the intended state will be sent.

To prevent this situation, when sending a test signal indicating whether the zone is favorable or normal, the system is configured to refer to the value of the favorable zone clear counter. When the value of the favorable zone clear counter is 0, processing is executed to output a test signal indicating that the zone is normal, and when the value of the favorable zone clear counter is not 0 (the value of the favorable zone clear counter is 1 to 1500), processing is executed to output a test signal indicating that the zone is favorable. By configuring in this way, the processing for outputting the test signal can accurately identify the state simply by determining whether the value of the favorable zone clear counter is 0 or not, thereby eliminating pressure on program capacity and improving program execution speed. As described above, when the favorable zone is ended by an arbitrary ending condition, the value of the favorable zone clear counter is set to 1, so that the processing for outputting the test signal can accurately output that the zone is favorable even in a game where the favorable zone ends.

<Main game state>
The main gaming state is a gaming state managed by the main control means, and is not necessarily the same as the RT state. For example, the main gaming state is determined in correspondence with the AT, sub-bonus, CZ, normal section, etc., which will be described later. When only the main gaming state transitions, the probability of determining the internal lottery result by the internal lottery means does not change. The main gaming state is for the main control means to manage the gaming state, and the performance related to the instruction function such as the AT winning probability, the freeze winning probability, or the output trigger to the external terminal is determined for each main gaming state.

<AT>
AT is an abbreviation of assist time, also called a notification period, and is a period for making it easier for a player to win a winning combination that has been selected by a combination lottery (hereinafter referred to as notification). Generally, the means for notifying during the AT include the operation timing of the stop switch, the operation order of the stop switch, and the operation timing and operation order of the stop switch, and are also referred to as the operation procedure or operation mode.

<Sub-bonus>
A sub-bonus is a type of AT, and is different from the bonuses that can be won by internal lottery (Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, RB, CB, SB, described below). It is basically the same as an AT, but is characterized by the fact that the sub-bonus starting symbol combination is stopped by reel effects, pseudo play, or push order when the sub-bonus starts. It should be noted that even when it is simply called "AT", it is a concept that includes sub-bonuses.

<Grouping of options>
When a selected role is won during a non-AT, the main control means 100 transmits to the sub-control means 1000 a performance group number indicating that the selected role has been won, and when a selected role is won during an AT, the main control means 100 transmits to the sub-control means 1000 a performance group number and operation procedure information. In other words, since operation procedure information is not transmitted to the sub-control means 1000 during a non-AT, the sub-control means 1000 is not able to notify the operation procedure. As a result, on the sub-control means 1000 side, it is unclear which operation procedure can be used to display a symbol combination advantageous to the player during a non-AT, and operation procedure information that can display a symbol combination advantageous to the player is transmitted during an AT, so that the operation procedure can be notified by the liquid crystal display device or operation indicator lamp on the sub-control means 1000 side. As a result, the player can easily recognize the operation procedure, and it is possible to suppress the illegal acquisition of operation procedure information during a non-AT.

<Processing related to instruction function>
The processing related to the instruction function is a concept including not only the AT-related lottery such as AT transition lottery, AT additional lottery, update of AT termination condition (addition/subtraction of AT play count, addition/subtraction of AT execution notification count), and AT execution (notification of operation mode), but also the processing related to the management of the AT state. The processing related to this instruction function can be executed with a bet number predetermined for each game state, and when a plurality of bet numbers are set as a prescribed number in a certain game state, the processing is configured to be executed only when any one of the bet numbers is set. For example, when two-coin bets and three-coin bets are possible in the bonus internal state, the processing related to the instruction function can be executed only in a game with three-coin bets, and the processing related to the instruction function cannot be executed in a game with two-coin bets. In other words, in a game with two-coin bets, even if an AT lottery target role is won, the AT lottery is not executed, and the AT play count is not updated according to the progress of the game. In addition, if the SB (single bonus) or CB that ends in one game is only for two-coin bet games, and the game after the SB or CB ends is two-coin bet or three-coin bet, if the replay is won in the SB or CB and the number of coins automatically bet is two, the processing related to the instruction function cannot be executed in the game after the SB or CB ends (the processing related to the instruction function can be executed with a three-coin bet), so the number of bets automatically inserted when the replay is won in the SB or CB is set to three. In this way, the processing related to the instruction function can be executed even in the game after the replay is won in the SB or CB, so that a game that is disadvantageous to the player can be eliminated. As described above, the processing related to the advantageous zone is configured to be executed regardless of the number of bets.

<Instruction monitor>
During AT, when reporting information on the operation procedure of the push order role, the operation procedure information may be reported using the number of winning coins display. Specifically, in the case of push order role A (left, center, right correct), "1" is displayed on the indication monitor, in the case of push order role B (left, right, center correct), "2" is displayed on the indication monitor, in the case of push order role C (center, left, right correct), "3" is displayed on the indication monitor, in the case of push order role D (center, right, left correct), "4" is displayed on the indication monitor, in the case of push order role E (right, left, center correct), "5" is displayed on the indication monitor, and in the case of push order role F (right, center, left correct), "6" is displayed on the indication monitor.

With this configuration, the player can know the correct button press sequence by checking the instruction monitor. Also, because the instruction monitor is controlled by the main control board, it can accurately notify the player of the correct button press sequence even if the sub-control board is tampered with.

In addition, if the indication monitor is also used as the number of coins won display, the lower digits may display the numbers (1 to 6) mentioned above, and the upper digits may display "=" as an identifier. In this case, the identifier allows the player to determine whether the number of coins won display is displaying the number of coins won or the push order, so that the player's recognition is not hindered.

In addition, when the instruction monitor is configured as a dedicated display, a three-digit seven-segment display may be used. The reason for using three digits is that it corresponds to the number of reels. In addition, in the case of push order role A (left, center, right correct), "123" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order role B (left, right, center correct), "132" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order role C (center, left, right correct), "213" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order role D (center, right, left correct), "312" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order role E (right, left, center correct), "231" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of push order role F (right, center, left correct), "321" is displayed on the instruction monitor. With such a configuration, the push order on the instruction monitor becomes easier to intuitively grasp, and the player can easily grasp the correspondence between the push order and the display on the instruction monitor.

The timing for displaying the push order on the instruction monitor is preferably within the advantageous zone, and any time after the push order role is selected by the internal lottery executed based on the operation of the start switch, and before the stop switch can be operated. With this configuration, the push order can be notified to the player before he or she operates the stop switch, preventing the player from performing the stop operation with an incorrect push order.

<Status display monitor (role ratio monitor)>
The role ratio monitor is a display device that switches and displays the cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative instruction-included role ratio (selectable according to the specifications of the gaming machine, also called the instruction-included role ratio), consecutive role ratio for the latest 6000 games, role ratio for the latest 6000 games, cumulative consecutive role ratio, cumulative role ratio, cumulative role etc. state ratio every 4800 ms, and is capable of displaying a four-digit number by using four 7-segment LEDs (with DP). The upper two digits of the four-digit number displayed by the four 7-segment LEDs are called the identification segment, and the lower two digits are called the ratio segment.

In the role ratio, "role" refers to the first type special role (so-called RB), the second type special role (so-called CB), and the normal role (so-called SB), and the "role ratio" is the ratio calculated by payout during role operation ÷ total payout × 100. Note that payouts during the operation of the first type special role continuous operation device (so-called BB) and the second type special role continuous operation device (so-called MB) are also included in "payouts during role operation", but payouts during general play during BB and general play during MB are not included in "payouts during role operation". Note that "payout" is a term that does not subtract the number of coins inserted, and in the case of payout number - number of coins inserted, it is called the difference number (difference number). In addition, the first type special role continuous operation device and the second type special role continuous operation device are sometimes simply called the role continuous operation device as a combined concept.

In the continuous feature ratio, "continuous feature" refers to the first type special feature (so-called RB), and the "continuous feature ratio" is the ratio calculated by: payout during operation of the first type special feature ÷ total payout × 100. Note that payouts during operation of the first type special feature continuous operation device (so-called BB) are also included in "payouts during feature operation", but payouts during general play during BB are not included in "payouts during feature operation".

The "instruction-included role" in the instruction-included role ratio includes the payout in the game in which the instruction function is activated (so-called AT) in addition to the "role" described above, and the "instruction-included role ratio" is a ratio calculated by (payout during instruction function activation, or payout during role activation) ÷ total payout × 100. Here, (payout during instruction function activation, or payout during role activation) does not refer to the payout in the game in which the instruction function is activated and the role is activated, but refers to the sum of the payout number in the game in which the instruction function is activated and the role is activated. If the game in which the instruction function is activated is a game in which the role is activated, the payout number for that game is (payout during instruction function activation, or payout during role activation) rather than the sum of the two payout numbers. Note that if a player makes a mistake in the operation of the stop switch in a game in which the AT is activated, the maximum payout may not be obtained, but in this case the calculation is based on the actual payout.

The information displayed in the identification segment among the information displayed on the ratio monitor is information for identifying which ratio is being displayed among the cumulative favorable zone ratio, cumulative instructed role ratio, consecutive role ratio for the latest 6000 games, role ratio for the latest 6000 games, cumulative consecutive role ratio, cumulative role ratio, and cumulative role etc. state ratio, and is displayed as "7U.", "7P.", "6Y.", "7Y.", "6A.", "7A.", and "5H.", respectively. For example, when "7U." is displayed in the identification segment, it indicates the cumulative favorable zone ratio, and when "6Y." is displayed in the identification segment, it indicates the consecutive role ratio for the latest 6000 games. Note that the "." displayed on the ratio monitor refers to decimal points.

Of the information displayed on the winning ratio monitor, the information displayed in the ratio segment is intended to allow the calculation results of various ratios to be visually confirmed, and is displayed as a two-digit number using two seven-segment LEDs. For example, if the calculation result is 70, "70" is displayed in the ratio segment. The calculated result is rounded down to the nearest whole number. If the calculation result is 100, "99" is displayed. If the cumulative number of games played is less than 400, the ratio segment displays "00."

If the cumulative number of games does not reach the reference number of games, the identification segment is displayed in a blinking manner. The reference number of games is determined according to various ratios, and is 175,000 games for the cumulative advantageous zone ratio, 175,000 games for the cumulative instructed role ratio, 6,000 games for the consecutive role ratio among the latest 6,000 games, 6,000 games for the role ratio among the latest 6,000 games, 17,500 games for the cumulative consecutive role ratio, 17,500 games for the cumulative role ratio, and 175,000 games for the cumulative role etc. state ratio.

The ratio segment is displayed in a blinking manner if the displayed value is equal to or greater than the threshold value. The threshold value is determined according to various ratios, and is 70 for the cumulative advantageous zone ratio, 70 for the cumulative indicated feature ratio, 60 for the consecutive feature ratio among the latest 6000 games, 70 for the feature ratio among the latest 6000 games, 60 for the cumulative consecutive feature ratio, 70 for the cumulative feature ratio, and 50 for the cumulative feature etc. state ratio. Note that if the cumulative number of games is less than 400 games and the calculation result is equal to or greater than the threshold value but the ratio segment displays "00", the ratio segment is displayed in a lit manner.

To check whether the role ratio monitor is operating normally, a test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and ratio segment for 4800 ms after the power is turned on and the timer interrupt process is started. The test pattern is displayed in a blinking manner by all segments (including DP) of the four 7-segment LEDs that make up the role ratio monitor. For example, "8.8.8.8." may be displayed in a blinking manner. In addition to being displayed immediately after power is turned on, the test pattern may also be displayed when settings are being changed, settings are being confirmed, or an RWM (RAM) abnormal error occurs.

In the cases where the cumulative number of games played in the identification segment does not reach the reference number of games, where the displayed value in the ratio segment is equal to or greater than the threshold value, and where a test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and ratio segment, the segments are displayed in a blinking mode. Specifically, the blinking mode is displayed by switching between lighting and turning off every 300 ms, such as lighting 300 ms → turning off 300 ms → lighting 300 ms → turning off 300 ms → .... Also, when various ratio information is switched, it starts with lighting, so that the display period of various ratio information does not become longer or shorter depending on the timing of lighting and blinking.

As described above, the cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative indicated role ratio, consecutive role ratio for the most recent 6000 games, role ratio for the most recent 6000 games, cumulative consecutive role ratio, cumulative role ratio, and cumulative role etc. status ratio displayed on the role ratio monitor are configured to switch display contents every 4800 ms, but by setting this 4800 ms to a multiple of 600 ms, which is one set of lighting and blinking, it is possible to configure it so that one of the 7-segment LEDs is always lit, even if the various ratios displayed on the role ratio monitor are displayed in a blinking mode when they are switched.

By configuring it in this way, the light starts off on even when various ratio information is switched, so it is possible to display the display continuously without any sense of incongruity caused by a shift in the blinking cycle.

In addition, the display period of the test pattern after the power is turned on as mentioned above is also set to 4800 ms, so when the test pattern has finished being displayed for 4800 ms, the 7-segment LED goes out, and the next timer interrupt process turns on and makes it possible to display information related to the cumulative favorable zone ratio or cumulative instruction-included role ratio.

Next, we will explain how to control the blinking display on the role ratio monitor.

To blink the display mode of the role ratio monitor, it has a memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching the light on and off. The memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching the light on and off is a 2-byte memory area, and executes a process of adding 1 for each timer interrupt process. The memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching the light on and off is initialized (0 is stored) when the power is turned on, and thereafter cycles through the values 0 to 299 each time a timer interrupt process is executed. In other words, the value following 299 is 0.

Example 1) When the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is "0", if an update process is performed, the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off becomes "1". At this time, the carry flag becomes 1 (the carry flag becomes 1 because a carry occurs as a result of calculating "0-299").

Example 2) When the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is "298", if an update process is performed, the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off will become "299". At this time, the carry flag will be 1 (the carry flag will be 1 because a carry occurs as a result of calculating "298-299").

Example 3) When the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is "299", if an update process is performed, the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off becomes "0". In this case, the carry flag becomes 0 (the result of calculating "299-299" is that no carry occurs, so the carry flag becomes 0).

As mentioned above, if the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is any value between 0 and 298, the carry flag will be 1, and if the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is 299, the carry flag will be 0. In other words, the carry flag will be 0 every 300 ms.

When the carry flag = 0, the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is configured to be updated. The blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is initialized (stores 0) when the power is turned on, and when 0 is stored in the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS), the role ratio monitor is turned on, and when 1 is stored in the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS), the role ratio monitor is turned off. In other words, since the carry flag = 0 every 300 ms, by repeatedly storing 0 and 1 in the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) every 300 ms, it is possible for the display mode of the role ratio monitor to be displayed (blinking display) alternately between the on mode and the off mode every 300 ms.

The display of the ratio monitor is displayed in a blinking mode when the cumulative number of games in the identification segment does not reach the reference number of games, when the display value in the ratio segment is equal to or greater than the threshold, or when a test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and the ratio segment. In other cases, the display is made in a lit mode without referring to the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS). However, regardless of whether the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is referenced or not, the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch between on and off is updated for each timer interrupt process, so the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is also updated from time to time, and even when the state is switched from not referring to the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) to referring to it, it is possible to display the display without any deviation in the timing of turning on and off and the timing of switching the various ratio displays.

<Program start processing flow>
The program start process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the power is turned on, the main control board 100 performs initial settings related to the operation of the gaming machine. Specifically, it sets the interrupt mode, sets the functions of the main CPU, and performs a RAM check process to create power-off recovery data. The RAM check process determines whether the checksums of all RAM are normal or not, and if the conditions are met, it determines that the power-off recovery data is normal, and if the conditions are not met, it determines that the power-off recovery data is abnormal.

Then, the state of the setting key switch signal and the door open detection switch signal is checked to determine whether the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are on.

If the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are on, it is determined whether the power interruption recovery data is normal or in a recoverable state. If the power interruption recovery data is normal or in a recoverable state, a first initialization range to be initialized in the initialization process in the setting change process is set, and the process proceeds to the setting change process of Figure 10. If the power interruption recovery data is not normal or in a recoverable state, a second initialization range to be initialized in the initialization process in the setting change process is set, and the process proceeds to the setting change process of Figure 10. After the setting change process, the process proceeds to the main game progress of Figure 9.

If the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are not on, it is determined whether the power failure recovery data created in the RAM check process is normal. If the power failure recovery data is abnormal or in an irrecoverable state, an irrecoverable error is notified and the game progress of the slot machine PS1 is stopped, and the process moves to an irrecoverable error process. On the other hand, if the power failure recovery data is not abnormal or in an irrecoverable state, the process moves to the power failure recovery process of FIG. 8. After the power failure recovery process, the process moves to the main game progress of FIG. 9. Note that after the power failure recovery process, the state saved when the power failure was detected is restored, so the process does not necessarily start from the beginning of the main game progress.

In addition, when processing an unrecoverable error, interrupts are prohibited and the output of the output port (output of sub-control commands, output of excitation signals to the stepping motor, etc.) is cleared. Then, the acquired number display 27 repeatedly displays (notifies) the error.

<Power off processing>
The power-off process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In this embodiment, when the power switch 40 is turned off or an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off, such as a power outage (also referred to as a power outage), the operating voltage for operating the slot machine PS1 drops, and when the operating voltage falls below a threshold, the voltage monitoring circuit detects the power outage and generates a power outage detection signal, which is input to the input port of the main control chip. Then, in the determination process for determining whether or not the power outage detection signal has been input in the timer interrupt process, the power outage process is executed when it is determined that the power outage detection signal has been input. When determining whether or not the power outage detection signal has been input in the timer interrupt process, the determination may be made in one timer interrupt process, or in two or more timer interrupt processes. In other words, when determining whether or not the power has been cut off in multiple timer interrupt processes, if it is determined that the power outage detection signal has been input in the first process but not in the second process, the power outage process is not executed. This is to prevent the power outage process from being executed in the event of noise or a momentary outage (a state in which the voltage falls below the threshold for just a moment, but then immediately rises above the threshold).

During power-off processing, output ports are cleared, interrupts that are executed periodically are prohibited from occurring, and the interrupt prohibited/enabled state at the time of power-off is saved. Next, the registers in use are saved, and the stack pointer is saved. Once saved, the power-off processing completed flag, which indicates that power-off processing has been performed, is turned on, and checksum data for all RAM areas is calculated and saved. Then RAM writing is prohibited, and the system waits for a reset. The address range of the saved stack pointer, the presence or absence of the power-off processing completed flag, and whether the checksums of all RAM areas are normal are determined during power-off recovery processing.

<Timer interrupt processing>
The timer interrupt process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In this embodiment, the timer interrupt process is configured to occur periodically every 2.235 ms (milliseconds).

When timer interrupt processing begins, the necessary data stored in the registers is compared.

Next, it determines whether a power outage has been detected based on whether a power outage detection signal has been received, and if it determines that a power outage has been detected, it executes the power outage process.

Next, the input ports that determine the input from various sensors and operation switches are read, and the input port data generation process is executed.

Next, reel drive control is executed. In reel drive control, control and update of the drive state are performed according to whether each reel is accelerating, rotating at a constant speed, starting to decelerate, decelerating, or stopped.

Next, data to be output for each output port (such as an excitation signal for the stepping motor or a drive signal for the hopper 44) is created and port output processing is performed to output various signals.

Next, a check is performed to see if any abnormalities have occurred. Examples of abnormalities include whether the current settings are normal, and whether the operation pattern of the dispenser and dispenser sensors is normal.

Next, external signals such as bonus signals, ART signals, security signals, medal insertion signals, and medal payout signals are set (controlled to on/off) to be output to external systems such as hall computers, and external signal output is performed to send them to the external terminal board.

Next, the control command transmission process is executed. In the control command transmission process, if a sub-control command has been set, the sub-control command is output to the sub-control board 1000.

Next, control is performed regarding the lighting of various LEDs. In controlling the lighting of various LEDs, the memory area of the RWM indicating whether various LEDs are lit or not is checked, and if a value indicating a light is lit ("1" in this embodiment) is stored, a lighting signal for that LED is output, and if a value indicating an off state ("0" in this embodiment) is stored, a lighting signal for that LED is not output (or an off signal is output).

Various LEDs control the 1-3 bet lamps, replay lamp, start lamp, medal insertion lamp, credit number indicator, winning number indicator, stop switch lamp, and MAX bet lamp.

Next, it outputs notification data to be sent to the sub-control board, such as the sound of the stop switch being operated or the sound of a medal being inserted.

Next, it outputs a signal related to the performance test.

Then restore the registers.

Then, save the interrupt enable flag to on and end the timer interrupt processing.

The types of sub-control commands include a start command issued when the start switch is operated, a winning information command indicating the result of the internal lottery, a reel spin start command issued when the reels start accelerating, a left reel stop command, a middle reel stop command, a right reel stop command, and an all reel stop command issued when the stop switches for stopping the reels while they are spinning are operated, etc.

Furthermore, timer measurement processing may be performed within the timer interrupt processing.
In timer measurement, a control process is performed to update information about the timer (time) stored in the RWM (RAM). For example, a process of updating (e.g., subtracting 1) a value stored in a memory area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area A) of the RWM that monitors (manages) the minimum play time (4.1 seconds) is performed. Note that the RWM may have memory areas related to multiple timers, such as a memory area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area B) of the RWM that monitors (manages) the insertion of game medals using the insertion button, and a memory area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area C) of the RWM that monitors (manages) the output time of an external signal, in addition to the memory area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area C) of the RWM that monitors (manages).
In this case, the timer measurement executes a process of subtracting 1 from a value stored in a memory area of the RWM that stores information about the timer (hereinafter also referred to as a timer area), such as a process of subtracting 1 from a value stored in timer area A, a process of subtracting 1 from a value stored in timer area B, and a process of subtracting 1 from a value stored in timer area C. Also, if a timer measurement is performed when the value stored in a certain timer area is "0", the value stored in the certain timer area is configured to become "0".

Note that, although the control process for updating the information related to the timer stored in the RWM is described as subtracting 1 from the value stored in the timer area, it may also be a process of adding 1 to the value stored in the timer area.

Here, the monitoring (management) of the insertion of game medals using the insertion button will be described.
Monitoring (management) of the insertion of a gaming medal using the insertion button is a timer that starts counting from the time the bet process is executed based on the operation of the 1 bet switch 19, and is a timer that prevents the process of determining whether the next 1 bet switch 19 has been operated or not from being executed until the timer value reaches "0".

For example, in a predetermined situation where the number of credits is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, when the number of bets is 0, the number of credits is 3, and a bet can be made by operating the 1 bet switch 19), the value "20" is stored in the timer area B after the bet process is executed based on the operation of the 1 bet switch 19. After that, the value stored in the timer area B is subtracted by "1" by the timer measurement of the timer interrupt process. Then, when the timer interrupt process is executed 20 times, the value stored in the timer area B becomes "0". Note that if the value stored in the timer area B is not "0" (if the value stored in the timer area B is any of "1" to "20"), the game progress main process does not determine whether the 1 bet switch 19 has been operated. In other words, even if the 1 bet switch 19 is operated when the value stored in the timer area B is not "0", the bet process is not executed. After that, after the value stored in the timer area B becomes "0", the bet process can be executed when the 1 bet switch 19 is operated.

This configuration can prevent multiple bet processes from being executed due to a malfunction despite a single operation of the 1 bet switch 19. It can also prevent a malicious player from repeatedly tapping the 1 bet switch 19, which would result in multiple bet processes being executed based on the operation of the 1 bet switch 19 and commands based on the execution of bet processes being sent to the sub-control means 1000 in succession.

<Power off recovery process>
The power interruption recovery process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In this embodiment, when the power switch 40 is turned on to turn on the power, the main control board 100 executes a power-off recovery process to restore various data to the state before the power was turned off.

In the power failure recovery process, the stack pointer is restored, and output data related to the sub-control command sent to the sub-control board 1000 is restored. After that, it is determined whether the set setting value data is within the normal range. If the determination results in an abnormality (value is outside the specified range), the process moves to unrecoverable error processing. On the other hand, if the data is normal (value is within the specified range), the unused RAM area is initialized, an interrupt that is executed periodically is started, and the input port is read. After that, the power failure processing completion flag is cleared, the used registers are restored, and the interrupt disabled/enabled state at the time of the power failure is restored, and the power failure recovery process is terminated. Note that when the power failure recovery process is terminated, the state before the power failure occurred is restored, and if it is not restored (when the settings are changed), the main control process for game progress is performed from the beginning.

In this embodiment, the interrupt is activated at a specific timing within the power failure recovery process, but the interrupt may also be activated after the power failure recovery process of the program start process.

<Main explanation of game progress>
The main control process for game progress executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The main control board 100 executes the game value input process. In the game value input process, the automatic input process by replay is executed (if the game is not replayed, the medal input by the automatic input process is not executed). After that, the game enters a medal input waiting state, and in the game value input process, in the medal input waiting state, the game waits for the insertion of a game medal from the medal input port 17 or the operation of the bet switch. When the game medal is inserted or the bet switch is operated, it judges whether or not a bet is possible (whether or not the amount of the bet is stored in the credit, whether or not the number of bets is the upper limit value), and if a bet is possible, it updates the number of bets or the number of credits. Then, it judges whether or not the number of bets that allows the game to be executed has been bet, and if it is judged that a bet has been made, it judges whether or not the start switch 12 has been operated, and if it is judged that no bet has been made, it waits for the insertion of a game medal, or, if it is in a state where it is stored in the credit, for the operation of the bet switch (if it is in a state where it is stored in the credit). If the bet amount that allows a game to be played has been placed and the start switch 12 has been operated (the start switch signal is determined to be on), an internal lottery process is performed, and if the start switch 12 has not been operated (the start switch signal is not determined to be on), the system waits for the start switch 12 to be operated.

In the internal lottery process, a random number for internal lottery is generated, and a predetermined calculation process is performed using the obtained internal lottery random number value to determine the winning combination (condition device number). After the winning combination is determined, a stop control table corresponding to the stop timing of each stop switch is created in advance, and preparations are made so that stop control can be executed even if the stop switch operation is accepted immediately after the acceptance of the stop switch operation after the reels have rotated.

The types of winning combinations available on the slot machine PS1 can be broadly categorized into bonuses, small combinations, and replays.

Bonus refers to a device that operates in a predetermined case. Generally, it operates when the symbol combination "7-7-7" or "7-7-bar" is displayed frozen on the winning line in the display window 4. The operation of the bonus device changes the number of symbol combinations related to winning for each set number, and changes the probability of activating the condition device for the symbol combination related to winning for each set number. Bonuses are divided into RB, BB, CB, MB, and SB.

RB is an abbreviation for regular bonus, and is also called the first type of special role. RB is generally set as the end condition when 8 small roles are won or 12 game results are obtained, and during RB, roles are drawn using an RB role drawing table in which the probability of winning a small role is set higher than in the normal role drawing table.

BB is an abbreviation for Big Bonus, and is also called a continuous operation device for the first type special role. The end condition of BB is set to the payout of more than a specified number of game medals (for example, 269 medals) related to winning a small role, and during BB, a role is drawn using a BB middle role drawing table in which the probability of winning a small role (described later) is set higher than in the normal role drawing table. Note that a BB middle role drawing table does not need to be set during BB. For example, a table that continuously operates the RB middle role drawing table described later until the BB end condition is met may be called a BB middle role drawing table.

CB is an abbreviation for Challenge Bonus, and is also called the second type special feature. In CB, at least all minor features can be set to winning status, regardless of the results of the feature selection. In addition, during CB, stopping control different from normal stopping control is performed for predetermined reels. For example, it is possible to control the left reel 8a to stop within 75 milliseconds of 190 milliseconds.

As described above, the CB may be configured such that at least all minor winning combinations are in a winning state, and therefore the symbol combination that can be displayed according to the operation procedure cannot be displayed (also called a missed opportunity). For example, during the CB, the left reel 8a may be controlled to stop within 75 milliseconds from 190 milliseconds, so that if it stops within 190 milliseconds, a specific symbol can be displayed on the pay line with any operation timing, but if it stops within 75 milliseconds, a specific symbol cannot be displayed with a specific operation timing.

MB is an abbreviation for middle bonus, and is also called a continuous operation device for the second type special feature. MB is set to end when, for example, more than 153 medals are paid out for a small prize, when RB is won, or when SB, which will be described later, is won.

SB is an abbreviation for single bonus, and is also called a normal role. The end condition for SB is set to be the result of one game. During SB, roles are drawn using the SB role drawing table, which sets the probability of winning a small role higher than the normal role drawing table.

In this embodiment, the BB is performed by drawing roles using the BB middle role drawing table, but this is not limited to this. During BB, the game may be played using a BB general role drawing table in which the winning probability of a small role is set to the same probability as the normal role drawing table and the winning probability of RB is increased, and an RB middle role drawing table in which the winning probability of a small role is set higher than that of the normal role drawing table. Even in this case, the fact remains that the end condition of BB is set to a payout exceeding a predetermined number of medals related to winning a small role. Furthermore, the means that control these bonuses are collectively referred to as special game control means.

A small prize is a prize in which a symbol combination based on a winning small prize is displayed frozen on an active line, and when it is determined to be a winning prize by the winning prize determination process (described later), medals are paid out based on the symbol combination that is frozen.

A replay (also called a replay role) is a role that grants a replay (a game in which the next game can be played by automatic betting without inserting new medals) when a symbol combination based on a winning replay is displayed frozen on an active line and the winning determination process determines that a winning combination has been won. A replay cannot be missed in a winning game, so the next game after a winning replay is always a replay.

If the result of the lottery is that the player does not win any of the bonus, small prize, or replay prizes, it is a loss and the winning process described below will not be performed. When it is a loss, a symbol combination that does not relate to any prize will be displayed on the active line.

For BB, RB, and MB among the roles that are drawn by the role lottery, if the symbol combination is not stopped and displayed on the valid line in the winning game, the winning flag can be carried over to the next game (special role carry-over means). While the winning flag is carried over, the role lottery may be performed using the role lottery table before the winning flag is carried over, or the role lottery may be performed using the carry-over role lottery table (also called the internal-internal lottery table or the internal-internal role lottery table) corresponding to the winning flag. When using the carry-over role lottery table, if the symbol combination based on the winning BB, RB, or MB is stopped and displayed on the valid line, it is determined that the transition condition of the role lottery table is met, and a transition is made from the carry-over role lottery table to the role lottery table corresponding to the winning flag.

The role selection table defines the probability of winning for multiple types of roles, and multiple types of role selection tables are provided depending on the game state. For example, there is a BB role selection table used during BB, and an MB role selection table used during MB, etc.

In the role selection table, single winning roles in which one type of symbol combination can be displayed stop on an active line and multiple winning roles in which multiple symbol combinations can be displayed stop on one or multiple active lines are set according to the results of the role selection.

For multiple symbol combinations set as overlapping winning roles, all symbol combinations may be set to be capable of being displayed as one winning role depending on the operation mode, or some symbol combinations may be set to be unable to be displayed as a winning role. Among these overlapping winning roles, roles that correspond to some of the symbol combinations that cannot be displayed as a winning role are sometimes referred to as control roles.

The role of the control function is to be able to control the effective line to be displayed so that it is different depending on the type of control function set as the overlapping winning role, even if the same symbol combination can be displayed on the effective line as a result of multiple role selections.

The winning flag control means turns on the flag corresponding to the winning role when any role is selected as a winning role in the role selection process. Then, when the player operates all the stop switches 13 and the prize-winning process for the winning role is terminated, the flag corresponding to the winning role is turned off.

Furthermore, for the above-mentioned BB, RB, and MB, the flag is turned on in the winning game, but if the winning BB, RB, or MB symbol combination is not stopped and displayed on the winning line when all stop switches 13 are operated, the flag is carried over to the next game onwards in the on state, the above-mentioned carryover role selection table is set, and the winning BB, RB, or MB symbol combination is stopped and displayed, completing the winning process for the winning role, and the flag corresponding to BB, RB, or MB is turned off.

The role selection table also includes an RT role selection table. RT is a game state in which the probability of winning a replay in the role selection is different from that of the normal role selection table, and is an abbreviation for replay time.

As a specific example of the use of RT, the losing area of the normal role lottery table may be replaced with a replay to increase the probability of winning a replay, or the replay area of the normal role lottery table may be replaced with a losing area to decrease the probability of winning a replay.
Furthermore, the normal role selection table and the replay area may be the same, but the type of replay that is won within the replay area may be different.
The slot machine PS1 is provided with a plurality of RT role selection tables, and is configured to transition to another RT state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied.

The transition conditions for the RT role selection table can be listed as follows. Transition condition 1 is when a specific symbol combination (symbol combination related to a bonus, RT transition symbol combination) is displayed as a stop, transition condition 2 is when a bonus is won, transition condition 3 is when BB, RB, or MB of the bonus ends, transition condition 4 is when a specified number of plays have been played since a specific symbol combination (RT transition symbol combination) is displayed as a stop, and transition condition 5 is when a specified number of plays have been played since BB, RB, or MB ends. These transition conditions for the RT role selection table can be set appropriately depending on the gameplay.

The number of entries is the number of winning entries for each lottery result defined in the internal lottery table by the internal lottery means. For example, if the total number of entries is 65,536, the winning probability is calculated by dividing each number by 65,536. For example, the winning probability of a given lottery result with a number of entries of 4 is 1/16,384.

In addition, if any of transition conditions 1 to 5 in the RT role selection table described above is met, the number of replays can be changed. For example, if the replay probability for RT1 is 1/7.3, when transitioning from RT1 to RT2, the replay probability for RT2 can be changed to 1/1.5. This makes it possible to transition to a state with a high replay probability, thereby suppressing the loss of medals and adding excitement to the game.

Freezing may be performed after the start lever is operated, depending on the internal lottery result of the internal lottery means and whether or not the freeze number from the previous or subsequent play has been stored. If freezing is performed with the start lever, reel spin start processing may be performed at the end of freezing without performing processing to determine whether the next minimum play time has elapsed.

Next, it checks whether the minimum play time (equivalent to 4.1 seconds) set in the previous game has elapsed. If it is determined that the minimum play time has elapsed (if it is determined that the value of the minimum play time timer is 0), it sets a new minimum play time, and if it is not determined that the minimum play time has elapsed (if it is determined that the value of the minimum play time timer is not 0), it decrements the value of the minimum play time timer and then checks whether the minimum play time has elapsed. This minimum play time check process is executed until it is determined that the minimum play time has elapsed, and it is configured so that no other process is executed as the main game progress process between the process of determining the minimum play time and the process of setting the new minimum play time. This prevents the minimum play time from being extended by other processes, making it possible to start playing as soon as possible. In other words, it is possible to prevent the game from being prolonged without making the player wait.

However, this is not limiting, and other processing may be executed as the main game progress processing between the processing for determining the minimum play time and the processing for setting a new minimum play time. In this case, the other processing may be a processing for clearing the RWM address, a processing for storing other data in the RWM, or other commands with short processing times. These processing times are so short that the user does not feel an extension to the minimum play time. After the new minimum play time is set, a processing for preparing to start spinning the reels is executed.

The reel spin start preparation process initializes the data related to reel stops saved in the previous game, sets the stop table to be used in the current game, requests the output of the start of rotation of all reels, and sets a sub-control command (reel spin start command) that indicates the start of rotation of the reels.

The stop table is set up in accordance with the symbol control number determined by the result of the role drawing by the internal drawing means, and predetermines the reel stop positions corresponding to the operation timing of the stop switch 13.

After the reel spin preparation process is complete, processing related to the freeze effect (for example, the reel effect before the reels spin) is executed. In the freeze effect, the reels are moved slightly or rotated in reverse, mainly to indicate the likelihood of a winning combination.

When a freeze effect is not executed, or after a freeze effect is executed and the execution of the freeze effect has finished, a process to spin the reels (also called reel spin process, reel spin start process, or reel spin start process) is executed. There are four reel spin states: acceleration state, constant speed spin state, stop preparation state, and stopped state, and the acceleration state is set when spinning the reels. In the acceleration state, a process is executed to gradually rotate the stepping motor by timer interrupt processing.

The acceleration process executed in the accelerating state is a process executed from when the reel rotation is stopped to when the constant speed rotation process is executed. In the constant speed rotation process, the stepping motor is moved one step for each timer interrupt process, but if the constant speed rotation process is suddenly executed when the reel is stopped, the torque will be insufficient and there is a high possibility of stepping out. For this reason, the acceleration process is necessary to gradually rotate the reel. In the acceleration process in this embodiment, the stepping motor is first moved one step after 50 timer interrupt processes, then moved one step after 30 timer interrupt processes, then moved one step after 10 timer interrupt processes, then moved one step after 5 timer interrupt processes, then moved one step after 2 timer interrupt processes, and then moved one step after one timer interrupt process. This is followed by the constant speed rotation process in which the stepping motor is moved one step for each timer interrupt process.

When constant speed rotation processing is being performed, the value of the rotation failure detection counter described above is incremented for each timer interrupt processing to detect rotation failure. Note that the initial value of the rotation failure detection counter is set to 0, so it is incremented for each timer interrupt processing, but if the initial value of the rotation failure detection counter is set to 180, the value of the rotation failure detection counter can be decremented for each timer interrupt processing, and it can be determined that a rotation failure has been detected when it reaches 0.

In addition, in the constant speed rotation state, the stop switch is permitted to be operated and operation of the stop switch is awaited. When the stop switch is permitted to be operated, the stop switch lamp is lit blue to notify the player that the stop switch is active (when the stop switch is not permitted to be operated, the lamp is lit red). The control of the stop switch lamp illumination may be performed by the main control means 100 or the sub control means 1000. When executing the push order navigation, the stop switch lamp illumination may be controlled by flashing the stop switch lamp, for example, to make it easier for the player to recognize which stop switch to operate.

A command indicating that the reels have started to spin is sent to the sub-control means 1000, and when the sub-control means 1000 receives this command, it sets a reel spin time measurement timer that measures the reel spin time and starts counting. Then, when the value of the reel spin time measurement timer reaches a predetermined value (equivalent to 3 minutes), it displays "Please stop the reels" (reel stop warning image) on the LCD to prompt the player to spin the reels. The reel spin time measurement timer is initialized when the stop switch is operated (when the operation of the stop switch is accepted), and if there are any reels that are still spinning, it starts counting again. In this way, the reel spin time measurement timer continues to be updated until all the reels have stopped.

When the reel stop warning image is displayed at the same time as the push order navigation, it is displayed in front of the push order navigation. This ensures visibility of the reel stop warning image even when the display areas of the reel stop warning image and the push order navigation overlap, and clearly prompts the player to operate the stop switch. In addition, since there is a risk that the push order navigation may become difficult to see at this time and the player may not know which reel to stop, the reel stop warning image may be erased (or the reel stop warning image may be made smaller or moved) by operating a sub-switch or a switch for effects, etc., so that the push order navigation can be recognized.

After the game progress main process enables the operation of the stop switch, the process of determining whether the stop switch is operated (reel stop reception check process) is repeated until the stop switch is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches has been operated, the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch is stopped (also called slip control). At this time, the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch transitions from a constant speed rotation state to a stop preparation state. In the stop preparation state, the reel is rotated to the target stop position while rotating at a constant speed. Then, when the target stop position is reached, the state transitions to a stop state, and all four-phase excitation is turned ON to apply the brakes. The slip control is performed within 190 milliseconds after the operation of the stop switch 13. In this embodiment, when the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted, it is possible to pull in up to four symbols ahead.

The target stop position is determined by whether the currently passing symbol number matches the symbol number stored as the stop position, and if it is determined that they match, all four phase excitations are turned ON to indicate the target stop position. The currently passing symbol number is determined by the fact that the initial symbol number is set the moment the index sensor detects the index (when the index signal rises), and then when the timer interrupt process moves one symbol from there, the symbol number next to the initial symbol number is set.

After executing the reel stop acceptance check process, it checks whether all reels are stopped. If all reels are stopped, it executes the winning determination process and then the winning process. If all reels are not stopped, it executes the process of waiting for the acceptance of the stop operation of the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel. Then, after all reels have stopped, it updates the display contents of the status display monitor and moves to the advantageous zone clear counter management process. Then, it executes the game end check process that updates the RT status, etc., and ends the main sequence of game progress. Note that software random number update process may be performed during the period from when the reels start spinning to when the stop operation is accepted.

The winning judgment process is a process that judges whether or not the symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination has stopped on a winning line. Since it judges whether or not the stopped symbol determined when the operation of the stop switch is accepted is abnormal, it is not judged based on the symbol combination that actually stopped on the winning line. After it is judged by the winning judgment process that the symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination has stopped on a winning line, the winning process is performed, and if it is not judged by the winning judgment process that the symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination has stopped on a winning line, processing based on a miss is performed.

Winning processing is processing that gives a bonus to a player based on a symbol combination that stops on a winning line. Winning processing when a symbol combination based on a minor win is stopped involves paying out medals based on the stopped symbol combination and shifting the game state based on the stopped symbol combination. Winning processing when a symbol combination based on a replay is stopped involves granting the right to replay and shifting the game state based on the stopped symbol combination. Winning processing when a symbol combination based on a bonus is stopped involves shifting the game state based on the stopped symbol combination. Note that in the case of a miss, no winning processing is performed.

However, this is not the only option. When the result of the winning determination process is a miss, a winning process based on the miss may be performed, and a process may be performed in which no special prize is given to the player as a result of the winning process. In addition, as a winning process based on a miss, the game state may be changed according to the operation mode at the time of the miss. For example, when all stop switches 13 are operated according to a predetermined operation sequence at the time of the miss, a game state with a different probability of winning a freeze may be changed. Even in the case of an apparent miss due to a missed minor combination, a winning process such as a change to an RT state or other game state change control may be performed without a payout. Furthermore, as a winning process based on a bonus, a payout of medals based on the symbol combination displayed in the stopped state or the right to replay may be added.

The process of transitioning game states involves setting a role selection table according to the game state to be transitioned to, setting reel control according to the game state to be transitioned to, setting the freeze winning probability according to the game state to be transitioned to, or a combination of these.

In the winning determination process, when a winning symbol combination is determined, winning symbol combination information (stopping number information) displayed on the pay line and role selection result information are transmitted to the sub-control board 1000. Meanwhile, when the sub-control board 1000 receives this information, it can output a performance according to the winning symbol combination information and role selection result information using the display device 32, lamp, or speaker S.

In the winning determination process, a winning determination is made for all active lines, and if the result of the determination is that multiple symbol combinations based on overlapping winning roles are displayed on multiple active lines, winning processing is performed for each of the multiple symbol combinations that are displayed.

For example, when a minor win with a payout of 2 coins and a minor win with a payout of 10 coins are displayed on multiple active lines, the winning process will pay out 12 coins by adding up the payout amount based on the minor win set to 2 coins and the payout amount based on the minor win set to 10 coins.

The system also sets an upper limit on the number of coins that can be paid out at one time, and when a symbol combination based on multiple minor winning combinations is displayed on an active line, if the number of coins that can be paid out exceeds the upper limit, the system will pay out the maximum number of coins.

For example, if the upper limit of the payout number is set to 15 coins, and a minor win with a payout number of 12 coins and a minor win with a payout number of 10 coins are displayed stopped on multiple active lines, the winning process will be as follows: if the combined value of the minor win set to 12 coins and the minor win set to 10 coins exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit of 15 coins will be paid out.

In this embodiment, medals are set to be paid out only for minor winning combinations, but medals equal to the number of medals bet may be paid out as a winning process based on a replay, or a preset number of medals may be paid out as a winning process based on a bonus.

<Processing for ending the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of gaming media>
Conventionally, there have been gaming machines that have a normal zone and a favorable zone as game zones, and that end the favorable zone when the MY of the favorable zone exceeds 2400. (Prior art document: JP 2020-010896 A)

Here, in conventional gaming machines (prior art documents), the MY of the advantageous zone is set as the base (0) at the point where the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed since the advantageous zone began, and the advantageous zone ends when the difference from the base exceeds "2400." Note that the point where the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed is synonymous with the point where the difference in the number of gaming media is the lowest.

Therefore, in conventional gaming machines (prior art documents), a player could only receive a maximum profit of the difference of "2414" in one advantageous zone. Therefore, if a player spends a lot of gaming media while playing in an advantageous zone, he or she cannot get back the gaming media spent in that advantageous zone, and conventional gaming machines were not attractive to players.

For example, in conventional gaming machines, even if a game where the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous zone is -3000 reaches a specified game state (e.g., AT state), the game ends if the MY in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400. Therefore, at most, only about 2400 game media could be obtained in one advantageous zone (the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous zone would end at about -600).

Therefore, instead of ending the advantageous zone when MY in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, the advantageous zone is configured to end when the start of the advantageous zone is set as the starting point (0) and the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone (the difference between the total number of gaming media awarded in the advantageous zone and the total number of gaming media bet in the advantageous zone) exceeds a predetermined number (e.g., 2400). Specifically, the total number of INs of gaming media in the advantageous zone (also referred to as the total number of inputs or total number of bets) and the total number of OUTs of gaming media in the advantageous zone (also referred to as the total number of payouts or total number of awards) are taken into consideration. In other words, the advantageous zone is configured to end when the difference between the number of OUTs of gaming media in the advantageous zone and the number of INs of gaming media in the advantageous zone (hereinafter referred to as the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone) exceeds 2400. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with improved playability compared to conventional machines while keeping the gambling nature within a certain range.

For example, with the gaming machine according to the present invention, when a certain game state (e.g., AT state) is reached from a certain game in which the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone is -3000, the advantageous zone can be ended when the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, starting from the start of the advantageous zone. Therefore, it becomes possible to obtain a maximum of approximately 5400 gaming media from a game in which the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone is -3000 (the difference in the number of gaming media in one advantageous zone becomes +2400, and the advantageous zone ends).

In addition, if the advantageous zone is configured to end when the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone (the difference between the total number of gaming media awarded in the advantageous zone and the total number of gaming media bet in the advantageous zone) exceeds a predetermined number (e.g., 2,400), it is acceptable to end the advantageous zone at a value less than this predetermined number. In other words, when the start of the advantageous zone is taken as the starting point (0), the maximum difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone becomes a predetermined number (more precisely, the predetermined number + α (α is the maximum difference in the number of gaming media in one game)).

In addition, even if the advantageous zone is configured to end when the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone exceeds a predetermined number, the advantageous zone can also be ended if any end condition is met before the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone exceeds the predetermined number.

In this way, in order to end the game when the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one favorable zone exceeds a predetermined value, it is necessary to be able to store the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone even if the difference in the number of gaming media is a negative value.

Below, we will use diagrams to explain the specific process for ending the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of gaming media.

<<Processing to end the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of gaming media (addition version)>>
Figure 53 shows an example of a process for ending a favorable zone with a difference in the number of gaming media.

In FIG. 53, there is a favorable zone difference number counter. The favorable zone difference number counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the (total) difference number of game media in the favorable zone.

The value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is not cleared by turning the power on or off. The value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is cleared by clearing the RWM when the favorable zone ends. The value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is cleared by turning the power on with a setting change (clearing the RWM when a setting change occurs). Information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag area, and is not cleared when the stop state is reached.

Note that turning on the power with a setting change specifically refers to turning on the power switch while the setting key switch is on. In other words, turning on the power with a setting change switches to setting change mode, and once the conditions for ending the setting change mode are met (for example, the setting key switch turning off after the start switch is turned on), and the setting change mode ends, play becomes possible.

The value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is configured to be updated by playing in the advantageous zone.

In the following explanation, the advantageous section difference counter is configured with 2 bytes, but the advantageous section difference counter may be configured with 3 bytes or 4 bytes.

First, in "favorable zone clear counter -1", 1 is subtracted from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter. If the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter is below 0 (if there is a borrow), the carry flag becomes 1. Also, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter is not below 0 (if there is no borrow), the carry flag becomes 0. Also, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter is 0, the zero flag becomes 1.

The advantageous zone clear counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the number of plays in the advantageous zone.

In "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?", if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter does not fall below 0, the answer is NO. Specifically, the answer is NO if the carry flag is not 1. In other words, if the answer to "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" is NO, it means that a value of 1 or greater is stored in the advantageous zone clear counter for the current game. In other words, this means that the current game is in an advantageous zone.

On the other hand, if the answer to the question "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" is YES, it means that the current game is in the normal zone.

When asking "Is the next game in an advantageous zone?", the determination is made according to the information in the RWM area stored in the main control board. For example, the transition to an advantageous zone may be decided in the current game (game in the normal zone), and the determination may be made according to the information in the RWM area that stores the information indicating the transition to the advantageous zone. Also, for example, if the specification is such that the transition to an advantageous zone is decided in the current game (game in the normal zone) and the game state of the transition destination is also determined, the determination may be made according to the information in the RWM area that stores the game state of the transition destination. In any case, it is possible to determine whether the next game will be in an advantageous zone or not according to information that can determine whether the next game will be in an advantageous zone or not. If the next game is in an advantageous zone, the result is YES, and if the next game is not in an advantageous zone, the result is NO.

In "save favorable zone clear counter initial value", an initial value is stored in an RWM area capable of storing the value of the favorable zone clear counter. For example, if the initial value is 1500, 1500 is stored in the RWM area capable of storing the value of the favorable zone clear counter. Also, for example, if the initial value is 4000, 4000 is stored in the RWM area capable of storing the value of the favorable zone clear counter. Note that this initial value corresponds to the maximum number of games that can be played in one favorable zone. Therefore, the initial value is not limited to 1500 or 4000, but may be any predetermined value. For example, a number of games that cannot be completed in one day (e.g., 65,535) may be set.

In "Set advantageous zone difference counter initial value", the initial value to be stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is set in the register. In other words, when the advantageous zone starts (when the current game is a game in the normal zone and the next game is a game in the advantageous zone), the initial value to be stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is set in the register. Specifically, the initial value is set to 63135 (65535-2400) and stored in the HL register.

The initial value of 63135 is the value obtained by subtracting the value "2400" corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone at which the favorable zone ends from the maximum value "65535" that can be stored in a 2-byte storage area (corresponding to the size of the storage area of the favorable zone difference counter). Note that in this example, the condition for ending the favorable zone is that the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone exceeds 2400, but the condition for ending the favorable zone is not limited to the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone exceeding 2400. For example, the condition for ending the favorable zone can be set to a predetermined value, such as the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone exceeding 4800. If the condition for ending the favorable zone is that the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone exceeds 4800, the initial value is set to 60735 (65535-4800).

In addition, in this example, the advantageous zone difference number counter is 2 bytes, but it can also be 3 bytes. If the advantageous zone difference number counter is 3 bytes and the condition for ending the advantageous zone is when the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, the initial value is set to 16774815 (16777215-2400).

The effect of setting the initial value as "a value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the advantageous zone difference number counter" minus "a value corresponding to the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone defined as the end condition of the advantageous zone" will be described later.

In addition, without being limited to this, the initial value of the advantageous zone difference counter may be 63120 (65535-2415) when the size of the memory area for the advantageous zone difference counter is 2 bytes. In this case, when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter becomes 65521 or more, the end process of the advantageous zone is executed.

When configured in this way, the value of the favorable zone difference counter will not exceed the upper limit when the favorable zone ends (the favorable zone ends when the difference in the favorable zone exceeds 2400, so the maximum value of the favorable zone difference counter is 65534 since the initial value can only be incremented up to 2414, which is 2400-1 (1 coin bet) + 15 (15 coins paid out)), so it is possible to prevent the carry flag and zero flag from being raised when the difference in the favorable zone exceeds 2400 and the favorable zone ends.

For this reason, in the update process of the favorable zone difference number counter, the zero flag is set only when the value of the favorable zone difference number counter changes from 1 to 0, and the carry flag is set only when the value falls below the lower limit of the favorable zone difference number counter (when the result of subtracting the difference number of the game in question from the value of the favorable zone difference number counter is less than 0). Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the lower limit of the favorable zone difference number counter has been exceeded simply by checking the carry flag, and therefore a specific value (for example, "0", "1", etc.) can be stored in the favorable zone difference number counter when the carry flag = 1 in the update process of the favorable zone difference number counter.

This allows for more accurate decision-making using the carry flag, which can reduce program size and improve program readability.

"Before decrement of favorable zone clear counter = 1?" determines whether the favorable zone clear counter was 1 before "favorable zone clear counter -1" was performed. For example, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter in "favorable zone clear counter -1" is that the favorable zone clear counter has a value of 0 (specifically, if the zero flag is 1), the answer is YES. On the other hand, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter in "favorable zone clear counter -1" is that the value of the favorable zone clear counter is not 0 (specifically, if the zero flag is 0), the answer is NO.

In addition, after "Before advantageous zone clear counter subtraction = 1?" and before "When replay is activated?", a process is performed to store the value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter in a specified register (e.g. HL register).

In "Replay Activated?", if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game based on a replay), the answer is YES. On the other hand, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is not a game based on a replay), the answer is NO.

"IN number < OUT number?" determines whether the OUT number is greater than the IN number.

For example, as a result of this game,
a) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 0, the answer is NO.
a) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 1, the answer is NO.
c) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 3, the answer is NO.
d) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the answer is YES.

Specifically, the IN number minus the OUT number is calculated, and the result of this calculation is stored in a specified register (for example, the A register). Furthermore, if there is a carry over as a result of the IN number minus the OUT number (if the carry flag is 1), the result is judged as YES, and if there is no carry over (if the carry flag is 0), the result is judged as NO. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is greater than the OUT number, the carry flag is 0 and the result is judged as YES. Furthermore, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is less than the OUT number, the carry flag is 1 and the result is judged as NO.

To give a specific example, the result of this game:
a) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 0, then the A register will be 3 and the carry flag will be 0.
a) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 1, the A register is 2 and the carry flag is 0.
c) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 3, the A register is 0 and the carry flag is 0.
d) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, then the A register will have a value of 249 and the carry flag will have a value of 1.

Here, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) as a result of the previous game, the number of bets for the current game is automatically bet (for example, "3" is set by the automatic bet), and if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed (on an active line) as a result of the current game, the number of bets will be treated as the number of INs for the current game, even if it was the number of bets set by the automatic bet.

On the other hand, for the IN number and OUT number, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the determination of "IN number < OUT number?" is not made. In other words, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the number of bets for the current game is not treated as the IN number. Similarly, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the number of awards (or automatic bets) for the current game is not treated as the OUT number.

Note that in "IN number < OUT number?", we calculated the IN number - the OUT number, but we could also determine it by OUT number - IN number. In other words, it would be sufficient if we could use the IN number and the OUT number to calculate the difference in the number of game media for the current game.

In "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction", the value of the calculation result (IN number - OUT number) of "IN number < OUT number?" is subtracted from the value of the advantageous section difference number counter stored in a specified register (for example, HL register). Note that if a carry occurs due to "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction", the carry flag becomes 1.
For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (the value of the HL register) is 2,
A) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 0, the HL register = 65535 and the carry flag = 1. Note that 2-3 = -1, but a register cannot store negative values. Therefore, a carry occurs, resulting in 65535.
a) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 1, the HL register is 0 and the carry flag is 0.
c) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 3, the HL register is 2 and the carry flag is 0.

When "favorable section difference number counter < 0", "favorable section difference number counter subtraction" is used to determine whether or not a carry has occurred. If a carry has occurred, it is judged as YES, and if a carry has not occurred, it is judged as NO. In the above example, when the value stored in the favorable section difference number counter is 2, a) it is judged as YES if IN number = 3 and OUT number = 0. Also, in the above example, when the value stored in the favorable section difference number counter is 2, b) it is judged as NO if IN number = 3 and OUT number = 1. Similarly, in the above example, when the value stored in the favorable section difference number counter is 2, c) it is judged as NO if IN number = 3 and OUT number = 3.

When "favourable section difference counter < 0" returns YES, the carry flag is 1, so a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. For example, the specified calculation is the exclusive OR of the value of the A register and the value of the A register. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. Note that although the exclusive OR of the value of the A register and the value of the A register is given as an example of the specified calculation, any calculation can be used as long as it sets the carry flag to 0.

In "Setting the lower limit of the favorable section difference counter", if a carryover occurs due to "Subtracting the favorable section difference counter", a predetermined lower limit (0) is stored in the register that stores the calculation result (in this embodiment, the HL register). In the above example, in a situation where the value stored in the favorable section difference counter is 2, if a) the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 0, then "Subtracting the favorable section difference counter" causes the HL register to = 65535. In such a case, "Setting the lower limit of the favorable section difference counter" stores 0 in the HL register.

In other words, if a carryover occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, it is possible to calculate the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone as accurately as possible by storing the lower limit value of 0 in the HL register. Note that even if "Set advantageous zone difference number counter lower limit value" is executed, the advantageous zone continues, and it is possible to provide the player with play in the advantageous zone. In other words, even in play after "Set advantageous zone difference number counter lower limit value" is executed, the processing in FIG. 53 is executed as long as the advantageous zone continues.

Note that, although FIG. 53 includes the process of "Set lower limit of favorable section difference counter", the process of "Set lower limit of favorable section difference counter" may not be included. Specifically, when "Favorable section difference counter < 0" is judged as YES, the value stored in the favorable section difference counter of the previous game may be set. For example, when the value stored in the favorable section difference counter is 2, and the IN number and OUT number of the game are a) IN number = 3 and OUT number = 0, the value stored in the favorable section difference counter may be set to 2 (the same value as the value of the favorable section difference counter of the previous game). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent abnormal values (values with digits dropped) from being stored in the "Favorable section difference counter". In addition, since the process corresponding to "Set lower limit of favorable section difference counter" is eliminated, the program capacity can be reduced.

In other words, if a downgrade occurs due to "advantageous zone difference number counter subtraction," the advantageous zone difference number counter is not updated using the value at the time of the downgrade, thereby preventing abnormal values from being entered as the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter. In other words, even if the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone becomes a negative value, the advantageous zone can be ended as accurately as possible using the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone.

In "Advantageous section difference counter addition," the complement of the result of the calculation "IN number < OUT number?" (IN number - OUT number) (the value stored in the A register) is calculated and stored in the A register. The calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is then added to the HL register.

The complement in "advantageous section difference counter addition" refers to the smallest number that carries beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived using the value of the 0-A register, or by a single instruction (NEG instruction) for deriving the complement.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (the value of the HL register) is 2,
d) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register is 249, but the "advantageous section difference counter addition" first derives 7, which is the complement of 249. Next, 2+7 is calculated, and 9 is stored in the HL register. Note that 2+7 does not exceed 65535 (there is no carry), so the carry flag is 0.

In addition, for example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (the value of the HL register) is 65530,
d) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register = 249, but the "advantageous section difference counter addition" first derives 7, which is the complement of 249. Next, 65530 + 7 is calculated, and 2 is stored in the HL register. Note that 65530 + 7 is 65537, but since it exceeds 65535 (because there is a carry), 2 is stored in the HL register. Also, because there is a carry, the carry flag becomes 1.

In "save favorable zone difference counter", the value stored in the HL register is stored in the favorable zone difference counter. In other words, this is a process that updates the favorable zone difference counter.

For example, if 63135 is stored in the HL register by "Set favorable zone difference counter initial value," then 63135 is stored in the favorable zone difference counter by "Save favorable zone difference counter."

For example, if "Replay Activation" is YES, the value of the favorable zone difference counter from the previous play is stored in the HL register, so "Save favorable zone difference counter" stores the same value as the favorable zone difference counter from the previous play in the favorable zone difference counter.

For example, if "Is favorable zone difference counter < 0?" returns NO, the value obtained by subtracting the difference in the gaming media for the current game (IN number - OUT number) from the value of the favorable zone difference counter for the previous game is stored in the HL register, so "save favorable zone difference counter" stores the value obtained by subtracting the difference in the gaming media for the current game from the value of the favorable zone difference counter for the previous game in the favorable zone difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Is favorable zone difference counter < 0?" is YES, the lower limit (0) is stored in the HL register, so the lower limit (0) is stored in the favorable zone difference counter by "Save favorable zone difference counter."

For example, after "adding favorable zone difference number counter", the value obtained by adding the difference number of the media for the current game (OUT number - IN number) to the value of the favorable zone difference number counter for the previous game is stored in the HL register, so by "saving favorable zone difference number counter", the value obtained by adding the difference number of the game media for the current game to the value of the favorable zone difference number counter for the previous game is stored in the favorable zone difference number counter.

In "Advantageous zone difference number > 2400?", it is determined whether the difference number of game media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400. Specifically, it is determined whether the carry flag is 1. If the carry flag is 1, it is determined as YES, and if the carry flag is not 1 (if the carry flag is 0), it is determined as NO. Note that the carry flag is 1 when a carry occurs due to "advantageous zone difference number counter addition". On the other hand, if a carry occurs due to "advantageous zone difference number counter subtraction", the carry flag becomes 1 once, but then a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0, so "Advantageous zone difference number > 2400?" can be determined as NO.

In other words, in "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?", it is possible to determine whether the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400 depending on whether the carry flag is 1. Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced compared to when the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone is directly compared to a constant (2400).

In this way, in "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?", whether the carry flag is 1 determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, so the "Advantageous Zone Difference Number Counter Initial Value Set" stores 63135 as the initial value.

As mentioned above, this 63135 is the value obtained by subtracting the value "2400", which corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone that ends the favorable zone, from the maximum value "65535" that can be stored in a 2-byte memory area (corresponding to the size of the memory area of the favorable zone difference number counter). In other words, when the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone that ends the favorable zone exceeds 2400, it exceeds 65535, so the carry flag becomes 1. In other words, "Favorable zone difference number > 2400?" is a process of determining whether the value of the favorable zone difference number counter exceeds 65535.

Also, as mentioned above, if the initial value of the favorable zone difference counter is set to "63120", then "favorable zone difference number > 2400?" is a process of determining whether the value of the favorable zone difference counter exceeds 65520 (whether it is 65521 or greater).

In addition, by storing 63135 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -63135 as the difference in gaming media, with the start of the favorable zone as the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 63135, a situation in which the value of the favorable zone difference counter is 13135 means that, with the start of the favorable zone as the starting point (0), the difference is -50000.

As described above, by storing 63135 as the initial value, which is "a value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the advantageous zone difference number counter" - "a value corresponding to the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone set as the end condition of the advantageous zone", the program capacity for determining whether the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone has exceeded 2400 can be reduced. Also, by storing 63135 as the initial value, it is possible to store values up to -63135 as the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone. Note that although an example is given of storing 63135 as the initial value, values other than 63135 can be used as the initial value as long as they have the same effect.

In "RWM initialization", all parameters that affect the performance related to the instruction function are updated to 0, and the advantageous zone clear counter management process is terminated. Parameters that affect the performance related to the instruction function include the number of AT games, the game status related to the AT, the advantageous zone clear counter, the advantageous zone difference counter, etc. Then, by updating the advantageous zone type to 0, the next game will be a game in a normal zone that is not an advantageous zone. In the game in the advantageous zone, if "RWM initialization" is not executed, the next game will be a game in the advantageous zone (the advantageous zone does not end).

In other words, if an abnormal value is stored in the HL register due to a carryover, it is possible to calculate the difference number of the favorable zone as accurately as possible by storing the lower limit value of 0 in the HL register. Note that even if "Set favorable zone difference number counter lower limit value" is executed, the favorable zone continues, and it is possible to provide the player with play in the favorable zone. In other words, even in play after "Set favorable zone difference number counter lower limit value" is executed, the processing in FIG. 53 is executed as long as the favorable zone continues.

Note that in "IN number < OUT number?", the OUT number is subtracted from the IN number, but it may be configured to subtract the IN number from the OUT number. In the case where the IN number is subtracted from the OUT number, when "IN number < OUT number?" is judged as NO (when a borrow occurs in the A register), in "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction", the complement is calculated by a predetermined calculation and stored in the A register (the difference number of the gaming medium of the current game), and then the value stored in the A register (the difference number of the gaming medium of the current game) is subtracted from the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter). In other words, when "IN number < OUT number?" is NO, it is sufficient to be configured to subtract the absolute value of the difference number of the gaming medium of the current game from the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter.

Similarly, if the IN number is subtracted from the OUT number when "IN number < OUT number?" is configured, then when "IN number < OUT number?" is judged as YES (when no carryover occurs in the A register), the "advantageous section difference number counter addition" can simply add the value stored in the A register (the difference number of the gaming media in the current game) from the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter) without calculating the complement. In other words, it is sufficient to be configured to add the absolute value of the difference number of the gaming media in the current game from the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter when "IN number < OUT number?" is NO.

<Processing to end the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of gaming media (subtraction version)>
Figure 54 shows an example of a process for ending a favorable zone with a difference in the number of gaming media.

In FIG. 54, there is a favorable zone difference number counter. The favorable zone difference number counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media in the favorable zone.

The value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is not cleared by turning the power on or off. The value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is cleared by clearing the RWM when the favorable zone ends. The value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is cleared by turning the power on with a setting change (clearing the RWM when a setting change occurs). Information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag area, and is not cleared when the stop state is reached.

In the following explanation, the advantageous section difference counter is configured with 2 bytes, but the advantageous section difference counter may be configured with 3 bytes or 4 bytes.

First, in "favorable zone clear counter -1", 1 is subtracted from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter. If the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter is below 0 (if there is a borrow), the carry flag becomes 1. Also, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter is not below 0 (if there is no borrow), the carry flag becomes 0. Also, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter is 0, the zero flag becomes 1.

The advantageous zone clear counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the number of plays in the advantageous zone.

In "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?", if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter does not fall below 0, the answer is NO. Specifically, the answer is NO if the carry flag is not 1. In other words, if the answer to "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" is NO, it means that a value of 1 or greater is stored in the advantageous zone clear counter for the current game. In other words, this means that the current game is in an advantageous zone.

On the other hand, if the answer to the question "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" is YES, it means that the current game is in the normal zone.

When asking "Is the next game in an advantageous zone?", the determination is made according to the information in the RWM area stored in the main control board. For example, the transition to an advantageous zone may be decided in the current game (game in the normal zone), and the determination may be made according to the information in the RWM area that stores the information indicating the transition to the advantageous zone. Also, for example, if the specification is such that the transition to an advantageous zone is decided in the current game (game in the normal zone) and the game state of the transition destination is also determined, the determination may be made according to the information in the RWM area that stores the game state of the transition destination. In any case, it is possible to determine whether the next game will be in an advantageous zone or not according to information that can determine whether the next game will be in an advantageous zone or not. If the next game is in an advantageous zone, the result is YES, and if the next game is not in an advantageous zone, the result is NO.

In "save favorable zone clear counter initial value", an initial value is stored in an RWM area capable of storing the value of the favorable zone clear counter. For example, if the initial value is 1500, 1500 is stored in the RWM area capable of storing the value of the favorable zone clear counter. Also, for example, if the initial value is 4000, 4000 is stored in the RWM area capable of storing the value of the favorable zone clear counter. Note that this initial value corresponds to the maximum number of games that can be played in one favorable zone. Therefore, the initial value is not limited to 1500 or 4000, but may be any predetermined value. For example, a number of games that cannot be completed in one day (e.g., 65,535) may be set.

In "Set initial value of favorable zone difference counter", the initial value to be stored in the favorable zone difference counter is set in the register. In other words, when the favorable zone starts (when the current game is a game in the normal zone and the next game is a game in the favorable zone), the initial value to be stored in the favorable zone difference counter is set in the register. Specifically, the initial value is set to 2400 and stored in the HL register.

Here, the initial value of 2400 is the value "2400" corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone that ends the advantageous zone. Note that in this example, the condition for ending the advantageous zone is that the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, but the condition for ending the advantageous zone is not limited to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeding 2400. For example, the condition for ending the advantageous zone can be set to a predetermined value, such as the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeding 4800. If the condition for ending the advantageous zone is that the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 4800, the initial value is set to 4800.

In addition, in this example, the advantageous zone difference number counter is 2 bytes, but it can also be 3 bytes. If the advantageous zone difference number counter is 3 bytes and the condition for ending the advantageous zone is when the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, the initial value is set to 2400.

The effect of setting the initial value to "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone that is set as the end condition of the advantageous zone" will be described later.

In addition, the initial value of the advantageous zone difference counter may be 2415 when the size of the memory area for the advantageous zone difference counter is 2 bytes. In this case, the end process of the advantageous zone will be executed when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter becomes less than 15.

When configured in this way, the value of the favorable zone difference counter will not exceed the lower limit when the favorable zone ends (the favorable zone ends when the difference in the favorable zone exceeds 2400, so the minimum value of the favorable zone difference counter is 1 since the initial value can only be subtracted up to a maximum of 2414, which is 2400-1 (1 coin bet) + 15 (15 coins paid out)), so it is possible to prevent the carry flag and zero flag from being raised when the difference in the favorable zone exceeds 2400 and the favorable zone ends.

For this reason, in the update process of the favorable zone difference counter, the zero flag is set only when the value of the favorable zone difference counter changes from 65535 to 0, and the carry flag is set only when the upper limit of the favorable zone difference counter is exceeded (when the result of adding the difference number of the game to the value of the favorable zone difference counter exceeds 65535). Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the upper limit of the favorable zone difference counter has been exceeded simply by checking the carry flag, and therefore a specific value (for example, "65535", "65534", etc.) can be stored in the favorable zone difference counter when the carry flag = 1 in the update process of the favorable zone difference counter.

This allows for more accurate decision-making using the carry flag, which can reduce program size and improve program readability.

"Before decrement of favorable zone clear counter = 1?" determines whether the favorable zone clear counter was 1 before "favorable zone clear counter -1" was performed. For example, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter in "favorable zone clear counter -1" is that the favorable zone clear counter has a value of 0 (specifically, if the zero flag is 1), the answer is YES. On the other hand, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter in "favorable zone clear counter -1" is that the value of the favorable zone clear counter is not 0 (specifically, if the zero flag is 0), the answer is NO.

In addition, after "Before advantageous zone clear counter subtraction = 1?" and before "When replay is activated?", a process is performed to store the value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter in a specified register (e.g. HL register).

In "Replay Activated?", if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game based on a replay), the answer is YES. On the other hand, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is not a game based on a replay), the answer is NO.

"IN number < OUT number?" determines whether the OUT number is greater than the IN number.

For example, as a result of this game,
a) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 0, the answer is NO.
a) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 1, the answer is NO.
c) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 3, the answer is NO.
d) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the answer is YES.

Specifically, the IN number minus the OUT number is calculated, and the result of this calculation is stored in a specified register (for example, the A register). Furthermore, if there is a carry over as a result of the IN number minus the OUT number (if the carry flag is 1), the result is judged as YES, and if there is no carry over (if the carry flag is 0), the result is judged as NO. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is greater than the OUT number, the carry flag is 0 and the result is judged as YES. Furthermore, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is less than the OUT number, the carry flag is 1 and the result is judged as NO.

To give a specific example, the result of this game:
a) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 0, then the A register will be 3 and the carry flag will be 0.
a) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 1, the A register is 2 and the carry flag is 0.
c) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 3, the A register is 0 and the carry flag is 0.
d) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, then the A register will have a value of 249 and the carry flag will have a value of 1.

Here, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) as a result of the previous game, the number of bets for the current game is automatically bet (for example, "3" is set by the automatic bet), and if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed (on an active line) as a result of the current game, the number of bets will be treated as the number of INs for the current game, even if it was the number of bets set by the automatic bet.

On the other hand, for the IN number and OUT number, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the determination of "IN number < OUT number?" is not made. In other words, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the number of bets for the current game is not treated as the IN number. Similarly, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the number of awards (or automatic bets) for the current game is not treated as the OUT number.

Note that in "IN number < OUT number?", we calculated the IN number - the OUT number, but we could also determine it by OUT number - IN number. In other words, it would be sufficient if we could use the IN number and the OUT number to calculate the difference in the number of game media for the current game.

In "advantageous section difference number counter addition", the result of the calculation "IN number < OUT number?" (IN number - OUT number) is added to the value of the advantageous section difference number counter stored in a specified register (for example, HL register). If a carry occurs due to "advantageous section difference number counter addition", the carry flag becomes 1.
For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (the value of the HL register) is 65534,
A) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 0, the HL register is 1 and the carry flag is 1. Note that 65534 + 3 = 65537, but a 2-byte pair register (HL register) cannot store a value greater than 65535. Therefore, a carry occurs and becomes 1.
a) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 1, the HL register is 0 and the carry flag is 1. Note that 65534 + 2 = 65536, but a 2-byte pair register (HL register) cannot store a value greater than 65535. Therefore, a carry occurs and the value becomes 0.
c) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 3, the HL register value is 65534 and the carry flag value is 0.

In "Favourable section difference number counter > upper limit value?", "Favourable section difference number counter addition" determines whether a carry has occurred. If a carry has occurred, it is judged as YES, and if a carry has not occurred, it is judged as NO. In the above example, when the value stored in the favourable section difference number counter is 65534, it is judged as YES if a) IN number = 3 and OUT number = 0. Also in the above example, when the value stored in the favourable section difference number counter is 65534, it is judged as YES if b) IN number = 3 and OUT number = 1. Similarly, in the above example, when the value stored in the favourable section difference number counter is 65534, it is judged as NO if c) IN number = 3 and OUT number = 3.

If "Favourable section difference counter > upper limit?" is YES, the carry flag is 1, so a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. For example, the specified calculation is the exclusive OR of the value in the A register and the value in the A register. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. Note that although the exclusive OR of the value in the A register and the value in the A register is given as an example of the specified calculation, any calculation can be used as long as it sets the carry flag to 0.

In "Set favorable section difference counter upper limit value", if a carry occurs due to "Add favorable section difference counter", a predetermined upper limit value (65535) is stored in the register that stores the calculation result (HL register in this embodiment). In the above example, in a situation where the value stored in the favorable section difference counter is 65534, if a) the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 0, then "Subtract favorable section difference counter" causes the HL register to = 1. In such a case, "Set favorable section difference counter upper limit value" stores 65535 in the HL register.

In other words, if a carry occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, it is possible to calculate the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone as accurately as possible by storing the upper limit value of 65535 in the HL register. Note that even if "Set upper limit value of advantageous zone difference number counter" is executed, the advantageous zone continues, and it is possible to provide the player with play in the advantageous zone. In other words, even in play after "Set upper limit value of advantageous zone difference number counter" is executed, the processing in FIG. 54 is executed as long as the advantageous zone continues.

Note that, although FIG. 54 includes the process of "Set upper limit value of favorable section difference counter", the process of "Set upper limit value of favorable section difference counter" may not be included. Specifically, when the result of "Favorable section difference counter>upper limit value" is determined to be YES, the value stored in the favorable section difference counter of the previous game may be set. For example, when the value stored in the favorable section difference counter is 65534 and the number of INs and the number of OUTs of the game are a) IN number=3 and OUT number=0, the value stored in the favorable section difference counter may be set to 65534 (the same value as the value of the favorable section difference counter of the previous game). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent abnormal values (values with digits dropped) from being stored in the "favorable section difference counter". In addition, since the process corresponding to "Set upper limit value of favorable section difference counter" is eliminated, the program capacity can be reduced.

In other words, if a carry occurs due to "advantageous zone difference number counter addition," the advantageous zone difference number counter is not updated using the value at the time of the carry, thereby preventing abnormal values from being entered as the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter. In other words, even if the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone becomes a negative value, the advantageous zone can be ended as accurately as possible using the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone.

In addition, although 65,535 (the maximum value that can be stored in the favorable zone difference number counter) has been described as an example of the upper limit, this is not limited to this. For example, it may be a value such as 12,400, which is a numerical value less than the maximum value that can be stored in the favorable zone difference number counter. If 12,400 is adopted as the upper limit, the favorable zone difference number counter can store a value up to the equivalent of -10,000 as the difference number of gaming media in the favorable zone.

In "Advantageous section difference counter subtraction," the complement of the result of the calculation "IN number < OUT number?" (IN number - OUT number) (the value stored in the A register) is calculated and stored in the A register. The calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is then subtracted from the HL register.

Note that the complement in "advantageous section difference counter subtraction" refers to the smallest number that carries beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived by subtracting the value of the 0-A register, or by a single instruction (NEG instruction) for deriving the complement.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (the value of the HL register) is 2,
d) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register is 249, but the "advantageous section difference counter subtraction" first derives 7, which is the complement of 249. Next, 2-7 is calculated, and 65531 is stored in the HL register. Note that since 2-7 is less than 0 (because there is a carry), the carry flag is 1.

In addition, for example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (the value of the HL register) is 10,
d) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register is 249, but the "advantageous section difference counter addition" first derives 7, which is the complement of 249. Next, 10-7 is calculated, and 3 is stored in the HL register. Note that 10-7 does not fall below 0 (there is no borrow), so the carry flag is 0.

In "save favorable zone difference counter", the value stored in the HL register is stored in the favorable zone difference counter. In other words, this is a process that updates the favorable zone difference counter.

For example, if 2400 is stored in the HL register by "Set favorable zone difference counter initial value," then 2400 is stored in the favorable zone difference counter by "Save favorable zone difference counter."

For example, if "Replay Activation" is YES, the value of the favorable zone difference counter from the previous play is stored in the HL register, so "Save favorable zone difference counter" stores the same value as the favorable zone difference counter from the previous play in the favorable zone difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Is favorable zone difference counter > upper limit?" is NO, the value obtained by adding the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game (IN number - OUT number) from the value of the favorable zone difference counter for the previous game is stored in the HL register, so "save favorable zone difference counter" stores the value obtained by adding the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game from the value of the favorable zone difference counter for the previous game in the favorable zone difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Is favorable zone difference counter > upper limit?" is YES, the upper limit (65535) is stored in the HL register, so the upper limit (65535) is stored in the favorable zone difference counter by "Save favorable zone difference counter."

For example, after "subtracting favorable zone difference number counter", the value obtained by subtracting the difference number of gaming media for the current game (OUT number - IN number) from the value of the favorable zone difference number counter for the previous game is stored in the HL register, so by "saving favorable zone difference number counter", the value obtained by subtracting the difference number of gaming media for the current game from the value of the favorable zone difference number counter for the previous game is stored in the favorable zone difference number counter.

In "Advantageous zone difference number > 2400?", it is determined whether the difference number of game media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400. Specifically, it is determined whether the carry flag is 1. If the carry flag is 1, it is determined as YES, and if the carry flag is not 1 (if the carry flag is 0), it is determined as NO. Note that the carry flag is 1 when there is a carry down due to "advantageous zone difference number counter subtraction". On the other hand, if there is a carry up due to "advantageous zone difference number counter addition", the carry flag becomes 1 once, but then a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0, so "Advantageous zone difference number > 2400?" can be determined as NO.

In other words, in "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?", it is possible to determine whether the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400 depending on whether the carry flag is 1. Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced compared to when the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone is directly compared to a constant (2400).

In this way, in "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?", whether the carry flag is 1 determines whether the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, so the "Advantageous Zone Difference Number Counter Initial Value Set" stores 2400 as the initial value.

As mentioned above, this 2400 is a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone that ends the favorable zone. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone that ends the favorable zone exceeds 2400, it will fall below 0, so the carry flag will become 1. In other words, "Favorable zone difference number > 2400?" is a process of determining whether the value of the favorable zone difference number counter is less than 0.

Also, as mentioned above, if the initial value of the favorable zone difference counter is set to "2415", "favorable zone difference number > 2400?" is a process of determining whether the value of the favorable zone difference counter is less than 15.

In addition, by storing 2400 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -63135 as the difference in gaming media, with the start of the favorable zone as the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 2400, a situation in which the value of the favorable zone difference counter is 30000 means that with the start of the favorable zone as the starting point (0), the difference is -27600.

As described above, by storing 2400 as the initial value, which is "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone that is set as the end condition of the advantageous zone," it is possible to reduce the program capacity for determining whether the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone has exceeded 2400. Also, by storing 2400 as the initial value, it is possible to store values up to the equivalent of -63135 as the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone. Note that while an example is given of storing 2400 as the initial value, a value other than 2400 (for example, 2401) can be used as the initial value as long as it has the same effect.

In "RWM initialization", all parameters that affect the performance related to the instruction function are updated to 0, and the advantageous zone clear counter management process is terminated. Parameters that affect the performance related to the instruction function include the number of AT games, the game status related to the AT, the advantageous zone clear counter, the advantageous zone difference counter, etc. Then, by updating the advantageous zone type to 0, the next game will be a game in a normal zone that is not an advantageous zone. In the game in the advantageous zone, if "RWM initialization" is not executed, the next game will be a game in the advantageous zone (the advantageous zone does not end).

Note that in "IN number < OUT number?", the OUT number is subtracted from the IN number, but it may be configured to subtract the IN number from the OUT number. In the case where the IN number is subtracted from the OUT number, if "IN number < OUT number?" is judged as NO (if a borrow occurs in the A register), then in "advantageous section difference number counter addition", the complement is calculated by a predetermined calculation and stored in the A register (the difference number of the gaming medium in the current game), and then the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter) is added to the value stored in the A register (the difference number of the gaming medium in the current game). In other words, if "IN number < OUT number?" is judged as YES, the absolute value of the difference number of the gaming medium in the current game is added to the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter.

Similarly, if the configuration is such that the IN number is subtracted from the OUT number when "IN number < OUT number?" is answered with YES (when no carryover occurs in the A register), then in the "favourable section difference number counter subtraction", the value stored in the A register (the difference number of the gaming media in the current game) can be subtracted from the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the favourable section difference number counter) without calculating the complement. In other words, if "IN number < OUT number?" is answered with NO, then the absolute value of the difference number of the gaming media in the current game can be subtracted from the value stored in the favourable section difference number counter.

As described above, specific processing for ending the advantageous period with the difference in the number of gaming media has been explained using Figures 53 and 54, but the present invention is not limited to these. In other words, it is sufficient if the advantageous period can end with the difference in the number of gaming media.

In addition, in Figures 53 and 54, one of the conditions for ending the advantageous zone is that the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number, but the condition for ending the advantageous zone does not have to be that the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number. In that case, it is not necessary to provide the advantageous zone clear counter in Figures 53 and 54.

If a favorable zone clear counter is not provided, the process corresponding to "favorable zone clear counter -1" in Figures 53 and 54, the process corresponding to "before favorable zone clear counter subtraction = 0?", and the process corresponding to "save favorable zone clear counter initial value" may not be provided.

<Regarding the relationship between the initialization process accompanying the operation of the setting change device and the advantageous zone difference counter>
In the above-mentioned advantageous zone difference counter, the value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is configured to be cleared by RWM clearing at the end of the advantageous zone or by power-on with a setting change (RWM clearing at the time of setting change), but it may be configured to be cleared only by RWM clearing at the end of the advantageous zone (not by power-on with a setting change). Note that setting changes include not only changing to another setting value (e.g., changing from setting value 1 to setting value 6), but also changing to the same setting value (e.g., changing from setting value 1 to setting value 1).

When configured in this way, if the power is turned on and a setting change is made while the advantageous zone difference counter is set to a predetermined value, play will begin in the normal zone. After that, in order to prevent the advantageous zone difference counter from being updated in the normal zone, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter when moving to the advantageous zone will be the predetermined value before the setting change.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that limits gambling to a certain range while improving playability compared to when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is cleared by clearing the RWM, which involves turning on the power and changing the settings.

For example, if a game parlor closes and play ends when the difference in the number of gaming media in a specific advantageous zone is -3000, even if the settings are changed the next day, play can be resumed in the advantageous zone after the setting change when the difference in the number of gaming media is -3000. This means that a maximum of approximately 5400 gaming media can be obtained in one advantageous zone, starting from the start of the advantageous zone after the setting change.

In addition, by clearing the value of the advantageous zone difference counter at the gaming establishment, it is possible to prevent the user from suffering significant losses when the performance related to the instruction function changes based on the advantageous zone difference counter.

For example, if the performance related to the instruction function is improved when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is below the initial value, such as the probability of winning the AT or the rate of granting bonuses such as an AT extension, compared to when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is above the initial value, even if business ends with the value of the advantageous zone difference counter being below the initial value and the settings are changed afterwards, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will not be cleared even when business begins the next day, so play can begin in a situation where the performance related to the instruction function has been improved.

The following explains the relationship between the initialization process that accompanies the operation of the setting change device and the advantageous zone difference counter.

<<Case 1>>
When the initialization process is performed due to a setting change, the favorable zone difference counter is not initialized but the favorable zone type is initialized.

When the game is in an advantageous zone (advantageous zone type = 1) and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value (predetermined value ≠ 0), the power is cut off, the setting change key is turned ON when no power is being supplied, and when the power is turned on, the setting change device is activated and an initialization process associated with the operation of the setting change device is executed. In this initialization process, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is not initialized, but the advantageous zone is initialized (advantageous zone type = 0). In other words, when the initialization process is executed and the operation of the setting change device is then terminated, the game state is the normal zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is the predetermined value.

The first game after the setting change device is activated will be played in the normal zone, and if a predetermined number (e.g., 3) is bet at the start of the first game, and the favorable zone transition process determines not to transition to the favorable zone for the next game, and no payout is made as a result of the first game, the next game will also be played in the normal zone, and the value of the favorable zone difference counter will be the predetermined value (the value of the favorable zone difference counter is not updated).

In addition, the first game after the setting change device is activated will be played in the normal zone, and even if a predetermined number of bets is placed at the start of the first game, and the favorable zone transition process determines not to transition to the favorable zone for the next game, and a specific number (e.g., 10) is paid out as a result of the first game, the next game will be played in the normal zone, and the value of the favorable zone difference counter will be the predetermined value.

In addition, the first game after the operation of the setting change device is finished will be played in the normal zone, and if a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of the first game, and the advantageous zone transition process determines that the next game will transition to an advantageous zone, and if no payout is made as a result of the first game, the next game will be played in the advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be a predetermined value.

In addition, the first game after the operation of the setting change device is finished will be played in the normal zone, and if a predetermined number of bets is placed at the start of the first game, and the advantageous zone transition process determines that the next game will transition to an advantageous zone, and if a specific number of payouts is made as a result of the first game, the next game will be in the advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be a predetermined value.

In other words, the process of updating the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is not executed during play in the normal zone.

Then, in the advantageous zone clear counter management process at the end of a game when the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter is a predetermined value, the game is in an advantageous zone, a predetermined number of bets have been placed at the start of the game, and no payout has been made as a result of the game, the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter can be updated (value of the advantageous zone difference number counter = predetermined value - 3).

In addition, when the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter is a predetermined value, the game is in an advantageous zone, a predetermined number of bets are made at the start of the game, and a specific number of payouts is made as a result of the game, the advantageous zone clear counter management process at the end of the game makes it possible to update the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter (value of advantageous zone difference number counter = predetermined value + 10 - 3).

In other words, when playing after a transition to a favorable zone, the process of updating the value of the favorable zone difference counter is executed.

In case 1, when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, it is an advantageous zone, and the main gaming state is AT, when the initialization process is executed in conjunction with the operation of the setting change device, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, it is a normal zone, and the main gaming state is a state corresponding to the normal zone (a state that is not AT) as the state after initialization. Note that the RT state may be initialized (transitioned to non-RT) or may be maintained. This is because whether the RT state is initialized or maintained by changing the settings can be determined in the specifications of each gaming machine.

With this configuration, even if the gaming establishment closes for the day during the AT and the settings are changed the next day, the AT state can be initialized, preventing the user from being given a significant advantage when the establishment reopens.

In addition, in case 1, in order to initialize the value of the favorable zone difference counter, initialization processing is performed due to an RWM abnormality, and initialization processing is performed by favorable zone clear counter management processing at the end of the favorable zone. Initialization processing due to an RWM abnormality refers to initialization processing that is executed when an irreversible error occurs and the setting change device is then activated. Note that the initialization range is different between the initialization processing associated with the operation of the setting change device when an irreversible error occurs and the initialization processing associated with the operation of the setting change device when no irreversible error occurs. Initialization processing by favorable zone clear counter management processing refers to initialization processing when the value of the favorable zone difference counter reaches the upper limit value (so-called ending) or initialization processing when any favorable zone end condition is met.

In addition, if the initialization conditions for the value of the favorable zone difference counter in case 1 are limited to the initialization process due to an RWM abnormality and the initialization process due to the favorable zone clear counter management process at the end of the favorable zone, it will not be possible to initialize the value of the favorable zone difference counter under any other condition. For example, since the value of the favorable zone difference counter cannot be initialized arbitrarily in a situation where the value of the favorable zone difference counter is below the initial value (a situation where the user's difference number is negative), it is possible to prevent the possibility of the user suffering significant losses.

In addition, as another optional condition for initializing the value of the favorable zone difference counter, the favorable zone difference counter may be initialized by operating the favorable zone difference counter clear switch.

In this case, the operation of the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch includes turning on the power while pressing the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch when the power is off, pressing the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch once or pressing and holding the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch when the power source is shared, etc. The initialization scope of the initialization process based on the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch may be either the advantageous zone difference counter only, or the advantageous zone difference counter and the advantageous zone type.

If the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be initialized under any other conditions, even if there is a malfunction based on the advantageous zone difference counter, the gaming facility can easily resolve the malfunction.

In addition, the operation of the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch may be disabled or enabled when the opening of the front door is detected.

In addition, when the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch is pressed during play, operation of other main switches (start switch, stop switch, bet switch, settlement switch, reset switch, etc.) may be enabled or disabled.

In addition, if the operation of the advantageous section difference counter clear switch is specified as turning on the power while pressing the advantageous section difference counter clear switch in a power-off state, there is a possibility that a situation may arise in which the advantageous section difference counter clear switch is pressed and the setting key switch is ON in a power-off state.

In this case, if the advantageous section difference counter and advantageous section type are initialized and the setting change mode is started, if the advantageous section difference counter and advantageous section type are initialized and the setting change mode is not started, the advantageous section difference counter is initialized and the advantageous section type is not initialized, if the setting change mode is started, the advantageous section difference counter is initialized and the advantageous section type is not initialized, if the setting change mode is not started, the advantageous section difference counter is not initialized and the advantageous section type is initialized, if the setting change mode is started, the advantageous section difference counter is not initialized and the advantageous section type is initialized, and if the setting change mode is started, the advantageous section difference counter is not initialized and the advantageous section type is initialized, and the setting change mode is not started.

In addition, in case 1, since the gaming establishment will not be able to grasp the value of the advantageous zone difference counter, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter may be indicated by a lamp or the like in a location that is not normally visible to the user (for example, behind the front door or inside the cabinet).

For example, when the red LED is off, the value of the favorable zone difference counter is equal to or greater than the initial value; when the red LED flashes at 5-second intervals, the value of the favorable zone difference counter is less than the initial value and greater than or equal to -5000; when the red LED flashes at 3-second intervals, the value of the favorable zone difference counter is less than the initial value -5000 and greater than or equal to -30000; and when the red LED is on, the value of the favorable zone difference counter is at the lower limit (or the upper limit if the favorable zone difference counter is a system that adds the bet amount).

For example, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter may be displayed on a five-digit display (e.g., a display with five seven-segment displays arranged side by side).

In addition, as a method for allowing the gaming establishment to know the value of the advantageous zone difference counter, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter, or the number of coins inserted (number of bets) and the number of coins paid out per game in the advantageous zone may be output to an external terminal so that they can be checked on the hall computer.

In addition, in case 1, since the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can easily become the lower limit, in order to determine whether the lower limit was reached by a normal route or due to fraudulent activity, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the current game are stored for each game, and when the difference between the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the current game is found to be within a certain value (for example, 14), it is determined to be normal and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is updated, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the current game is saved as the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game. When the difference between the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the current game is found to be outside the certain value (for example, 14), it is determined to be abnormal and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is not updated, and the game is stopped by error processing, or the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is updated but an error command is sent to the sub-control means, and the sub-control means issues an error notification.

With this configuration, even if the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is fraudulently set to the lower limit, the gaming facility can be notified.

In addition, in case 1, the favorable zone difference counter is not updated during the normal zone, but the favorable zone difference counter may be updated during the normal zone. In such a case, the favorable zone clear counter management process is made updateable during the normal zone, and the bet number is subtracted and the payout number is added to the value of the favorable zone difference counter according to the progress of the game in the normal zone. In this modified example, it is possible that the upper limit value of the favorable zone difference counter is reached during the normal zone. When the upper limit value of the favorable zone difference counter is reached during the normal zone, the initialization process may be executed to initialize the favorable zone difference counter and the favorable zone type, or the favorable zone difference counter may be initialized but the favorable zone type may not be initialized (because the favorable zone type is the initial value during the normal zone). In other words, the initialization process (initialization range) when the upper limit value of the favorable zone difference counter during the favorable zone is reached and the initialization process (initialization range) when the upper limit value of the favorable zone difference counter during the normal zone is reached may be the same process or different processes.

<<Case 2>>
When both the favorable zone difference counter and the favorable zone type are not initialized during the initialization process due to a setting change.

When the game is in an advantageous zone (advantageous zone type = 1) and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value (predetermined value ≠ 0), the power is cut off, the setting change key is turned ON when no power is being supplied, and when the power is turned on, the setting change device is activated and an initialization process associated with the operation of the setting change device is executed. In this initialization process, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter and the advantageous zone type are not initialized (advantageous zone type = 1 remains). In other words, when the initialization process is executed and the operation of the setting change device is then terminated, the game state is in an advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is the predetermined value.

The first game after the setting change device is activated will be played in the advantageous zone, and if a predetermined number (e.g., 3) is bet at the start of the first game, and no payout is made as a result of the first game, and the advantageous zone clear counter supervision process determines not to transition to the normal zone for the next game, the next game will also be in the advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated (predetermined value - 3).

In addition, the first game after the setting change device is activated will be played in the advantageous zone, and if a predetermined number of bets is placed at the start of the first game, and a specific number (e.g., 10) is paid out as a result of the first game, and even if the advantageous zone clear counter supervision process determines not to transition to the normal zone for the next game, the next game will be in the advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated (predetermined value + 10 - 3).

In addition, the first game after the setting change device is activated will be played in the advantageous zone, and if a specified number of bets are placed at the start of the first game, and no payout is made as a result of the first game, and the advantageous zone clear counter supervision process determines that the next game will be played in the normal zone (initialization process is executed in the advantageous zone clear counter supervision process), the next game will be played in the normal zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be set to its initial value.

In addition, the first game after the setting change device is activated will be played in the advantageous zone, and if a specified number of bets is placed at the start of the first game, and a specific number of payouts is made as a result of the first game, and if the advantageous zone clear counter supervision process determines that the next game will be played in the normal zone (initialization process is executed in the advantageous zone clear counter supervision process), the next game will be in the normal zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be set to its initial value.

In other words, even after the initialization process when a setting change is performed in a favorable zone, the zone is still favorable, and the process of updating the value of the favorable zone difference counter is executed.

If the setting change device is activated and the initialization process is executed in a normal zone situation, the first game after the operation of the setting change device ends will be a game in the normal zone, and if a predetermined number of bets is placed at the start of that first game, the advantageous zone transition process determines that there will be no transition to the advantageous zone for the next game, and no payout is made as a result of that first game, the next game will also be in the normal zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be the initial value (the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is not updated).

In addition, if the setting change device is activated and the initialization process is executed in a normal zone situation, the first game after the operation of the setting change device ends will be a game in the normal zone, and if a predetermined number of bets is placed at the start of that first game, the advantageous zone transition process determines that there will be no transition to the advantageous zone for the next game, and a specific number of payouts is made as a result of that first game, the next game will also be in the normal zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be the initial value (the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is not updated).

In addition, if the setting change device is operated in a normal zone and the initialization process is executed, the first game after the operation of the setting change device ends will be a game in the normal zone, and if a predetermined number of bets is placed at the start of the first game, and the advantageous zone transition process determines that the next game will transition to an advantageous zone, and no payout is made as a result of the first game, the next game will be in an advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be set to its initial value (the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is not updated).

In addition, if the setting change device is operated in a normal zone and the initialization process is executed, the first game after the operation of the setting change device ends will be a game in the normal zone, and if a predetermined number of bets is placed at the start of the first game, and the advantageous zone transition process determines that the next game will transition to an advantageous zone, and a specific number of payouts is made as a result of the first game, the next game will be in an advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be set to its initial value (the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is not updated).

In other words, if the setting change device is activated during the normal section and the initialization process is performed, play will begin from the normal section.

In case 2, when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, it is an advantageous zone, and the main gaming state is AT, when the initialization process is executed in conjunction with the operation of the setting change device, the state after initialization is that the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, it is an advantageous zone, and the main gaming state is another gaming state different from AT. For example, the other gaming state may be a gaming state with a high stay rate by design (for example, a normal advantageous zone state). Note that the RT state may be initialized (transitioned to non-RT) or maintained. This is because whether the RT state is initialized or maintained by changing the settings can be determined by the specifications of each gaming machine.

In addition, when the main game state before the setting change was during AT, the main game state after the setting change may be a predefined main game state (for example, the normal state of the advantageous zone).

In addition, even if the main gaming state before the setting change was a gaming state different from the AT, the main gaming state after the setting change may be a predefined main gaming state.

With this configuration, even if the gaming establishment closes for the day during the AT and the settings are changed the next day, the AT state can be initialized, preventing the user from being given a significant advantage when the establishment reopens.

In addition, in case 2, when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, the advantageous zone is present, and the main gaming state is AT, when an initialization process is executed in conjunction with the operation of the setting change device, the state after initialization may be such that the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, the advantageous zone is present, and the main gaming state is AT.

This configuration eliminates the need to change the main game state during the initialization process associated with the operation of the setting change device, which reduces program size and improves program readability.

In addition, in order to allow game establishments to initialize the main game state, a separate main game state initialization switch may be provided to enable initialization of the main game state. Examples of the main game state initialization switch include turning on the power while pressing the advantageous zone difference number counter clear switch in a power-off situation, or pressing the advantageous zone difference number counter clear switch once or holding it down in a situation where the power source is shared. Initialization of the main game state may be the main game state selected immediately after transitioning to the normal zone or advantageous zone, or a pre-determined game state.

In addition, in case 2, the value of the favorable zone difference counter is initialized by an initialization process due to an RWM abnormality, and by an initialization process by favorable zone clear counter management process at the end of the favorable zone. The initialization process by the favorable zone clear counter management process refers to the initialization process when the value of the favorable zone difference counter reaches the upper limit value (so-called ending), or the initialization process when any favorable zone end condition is met.

In addition, if the initialization conditions for the value of the favorable zone difference counter in case 2 are limited to the initialization process due to an RWM abnormality and the initialization process due to the favorable zone clear counter management process at the end of the favorable zone, it will not be possible to initialize the value of the favorable zone difference counter under any other condition. For example, since the value of the favorable zone difference counter cannot be initialized arbitrarily in a situation where the value of the favorable zone difference counter is below the initial value (a situation where the user's difference number is negative), it is possible to prevent the possibility of the user suffering significant losses.

In addition, as another optional condition for initializing the value of the favorable zone difference counter, the favorable zone difference counter may be initialized by operating the favorable zone difference counter clear switch.

In this case, the operation of the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch includes turning on the power while pressing the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch when the power is off, pressing the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch once or pressing and holding the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch when the power source is shared, etc. The initialization scope of the initialization process based on the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch may be either the advantageous zone difference counter only, or the advantageous zone difference counter and the advantageous zone type.

If the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be initialized under any other conditions, even if there is a malfunction based on the advantageous zone difference counter, the gaming facility can easily resolve the malfunction.

In addition, the operation of the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch may be disabled or enabled when the opening of the front door is detected.

In addition, when the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch is pressed during play, operation of other main switches (start switch, stop switch, bet switch, settlement switch, reset switch, etc.) may be enabled or disabled.

In addition, if the operation of the advantageous section difference counter clear switch is specified as turning on the power while pressing the advantageous section difference counter clear switch in a power-off state, there is a possibility that a situation may arise in which the advantageous section difference counter clear switch is pressed and the setting key switch is ON in a power-off state.

In this case, if the advantageous zone difference counter and advantageous zone type are initialized and the setting change mode is started, if the advantageous zone difference counter and advantageous zone type are initialized and the setting change mode is not started, the advantageous zone difference counter is initialized and the advantageous zone type is not initialized, if the setting change mode is started, the advantageous zone difference counter is initialized and the advantageous zone type is not initialized, if the setting change mode is not started, the advantageous zone difference counter is not initialized and the advantageous zone type is initialized, if the setting change mode is started, the advantageous zone difference counter is not initialized and the advantageous zone type is initialized, and if the setting change mode is started, the advantageous zone difference counter is not initialized and the advantageous zone type is initialized, and the setting change mode is not started.

In addition, in case 2, since the gaming establishment will not be able to grasp the value of the advantageous zone difference counter, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter may be indicated by a lamp or the like in a location that is not normally visible to the user (for example, behind the front door or inside the cabinet).

For example, when the red LED is off, the value of the favorable zone difference counter is equal to or greater than the initial value; when the red LED flashes at 5-second intervals, the value of the favorable zone difference counter is less than the initial value and greater than or equal to -5000; when the red LED flashes at 3-second intervals, the value of the favorable zone difference counter is less than the initial value -5000 and greater than or equal to -30000; and when the red LED is on, the value of the favorable zone difference counter is at the lower limit (or the upper limit if the favorable zone difference counter is a system that adds the bet amount).

For example, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter may be displayed on a five-digit display (e.g., a display with five seven-segment displays arranged side by side).

In addition, as a method for allowing the gaming establishment to know the value of the advantageous zone difference counter, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter, or the number of coins inserted (number of bets) and the number of coins paid out per game in the advantageous zone may be output to an external terminal so that they can be checked on the hall computer.

In addition, in case 2, since the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can easily become the lower limit, in order to determine whether the lower limit was reached by a normal route or due to fraudulent activity, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the current game are stored for each game, and when the difference between the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the current game is found to be within a certain value (for example, 14), it is determined to be normal and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is updated, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the current game is saved as the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game. When the difference between the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the current game is found to be outside the certain value (for example, 14), it is determined to be abnormal and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is not updated, and the game is stopped by error processing, or the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is updated but an error command is sent to the sub-control means, and the sub-control means issues an error notification.

With this configuration, even if the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is fraudulently set to the lower limit, the gaming facility can be notified.

In addition, in case 2, even if the initialization process is executed due to a setting change, the type of advantageous zone does not change, so even if the setting is changed while the zone is advantageous, the game immediately after the setting change will be played in the advantageous zone, and the process related to the instruction function can be executed based on the internal lottery result by the internal lottery means.

As a result, since processing related to the instruction function can be executed from the game immediately after the setting change, it is possible to minimize games in which processing related to the instruction function cannot be executed (games in the normal area), improving the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in case 2, the favorable zone difference counter is not updated during the normal zone, but as a variation of case 2, the favorable zone difference counter may be updated during the normal zone.

In such cases, the advantageous zone clear counter management process can be updated even during normal zones, and the number of bets is subtracted and the number of payouts is added to the value of the advantageous zone difference counter according to the progress of play in the normal zone.

Specifically, when in a normal zone, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of a game, and the advantageous zone transition process determines that there will be no transition to the advantageous zone for the next game, and if no payout is made as a result of that game, the next game will also be in the normal zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated (predetermined value - 3).

In addition, when in a normal zone, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, a predetermined number of bets are made at the start of a game, and the advantageous zone transition process determines that there will be no transition to the advantageous zone for the next game, and a specific number of payouts is made as a result of that game, the next game will also be in the normal zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated (predetermined value + 10 - 3).

In addition, when in a normal zone, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, and if a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of a game, and the advantageous zone transition process determines that the next game will transition to the advantageous zone, and no payout is made as a result of that game, the next game will be in the advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated (predetermined value -3).

In addition, when in a normal zone, the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter is a predetermined value, and if a predetermined number of bets is placed at the start of a game, and the advantageous zone transition process determines that the next game will transition to the advantageous zone, and a specific number of payouts is made as a result of that game, the next game will be in the advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter can be updated (predetermined value + 10 - 3).

With this configuration, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated regardless of whether it is in a normal zone or an advantageous zone, improving playability in the normal zone. Also, since the advantageous zone difference counter update process can be realized in a common module without determining the play zone, it is possible to compress the program size and improve the readability of the program.

In addition, in a modified version of Case 2, the initialization conditions for the favorable zone difference counter may include the initialization process due to an RWM abnormality, the initialization process due to the favorable zone clear counter management process at the end of the favorable zone, and also the transition to the favorable zone.

The initialization process when transitioning to a favorable zone is a process that can be executed when it is decided to transition to a favorable zone for the next game during the favorable zone transition process in the normal zone, and is executed before the start of the next game.

As a result, even if the value of the favorable zone difference counter exceeds the initial value during the normal zone, the value of the favorable zone difference counter can be initialized when the favorable zone transitions, so that it is possible to prevent the favorable zone from ending in a situation where the user wins less than 2,400 coins when winning the AT immediately after the favorable zone begins. Note that the initialization process when transitioning to the favorable zone does not necessarily have to be executed when transitioning to the favorable zone, and the initialization process may be executed to set the value of the favorable zone difference counter to the initial value only if the value of the favorable zone difference counter exceeds the initial value when transitioning to the favorable zone.

In addition, whether or not to execute the initialization process for any end condition (a favorable zone end condition other than reaching the favorable zone difference counter upper limit value) among the initialization processes by the favorable zone clear counter management process at the end of the favorable zone may be determined according to the situation of the favorable zone.

For example, if an advantageous zone is terminated by satisfying an arbitrary termination condition in the advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is greater than the initial value, an initialization process may be executed at the end of the advantageous zone, and if the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is equal to or less than the initial value, an initialization process may not be executed at the end of the advantageous zone.

In this case, it is advantageous for the user when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is equal to or less than the initial value, so even if the user is unable to obtain any winning balls in the advantageous zone, the winning balls can be retrieved at the next opportunity, so interest in the game can be prevented from declining when the advantageous zone ends.

For example, if an advantageous zone is ended by satisfying an arbitrary end condition in the advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is greater than the initial value, the initialization process may not be executed when the advantageous zone ends, and if the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is equal to or less than the initial value, the initialization process may be executed when the advantageous zone ends.

In this case, the possibility of winning more balls than expected can be reduced for the gaming establishment, enabling stable operation of the establishment.

In addition, in a modified version of Case 2, it is possible that the upper limit of the favorable zone difference counter is reached during the normal zone. When the upper limit of the favorable zone difference counter is reached during the normal zone, the favorable zone difference counter and the favorable zone type may be initialized by executing an initialization process, or the favorable zone difference counter may be initialized but the favorable zone type may not be initialized (because the favorable zone type is the initial value during the normal zone). In other words, the initialization process (initialization range) when the upper limit of the favorable zone difference counter is reached during the favorable zone and the initialization process (initialization range) when the upper limit of the favorable zone difference counter is reached during the normal zone may be the same process or different processes.

The modified example of case 2 can be combined with other configurations in case 2 without any problem, and is a modification to a configuration in which the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated in the normal zone of case 2. It goes without saying that for the changes, a configuration based on the modified example of case 2 can be adopted, and for other common points (for example, the configuration of the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch, etc.), the configuration of case 2 can be adopted.

<<Common to Cases 1 and 2>>
A common configuration between the above-mentioned cases 1 and 2 (including the modified examples) will be described.

The favorable zone clear counter management process is executed at the end of play (processing after all reels have stopped). For this reason, in a play zone in which the favorable zone difference counter can be updated, the value of the favorable zone difference counter is a predetermined value, and the number of bets is a predetermined number, power-off processing is executed during the period from the start of play (start switch ON) to the end of play (when all reels stop and before the favorable zone clear counter management process is executed) (so-called "during play"); if the power supply is subsequently stopped and the setting key is turned ON, power supply is resumed, and initialization processing is executed by operating the setting change device, the number of bets is initialized, the number of credits is initialized, the reels do not spin, and the state before the bet is placed is restored, and the value of the favorable zone difference counter is the predetermined value.

In other words, the timing for subtracting a predetermined number, which is the number of bets, from the advantageous zone difference counter is the advantageous zone clear counter management process at the end of a game, so if an initialization process is executed due to a setting change during a game, the number of bets used in that game is not updated.

This prevents the gaming establishment from repeatedly placing bets and changing settings to intentionally set the value of the advantageous zone difference counter below its initial value, preventing excessive gambling.

It is also possible to execute the advantageous zone clear counter management process at the start of a game. In this case, the advantageous zone clear counter management process is executed at the start of a game (start switch ON) and at the end of a game (processing after all reels have stopped). For this reason, in a game zone in which the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, and the number of bets is a predetermined number, the power-off process is executed during the period from the start of a game (start switch ON) to the end of a game (when all reels stop and before the advantageous zone clear counter management process is executed) (so-called "during a game"). If the power supply is then stopped and the setting key is turned ON, the power supply is resumed, and the initialization process is executed by operating the setting change device, the number of bets is initialized, the number of credits is initialized, the reels do not spin and return to the state before the bet was made, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is the predetermined value -3.

This allows the number of medals actually used to be subtracted from the value of the advantageous zone difference counter even if the settings are changed during play, enabling accurate updating of the advantageous zone difference counter.

In addition, when the advantageous zone clear counter management process is executed at the end of a game, it is executed after the medal payout is completed. For this reason, in a game zone where the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, and the number of bets is a predetermined number, a small winning symbol combination that pays out a specific number when all reels are stopped is displayed as stopped, and the power-off process is executed while the specific number of medals is being paid out (including while the payout number is being added to the credits), and then, in a situation where the power supply is stopped, the setting key is turned ON and the power supply is resumed, and the initialization process is executed by the operation of the setting change device, the number of bets is initialized, the number of credits is initialized, the reels do not spin and return to the state before the bet was made, the payout of medals is not resumed, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is the predetermined value.

As a result, even if an initialization process is performed due to a setting change while medals are being paid out, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the amount already paid out will not be updated, preventing the medal payout process from becoming complicated.

<<Case 3>>
When both the favorable zone difference counter and the favorable zone type are initialized during the initialization process due to a setting change.

In case 3, both the favorable zone difference counter and the favorable zone type are initialized by the initialization process by changing the settings, as in the conventional case, but the difference is that the favorable zone difference counter can also be updated in normal zones.

Specifically, when in a normal zone, the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter is a predetermined value, a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of a game, and the advantageous zone transition process determines that there will be no transition to the advantageous zone for the next game, and if no payout is made as a result of that game, the next game will also be in the normal zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter can be updated (value of advantageous zone difference number counter = predetermined value - 3).

In addition, when in a normal zone, the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter is a predetermined value, a predetermined number of bets are made at the start of a game, and the advantageous zone transition process determines that there will be no transition to the advantageous zone for the next game, and a specific number of payouts is made as a result of that game, the next game will also be in the normal zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter can be updated (value of advantageous zone difference number counter = predetermined value + 10 - 3).

In addition, when in a normal zone, the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter is a predetermined value, a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of a game, and the advantageous zone transition process determines that the next game will transition to the advantageous zone, and if no payout is made as a result of that game, the next game will be in the advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter can be updated (value of advantageous zone difference number counter = predetermined value - 3).

In addition, when in a normal zone, the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter is a predetermined value, and when a predetermined number of bets is placed at the start of a game, and the advantageous zone transition process determines that the game will transition to an advantageous zone for the next game, and a specific number of payouts is made as a result of that game, the next game will be in an advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter can be updated (value of advantageous zone difference number counter = predetermined value + 10 - 3).

With this configuration, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated regardless of whether it is in a normal zone or an advantageous zone, improving playability in the normal zone. Also, since the advantageous zone difference counter update process can be realized in a common module without determining the play zone, it is possible to compress the program size and improve the readability of the program.

In addition, when the player is in a favorable zone, if the value of the favorable zone difference counter is a predetermined value, a predetermined number of bets are made at the start of play, and no payout is made as a result of the play, the value of the favorable zone difference counter can be updated in the favorable zone clear counter management process at the end of play (value of the favorable zone difference counter = predetermined value - 3).

In addition, in a situation where the game is in a favorable zone, the value of the favorable zone difference counter is a predetermined value, a predetermined number of bets are made at the start of the game, and a specific number of payouts is made as a result of the game, in the favorable zone clear counter management process at the end of the game, the value of the favorable zone difference counter can be updated (value of the favorable zone difference counter = predetermined value + 10 - 3).

In other words, when playing after a transition to a favorable zone, the process of updating the value of the favorable zone difference counter is executed.

In case 3, when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, it is an advantageous zone, and the main gaming state is AT, when the initialization process is executed in conjunction with the operation of the setting change device, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is the initial value, it is a normal zone, and the main gaming state is a state corresponding to the normal zone (a state that is not AT) as the state after initialization. Note that the RT state may be initialized (transitioned to non-RT) or may be maintained. This is because whether the RT state is initialized or maintained by changing the settings can be determined in the specifications of each gaming machine.

With this configuration, even if the gaming establishment closes for the day during the AT and the settings are changed the next day, the AT state can be initialized, preventing the user from being given a significant advantage when the establishment reopens.

In addition, in case 3, in order to initialize the value of the favorable zone difference counter, in addition to the initialization process accompanying the operation of the setting change device, initialization process due to an RWM abnormality and initialization process by favorable zone clear counter management process at the end of the favorable zone are performed. Initialization process by favorable zone clear counter management process refers to initialization process when the value of the favorable zone difference counter reaches the upper limit value (so-called ending) and initialization process when any favorable zone end condition is met.

In addition, as another optional condition for initializing the value of the favorable zone difference counter, the favorable zone difference counter may be initialized by operating the favorable zone difference counter clear switch.

In this case, the operation of the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch includes turning on the power while pressing the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch when the power is off, pressing the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch once or pressing and holding it when the power source is shared, etc. The initialization scope of the initialization process based on the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch may be either the advantageous zone difference counter only, or the advantageous zone difference counter and the advantageous zone type.

If the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be initialized under any other conditions, even if there is a malfunction based on the advantageous zone difference counter, the gaming facility can easily resolve the malfunction.

In addition, the operation of the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch may be disabled or enabled when the opening of the front door is detected.

In addition, when the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch is pressed during play, operation of other main switches (start switch, stop switch, bet switch, settlement switch, reset switch, etc.) may be enabled or disabled.

In addition, if the operation of the advantageous section difference counter clear switch is specified as turning on the power while pressing the advantageous section difference counter clear switch in a power-off state, there is a possibility that a situation may arise in which the advantageous section difference counter clear switch is pressed and the setting key switch is ON in a power-off state.

In this case, it is possible that the advantageous zone difference counter and advantageous zone type are initialized and the setting change mode is activated, but it is also possible that the advantageous zone difference counter and advantageous zone type are initialized and the setting change mode is not activated.

<<Regarding the common configuration of cases 1, 2, and 3 regarding the relationship between the initialization process accompanying the operation of the setting change device and the advantageous zone difference counter>>
A common configuration for the above-mentioned cases 1, 2 (including the modified examples), and 3 will be described.

In either case, the hit difference counter for the complete function is initialized (set to an initial value) when the power is turned off or turned on.

In either case, it is possible to transmit the value of the advantageous zone difference counter to the sub-control means.

For this reason, when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a certain number lower than the initial value, a suggestive effect can be given to the user with a certain probability, or the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be displayed on a screen that can only be viewed by the gaming establishment while the settings are being checked or changed, etc.

This is expected to improve the presentation effect for users and the maintenance effect for gaming facilities.

In the initialization process accompanying the operation of the setting change device, irrecoverable errors, recoverable errors, number of bets, number of credits, and stop status can be initialized in either case of initializing the advantageous zone difference counter or not initializing it.

<Settings change process>
The setting change process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the setting change mode is started (the setting change process is executed), it is determined whether the current setting value is within the normal range, and if it is within the normal range, the current setting value is obtained, and if it is outside the normal range, "1" is saved as the setting value and the setting value "1" is obtained.

After obtaining the set value, the set value display data is saved. After saving the set value display data, the lighting control is performed by referring to the set value display data every 5 interrupts using dynamic lighting control, which is a timer interrupt process.

Then, it is determined whether the start switch 12 has changed from off to on. If it is determined that the start switch 12 has not changed from off to on, it is determined whether the setting switch has changed from off to on.

If it is determined that the setting switch has not changed from off to on, it is determined again whether the start switch 12 has changed from off to on, and if it is determined that the setting switch has changed from off to on, it is determined whether the setting value is equal to or greater than the maximum setting value (setting 6).

If the set value is not greater than or equal to the maximum value, the current set value is incremented; if the set value is greater than or equal to the maximum value, the current set value is set to the initial value (0) and then incremented further. After the set value has been incremented, the updated set value is displayed and the process returns to the step of determining whether the start switch 12 has changed from off to on.

After that, when the start switch sensor is detected and it is determined that the start switch 12 has changed from off to on, the setting value is finalized and the system waits until it is determined that the setting key switch has changed from on to off. When it is determined that the setting key switch has changed from on to off, the system saves the determined setting value in the main control RAM, turns off the setting display LED, and turns on the blocker provided in the medal selector 34 (forming a passage for medals to flow down to the hopper 44), thereby ending the setting change mode.

The setting change mode is a means for determining one of the setting values from 1 to 6 (displayed as 1 to 6 setting values). After a setting value is determined, the internal lottery table (also called the role selection table) corresponding to the determined setting value continues to be set until the setting value is next changed by the setting change means. Note that role selection tables are provided for each setting value, with different probabilities of determining the result of the internal lottery (probability of winning the role).

When the setting key used for changing the settings is rotated by the manager of the game center while the slot machine PS1 is not powered on, and the slot machine PS1 is powered on with the setting key held in a rotation position where the setting key switch signal is turned on, the setting change means turns on the setting key switch signal when the slot machine PS1 is powered on. In this embodiment, the setting key switch signal is turned on when the setting key is turned on (OFF→ON), and if the setting key was on before the power was cut off, the setting key switch signal is not detected when the power is turned on, so the setting change mode is not entered. However, the setting key switch signal may be turned on as a level on, and the setting change mode may be entered when the setting key is on when the power is turned on again, even if the setting key was on before the power was cut off.

When the setting change means determines that the setting key switch signal is on, the door open signal is on, and the setting change possible flag is on, it activates a setting change mode in which the setting value of the slot machine PS1 can be changed.

The setting change possible flag is switched on and off depending on the game status. For example, a possible mode is that the setting change possible flag is turned off during the period from when the start switch 12 is operated until the game ends, and is turned on during other periods. However, this is not the only mode, and the setting change possible flag may be turned off only when a specific bonus game has started or when a specific bonus is in progress, or the setting change possible flag may not be set so that the setting can be changed in any state.

When the setting change mode is activated, the blocker provided in the medal selector 34 is turned off, preventing the start of play by inserting a medal. The setting value data that can be changed in the setting change mode has six levels: "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". The higher the setting value, the higher the role selection table with a higher ball payout rate is set.

After the setting change mode is started, the setting display LED on the back of the front panel PS2 is lit to notify that the setting change mode is active. Then, setting value display data for displaying the set setting value data is set, and the credit number display 26 arranged in front of the front panel PS2 of the slot machine PS1 and the setting display LED (not shown) arranged on the back of the front panel PS2 of the slot machine PS1 are lit to display the setting value. When the setting value data is "1", the setting value display displays "1", when the setting value data is "2", when the setting value data is "3", when the setting value data is "4", when the setting value data is "5", when the setting value data is "6", the setting value display displays "6".

When the setting value data stored in the setting value data storage area is stored in six levels from "0" to "5", if the setting value data is "0", the setting value display will show "1", if the setting value data is "1", if the setting value data is "2", if the setting value data is "2", if the setting value data is "3", if the setting value data is "3", if the setting value data is "4", if the setting value data is "4", if the setting value data is "5", if the setting value data is "5", then the setting value display will show "6".

After starting the setting change mode, it continues to determine whether the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is on or not, and when it is determined that the start switch 12 has been operated and the sensor signal of the start switch 12 has turned on, the setting value is determined and the current setting value is displayed on the setting display LED. In other words, if it is determined that the sensor signal of the start switch 12 has turned on during the setting change mode, the setting value will not be changed even if the setting switch is operated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting switch signal is on without determining that the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is on, the setting switch rising data is cleared, and it is determined whether the current setting value is equal to or greater than the maximum setting value (setting value data "6"), and if it is determined that the current setting value is equal to or greater than the maximum setting value (setting value data "6"), the setting value data is cleared (setting value data is set to "1"), and if it is determined that the current setting value is less than the maximum setting value (setting value "1" to "5"), the current setting value is incremented. Note that, in the case where the setting value data is set to six levels from 0 to 5, the processing of the setting change mode is such that it is determined whether the current setting value is equal to or greater than the maximum setting value (setting value data "5"), and if it is determined that the current setting value is equal to or greater than the maximum setting value (setting value data "5"), the setting value data is cleared (setting value data is set to "0"), and if it is determined that the current setting value is less than the maximum setting value (setting value "0" to "4"), the current setting value is incremented.

When the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is determined to be on after the setting change mode is activated, the setting display LED may display the setting value in a manner different from that in which the setting is changeable, such as displaying "0" on the setting display LED to indicate that the setting value cannot be changed, or displaying "_X" on the setting display LED (where "X" is the set value after confirmation).

<Gameability using advantageous zones applicable to this embodiment>
In this embodiment, the prescribed number of coins required to start playing is only 3. In other words, the game cannot start with anything other than 3 coins, and even when a bonus is activated, the game can only start with 3 coins.

In this embodiment, the active line is one line consisting of the bottom left reel, the middle of the middle reel, and the bottom right reel. Hereinafter, when a symbol combination stops on an active line, it will be simply referred to as a symbol combination stopping.

In this embodiment, there are 10 types of symbols. They are called Red Seven, Blue Seven, Bar, Gold Bar, Blank, Cherry, Watermelon, Bell A, Bell B, and Replay. Note that the names and types of symbols are merely examples, and there is no problem if they are changed.

The reel arrangement of this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 11. As shown in FIG. 11, each reel has 20 symbols, and is equipped with a first reel (left reel), a second reel (middle reel), and a third reel (right reel).

The symbol combinations in this embodiment are shown in Figures 12 to 17. The "Winning symbol/Activation symbol/Pattern symbol name" item in the figure shows the name of the condition device corresponding to the symbol combination. Also, the "Specified number and game state" shows the bonus that is awarded when the symbol combination stops for each specified number. If "1 type BB" is written in the "Specified number and game state" item, it indicates that 1 type BB will be awarded when the symbol combination stops, if it is written "Replay" it indicates that replay will be awarded when the symbol combination stops, if a number is written, it indicates the number of coins to be paid out when the symbol combination stops, and if it is written "-" it indicates that the symbol combination will not stop in the corresponding game state.

In this embodiment, the bonus is equipped with a Type 1 BB, and the end condition is the payout of more than 11 game medals. This Type 1 BB is a type in which the RB operates continuously, and the RB ends when either two wins or two games are met. When the end condition of the RB is met, the RB operates automatically until the end condition of the Type 1 BB (payout of more than 11 game medals) is met.

As shown in Figure 12, there are eight types of BB symbol combinations, and the rate at which symbols related to BB symbol combinations are drawn on each reel (probability that symbols related to the symbol combination will stop) is not 100%, so to display a BB symbol combination, it is necessary to carefully press each reel.

In this embodiment, the RT transition starts from non-RT (also referred to as not inside 1st type BB), and if the 1st type BB is won during non-RT and the 1st type BB symbol combination does not stop, the next game (which may be the end of the game) transitions to RT1 (also referred to as inside 1st type BB). If the 1st type BB symbol combination stops during RT1, RT1 ends and the 1st type BB is activated (also referred to as during 1st type BB) from the next game, and when the activation of the 1st type BB ends, the next game transitions to non-RT. In addition, since the setting change starts from non-RT, if the setting change device is activated during RT1 or 1st type BB operation, non-RT is set when the operation of the setting change device ends. Note that in a power outage where the setting change device does not operate (sometimes referred to as a normal power outage), the RT state and the 1st type BB operation state are not cleared, so when the power is restored, it starts from the state before the power outage. Specifically, if a power outage occurs during type 1 BB and the power is subsequently restored, the type 1 BB operating state is type 1 BB, and if a power outage occurs while the state is RT1 and the power is subsequently restored, the RT state is configured to be RT1.

The condition device in this embodiment is described in FIG. 18. In FIG. 18, the "Winning Replay" item lists the numbers corresponding to the winning numbers. In addition, the "Condition Device" item lists the condition devices that will be activated. In addition, the "Common Name" item lists the simple names of the condition devices that will be activated. For example, the common name corresponding to the Replay-H condition device is "Right Push: Strong-Battle Eye", which indicates that the Strong Battle Eye will stop when the right reel is stopped for the first time, and the common name corresponding to the Winning-A1 condition device is "Push Order Bell Group A 123", which indicates that the operation mode of the left reel stopping first, the center reel stopping second, and the right reel stopping third is the correct operation mode (in this case, the operation mode that stops the symbol combination of Winning 52 (a winning with a larger payout number than Winning 01-02, 09, 29-31)). In addition, the "Component" item shows the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device. For example, if the replay-A condition device is activated (a win), it is possible to display replay 01 or replay 02. Note that the "0" in the "Winning replay" section corresponds to a loss.

The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in the non-type BB in this embodiment are explained using Figures 19 to 21. The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in the non-type BB are: Type 1 BB, Replay-A, Replay-B, Replay-C (+1 type BB), Replay-D (+1 type BB), Replay-E (+1 type BB), Replay-F (+1 type BB), Replay-G (+1 type BB), Replay-H (+1 type BB), Replay-I (+1 type BB), Replay-J (+1 type BB), Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-A7, Winning-A8, Winning-A9, Winning-B10, Winning-B20, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-B7, Winning-B8, Winning-B9, Winning-B11, Winning-B12, Winning-B13, Winning-B14, Winning-B15, Winning-B16, Winning-B17, Winning-B18, Winning-B19, Winning-B20, Winning-B21, Winning-B22, Winning-B23, Winning-B24, Winning-B25, Winning-B26, Winning-B27, Winning-B28, Winning-B30, Winning-B31, Winning-B32, Winning-B33, Winning-B34, Winning-B35, Winning-B46, Winning-B47, Winning-B58, Winning-B69, Winning-B71, Winning-B72, Winning-B73, Winning-B74, Winning-B7 The possible results are -A6, Winner -B1, Winner -B2, Winner -B3, Winner -B4, Winner -B5, Winner -B6, Winner -C1, Winner -C2, Winner -C3, Winner -C4, Winner -C5, Winner -C6, Winner -D (+1 type BB), Winner -E (+1 type BB), Winner -F (+1 type BB), Winner -G (+1 type BB), Winner -H (+1 type BB), Winner -I (+1 type BB), Winner -J (+1 type BB), Winner -K (+1 type BB), and there are no losers.

The above-mentioned description of "Replay -C (+1 type BB)" indicates that Replay -C and 1 type BB are won at the same time, and corresponds to the fact that the names of both "Bonus Condition Device" and "Winning Replay" are written in Figures 19, 20, and 21. Also, the "Internal Lottery" item in Figures 19, 20, and 21 indicates whether or not the internal lottery is subject for each game state, with "○" indicating that the internal lottery is subject and "×" indicating that the internal lottery is not subject. Also, the "Advantageous Zone Transition" item in Figures 19, 20, and 21 indicates whether or not the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed for each game state, with "○" indicating that the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed and "×" indicating that the advantageous zone transition lottery is not executed. Note that in this embodiment, when the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed, 100% of the time, the game is configured to transition to the advantageous zone. Also, the items "R1" to "R6" in Figures 19, 20, and 21 indicate the number of winning settings for the internal lottery corresponding to the setting value, and 65,536 settings are allocated for each game state. Note that "R1" corresponds to a setting value of "1," "R2" corresponds to a setting value of "2," "R3" corresponds to a setting value of "3," "R4" corresponds to a setting value of "4," "R5" corresponds to a setting value of "5," and "R6" corresponds to a setting value of "6."

In this embodiment, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means within the Type 1 BB are any of the following: Replay-A, Replay-B, Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, and there are no losing results.

In this embodiment, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means during Type 1 BB are Winning -K, Winning -L, or Losing.

In this embodiment, the conditions for moving from the normal zone to the advantageous zone are winning any of Re-play-C, Re-play-D, Re-play-E, Re-play-F, Re-play-G, Re-play-H, Re-play-I, Re-play-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, or Winning-K; winning Re-play-A or Re-play-B does not move to the advantageous zone. That is, if you win any of the following during the normal period: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win-B4, Win-B5, Win-B6, Win-C1, Win-C2, Win-C3, Win-C4, Win-C5, Win-C6, Win-D, Win-E, Win-F, Win-G, Win-H, Win-I, Win-J, Win-K, you will be in the advantageous period from the next play.

In this embodiment, if any of the following is won during the normal zone: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, or Winning-K, the player will always move to the advantageous zone. That is, if you win any of the following during the normal period: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win-B4, Win-B5, Win-B6, Win-C1, Win-C2, Win-C3, Win-C4, Win-C5, Win-C6, Win-D, Win-E, Win-F, Win-G, Win-H, Win-I, Win-J, Win-K, you will be in the advantageous period from the next play.

In this embodiment, since there are no misses in RT1 (inside the Type 1 BB) (either the replay role or the winning role is always a winning role), once you move to RT1, it is possible to stop the BB symbol combination with some of the operation modes when the push order bell group C (winning role-C1 to C6) is won. The part when the push order bell group C is won is, for example, the middle reel when the winning role-C1 is won, or some of the eye-pushing positions of the first stop of the right reel. Also, when WINNING-C1 is hit in the advantageous zone, the correct button press sequence (in this case, "1, 2, 3" is displayed on the LCD) is notified, and WINNING 38 stops and the BB symbol combination does not stop. With this configuration, the user can maintain RT1 by being notified of an operation mode in which the BB symbol combination does not stop. Also, the number of losing buttons during RT1 can be set to 4 (because the minimum winning probability designed is 1/17500 or more), and the BB symbol combination is configured not to stop for other replay roles or winning roles, so that the BB symbol combination stops only when there is a loss.

In this embodiment, the game states managed by the main control means in the advantageous zone include the general advantageous zone state, chance zone (also referred to as CZ), and AT, with transitions occurring from the general advantageous zone state to CZ, from CZ to AT, and from AT to the general advantageous zone state or CZ, respectively. Furthermore, the game state managed by the main control means in the normal zone is only the general normal zone state, and there is no transition of the game state until a transition to the advantageous zone occurs. Note that in the general advantageous zone state and the general normal zone state, the flags related to the game state managed by the main control means may be the same or different.

The normal state is when the internal lottery result is any of WINNER-A1 through WINNER-C6, and the advantageous winning button sequence is not announced.

The CZ is the state you enter when you win any of the internal lottery results from WINNER-D to WINNER-H under normal circumstances, and during the CZ, the transition to the AT is determined by the results of the internal lottery during the CZ or the lottery at the start of the CZ.

The AT is the state you enter when you win the AT lottery during the CZ, and is the state that notifies you of the advantageous operation mode (winning button sequence) when you win any of WIN-A1 through WIN-C6.

In this embodiment, the conditions for always transitioning from the advantageous zone to the normal zone are when the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 1500 times), when MY in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, when initialization processing based on a setting change is performed, and when the RAM clear switch is enabled, and the AT end conditions and the advantageous zone end conditions do not match. However, some of the AT end conditions (such as when the ending is reached or when the number of winning coins exceeds a predetermined number (e.g., 2300 coins)) may also be used as the advantageous zone end conditions. In addition, a transition to the normal zone may be made when a CZ is won in the advantageous zone. In this case, whether or not to end the advantageous zone is determined depending on the situation of the advantageous zone when a CZ is won in the advantageous zone.

The CZ is determined by drawing lots when one of the winning combinations, Winning-D through Winning-H (hereafter also referred to as rare combinations), is won, and basically the less likely the internal drawing result is to win, the more likely it is to win the CZ. In this embodiment, the order of likelihood of winning the CZ is Winning-G > Winning-E > Winning-H > Winning-F > Winning-D.

In this embodiment, the CZ does not occur immediately after winning, but starts when the player wins the CZ, transitions from the advantageous zone to the normal zone, and then transitions back to the advantageous zone (the CZ always starts when transitioning to the advantageous zone in RT1). This solves the problem that when the player wins the AT from the CZ, the player cannot get the balls because the number of remaining games in the advantageous zone is small. This is particularly effective when the specification has a small net increase (the expected number of coins to be acquired per game, also called the gradient value). For example, in the case of a net increase of 2 coins, the maximum number of coins acquired in the advantageous zone is about 2400 coins, so 1200 games are required to acquire 2400 coins. However, the AT is not always performed in the advantageous zone, and since various game states such as the normal state and the CZ described above are transitioned, the number of remaining games in the advantageous zone is often small (for example, 500 games) at the start of the AT. In this case, even if 500 games are played, the net increase is 2 coins, so the player ends up acquiring about 1000 coins, making it difficult to meet the user's expectations for acquisition. Therefore, by ending the advantageous zone once when the CZ is won, and starting the CZ when moving to a new advantageous zone, even if the CZ has 100 plays, the advantageous zone can be played 1,400 times, creating the expectation that the user will win 2,400 coins.

The probability of winning the CZ from the second time onwards within the same advantageous zone may also be varied depending on the number of coins won since the advantageous zone began (cumulative number of coins paid out - cumulative number of coins inserted). For example, if a CZ is started when moving to an advantageous zone and an AT is won, it is possible to vary the probability of winning the CZ in the remaining advantageous zone after the AT ends depending on whether 50 coins are won in the AT or 1000 coins are won. In this case, it is possible to make the probability of winning the CZ after winning 50 coins higher or lower than the probability of winning the CZ after winning 1000 coins.

If the probability of winning a CZ after winning 50 coins is made higher than the probability of winning a CZ after winning 1,000 coins, it will be easier to award the next CZ to users who have not won much in the AT, allowing them to play while maintaining a sense of anticipation.

If the probability of winning the CZ after winning 50 coins is made lower than the probability of winning the CZ after winning 1000 coins, since there is little remaining advantageous period after winning 1000 coins (since it is close to the end of the advantageous period, which is 1500 plays or winning 2400 coins), even if the CZ probability is made high, the ball payout design will not significantly increase gambling spirit, and a new sense of expectation can be created for the user.

When a CZ is won, a congratulatory performance is performed in which text such as "Success" or "Victory" is displayed in the game in which the CZ was won, or after a certain number of games (which can be set arbitrarily depending on the specifications of the gaming machine). This allows the user to understand that some kind of privilege has been granted, and allows the user to intuitively understand the progress of the game. Then, from the next game onwards, the display "CZ Preparation" is displayed by lighting the liquid crystal or lamp, creating a sense of expectation for the CZ in the user. When the CZ winning game is in an advantageous zone, CZ Preparation corresponds to the state from the end of the advantageous zone to the transition to the advantageous zone again in the subsequent normal zone. Since "CZ Preparation" is internally a normal zone, it is a disadvantageous state for users who do not perform any AT lottery or AT addition, but by lowering the ball output rate during CZ preparation compared to the AT state, balls can be allocated to the AT, creating a wave of balls. In addition, since the CZ preparation creates a sense of expectation for the CZ, the user is less likely to feel that he or she has lost even if the ball output rate is lowered.

In addition, the advantageous zone ends with the next play after the CZ wins, but a predetermined number of plays may be played from the play after the CZ wins until the advantageous zone ends. In this case, the game after the CZ win does not announce that the CZ has been won, and it is possible to play a predetermined number of plays to see whether the CZ has been won or not by using effects (so-called premonition effects or consecutive effects). Then, a congratulatory effect is executed at the timing when the predetermined number of plays are played, and the CZ is in preparation from the next play. This is because the advantageous zone lamp is lit during the advantageous zone, and the advantageous zone lamp is turned off when the advantageous zone ends, so that it is not possible to tell whether the CZ has been won or not from the lighting state of the advantageous zone lamp between the CZ win play and the announcement that the CZ has been won. Note that the advantageous zone may be switched to the normal zone during CZ preparation, and in this case, since it has already been announced that the CZ is in preparation, the result is not known in advance by the lighting state of the advantageous zone lamp during CZ preparation.

In addition, CZ preparation does not necessarily have to be a normal zone, and may be set to a favorable zone. Even in this case, the rate at which CZ preparation is executed in a normal zone is relatively higher than the rate at which CZ preparation is executed in a favorable zone, and the condition for executing CZ preparation in a favorable zone is that the number of remaining plays in the favorable zone is a predetermined number (for example, 1000 times). By configuring in this way, CZ preparation is executed when there is a margin in the number of remaining plays in the favorable zone, so even if the CZ is executed after CZ preparation and the AT is executed as a result, a sufficient feeling of winning can be created. In addition, since the normal zone is not used during CZ preparation, it is also possible to create a surprise such as starting the AT immediately after CZ preparation (since information related to the AT is initialized at the end of the favorable zone, if the normal zone is used during CZ preparation, the CZ will be executed at the start of the favorable zone, and the AT cannot be started).

In addition, when executing CZ preparation during the above-mentioned advantageous zone, it may be determined by drawing lots whether or not to award an AT when any of WIN-D through WIN-H is won during CZ preparation. In this case, the order of rare roles that are likely to win the AT by AT drawing may be the same as the order that is likely to win the CZ, or may be slightly different, such as WIN-E > WIN-G > WIN-F > WIN-H > WIN-D. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the user expect to win a rare role even during CZ preparation.

Furthermore, in order to not discourage users who have won a rare role but not the AT from playing, a bonus different from the AT may be awarded. Such a bonus may, for example, be displayed as a two-dimensional code that can be read by the user's terminal, or a setting suggestion effect that allows the setting value to be determined. Such a bonus may be made easier to award the closer the number of plays in the advantageous zone is to the aforementioned predetermined number (e.g., 1500 plays), or when the number of CZ plays is a specific number (e.g., a multiple of 5).

The process for changing settings in this embodiment is explained below.

When the setting change device is started, the RAM initialization process described above is performed at the timing when the setting change device is started or when the setting value is confirmed. If the game state immediately before this RAM initialization process is performed is RT1, the RT1 information is initialized when the RAM initialization process is performed, and the game state after the RAM initialization process becomes non-RT. Also, if the game state immediately before the RAM initialization process is performed is in Type 1 BB, the information in Type 1 BB is initialized when the RAM initialization process is performed, and the game state after the RAM initialization process becomes non-RT.

In addition, if the game state immediately before the RAM initialization process is performed is a favorable zone, the information of the favorable zone is initialized when the RAM initialization process is performed, and the game state after the RAM initialization process becomes the normal zone. In other words, the game state during the favorable zone can be the normal state, CZ, or AT, but in any state, when the RAM initialization process is performed, it transitions to the normal zone.

When the RAM initialization process is performed, play will start in a non-RT and normal zone, but in this embodiment, the specification is such that the CZ starts when moving from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, so after the setting change, the player is in an advantageous state (a state in which the CZ can be started by moving to the advantageous zone without playing to win the CZ).

By configuring it this way, the settings are changed to a favorable state, which motivates customers to visit the store in the morning, thereby increasing the number of customers attracted.

In addition, if it is possible to set an overly favorable state after changing the settings (a state in which the machine transitions to the CZ after just a few plays), this could significantly stimulate gambling instincts (the so-called morning mode). For this reason, it is possible to change the contents of the CZ depending on the situation when the machine transitions to the favorable zone.

In this case, if the RT state of the next play that has been determined to transition to the favorable zone is RT1, a CZ will be started since this is the basic game flow, and if the RT state of the next play that has been determined to transition to the favorable zone is non-RT, a CZ will not be started as this is after a setting change. Games that have been determined to move into the favorable zone are those that have won any of the following: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, Winning-K.

In addition, since Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, and Winning-K overlap with Type 1 BB, the RT state of the next play after the winning will be RT1 and CZ will start, but Winning-A1, Winning Since Prize-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, and Winning-C6 do not overlap with Type 1 BB, the next play after the win is non-RT and CZ will not start.

This configuration allows for cases where a player transitions to a favorable zone during non-RT, and therefore suppresses morning-related specifications such as transitioning to a CZ after just a few plays after changing the settings, thereby reducing the tendency for gambling.

It is also possible to reduce gambling by using a specification that changes the game state managed by the main control means in the favorable zone by referring to the RT state of the next game in which a transition to the favorable zone has been decided. In this case, the favorable zone that has transitioned to a non-RT (not inside the Type 1 BB) may not perform an AT, and the favorable zone that has transitioned to an RT1 (inside the Type 1 BB) may have the possibility of performing an AT. With this configuration, if a transition to the favorable zone occurs in a non-RT after the setting change, the AT will not be performed and no balls can be earned, thereby reducing gambling. The condition for ending the favorable zone at this time may be until the above-mentioned CZ is won, or may be that a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games) have been played.

In addition, the transition of the CZ is controlled by referring to the RT state of the next game that has won the advantageous zone transition lottery, but this is not limited to this, and the transition of the CZ may be controlled by referring to the condition device in operation for the game that has won the advantageous zone transition lottery. In this case, when the prize-winning-A1 is won while inside a type 1 BB in the normal zone, the CZ is controlled to start at the start of the advantageous zone based on the fact that the condition devices for the type 1 BB and the prize-winning-A1 are in operation. In addition, when the prize-winning-A1 is won while not inside a type 1 BB in the normal zone, the CZ is controlled not to start at the start of the advantageous zone based on the fact that the condition device for the prize-winning-A1 is in operation.

In this embodiment, only Type 1 BB was the subject of the lottery, but instead, RB or MB may be the subject of the lottery, or two or all of Type 1 BB, RB, and MB may be the subject of the lottery.

<Gameplay that increases the expected value of game value gained at the start of the advantageous zone>
We will explain the gameplay that can be applied to this embodiment, which increases the expected value of game value gained at the start of the advantageous zone.
In this case, in order to increase the expected value of the game value at the start of the advantageous period, the advantageous period is configured not to end by playing a predetermined number of times. In other words, the advantageous period is configured not to end depending on the number of times of playing in the advantageous period.

When a predetermined number of premonition games are played in the general advantageous zone state after the start of one advantageous zone, the next game transitions to a predetermined AT (also referred to as AT1), a predetermined lottery is played in the AT1, and if the predetermined lottery is won, the AT1 continues until the number of wins in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400 (until the value of the MY counter exceeds the upper limit), and when the end condition of the advantageous zone is met, the advantageous zone ends and the normal zone starts from the next game. Then, after the normal zone is passed and a new advantageous zone is started, a predetermined number of premonition games are played in the general advantageous zone state, and the AT1 transitions, and when the predetermined lottery is won in the AT1, the AT1 continues until the number of wins in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, and when the end condition of the advantageous zone is met, the advantageous zone ends and the normal zone starts from the next game.
That is, until a predetermined lottery is not won in the AT1, the acquisition of about 2400 game values is looped. The probability of winning in the predetermined lottery can be set appropriately, but it is preferable to configure it so that the probability of winning is as high as 50% or more and less than 80%. In addition, a minimum guarantee (such as AT50 games or 100 wins) is provided during the execution period of the AT1, and even if a predetermined lottery is not won in the AT1, the AT1 is not immediately terminated but is configured to continue until the AT with the minimum guarantee is executed. The predetermined lottery may be configured to be executed at the start of the AT1, or may be configured to be executed after the AT with the minimum guarantee is executed in the AT1.

In addition, if a player does not win in a specified lottery in AT1, the game will transition to the general advantageous zone state after the end of AT1 without ending the advantageous zone, and if a player wins a specified role (such as Replay-A, Replay-J, Win-J, etc.) that has a low probability of winning in the role lottery (such as 1/8192, the lowest probability in the role lottery) in the general advantageous zone state, the advantageous zone will end and the normal zone will start from the next play, and after passing through the normal zone and starting a new advantageous zone, a predetermined number of premonition plays will be performed in the general advantageous zone state, and the game will transition to AT1.

The general advantageous zone state to which the player transitions after failing to win in a specified lottery at AT1 is configured to have a lower expectation for the AT than the general advantageous zone state at the start of one advantageous zone.

In addition, the advantageous zone is configured to end when a predetermined role is won in the advantageous zone general state to which AT1 transitions after a predetermined lottery result is not won, but it is not limited to this, and the advantageous zone may be configured to end when a predetermined CZ is executed to end the advantageous zone and a lottery result is won during the predetermined CZ.

In addition, during AT1 or during a premonition game played a predetermined number of times immediately after the start of the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone is configured not to end even if the player wins the predetermined role. This configuration can improve the tempo of the game when the winning number 2400 is looping. Even if the player wins the predetermined role in a situation where it is confirmed that the player can win a predetermined lottery in AT1 and can win a game value of about 2400, AT1 will not end midway, so the risk of causing a disadvantage to the player can be prevented. Even if the player wins the predetermined role in a situation where a predetermined performance is being performed indicating that the player can win a predetermined lottery and can win a game value of about 2400, the predetermined performance will not end midway, so the risk of causing a distrust among the player can be prevented. In addition, if the player wins the predetermined role during AT2, which will be described later, the advantageous zone may be configured to end with the game in which the predetermined role was won, or the advantageous zone may be configured to end after the end of AT2.

In this way, by increasing the expected gain in game value at the start of an advantageous zone, a new type of gameplay can be created in which the player aims to end the advantageous zone. Furthermore, by requiring a certain number of premonition plays from the start of an advantageous zone until the transition to AT1, the AT will not continue beyond 2,400 points even if a certain lottery is won in AT1, so excessive gambling can be prevented.

In addition, even in the general advantageous zone state to which a player transitions after failing to win a predetermined lottery in AT1, an AT lottery may be held, or a ceiling may be set so that a player transitions to the AT each time a ceiling number of games (e.g., 1,000 games) have been played (these ATs other than AT1 are collectively referred to as AT2), but it is preferable to configure AT2 so that the predetermined lottery is not held. In this way, by not holding the predetermined lottery in ATs other than AT1, it is possible to prevent excessive gambling and to increase the sense of anticipation for the predetermined lottery in AT1.

Even if the expected gain in game value at the start of the favorable zone is configured to be high in this way, if a transition to the favorable zone is determined during RT1 (inside Type 1 BB) by the method described above, the game will transition to AT1 after a predetermined number of premonition plays from the start of the favorable zone, but if a transition to the favorable zone is determined during a non-RT, the AT will not be executed even after a predetermined number of plays from the start of the favorable zone; in other words, it is preferable to configure the game so that the AT will not be executed after a predetermined number of plays from the start of the favorable zone in the first favorable zone after the setting is changed. In this way, by configuring the case where a transition to the favorable zone is determined during RT1 to be relatively more favorable than the case where a transition to the favorable zone is determined during a non-RT, the specifications related to the morning can be suppressed.

In addition, if a specific number of games (e.g., 5,000 games) have been played without one advantageous period ending, the system may be configured to transition to a specific state in which the design value of the payout rate is a specific value (a value exceeding 100% and not exceeding 115%) from the next game until the advantageous period ends. Note that the specific number of games can be set as appropriate, but it is preferable to set it to the number of games that can be played within the business hours of the gaming establishment in one day.

In addition, in order to set the design value of the payout rate in a specified state to a specified value, 1) it may be configured to transition to AT2 every time a specified number of games (e.g., 100 games) are played in the general advantageous zone state, and the AT2 may always end after a specific number of games (e.g., 50 games), or 2) it may be configured to provide multiple scenarios in which the number of games to transition to AT2 and the number of games won in AT2 after the transition are predetermined so that the payout rate becomes a specified value, and to have the game proceed according to one of the scenarios.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to motivate a player to continue playing even in an unfavorable situation for the player, such as when one advantageous period continues for a long period of time.

In addition, in a specified state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value, the advantageous zone may be configured not to end even if a predetermined role is won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a specified state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value from being overly advantageous for the player.

In addition, even if the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value, the advantageous period may be configured to end if a predetermined combination is won. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation when a predetermined combination is won.

In addition, the design value of the payout rate in a specified state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value may be designed to be the same regardless of the set value. By doing so, in a specified state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value, stable playability can be provided without any advantage/disadvantage due to the set value.

In addition, the design value of the payout rate in a predetermined state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value may be configured to be higher as the set value is higher, such as set value 1 < set value 2 < ... < set value 6. By doing this, the higher the set value is, the sooner the advantageous zone can end when a transition is made to a predetermined state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value in an advantageous zone, and therefore the transition to a state where the expected value of the game value to be acquired is higher can be made sooner.

The design value of the payout rate in a predetermined state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value may be configured to be higher than the lowest set value (set value 1 in this embodiment) and lower than the highest set value (set value 6 in this embodiment). By configuring it in this way, even if a predetermined lottery is not won during AT1 of one advantageous zone, it is possible to continue playing, thereby enhancing the significance of aiming for a predetermined state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value, while also preventing the significance of playing at the highest set value from being lost.

<Control for dealing with power interruption while various switches are pressed according to this embodiment>
When the front panel PS2 is closed, a game has ended, no 3 bets have been made (including a situation where no automatic bet has been made), and a number of credits that allows a bet of 3 or more is stored as the number of credits (for example, the number of credits when no bets have been made is 3 or more, or the number of credits when 1 bet has been made is 2 or more) (hereinafter referred to as a MAX bet possible state), when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed), the MAX bet process is executed, 3 is stored as the number of bets, and the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are lit (before the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are off).

In addition, not only when the front panel PS2 is closed, but also when the front panel PS2 is open, if the game is over, no 3 bets have been made (including when no automatic bets have been made), and the number of credits stored is equal to or greater than the number that allows 3 bets (for example, the number of credits when no bets have been made is 3 or more, or the number of credits when 1 bet has been made is 2 or more), when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed), the MAX bet process is executed, 3 is stored as the number of bets, and the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are turned on (before the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are turned off). In the following, unless otherwise specified, when the power is turned on, the front panel PS2 is closed, but the same behavior may be performed even when the front panel PS2 is open.

The MAX bet possible state includes a state where no bet has been made, a state where 1 bet has been made, and a state where 2 bets have been made, but when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated and the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are newly lit, this is the MAX bet possible state where no bet has been made. In the MAX bet possible state where 1 bet has been made, the 2 bet lamp and 3 bet lamp are newly lit when the 1 bet lamp is already lit, and in the MAX bet possible state where 2 bets have been made, the 1 bet lamp and 2 bet lamp are already lit and the 3 bet lamp is newly lit.

In addition, in the MAX bet enabled state, the MAX bet lamp is lit, informing the player that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid. Then, when the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the MAX bet lamp is lit in the MAX bet enabled state (when the sensor that detects the MAX bet switch 18 goes from OFF to ON), the MAX bet lamp goes out. In other words, the MAX bet lamp goes out even when the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed (when the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed and not released, and the sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 remains ON).

In addition, in a state where a MAX bet is possible, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold value and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process will not be executed. Also, because the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, it is not possible to perform a new MAX bet process by pressing the MAX bet switch 18. In other words, because the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the sensor signal of the MAX bet switch is on), the MAX bet switch 18 cannot be pressed and the MAX bet process cannot be executed.

This makes it possible to prevent a bet from being placed even if the MAX bet switch 18 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX bet switch 18) when power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such a case, the MAX bet lamp can accurately indicate that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid by lighting it. Therefore, a player who recognizes that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid can place a MAX bet (perform MAX bet processing) by releasing the MAX bet switch 18 that he had pressed (after the sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 goes from ON to OFF) and then pressing the MAX bet switch 18 again (the sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 goes from OFF to ON).

In addition, for example, if a malfunction occurs in the return spring or sensor of the MAX BET switch 18 before or after a power outage, causing the MAX BET switch 18 to remain in the pressed state, the MAX BET lamp can be turned on to notify the administrator that even if the MAX BET process cannot be performed, it is not due to a software malfunction.

In addition, in a state where a MAX bet is possible, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and making the gaming machine unable to operate, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, and the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process will not be executed, but if the 1 bet switch 19 is operated (pressed) again (the sensor that detects the 1 bet switch 19 turns from OFF to ON), the 1 bet process can be executed.

As a result, even if the MAX bet switch 18 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX bet switch 18) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the lighting state of the MAX bet lamp will notify the player that betting is possible and suggest that the 1 bet switch 19 can be operated. Even in such a case, the operation of the 1 bet switch 19 is valid, so the game can continue.

In addition, in a state where a MAX bet is possible, when a power outage occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, making the gaming machine unable to operate, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, and when the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet process may be executed. In this case, the MAX bet lamp may be on or off after the power is turned on. If the MAX bet lamp is on after the power is turned on, it indicates that the 1 bet switch 19 is operable, and when the 1 bet switch 19 is operated, the state changes from 3 bets to 1 bet, and the difference "2" is returned to the credits (if the difference cannot be returned to credits in a 3 bet state and the number of credits is 50, the state does not change to 1 bet even if the 1 bet switch 19 is operated, and the 3 bet state is maintained, so the MAX bet lamp does not light up after the power is turned on (it is off)). If the MAX bet lamp is off after the power is turned on, it is possible to indicate that the MAX bet process has been executed. In addition, whether the MAX BET lamp is on or off after power is turned on, it is possible to notify the user that the MAX BET process has been executed by outputting three bet sounds (three times one bet sound) when the power is turned on.

Next, when the MAX BET switch 19 is operated (pressed) in a state where a MAX BET is possible (a state where no bet has been made), the number of bets is stored as 1 and the 1 BET lamp is lit. Also, since the operation of the MAX BET switch 18 is still valid, the MAX BET lamp is also lit.

In addition, when a MAX bet is possible (when no bets have been placed), if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed, if the power is turned on while the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed while the sensor of the 1 bet switch 19 remains ON), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the 1 bet process will not be executed. Also, because the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed, it is not possible to perform a new 1 bet process by pressing the 1 bet switch 19.

This makes it possible to prevent a bet from being placed even if the 1 bet switch 19 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the 1 bet switch 19) when the power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such a case, the lighting state of the MAX bet lamp can indicate that bet processing is possible, suggesting that the 1 bet switch 19 is operable. Therefore, a player who recognizes that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 or 1 bet switch 19 is valid can perform a 1 bet process or a MAX bet process by releasing the 1 bet switch 19 that was pressed (after the sensor of the 1 bet switch 19 goes from ON to OFF) and then pressing the MAX bet switch 18 again (the sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 goes from OFF to ON) without releasing the 1 bet switch 19 that was pressed (while the sensor of the 1 bet switch 19 remains ON).

In addition, when the gaming machine is in a MAX bet enabled state (when no bets have been placed) and a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and making it unable to operate, if the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed and the power is turned on while the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the 1 bet process will not be executed, but the MAX bet process can be executed by operating (pressing) the MAX bet switch 18 again.

As a result, even if the 1 bet switch 19 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the 1 bet switch 19) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the lighting state of the MAX bet lamp indicates that bet processing is possible, suggesting that the MAX bet switch 18 is operable. Even in such a case, the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid, so the game can continue.

In addition, in a MAX bet enabled state, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold value and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed, and the power is turned on while the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the 1 bet process may be executed. In this case, the MAX bet lamp is lit after power is turned on, indicating that the MAX bet switch 18 is operable, and when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated, the 1 bet state changes to the 3 bet state. Also, it is possible to notify that the 1 bet process has been executed by outputting a 1 bet sound when the power is turned on.

In addition, when a MAX bet is possible (when no bet has been placed) and a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold value and making it impossible for the gaming machine to operate, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (this may be the case when the front panel PS2 is not open or may already be open), and if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the front panel PS2 is open (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process will not be executed; however, while the MAX bet switch 18 continues to be pressed, the 1 bet process can be executed by operating (pressing) the 1 bet switch 19 again. In addition, when a power outage occurs in a state where a MAX bet is possible (when no bet has been placed), causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold value and making it impossible for the gaming machine to operate, if the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (this may be the case when the front panel PS2 is not open or may already be open), and if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the front panel PS2 is open (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process will not be executed, but the MAX bet process can be executed by releasing the MAX bet switch 18 and operating (pressing) it again. In this case, even if the 1 bet switch 19 or the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed again and the 1 bet process or the MAX bet process is executed, the 1 bet sound or the 3 bet sound may not be output. Alternatively, when the 1 bet switch 19 or the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed again and the 1 bet process or the MAX bet process is executed, 3 bets are made and the front panel PS2 is open, when the start switch 12 is operated (pressed), the reel rotation process is executed and each reel spins, but the start sound may not be output.

This makes it possible to prevent a bet from being placed even if the MAX BET switch 18 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX BET switch 18) when power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such a case, the MAX BET lamp can be lit to accurately indicate that the operation of the MAX BET switch 18 is valid.

In addition, for example, if a malfunction occurs in the return spring or sensor of the MAX BET switch 18 before or after a power outage, causing the MAX BET switch 18 to remain in the pressed state, the MAX BET lamp can be turned on to notify the administrator that even if the MAX BET process cannot be performed, it is not due to a software malfunction.

Also, by enabling 1 bet processing with the 1 bet switch 19 even when the front panel PS2 is open, it becomes possible to check whether 1 bet processing is possible normally in conjunction with the work performed by the administrator when the front panel PS2 is open (for example, checking settings, setting the administrator menu, etc.). Note that when playing at an arcade, playing with the front panel PS2 open is not normal, so by deliberately not outputting the 1 bet sound, it becomes possible to make the player aware that it is not normal.

In addition, in a state where a MAX bet is possible (a state where no bet has been placed), when a power outage occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, causing the gaming machine to become inoperable, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (this may be a state where the front panel PS2 is not open or may already be open), and if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the front panel PS2 is open (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp does not light up, the MAX bet process is not executed, and even if the 1 bet switch 19 is newly operated (pressed), the 1 bet process is not executed, and thereafter, when the front panel PS2 is closed (the closure is detected) while the operation (pressing) of the MAX bet switch 18 is continuing, the MAX bet lamp lights up, and when the 1 bet switch 19 is newly operated (pressed), the 1 bet process becomes possible.

This makes it possible to prevent bets from being placed even if the MAX bet switch 18 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX bet switch 18) when the power is turned on after a power outage, and by not lighting the MAX bet lamp, it is possible to make the player aware that he or she cannot continue playing. Furthermore, when the front panel PS2 is closed, even if the MAX bet switch 18 continues to be operated (pressed), the bet operation with the 1 bet switch 19 is enabled, making it possible to minimize the disruption of game progress.

In addition, in a state where a MAX bet is possible, if a power outage occurs causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold value and the gaming machine is unable to operate, and the MAX bet switch 18 and the 1 bet switch 19 are pressed, and the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and the 1 bet switch 19 are pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process and 1 bet process will not be executed. In this case, if the MAX bet switch 18 is released while the 1 bet switch 19 is still being pressed, and the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed) again, the MAX bet process can be executed. Similarly, in a state where a MAX bet is possible, if a power outage occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, causing the gaming machine to become inoperable, and the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 are pressed, if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 are pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process and 1 bet process will not be executed. However, if the 1 bet switch 19 is released while the MAX bet switch 18 is still pressed, and the 1 bet switch 19 is operated (pressed) again, the 1 bet process can be executed.

This makes it possible to prevent bets from being placed even if the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 are unintentionally operated (such as by placing hands on the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19) when the power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such a case, the MAX bet lamp can be lit to accurately indicate that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid. Also, even in such a case, the game can continue because the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 is valid.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, the game has ended, no bets have been made (replay has not been activated), and normal effects are being displayed (effects other than continuous effects or AT effects) or a demo screen is being displayed (hereinafter referred to as a menu screen displayable state), if the sub switch 20 is operated (pressed) (the sensor that detects the sub switch 20 goes from OFF to ON), the display process for the menu screen is executed and the menu screen is displayed on the display device 32.

In addition, when the menu screen is in a state where it can be displayed, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold value and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the sub switch 20 is pressed and the power is turned on while the sub switch 20 is pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed while the sensor of the sub switch 20 remains ON), the sub switch lamp will light up and the menu screen will not be displayed.

As a result, even if the sub switch 20 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the sub switch 20) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the unintentional menu screen is not displayed, and the lighting state of the sub switch lamp indicates that the menu screen can be displayed, suggesting that the sub switch 20 can be operated. Therefore, a player who recognizes that the operation of the sub switch 20 is valid can release the sub switch 20 that he has pressed (after the sensor of the sub switch 20 changes from ON to OFF), and then press the sub switch 20 again (the sensor of the sub switch 20 changes from OFF to ON), thereby allowing the menu screen to be displayed.

In addition, in a state where the menu screen can be displayed, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold value and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the sub switch 20 is pressed and the power is turned on while the sub switch 20 is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the sub switch lamp may light up and the menu screen may be displayed. In this case, the menu screen can be displayed immediately after power is turned on, reflecting the intention to press the sub switch 20, and further, by lighting the sub switch lamp, it can be indicated that the confirmation operation for each item on the menu screen was valid.

In addition, when the MAX bet switch 18 and sub switch 20 are pressed in a situation where a power outage occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, causing the gaming machine to become inoperable while the MAX bet switch 18 and sub switch 20 are pressed, if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and sub switch 20 are pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up, the MAX bet process will not be executed, the sub switch lamp will light up, and the menu screen will not be displayed. Also, because the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, it is not possible to perform a new MAX bet process by pressing the MAX bet switch 18. In other words, because the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the sensor signal of the MAX bet switch is on), the MAX bet switch 18 cannot be pressed and the MAX bet process cannot be performed.

This makes it possible to prevent unintentional bets from being made and the menu screen from being displayed, even if the MAX bet switch 18 and sub switch 20 are unintentionally operated (such as by placing hands on the MAX bet switch 18 and sub switch 20) when power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such a case, the MAX bet lamp can accurately indicate that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid, and the sub switch lamp can indicate that the menu screen can be displayed, suggesting that the sub switch 20 can be operated.

In addition, for example, if a malfunction occurs in the return spring or sensor of the MAX BET switch 18 before or after a power outage, causing the MAX BET switch 18 to remain in the pressed state, the MAX BET lamp can be turned on to notify the administrator that even if the MAX BET process cannot be performed, it is not due to a software malfunction.

In addition, in a situation where a MAX BET is possible and the menu screen can be displayed, a power outage occurs, the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine is unable to operate, and if the MAX BET switch 18 and the sub switch 20 are pressed, and the power is turned on while the MAX BET switch 18 and the sub switch 20 are pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp may be lit, the MAX BET process is not executed, the sub switch lamp may be lit, and the menu screen may be displayed. In this case, the menu screen may be displayed immediately after the power is turned on, reflecting the intention to press the sub switch 20, and further, by lighting the sub switch lamp, it may be possible to indicate that the confirmation operation for each item on the menu screen is valid. In this case, the MAX BET lamp may continue to be lit even after the menu screen is displayed, to notify that the MAX BET process can be executed.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, a game has ended, no bets have been made (replay has not been activated), and the number of credits is one or more (hereinafter referred to as the settlement-enabled state), the settlement process is executed when the settlement switch is operated (pressed), and the medals stored in the credits are paid out to the tray 28.

In addition, in a state where settlement is possible, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and making the gaming machine unable to operate, and the settlement switch is pressed (the sensor that detects the settlement switch turns from OFF to ON), if the power is turned on while the settlement switch is pressed (the settlement switch sensor is ON and the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp will light up and settlement processing will not be executed. Also, even if the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed while the settlement switch is pressed, the MAX BET process will not be executed.

As a result, even if the settlement switch is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the settlement switch) when powering on after a power outage, the unintentional settlement process will not be executed, and the lighting state of the MAX BET lamp will notify the player that medals remain in the credits, preventing the player from leaving the seat with credits remaining.

In addition, in a state where settlement is possible, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold value and the gaming machine to become inoperable, the settlement switch is pressed, and if the power is turned on while the settlement switch is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and settlement processing will not be executed, but if the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the settlement switch is pressed, the MAX bet processing will be executed.

As a result, even if the settlement switch is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the settlement switch) when powering on after a power outage, the unintentional settlement process will not be executed, and because operation of the MAX BET switch is valid, the progress of the game will not be hindered as much as possible, so as not to reduce interest in the game.

In addition, in a state where settlement is possible, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold value and the gaming machine to become inoperable, the settlement switch may be pressed, and if the power is turned on while the settlement switch is pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp may be lit and settlement processing may be executed.

This means that, for example, if the power is turned on before an arcade opens, and the settlement switch is operated (e.g., hand is placed on the settlement switch), the settlement process can be performed immediately after the power is turned on, simplifying the power-on process before opening and the settlement process for remaining medals on the credit.

In addition, when the settlement is possible and a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold value and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the settlement switch is pressed and the power is turned on while the settlement switch is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the lamp of the sub-switch 20 will light up and operation of the sub-switch 20 will be valid, regardless of whether the settlement process is executed or not (the menu screen can be displayed by accepting the operation of the sub-switch 20).

As a result, even if the settlement switch is unintentionally operated when powering on after a power outage, for example, the menu screen can be displayed by operating sub switch 20, and information useful for playing, such as checking game history and adjusting the volume, can be viewed or changed on the menu screen. Also, by enabling all operations related to the progress of the game at this time, all games other than settlement can be performed. The settlement process is only used at the end of play, and since the player is not put at a disadvantage by adjusting the number of medals inserted even if the settlement process is not performed, it is possible to carry out the process without interfering with the progress of the game as much as possible.

In addition, when the machine is in a state where a MAX bet is possible and settlement is possible, if a power outage occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, causing the gaming machine to become inoperable, the MAX bet switch 18 and the settlement switch are pressed, and if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and the settlement switch are pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process and settlement process will not be executed. In this case, if the MAX bet switch 18 is released while the settlement switch is still being pressed, and the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed) again, the MAX bet process can be executed, and if the settlement switch is released while the MAX bet switch 18 is still being pressed, and the settlement switch is operated (pressed) again while the MAX bet switch 18 is still being pressed, the settlement process can be executed.

This makes it possible to prevent bets from being placed and settlement processing even if the MAX BET switch 18 and settlement switch are unintentionally operated (such as by placing hands on the MAX BET switch 18 and settlement switch) when power is turned on after a power outage, for example. Also, the lighting state of the MAX BET lamp can accurately notify the user that medals remain in the credits and that the operation of the MAX BET switch 18 is valid.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, play has ended, and three bets have been made (including when replay is activated) (hereinafter referred to as the reel rotation enabled state), the reel rotation process is executed and each reel spins when the start switch 12 is operated (pressed). Note that the reel rotation process is executed after the minimum play time has elapsed.

In addition, if a power outage occurs while the reels are spinning, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and making the gaming machine unable to operate, and the start switch 12 is pressed, if the power is turned on while the start switch 12 is still pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the start lamp will light up but none of the reels will spin.

As a result, even if the start switch 12 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the start switch 12) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the reels will not spin unintentionally, and it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally using the gaming media that have been bet on. Also, even in such cases, the lighting of the start lamp can accurately notify the player that the operation of the start switch 12 was valid.

In addition, in a situation where a power outage occurs while the reels are spinning, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold value and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the start switch 12 is pressed and the power is turned on while the start switch 12 is being pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed), the start lamp may not light up and none of the reels may spin. In such a case, it is preferable that the start lamp light up when the operation of the start switch 12 is terminated (when the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is turned off).

As a result, even if the start switch 12 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the start switch 12) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the reels will not spin unintentionally, preventing the player from unintentionally using the gaming media that has been bet on. Also, by not lighting the start lamp in such a case, the player can be made aware that the reels will not spin until the operation of the start switch 12 is terminated, and the start lamp lights up when the operation of the start switch 12 is terminated, accurately informing the player that the operation of the start switch 12 was valid.

In addition, in a situation where a power outage occurs while the reels are rotatable, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold value and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the start switch 12 is pressed and the power is turned on while the start switch 12 is being pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed), all of the reels may rotate.

As a result, if a power outage occurs while the reels are spinning, causing the operating voltage to momentarily fall below the threshold, and then the start switch 12 is operated before the operating voltage exceeds the threshold and the power is automatically turned on, and the power is automatically turned on while the start switch 12 is operated (when the power outage recovery process is executed), all the reels will spin after the power is turned on, so it is possible for the game to progress (all the reels will spin) regardless of when the player operates the start switch 12, reducing the effort required by the player and improving the tempo of the game.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, all reels are spinning, and the operation of the stop switch 13 is valid (hereinafter referred to as the reel stoppable state), when the stop switch 13 is operated (pressed) (when any of the sensors detecting the left stop switch 13a, middle stop switch 13b, and right stop switch 13c changes from OFF to ON), a stop control process is executed for the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13, and the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13 stops. Note that the reel stoppable state is not limited to a state in which all reels are spinning, and a state in which any one reel is spinning can also be called the reel stoppable state.

When the reel can be stopped, the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is lit to indicate that it is enabled, and when the reel cannot be stopped even when the stop switch 13 is operated, the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is lit to indicate that it is disabled.

Here, the state where the reels cannot be stopped may be a state where the reels are rotating but the operation of the stop switch 13 is not accepted (such as when a rotation failure is being detected or when another switch managed by the main control means 100 is operated), or a state where the reels are not rotating (such as when all reels are stopped or when the left stop switch 13a is operated when the left reel is stopped).

In addition, the lighting state indicating that the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is active is when it is lit in white or red, and the lighting state indicating that the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is inactive is when it is unlit (off) or when it is lit in a color (e.g. blue) different from the lighting color indicating that it is active.

In addition, in a state where the reels can be stopped, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine unable to operate, the left stop switch 13a is pressed and the power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed (the sensor of the left stop switch 13a remains ON and the power outage recovery process is executed), the stop control process is not executed for the left reel. Also, if the power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed, the LED that constitutes the stop switch 13 is lit up to indicate that it is disabled.

As a result, for example, the left stop switch 13a is the stop switch that corresponds to the final stop operation, and even if a power outage occurs while the left reel is in a stoppable state and the left stop switch 13a is unintentionally operated when the power is turned on, the left stop switch 13a will not stop the rotation of the left reel, making it possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as missing out on a minor role that requires careful pressing. It is also possible to prevent the stop switch 13 from accepting an operation in a push order that is different from the correct push order when an internal lottery result (the so-called push order role) in which a symbol combination that is advantageous to the player stops depending on the push order is won.

In addition, in a state where the reels can be stopped, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold value and making the gaming machine unable to operate, the left stop switch 13a may be pressed, and if power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed (if a power outage recovery process is executed), a stop control process may be executed for the left reel. Even in this case, if power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed, the LED that constitutes the stop switch 13 will be lit up to indicate that it is disabled.

As a result, for example, if a power outage occurs during play, causing the operating voltage to momentarily fall below the threshold, and then the left stop switch 13a is pressed before the operating voltage exceeds the threshold and the power is automatically turned on, and the power is automatically turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the left reel stops after the power is turned on, so the game can proceed (the corresponding reel stops) regardless of when the player presses the stop switch 13, reducing the player's efforts and improving the game tempo. Note that when stopping the reel corresponding to the stop switch 13 that is pressed after power is turned on, the reel can be stopped even if the reel is accelerating, making it possible to approach the timing that the player originally wanted to stop it. However, if multiple stop switches 13 are pressed after power is turned on, none of the reels are stopped.

<Control for Responding to Power Outage During Slip Control According to the Present Embodiment>
When the start switch 12 is operated and the reel is rotating, if the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted, the reel is rotated from the acceptance position of the stop switch 13 to the stop position (so-called slip control), and the reel stops when it reaches the stop position. If the power cut process is executed during this slip control, the slip control cannot be executed, and therefore the reel cannot be stopped at the stop position.

In addition, the stop position is determined when the stop switch 13 is received, and the winning determination process is executed based on the determined stop position, so when it is determined that a small win has been won based on the stop position, regardless of whether the reels are actually stopped or not, the payout of medals based on the small win is executed.

For this reason, in a game in which a small prize is won by the internal lottery process, power-off processing is executed during slip control when the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted at a timing when the symbol corresponding to the small prize can be stopped, and even if the symbol corresponding to the small prize is not stopped on a winning line after the power is restored, the winning determination processing after all reels have stopped determines that the symbol combination corresponding to the small prize has been stopped, and medals are paid out according to the stopped symbol combination.

This is for the following reason. That is, while it has the effect of preventing a situation in which a player is unable to receive a medal payout even though he or she performed a stop operation at the timing when the medal payout should be received, it also has the problem of not being able to recognize which symbol combination the medal payout is based on. To solve this problem, in a game in which a small prize has been won by the internal lottery process, a power cut process is executed during slip control (from the time the stop acceptance is accepted until the end of the slip control) when the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted at a timing when the symbol corresponding to the small prize can be stopped, and after the power is restored, the reel is rotated to detect the index, and based on the detected index information, the reel is rotated to the stop position and then controlled to stop at the stop position, and the medals are then paid out.

By configuring it this way, even if the power is cut off during slip control, the reels will rotate to the intended stop position after the power is restored, allowing the player to visually confirm which symbol combination has been stopped, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In addition, if a power cut process is performed during slippage control, and an index is detected during re-spin processing after power is restored, the reel will move to the planned stop position even if the same symbol is present during the movement to the planned stop position. If the reel stops on the same symbol just before the planned stop position, it may result in a stop indication of a prohibited stop that will not stop during play, so a process is required to determine whether or not a stop is prohibited, but the reel is moved to the planned position to reduce the processing burden during the re-spin processing.

In addition, power-off processing is executed during slip control, and in the re-spin processing after power is restored, acceleration processing and constant speed processing are executed in the same way as the normal reel spin start processing. However, this is not limited to this, and acceleration processing and constant speed processing different from the normal processing may be executed. For example, it is possible to think of a state in which the acceleration time is shorter, the acceleration time is longer, the constant speed spin speed is slower, or the constant speed spin speed is faster. In this way, by changing the acceleration mode or constant speed mode from the normal state, it is possible to make the player aware that the spin is different from the normal state.

In addition, if the reel rotates to the same position as the stop acceptance position while rotating at a constant speed during re-spinning, the reel enters slip control as if a stop operation had been accepted, as in normal rotation processing, and when the reel rotates to the planned stop position, a full-phase excitation signal is output to the stepping motor driving the reel (in the case of a four-phase stepping motor, a four-phase excitation signal is output) to stop the re-spinning reel.

In addition, if power is cut off during slippage control, and the re-spin process is in progress after power is restored, it is possible to have the LCD display show "Re-spinning", output a voice message saying "Re-spinning", or have the error display show an error message so that the player knows that the re-spin is occurring. This allows the player to know that the re-spin is not normal.

In addition, when power-off processing is executed during slip control, a flag indicating that slip control has not been completed is stored in a specified memory area, and when power is turned on, the specified memory area is checked, and if the flag is set, re-spin processing is executed. The flag is initialized when the re-spin processing is stopped as a result of being executed, so that re-spin processing is not executed when power is turned on normally. The flag indicating that slip control has not been completed may be an error flag or a game status flag.

In addition, when a power cut process is performed during slip control, the re-rotation process may be performed automatically after the power is restored, or an error may occur after the power is restored and the re-rotation process is performed after the error is released by a reset switch. Either aspect is applicable to the re-rotation process in the following embodiments.

In addition, power-off processing may be performed during slip control, and during re-rotation processing after power is restored, the rotation failure detection counter may be updated during acceleration and constant speed, or during constant speed. Then, when the rotation failure detection counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, the above-mentioned 180), acceleration processing is performed again. Possible causes of rotation failure in this case include holding the reel by hand, loss of synchronism due to a motor malfunction, or deterioration of components over time.

In this case, the rotation failure detection counter is initialized in the initialization process when the power is turned on, and the rotation failure detection counter starts updating (counting) as the re-spin process is executed. Then, after the index is detected for the first time after the power is turned on, the value of the rotation failure detection counter is updated to 0 and updating of the rotation failure detection counter starts again, and the reel control means rotates the reel to the stop position and stops it. By clearing the rotation failure detection counter after the first index is detected in this way, even if the position of the reel stopped due to the power-off process is the position immediately after the index has passed, and the stop position is the position immediately before the index has passed, it is possible to stop the reel to the stop position without detecting a rotation failure. In other words, the reel rotates approximately two revolutions from when the power is turned on until it stops, but it is not determined that there is a rotation failure.

The timing for initializing the rotation failure detection counter is when the power is turned on, but this is not limited to the above. The rotation failure detection counter may be initialized when the stop switch 13 is received, or when the reel is in a constant speed state.

In this way, power cut processing is performed during slip control, and rotation failure is detected during re-rotation processing after power is restored, making it possible to prevent the stop position from shifting due to step-out, etc., even during re-rotation, and to stop the motor at the planned stop position. Furthermore, since rotation failure is not detected during normal slip control, re-acceleration processing is not performed if step-out, etc. occurs during normal slip control.

Next, if a power cut process is executed during slip control and an error (recoverable error) is detected during the re-spin process after the power is restored, an error is notified after the re-spin process is completed. The errors detected at this time are any of the following errors: medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passing time error, hopper retention error, hopper empty error, abnormality detection error, door open error, harness disconnection error, etc. In addition to the error code displayed on the number of acquired coins display 27, the error can be notified by an LCD, a speaker, or by lighting the upper or both side performance lamps or performance switch lamps in a specified color (for example, a highly visible color such as red or blue). Note that the error can be notified by only one error notification or by a combination of multiple error notifications.

In this way, by issuing an error notification after the re-spin process has finished, it becomes possible for players and arcade personnel to easily recognize whether the notification is regarding re-spin or an error. If a re-spin notification is issued during re-spin, the re-spin notification is terminated after the re-spin has finished and switched to an error notification. Note that no error notification is issued during re-spin, and no notifications related to re-spin that are not error notifications are issued either.

The error modes during the re-spinning process described above are not limited to these, and only some errors may be detected (for example, a hopper accumulation error may be detected but a medal accumulation error may not be detected), and the error notification mode may be such that after an error is detected, the error is notified by the acquired coin count display 27, and when the re-spinning process is completed and the reels stop, the error is notified by the LCD or speaker, or the error is notified by the acquired coin count display 27, LCD, or speaker after an error is detected.

Then, power-off processing is executed during slip control, and during the re-spin processing after the power is restored, the light of the stop switch 13 is disabled, so that the corresponding reel will not stop even if the stop switch 13 is operated.

In addition to power recovery after a power outage during slip control, situations in which the reel rotates when the power is turned on also include power recovery after a power outage during normal reel rotation. When power is restored after a power outage during normal reel rotation, the reel can be stopped and the illumination state of the lamp on the stop switch 13 is in an active state. For this reason, by checking the illumination state of the lamp on the stop switch 13 when the reel rotates when the power is turned on, it is possible to determine whether the reel is undergoing re-spin processing or normal reel rotation.

Another situation in which the reels spin when the power is turned on may be when the power is restored after being turned off while the reels are frozen. Types of freezes in which the reels spin include pseudo-games in which temporary stop control is performed by operating the stop switch 13, and reel effects in which the reels do not stop spinning even when the stop switch 13 is operated.

During simulated play, the light on the stop switch 13 lamp is in an active state, and when power is restored after a power outage during simulated play, the light on the stop switch 13 lamp is in an active state, so when the reels spin when the power is turned on, it is possible to determine whether the reel re-spin process is in progress or normal reel spinning is in progress by checking the light on the stop switch 13 lamp.

During reel performance, the light of the stop switch 13 is in an invalid state, and when power is restored after a power outage during reel performance, the light of the stop switch 13 is in an invalid state, so when the reel spins when the power is turned on, it is not possible to determine whether the reel performance is in progress or the re-spin process is in progress from the light of the stop switch 13. In this case, however, it is possible to determine this by checking a display device such as an LCD or an error display. Note that even if the light of the stop switch is in an invalid state during reel performance, when the operation of other main system switches (switches managed by the main control means 100) is enabled, the light of the other main system switches is in an valid state, so it is possible to determine whether the reel performance is in progress or the re-spin process is in progress by checking the light of the other main system switches.

In addition, when power is restored after a power outage during simulated play or reel presentation, the reels may not be rotated. In this case, since the reels do not rotate when power is restored, it is easy to determine whether or not a re-spin process is in progress based on the way the reels are spinning.

Next, if power-off processing is executed during slip control and then executed again during re-rotation processing after power is restored, the motor will rotate until the index is detected after power is restored, and then move to the planned stop position again and stop. Note that if power-off processing is executed just before the index is detected, and the index is not detected during acceleration after power is restored, the motor will rotate again until the index is detected, which can also be said to be the case.

In this way, the re-spin process can be executed even if the power is restored after a power outage during the re-spin process, making it possible to display the stopped symbols to the player even in an unstable situation where multiple power outages may occur.

The timing at which the power-off process is executed during slip control and then executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored can be either before the index is detected during the re-rotation process or after the index is detected during the re-rotation process.

<Pattern 1>
If power-off processing is executed during slip control, and the power-off processing is executed again during the re-rotation processing after the power is restored before the index is detected during the re-rotation processing, one possible mode is to rotate until the index is detected during the second re-rotation processing after the power is restored, and then rotate to the planned stop position and stop.

In this case, the index is not detected in the first re-rotation process and the reference pattern position is not stored, so the second re-rotation process determines that the reference pattern position has not been stored and executes rotation to detect the index again, allowing the reel to stop at the planned stopping position.

<Pattern 2-1>
In addition, if the power-off process is executed during slip control, and the power-off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored, the timing is after the index is detected during the re-rotation process (it is sufficient that the sensor detects the index, and this also includes the timing of the moment the sensor detects the index; the same applies hereinafter), it is possible to consider a mode in which the re-rotation process is rotated to the planned stopping position based on the reference pattern position based on the index detected before the power was removed after the power is restored, and then stopped.

In this case, since the index is detected during the first re-spin process, the reel can stop at the planned stopping position based on the stored reference symbol position, making it possible to shorten the time until gameplay can be resumed by the time it takes to detect the index.

In the above-mentioned pattern 2-1, if a power-off process is executed between the detection of the index during the first re-rotation process and the rotation to the planned stop position and the application of the brake (output of four-phase excitation), even if the timing of the power-off process is that the re-rotation has not yet reached the stop acceptance position, or even if the re-rotation has reached the stop acceptance position, the re-rotation process or stop control will be executed based on the stored reference pattern position without detecting the index again after the power is restored.

In this way, regardless of the stop acceptance position accepted immediately before the first power-off process, the same re-rotation process or stop control can be executed after the second power recovery, so the process is not complicated and the program can be speeded up.

<Pattern 2-2>
In addition, if the power-off process is executed during slip control, and the power-off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored, the index may be detected again after the power is restored, and then the motor may rotate to the planned stop position and stop.

In this case, taking into consideration the possibility that the reel may have moved between the second power outage and when power is restored, the reel will be rotated again until the index is detected again, allowing the reel to be rotated more accurately to the intended stopping position.

In the above-mentioned pattern 2-2, if a power-off process is executed between the detection of the index during the first re-rotation process and the rotation to the planned stop position and the application of the brake (output of four-phase excitation), even if the timing of the power-off process is that the rotation has not yet reached the stop acceptance position or that the rotation has reached the stop acceptance position, the re-rotation process is executed to detect the index again after the power is restored, and the pattern is moved to the planned stop position and stopped there.

In this way, regardless of the stop acceptance position accepted immediately before the first power-off process, the same re-rotation process or stop control can be executed after the second power recovery, so the process is not complicated and the program can be speeded up.

<Pattern 2-3>
In addition, if the power off process is executed during slip control, and the power off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored as the timing when the index has been detected during the re-rotation process but the pattern has not rotated to the stop acceptance position, then the re-rotation process or stop control is executed based on the stored reference pattern position without detecting the index again after the power is restored, and if the power off process is executed during slip control, and the power off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored as the timing when the index has been detected during the re-rotation process but the pattern has rotated to the stop acceptance position, then the re-rotation process to detect the index again after the power is restored is executed and the pattern is moved to the planned stop position and stopped.

In this way, the stop acceptance position accepted immediately before the first power-off process can be precisely controlled after the reference power source is restored, making it possible to execute appropriate processing according to the situation in which the power-off process was executed.

<Description of winning effects, settlement effects and insertion effects applicable to this embodiment>
Next, the relationship between the winning effect, the settlement effect and the insertion effect that can be applied to this embodiment will be described.

In the effects applicable to this embodiment described below, it is possible to simultaneously output both winning effects associated with the payout process of gaming medals based on the winning of minor roles such as push order roles, settlement effects associated with the settlement process, and deposit effects associated with betting operations, with the aim of preventing the player from mistakenly thinking that the settlement was not performed properly or that the deposit was not performed properly, and allowing the player to recognize that the gaming machine is functioning normally.

The configuration related to the winning effects, settlement effects and deposit effects that can be applied to this embodiment will be explained below.

<Main Control Means>
The main processing of the main control means is as described in the present embodiment, etc., but details of the processing omitted in the description of the present embodiment will be described below.

<Processing when a gaming medal is inserted>
If game medals are ready to be inserted, when the game medals are inserted, if the bet number is not set to the upper limit, a bet (also called a bet) is set for the number of inserted medals, and if the upper limit is set, the credit is increased by the number of inserted medals. Also, if the bet number is not set to the upper limit and the number of medals that can be bet is stored in the credit, a bet is set according to the operation of the bet switch (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19). Here, inserting game medals is equivalent to the game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 17 passing through the medal selector 34 normally.
In addition, if game medals have been set for a bet or have been accumulated in the credits, settlement processing can be performed by operating the settlement switch before starting play (after the required number of medals to be bet has been set and before the start lever has been operated).
Furthermore, the main control means (main control board 100) transmits a medal insertion command to the sub-control means (sub-control board 1000, also referred to as the presentation control means) when a gaming medal is inserted, and transmits a reserve insertion command to the sub-control means according to the number of medals set for a bet when the bet switch is operated. When credits are accumulated (added), the main control means transmits a reserve number command indicating the current number of reserved medals to the sub-control means. Based on these commands, the sub-control means can execute insertion presentations such as outputting the sound of a gaming medal being inserted.

<Winning process (payout process)>
The winning process (hereinafter also referred to as the payout process) is a process of paying out a predetermined game medal according to the winning minor combination (the stopped and displayed symbol combination) when it is determined that the minor combination has won a prize by the winning determination process. Paying out the game medal here means that if the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit, the credits are added, and if the accumulated credits have reached the upper limit, the game medals are paid out from the hopper 44. The main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means when starting a payout based on the winning (whether it is the addition of credits or the payout from the hopper 44), and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means when ending the payout based on the winning. Based on the payout start command and the payout end command, the sub-control means can execute a winning performance such as outputting a payout sound of the game medals and executing a back lamp performance (also referred to as a BL performance). The payout start command includes information on the number of game medals to be paid out, and the payout start command and the payout end command are sent even when there is no payout (when there is a loss or a win in replay). When there is a loss or a win in replay, the number of game medals to be paid out is sent as 0, and then the payout end command is sent.

<Settlement process>
When the settlement switch is operated while no game is being played, a process of paying out (settlement) game medals to the player from the hopper 44 in a number corresponding to the set bet amount or the accumulated credit amount is executed. When the settlement process is started, the main control means transmits a settlement start command to the sub-control means, and when the settlement process is completed, the main control means transmits a settlement end command to the sub-control means. Based on the settlement start command and settlement end command, the sub-control means can execute settlement effects such as outputting a settlement sound.

<Secondary Control Means>
Various effects can be executed according to the progress of the game, and effects are executed based on the results of the lottery for the role (the result of an internal lottery), push order navigation effects are executed during the AT, and throw-in effects, winning effects, settlement effects, etc. are executed.

<Introducing performance>
This is a performance executed when a game medal is inserted or a bet switch is operated, and an insertion sound is output based on a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command transmitted from the main control means. In the main control means, as the reserve insertion command, one of the reserve insertion command (1 medal), the reserve insertion command (2 medals), and the reserve insertion command (3 medals) is set according to the number of medals set to be bet, and the set reserve insertion command is transmitted to the sub-control means. When the reserve insertion command (1 medal) is received, the insertion sound A indicating that one medal has been bet is output once (for example, a "da" sound is output) to inform the player that one medal has been bet. When the reserve insertion command (3 medals) is received, the insertion sound A is output three times to inform the player that three medals have been bet. When the medal insertion command is received, if the inserted game medal is set to be bet, the insertion sound A is output once, and if it is reserved, the insertion sound B indicating that one medal has been reserved is output once (for example, a "ji" sound is output) to inform the player that it has been bet or reserved.
When a reserve input command (3 coins) is received, input sound C indicating that 3 coins have been bet may be output instead of outputting input sound A three times, or the same sound may be output when a bet is set and when the coins are reserved (for example, input sound A may be output in all states). Also, a different sound (input sound D) may be output during normal times (non-AT) and during AT.

<Winning Performance>
This is an effect executed when game medals are paid out, and is executed based on a payout start command and a payout end command, and includes output of a payout sound indicating that game medals are being paid out, and execution of a back lamp effect.

<Dispensing sound output>
There are two different sounds, payout sound A and payout sound B, for the payout sound of the game medals that are output during the execution of the payout process of the game medals. Payout sound A is a payout sound that is output when the push order role is won during normal times (non-AT), and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct pattern combination stops, and an advantageous payout is performed. Payout sound B is a payout sound that is output when the push order role is won during AT, and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct pattern combination stops, and an advantageous payout is performed. If the operation is not performed in the correct push order, an incorrect pattern combination may stop and an unfavorable payout may be performed, but in that case, the payout sound is not output. Payout sound A is a payout sound that starts when a payout start command is received, and repeats the output of a first sound (e.g., a "zu" sound) until a payout end command is received, and then ends after repeating the output of the first sound for a first specific time (e.g., 1 second) after receiving the payout end command. The payout sound A is output for a first payout sound period (the period obtained by adding the first specific time to the period during which the actual payout is being performed) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being performed (the period during which the payout process is being performed), thereby making it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being performed. Also, by outputting the payout sound for the first payout sound period that is longer than the period during which the payout is being performed, the player is made to recognize that a payout is being performed during the period during which the payout sound is being output, and it is expected that the start time of the next game will be delayed, so that when a performance based on the result of an internal lottery is being performed over a certain period of time, it is easier to perform the performance without being canceled midway.

The payout sound B is a payout sound that starts when a payout start command is received, repeats the output of a second sound (e.g., a "de" sound) until a payout end command is received, and then repeats the output of the second sound for a second specific time (e.g., 2 seconds) after the payout end command is received and ends. That is, the payout sound B outputs a sound for a second payout sound period (a period obtained by adding the second specific time to the period during which the actual payout is performed) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed, and this second payout sound period is longer than the first payout sound period of the payout sound A. In this way, the payout sound B outputs a payout sound for a longer period than the payout sound A, so that it can be recognized as if more game medals have been awarded. In addition, by outputting a payout sound B different from the payout sound A during the AT, it is possible to easily recognize that the player is in a favorable state different from the normal state.
In addition, the payout sound is output from the time the payout end command is received until the first specific time or the second specific time has elapsed, but when the payout start command is received, the payout sound may be output for the time taken from the start of payout to the end of payout (the longer of the credit addition and the payout of the game medals) plus the first specific time or the second specific time, without being triggered by the payout end command. Also, the payout sound A during normal operation and the payout sound B during AT are different, but the same payout sound may be output.

<Back lamp effect>
There are two different back lamp effects, a back lamp effect A and a back lamp effect B. The back lamp effect A is a back lamp effect that is output when the push order role is won during normal times (non-AT), and the correct symbol combination is stopped as a result of operation in the correct push order, and an advantageous payout is performed. The back lamp effect B is a back lamp effect that is executed when the push order role is won during AT, and the correct symbol combination is stopped as a result of operation in the correct push order, and an advantageous payout is performed. If the operation is not performed in the correct push order, an incorrect symbol combination may stop, but in that case, the back lamp effect is not executed. The back lamp effect A starts when a payout start command is received, and the back lamp is turned on and off repeatedly in a first pattern until a payout end command is received, and after the payout end command is received, the back lamp is turned on and off repeatedly in a first pattern for a first specific time (for example, 1 second) and ends. By executing the back lamp effect A for a first back lamp effect period (the period obtained by adding the above-mentioned first specific time to the period during which the actual payout is being performed) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being performed, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the payout is being performed. Also, by executing (outputting) the back lamp effect A for the first back lamp effect period that is longer than the period during which the payout is being performed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the payout is being performed during the period during which the back lamp effect A is being performed, and it is expected that the start time of the next game will be delayed, and further, when a performance according to the result of the internal lottery is being performed over a certain period of time, it is easier to execute it without being canceled midway.

The back lamp performance B starts when a payout start command is received, and the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in the second pattern until a payout end command is received. After the payout end command is received, the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in the second pattern for a second specific time (for example, 2 seconds) and ends. In other words, the back lamp performance B is repeatedly turned on and off for a second back lamp performance period (the period during which the actual payout is performed plus the second specific time) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed, and this second back lamp performance period is longer than the first back lamp performance period. In this way, the back lamp performance B can be made to recognize that more game medals have been awarded by executing the back lamp performance for a longer period than the back lamp performance A. In addition, by executing the back lamp performance B, which is different from the back lamp performance A, during the AT, it is possible to easily recognize that the player is in an advantageous state that is different from the normal state.

The back lamp performance is executed from the time the payout end command is received until the first specific time or the second specific time has elapsed, but when the payout start command is received, the back lamp performance may be executed for the time taken from the start of payout to the end of payout (whichever is longer than the addition of credits and the payout of game medals) plus the first specific time or the second specific time, without being triggered by the payout end command. In addition, the back lamp performance is different during normal play and during AT, but the same back lamp performance may be executed. In addition, the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in a certain pattern, but a series of on and off patterns may be determined and output from the start to the end of the back lamp performance. In addition, the "first back lamp performance period" of the back lamp performance A and the "first payout sound period" of the payout sound A are both the period during which the actual payout is performed plus the first specific time, and both are the same period, but these "first back lamp performance period" and "first payout sound period" may be different periods from each other. The same applies to the relationship between the "second back lamp performance period" of the back lamp performance B and the "second payout sound period" of the payout sound B. In short, the "first payout sound period" and "second payout sound period" of the payout sounds A and B, and the "first back lamp performance period" and "second back lamp performance period" of the back lamp performance A and B are each longer than the period during which actual payout is being performed, and as long as the relationship is "first payout sound period" < "second payout sound period" and "first back lamp performance period" < "second back lamp performance period," these periods can be set appropriately.

＜Settlement Performance＞
This is an effect executed when the game medals are settled, and is executed based on a settlement start command and a settlement end command, and a settlement sound (settlement effect) indicating that the game medals are being paid out and a voice indicating that the settlement is completed are output. The settlement sound starts when the settlement start command is received, and a sound different from the payout sound (for example, a "do" sound) is repeatedly output until the payout end command is received, and after the payout end command is received, a voice indicating that the settlement is completed, such as "settlement has been completed," is output in a third specific period (for example, 5 seconds), and ends. In other words, in the settlement effect, the sound is output over a predetermined settlement effect period (the period in which the actual payout is performed plus the third specific time) that is longer than the period in which the actual payout is performed (the period in which the settlement process is performed).

Below, various effects executed according to the progress of the game will be explained with reference to Figs. 22 to 26. Fig. 22 is a time chart when the insertion operation is not performed with the MAX BET switch after the payout process is completed, Fig. 23 is a time chart when the insertion operation is performed with the MAX BET switch after the payout process is completed, Fig. 24 is a time chart when the settlement operation is performed with the settlement switch after the payout process is completed, Fig. 25 is a time chart when the game medal is not inserted after the settlement process is completed, and Fig. 26 is a time chart when the game medal is inserted after the settlement process is completed. Note that for convenience of explanation, ON and OFF are used in Figs. 22 to 26, but the corresponding processing and performance status are written in parentheses. Specifically, for the payout process/settlement process/BL performance/settlement performance, ON indicates a state in which it is being executed, and OFF indicates a state in which it is not being executed, and when it changes from OFF to ON, it means that the processing etc. is started, and when it changes from ON to OFF, it means that it is ended. For the payout sound/insertion sound, ON indicates that it is being output, and OFF indicates that it is not being output. For the MAX bet lamp/medal insertion possible lamp, ON indicates that it is lit, and OFF indicates that it is off. For the MAX bet switch operation/settlement switch operation, ON indicates that it has been operated, and OFF indicates that it has not been operated. For medal insertion, ON indicates that the inserted game medal has passed through the medal selector 34 (the insertion sensor provided on the medal selector 34 has detected the game medal), and OFF indicates that a game medal has not been inserted.

<If the MAX bet switch is not used to insert bets after the payout process is completed>
As shown in FIG. 22, the main control means starts the payout process at the timing of time t0, and the sub-control means starts the output of the payout sound A (written as payout sound in the figure, the same below) and the back lamp effect A (written as BL effect in the figure, the same below) based on the received payout start command. At the timing of time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means. The sub-control means continues the output of the payout sound A and the back lamp effect A as a winning effect for the T1 period (first specific time) based on the payout end command. After the payout process ends at the timing of time t1, the main control means performs a process such as updating the RT state (game end check process) and turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game medals. The main control means turns on the MAX bet lamp based on the fact that it is possible to insert game medals at the timing of time t2. The MAX bet lamp continues to be lit because the MAX bet switch was not operated. At the timing of time t5, since the T1 period has elapsed since the timing of time t1, the sub-control means ends the output of the payout sound A and the back lamp effect A. That is, the period from time t0 to t5 can be said to be the first payout sound period and the first back lamp effect period. As described above, even if various situations are combined, such as continuing the output of the payout sound A and the back lamp effect A and turning on the MAX BET lamp, at the timing after time t1, smooth control is possible, and by continuing the output of the payout sound A, the player is made aware that a payout has been made, and is also made aware that a bet can be set by the MAX BET operation, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine.

<When inserting a bet using the MAX bet switch after the payout process is completed>
As shown in FIG. 23, until the timing of time t2, it is the same as when the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process is completed, and at the timing of time t3, the MAX bet switch is operated. By operating the MAX bet switch, the main control means ends (turns off) the illumination of the MAX bet lamp, the sub control means ends the back lamp performance A, and outputs the insertion sound A (written as insertion sound in the figure, the same below) three times as the insertion performance from the timing of time t3 to the timing of time t4 (during the T2 period). Even if various situations such as outputting the payout sound A while outputting the insertion sound A are combined at the timing after time t3, smooth control is possible, and thus, while the player is made aware that the payout has been performed, the MAX bet switch has been operated and the bet setting has been performed, and the performance of the gaming machine can be improved. In addition, the output of the payout sound A continues at the timing of time t3, but by ending the back lamp performance A, the player is made aware that the payout has been performed by sound, and the bet setting has been performed visually. Although the explanation has been given in connection with FIG. 23 regarding the insertion operation using the MAX BET switch, the insertion sound is also output in the same manner when an insertion operation using the 1 BET switch or when a coin is inserted.

<When settlement operation is performed using the settlement button after the dispensing process is completed>
As shown in FIG. 24, up to the timing of time t2, it is the same as when the MAX bet switch is operated after the payout process is completed, and at the timing of time t3, the settlement button is operated instead of the operation of the MAX bet switch. At the timing of time t3, the main control means starts the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement button, and ends (turns off) the illumination of the MAX bet lamp. Then, the sub-control means ends the output of the payout sound A and the back lamp performance A at the timing of time t3 without waiting for the lapse of the T1 period. After that, the output of the settlement sound is started as the settlement performance based on the settlement start command. At the timing of time t6, the main control means ends the settlement process and transmits a settlement end command to the sub-control means. When the sub-control means receives the settlement end command, it replaces the output of the settlement sound with the output of a sound indicating that the settlement has been completed for the T3 period (third specific time). When the settlement process is started, if the payout sound A and the settlement sound are output simultaneously, it will confuse the player, so by terminating the output of the payout sound A and the back lamp effect A, which were scheduled to continue for the T1 period, when the settlement process is started, the player can be made to accurately recognize that a settlement process different from the payout process is being performed.

<If you do not insert a medal after the settlement process is complete>
As shown in FIG. 25, at the timing of time t8, the main control means starts the settlement process, and the sub-control means starts outputting a settlement sound as a settlement effect based on the settlement start command received. Here, the back lamp effect is not executed (output) during settlement, so that the payout process and the settlement process can be visually different processes. At the timing of time t9, the main control means ends the settlement process and transmits a settlement end command to the sub-control means. When the sub-control means receives the settlement end command, it outputs a sound indicating that the settlement has been completed, instead of outputting the settlement sound, for a period of T3. After the settlement process is completed at the timing of time t9, the main control means makes it possible to insert a game medal by turning on the blocker. At the timing of time t10, the main control means turns on the medal insertion possible lamp based on the fact that the game medal is ready to be inserted. Since no medals were inserted thereafter, the lamp remains lit. At the timing of time T13, since the timing of time t9 has passed, the sub-control means ends the output of the sound indicating that the settlement has been completed. As described above, the settlement effect is executed from time t10 onwards, but it is possible to insert medals.

<If you insert a medal after the settlement process is complete>
As shown in Fig. 26, up to the timing of time t10, the situation is the same as when no gaming medal is inserted after the settlement process is completed, and at the timing of time t11, the main control means inserts a gaming medal, sets a bet on one medal, and transmits a medal insertion command to the sub-control means. The sub-control means outputs insertion sound A once as an insertion effect based on receiving the medal insertion command, and outputs the sound from the timing of time t11 to the timing of time t12. Even when various situations are combined, such as outputting a sound indicating that settlement has been completed and outputting insertion sound A at the timing after time t11, smooth control is possible, and this allows the player to recognize that the settlement process has been completed, while also recognizing that a medal has been inserted and a bet has been set, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. 22 to 26, the payout sound is payout sound A and the BL effect is back lamp effect A. However, in these Figs. 22 to 26, the payout sound may be payout sound B and the BL effect may be back lamp effect B (in this case, it goes without saying that the T1 period in Figs. 22 and 38 is to be read as the second specific time). Even in this case, the same effect as described above is achieved.

<Changes in form>
We have explained a configuration in which the same sound is repeatedly output during the dispensing process or settlement process until it is completed, but in addition to the commands mentioned above, the main control means may send to the sub-control means a command indicating that one coin has been dispensed or a command that can identify the remaining number of coins to be dispensed each time a coin is dispensed, and the sub-control means may output a dispensing sound or settlement sound each time a coin is dispensed based on receiving these commands sent from the main control means.
Also, the settlement sound is different from the payout sound, but it may be the same as the payout sound. By making them the same sound, the amount of sound data can be reduced, leading to a reduction in data capacity. If they are the same sound, the presence or absence of a backlight effect can distinguish between the payout process and the settlement process, allowing the player to recognize that the settlement process is being performed appropriately, even if the settlement process is performed immediately after the payout process.
The settlement sound may be the same sound as the error sound. In this case, the sound data can be reduced, leading to a reduction in data capacity.
Also, during the AT, the payout sound B is output, but in addition to outputting the payout sound B from the start of the payout process, a sound such as "Get" or "Yeesss" indicating the correct push order may be output from the start of the payout process to the time when the payout process ends and the second specific time (2 seconds) has elapsed. By outputting the sound indicating the correct push order, the player can recognize that the stop switch has been operated correctly, and by outputting the payout sound for a longer time than the sound indicating the correct push order, the player can recognize that the game medals have also been properly paid out.
In addition, although the MAX bed lamp is turned on and off by the main control means, the main control means may transmit to the sub-control means whether or not the MAX bed switch is in an operable state, and the sub-control means may turn the lamp on and off.

In addition, although it has been explained that a sound is output to indicate that a bid has been inserted, in addition to outputting the sound, an image indicating that a bid has been inserted may be displayed on the display device 32, or an LED lamp for presentation purposes may be used to notify the user that a bid has been inserted.
In addition, although the winning effect is described as being a payout sound output and a back lamp effect, an image indicating that a prize has been won (for example, displaying "GET") may be displayed on the display device 32, or an LED lamp for effect may be used to notify the player that a prize has been won. In this case, when the throw-in effect is executed, the display on the display device 32 as the winning effect or the notification by the LED lamp may be terminated, or the display on the display device 32 and the notification by the LED lamp as the throw-in effect may not be executed.
In addition, as the settlement effect, a settlement sound and a voice indicating that settlement has been completed are output, but an image indicating that settlement processing is in progress (for example, a display indicating "Settlement in progress") may be displayed on the display device 32, or an LED lamp for the effect may be used to notify that settlement is in progress. In this case, when the insertion effect is executed, the display on the display device 32 may be terminated or the notification by the LED lamp may be terminated as the settlement effect, or the display on the display device 32 and the notification by the LED lamp may not be executed as the insertion effect.
In addition, although the winning performance is executed for the push order role, it may be executed for other minor roles (such as the watermelon role, the bell role or the cherry role that do not require pushing order, etc.) For other minor roles, a payout sound different from the push order role or a back lamp performance different from the push order role is executed, so that the player can easily recognize that a role different from the push order role has won.
Furthermore, the times and lengths of the periods in this embodiment are merely examples and can be changed in various ways.

<Description of errors and winning effects related to the hopper 44 applicable to this embodiment>
Next, the relationship between errors related to the hopper 44 and winning effects applicable to this embodiment will be described.

In the presentation applicable to this embodiment described below, the purpose is to allow the player to recognize the result of the game or presentation before a hopper empty error occurs when a winning presentation is performed following the start of the payout process or a presentation after the reels have stopped.

The following describes the configuration related to errors related to the hopper 44 and winning effects that can be applied to this embodiment.

<Main Control Means>
The main processing of the main control means is as described in this embodiment and in the explanation of the winning effects, settlement effects and deposit effects that are applicable to this embodiment, but details of the processing that are omitted in the description of this embodiment will be explained below.

<Winning process (payout process)>
The payout process is a process of paying out a game medal that is determined in advance according to the winning minor role (the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed) when it is determined by the winning determination process that a minor role has been won. Paying out the game medal here means that if the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit, the credits are added, and if the accumulated credits have reached the upper limit, the game medals are paid out from the hopper 44. In order to pay out the game medals from the hopper 44, the main control means (main control board 100) drives the hopper motor by inputting a drive signal (ON state) to the hopper motor, and discharges the game medals one by one by rotating the rotating disk, and when the payout sensor detects the game medal for a predetermined time (the time from the start of passage to the end of passage is between 3 ms and 200 ms), it is determined that one game medal has been paid out. Furthermore, the main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means (sub-control board 1000) when starting a payout based on a win (whether it is adding credits or paying out from the hopper 44), and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means when it is to end the payout. Based on the payout start command, the sub-control means is capable of executing winning effects such as displaying the payout number and the cumulative difference in number of medals. The payout start command includes information on the number of medals to be paid out, and the payout start command and payout end command are also transmitted when there is no payout (when there is a loss or when there is a win in a replay). When there is a loss or when there is a win in a replay, information on the number of medals to be paid out is transmitted as 0, followed by the payout end command.

<Error regarding hopper 44>
A hopper retention error, a hopper empty error, and an abnormality detection error can be detected as errors related to the hopper 44. The hopper retention error is an error that occurs when it is determined that the payout outlet of the hopper 44 is clogged with game medals when the game medals are paid out, the hopper empty error is an error that occurs when it is determined that the hopper is empty of game medals, and the abnormality detection error is an error that occurs when it is determined that an abnormal input has been made to the payout sensor of the hopper 44.
When the main control means detects an error and notifies the error, it transmits an error notification start command including information on the type of error to the sub-control means, and transmits an error recovery command when the error is released. The sub-control means, based on the error notification start command, displays error information (error screen) corresponding to the type of error detected on the display device 32, and based on the error recovery command, ends the error screen display and returns to the display before the error occurred.
In addition, the main control means transmits an error detection command indicating that an error has been detected at the timing when the abnormality detection error is detected, and the sub-control means displays that an abnormality has been detected based on the error detection command.

<Hopper accumulation error>
When game medals are dispensed from the hopper 44, a drive signal is input to the hopper motor to rotate the turntable and perform the game medal dispense operation, and if the dispense sensor continues to detect a game medal for a certain period of time (201 ms) or more, it is determined that the game medals have become clogged, and a hopper retention error is set.
<Hopper empty error>
When game medals are dispensed from the hopper 44, even if a drive signal is input to the hopper motor to perform the game medal dispensing operation of rotating the turntable, if no game medals are detected by the dispensing sensor for a certain period of time (3.5 seconds), it is determined that the hopper 44 is empty of game medals, and a hopper empty error is set.
<Abnormality detection error>
When the payout sensor detects an abnormal input for a certain period of time (3 ms) or more when the game medal is not being paid out, it is determined that an abnormal input has been made to the payout sensor, and an abnormality detection error is set. The error display is performed when the game is not being played (when waiting for the insertion of a game medal or waiting for the start lever to be operated).

<Secondary Control Means>
Various effects can be executed depending on the progress of the game, and effects can be executed based on the results of the role selection (internal lottery results), error notifications can be executed, push order navigation effects can be executed during the AT, winning effects can be executed, a result screen can be displayed, result announcement effects can be executed, and so on.

<Winning Performance>
This is an effect that is executed when game medals are paid out, and includes an acquisition display effect that indicates that a predetermined number of game medals will be paid out, and an accumulation display effect that indicates that the game medals acquired by the player have accumulated to a predetermined number. The acquisition display effect and the accumulation display effect are executed based on the sub-control means receiving a payout start command.

<Acquisition display effect>
The acquisition display effect is an effect that is executed when a push order role is won during the AT, and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct symbol combination stops and an advantageous payout is made. The acquisition display effect may be displayed as "GET" without specifying the game medals to be paid out, or may be displayed as "GET 12 medals" so that it is specifically specified that 12 game medals will be paid out. If a push order role is won during the AT and the correct push order is not operated, an incorrect symbol combination stops and an unfavorable payout (such as a payout of one medal, which is less than the number of game medals in the correct symbol combination) may be made, but in that case the acquisition display effect is not executed.
The acquisition display effect starts when a payout start command is received, and is executed for a predetermined acquisition display effect period (1 second) that is shorter than the period during which actual payout is being performed (the period during which the payout process is being performed). Therefore, it is executed even if all game medals that are actually to be paid out to the player have not been paid out. This is to prevent the effect from being canceled by the start of the next game or being confused with the result of the next game if the acquisition display effect is executed after all game medals have been paid out. In addition, by executing the acquisition display effect even if all game medals have not been paid out, it is possible to make the player aware of the result of the game (that a payout will be obtained) in advance.

<Cumulative display effect>
The cumulative display effect is an effect that is executed when the cumulative number of game medals acquired by the player during the AT (also referred to as the total number of game medals) exceeds a prescribed number for the first time (500, 1000, 1500, 2000). Specifically, the cumulative number of acquired medals is counted during one AT from the start of the AT, and the cumulative display effect is executed (started) when it is determined that the cumulative number exceeds 500 due to the payout of game medals. Thereafter, even if the cumulative number falls below 500 and exceeds 500 again, the cumulative display effect is not executed. As for the form of the cumulative display effect, "GET 500 medals" or the like is displayed according to the prescribed number.
The cumulative display effect is started when a payout start command is received and it is determined that the cumulative number will exceed the specified number due to the payout, and is executed for a predetermined cumulative display effect period (1 second) that is shorter than the period during which the actual payout is being performed (the period during which the payout process is being performed). As with the acquisition display effect, it is executed even if the game medals actually paid out to the player do not exceed the specified number. This is to prevent the timing of executing the cumulative display effect from varying if the cumulative display effect is executed at the timing when the specified number is actually exceeded, and the effect is canceled by the start of the next game, or is confused with the result of the next game. In addition, by executing the cumulative display effect even if the specified number is not exceeded, the player can be made aware of the result of the game (exceeding the specified number) in advance.
In addition, although the conditions for executing both the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect may be satisfied in one game, in this embodiment, in a game in which the cumulative display effect can be executed, in principle, only the cumulative display effect is executed without executing the acquisition display effect. However, a case where the acquisition display effect is executed differently from the principle will be described later.

<Results screen display>
The result screen displayed in this embodiment is a screen displayed when the AT ends, and displays the total number of game medals acquired during the AT, the number of games indicating the execution period of the AT, etc. When the result screen is displayed, a display for calling attention (a display to prevent addiction) is also displayed. When the final game of the AT ends (when the all-reel stop command is received), the display of the result screen begins, and the display of the result screen continues until the next game begins. Note that only the acquisition display effect can be executed during the display of the result screen in the final game, and even if any of the specified numbers is exceeded in the final game, the cumulative display effect is not executed. For example, if a push order role is won and the correct push order is operated, the correct pattern combination stops, an advantageous payout is performed, and the specified number of 500 coins is exceeded, if it is not the final game, the cumulative display effect is executed, but if it is the final game, the result screen is displayed, so the cumulative display effect is executed without executing the acquisition display effect. This is because the total number of game medals won during the AT is displayed on the result screen, and if the cumulative display effect is also executed, similar information will be displayed on top of each other, confusing the player.

<Results announcement>
The result notification effect is an effect for notifying the player that an advantageous result has been obtained, and is an effect executed in the final game of the consecutive effects. Specifically, it is an effect for notifying the player whether an advantageous result has been obtained, such as winning a bonus, winning an additional number of games remaining in the AT, or winning a specialized zone that increases the chance of additional bonuses. As an example, whether an advantageous result has been obtained is notified based on the result of a battle effect or the like. If an advantageous result has been obtained, an image showing success or victory is displayed, and if an advantageous result has not been obtained, an image showing failure or defeat is displayed. In the battle effect, a screen in which a friendly character and an enemy character confront each other is displayed in response to a lever operation, and after all the reels have stopped (due to receipt of a command to stop all reels), the friendly character and the enemy character compete against each other, and after a certain time has passed and a branching timing for the effect has elapsed, an image showing success or victory, or an image showing failure or defeat is displayed. The timing of the branching effect is 2.7 seconds after the start of the payout process, and the result notification effect ends when an image showing success or victory or an image showing failure or defeat is displayed, which is 3 seconds after the start of the payout process. This allows the result notification effect to end before an error screen is displayed when a hopper empty error occurs (is detected), and the player can check whether or not there is a favorable result, regardless of the occurrence of an error. Note that the all reels stop command and the payout start command are sent at approximately the same time, so the start of the payout process may be replaced with after all reels have stopped.

Various effects executed according to the progress of the game will be described below with reference to Fig. 27 to Fig. 32. Fig. 27 is a time chart when payout is performed normally, Fig. 28 is a time chart when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs), Fig. 29 is a time chart when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs), Fig. 30 is an example of a display screen when payout is performed normally, Fig. 31 is an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs), and Fig. 32 is an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs).
In addition, in Figs. 27 to 29, ON and OFF are used for convenience of explanation, but the status of the corresponding processing and presentation is described in parentheses. Specifically, ON of the payout processing indicates a state in which it is being executed, OFF indicates a state in which it is not being executed, and when it changes from OFF to ON, it means that the processing, etc. is started, and when it changes from ON to OFF, it means that it is finished. ON of the payout indicates that one game medal has been paid out, and OFF indicates that no game medal has been paid out. ON of the acquisition display presentation and the accumulation display presentation indicates a state in which the presentation is being executed (displayed), and OFF indicates that it is not being executed (not displayed). ON of the result notification presentation indicates a state in which it is being executed (presentation is progressing), and OFF indicates that it is not being executed (presentation has ended and the display has stopped on the screen that notifies the result). ON of the error (empty hopper) and error (hopper retention) indicates a state in which an error has occurred (an error has been detected and an error has been set), and OFF indicates a state in which no error has occurred. The error display ON indicates a state in which an error has occurred and an error code is displayed by the main control means or an error screen is displayed by the sub-control means, while OFF indicates a state in which neither an error code nor an error screen is displayed.

Figures 30 to 32 show the case where the acquisition display effect is executed, and when the cumulative display effect is executed, the notation "GET 12 coins" displayed in the acquisition display effect in the figures changes to the notation "GET 500 coins" displayed in the cumulative display effect.

It is possible to combine the winning effect, settlement effect and deposit effect described above, and times t0 and t1 in Figures 22 to 24 are the same as times t0 and t1 in Figure 27. Time t5 in Figures 22 and 23 is later than time t1 in Figure 27 and earlier than time t15.

<If the payment is successful>
As shown in FIG. 27, the main control means starts the payout process at time t0, and the sub-control means starts the acquisition display effect or the accumulation display effect based on the received payout start command. At time t14, one second later, the sub-control means ends the acquisition display effect or the accumulation display effect. After that, at time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means. The time related to the payout process is 1.5 seconds if it is executed normally (in this example, 12 game medals are normally paid out). The acquisition display effect starts when the payout process starts and ends before the payout process ends. This allows the player to recognize that game medals will be acquired and that the cumulative number of acquired game medals will exceed a predetermined number before the payout process is completed. Since the result notification effect is executed from the start of the game, it is already being executed at the time the payout process is started. At time t15, the result notification effect becomes the effect branch timing, and the display after this timing is different depending on whether an image indicating success or victory is displayed or an image indicating failure or defeat is displayed. At time t16, the result notification effect that was being executed ends. Time t15 is 2.7 seconds after the start of the payout process, and time t16 is 3 seconds after the start of the payout process.

<When normal dispensing is not performed (when a hopper empty error occurs)>
As shown in FIG. 28, the main control means starts the payout process at the timing of time t0, and the sub-control means starts the acquisition display effect or the accumulation display effect based on the received payout start command. After the timing of time t0, the payout process is executed, but since there are no game medals in the hopper 44, the game medals are not paid out and the rotation of the wheel continues. Then, at the timing of time t17, the main control means determines that the game medals in the hopper 44 are empty, ends the payout process, and sets a hopper empty error. Based on the occurrence of the hopper empty error, the main control means displays an error code, and the sub-control means displays an error screen. At the other timings of time t14, t15, and t16, as in FIG. 27, at the timing of time t14, the acquisition display effect or the accumulation display effect is ended, at the timing of time t15, the effect branching timing is reached, and at the timing of time t16, the result notification effect is ended. The period during which the winning display effect and the cumulative display effect are executed and the period until the result notification effect is ended are set shorter than the period from when the payout process starts until a hopper empty error occurs, so that it is possible to check the contents of the winning display effect, the cumulative display effect and the result notification effect before a hopper empty error occurs and an error screen is displayed.
Note that this figure shows a case in which a hopper empty error occurs without a single medal being paid out after the start of the payout process; if a hopper empty error occurs after multiple game medals have been paid out, the timing at which the hopper empty error occurs will be later than time t17 by the time the multiple game medals have been paid out.

<When delivery is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs)>
As shown in Fig. 29, at the timing of time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means starts the acquisition display effect or the accumulation display effect based on the received payout start command. After the timing of time t0, the payout process is executed, but the payout of the game medals is not executed because the game medals are stuck in the outlet of the hopper 44. Then, at the timing of time t18, since the payout sensor of the hopper 44 has continuously detected the game medals for 201 ms or more since the start of the payout process, the main control means judges that the game medals are stuck, ends the payout process, and sets a hopper retention error. At the timing of time t18, the main control means displays an error code based on the occurrence of the hopper retention error, and the sub-control means cancels (ends the display of) the executed acquisition display effect or accumulation display effect and the executed result notification effect, and displays an error screen. The acquisition display effect or the cumulative display effect is executed from the start of the payout process, and is therefore executed before the payout process is started and a hopper congestion error occurs, so it is possible to check the contents of the acquisition display effect or the cumulative display effect before the error screen is displayed.
Note that this figure shows a case where a hopper retention error occurs after not a single medal has been paid out since the start of the payout process; if a hopper retention error occurs after multiple game medals have been paid out, the timing at which the hopper retention error occurs will be later than time t18 by the amount of time it takes for multiple game medals to be paid out, and the period for executing the acquisition display effect, accumulation display effect, and result announcement effect will be longer.

Although the execution of the winning display effect, cumulative display effect, and result notification effect is canceled and not displayed, the effect itself may be executed while an error screen is displayed superimposed on the effect to make it invisible. In this case, if the error is cleared during the execution of the effect, the effect being executed becomes visible from the moment the error is cleared. However, the reset switch must be operated to clear the error, and since the reset switch is located inside the cabinet, it is necessary to unlock the locking device and open the front panel PS2. Normally, it takes more than three seconds from the start of the payout process to the end of the result notification effect before the error can be cleared, so even if a hopper retention error occurs and the hopper retention error is cleared in the shortest time possible, the winning display effect, cumulative display effect, and result notification effect will not return to being executed, but will return to the screen after all effects have finished.

<Display screen when payment is successful>
FIG. 30 shows an example of a display screen when a payout has been made normally. FIG. 30 shows a scene in which a game has been played with 11 games remaining in the AT and a total of 230 game medals have been acquired, and a battle effect (result announcement effect) is being executed. The number of remaining games is displayed in the upper left of the screen (since the game was played with 11 games remaining, one is subtracted and 10G (games) is displayed). The total number of game medals acquired in the AT is displayed as 230 in the upper right of the screen. Friendly characters (characters with round heads) are displayed on the left side of the center of the screen, and enemy characters (characters with star-shaped heads) are displayed on the right side.

Figure (a) shows the screen when all reels have stopped during the battle performance (received command to stop all reels), and the performance progresses from this point on to announce the result. Figure (b) shows the screen at time t0 in Figure 27, when the payout process has started. One medal has been paid out, increasing the total number of medals from 230 to 231, and the "GET 12 medals" display moves from the right side of the screen toward the center so that it can be specified that 12 medals will be paid out as an acquisition display. In the center of the screen, a competition between ally characters and enemy characters has begun. Figure (c) shows the time when three medals have been paid out, and the "GET 12 medals" display is displayed large in the center of the screen so that it can be specified that 12 medals will be paid out as an acquisition display. The competition between ally characters and enemy characters continues.

27(d) shows the timing when eight game medals have been paid out, and the large "12 medals GET" display in the center of the screen is moving toward the left side of the screen toward the end of the acquisition display effect. FIG. 27(e) shows the timing of time t15 in FIG. 27, when the payout of game medals has ended and the effect branching timing has occurred. Since the payout of game medals has ended, the total number of game medals is displayed as 242. In the center of the screen, the ally character and enemy character continue to compete. FIG. 27(f) shows the timing after the effect branching timing, and the process of displaying an image indicating success is displayed. The ally character is enlarged from the competition between the ally character and enemy character, and it is possible to recognize that it has been a success. FIG. 27(g) shows the timing of time t16 in FIG. 27, when the battle effect ends. "Success" is displayed in the lower right of the screen, clearly indicating that it was a success effect. The image displayed in FIG. 27(g) ends as an effect, but will continue to be displayed until the next game starts. Figure 27(h) shows the timing after the branching point in the effect, and shows the process of displaying an image indicating failure. The enemy character is enlarged in the image of the friendly character competing with the enemy character, making it clear that this will result in failure. Figure 27(i) shows the timing of time t16 in Figure 27, when the battle effect ends. "Failure" is displayed in the bottom right of the screen, making it clear that the effect indicated failure. The image displayed in Figure 27(i) has ended as an effect, but will continue to be displayed until the start of the next game.

<Display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (hopper empty error occurs)>
FIG. 31 shows an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs). In (a) to (i) of the same figure, the flow of the acquisition display effect, the accumulation display effect, and the result notification effect is the same as in FIG. 30. However, since no game medals are paid out after the start of the payout process, the total number of game medals in the upper right corner of the screen remains at 230 and is not updated. FIG. 31 (j) is the timing of time t17 in FIG. 28, when no game medals are detected for 3.5 seconds after the start of the payout process, so that a hopper empty error is set in the main control means and an error screen indicating a hopper empty error is displayed in the sub-control means. Before the hopper empty error occurs, the same image is displayed whether an image indicating success or failure is displayed.

<Display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs)>
FIG. 32 shows an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs). From (a) to (c) in the same figure, the flow of the acquisition display effect, the cumulative display effect, and the result notification effect is the same as in FIG. 30. However, since the payout of the game medals has not been performed after the start of the payout process, the total number of game medals in the upper right corner of the screen remains at 230 and is not updated. (k) in the same figure is the timing of time t18 in FIG. 29, at which a hopper retention error is set in the main control means and a screen indicating the hopper retention error is displayed in the sub-control means. If the payout sensor of the hopper 44 continues to detect the error for 201 ms or more after the start of the payout process, the main control means determines that the game medals are clogged and sets a hopper retention error. When the main control means sets the hopper retention error, it transmits a command indicating the occurrence of a hopper retention error to the sub-control means. When the sub-control means receives a command indicating the occurrence of a hopper retention error, it displays a screen indicating the hopper retention error on the display device 32.

<Changes in form>
The period during which the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect are performed is set to a shorter period (1 second) than the period (1.5 seconds) required when the payout process is normally executed, but it may be set to a longer period. Specifically, it may be set to a period longer than 1.5 seconds and shorter than the period required to detect a hopper empty error (3.5 seconds). By setting the period longer than the period required when the payout process is executed, the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect can be more easily viewed by the player.
In addition, the period required when the payout process is executed normally is set to 1.5 seconds, but the required time may be varied depending on the number of medals to be paid out and whether the payout process involves only adding credits or includes the payment of game medals from a hopper.
In addition, although only one of the acquisition display effect and the accumulation display effect is executed in the above description, when the conditions for executing both effects are met, the accumulation display effect may be executed after the acquisition display effect is executed. Since the acquisition display effect ends one second after the start of the payout process, and the accumulation display effect is executed for one second thereafter, the player can recognize the contents of the accumulation display effect even if a hopper empty error occurs.
In addition, the winning display effect is executed when the push order role is won during AT, and the correct symbol combination is stopped as a result of the correct push order operation, and an advantageous payout (12 coins paid out) is performed, but it may also be executed when a role other than the push order role is won. Specifically, it may be executed when a push order-independent role (so-called shared bell), which executes an advantageous payout (12 coins paid out) regardless of the push order, is won, and the symbol combination (correct symbol combination) corresponding to the push order-independent role is stopped.

The acquisition display effect may have a plurality of types when an advantageous payout (12 coins payout) is executed. Specifically, the color and font when "12 coins GET" is displayed may be different depending on the state. More specifically, the color and font may be different depending on whether or not the state is favorable for winning the AT addition, or the color and font may be different during the premonition of the occurrence of a continuous performance or during the premonition of the transition to the addition specialization zone. By varying the mode of the acquisition display effect, the player can be informed that he or she will acquire game medals, and can be made to expect that an advantageous situation may occur in the next game or later. In addition, the color and font when "12 coins GET" is displayed may be different depending on the setting value set in the gaming machine. Information for estimating the setting value set in the gaming machine can be provided every time the acquisition display effect is executed.
In addition, the cumulative display effect may have a mode that can be displayed only when a specific setting value is set, other than for each specified number. Specifically, when the setting value "2", "4", or "6" is set, if the cumulative number of game medals exceeds 246 for the first time, "GET 246" is displayed. When the cumulative number exceeds 246, the display may be always performed, or may be displayed only when a lottery is held and a winner is selected. By suggesting the setting with the content displayed in the cumulative display effect, not only the cumulative number is notified to the player, but also information for estimating the setting value set in the gaming machine can be provided. Only when the setting value "6" is set, if the cumulative number of game medals exceeds 666 for the first time, "GET 666" may be displayed. In addition, multiple display modes with different colors, fonts, etc. may be provided for each specified number, and the setting value set in the gaming machine or the state may be suggested depending on the display mode displayed.

The acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect can be executed during the AT, and even if the cumulative number of game medals exceeds the specified number only while the result screen is displayed, the acquisition display effect is executed without executing the cumulative display effect, but other situations in which the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect are not executed may be provided. Specifically, in a situation called a pseudo bonus, the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect may not be executed. Also, in a situation during a pseudo bonus executed during the AT, the acquisition display effect may not be executed, and only the cumulative display effect may be executed. Also, in a situation such as a preparation period before starting the AT, an AT start screen, a consecutive effect executed during the AT, or a premonition of a consecutive effect, the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect may not be executed. In an ending state that can be executed before the advantageous zone ends, the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect may not be executed. By providing cases where they are executed or not executed depending on the game state managed by the main control means and the state of the effect managed by the sub-control means, the necessary information can be appropriately notified to the player.

The cumulative display performance is determined based on the cumulative number of game medals acquired by the player during the AT and the number of game medals paid out by the payout process, but may be determined using the value of the MY counter. Specifically, the main control means transmits a command indicating the value of the MY counter to the sub-control means after the game end check and when the lever is operated. The value of the MY counter after the game end check indicates the value after the payout process, and the value of the MY counter when the lever is operated indicates the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets. The number of game medals included in the payout start command is added to the value of the MY counter when the payout start command is received as a result of the game, and it is determined whether the total value of the addition exceeds a specified number. If a value based on the value of the MY counter is displayed as the cumulative number during the AT, the player can grasp the number of game medals that can be acquired until the advantageous zone ends.
The result notification effect is a battle effect executed in the final game of the consecutive effects, but it may be an effect executed in one game instead of the consecutive effects. Also, it is not limited to a battle effect in which a friendly character competes with an enemy character, but may be another effect that associates the result of the effect with an advantageous result for the player, such as whether or not the player wins first prize in a lottery or wins in a maze lottery.

Although the result notification effect is described as displaying the result after the effect branching timing as time elapses after all reels have stopped, the result may also be displayed by operating a switch for the effect. Specifically, at the effect branching timing (timing of time t15), an image of a switch simulating the effect switch (also called an operation prompting image or operation prompting effect) is displayed, and when the player operates the effect switch, an image indicating success or failure is displayed. By displaying the operation prompting image at the effect branching timing, even in a situation where a hopper empty error occurs and an error screen is displayed, the player can recognize that the operation prompting image will be displayed before the error screen is displayed.
In addition, after all reels have stopped (after all reels have stopped), a PUSH button effect may be executed to notify the stage change of the performance or the number of added games remaining in the AT. Specifically, after all reels have stopped and before time t17 before the hopper empty error occurs, an image of a switch simulating a performance switch is displayed, and the player operates the image to change the stage of the performance or to notify the number of added games. Before the hopper empty error occurs (an error screen is displayed), it is possible to recognize that an image of a switch simulating a performance switch is displayed (a PUSH button effect is executed). In addition, before the image of a switch simulating a performance switch is displayed, an image of the switch simulating a performance switch may be displayed, and as a result of the image simulating a performance switch being displayed before the error screen is displayed, it is possible to recognize that an image of the switch simulating a performance switch is displayed.

In addition to the result notification effect and the PUSH button effect, effects such as comment effects may be executed when the stop switch of the final reel is operated or when all reels are stopped. By executing these effects before time t17 before the hopper empty error occurs (for example, at time t15 or time t1), the content of the effect can be recognized before the hopper empty error occurs.
In addition, the performance is executed when the push order role is won, and the correct symbol combination is stopped as a result of the correct push order operation, and an advantageous payout (12 coins paid out) is performed, but it may also be executed when a role other than the push order role is won. Specifically, it may be executed when a push order-independent role (so-called shared bell), which executes an advantageous payout (12 coins paid out) regardless of the push order, is won, and the symbol combination (correct symbol combination) corresponding to the push order-independent role is stopped.
Furthermore, the times and lengths of the periods described in the above embodiments are merely examples and can be changed as appropriate.

<Navigation image>
Next, the navigation image in this embodiment will be described. Note that, here, the push order navigation image (sometimes called stop operation information) will be described, but it is not limited to the push order navigation image, and may be applied to the above-mentioned eye push navigation image and operation mode navigation image.

In this embodiment, for example, during an AT or other game in which the push order bell is selected as a result of an internal lottery, information suggesting advantageous operation of the stop switch (such as being awarded the maximum amount of gaming media that can be obtained in that game) can be displayed on the LCD as a push order navigation image. Specifically, the numbers "1," "2," and "3" can be used to indicate six different push orders, with "1" indicating the stop switch operated as the first stop operation, "2" indicating the stop button operated as the second stop operation, and "3" indicating the stop button operated as the third stop.

The first stop operation or the third stop operation may be configured as a two-choice push (whether to operate the stop switch at reel positions 1 to 10 or 11 to 20, for example, with a push order navigation image showing either a blue 7 image or a red 7 image), and combined with the six push order options to show 12 different operation modes. The push order navigation image displayed on the left side of the LCD corresponds to the left reel 8a, the push order navigation image displayed near the center of the LCD corresponds to the middle reel 8b, and the push order navigation image displayed on the right side of the LCD corresponds to the right reel 8c. For example, when "123" is displayed as the push order navigation image, it shows the push order for operating the stop switches corresponding to the left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, and right reel 8c. In this embodiment, a part of the push order navigation image, such as "1", may be referred to as the "push order navigation image", and the entire push order navigation image, such as "123", may be referred to as the "push order navigation image".

<Press order navigation image appearance>
33 is a diagram showing an example of the form of the push order navigation image in this embodiment. In FIG. 33, the push order navigation image for the first stop operation is explained as an example, but the second stop operation and the third stop operation are configured in the same way.

The push order navigation image is composed of a "navigation number image" and a "navigation background image", and is configured to have at least four display modes for the push order navigation image: a "normal mode", a "highlighted mode", a "failed mode", and a "successful mode".

The navigation number image is an image of numbers that indicate the order in which buttons should be pressed. The navigation background image is an image that shows the decoration around the numbers that indicate the order in which buttons should be pressed, or an image that shows the effect around the numbers that indicate the order in which buttons should be pressed.

First, <1> in Figure 33 is a push order navigation image in normal mode, in which a push order navigation image corresponding to a stop switch that should not currently be operated is displayed in normal mode. Note that the configuration is such that audio corresponding to the push order navigation image displayed in normal mode is not output. Furthermore, among the push order navigation images in normal mode, push order navigation images corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated next and push order navigation images corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated last may be displayed separately. In this case, a mode can be considered in which the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated next is displayed larger than the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated last, and smaller than the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should currently be operated.

Next, <2> in FIG. 33 is a push order navigation image in an emphasized mode, in which the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should currently be operated is displayed in an emphasized mode. The push order navigation image displayed in an emphasized mode is configured to output a sound corresponding to the push order navigation image from the speaker S. For example, when it is time to operate the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a, a sound saying "left" is output. The push order navigation image in an emphasized mode has at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" larger than the push order navigation image in the normal mode, and is configured to visually notify the player of the stop switch that should currently be operated. Furthermore, in addition to the size, the push order navigation image in an emphasized mode may be displayed brighter than the push order navigation image in the normal mode, or displayed in a color or font different from the normal mode, to visually notify the player of the stop switch that should currently be operated in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, <3> in FIG. 33 is a push order navigation image in a successful mode, and when the stop switch that should currently be operated is operated (when the stop switch corresponding to the push order navigation image currently displayed in an highlighted mode is operated), the push order navigation image displayed in a highlighted mode is displayed in a successful mode. In other words, when the stop switch that should currently be operated is operated in the correct operating mode, the push order navigation image displayed in a highlighted mode changes to a successful mode. In addition, when the stop switch that should currently be operated is operated and the push order navigation image is displayed in a successful mode, a sound corresponding to the next push order is output (for example, when the stop switch corresponding to the center reel 8b should be operated next, a sound "It's the middle" is output from the speaker S), and the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should next be operated is displayed in a highlighted mode. In addition, the push order navigation image in the successful mode is configured to end its display after being displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds).

In addition, when the stop switch is operated in the correct manner, a sound effect or voice (sometimes called a success sound) indicating that the pressing sequence is correct may be output from the speaker S. By configuring it in this way, the player can recognize that the stop switch has been operated in the correct manner not only visually but also audibly.

The push order navigation image in the successful mode is configured so that at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" is larger than the push order navigation image in the normal mode. The push order navigation image in the highlighted mode and the push order navigation image in the successful mode are configured so that both the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" are approximately the same size.

Next, <4> in FIG. 33 is a push order navigation image in a failure mode. When a stop switch that should not be operated is operated (when a stop switch corresponding to a push order navigation image displayed in a normal mode is operated), all currently displayed push order navigation images are displayed in a failure mode. In other words, when a stop switch that should not be operated is operated in an incorrect operation mode, all currently displayed push order navigation images change to a failure mode. In addition, when a stop switch that should not be operated is operated to display the push order navigation image in a failure mode, a sound indicating that the push order is incorrect (for example, a sound such as "What are you doing?", which may be called a failure sound) may be output from the speaker S, or a sound indicating that the push order is incorrect may not be output. In addition, the push order navigation image in the failure mode is configured to end its display after being displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). In addition, when a stop switch that should not be operated is operated, the push order navigation image in the failure mode is not displayed, and the display of all push order navigation images may be immediately ended (shorter than the predetermined time).

In addition, when a stop switch that should not currently be operated is operated and all currently displayed push order navigation images are displayed in a failed state, the size of the push order navigation images is configured to remain the same as it was before the stop operation. In other words, the push order navigation images that were displayed in an highlighted state before the stop operation are displayed as failed push order navigation images in the highlighted state size, and the push order navigation images that were displayed in a normal state before the stop operation are displayed as failed push order navigation images in the normal state size.

In addition, in this embodiment, the time from when the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted to when the display of the push order navigation image in the successful mode is terminated is configured to be longer than the time from when the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted to when the display of the push order navigation image in the unsuccessful mode is terminated.

This configuration gives players a sense of superiority when they succeed, and when they fail, it is less likely that other players will notice that they pressed the buttons incorrectly, which increases the fun of the game.

The push order navigation image may be configured to be displayed with effects for all modes, including the normal mode, the highlighted mode, the successful mode, and the unsuccessful mode, or may be configured to be displayed with effects for at least one mode of the push order navigation image.

In addition, the push order navigation image for all modes, including the normal mode, the highlighted mode, the successful mode, and the unsuccessful mode, may be configured to be displayed as moving images with movement, or the push order navigation image for all modes may be configured to be displayed as still images, or the push order navigation image for at least one mode may be configured to be displayed as a moving image and the push order navigation image for the other modes may be configured to be displayed as still images.

Also, when the start switch 12 is operated to start a game, all push order navigation images may be displayed in a normal manner, and then when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation) may be displayed in an emphasized manner.Also, when the start switch is operated to start a game, the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first may be displayed in an emphasized manner, and the other push order navigation images may be displayed in a normal manner, but from the start of display until the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, all push order navigation images may be displayed as still images, and when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, all push order navigation images may be displayed as moving images with some kind of movement.

This configuration makes it easier for the player to visually recognize that the operation of the stop switch has been validated, preventing the player from pressing the wrong button in the wrong order. When the operation of the stop switch is validated in this way, the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is displayed in an emphasized manner, or the push order navigation image is changed from a still image to a moving image; this is sometimes referred to as a stop acceptance effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the start switch 12 is operated to start a game and the push order navigation image is displayed, a predetermined sound effect (sometimes called a navigation display sound) is output from the speaker S.

At this time, the timing for outputting the sound (e.g. "left") corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first from the speaker S may be immediately after the start switch 12 is operated, or when the reels start to spin, or when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective. In other words, it is sufficient that the sound is configured to be output from the speaker S at any timing between when the start switch 12 is operated and when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective.

By configuring it this way, even if there is a delay in the display of the push order navigation image due to a malfunction of the LCD display, the player can audibly recognize which stop switch should be operated first, which does not impede the progress of the game and prevents pushing the wrong order.

Figure 34 is an example of a case in which the push order navigation image is displayed on the LCD in this embodiment, and by displaying "123" on the LCD, it indicates that the correct push order is to operate the stop switches corresponding to the left reel 8a → the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b → the stop switch corresponding to the right reel 8c. In Figure 34, since the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a should be operated first, "1" is displayed in the push order navigation image in an highlighted state, and "2" and "3" are displayed in the normal state.

<Configuration regarding display of push order navigation image and power off>
Next, the display of the push order navigation image when a power outage occurs during the display of the push order navigation image and the power is restored without changing the settings will be described using an example in which the winning-A1 condition device is won during the AT and the push order navigation image "123" corresponding to the correct push order "left, center, right" is displayed on the liquid crystal. Note that the configuration regarding the display of the push order navigation image and the power outage described below can be applied in combination with other appropriate cases where the timing of the power outage and the state of the push order navigation image are different (such as the push order navigation image "213" corresponding to the correct push order "center, left, right"). In addition, it can be applied in combination with other appropriate cases described below, such as the <configuration regarding the display of the push order navigation image and a specified error>.

(1) When the power is turned off before the first stop operation First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, since the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. Also, since the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a should be operated as the first stop operation, the voice "Go left" is output from the speaker S. Note that the voice such as "Go left" that corresponds to the stop switch that should currently be operated may be simply referred to as the navigation voice.

After that, before the first stop operation has been performed, a power outage occurs and all LCD displays cease (power is not turned on). After that, at a timing (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "predetermined navigation timing") such as when a drive voltage is supplied to the sub-control board after the power is restored and the drawing process can be executed, or when a drive voltage is supplied to the main control board and a command regarding the push order is sent to the sub-control board, the "123" push order navigation image is displayed again on the LCD. Note that the "1" push order navigation image is displayed in an emphasized state, and the "2" and "3" push order navigation images are displayed in a normal state. At this time, the navigation sound is not output again. At this time, the navigation display sound may be configured not to be output again, or may be configured to be output.

In this way, if the power is turned off after the push sequence navigation image is displayed but before the first stop operation, and then the power is restored, the push sequence navigation image will return but the navigation voice will not. By not outputting the navigation voice when the power is restored in this way, the processing of the sub-control board when the power is restored is reduced, and the push sequence navigation image can be displayed quickly.

The navigation voice may be output again when the power is restored. By configuring it in this way, the game can be played without any sense of incongruity between before the power was cut and after the power is restored.

In addition, if the game is configured to execute the aforementioned operation acceptance effect when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, the game may be configured to display the push order navigation image together with the stop acceptance effect when the power is restored after a power outage. By configuring the game in this way, the game can be played without any sense of incongruity between before the power outage and after the power is restored.

The push order navigation image may also be configured to be displayed without the stop acceptance effect when the power is restored after a power outage. This configuration reduces the processing on the sub-control board when the power is restored after a power outage, and allows the push order navigation image to be displayed quickly.

In addition, when the push order navigation image is displayed again when the power is restored after a power outage, the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation may be configured to display both the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image", while the other push order navigation images may be configured to display only the "navigation number image". By configuring in this way, the processing of the sub-control board when the power is restored after a power outage can be reduced, and the push order navigation image can be displayed quickly.

In addition, when the push order navigation images are displayed again when the power is restored after a power outage, both the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" may be displayed for all push order navigation images that are displayed when the power is restored. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play without any sense of incongruity between before the power outage and after the power is restored.

(2) When the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode, and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal mode. In addition, a navigation voice "left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, before the second stop operation has been performed, a power outage occurs and all LCD displays cease (a state in which power is not turned on). Then, at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful state, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized state, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a normal state. In other words, the same images are displayed after a stop is accepted when the push order for the first stop on the stop switches is the correct push order.

At this time, the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the second stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output.

At this time, just as before the power failure, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in a normal mode. At this time, the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "1" is configured to be displayed again when the power is restored, even if it was terminated because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since its display began before the power failure. Note that the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "1" may be configured to be terminated when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since its redisplay, or may be configured to be terminated immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since its redisplay.

In this way, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode, and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. By configuring it in this way, even if the power is restored during AT, the operation mode of the stop switch before the power outage can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from making a mistake in the push order. Furthermore, because the push order navigation image for the successful mode is also displayed again, the player can be made aware that the operation mode of the stop switch before the power outage was the correct mode.

In addition, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a normal mode.

This configuration allows the player to concentrate on the stopping operations that need to be performed at the moment.

(3) When the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner and the power is subsequently turned off before the second stop operation First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal. Here, since the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice "left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner at this time, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" displayed in a normal manner.

After that, if the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to center reel 8b is operated), all push order navigation images are displayed in a failed manner, and when a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed in the failed manner, the display of all push order navigation images is terminated. In addition, a sound saying "What are you doing?" is output from speaker S to indicate that the push order was incorrect.

After that, before the second stop operation has been performed, a power outage occurs and all LCD display is terminated (power is not turned on). After that, even if the drawing process can be executed after the power is restored, the push order navigation image is not displayed. Also, no failure sound is output at this time to indicate that the push order was incorrect.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect manner before the power was cut off, the push order navigation image will not be displayed again after the power is restored, allowing the player to return to play without lowering their expectations (and without inadvertently raising their expectations).

Also, as described above, if the stop switch is operated in a correct manner as the first stop operation and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, then at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is displayed in a successful manner, the push order navigation image corresponding to the second stop operation is displayed in an highlighted manner, and the push order navigation image corresponding to the third stop operation is displayed in a normal manner. On the other hand, if the stop switch is operated in an incorrect manner as the first stop operation and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, then at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored (referred to as navigation timing even if navigation is not actually performed), the push order navigation image is not displayed.

By configuring it in this way, the display after power recovery can be appropriately performed according to the game situation before the power was cut, allowing the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, if the stop switch was operated in an incorrect mode before the power was cut, the player can return to play without lowering his or her expectations (without inadvertently raising his or her expectations).

If the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect mode and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, all push order navigation images may be configured to be displayed again in a failed mode at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored. In this case, too, no failure sound or navigation voice indicating that the push order was incorrect is output after the power is restored. In addition, when the push order navigation image in the failed mode is displayed again after the power is restored, it may be configured to be turned off when a specified time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has passed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to be turned off immediately even before the specified time has passed since it was displayed again.

When configured in this manner, if the stop switch is operated in a correct manner as the first stop operation and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation will be displayed in a successful manner, the push order navigation image corresponding to the second stop operation will be displayed in an highlighted manner, and the push order navigation image corresponding to the third stop operation will be displayed in a normal manner; on the other hand, if the stop switch is operated in an incorrect manner as the first stop operation and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, all push order navigation images will be displayed in an unsuccessful manner.

This configuration allows the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, if the stop switch was operated in an incorrect mode before the power was cut off, even if it takes several minutes for the power to be restored after the power is cut off, the push order navigation image for the failed mode will be displayed after the power is restored, so it is possible to prevent the player from mistakingly assuming that the gaming machine is broken because no payout or only a small payout (such as one coin) has been made despite the AT being in progress.

(4) When the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode and the power is then turned off before the third stop operation When the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode. In addition, the navigation voice "Go right" corresponding to the third stop is output from the speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" of both are displayed at approximately the same size.

After that, when the third stop operation has not yet been performed, a power outage occurs and all LCD display ends (power is not turned on). Then, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image of "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in a successful state, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in an emphasized state. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output. Also, at this time, as before the power outage, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in a successful state and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in an emphasized state, so that both "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" are displayed at approximately the same size. Also, at this time, the push order navigation image of the successful state of "2" is configured to be displayed again when the power is restored, even if the display was terminated because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since the display started before the power outage. In addition, when the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "2" is displayed again after the power is restored after a power outage, it may be configured to be turned off when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to be turned off immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct manner, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful manner, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an highlighted manner.

By configuring it this way, even if the power is turned off and restored during AT, the operation state of the stop switch before the power was turned off can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from making a mistake in the pressing order. In particular, since the pressing order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is not reproduced, the player can focus on the third stop.

In addition, if the first and second stop operations are performed in the correct mode, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power outage is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" may be displayed in a successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" may be displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" may be displayed in an emphasized mode. In this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. In addition, at this time, the push order navigation images for "1" and "2" are displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so that the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" are all displayed at approximately the same size. In addition, at this time, the push order navigation images for "1" and "2" in the successful mode are configured to be displayed again when the power outage is restored, even if the display was terminated because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since the display was started before the power outage. In addition, when the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" are displayed again after the power is restored, they may be configured to cease displaying a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) after they are displayed again, or they may be configured to cease displaying immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed after they are displayed again. In other words, before the power is cut off, the display mode of the push order navigation images changes with each stop operation, so the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" cease displaying at different times, but after the power is cut off, the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" cease displaying at the same time.

By configuring it in this way, even if the power is cut off and restored during AT, the operation state of the stop switch before the power was cut can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from pressing the wrong order. In particular, by displaying the press order navigation image corresponding to the first and second stops in a successful manner, it is possible to clearly show that only the third stop remains and that the correct press order has been followed.

In addition, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct manner and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" is not displayed, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized manner. Note that in this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.

This configuration allows the player to concentrate on the stopping operations that need to be performed at the moment.

(5) When the first stop operation is performed in a correct mode, the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect mode, and the power is then turned off before the third stop operation. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, since the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal mode. In addition, a navigation voice "left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" displayed in a normal mode.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, if the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to right reel 8c is operated), the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" are displayed in a failed manner, and when a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed in the failed manner, the display of the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" ceases. In addition, the sound "What are you doing?" is output from speaker S, indicating that the push order was incorrect.

After that, before the third stop operation has been performed, a power outage occurs and all LCD displays cease (a state in which the power is not turned on). After that, even if the specified navigation timing arrives after the power is restored, the push order navigation image is not displayed. At this time, no failure sound is output to indicate that the push order was incorrect.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect manner before the power was cut off, the push order navigation image is not displayed again when the power is restored, allowing the player to return to play without lowering their expectations (and without inadvertently raising their expectations).

In addition, if the first stop operation is performed in a correct mode, then the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect mode, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, the push order navigation image for "1" may be displayed in a successful mode at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, and the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" may be displayed in a failed mode. In this case, too, no failure sound is output after the power is restored to indicate that the push order was incorrect. Note that when the push order navigation image in the failed mode is displayed again after the power is restored, it may be configured to end its display a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) after it is displayed again, or it may be configured to immediately end its display even before the predetermined time has elapsed after it is displayed again.

This configuration allows the player to easily understand the game situation. In particular, by redisplaying the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop operation in the correct mode, the player can understand which stop operation he or she performed incorrectly.

In addition, if the first stop operation is performed in a correct mode, then the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect mode, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, all push order navigation images may be configured to be displayed in a failed mode at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored. In this case, too, no failure sound is output to indicate that the push order was incorrect after the power is restored. Note that the push order navigation image in the failed mode may be configured to end its display when a specified time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again after the power is restored, or to end its display immediately even before the specified time has elapsed since it was displayed again. By configuring in this way, even if it takes several minutes from the power outage to the power restoration, the push order navigation image in the failed mode is displayed after the power is restored, so that it is possible to prevent the player from mistakingly assuming that the gaming machine is broken because there is no payout or only one coin is paid out despite the AT being in progress.

(6) When the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode, the power is turned off before the third stop operation, the third stop is performed after the power is restored, and the power is turned off again. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image of "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal. Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode. In addition, the navigation voice "Go right" corresponding to the third stop is output from the speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" of both are displayed at approximately the same size.

After that, in a situation where the third stop operation has not yet been performed, a power outage occurs, and all LCD displays end (state where power is not turned on). Then, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed or is displayed in a successful state, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful state, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized state. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output. When the push order navigation image for the successful state of "2" (the push order navigation images for the successful states of "1" and "2" if the push order navigation for the successful state of "1" is also configured to be displayed), if it is displayed again after the power is restored, it may be configured to end its display when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to immediately end its display even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

After that, the display of the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "2" is terminated (if the push order navigation for the successful mode of "1" is also configured to be displayed, the display of the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "1" is also terminated), and in a situation where the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, if the third stop operation is performed in the correct mode, the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the successful mode. Also, at this time, a specified image (sometimes called a GET image) is configured to be displayed indicating that all stop operations have been performed in the correct mode.

After that, when the stop operation is performed up to the third stop, the power is cut off again and all display on the LCD screen is terminated. After that, even after the power is restored, the push order navigation image and the GET image are not displayed. At this time, the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation are not output.

This configuration allows the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, since no new stopping operation is required after the third stop, by not reproducing the push order navigation image, it is possible to effectively allow the player to understand that no new stopping operation is required.

In addition, if the operation is performed correctly up to the third stop operation and then a power outage occurs again, the push order navigation images "1" to "3" may be configured to be displayed again in the successful mode at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to clearly see that all stop operations were performed in the correct manner.

If the second power outage occurs before the payout process is executed, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed or is displayed in a successful state at the specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful state, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an highlighted state. If the second power outage occurs after the payout process is executed, the push order navigation image is not displayed at the specified navigation timing after the power is restored. In this way, the display content after the power is restored may be configured to differ depending on whether the situation before the power outage was before or after the payout process was executed.

<Explanation about rare role navigation images>
In addition, in this embodiment, in a game in which a so-called rare role such as a cherry role or a watermelon role is won, a navigation image (sometimes called a rare role navigation image) showing the possibility of winning a rare role is configured to display "!!!". The navigation background image of the rare role navigation image and the navigation background image of the push order navigation image are displayed in the same or substantially the same manner. That is, the push order navigation image and the rare role navigation image are configured to be similar images, although the "number" and "!" are different. In addition, the rare role navigation image may be configured to be displayed only when any rare role is won, or may be configured to be displayed even in a game in which the result of the internal lottery is a miss or a replay, as a performance suggesting the possibility of the predetermined benefit being granted when it is determined that a predetermined benefit (for example, the first hit of the AT, the addition of the AT, the transition to the chance zone, etc.) is granted.

In addition, since there is no advantage or disadvantage based on the push order, the rare role navigation image is configured to always be displayed at the same size during one game (the size does not differ between the normal mode and the highlighted mode, as with the push order navigation image).

In addition, in a game in which a rare role navigation image is displayed, a power outage occurs at any timing before the third stop operation is performed (when the start switch 12 is operated, when the first stop operation is performed, when the second stop operation is performed, when the third stop operation is performed, etc.), and all LCD displays end (a state in which the power is not turned on). After that, the rare role navigation image is configured to be displayed again at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored. Note that, regardless of when the power outage occurs, the rare role navigation image that is displayed again when the power is restored will be displayed in the display mode after the start switch 12 is operated, such as "!!!".

This configuration allows the player to easily understand the game situation. In particular, it allows the player to maintain a sense of hope that they may win a rare combination. It also prevents the player from missing out on a rare combination.

In addition, in a game in which a rare role navigation image is displayed, if a power outage occurs at any time before the third stop operation is performed (the time when the start switch 12 is operated, the time when the first stop operation is performed, the time when the second stop operation is performed, the time when the third stop operation is performed, etc.), the rare role navigation image may be configured not to be displayed again after the power is restored.

By configuring it in this way, players can prevent themselves from confusing the push order navigation image with the rare role navigation image.

The rare role navigation images may be configured to end display one by one in response to the stop operation, or may be configured to display all rare role navigation images at the timing when the first stop operation is performed. Also, when configured to end display of the rare role navigation images one by one for each stop operation, the display may be configured to end in response to the stop ancestor operation in the order of the left rare role navigation image, the middle rare role navigation image, and the right rare role navigation image, regardless of which stop switch 13 was operated, or the display may be configured to end in response to the stop ancestor operation of the rare role navigation image at the position corresponding to the stop switch 13 where the stop operation was performed.

<Display of push order navigation image and configuration regarding errors>
Next, a specific error (medal retention error, medal backflow error, hopper empty error, etc.) occurs during the display of the push order navigation image, and then the display of the push order navigation image after the specific error is released will be described using an example in which the winning-A1 condition device is won during the AT, the push order navigation image "123" corresponding to the correct push order "left, middle, right" is displayed on the liquid crystal, and a hopper empty error occurs as a specific error. Note that the configuration regarding the display of the push order navigation image and the specific error described below can be applied in appropriate combination even when the timing of the occurrence of the specific error and the state of the push order navigation image are different. In addition, it can be applied in appropriate combination with the above-mentioned <Configuration regarding the display of the push order navigation image and power off>.

(1) When the first stop operation is performed in a correct manner, and then a predetermined error occurs before the second stop operation First, as shown in FIG. 35, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image of "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal. Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice of "left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, before the second stop operation has been performed, a hopper empty error occurs, the push order navigation image becomes invisible (this can be made invisible by ending the display, or by displaying an image related to the error on the front of the LCD screen), and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed.

After that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in a successful mode, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in a normal mode. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the second stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output. Also, at this time, as before the occurrence of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so that at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image of "3" displayed in a normal mode. Also, at this time, the push order navigation image of the successful mode of "1" is configured to be displayed again when the power is restored even if the display was terminated because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since the display was started before the occurrence of the hopper empty error.

Then, the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "1" may be configured to be turned off when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to be turned off immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode, and then a specified error occurs before the second stop operation, then at the specified navigation timing after the specified error is cleared, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. By configuring it in this way, even if a specified error occurs during AT, the operation mode of the stop switch before the specified error occurred can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from making a mistake in the push order. Furthermore, because the push order navigation image for the successful mode is also displayed again, the player can be made aware that the operation mode of the stop switch before the specified error occurred was the correct mode.

In addition, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode and then a hopper empty error occurs before the second stop operation, then at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a normal mode.

This configuration allows the player to concentrate on the stopping operation that they are currently performing.

The display mode of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" of the push order navigation image shown in FIG. 35 and the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" of the push order navigation image shown in FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 are configured to have different designs (pictures, font of numbers, color, etc.). In this way, the design of the push order navigation image may be configured to be changed appropriately depending on the game situation. For example, when the expectation degree for the addition of AT is in a normal state, the push order navigation image may be displayed with the design shown in FIG. 33 and FIG. 34, and when it is in a high probability state, the push order navigation may be displayed with the design shown in FIG. 35. In addition, it may be configured to be possible to select a presentation mode related to the presentation tendency during the AT, and when a predetermined presentation mode is set, the push order navigation image may be displayed with the design shown in FIG. 33 and FIG. 34, and when a specific presentation mode is set, the push order navigation may be displayed with the design shown in FIG. 35.

By configuring it in this way, the player can visually grasp the current game situation through the design of the push order navigation image.

(2) When the second stop operation is performed correctly and a predetermined error occurs before the third stop operation, first, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, the navigation voice "left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode. In addition, the navigation voice "Go right" corresponding to the third stop is output from the speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" of both are displayed at approximately the same size.

After that, in a situation where the third stop operation has not yet been performed, a hopper empty error occurs, and the display of the push order navigation image becomes invisible (it may be made invisible by ending the display, or may be made invisible by displaying an image related to the error on the front of the LCD screen), and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, the push order navigation image of "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in a successful state, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in an emphasized state. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output. Also, at this time, as before the occurrence of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in a successful state, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in an emphasized state, so that the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" of both are displayed at approximately the same size. In addition, at this time, the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "2" is configured to be displayed again when the power is restored, even if its display has ended because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since its display began before the power was cut off.

Then, the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "2" may be configured to be turned off when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to be turned off immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct mode, and then a specified error occurs before the third stop operation, then at the specified navigation timing after the specified error is cleared, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an highlighted mode. By configuring it in this way, even if a specified error occurs during AT, the operation mode of the stop switch before the occurrence of the specified error can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from making a mistake in the push order. In particular, since the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is not reproduced, the player can focus on the third stop.

In addition, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in a correct manner and then a hopper empty error occurs before the third stop operation, then at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image relating to the hopper empty error is terminated, and the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful manner, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful manner, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an highlighted manner.

In this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.

At this time, the push order navigation images for "1" and "2" are displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an highlighted mode, so that the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" are all displayed at approximately the same size. At this time, the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" are configured to be displayed again when the hopper empty error is cleared, even if they had ceased display because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since their display began before the occurrence of the hopper empty error. Note that the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" may be configured to cease display when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since their re-display, or may be configured to cease display immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since their re-display. In other words, before the hopper empty error occurs, the display mode of the push order navigation image changes with each stop operation, so the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" end displaying at different times, but after the hopper empty error is cleared, the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" end displaying at the same time.

By configuring it in this way, even if a specified error occurs during AT, the operation state of the stop switch before the specified error occurred can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from pressing the wrong order. In particular, by displaying the press order navigation image corresponding to the first and second stops in a successful manner, it can be made clear that only the third stop remains, and that the correct press order has been followed.

Also, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct manner, and then a hopper empty error occurs before the third stop operation, then at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" is not displayed, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal manner. Note that even in this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.
This configuration allows the player to concentrate on the stopping operation that he or she is currently performing.

(3) When the first three stop operations are performed correctly and a specific error occurs afterwards First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice "left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode. In addition, the navigation voice "Go right" corresponding to the third stop is output from the speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" of both are displayed at approximately the same size.

After that, when the third stop operation is performed (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the right reel 8c, which was the final stop operation, is operated), the push order navigation image "3" is displayed in a successful mode. At this point, all stop operations have been performed in the correct mode, so the GET image is displayed.

After that, a hopper empty error occurs, and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, and the push order navigation image of "1", "2", and "3" is displayed again in the successful mode. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output. At this time, the push order navigation images of the successful mode of "1", "2", and "3" are configured to be displayed again after the hopper empty error is cleared, even if the display of each of them ended because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since the start of display before the hopper empty error occurred. At this time, the GET image may be configured to be displayed again, or not displayed.

Then, the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "1," "2," and "3" may be configured to cease displaying after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to cease displaying immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

This configuration allows the player to easily understand the game situation. In particular, after a specified error is resolved, all push order navigation images are reproduced in a successful manner, making it clear that all stop operations were performed in the correct manner.

In addition, if the third stop operation (final stop operation) is performed in the correct mode and then a hopper empty error occurs, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the push order navigation images of "1" and "2" are not displayed, and the push order navigation image of "3" may be displayed in a successful mode. In this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. In addition, at this time, even if the push order navigation image of the successful mode of "3" was terminated because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since the display started before the hopper empty error occurred, it may be configured to be displayed again after the hopper empty error is released, and the display may be terminated when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to be immediately terminated even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.
By configuring in this manner, it is possible to clearly show that the third stop operation was performed as the stop operation immediately before the occurrence of the specified error, and that the third stop operation was performed in a correct manner.

Also, if the third stop operation (final stop operation) is performed correctly and then a hopper empty error occurs, the display of the image relating to the hopper empty error may be terminated at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, and none of the push order navigation images "1" to "3" may be displayed. Note that even in this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.
By configuring in this manner, the player can recognize that the final stop operation has already been completed.

In addition, if the specified error occurs before the payout process is executed, the push order navigation images "1" to "3" are configured to be displayed in a successful manner at a specified navigation timing after the specified error is cleared, and if the specified error occurs after the payout process is executed, none of the push order navigation images "1" to "3" are displayed at a specified navigation timing after the specified error is cleared. In other words, the display content after the specified error is cleared may be configured to differ depending on whether the situation before the specified error occurred was before or after the payout process was executed.

(4) When the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner and a predetermined error occurs before the second stop operation. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image of "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal. Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice of "left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" displayed in a normal manner.

After that, if the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to center reel 8b is operated), all push order navigation images are displayed in a failed manner, and when a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed in the failed manner, the display of all push order navigation images is terminated. In addition, a sound saying "What are you doing?" is output from speaker S to indicate that the push order was incorrect.

After that, in a situation where the second stop operation has not yet been performed, a hopper empty error occurs and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends and all push order navigation images are displayed in a failed state. At this time, no failure sound is output to indicate that the push order was incorrect. When the push order navigation image in a failed state is displayed again after the power is restored, it may be configured to end its display when a specified time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to end its display immediately even before the specified time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect mode before the hopper empty error occurred, the push order navigation image is displayed again in a failed mode after the hopper empty error is cleared, allowing the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, even if it takes several minutes from the occurrence of the hopper empty error to the clearing of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image in the failed mode is displayed after the hopper empty error is cleared, so it is possible to prevent the player from mistakingly assuming that the gaming machine is broken because no payout or only a small payout (such as one coin) has been made despite the AT being in progress.

Also, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of images related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, and all push order navigation images may not be displayed. In this way, by not displaying the push order navigation image of the failed mode again after the hopper empty error is cleared, the player can return to playing without lowering their expectations.

(5) When the first stop operation is performed in a correct mode, the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect mode, and then a predetermined error occurs before the third stop operation. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image of "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal mode. In addition, a navigation voice of "left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" displayed in a normal mode.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

If the second stop operation is then performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to right reel 8c is operated), the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" are displayed in a failed manner, and when a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed in a failed manner, the display of all push order navigation images ceases. In addition, a voice message saying "What are you doing?" is output from speaker S to indicate that the push order was incorrect.

After that, in a situation where the third stop operation has not yet been performed, a hopper empty error occurs and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends and all push order navigation images are displayed in a failed state. At this time, no failure sound is output to indicate that the push order was incorrect. When the push order navigation image in a failed state is displayed again after the power is restored, it may be configured to end its display when a specified time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to end its display immediately even before the specified time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect mode before the hopper empty error occurred, the push order navigation image is displayed again in a failed mode after the hopper empty error is cleared, allowing the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, even if it takes several minutes from the occurrence of the hopper empty error to the clearing of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image in the failed mode is displayed after the hopper empty error is cleared, so it is possible to prevent the player from mistakingly assuming that the gaming machine is broken because no payout or only a small payout (such as one coin) has been made despite the AT being in progress.

Also, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, the push order navigation image for "1" may be displayed in a successful state, and the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" may be displayed in a failed state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to allow the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, it is possible to clarify which stop operation caused the push order error.

Also, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, and the push order navigation image for "2" and "3" may be displayed in a failed state. This configuration allows the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, it is possible to clarify which stop operation caused the push order error.

Also, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of images related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, and all push order navigation images may not be displayed. In this way, by not displaying the push order navigation image of the failed mode again after the hopper empty error is cleared, the player can return to playing without lowering their expectations.

(6) When the first or second stop operation is operated in an incorrect manner and a predetermined error occurs after the third stop operation First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image of "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal. Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice of "left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" displayed in a normal manner.

After that, if the first stop operation or the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner, the push order navigation image that is displayed at the time when the push order is not completed is displayed in a failed manner, and when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the push order navigation image was displayed in the failed manner, the display of the push order navigation image is terminated. In addition, a voice saying "What are you doing?" is output from speaker S to indicate that the push order has been incorrect.

After that, a hopper empty error occurs after the third stop operation is performed, and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, and all push order navigation images are displayed in a failed state. At this time, no failure sound is output to indicate that the push order was incorrect. When the push order navigation image in a failed state is displayed again after the power is restored, it may be configured to end its display when a specified time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to end its display immediately even before the specified time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect mode before the hopper empty error occurred, the push order navigation image is displayed again in a failed mode after the hopper empty error is cleared, allowing the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, even if it takes several minutes from the occurrence of the hopper empty error to the clearing of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image in the failed mode is displayed after the hopper empty error is cleared, so it is possible to prevent the player from mistakingly assuming that the gaming machine is broken because no payout or only a small payout (such as one coin) has been made despite the AT being in progress.

Also, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of images related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, and all push order navigation images may not be displayed. In this way, by not displaying the push order navigation image of the failed mode again after the hopper empty error is cleared, the player can return to playing without lowering their expectations.

<Configuration regarding display of push order navigation image and reel stop warning image>
In addition, in a game in which the push order bell is won as a result of an internal lottery and the push order navigation image is displayed, the above-mentioned reel stop warning image (also called a stop promotion image) is displayed because a predetermined time (3 minutes) has passed since the start of reel rotation (or the first stop operation or the second stop operation) without a stop operation being performed, and then the reel stop warning image and the push order navigation image are displayed at the same time, a power outage occurs, and then at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image is displayed again, but the reel stop warning image may not be displayed again. By configuring in this way, even if an unexpected situation occurs such as a power outage during a game, the player can concentrate on the push order navigation image, so that pushing order mistakes can be prevented. Note that the above-mentioned <Configuration regarding display of push order navigation image and power outage> can be appropriately applied to the display mode of the push order navigation image at this time.

<Description of errors related to the hopper 44 and winning lamp effects applicable to this embodiment>
Next, the relationship between errors related to the hopper 44 and winning effects applicable to this embodiment will be described.

The presentation applicable to the present embodiment described below aims to allow the player to properly recognize that he or she has won by executing a winning lamp presentation based on the winning of a small role such as a push order role, or a winning lamp presentation based on the winning of a replay role such as a replay role.
Another object of the present invention is to allow the player to recognize the result of the game before a hopper empty error occurs after winning.

The following describes the configuration related to errors related to the hopper 44 and the winning lamp effect that can be applied to this embodiment.

<Award winning LED lamp>
It is a part (not shown) of the performance lamps (LED lamps) provided on the front panel PS2, and is a lamp that lights up, flashes, etc. when a prize is won. It is also a lamp that lights up, flashes, etc. when an error such as a door open error or a hopper empty error occurs.

<Main Control Means>
The main processing of the main control means is as described in this embodiment, the explanation of the winning effects, settlement effects and deposit effects that are applicable to this embodiment, and the errors and winning effects related to the hopper 44 that are applicable to this embodiment, but details of the processing that are omitted in the description of this embodiment will be described below.

＜Pushing order＞
This is a role that can be won by role lottery (internal lottery), and when a symbol combination corresponding to the winning push order role is displayed on a winning line, and a prize is awarded by the prize winning determination process, medals are paid out based on the symbol combination that is displayed. The symbol combinations that can be displayed for the push order role include a correct symbol combination that is displayed when the player presses the buttons in the correct push order, and an incorrect symbol combination that is displayed when the player presses the buttons in the incorrect push order. A correct symbol combination is a symbol combination that displays a bell symbol, mainly consisting of yellow, such as bell-bell-bell, on a winning line, and 12 coins are paid out. An incorrect symbol combination is a symbol combination that displays a blank-replay-watermelon or other symbol combination on a winning line, and 1 coin is paid out.

＜Cherry＞
This is a role that can be won by the role lottery (internal lottery), and when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning Cherry role is displayed on the winning line, and it is determined that a prize has been won by the winning determination process, medals are paid out based on the symbol combination that is displayed. The symbol combination corresponding to the Cherry role is a symbol combination that displays mainly red cherry symbols, such as Cherry-Cherry-Cherry, on the winning line, and one medal is paid out.

<Replay role>
This is a role that can be won by the role lottery (internal lottery), and when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning replay role is displayed on the winning line, and the winning determination process determines that the player has won, a replay is awarded based on the symbol combination that is displayed. The symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is a symbol combination that displays replay symbols, mainly composed of blue, such as replay-replay-replay, on the winning line.

<Winning process (payout process)>
The winning process is a process of paying out game medals that are predetermined according to the winning minor winning combination (the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed) when it is determined that the minor winning combination has been won by the winning determination process. Here, paying out game medals means that if the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit, the credits are added, and if the accumulated credits have reached the upper limit, the game medals are paid out from the hopper 44. The main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means when starting a payout based on the winning (whether it is the addition of credits or the payout from the hopper 44), and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means when ending the payout based on the winning. Based on the payout start command and the payout end command, the sub-control means can execute a winning performance such as outputting the payout sound of the game medals, performing a back lamp performance (also called a BL performance), and performing a winning lamp performance. The payout start command is configured to include information on the number of game medals to be paid out, and the payout start command and the payout end command are also transmitted when there is no payout (when there is a loss or a re-play winning). In the case of a loss or a win of a replay role, the number of game medals to be paid out is set to 0, and then a payout end command is sent. Even when a replay role is won, the sub-control means can execute winning effects such as outputting a winning sound of the replay role or a back lamp effect based on the payout start command and the payout end command.

<Automatic input processing>
The automatic insertion process (automatic bet process) is a process executed when it is determined by the winning determination process that the replay role has won. In the automatic insertion process, a bet is automatically set (the number of inserted medals is stored) for the same number of medals as the number of medals bet on the game in which the replay role won, without inserting game medals. When the automatic insertion process is executed, the main control means (main control board 100) transmits an automatic insertion command to the sub-control means according to the number of medals bet (inserted). In this embodiment, the sub-control means does not execute an insertion effect (output of an insertion sound) based on the automatic insertion command, but may execute an insertion effect such as output of an insertion sound in the same manner as when a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command is received.

In addition, in the automatic insertion process, the bet number is increased by one at a time. For example, if a replay role is won in a game with a bet number of three and the automatic insertion process is then executed, the process of adding one to the bet number is repeated three times. However, since the addition process is executed in an extremely short time, it is visually perceived by the human eye as if the 1 to 3 bet lamps are all lit at the same time. Note that if the 1 to 3 bet lamps are to be lit in sequence, a timer is set after the bet number is added, and the next bet number is not added until the timer value reaches 0.

Even after the automatic insertion process, if the settlement switch is operated, settlement processing is possible in the same way as before starting play when game medals have been bet or stored in the credits (after the required bet number has been set and before the start lever has been operated). However, in the settlement processing after the automatic insertion process, the bet amount set for the bet is not paid out, and instead, a number of game medals corresponding to the stored credits is paid out to the player from the hopper 44 (settlement) processing is executed.

<Secondary Control Means>
Various effects can be executed according to the progress of the game, and effects such as those described in the explanation of the winning effect, settlement effect, and insertion effect applicable to this embodiment, and the error and winning effect related to the hopper 44 applicable to this embodiment are executed. In this embodiment, a winning lamp effect is also executed.

<Winning Performance>
This is an effect that is executed when a game medal is paid out, or when a symbol corresponding to a replay role is won (displayed), and is executed based on a payout start command, a payout end command, etc. When a game medal is paid out, a payout sound indicating that a game medal is being paid out, a back lamp effect, and a winning lamp effect are executed. When a symbol corresponding to a replay role is won, a winning sound indicating that a replay has won, a back lamp effect, and a winning lamp effect are executed. Note that when a push order role is won in the role lottery (internal lottery) and an incorrect symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the winning line, it is possible to prevent the winning effect from being executed.

<Dispensing sound output>
There are two different payout sounds of game medals that are output during the execution of the payout process of game medals: payout sound A and payout sound C. Payout sound A is a payout sound that is output when a push order role is won during normal times (non-AT), and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct symbol combination stops, and an advantageous payout (payout of 12 game medals) is made. Payout sound C is a payout sound that is output when a cherry role is won during normal times (non-AT), the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role stops, and a payout (payout of one game medal) is made.

The payout sound A starts when a payout start command is received, and repeats the output of a first sound (e.g., a "zu" sound) until a payout end command is received, and then ends after the payout end command is received by repeating the output of the first sound for a first specific time (e.g., 1 second). The payout sound A outputs the sound for a first payout sound period (the period during which the actual payout is performed plus the first specific time) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being performed (the period during which the payout process is performed, e.g., about 1.2 seconds), making it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being performed. In addition, by outputting the payout sound for a predetermined payout sound period that is longer than the period during which the payout is being performed, the player is made to recognize that a payout is being performed during the period during which the payout sound is being output, and it is expected that the start time of the next game will be delayed. As a result, when a performance according to the result of the internal lottery is being performed over a certain period of time, it is easier to perform the performance without being canceled midway.

The payout sound C is a payout sound that starts when a payout start command is received, repeats the output of a third sound (e.g., a buzzing sound) until a payout end command is received, and then repeats the output of a predetermined sound for a fourth specific time (e.g., 1.5 seconds) after the payout end command is received, and ends. That is, the payout sound C outputs a sound for a third payout sound period (a period obtained by adding the fourth specific time to the period during which actual payout is performed) that is longer than the period during which actual payout is performed (e.g., about 0.2 seconds), and this third payout sound period is shorter than the first payout sound period of the payout sound A because the number of game medals paid out is smaller. In this way, the payout sound C is shorter than the payout sound A, but by outputting the payout sound for a period longer than the period during which payout is performed, the player can be sure not to miss the payout, even though the number is small, and can recognize that game medals have been awarded.
The output of the payout sound is not canceled (ended) by a bet setting (receiving a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command), but is canceled (ended) by a game start operation (receiving a start switch acceptance command).

Note that the output of the payout sound begins after the start payout command is received, and continues until a specified time has elapsed after the end payout command is received. However, once the start payout command is received, the payout sound may be output for a predetermined time that is the sum of the time taken from the start of payout to the end of payout (whichever is longer between adding credits and paying out game medals) plus a first specific time or a fourth specific time, without being triggered by the end payout command.
Further, although the dispensing sounds A and C are different from each other in the above embodiment, the same dispensing sound may be output.

<Winning sound output>
The winning sound output when a replay role is won is a winning sound A. The winning sound A starts when a payout start command is received, and is a winning sound that outputs a fourth sound (e.g., a "ji" sound) until a fifth specific time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed. By outputting the winning sound for a certain period of time, the player can ensure that he or she does not miss the sound, and can recognize that a replay role has been won.
The output of the winning sound is not cancelled (ended) by a payout end command or betting setting (reception of an automatic insertion command), but is cancelled (ended) by a game start operation (reception of a start switch acceptance command). The output time of the winning sound A may be configured to end before the automatic insertion is performed, or may be configured to end by the time the game start operation becomes possible.

<Back lamp effect>
There are three different back lamp effects: Back Lamp Effects A, Back Lamp Effects C, and Back Lamp Effects D. Back Lamp Effects A is a back lamp effect that is output (executed) when a push order role is won during normal play (non-AT), and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct symbol combination stops and 12 coins are paid out. Back Lamp Effects C is a back lamp effect that is output (executed) when a cherry role is won during normal play (non-AT), the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role stops, and 1 coin is paid out. Back Lamp Effects D is a back lamp effect that is output (executed) when a replay role is won during normal play (non-AT), and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role stops.

The back lamp performance A starts when a payout start command is received, and the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in a first pattern until a payout end command is received. After the payout end command is received, the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in a first pattern for a first specific time (for example, 1 second) and ends. The back lamp performance A is executed for a first back lamp performance period (a period obtained by adding the above-mentioned first specific time to the period during which actual payout is performed) that is longer than the period during which actual payout is performed (for example, about 1.2 seconds), so that the player can easily recognize that a payout is being performed. In addition, by executing (outputting) the back lamp performance A for a first back lamp performance period that is longer than the period during which payout is performed, the player can recognize that a payout is being performed during the period during which the back lamp performance A is being performed, and it is expected that the start time of the next game can be delayed, and further, when a performance according to the result of an internal lottery is performed over a certain period of time, it is easier to execute it without being canceled midway. Note that backlight effect A is canceled (ended) when a bet is set (a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command is received).

The back lamp performance C starts when a payout start command is received, and the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in the third pattern until a payout end command is received. After the payout end command is received, the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in the third pattern for a first specific time (for example, 1 second) and ends. The back lamp performance C is executed for a third back lamp performance period (a period obtained by adding the above-mentioned first specific time to the period during which the actual payout is being performed) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being performed (for example, about 0.2 seconds), so that the player can easily recognize that a payout is being performed. In addition, by executing (outputting) the back lamp performance C for a third back lamp performance period that is longer than the period during which the payout is being performed, the player can recognize that the payout is being performed during the period during which the back lamp performance C is being performed, and it is expected that the start time of the next game can be delayed, and further, when a performance according to the result of the internal lottery is performed over a certain period of time, it is easier to execute it without being canceled midway. In addition, like Backlamp Performance A, Backlamp Performance C is canceled (ended) upon betting (receiving a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command).

The back lamp performance D starts when a payout start command is received, and ends by repeatedly turning on and off the back lamp in the fourth pattern for a first specific time (for example, 1 second). By executing the back lamp performance D for the fourth back lamp performance period (the same period as the first specific time), it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a replay role has been won. In addition, by executing (outputting) the back lamp performance D for the fourth back lamp performance period, the player is made to recognize that a process based on a replay role is being performed during the period in which the back lamp performance D is being executed, and it is expected that the start time of the next game will be delayed. Furthermore, when a performance based on the result of an internal lottery is being performed over a certain period of time, it is easier to execute it without being canceled midway. Note that the back lamp performance D is not canceled (ended) by betting setting (automatic insertion command), but is canceled (ended) by a game start operation (reception of a start switch reception command).

<Winners Lamp Presentation>
There are three different winning lamp effects: winning lamp effect A, winning lamp effect C, and winning lamp effect D. The winning lamp effect A is a winning lamp effect that is output (executed) when the push order role is won during normal play (non-AT), and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct symbol combination stops, and 12 coins are paid out. The winning lamp effect C is a winning lamp effect that is output (executed) when the cherry role is won during normal play (non-AT), the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role stops, and 1 coin is paid out. The winning lamp effect D is a winning lamp effect that is output (executed) when the replay role is won during normal play (non-AT), and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role stops.

The winning lamp performance A starts when a payout start command is received, and the winning LED lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in yellow until a payout end command is received (fifth pattern), and after the payout end command is received, the winning LED lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in the fifth pattern for a first specific time (for example, 1 second) and ends. The winning lamp performance A is executed for a first winning lamp performance period (a period obtained by adding the above-mentioned first specific time to the period during which the actual payout is performed) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed (for example, about 1.5 seconds), so that the player can easily recognize that a payout is being performed. In addition, by executing (outputting) the winning lamp performance A for a first winning lamp performance period that is longer than the period during which the payout is performed, the player can recognize that a payout is being performed during the period during which the winning lamp performance A is being performed, and it is expected that the start time of the next game will be delayed, and further, when a performance according to the result of the internal lottery is performed over a certain period of time, it is easier to execute it without being canceled midway. Note that the winning lamp effect A is not cancelled (ended) by setting a bet (receiving a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command), but is cancelled (ended) by operating to start playing (receiving a start switch acceptance command).

The winning lamp performance C starts when a payout start command is received, and the winning LED lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in red (sixth pattern) until a payout end command is received, and then the winning LED lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in the sixth pattern for a sixth specific time (e.g., 2.3 seconds) after the payout end command is received, and ends. The winning lamp performance C is executed for a third winning lamp performance period (a period obtained by adding the sixth specific time to the period during which the actual payout is performed, and is the same length as the first winning lamp performance period) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed (e.g., about 0.2 seconds), making it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being performed. In addition, by executing (outputting) the winning lamp performance C for a third winning lamp performance period that is longer than the period during which the payout is performed, the player is made to recognize that a payout is being performed during the period during which the winning lamp performance C is being performed, and it is expected that the start time of the next game will be delayed, and further, when a performance according to the result of the internal lottery is performed over a certain period of time, it is easier to execute it without being canceled midway. Note that the winning lamp effect C is not cancelled (ended) by setting a bet (receiving a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command), but is cancelled (ended) by operating to start playing (receiving a start switch acceptance command).

The winning lamp effect D starts when the payout start command is received, and ends by repeatedly turning on and off the winning LED lamp in blue for a seventh specific time (for example, 2.5 seconds) (seventh pattern). The winning lamp effect D is executed for the fourth winning lamp effect period (the same period as the seventh specific time and the same length as the first winning lamp effect period), making it easier for the player to recognize that the replay role has won. In addition, by executing (outputting) the winning lamp effect D for the fourth winning lamp effect period, the player is made to recognize that processing based on the replay role is being performed during the period in which the winning lamp effect D is being executed, and it is expected that the start time of the next game will be delayed, and further, when an effect based on the result of the internal lottery is being performed over a certain period of time, it is easier to execute it without being canceled midway. Note that the winning lamp effect D is not canceled (ended) by betting setting (automatic insertion command), but is canceled (ended) by a game start operation (reception of a start switch reception command).

Winning lamp effects A, C, and D are configured so that the colors of the winning LED lamp when it lights up are different, but the lighting and blinking patterns and the length of the execution period are the same. By making the only difference in color, it becomes easier to recognize that the winning lamp effect is an effect caused by a winning role. Also, by making the execution period the same as the length of winning lamp effect A, when a cherry or replay role is won, the next game can start earlier than when the correct pattern combination for the push order role is stopped and displayed, but because the winning lamp effect is being executed, it is expected that the start of the next game will be delayed until the winning lamp effect ends.

In addition, the winning lamp effects A and C are executed from the time the end payout command is received until the first specific time or the sixth specific time has elapsed, but when the start payout command is received, the winning lamp effect may be executed for a predetermined time that is the sum of the first specific time or the sixth specific time and the time taken from the start of payout to the end of payout (whichever is longer between adding credits and paying out game medals), without being triggered by the end payout command.
In addition, the "first winning lamp presentation period", "third winning lamp presentation period", and "fourth winning lamp presentation period" of winning lamp presentations A, C, and D are set to the same period as the "first payout sound period" of payout sound A, but the "first winning lamp presentation period", "third winning lamp presentation period", and "fourth winning lamp presentation period" may be set to periods different from the "first payout sound period". It is preferable that the "first winning lamp presentation period", "third winning lamp presentation period", and "fourth winning lamp presentation period" are set to the same period, and may be set to a length of time longer than the time required to pay out the maximum number of game medals that can be paid out in one game.

<Error notification>
When an error such as an error related to the hopper 44 or a door open error occurs, the main control means displays an error code on the winning number display 27, and the sub-control means notifies the occurrence of the error with the liquid crystal (display device), speaker S, and winning LED lamp. The winning LED lamp lights up in red during the period when the occurrence of the error is being notified. The winning LED lamp also lights up in red when a cherry wins, but by making the lamp continue to light up in red during the error notification, the pattern is made different from when a cherry wins, making it possible to distinguish whether the lamp is notifying the occurrence of an error or a win.

＜Settlement Performance＞
This is an effect that is executed when the game medals are settled, and a settlement sound (settlement effect) is output to indicate that the game medals are being paid out, and a sound is output to indicate that the settlement is complete. Since the settlement effect does not use the winning LED lamp or back lamp, even if the medals are paid out, it is easy to recognize that it is different from the effect based on the winning of a small role or a replay role.

Various effects executed according to the progress of the game will be explained below with reference to Figures 36 to 45. Figure 36 is a time chart when no insertion operation is performed with the MAX bet switch after the payout process based on the winning of the push order role is completed, Figure 37 is a time chart when an insertion operation is performed with the MAX bet switch after the payout process based on the winning of the push order role is completed, Figure 38 is a time chart when no insertion operation is performed with the MAX bet switch after the payout process based on the winning of the cherry role is completed, Figure 39 is a time chart when an insertion operation is performed with the MAX bet switch after the payout process based on the winning of the cherry role is completed, and Figure 40 is a time chart when no game medals are inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of the replay role is completed. FIG. 41 is a time chart when a gaming medal is inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed, FIG. 42 is a time chart when a settlement operation is performed with the settlement switch after the payout process based on the winning of a push order role is completed, FIG. 43 is a time chart when a settlement operation is performed with the settlement switch after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed, FIG. 44 is a time chart when a payout is not performed normally after the winning of a cherry role (when a hopper empty error occurs), and FIG. 45 is a time chart when a payout is not performed normally after the winning of a cherry role (when a hopper retention error occurs).

36 to 45, ON and OFF are used for convenience of explanation, but the status of the corresponding process or presentation is written in parentheses. Specifically, for the payout process/settlement process/prize winning lamp presentation (prize winning LED lamp)/BL presentation/settlement presentation/error notification (prize winning LED lamp), ON indicates that the process is being executed, OFF indicates that the process is not being executed, and when it changes from OFF to ON, it means that the process has started, and when it changes from ON to OFF, it means that the process has ended. For the payout sound/insertion sound/prize winning sound, ON indicates that an output is being output, and OFF indicates that an output is not being output. For the MAX bet lamp/medal insertion possible lamp, ON indicates that the lamp is lit, and OFF indicates that the lamp is off. For the MAX bet switch operation/settlement switch operation, ON indicates that the operation has been performed, and OFF indicates that the operation has not been performed. For medal insertion, ON indicates that the inserted game medal has passed through the medal selector 34 normally (the insertion sensor provided on the medal selector 34 has detected the game medal), and OFF indicates that no game medal has been inserted. For error (hopper empty) and error (hopper stuck), ON indicates that an error has occurred (an error has been detected and set), and OFF indicates that no error has occurred. For error display, ON indicates that an error code is being displayed by the main control means or an error screen is being displayed by the sub-control means based on the occurrence of an error, and OFF indicates that no error code or error screen is being displayed.

It can also be combined with the acquisition display effect, cumulative display effect, result announcement effect, push effect, and comment effect described above, and times t0 to t5, t17, and t18 in Figures 22 to 32 are the same as times t0 to t5, t17, and t18 in Figures 36 to 45.

<If the MAX BET switch is not used to insert a bet after the payout process based on the winning push order is completed>
FIG. 36 shows a case where the correct symbol combination is displayed and stopped in the correct push order as a winning push order role. At the timing of time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means starts the output of the payout sound A (written as payout sound in the figure, the same below) based on the received payout start command, the winning lamp performance A (written as winning lamp performance in the figure, the same below) on the winning LED lamp, and the back lamp performance A (written as BL performance in the figure, the same below) on the back lamp. The time related to the payout process is 1.5 seconds when it is normally executed (in this example, 12 game medals are normally paid out). At the timing of time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means. The sub-control means continues the output of the payout sound A, the winning lamp performance A, and the back lamp performance A as the winning performance for the T1 period (first specific time) based on the payout end command.

After the payout process is completed at time t1, the main control means performs processes such as updating the RT status (game end check process) and turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game medals. The main control means turns on the MAX BET lamp based on the fact that it is possible to insert game medals at time t2. The MAX BET lamp remains lit because the MAX BET switch was not operated. At time t5, since the T1 period has passed since time t1, the sub-control means ends the output of payout sound A, winning lamp presentation A, and back lamp presentation A. In other words, the period from time t0 to t5 can be said to be the first payout sound period, the first back lamp presentation period, and the first winning lamp presentation period. As described above, from time t1 onwards, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as continuing to output payout sound A, continuing the winning lamp presentation A and the back lamp presentation A, and turning on the MAX BET lamp. By continuing to output payout sound A, the winning lamp presentation A and the back lamp presentation A, the player is made aware that a payout has been made, and is also made aware that a bet can be set by operating the MAX BET, improving the performance of the gaming machine.

<When the MAX BET switch is used to insert a bet after the payout process based on the winning push order is completed>
FIG. 37 shows a case where the correct symbol combination is displayed and the correct push order is operated as the winning of the push order role, and the winning is achieved. Until the timing of time t2, it is the same as the case where the MAX bet switch is not inserted after the payout process based on the winning of the push order role is completed, and at the timing of time t3, the MAX bet switch is inserted. By operating the MAX bet switch, the main control means ends (turns off) the illumination of the MAX bet lamp, and the sub-control means ends the back lamp performance A, and outputs the insertion sound A (written as the insertion sound in the figure, the same below) three times as the insertion performance from the timing of time t3 to the timing of time t4 (during the T2 period). Even if various situations such as the output of the payout sound A and the output of the winning lamp performance A are combined at the timing after time t3, smooth control is possible, and thus the player can recognize that the payout has been performed, while also being aware that the MAX bet switch has been operated and the bet setting has been performed, and the performance of the gaming machine can be improved. At time t3, the payout sound A is output and the winning lamp effect A continues, but the back lamp effect A is ended, allowing the player to visually recognize that a bet has been set. Note that, although the explanation was given above regarding the insertion operation using the MAX bet switch, the back lamp effect A is also ended and the insertion sound A is output when the insertion operation using the 1 bet switch or the insertion of a coin is performed.

<If you do not insert the MAX BET switch after the payout process based on the Cherry winning combination is completed>
FIG. 38 shows a case where the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role is stopped and displayed on the pay line, and a prize is won. At the timing of time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means starts the output of the payout sound C (written as payout sound in the figure, the same below) based on the received payout start command, the winning LED lamp's winning lamp effect C (written as winning lamp effect in the figure, the same below), and the back lamp effect C (written as BL effect in the figure, the same below) based on the received payout start command. The time related to the payout process is 0.2 seconds when it is executed normally (in this example, one game medal is normally paid out). At the timing of time t19, the main control means ends the payout process and sends a payout end command to the sub-control means. Based on the payout end command, the sub-control means continues to output the payout sound C as a winning effect for a T4 period (fourth specific time) until time t24, to execute the winning lamp effect C for a T6 period (sixth specific time) until time t5, and to execute the back lamp effect C for a T1 period (first specific time) until time t23.

After the payout process is completed at time t19, the main control means performs processes such as updating the RT status (game end check process) and turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game medals. The main control means turns on the MAX BET lamp at time t20 based on the fact that game medals can be inserted. The MAX BET lamp remains lit because the MAX BET switch was not operated. (Note that this diagram assumes that there is enough credit accumulated to allow bet setting by operating the MAX BET switch. If bet setting is not possible by operating the MAX BET switch, the game medals can be inserted at time t20, but the MAX BET lamp does not light up.)

At time t23, a period T1 has passed since time t19, so the sub-control means ends back lamp effect A. In other words, the period from time t0 to t23 can be considered the third back lamp effect period. At time t24, a period T4 has passed since time t19, so the sub-control means ends the output of payout sound C. In other words, the period from time t0 to t24 can be considered the third payout sound period. At time t5, a period T6 has passed since time t19, so the sub-control means ends winning lamp effect C. In other words, the period from time t0 to t5 can be considered the third winning lamp effect period. As described above, from time t19 onwards, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as continuing to output the payout sound C, continuing the winning lamp presentation C and the back lamp presentation C, and turning on the MAX BET lamp. By continuing to output the payout sound C, the winning lamp presentation C, and the back lamp presentation C, the player is made aware that a payout has been made, and is also made aware that a bet can be set by operating the MAX BET, improving the performance of the gaming machine.

<When the MAX BET switch is used to insert a bet after the payout process based on the Cherry winning combination is completed>
FIG. 39 shows a case where the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role is stopped and displayed on the pay line and a prize is won. Until the timing of time t20, it is the same as the case where the insertion operation by the MAX bet switch is not performed after the end of the payout process based on the cherry role, and at the timing of time t21, the insertion operation by the MAX bet switch is performed. By operating the MAX bet switch, the main control means ends (turns off) the illumination of the MAX bet lamp, and the sub-control means ends the back lamp performance C, and outputs the insertion sound A (written as insertion sound in the figure, the same below) three times as three coins are bet by the insertion operation by the MAX bet switch as the insertion performance from the timing of time t21 to the timing of time t22 (during the T2 period). Even if various situations such as the output of the payout sound C and the winning lamp performance C are performed and the output of the insertion sound A are combined at the timing after time t21, smooth control is possible, and thus, while the player is made aware that the payout has been performed, the player is also made aware that the MAX bet switch has been operated and the bet setting has been performed, and the performance of the gaming machine can be improved. Also, at time t21, the output of the payout sound C and the winning lamp effect C continue, but by ending the back lamp effect C, it is possible to visually recognize that a bet has been set.

In FIG. 39, it is assumed that there are enough credits stored to allow a bet to be set by operating the MAX bet switch. If a bet cannot be set by operating the MAX bet switch, the machine will be in a state in which a gaming medal can be inserted at time t20, but the MAX bet lamp will not light up. Also, while an insertion operation using the MAX bet switch has been described, inserting a medal using the 1 bet switch will also end the back lamp effect C and output insertion sound A.

<If you do not insert a medal after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed>
As shown in FIG. 40, at the timing of time t0, the main control means transmits a payout start command with the number of game medals to be paid out being 0 to the sub-control means, and the sub-control means starts output of winning sound A (written as winning sound in the figure, the same below), winning lamp effect D by the winning LED lamp (written as winning lamp effect in the figure, the same below), and back lamp effect D by the back lamp (written as BL effect in the figure, the same below) based on the received payout start command. The sub-control means continues output of winning sound A as a winning effect for a T5 period (fifth specific time), winning lamp effect D for a T7 period (seventh specific time), and back lamp effect D for a T1 period (first specific time) based on the payout start command. At the timing of time t25, the main control means starts automatic insertion processing and transmits an automatic throw command to the sub-control means. After the automatic insertion processing is completed at the timing of time t26, the main control means turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game medals.

At time t26, the main control means turns on the medal insertion possible lamp based on the fact that a gaming medal can be inserted. Since no medals were inserted thereafter, the lamp remains lit. At time T29, the sub-control means ends the back lamp performance D because a T1 period has elapsed since time t09. In other words, the period from time t0 to t29 can be considered the fourth back lamp performance period. At time t5, the sub-control means ends the winning lamp performance D because a T7 period has elapsed since time t0. In other words, the period from time t0 to t5 can be considered the fourth winning lamp performance period. As described above, even when various situations are combined, such as continuing the winning lamp performance D and the back lamp performance D at times after time t26, while turning on the medal insertion possible lamp, smooth control is possible, and by continuing the winning lamp performance D and the back lamp performance D, the player is made to recognize that a payout has been made, and is also made to recognize that a medal can be inserted, which can improve the performance of the gaming machine. In this diagram, it is assumed that the credits stored after the automatic insertion process have not reached the upper limit, and if it is not possible to insert a gaming medal, the medal insertion possible lamp will not light up at time t26 (the blocker will not be turned on).

<When inserting a medal after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed>
As shown in Fig. 41, until the timing of time t26, it is the same as when the game medal is not inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of the replay role is completed, and at the timing of time t27, the game medal is inserted, so that the main control means stores one game medal in the credit and transmits a storage number command to the sub-control means. The sub-control means ends the back lamp performance D based on receiving the storage number command, outputs the input sound B (written as the input sound in the figure, the same applies below) once as the input performance, and outputs it from the timing of time t27 to the timing of time t28. Even if various situations such as the output of the input sound B are combined while the winning lamp performance D is performed at the timing after time t27, smooth control is possible, and thus, it is possible to make the player recognize that the replay role has won, while also making the player recognize that a valuable input has been made and one medal has been stored, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. Furthermore, at the timing of time t27, the winning lamp effect D continues, but by ending the back lamp effect D, it is possible to visually recognize that the points have been accumulated in the credits.
In addition, in this diagram, it is assumed that the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit after the automatic insertion process (the accumulated number is 48 or less), and the state in which game medals can be inserted continues even if one game medal is inserted.

<When settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the payout process based on the winning of the push order role is completed>
As shown in Figure 42, up until the timing of time t2, the operation is the same as when the MAX bet switch is operated after the payout process based on the winning push order role is completed, and at the timing of time t3, the settlement switch is operated instead of the MAX bet switch.
At the timing of time t3, the main control means starts the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement button, and ends (turns off) the illumination of the MAX BET lamp. Then, the sub-control means ends the output of the payout sound A, the winning lamp performance A, and the back lamp performance A at the timing of time t3 without waiting for the lapse of the T1 period. After that, based on the settlement start command, the output of the settlement sound is started as the settlement performance. Note that the settlement sound is output as the settlement performance, but the performance using the back lamp and the winning LED lamp is not performed. When the settlement process is started, in order to prevent the player from being confused by the simultaneous output of the payout sound A and the output of the settlement sound, the output of the payout sound A, the winning lamp performance A, and the back lamp performance A, which were scheduled to continue for the T1 period, are ended by the start of the settlement process, and the performance using the back lamp and the winning LED lamp is not performed, so that the player can accurately recognize that the settlement process different from the payout process is being performed.

<When settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role has ended>
As shown in FIG. 43, up until time t26, the process is the same as when a gaming medal is inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed, and at time t30, the settlement switch is operated.
At the timing of time t30, the main control means starts the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement button, and ends (turns off) the illumination of the medal insertion possible lamp. Then, the sub-control means ends the winning lamp effect D at the timing of time t30 without waiting for the passage of the T7 period and the back lamp effect D at the timing of time t30 without waiting for the passage of the T7 period and the T1 period. After that, based on the settlement start command, the output of the settlement sound is started as the settlement effect. Note that the settlement sound is output, but the effects using the back lamp and the winning LED lamp are not performed. Since the settlement process has started, the winning lamp effect D and the back lamp effect D, which were scheduled to continue for the T7 period and the T1 period, are ended, and the effects using the back lamp and the winning LED lamp are not performed, so that the player can recognize that the settlement process is being performed. Note that in this figure, it is assumed that the accumulation of credits has not reached the upper limit after the automatic insertion process and that 19 or more coins are accumulated.

<When payout is not performed normally after winning the Cherry role (when a hopper empty error occurs)>
As shown in FIG. 44, the main control means starts the payout process at the timing of time t0, and the sub-control means starts the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C based on the received payout start command. After the timing of time t0, the payout process is executed, but since there are no game medals in the hopper 44, the game medals are not paid out and the rotation of the rotating wheel continues. Then, at the timing of time t17, the main control means determines that the game medals in the hopper 44 are empty, ends the payout process, and sets a hopper empty error. Based on the occurrence of the hopper empty error, the main control means displays an error code, and the sub-control means cancels (ends the display) the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C that were being executed, displays an error screen, and executes an error notification using the winning LED lamp. Note that the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C are continuously executed until the timing of time t17. Until time t17, the winning LED lamp lights up in red as a winning lamp effect and flashes repeatedly, but at time t17, the winning LED lamp lights up in red as an error notification, so although it is the same red, the lighting pattern is different, so it can be recognized that the winning lamp effect has switched to an error notification. Note that this figure shows a case in which a hopper empty error occurs without a single medal being paid out after the start of the payout process, and if a hopper empty error occurs after multiple medals have been paid out, the timing at which the hopper empty error occurs will be later than time t17 by the amount of medals paid out.

<If payout is not performed normally after winning the Cherry role (when a hopper retention error occurs)>
As shown in FIG. 45, the main control means starts the payout process at the timing of time t0, and the sub-control means starts the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C based on the received payout start command. After the timing of time t0, the payout process is executed, but the payout of the game medals is not executed because the game medals are stuck in the outlet of the hopper 44. Then, at the timing of time t18, since the payout sensor of the hopper 44 has continuously detected the game medals for 201 ms or more since the start of the payout process, the main control means judges that the game medals are stuck, ends the payout process, and sets a hopper retention error. Similarly, at the timing of time t18, the main control means displays an error code based on the occurrence of a hopper retention error, and the sub-control means cancels (ends the display) the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C that were being executed, and displays an error screen.

The output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C are executed from the start of the payout process, and are executed before the payout process starts and a hopper retention error occurs, so it is possible to check the winning effects such as the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C before the error screen is displayed. Note that the same figure shows a case where a hopper retention error occurs when not a single medal is paid out after the start of the payout process. In a situation where multiple game medals are paid out, if a hopper retention error occurs after some of the multiple game medals have been paid out, the timing at which the hopper retention error occurs will be later than time t18 by the amount of the payout of some of the game medals, and the period for executing the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C will be longer.

<Changes in form>
The time required to normally pay out 12 game medals is set to 1.5 seconds, and the time required to normally pay out one game medal is set to 0.2 seconds, but the payout time may be varied depending on the number of medals to be paid out and whether the payout process only involves adding credits or includes paying out game medals from the hopper 44. In this case, the time required to pay out one game medal from the hopper 44 may be configured to be longer than the time required to add one game medal to credits. Conversely, the time required to add one game medal to credits may be configured to be longer than the time required to pay out one game medal from the hopper 44.

In the winning lamp performance, the color corresponding to the type of winning combination (yellow light is emitted when the push order combination is won and the correct symbol combination is won, red light is emitted when the cherry combination is won, and blue light is emitted when the replay combination is won) is described, but the color of light may be a common color (e.g., white) regardless of the type of winning combination. By using a common color, it is possible to simply notify that a certain role has been won regardless of the symbol combination (outcome) that stops on the reel. Also, the winning lamp performance can be executed regardless of the color of the symbol corresponding to the role that stops on the winning line, preventing misconception.
In addition, the common color regardless of the type of role may be the same white for all roles, or may be divided into several groups according to the type of role (white for bell roles and replay roles, purple for cherry roles and watermelon roles).

The winning lamp effect is executed for a time determined by the role after receiving the payout end command, but it may be executed for a time determined by the role after receiving the payout start command. For example, it may be executed for 2.5 seconds when the correct symbol combination, the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role, or the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role stops.
The execution period of the winning lamp effect is the same as the output period of the payout sound, but it may be a different period. Also, the execution period of the winning lamp effect is the same as the output period of the back lamp effect, but it may be a different period. The execution period of the winning lamp effect can be longer than the time required for the payout process (1.5 seconds) and shorter than the time required for the hopper empty error to be set (3.5 seconds).

Although the winning lamp effect A is executed during normal times (non-AT), it may be executed during the AT as well. Also, the color may be the same, but the pattern of lighting and extinguishing or the execution time may be different. Also, it may not be executed during the AT. By not executing it during the AT, the winning lamp effect is executed each time for the correct symbol combination of the push order role, which has increased the frequency of winning, and it is possible to prevent the player from being bothered.
Similarly, other roles (cherry role, replay role) may be configured to be executed during the AT, or may not be executed during the AT.

Although it has been stated that the winning lamp effect does not end with the insertion operation of the MAX bet switch (reception of the reserve insertion command) or the insertion of a game medal (reception of the reserve number command), it may end with the insertion operation of the MAX bet switch (reception of the reserve insertion command) or the insertion of a game medal (reception of the reserve number command). After the replay combination is won, the winning lamp effect may not end in the automatic bet process, and may end when a game medal is inserted thereafter.
Although the back lamp effect is said to end when the MAX bet switch is inserted (received the reserve insertion command) and when a gaming medal is inserted (received the reserve number command), it may be configured so that it does not end.

Although it has been stated that the winning LED lamp will not be used as the settlement effect, it may be used. This may be the same as the error notification that is performed when an error occurs, or it may be a different effect from the winning lamp effect that is performed when an error is notified or when a winning combination is won. As a different effect, it is desirable that one of the light color, blinking pattern, or time of the winning LED lamp is different, so that it can be recognized as being different from the error notification and winning lamp effects.

When an error occurs, an error is notified using the winning LED lamp, but when the power is turned on or a door open error occurs, the winning LED lamp may also be used to notify an error in the same manner as when a hopper empty error occurs. When the power is turned on, the winning LED lamp continues for a certain period of time, and when a door open error occurs, the winning LED lamp continues until the door is closed or until a certain period of time has passed since the door was closed. In these situations, gameplay can continue, and there is a possibility that the execution of the error notification and the execution of the winning lamp presentation may overlap. In the event that they overlap, the error notification may be prioritized over the winning lamp presentation. Prioritizing the error notification may be configured to not execute the winning lamp presentation while the error notification is being executed, even if the opportunity to execute the winning lamp presentation is met. Also, when an error notification is executed while the winning lamp presentation is being executed, the winning lamp presentation may be ended and the error notification executed.

Also, giving priority to error notification can mean that the winning LED lamp will light up in a way that corresponds to the error notification when an error notification is being executed. Specifically, it can be configured so that when the trigger for executing the winning lamp effect is met, the winning lamp effect is executed, while the winning LED lamp only emits light corresponding to the error notification when it is the period for executing the error notification, and when the period for executing the error notification has ended but the period for executing the winning lamp effect is still ongoing, the winning LED lamp emits light corresponding to the winning lamp effect.

The winning lamp effect is executed when the correct symbol combination stops in a game in which the push order role is won, when the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role stops, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role stops, but it may be configured to be executed when the push order does not matter role (so-called shared bell), which executes an advantageous payout (payout of 12 coins) regardless of the push order, stops a symbol combination corresponding to the push order does not matter role (correct symbol combination). It may also be configured to be executed when other roles such as watermelon role and chance role are won.
Furthermore, the times and lengths of the periods described in the above embodiments are merely examples and can be changed as appropriate.

<Explanation regarding ball output specifications across advantageous zones>
Since all parameters that affect the performance of the instruction functions are updated to 0 by the RAM initialization process (also called RAM initialization process at the end of the advantageous period) when the advantageous period ends and the normal period starts, in conventional gaming machines, when one advantageous period ends and the machine moves to a new advantageous period via the normal period, it is not possible to carry over any information on the instruction functions in the previous advantageous period. For this reason, even if there are 500 games remaining in the AT in one advantageous period, if the upper limit of the advantageous period is reached, the AT ends and the number of remaining games in the AT is initialized, which often makes the player feel like they have lost out.
In light of this problem, we will explain a method of indirectly carrying over certain parameters (for example, a certain mode related to winning the AT, certain points related to winning the AT, etc., also known as carryover parameters) that affect the performance related to the instruction function to the next advantageous period by winning a bonus before the end of the advantageous period.

Note that the reel arrangement, symbol combination, condition device, and internal lottery placement number are basically the same as in Figures 11 to 21, but the replay probability is configured not to change (maintain non-RT) even if the Type 1 BB symbol combination does not stop in a game in which the Type 1 BB is won. In other words, it is configured not to have RT1 (RT inside Type 1 BB). It is also configured to have RT2, which is entered after the end of Type 1 BB and ends after a predetermined number of games (for example, five games). It is also configured to determine a transition to the advantageous zone even in a game in which Replay-A or Replay-B is won, so that a transition to the advantageous zone is determined at approximately 1/1 (65532/65536) in the normal zone. Also, for ease of explanation, non-RT and not inside Type 1 BB will be referred to as non-RT1, and non-RT and inside Type 1 BB will be referred to as non-RT2, but non-RT1 and non-RT2 are the same RT, and the internal lottery numbers are also the same, except that a single Type 1 BB win with a number of 4 in non-RT1 will result in a loss in non-RT2.

The RT transition starts from non-RT1, and if a type 1 BB is won during non-RT1 and the type 1 BB symbol combination does not stop, it becomes non-RT2 from the next game (which may be the end of the game), and if a type 1 BB symbol combination stops during non-RT2, non-RT2 ends and type 1 BB is activated from the next game (also referred to as during type 1 BB), and when the activation of type 1 BB ends, it transitions to RT2 (finite RT after the end of type 1 BB) from the next game, and when a predetermined number of games are played in RT2, RT2 ends and the next game transitions to non-RT1. Note that when a type 1 BB is won during RT2, if a type 1 BB symbol combination stops, RT2 ends and type 1 BB is activated from the next game, and if a type 1 BB symbol combination does not stop, RT2 does not end, and if 5 games are played in RT2, RT2 ends and the next game transitions to non-RT2. In addition, when changing settings, the system starts from non-RT (non-RT1), so if the setting change device operates while the type 1 BB condition device is operating (non-RT2) or while type 1 BB is operating, non-RT (non-RT1) is set when the operation of the setting change device ends. Note that in the event of a power outage in which the setting change device does not operate (sometimes called a normal power outage), the RT state and type 1 BB operating state are not cleared, so when the power is restored, the system starts from the state before the power outage.

In addition, in games in which a 1st type BB is won during non-RT1, games in which a loss occurs during non-RT2, and games in which one of the push order bell group C (winning - C1 to C6) is won during non-RT2, the 1st type BB symbol combination can be stopped according to the operation mode of the stop switch. In games in which one of the push order bell group C is won during an advantageous zone, the operation mode of the stop switch that does not stop the 1st type BB symbol combination is notified except in some circumstances, so the user can maintain non-RT2 by playing according to the operation mode notified.

In this embodiment, in order to indirectly carry over carryover parameters (also referred to as the expectation level for the AT, the expectation level for the notified game state, and the specified information for the notified game state) in one favorable zone (hereinafter also referred to as favorable zone 1) to the next favorable zone (hereinafter also referred to as favorable zone 2), first, in favorable zone 1, if a specific condition is met during the AT (for example, the number of coins won during the AT exceeds 2000, the number of times played during the AT reaches a specified number, the number of times played in one favorable zone reaches a specified number, etc., also referred to as an ending condition), the AT is configured to continue until the specified condition is met (for example, until the value of the MY counter exceeds a specified value (for example, a value less than the upper limit value of the MY counter, such as 2350)) regardless of the remaining period of the AT at the time the specific condition is met. In addition, if the upper limit of the advantageous zone is not set when MY exceeds 2400, but when the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone described above exceeds 2400, the description "MY counter value" will be replaced with "difference in the number of gaming media in one advantageous zone."

After that, in a game in which the value of the MY counter exceeds a predetermined value and in which the 1st type BB symbol combination can be stopped, a predetermined effect is executed to prompt the 1st type BB symbol combination to stop. Note that when executing the predetermined effect to prompt the 1st type BB symbol combination to stop, the operation mode of the stop switch that can stop the 1st type BB symbol combination is not notified, but the operation mode of the stop switch that does not stop the 1st type BB symbol combination even if one of the push order bells C group is won. Also, if the 1st type BB symbol combination does not stop in a game in which a predetermined effect to prompt the 1st type BB symbol combination is executed, the predetermined effect to prompt the 1st type BB symbol combination to stop is executed again in the subsequent game in which the 1st type BB symbol combination can be stopped.

After that, when the operation of the Type 1 BB ends, the game will transition to RT2 from the next game, and the advantageous zone 1 will end in either the game in which the operation of the Type 1 BB ends or in any game during RT2, and all parameters will be updated to 0, and the game will transition to the normal zone and non-RT1 from the next game. Note that which game, either the game in which the operation of the Type 1 BB ends or any game during RT2, will end the advantageous zone 1 in is configured to be determined at the end of the game in which the ending conditions were satisfied in the advantageous zone 1, depending on the value of the carryover parameter at the end of the game in which the ending conditions were satisfied.

Then, after passing through the normal zone and moving to advantageous zone 2, the value of the carryover parameters can be newly determined according to the number of games played in RT2.

Specifically, if the value of the carryover parameter at the end of a game in which the ending condition is satisfied in advantageous zone 1 is a first value, it is determined that advantageous zone 1 ends with the game in which the operation of the Type 1 BB ends, and the game moves from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 in the first game of RT2, so that four games are played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that four games have been played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the value of the carryover parameter is set to the first value.
Furthermore, if the value of the carryover parameter at the end of a game that satisfies the ending condition in advantageous zone 1 is a second value, it is determined that advantageous zone 1 ends in the first game of RT2 after the operation of Type 1 BB ends, and that the game transitions from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 in the second game of RT2, so that three games are executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that three games have been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the value of the carryover parameter is set to the second value.
In this way, the value of the carried-over parameter at the time of transition to non-RT in favorable zone 2 is configured to differ depending on the value of the carried-over parameter at the end of a game in which the ending condition is satisfied in favorable zone 1.

In this way, by changing the number of times to play in RT2 at the start of the next favorable zone depending on the value of the carryover parameter in one favorable zone, it is possible to roughly know the value of the carryover parameter at the end of the previous favorable zone based on the number of times to play in RT2 at the start of the favorable zone, and it is also possible to indirectly carry over the value of the carryover parameter to the next favorable zone.

In this embodiment, the timing for deciding which of the games in which the operation of the Type 1 BB ends or any of the games during RT2 will end the advantageous zone 1 is set to the end of the game in which the ending condition is satisfied in the advantageous zone 1, but it is not limited to this and may be set to the end of the game in which a predetermined condition is satisfied in the advantageous zone 1 (for example, the value of the MY counter exceeds a predetermined value (for example, a value less than the upper limit of the MY counter, such as 2350)), or may be set to the end of the game in which the Type 1 BB symbol combination stops after satisfying the predetermined condition in the advantageous zone 1.

In addition, in the case where the ending conditions are not met during the AT but the advantageous zone ends after the AT ends, the value of the carryover parameter may be indirectly carried over to the next advantageous zone using a similar method. In this case, it is preferable to configure the game to execute a predetermined effect that encourages the stopping of the Type 1 BB symbol combination in a game in which the Type 1 BB symbol combination can be stopped after the AT ends. In this case, the game may be configured to determine whether the advantageous zone will end in the game in which the Type 1 BB operation ends or in any game during RT2 at the end of the final game of the AT, depending on the value of the carryover parameter at the end of the final game of the AT.

In addition, if a player accidentally stops a type 1 BB symbol combination when a specified effect that encourages the player to stop the type 1 BB symbol combination is not being executed, the advantageous zone will not end but will continue even after the operation of the type 1 BB has ended. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the advantageous zone from ending at an unintended timing. This configuration also makes it possible to prevent a player from using a strategy such as intentionally ending the advantageous zone depending on the game situation.

<<Example 1 of ball output specifications across advantageous zones>>
Next, using Figure 50, we will explain the case where certain points related to winning the AT are carried over to the next advantageous period as carryover parameters.

The specific points related to winning the AT are managed by a specific counter (details omitted), and are accumulated when an unfavorable event occurs to the player during gameplay, such as when a consecutive performance fails or when a CZ fails. When the points reach 100, a specific bonus is awarded, such as winning the AT or adding to the remaining time of the AT.

Pattern A in Figure 50 shows the case where the specified points for winning the AT are 0 to 30 points at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern A in FIG. 50, advantageous zone 1 ends with the game in which the activation of Type 1 BB ends, and the first game of RT2 determines the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2, so that four games are played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that four games have been played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the system is configured to set the specified point related to winning the AT to 30.

Pattern B in Figure 50 shows the case where the specified points for winning the AT are 31 to 50 points at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern B of FIG. 50, after the operation of Type 1 BB has finished, the first play of RT2 ends favorable zone 1, and the second play of RT2 determines the transition from the normal zone to favorable zone 2, so that three plays are executed in RT2 at the start of favorable zone 2. Then, based on the fact that three plays have been executed in RT2 at the start of favorable zone 2, the system is configured to set the specified point related to winning the AT to 50.

Pattern C in Figure 50 shows a case where the specified points for winning the AT are 51 to 70 points at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern C of FIG. 50, after the operation of Type 1 BB is completed, the second play of RT2 ends advantageous zone 1, and the third play of RT2 determines the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2, so that two plays are executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that two plays have been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the system is configured to set the specified point related to the AT win to 70.

Pattern D in Figure 50 shows the case where the specified points for winning the AT are 71 to 100 points at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern D of FIG. 50, after the operation of the Type 1 BB is completed, the third play of RT2 ends favorable zone 1, and the fourth play of RT2 determines the transition from the normal zone to favorable zone 2, so one play is executed in RT2 at the start of favorable zone 2. Then, based on the fact that one play is executed in RT2 at the start of favorable zone 2, the system is configured to set the specified point related to the AT win to 100.

<<Specific example 2 of ball output specifications across advantageous zones>>
Next, using Figure 51, we will explain the case where a specified mode related to winning the AT is carried over to the next advantageous period as a carryover parameter.

Details of the specified modes for winning the AT are omitted, but there are four modes: Normal A, Normal B, Heaven Preparation, and Heaven, and the expected probability of winning the AT in the general advantageous zone state differs depending on which mode you are in.

Pattern A in Figure 51 shows the case where the player is in normal A at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern A in FIG. 51, advantageous zone 1 ends with the game in which the activation of Type 1 BB ends, and the first game of RT2 determines the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2, so that four games are played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that four games have been played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, normal A is set as the predetermined mode for winning the AT.

Pattern B in Figure 51 shows the case where the player is in normal B at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern B of FIG. 51, after the operation of Type 1 BB is completed, the first play of RT2 ends advantageous zone 1, and the second play of RT2 determines the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2, so that three plays are executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that three plays have been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, normal B is set as the predetermined mode for winning the AT.

Pattern C in Figure 51 shows the case where the player is in Heaven Preparation at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern C of FIG. 51, after the operation of Type 1 BB is completed, the second play of RT2 ends advantageous zone 1, and the third play of RT2 determines the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2, so that two plays are executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that two plays have been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, heaven preparation is set as a predetermined mode for winning the AT.

Pattern D in Figure 51 shows the case where the player is in heaven at the end of the game after satisfying the ending conditions.

In pattern D in FIG. 51, after the operation of Type 1 BB is completed, the third play of RT2 ends advantageous zone 1, and the fourth play of RT2 determines the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2, so one play is executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that one play is executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, heaven is set as the specified mode for winning the AT.

<<Specific example 3 of ball output specifications across advantageous zones>>
Next, using Figure 52, we will explain the case where specified information regarding the AT execution period is carried over to the next favorable period as a carryover parameter.

Note that, here, the game of RT2 that ends the advantageous zone is determined according to the number of remaining stocks in the AT at the end of the advantageous zone, but if the remaining stocks in the AT are configured to be cleared when the ending conditions are met, the game of RT2 that ends the advantageous zone may be determined according to the number of remaining stocks in the AT at the time the ending conditions are met. Also, instead of the remaining number of stocks in the AT as the specified information regarding the execution period of the AT, if the AT is a game number management type AT, the number of remaining games in the AT may be used as the carryover parameter, or if the AT is a difference number management type AT, the remaining number of wins that can be won in the AT may be used as the carryover parameter.

The number of remaining stocks in the AT is information about the remaining period of the AT in a so-called set-managed AT, and details will be omitted, but for example, in the case of an AT that lasts for 50 games per set, if there are remaining stocks after 50 games of the AT are played, the AT will move on to the next set, and if there are no remaining stocks, a lottery to continue the AT is held and the AT will end if there is no winning lottery.

Pattern A in Figure 52 shows the case where the remaining stocks in the AT are 0 at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern A of FIG. 52, it is decided that advantageous zone 1 will end in the game where the activation of Type 1 BB has ended, and it is decided to move from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 in the first game of RT2, so that four games will be played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that four games have been played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the remaining stock number of the AT is set to 0 as predetermined information regarding the execution period of the AT.

Pattern B in Figure 52 shows the case where the remaining stock in the AT is 1 at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern B of FIG. 52, after the operation of Type 1 BB has finished, the first play of RT2 determines that advantageous zone 1 will end, and the second play of RT2 determines that the normal zone will transition to advantageous zone 2, so that three plays are executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that three plays have been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the remaining stock number of the AT is set to 1 as predetermined information regarding the execution period of the AT.

Pattern C in Figure 52 shows the case where the remaining stock number in the AT is 2 at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern C of FIG. 52, after the operation of Type 1 BB has finished, the second play of RT2 determines that advantageous zone 1 will end, and the third play of RT2 determines that the normal zone will transition to advantageous zone 2, so that two plays are executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that two plays have been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the remaining stock number of the AT is set to 2 as predetermined information regarding the execution period of the AT.

Pattern D in Figure 52 shows the case where the remaining stocks in the AT are 3 or more at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern D of FIG. 52, after the operation of Type 1 BB has finished, it is decided to end advantageous zone 1 at the third play of RT2, and it is decided to move from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 at the fourth play of RT2, so that one play is executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that one play is executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the remaining stock number of the AT is set to 3 as predetermined information regarding the execution period of the AT.

By configuring as in specific examples 1 to 3 above, the value of the carried-over parameters in one favorable zone can be indirectly carried over to the next favorable zone, so that the carried-over parameters in one favorable zone can be prevented from being initialized by the initialization process at the end of the favorable zone, which would cause the player to incur losses. In addition, it is possible to create an incentive to continue playing even when one favorable zone ends and the game moves to the next favorable zone.

As shown in Figures 50 to 52, the timing of the end of the advantageous zone is delayed as the carry-over parameter value increases, because there is a 4/65536 probability that the normal zone will continue. For example, in pattern B of Figure 50, the specified point related to winning the AT is set to 50 at the start of advantageous zone 2, but if the normal zone continues for two plays, two plays will be played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, and so the specified point related to winning the AT is set to 70. In this way, by configuring the timing of the end of the advantageous zone to be delayed as the carry-over parameter value increases, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering losses even if the normal zone happens to continue for more than two plays.

The system may be configured so that the greater the carryover parameter value, the earlier the timing of the end of the advantageous period. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the gaming establishment from incurring losses even if the normal period happens to continue for two games.

Note that RT2 is configured to end after five plays, but the number of plays after which RT2 ends can be set appropriately depending on the carryover parameters that you want to indirectly carry over to the next favorable zone.

It is also possible to indirectly carry over multiple carryover parameters to the next advantageous period by increasing the number of games that will end RT2.
For example, any one of the specified points related to winning the AT, the specified mode related to winning the AT, and the specified information related to the remaining period of the AT may be set as a carryover parameter, any two of them may be set as carryover parameters, or all three may be set as carryover parameters.
It should be noted that carry-over parameters may be set to four or more in addition to the above-mentioned three.

As described above, we have explained a method of indirectly carrying over a specific parameter that affects the performance related to the instruction function in one advantageous zone to the next advantageous zone by using RT2 (finite RT after the end of Type 1 BB), but it is also possible to award a player gaming media that exceeds the upper limit value of the advantageous zone by connecting multiple advantageous zones using RT2.
The following will explain this using Figures 88 and 89.

<<Specific example 4 of ball output specifications across advantageous zones>>
Here, using Figure 88, we will explain an example of granting a player gaming media exceeding the upper limit of the difference in the number of gaming media (gaming value) in one advantageous zone when a specific flag is won in the first advantageous zone after the setting is changed (for example, this refers to a game in which a 4/65536 role is won, or a game in which a 4/65536 role is won and a specified ball draw is won; winning a specific flag can be referred to as a case in which specific conditions are satisfied).

In the example shown in Figure 88, it is configured to be able to determine which game will end the advantageous zone, either the game at which the operation of the first type BB ends or any game during RT2, based on the value stored in a specified storage means (also called an RT2 counter) that can store the number of games played in RT2 at the start of one advantageous zone.

The value of the RT2 counter may be configured to count the number of plays performed in RT2 at the start of one favorable period, or may be configured to store the number of remaining plays in RT2 at the start of one favorable period. The value of the RT2 counter is configured to be initialized at the end of the favorable period.

In addition, RT2 is configured to end after five plays have been performed.

In addition, in normal zone play, if the player is in an RT state (non-RT1, non-RT2, RT2) where a transition to an advantageous zone can be determined, the transition to the advantageous zone is determined with approximately a 1/1 probability (not based on the RT state) based on the results of the internal lottery. Note that in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, the transition to the advantageous zone is not determined during a type 1 BB, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured to determine a transition to the advantageous zone with approximately a 1/1 probability based on the results of the internal lottery even during a type 1 BB, or may be configured to determine a transition to the advantageous zone with a probability lower than approximately 1/1 (such as 1/10) based on the results of the internal lottery.

In the example shown in FIG. 88, first, in the favorable zone 1 (the first favorable zone after the setting change), when a specific flag is hit (when a specific condition is satisfied), the AT is executed until the difference in the number of game media in the favorable zone 1 exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 2350), and after the difference in the number of game media exceeds the predetermined value, a predetermined effect is executed to prompt the stop of the 1st type BB pattern combination in a game in which the 1st type BB pattern combination can be stopped. Here, the predetermined effect to prompt the stop of the 1st type BB pattern combination may be any effect that the player can judge to be appropriate for stopping the 1st type BB pattern combination, such as displaying an image such as "Aim for 7!". When the player operates the stop switch in a predetermined manner according to the predetermined effect to prompt the stop of the 1st type BB pattern combination, the player can stop the 1st type BB pattern combination (win). Note that the favorable zone 1 is the first favorable zone after the setting change, and since the game starts from a non-RT and non-1st type BB inside after the setting change, the value of the RT2 counter in the favorable zone 1 is 0. In addition, even if a predetermined effect is executed to prompt the stopping of the BB symbol combination, if the stop switch is operated in a specific manner different from the predetermined manner without following the predetermined effect to prompt the stopping of the BB symbol combination, the BB symbol combination cannot be stopped (a prize cannot be won). In such a case, in a subsequent game in which the BB symbol combination can be stopped, the predetermined effect to prompt the stopping of the BB symbol combination is executed again.

After that, when the player operates the stop switch in a predetermined manner in accordance with a predetermined presentation that prompts the player to stop the Type 1 BB symbol combination, the Type 1 BB symbol combination stops (wins) and the Type 1 BB operation starts.

After that, advantageous zone 1 ends with a game that satisfies the end condition of Type 1 BB (a game in which the operation of Type 1 BB ends) based on the value of the RT2 counter being 0. Then, the transition to advantageous zone 2 is determined with the game following the game that ended advantageous zone 1 (the first game of RT2 (a game in the normal zone)). After that, four games are played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, so the value of the RT2 counter in advantageous zone 2 becomes 4.

In favorable zone 2, when it transitions to non-RT, the AT is executed until the difference in the number of game media in favorable zone 2 exceeds a predetermined value based on the value of the RT2 counter being 4, and in a game in which the type 1 BB symbol combination can be stopped after the difference in the number of game media exceeds the predetermined value, a predetermined effect is executed to prompt the stopping of the type 1 BB symbol combination. When the player operates the stop switch in a predetermined manner in accordance with the predetermined effect to prompt the stopping of the type 1 BB symbol combination, the type 1 BB symbol combination is stopped (a prize is won) and the operation of the type 1 BB is started.

After that, based on the RT2 counter value being 4, advantageous zone 2 ends with the first play of RT2. Then, the transition to advantageous zone 3 is determined with the play following the play that ended advantageous zone 2 (the second play of RT2). After that, three plays are executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 3, so the value of the RT2 counter in advantageous zone 3 becomes 3.

In favorable zone 3, when transitioning to non-RT, AT is executed until the difference number of game media in favorable zone 3 exceeds a predetermined value based on the value of 3 on the RT2 counter, and in a game in which the type 1 BB pattern combination can be stopped after the difference number of game media exceeds the predetermined value, a predetermined effect is executed to prompt the stopping of the type 1 BB pattern combination. When the player operates the stop switch in a predetermined manner in accordance with the predetermined effect to prompt the stopping of the type 1 BB pattern combination, the type 1 BB pattern combination is stopped (winning) and the operation of the type 1 BB is started.

After that, the second play of RT2 ends favorable zone 3 based on the value of the RT2 counter being 3. Then, the transition to favorable zone 4 is determined in the play following the play that ends favorable zone 3 (the third play of RT2). After that, two plays are executed in RT2 at the start of favorable zone 4, so the value of the RT2 counter in favorable zone 4 becomes 2.

In favorable zone 4, when it transitions to non-RT, the AT is executed until the difference in the number of game media in favorable zone 4 exceeds a predetermined value based on the value of the RT2 counter being 2, and in a game in which the type 1 BB pattern combination can be stopped after the difference in the number of game media exceeds the predetermined value, a predetermined effect is executed to prompt the stopping of the type 1 BB pattern combination. When the player operates the stop switch in a predetermined manner in accordance with the predetermined effect to prompt the stopping of the type 1 BB pattern combination, the type 1 BB pattern combination is stopped (a prize is won) and the operation of the type 1 BB is started. Then, the type 1 BB is won.

After that, based on the RT2 counter value being 2, advantageous zone 4 ends with the third play of RT2. Then, the transition to advantageous zone 5 is determined with the play following the play that ends advantageous zone 4 (the fourth play of RT2). After that, one play is executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 5, so the value of the RT2 counter in advantageous zone 5 becomes 1.

In the favorable zone 5, the lottery state for the AT is set to a predetermined suppression state based on the value of the RT2 counter being 1. In the predetermined suppression state, it may be configured so that the AT can be won, but it is configured so that the difference in the number of game media in the favorable zone does not exceed a predetermined value. In other words, in the predetermined suppression state, the difference in the number of game media in the favorable zone exceeds an upper limit (e.g., 2400), and the favorable zone does not end. Note that here, in order to maintain the predetermined suppression state so that gambling does not become excessively high, it is preferable to configure so that the favorable zone does not end when a predetermined number of games are played, but it may also be configured so that the predetermined suppression state can end by setting an upper limit (e.g., 4000) based on the number of games in the favorable zone.

In this way, based on the value of the RT2 counter, it is configured to be possible to determine in which game the advantageous zone will end, either the game in which the operation of the first type BB ends or the game during RT2. Also, based on the value of the RT2 counter, it is configured to be possible to determine whether to execute the AT until the difference in the number of game media exceeds a predetermined value, or to set the lottery state related to the AT to a predetermined suppression state. In other words, it is configured to be possible to determine the expectation degree related to the AT (the degree of profit given to the player) based on the value of the RT2 counter. Specifically, when the value of the RT2 counter is 1, it is configured to be in a predetermined suppression state, and when the value of the RT2 counter is other than 1, it is configured not to be in the predetermined suppression state and to be able to execute the AT until the difference in the number of game media exceeds a predetermined value. Note that, regardless of whether to set it to a predetermined suppression state or not, it is also possible to configure it so that the expectation degree related to the AT, such as the expectation degree of winning the AT, the expectation degree of addition during the AT, and the expectation degree of continuation of the AT, can be determined based on the value of the RT2 counter.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to award gaming media across multiple advantageous zones based on winning a specific flag, and it is possible to award to a player gaming media that exceeds the upper limit of gaming media that can be awarded in one advantageous zone, thereby eradicating the negative image of gaming machines equipped with advantageous zones that only allow a maximum of 2,400 positive coins to be obtained in one win. Furthermore, in the final advantageous zone (corresponding to advantageous zone 5 described above) to which a player moves based on winning a specific flag, a predetermined suppression state is established, so that excessive gambling tendency is prevented.

In addition, the advantageous zone may be configured so that it does not occur in the game where the operation of the first type BB ends, but ends only in the game during RT2, and it may be configured so that it is possible to determine in which game during RT2 the advantageous zone ends based on the value of the RT2 counter. In this case, if a specific flag is hit in advantageous zone 1, advantageous zone 1 ends in the first game of RT2, advantageous zone 2 ends in the second game of RT2, advantageous zone 3 ends in the third game of RT2, and the value of the RT2 counter for advantageous zone 4 becomes 1, so that advantageous zone 4 is in a predetermined suppressed state.
By configuring in this manner, the RT state at the end of the advantageous period will be one of RT2 play, so processing can be prevented from becoming complicated.

In addition, in a situation where a predetermined performance that encourages the stopping of the 1st type BB symbol combination is not being executed, if a player mistakenly wins a 1st type BB, predetermined information indicating that the 1st type BB has been mistakenly won is stored in a predetermined RWM, and when the predetermined information indicating that the 1st type BB has been mistakenly won is stored, the advantageous zone is not terminated even after the operation of the 1st type BB ends regardless of the value of the RT2 counter, and the value of the RT2 counter is not updated in the RT2 after the operation of the mistakenly won 1st type BB ends. Note that the predetermined information indicating that the 1st type BB has been mistakenly won is initialized when the game transitions from RT2 to non-RT.
By configuring in this way, even if the player mistakenly wins the first type BB, the player will not suffer any loss.

In addition, RT2 is configured to end after five plays, but the number of plays after which RT2 ends can be set as appropriate.

In the example of Figure 88, the AT is configured to start immediately after a specific flag is hit and the game transitions from RT2 to non-RT, but the present invention is not limited to this and the AT may be configured to start after a predetermined number of premonition games (non-AT games) have passed.

<<Specific example 5 of ball output specifications across advantageous zones>>
Here, using Figure 89, we will explain an example of granting a player gaming media exceeding the upper limit of the difference in the number of gaming media (gaming value) in one advantageous zone when a specific flag is won in the first advantageous zone after the setting is changed (for example, this refers to a game in which a 4/65536 role is won, or a game in which a 4/65536 role is won and a specified ball draw is won; winning a specific flag can be referred to as a case in which specific conditions are satisfied).

In the example shown in FIG. 89, the lottery state for the AT is determined based on the RT state in which the player remains by referring to the RT state, and when the RT state is RT2 (finite RT after the operation of the first type BB ends), the lottery state for the AT is configured to be a predetermined preferential state (also called a super preferential state). In the super preferential state, if the player is not in the AT, the player wins the AT regardless of the winning role, or the player has a higher probability of winning the AT compared to a predetermined game state (for example, a specific game state different from the super preferential state). Also, if the player is in the AT, the AT is configured to continue until the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous zone exceeds the upper limit (2400). The lottery state for the AT is a state that affects the result of the lottery for the AT, such as the AT transition lottery (also called the AT first win lottery), the AT addition lottery, the update of the AT end condition (addition/subtraction of the number of AT games, addition/subtraction of the number of AT execution notifications), and the execution of the AT (notification of the operation mode).

RT2 is configured to end after 2000 plays have been performed.

In addition, the advantageous period does not end when a certain number of games have been played, but is configured to end when the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous period exceeds an upper limit (2400) or when an arbitrary end condition is met.

In addition, regardless of the lottery status regarding the AT, the AT is configured to be executed as soon as an advantageous zone other than advantageous zone 1 starts. The AT may also be configured to be executed after a predetermined number of premonition games (e.g., 32 games).

Furthermore, favorable zone 1 is a favorable zone that is determined to be entered during play during a normal zone and not during RT1 (not during RT and not inside type 1 BB). Specifically, it is the first favorable zone after the setting change. Moreover, favorable zones 2 to 5 are favorable zones other than the first after the setting change. A flag (referred to as favorable zone 1 flag) for distinguishing favorable zone 1 from favorable zones other than favorable zone 1 is configured to be storable in a specified memory area, and favorable zone 1 is configured to distinguish from favorable zones other than favorable zone 1 based on the favorable zone 1 flag. Moreover, the favorable zone 1 flag is configured to be initialized at the end of the favorable zone.

Here, we will explain the specific method for distinguishing between advantageous zone 1 and advantageous zones other than advantageous zone 1. Note that in the example shown in Figure 89, it is configured so that a transition to an advantageous zone can be determined even in the case of a single win on Type 1 BB.

In the example shown in Figure 89, a single win of Type 1 BB occurs in the normal section, followed by Replay -C (+1 type BB), Replay -D (+1 type BB), Replay -E (+1 type BB), Replay -F (+1 type BB), Replay -G (+1 type BB), Replay -H (+1 type BB), Replay -I (+1 type BB), Replay -J (+1 type BB), Winning -D (+1 type BB), Winning -E (+1 type BB), Winning -F (+1 If the player wins any of the following prizes in the normal zone, the game is configured to determine a transition to the advantageous zone when the RT state of the game is non-RT1: WIN-G (+1 type BB), WIN-H (+1 type BB), WIN-I (+1 type BB), WIN-J (+1 type BB), or WIN-K (+1 type BB), the game is configured to determine a transition to the advantageous zone when the RT state of the game is non-RT2 or RT2, and not a transition to the advantageous zone when the RT state of the game is non-RT2 or RT2. Also, if the player wins any of the prizes in the normal zone, the game is configured to determine a transition to the advantageous zone regardless of the RT state of the game: WIN-A1, WIN-A2, WIN-A3, WIN-A4, WIN-A5, WIN-A6, WIN-B1, WIN-B2, WIN-B3, WIN-B4, WIN-B5, WIN-B6, WIN-C1, WIN-C2, WIN-C3, WIN-C4, WIN-C5, or WIN-C6, the game is configured to determine a transition to the advantageous zone regardless of the RT state of the game.

Therefore, the following wins are possible: single win of Type 1 BB, replay -C (+1 type BB), replay -D (+1 type BB), replay -E (+1 type BB), replay -F (+1 type BB), replay -G (+1 type BB), replay -H (+1 type BB), replay -I (+1 type BB), replay -J (+1 type BB), winning -D (+1 type BB), winning -E (+1 type BB), winning -F (+1 type BB), winning -G (+1 type BB), winning - If a transition to a favorable zone is determined in a game in which either H (+1 type BB), winning -I (+1 type BB), winning -J (+1 type BB), or winning -K (+1 type BB) has been won (a game in which a type 1 BB has been won), the favorable zone is determined to be a favorable zone to which a transition was determined during non-RT1, so it is determined to be favorable zone 1, and the favorable zone 1 flag is turned on in the game in which a transition to a favorable zone has been determined.
In addition, there are cases where the game at which RT2 ends and the game at which the advantageous zone ends overlap, and in this case, there is a possibility that the next game will be in the normal zone and non-RT1, so there is a risk that the transition to the advantageous zone will be decided during non-RT1 other than immediately after the setting is changed. However, if you win a single 1-type BB, re-play -C (+1-type BB), re-play -D (+1-type BB), re-play -E (+1-type BB), re-play -F (+1-type BB), re-play -G (+1-type BB), re-play -H (+1-type BB), re-play -I (+1-type BB), Replay-J (+1 type BB), Prize-D (+1 type BB), Prize-E (+1 type BB), Prize-F (+1 type BB), Prize-G (+1 type BB), Prize-H (+1 type BB), Prize-I (+1 type BB), Prize-J (+1 type BB), Prize-K (+1 type BB) are designed to be 21918/65536 (approximately 1/3) from FIG. 19, so the probability of remaining in non-RT1 even after 2000 games have been played and RT2 has ended is close to 0. Therefore, the advantageous zone to which a transition is determined during non-RT1 is considered to be the first advantageous zone after the setting change.

In addition, if a transition to a favorable zone is determined in a game in which any of the following has been won: Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win-B4, Win-B5, Win-B6, Win-C1, Win-C2, Win-C3, Win-C4, Win-C5, Win-C6, it is not possible to determine whether the favorable zone is favorable zone 1 or a favorable zone other than favorable zone 1 in the game in which a transition to the favorable zone has been determined, so the RT state and the operating state of the type 1 BB condition device are referenced in the first game of the favorable zone. Then, if the first game of the favorable zone is non-RT1 (non-RT and not inside type 1 BB), it is determined that the favorable zone is a favorable zone to which a transition was determined during non-RT1, so it is determined to be favorable zone 1 and the favorable zone 1 flag is turned on. Furthermore, if the first play in the advantageous zone is non-RT2 (non-RT and within Type 1 BB) or RT2, then it is determined that the advantageous zone is not an advantageous zone to which a transition was determined during non-RT1, so it is determined to be an advantageous zone other than advantageous zone 1, and the advantageous zone 1 flag is not turned on.

In addition, the system is configured so that the advantageous zone does not end while the Type 1 BB is in operation, and the transition to the advantageous zone is not determined while the Type 1 BB is in operation, so the transition to the advantageous zone is determined when playing non-RT1, non-RT2, or RT2.

By controlling the advantageous zone 1 flag in this manner, it is possible to distinguish between advantageous zone 1 and advantageous zones other than advantageous zone 1.

In the example shown in FIG. 89, first, during the AT in favorable zone 1 (the first favorable zone after the setting change), if a specific flag is hit (if a specific condition is met), a predetermined effect is executed to prompt the stopping of the type 1 BB symbol combination in a game in which the type 1 BB symbol combination can be stopped. When the player operates the stop switch in a predetermined manner in accordance with the predetermined effect to prompt the stopping of the type 1 BB symbol combination, the type 1 BB symbol combination is stopped (a win is made) and the operation of the type 1 BB is started.

Next, when the operation of Type 1 BB ends, the next game will transition to RT2. In RT2, the lottery state for the AT will become a super-favorable state, and the AT will continue until the difference in the number of game media in the favorable zone 1 exceeds the upper limit (2400), and when the difference in the number of game media in the favorable zone 1 exceeds the upper limit, the favorable zone 1 will end.

Next, after passing through the normal zone, when the conditions for starting the advantageous zone are met (when a decision is made to move to the advantageous zone), advantageous zone 2 begins. Since the RT state is still RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the lottery state for the AT becomes a super-favorable state, and the AT continues until the difference in the number of game media in advantageous zone 2 exceeds the upper limit, and when the difference in the number of game media in advantageous zone 2 exceeds the upper limit, advantageous zone 2 ends.

Next, once the conditions for starting the advantageous zone are met after passing through the normal zone (when a decision is made to move to the advantageous zone), advantageous zone 3 begins. Since the RT state is still RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 3, the lottery state for the AT becomes a super-favorable state, and the AT continues until the difference in the number of game media in advantageous zone 3 exceeds the upper limit, and when the difference in the number of game media in advantageous zone 3 exceeds the upper limit, advantageous zone 3 ends.

Next, once the conditions for starting the advantageous zone are met after passing through the normal zone (when a decision is made to move to the advantageous zone), advantageous zone 4 begins. Since the RT state is still RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 4, the lottery state for the AT becomes a super-favorable state, and the AT continues until the difference in the number of game media in advantageous zone 4 exceeds the upper limit, and when the difference in the number of game media in advantageous zone 4 exceeds the upper limit, advantageous zone 4 ends.

Next, when the conditions for starting the advantageous zone are met after passing through the normal zone (when a decision is made to transition to the advantageous zone), advantageous zone 5 begins. Even at the start of advantageous zone 5, the RT state is still RT2, so the lottery state for the AT becomes the super-favorable state and the AT is executed, but RT2 ends during a certain game in advantageous zone 5 and transitions to non-RT. When transitioning from RT2 to non-RT, the state related to the AT is controlled to a predetermined suppression state. In the predetermined suppression state, it may be configured so that the AT can be won, but it is configured so that the difference number of game media in the advantageous zone does not exceed a predetermined value. In other words, in the predetermined suppression state, it is controlled so that the difference number of game media in the advantageous zone does not exceed the upper limit value, thereby ending the advantageous zone. Also, in the predetermined suppression state, it is configured so that a specific flag is not drawn, or a specific flag is drawn but not won.

After that, in a specified suppression state, the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous zone is controlled so as not to exceed the upper limit value, so that if the AT end condition is met in a game in advantageous zone 5, it becomes non-AT, and thereafter advantageous zone 5 is controlled so as not to end.

In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 89, the RT state is referenced and the lottery state for the AT is determined based on the RT state in which the player remains, and when the RT state is RT2 (finite RT after the end of operation of Type 1 BB), the lottery state for the AT is configured to be a super preferential state. Also, when it is non-RT in favorable zone 1 (the first favorable zone after the setting change), the lottery state for the AT is configured to be a normal state, and when it is non-RT in favorable zones other than favorable zone 1, the lottery state for the AT is configured to be a specified suppressed state.

By configuring it in this way, a Type 1 BB is awarded based on hitting a specific flag, and by controlling the transition to a super preferential state in RT2, which occurs after the Type 1 BB ends, it becomes possible to award gaming media across multiple advantageous zones, and gaming media that exceed the upper limit of gaming media that can be awarded in one advantageous zone can be awarded to the player, thus eradicating the negative image of gaming machines equipped with advantageous zones, in which a maximum of 2,400 coins can be obtained in one hit. Furthermore, when RT2 ends and the transition to non-RT occurs, a specified suppression state is entered, so that excessive gambling tendency is not allowed.

In addition, the advantageous zone 1 may be configured so that the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous zone 1 exceeds the upper limit value and the advantageous zone 1 ends without hitting a specific flag in the advantageous zone 1. In this case, the next advantageous zone after the advantageous zone 1 starts with an AT (or an AT is executed after a predetermined number of premonition games), but since the RT state remains a non-RT, it does not become a super-favorable state, and when the AT ends, it is controlled to a predetermined suppression state so that the advantageous zone does not end.
In this way, by reducing the expected value of game media to be acquired when a specific flag is not won, it is possible to reduce the gambling nature of the entire gaming machine while increasing the expected value of game media to be acquired when a specific flag is won.

In addition, during RT2 after hitting a specific flag, the game goes through about one game of normal game (non-AT game) every time the advantageous zone ends, but the presentation on the liquid crystal is configured to be able to continuously execute the presentation of the AT. In addition, the display of the number of wins during the AT displayed on the liquid crystal at this time is also configured to display the cumulative number of wins given across multiple advantageous zones, rather than clearing every time the advantageous zone ends.
By configuring in this manner, a seamless presentation can be achieved even if gaming media can be awarded across multiple advantageous zones.

In addition, the system is configured so that a specific flag can be won in the advantageous zone 1, but is configured so that a specific flag cannot be won in advantageous zones other than the advantageous zone 1.
By configuring in this way, if a specific flag is won again in the super preferential state and RT2 is reset after the end of the first type BB, the super preferential state is not substantially extended, so that excessive gambling can be prevented.

In addition, if a player mistakenly wins a Type 1 BB in advantageous zone 1 without winning a specific flag, the lottery state for the AT is configured not to become an ultra-favorable state even when moving to RT2, and the advantageous zone is configured not to end because the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous zone exceeds the upper limit value without winning a specific flag during RT2.
In addition, if a player mistakenly wins a Type 1 BB in a super-favorable state in an advantageous zone other than advantageous zone 1, RT2 is reset, but the system is configured so that the super-favorable state does not occur during the reset RT2, and so that the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous zone does not exceed the upper limit value during the reset RT2, causing the advantageous zone to end.
In addition, if a player mistakenly wins a Type 1 BB while in a specified inhibited state in a favorable zone other than favorable zone 1, the specified inhibited state is maintained even when transitioning to RT2.
By configuring in this way, a player who unintentionally wins the first type BB by mistake will suffer a loss, but it is possible to prevent a strategy of intentionally winning the first type BB to acquire many game media.

In addition, in a game in which a type 1 BB symbol combination can be stopped after hitting a specific flag in the advantageous zone 1, a predetermined effect is executed to encourage the stopping of the type 1 BB symbol combination, but the player fails to stop the type 1 BB symbol combination. Instead of executing the predetermined effect again in the subsequent game, the same effect as when the type 1 BB symbol combination is stopped in the game in which the predetermined effect is executed is executed, and the AT is continued until the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous zone 1 exceeds the upper limit value and the end condition of the advantageous zone 1 is met, and the AT is ended when the end condition of the AT executed at the start of the next advantageous zone is met, and thereafter the lottery state regarding the AT is set to a predetermined suppression state. In other words, the expected value of the game value when the type 1 BB is not won in the game in which the predetermined effect is executed may be configured to be smaller than the expected value of the game value when the type 1 BB is won in the game in which the predetermined effect is executed.
In this way, by reducing the expected value of the game value when the button press fails, it is possible to increase the expected value when the button press succeeds. Also, even if the button press fails, the same presentation is executed as when it succeeds, so the presentation can proceed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, while the configuration is such that a specific flag is drawn during play in the AT in the advantageous zone 1, it is not limited to this, and the specific flag may also be drawn during play in the non-AT in the advantageous zone 1, and if the specific flag is won, a type 1 BB is won, and when the transition to RT2 after the type 1 BB ends is made, the lottery state for the AT is made a super-favorable state and the AT starts.

In this embodiment, only Type 1 BB was the subject of the lottery, but instead, RB or MB may be the subject of the lottery, or two or all of Type 1 BB, RB, and MB may be the subject of the lottery.

<About the strike-stop difference counter that records the difference from when the power was turned on>
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a value (difference) is calculated for each game by subtracting the number of medals inserted (sometimes called the number of medals inserted, the number of bets, the number of bets, the number of medals bet, the number of bets, the number of bets, the number of points inserted, the bet points, or the number of INs) from the number of medals paid out (sometimes called the number of medals paid out, the number of medals paid out, the number of medals given, the number of game media given, the number of medals acquired, the number of medals acquired, the number of medals acquired, the number of medals paid out, the number of points given, the number of game media acquired, the number of points paid out, the number of points acquired ... In addition, the process of updating the stop difference counter before the stop processing is executed and the process related to the judgment are collectively referred to as the stop monitoring process.

Note that, in the following, an example will be mainly described in which the stop processing is executed when the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds a predetermined value, with the time when the power is turned on being the starting point (0), but this is not limited to this. For example, the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed after the power is turned on may be set as the reference (0), and the stop processing may be executed when the difference in the number of gaming media from that reference exceeds a predetermined value. In other words, the stop processing may be executed by MY.

For example, after power is turned on, the point at which the player's ball output is at its lowest is set as the reference (0), and if a stop-play process is executed when the difference in the number of game media from that reference exceeds a predetermined value, the stop-play difference counter can store the difference in the number of game media from the reference when the point at which the player's ball output is at its lowest is set as the reference (0), or a value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media from the reference when the point at which the player's ball output is at its lowest is set as the reference (0) (a value that allows the difference in the number of game media from the reference when the point at which the player's ball output is at its lowest is set as the reference (0) to be understood).

This end-of-game monitoring process is performed not only in advantageous zones but also in normal zones (regardless of the game zone).

For example, in a certain game in which the total number of medals paid out since the power was turned on is 50,001 and the total number of medals inserted since the power was turned on is 31,000, the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000, so information indicating that the stop condition has been met in that certain game is stored in the stop flag memory area, making it possible to execute the stop process.

The capping flag memory area is an area within the RWM area of the main control board. For example, if the difference in the number of game media from the time the power is turned on exceeds 19,000, a predetermined value (e.g., a predetermined number such as "1" or "255") is stored in the capping flag memory area as information indicating that the capping condition has been met.

Then, if information indicating that the halt condition has been met is stored in the halt flag storage area, the halt process can be executed.

The information stored in the limit flag memory area is not initialized by simply turning the power on without changing the settings (normal power ON) or turning the power off normally (power switch turned off). Also, the information stored in the limit flag memory area is not initialized by clearing the RWM at the end of the favorable zone. Note that turning the power on without changing the settings corresponds, for example, to turning the power switch on when the setting key switch is off.

In other words, if the power is turned off (the power switch is turned off) while the stop process is being executed, and then the power is turned on without changing the settings, the stop process will not be canceled and the stop process will be executed. Also, even if the game at the end of the advantageous zone is a game that satisfies the stop condition, clearing the RWM at the end of the advantageous zone will not initialize the value of the stop difference counter related to the stop condition, nor will it clear the information stored in the stop flag memory area, and the stop process will be executed.

The information stored in the limit flag memory area can be initialized by turning on the power with a change in settings (RWM clear process with a change in settings) (information indicating that the limit conditions have been met can be cleared).

Also, an RWM clear switch different from the setting key switch may be provided, and the information stored in the stop flag storage area may be cleared when the power is turned on while the RWM clear switch is operated (when the RWM clear switch is on). When the power is turned on while the RWM clear switch is operated, the device does not enter setting change mode, but the RWM clear process associated with the RWM clear switch is performed.

The RWM clear switch may also serve as the reset switch. In other words, when the power is turned on while the reset switch is being operated (while the reset switch is on), the information stored in the stop flag storage area may be cleared.

As described above, if the power is turned off while the limiting process is being executed and then turned on again with a change of settings, the machine will transition to setting change mode, and once the conditions for ending the setting change mode are met and the setting change mode is terminated, the limiting process will not be executed and the machine will enter a state in which play can be continued (a state in which betting can be made).

In addition, the information stored in the stop flag memory area is not initialized by operating a reset switch that can release a certain error state (door open error, medal retention error, etc.), and the stop processing is executed.

In other words, even if the reset switch is operated while the stop process is being executed, the stop process will not be canceled and will be executed.

Note that, here, the conditions for clearing and not clearing the information stored in the capped flag storage area have been explained, but the conditions for clearing and not clearing the information stored in the capped temporary flag storage area, which will be described later, are similar to the conditions for clearing and not clearing the information stored in the capped flag storage area.

The stop processing may be any or all of the following processing: not adding the number of bets or credits when a medal is inserted, turning off the blocker so that the number of bets or credits is not added even when a medal is inserted, not executing bet processing even if the operation of the MAX bet switch or 1 bet switch is accepted, not accepting the operation of the MAX bet switch or 1 bet switch, not executing reel spin start processing even if the operation of the start switch is accepted, not accepting the operation of the start switch, not executing reel stop processing even if the operation of the stop switch is accepted, or not accepting the operation of the stop switch.

In other words, the stop processing prevents operations to be performed to play the next game (also called stopping the progress of the game). In this way, the state in which the stop processing is being executed is sometimes called the stop state or the activation of the complete function.

Even if the game progress is stopped by the stop processing, the operation of the settlement switch is valid, and the settlement processing can be executed. In gaming machines that do not use actual medals (so-called medal-less gaming machines), the operation of the settlement switch for moving the betted medals (electronic medals) to the medal count display device (a device that can store up to 16,383 medals based on the concept of the tray 28 of conventional gaming machines) and the operation of the counting switch for moving the number of medals stored in the medal count display device to the lending unit are valid, and the processing based on the operation of each switch is configured to be executable.

When game progress is stopped by the stop processing, it cannot be released even by turning the power on. The stopped game progress (stopped state) can be released by turning the power on, which involves changing the settings and executing the RWM initialization process. In other words, if a gaming machine is put into a stopped state during the opening hours of the gaming center, that gaming machine cannot be operated during the opening hours of that day.

In this way, if the value of the stop difference counter exceeds a predetermined value, there is a possibility that it will cause the player to become overly gambling. Therefore, by stopping the progress of the game when the value of the stop difference counter exceeds the predetermined value, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game.

The stop difference counter may also be referred to as difference number counter, difference number storage means, difference number storage means, difference number storage area, difference number storage area, number of gaming media storage means, number of gaming media storage area, number of gaming medals storage means, number of gaming medals storage area, MY counter at power-on, MY storage means at power-on, MY storage area at power-on, stop counter, stop difference number counter for stop, difference number counter for stop, MY counter for stop, MY storage means for stop, MY storage area for stop, complete difference number counter, complete MY counter.

The value stored in the stop difference counter is configured to be initialized when the power is turned on in a stop state or when the power is not turned on. In this embodiment, the initial value of the stop difference counter is 0 and increments from the initial value, so initialization at power-on means setting the value of the stop difference counter to 0. However, if the initial value of the stop difference counter is 19,000 and the counter is a subtractive counter, initialization at power-on means setting the value of the stop difference counter to 19,000. Note that power-on includes normal power-on, power-on with setting change, and power-on with RWM abnormality. Also, the value stored in the stop difference counter is not initialized by the RWM initialization process executed when the end condition of the favorable zone (for example, MY during the favorable zone exceeds 2,400, or the number of games during the favorable zone reaches a predetermined number, etc.) is met.

In addition, since the hit difference counter is easily initialized by fraud if it is initialized only by turning on the power, the hit difference counter may be configured to be cleared by turning on the power while pressing a specific switch that cannot be operated by the player, such as a setting change switch, reset switch, or RAM clear switch, when no power is being supplied.

In addition, if a power outage occurs when the value of the stop difference counter exceeds a predetermined value and game progress is stopped, and the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the OFF position and the machine starts up normally (normal power on), the value of the stop difference counter is initialized, but game progress remains stopped. This is because a stop process is executed when the value of the stop difference counter exceeds a predetermined value, and this stop process is configured to repeat the same process indefinitely using jump commands, etc., so even if a power outage occurs during the stop process and the power is turned on again, the stop process will start. Note that when the stop process is executed, an interrupt process is executed, and the interrupt process is executed as usual, but the stop process will loop without returning from the interrupt process to the normal main loop process.

In addition, since interrupt processing is executed normally while the termination processing is being performed, the above-mentioned power cut-off processing can be executed normally even if an event that cuts off the power during the termination processing (for example, turning off the power switch) occurs.

This configuration can prevent unauthorized power-off and power-on that would allow gameplay to continue after gameplay has been halted by the game-stopping process.

The stop difference counter stores a value obtained by subtracting the number of medals inserted from the number of medals paid out for each game, and a specific example of updating the value of the stop difference counter will be described below. Note that the process of updating the value of the stop difference counter is executed at a predetermined timing between when all reels have stopped and when medals for the next game can be inserted (betting for the next game is possible). Since the process of updating the value of the stop difference counter is executed when one game ends, the predetermined timing is sometimes referred to as when one game ends. Also, the stop difference counter will be described as 2-byte data. Note that the "/" indicating 2-byte data indicates the separator between each byte, and the number in parentheses after the binary value indicates the binary value as a decimal value.

<When the hit difference counter = 00000000/01100100b (100), the number of medals paid out = 00001010b (10), and the number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)>
If the value of the stop difference counter is 00000000/01100100b (100), the register calculates 00001010b (10 (number of medals paid out)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = 00000111b (7), obtains the value of the stop difference counter, and stores (updates) the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the stop difference counter in the stop difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the stop difference counter is 00000000/01101011b (107).

<When the hit difference counter = 00000000/01100100b (100), the number of medals paid out = 00000000b (0), and the number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)>
If the value of the stop difference counter is 00000000/01100100b (100), the register calculates 00000000b (0 (number of medals paid out)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = -00000011b (-3), obtains the value of the stop difference counter, and stores (updates) the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the stop difference counter in the stop difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the stop difference counter is 00000000/01100001b (97).

<When the hit difference counter = 00000000/00000000b (0), the number of medals paid out = 00001010b (10), and the number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)>
If the value of the stop difference counter is 00000000/00000000b (0), the register calculates 00001010b (10 (number of medals paid out)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = 00000111b (7), obtains the value of the stop difference counter, and stores (updates) the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the stop difference counter in the stop difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the stop difference counter is 00000000/00000111b (7).

<When the hit difference counter = 00000000/00000000b (0), the number of medals paid out = 00000000b (0), and the number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)>
When the value of the stop difference counter is 00000000/00000000b (0), the register calculates 00000000b (0 (number of medals paid out)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = -00000011b (-3), obtains the value of the stop difference counter, and stores (updates) the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the stop difference counter in the stop difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the stop difference counter is 10000000/00000011b (32771).

The result of the calculation explained above in <When hit difference counter = 00000000b (0), number of medals paid out = 00000000b (0), number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)> is -00000011b (-3), but the value stored in the hit difference counter is 10000000/00000011b (32771) because the most significant bit is configured so that a 0 indicates a positive value and a 1 indicates a negative value. With a 2-byte counter, values up to 01111111/11111111 (32767) can be stored correctly without using the most significant bit. In other words, if the value of the hit/stop difference counter is 11111111/11111111b, it can indicate -32767, so in the above example, -3 would be 10000000/00000011b.

Note that some parts of the above calculation examples are omitted. In more detail, the current value of the stop difference counter is obtained, and it is determined whether the most significant bit of the obtained stop difference counter value is 0 or not. If the most significant bit of the obtained stop difference counter value is 0, the number of medals inserted is subtracted from the number of medals paid out, the subtracted value is added to the obtained stop difference counter value, and the added value is updated as the value of the stop difference counter. Also, if the most significant bit of the obtained stop difference counter value is 1, the number of medals inserted is subtracted from the number of medals paid out, and the subtracted value is subtracted by subtracting a fixed value of 10000000/00000000b (32768) from the obtained stop difference counter value, and the subtracted value is updated as the value of the stop difference counter.

In addition, if the result of calculating the value to be used as an update to the value of the stop difference counter is a negative value, the most significant bit of the absolute value of the result of calculating the value to be used as an update to the value of the stop difference counter is set to 1, and the value is updated as the value of the stop difference counter.

In addition, in each of the above calculation examples, the result of subtracting the number of medals inserted from the number of medals paid out in the register was added to the obtained value of the stop difference counter, but the order of calculations may be such that first the number of medals paid out is added to the obtained value of the stop difference counter, and then the number of medals inserted is subtracted from the result of that addition, or the number of medals inserted is subtracted from the obtained value of the stop difference counter first, and then the number of medals paid out is added to the result of that subtraction.

When the number of medals paid out is not 0, it means that a small role has been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the small role has stopped. When a replay role has been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role has stopped, the number of medals paid out may be 3 or 0. If the number of medals paid out is 3 when a replay role has been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role has stopped, the number of medals inserted is 3, and if the number of medals paid out is 0 when a replay role has been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role has stopped, the number of medals inserted is 0.

In addition, when a replay role is won, the update process of the stop difference number counter may be executed, or the update process of the stop difference number counter may not be executed.
In addition, when a replay role is won, a hit-stop difference number counter judgment process may be executed, or a hit-stop difference number counter judgment process may not be executed.

The stop difference counter does not have to be 2 bytes, but may be 3 bytes or 4 bytes. When the stop difference counter is 3 bytes, the fixed value is 10000000/00000000/00000000b (8388608), and when the stop difference counter is 4 bytes, the fixed value is 10000000/00000000/00000000/00000000b (2147483648). Note that the stop difference counter is initialized when the power is turned on, so even if the number of medals paid out is 0 in 10,000 games, which corresponds to about a whole day during the business hours of the game arcade, only up to -30,000 (10,000 (number of games that can be played in a day) x 3 (number of medals inserted)) is stored, so a stop difference counter of 2 bytes is sufficient storage capacity.

<Another aspect regarding update of the hit difference counter>
a stop difference counter that stores the difference since the power is turned on of the gaming machine, wherein the payout medal number memory area stores the total number of payout medals since the power is turned on of the gaming machine, and the stop difference counter stores the difference since the power is turned on of the gaming machine, and the payout medal number memory area, the inserted medal number memory area, and the stop difference counter are configured to be initialized when the power is turned on, and when updating the stop difference counter in a stop difference counter update process executed after one game is completed, if the result of subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal number memory area from the value stored in the payout medal number memory area is a positive value, the result of subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal number memory area from the value stored in the payout medal number memory area is stored in the stop difference counter, and if the result of subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal number memory area from the value stored in the payout medal number memory area is a negative value, 0 is stored in the stop difference counter.

In such a configuration, it is desirable that the payout medal count storage area, the inserted medal count storage area, and the stop difference counter are 2-byte storage areas, but the payout medal count storage area may be a storage area of 2 bytes or more, the inserted medal count storage area may be a storage area of 2 bytes or more, and the stop difference counter may be a storage area of 2 bytes or more.

The medal payout count storage area, medal insertion count storage area, and stop difference counter are initialized when the power is turned on, and the initialization process involves storing 0 in each storage area. As with the above, the power-on process includes setting changes and RWM abnormalities.

The number of medals paid out storage area is a storage area that accumulates and stores the number of medals paid out for each game, and is updated regardless of the game status or the specified number (sometimes referred to as the number of medals paid out storage area update process). For example, when 100 is stored in the number of medals paid out storage area, if the Nth game is played and 10 medals are paid out, 110 will be stored in the number of medals paid out storage area after the Nth game is completed, and if the N+1th game is played and 0 medals are paid out (no medals were paid out), 110 will be stored in the number of medals paid out storage area after the N+1th game is completed.

The number of medals inserted memory area is a memory area that accumulates and stores the number of medals inserted for each game, and is updated regardless of the game status or the specified number (sometimes referred to as the number of medals inserted memory area update process). For example, when 50 is stored in the number of medals inserted memory area, if the Nth game is played and three medals are inserted, 53 will be stored in the number of medals inserted memory area after the Nth game is completed, and if the N+1th game is played and two medals are inserted, 55 will be stored in the number of medals paid out memory area after the N+1th game is completed.

The stop difference counter stores a value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid medals storage area updated for each game. Here, if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid medals storage area updated for each game is a positive value, the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid medals storage area updated for each game is updated as the value of the stop difference counter, but if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid medals storage area updated for each game is a negative value, the value of the stop difference counter is updated to 0. For this reason, the value of the stop difference counter is not necessarily the value obtained by subtracting the number of inserted medals from the number of paid medals for each game, but this is not a problem because the stop difference counter is a counter for determining whether the stop difference counter has exceeded 19,000.

In addition, the embodiment has been described in which 0 is stored in the stop difference counter when the value stored in the payout medal count storage area updated for each game minus the value stored in the inserted medal count storage area updated for each game is a negative value, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the value stored in the payout medal count storage area updated for each game minus the value stored in the inserted medal count storage area updated for each game is a negative value, the stop difference counter may not be updated, a fixed value greater than 0 and less than 19,000 may be stored in the stop difference counter, a fixed value of 19,000 or more may be stored in the stop difference counter, or the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the paid out medal count storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the inserted medal count storage area updated for each game may be stored as is.

In the case of a mode in which the stop difference counter is not updated when the value stored in the payout medal number storage area updated for each game minus the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area updated for each game is a negative value, or in the case of a mode in which a fixed value exceeding 0 and less than 19,000 is stored in the stop difference counter, the value of the stop difference counter will not exceed 19,000 even if a process of determining whether the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000 is executed every game, so the progress of the game will not be stopped, and if the value stored in the payout medal number storage area updated for each game minus the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area updated for each game is a positive value, an accurate value is stored in the stop difference counter, so there is no problem. Also, if the value stored in the payout medal number storage area updated for each game minus the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area updated for each game is a negative value, the process of determining whether the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000 may not be executed.

When the value stored in the payout medal count storage area updated for each game minus the value stored in the inserted medal count storage area updated for each game is a negative value, if the stop difference counter is stored as a fixed value of 19,000 or more, or the value stored in the payout medal count storage area updated for each game minus the value stored in the inserted medal count storage area updated for each game is stored as is, if the process of determining whether the stop difference counter value exceeds 19,000 is executed every game, it may be determined that the value exceeds 19,000. Therefore, if the value stored in the payout medal count storage area updated for each game minus the value stored in the inserted medal count storage area updated for each game is a negative value, there is no problem in not executing the process of determining whether the stop difference counter value exceeds 19,000.

The hit and stop difference counter update process is the same as that described above, and is executed at a predetermined timing between when all reels have stopped and when medals for the next game can be inserted (bet for the next game can be placed). The hit and stop difference counter update process may include a medal payout number memory area update process and a medal insertion number memory area update process.

<Determination process of the hit-stop difference counter when the reel continuous operation device or the first type special reel is in operation>
Before executing the process of determining whether the value of the hit difference counter has exceeded 19,000 as the hit difference counter judgment process, it may be determined whether the reel continuous operation device is operating, whether the first type special reel is operating, or whether the reel continuous operation device or the first type special reel is operating, and if it is determined that they are operating in either case, the hit difference counter judgment process may not be executed.

This is because if play stops while the continuous role operation device or the first type special role is operating (so-called during a bonus), there is a high possibility that the player's motivation to play will be significantly diminished. Therefore, by allowing play to proceed during a bonus even if the value of the hit stop difference counter exceeds 19,000, and by stopping the progress of play after the bonus ends, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment without diminishing their motivation to play. It is also possible to increase the player's motivation to play and increase the number of balls won during a bonus.

Even in this case, the update process of the hit difference counter is performed even when the continuous operation device of the reel is operating or when the first type special reel is operating. Therefore, it is preferable that the processing order of the program is configured as follows: "update process of the hit difference counter" → "processing to determine whether the continuous operation device of the reel is operating, whether the first type special reel is operating, whether the continuous operation device of the reel or the first type special reel is operating" → "stop difference counter determination process."

Also, if the value of the hit difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, and the value of the hit difference counter falls below 19,000 when the bonus ends, the game may be stopped after the bonus ends.

In this case, even during a bonus, it is determined whether the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000, and if it is determined that the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000, a predetermined value (for example, any value such as "1", "255", etc.) is stored in the temporary stop flag (temporary stop flag storage area), and it is determined whether the value of the temporary stop flag is the predetermined value when the bonus ends, and if it is the predetermined value, the progress of the game is stopped. Note that if it is determined that the value of the temporary stop flag is not the predetermined value when it is determined that it is not the predetermined value when the bonus ends, the progress of the game is not stopped. Also, if the configuration stores a predetermined value in the temporary stop flag even when it is determined that the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000 when not in a bonus, it is possible to determine whether the temporary stop flag is a predetermined value or not after each game ends, whether in a bonus or not, and to stop the game according to the value of the temporary stop flag. If the configuration does not store a predetermined value in the temporary stop flag when it is determined that the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000 when not in a bonus, it is possible to stop the game according to whether the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000, without determining whether the temporary stop flag is a predetermined value or not after each game ends when not in a bonus.

The temporary limit flag is not initialized by the initialization of the RWM at power-on, but is configured to be cleared by the initialization of the RWM at power-on that involves a setting change.

In the above embodiment, an example was described in which game progress is not stopped even if the value of the hit difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured in such a way that game progress is not stopped even if the value of the hit difference counter exceeds 19,000 during an AT. However, as described above, since the AT is capable of extending (changing) the end condition, game progress is not stopped only in an AT in which the end condition is not extended.

When there are multiple prescribed numbers for starting a game, there are cases where the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed with one prescribed number, and when the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed with one prescribed number, it cannot be said that the end condition has been changed, so the game is not stopped even if the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000. Specifically, when three coins and two coins are possible as the prescribed numbers for starting a game, the end condition of the AT can be updated with three coins (the number of games at which the AT ends and the difference number can be updated), but the end condition of the AT cannot be updated with two coins (the number of games at which the AT ends and the difference number cannot be updated), and when the stop difference counter reaches 19,000 during the AT, the game is not stopped until the end condition of the AT is met.

This makes it possible to ensure that the player's interest in the game does not decrease, since the AT operates in the same way as a bonus, even if the gameplay makes the AT appear to be a bonus. It also increases the player's motivation to play and increase the number of balls won during the bonus.

In addition, if the progress of the game is not stopped even if the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus or AT, lotteries that are advantageous to the player, such as AT lotteries or CZ lotteries, will not be executed during the bonus or during play during the AT after the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000.

This will help to prevent players from becoming overly gambling-minded when it is certain that the game will stop.

It has been described that during a bonus, a determination is made as to whether the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000, and if it is determined that the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000, a predetermined value (e.g., any value such as "1" or "255") is stored in a temporary stop flag (temporary stop flag storage area), and when the bonus ends, a determination is made as to whether the value of the temporary stop flag is the predetermined value, and if so, the progress of the game is stopped; however, it is not necessary to provide a temporary stop flag.

Specifically, if the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, the value of the stop difference counter may be configured not to be updated during subsequent play during the bonus, and the stop process may be executed by the stop difference counter judgment process after the bonus ends. For example, if the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus (e.g., 19001), the stop difference counter may not be updated during subsequent play after that, and the value of the difference number counter at the end of the bonus may be configured to exceed 19,000.

<Initialization of the hit difference counter>
In the above-described embodiment, when the value of the hit difference counter is initialized at power-on, the initial value is set to 0 if the counter is an additive type and 19,000 if the counter is a subtractive type. However, this is not limiting and any value may be used as the initial value.

For example, if the difference counter is a 2-byte counter, it can count from 0 to 65535. If the difference counter is to be set to 19,000, the initial value is set to 46,535 (65,535-19,000). If the difference counter is to be set to 19,000, the initial value is set to 46,535 (65,535-19,000). If the difference counter is set to 65,535, the game will be stopped. Depending on whether the carry flag is set to 1 or 0, the carry flag can be easily used to determine whether the difference counter has exceeded 19,000 since the power was turned on. The carry flag also stores 1 when it falls below 0, but as mentioned above, the theoretical maximum number of coins inserted in a day is around 30,000 coins, so there is a sufficient margin of 16,535 coins (46,535-30,000). In reality, the number of coins is unlikely to decrease by 30,000 coins in a day because of winning small prizes and replay prizes, so the probability of the number falling below 0 is extremely low.

By configuring it in this way, the process of updating the hit/stop difference counter can be simplified and the program size can be reduced.

For example, as described above, if the difference exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, the progress of the game may be stopped at the end of the bonus. In this case, if the stop difference counter can only count up to 19,000, the increase during the bonus cannot be counted, so the initial value of the stop difference counter when it is a 2-byte counter may be set to a value smaller than 46,535. For example, a value smaller than 46,535 may be 40,000. In this case, since there is a margin for winning up to 6,535 coins after the difference exceeds 19,000 coins, even if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during a bonus, the counting of the difference can be continued until the bonus ends. Also, even if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during the AT, the AT can only win up to a maximum of 2,414 coins due to the relationship with the advantageous zone, so even if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during the AT, the counting of the difference can be continued until the AT ends. When the initial value of the stop difference counter is set to 40,000, it is possible to determine whether the difference exceeds 19,000 by whether the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 59,000. In addition, if the value of the hit difference counter exceeds 59,000, it will determine whether the game is in a bonus state, and if so, the game will continue to progress until the bonus ends.

Although we have given an example in which the initial value of the hit difference counter is a value smaller than 46535, it is preferable to set the initial value to a value (32767 or greater) larger than half the maximum value (65535) that can be counted with two bytes. This is because when the setting value of the gaming machine is a value that indicates the smallest ball payout rate (for example, setting value 1), the ball payout rate is often designed to be below 100%, making it more likely that the difference will decrease rather than increase. For this reason, by setting the initial value of the hit difference counter to a value larger than half the maximum value that can be counted, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the value of the hit difference counter will become 0, making it easier to achieve normal operation in the market.

It is also possible that the difference is not counted correctly when the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000. In this case, even if the initial value of the stop difference counter is set to 46,535, the game will not be stopped even if the difference exceeds 19,000 during the bonus. In this case, when the stop difference counter exceeds 65,535 (when it is determined that it has exceeded 65,535, or when it is determined that 1 has been stored in the carry flag), a predetermined value is stored in the temporary stop flag, and whether or not to stop the game progress is determined depending on whether the temporary stop flag is at a predetermined value. In this way, when the difference exceeds 19,000 during the bonus, the stop difference counter will exceed 65,535 and count from 0, but since whether or not to stop the game progress is determined depending on the temporary stop flag, the value of the stop difference counter is not normal, but it is possible to achieve normal operation overall.

Although the hit and stop difference counter has been explained as subtracting the number of medals inserted and adding the number of medals paid out, it may also be configured to add the number of medals inserted and subtract the number of medals paid out. In this case, the initial value of the hit and stop difference counter may be set to 19,000, or a value between 19,000 and 32,766 inclusive.

Although the hit and stop difference counter has been explained as a 2-byte counter, it can also be a 3-byte or 4-byte counter. If the hit and stop difference counter is a 3-byte counter, the initial value can be set to 16758215 so that the carry flag will store 1 when the difference exceeds 19,000 coins. By making it 3 bytes or more, even if there are gaming parlors that do not turn off the power to the gaming machines, and the set value is always below 100% and 10,000 games are played every day, the hit and stop difference counter will not fall below 0 for several years, further reducing the possibility of malfunctions in the market.

<About test signals related to termination>
As described above, when the stopping process is executed, the progress of the game stops (the game enters a stopped state). If the progress of the game suddenly stops during testing by the testing institution, it is not possible to accurately determine whether the stop of the game progress is due to a malfunction or due to the operation of the stopping process. Therefore, when the stopping process is executed, a process for outputting a test signal related to the stopping process that can grasp that the progress of the game has stopped due to the execution of the stopping process may be executed. By configuring in this way, when the progress of the game stops due to the stopping process, the testing institution can determine that the stop of the game progress is not due to a malfunction but due to the execution of the stopping process, and the test by the testing institution can be determined to be a correct result.

At this time, the process for outputting the test signal related to the stop may be executed continuously during the stop state, may be executed for a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second), or may be executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., once or multiple times (5 times)).

In addition, when the stopping process is executed, the process for outputting a test signal related to stopping, which allows the player to know that the game has stopped due to the execution of the stopping process, can be executed, but the process for outputting a test signal related to stopping may be executed from the game before the occurrence of the stopping process. In other words, the process for outputting a test signal related to stopping may be executed in advance. For example, in a specification in which the stopping process is executed when the difference number from the start point at the time of power-on exceeds 19,000, the process for outputting a test signal related to stopping may be executed from the time the difference number from the start point at the time of power-on becomes 18,500. In this case, since the difference number from the start point at the time of power-on has not yet reached 19,000, the game can continue even in a situation where a test signal related to stopping is being output. By configuring in this way, the testing organization can be notified in advance that there is a possibility that the stopping process will be executed, and the testing by the testing organization can be performed smoothly.

At this time, the process for outputting the test signal related to the cutoff may be executed for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds) or may be executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., once or multiple times (5 times)). Also, it may be executed when the difference number from the start point at power-on is a value of 18,500 or more (if the difference number from the start point at power-on becomes less than 18,500, the process for outputting the test signal related to the cutoff may not be executed).

Note that the timing for executing the process to output the test signal related to the pre-canceling is set to when the difference number from the start point at power-on reaches 18,500, but the difference number from the start point at power-on can be set to any value, such as 18,000 or 18,985.

Furthermore, as the timing for executing the process to output a test signal related to the stoppage in advance, the point where the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed is set as the reference (0), and if the stoppage occurs when the difference in the number of gaming media from that reference exceeds 19,000, the time can be set to any value, such as when the difference in the number of gaming media becomes 18,500, 18,000, or 18,985.

In addition to the test signal, processing may also be performed to output an external signal. In this case, the output mode and output timing of the test signal related to the limiting process described above can be applied to the external signal (e.g., a security signal). By outputting an external signal in this way, it is possible to notify hall staff in advance that the limiting process may be executed.

The security signal may also be configured to be output under certain conditions, such as when a specific error occurs (when a specific error occurs and until the specific error is cleared).

For example, the specified error that outputs a security signal may be any one or all of the following: errors related to the selector (medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passing time error) and errors related to the hopper 44 (hopper retention error, abnormality detection error). Furthermore, it is not limited to the errors mentioned above, and other errors may also be used.

The security signal may be configured to be output not only when a specific error occurs, but also during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. For example, the security signal may be configured to be output when the setting key switch is on.

In other words, the security signal may be configured to be output when any of the following conditions are met: a) when a stalled state is reached, b) when a specified error occurs, c) when a transition to setting change mode is made, or d) when a transition to setting confirmation mode is made.

By configuring it in this way, the amusement facility can prevent not only certain errors, but also fraudulent turning on of the setting key switch (for example, fraudulent changes to setting values or fraudulent confirmation of setting values) by outputting a security signal.

The conditions for outputting a security signal are not limited to adopting all of the above conditions A) to D), but may adopt any part of the conditions or may include other conditions.

<External signals related to cut-off>
A security signal is output as an external signal related to the stoppage. For example, it can be configured to start outputting a security signal at a certain timing when the stoppage state is reached, and end outputting the security signal when a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed. In other words, when the stoppage state is reached, the security signal is output for the predetermined period. Then, after the stoppage state is reached and the security signal is output for the predetermined period, output of the security signal is ended even in the stoppage state.

Specifically, when starting to output a security signal, a timer value corresponding to a predetermined period is stored as a timer value (one of the values stored in the RWM) for outputting a security signal for a predetermined period. Then, at every predetermined cycle (e.g., each time a timer interrupt process is executed), a process of updating the timer value for outputting a security signal for a predetermined period (e.g., a process of subtracting 1 from the timer value stored in the RWM) is executed.

For example, the timer value corresponding to the specified period can be "13429", and the specified cycle can be "2.234 ms (cycle of timer interrupt processing)". Then, by updating the timer value to output a security signal for the specified period, the security signal is configured to be output for the period until the timer value becomes "0". In this case, the security signal can be output for approximately 30 seconds.

By configuring it in this way, a security signal can be output to the hall computer (also called hall con) for a specified period of time, allowing game center staff to know that some kind of event has occurred on a gaming machine that has been discontinued.

In addition, after the security signal is output for a predetermined period of time, the output of the security signal is terminated, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not output a security signal without having to turn off the power (the power switch) of the gaming machine that has reached a stoppage state.

In addition, gaming establishments (store staff) may wish to appeal to players about a gaming machine that has been stopped playing by showing a notification that is issued when a gaming machine is stopped playing (this corresponds to a stop-play notification, described below) without turning off the power to the machine (without turning off the power switch).

In this way, even if the gaming machine is left in a stopped state, the security signal output will end a predetermined period after the security signal output starts, so the hall computer will not continue to receive the security signal. In other words, it is possible to prevent gaming establishments (and gaming establishment staff) from feeling annoyed by the security signal.

In addition, if a specified error (a specified error is an error that is a condition for outputting a security signal) occurs after the output of the security signal has been stopped and a specified period of time has elapsed since the output of the security signal started, the security signal may be output again.

In other words, a security signal is output from the timing (timing A) when the security signal output starts until a timing (timing B) a predetermined period later. Thereafter, if a predetermined error occurs (a predetermined error is detected) under a predetermined situation where a security signal is not being output, output of the security signal starts from the timing (timing C) when the predetermined error occurs (a predetermined error is detected). Note that when the predetermined error is cleared, output of the security signal ends.

By configuring it in this way, if a specific error occurs in a gaming machine that has been left in a stopped state, the security signal is output again, making it possible to notify the gaming establishment (or gaming establishment staff) that some kind of fraud may have occurred on the stopped gaming machine.

Also, if the device is in a stopped state and enters setting confirmation mode after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the security signal output started, the security signal may be configured to be output again.

In other words, the security signal is output from the timing (timing A) when the security signal output starts until a predetermined time later (timing B). After that, if the setting confirmation mode is entered under a predetermined situation where the security signal is not being output, the security signal output starts from the timing (timing C) when the setting confirmation mode is entered (the setting key switch is turned on). Note that when the setting confirmation mode ends, the security signal output ends.

By configuring it in this way, if a gaming machine that has been left in a stopped state goes into setting confirmation mode, the security signal is output again, making it possible to notify the gaming establishment (or gaming establishment staff) that some kind of fraud may have occurred on the stopped gaming machine.

<When a specific error occurs while the security signal is being output due to a halt (1)>
The security signal may be configured to be output beyond the specified period if a stop state is reached, a specified error (the specified error is an error that is a condition for outputting the security signal) occurs before a specified period has elapsed since output of the security signal started, and the specified error is released after the specified period has elapsed since output of the security signal started.

In other words, suppose that a specified error occurs (a specified error is detected) at a timing (timing B) before a specified period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the timing (timing A) when the security signal started to be output. Then, suppose that the specified error is cleared at a timing (timing C) after the specified period of time has elapsed since timing A (e.g., 40 seconds after timing A).

In this case, a security signal is output from timing A to timing C. In other words, the security signal can continue to be output until the specified error is resolved (when power is not being supplied, the security signal is not output).

By configuring it in this way, even if the specifications are such that a security signal is output for a specified period of time when a gaming machine is in a stopped state, if a specified error occurs before the specified period has elapsed and the specified error is cleared after the specified period has elapsed, the security signal will be output until the specified error is cleared, so that the gaming establishment (or gaming establishment staff) can be appropriately notified that some event has occurred on the gaming machine that has been stopped.

The system is also configured to execute a timer value update process for outputting a security signal for a specified period even during a period in which a specified error occurs.

Furthermore, the configuration is not limited to the above, and other configurations may be adopted.

For example, if a halted state is reached and a specified error (the specified error is an error that is a condition for outputting the security signal) occurs before a specified period of time has elapsed since the start of outputting the security signal, and the specified error is released after the specified period of time has elapsed since the start of outputting the security signal, the security signal may be configured to be output until the specified period of time has elapsed since the specified error was released.

If the security signal is configured to be output until a specified period of time has elapsed after a specified error is cleared, it is conceivable that, once the specified error is cleared, the timer value corresponding to the specified period of time may be reset in order to output the security signal for the specified period of time.

By configuring it in this way, the security signal is output until a specified period of time has passed since the specified error is cleared, so even if a specified error occurs, the gaming establishment (or gaming establishment staff) can accurately understand that play has been stopped.

In addition, for example, if a stop state is reached and a specified error (the specified error is an error that is a condition for outputting the security signal) occurs before a specified period of time has elapsed since the output of the security signal started, and the specified error is released after the specified period of time has elapsed since the output of the security signal started, the security signal may be configured to be output until the remaining period of the specified period has elapsed since the specified error was released.

For example, if the timing when the output of the security signal starts is defined as timing A, the timing when a specified error occurs (a specified error is detected) is defined as timing B, the timing when the specified error is removed is defined as timing C, and the timing when the output of the security signal ends is defined as timing D, then the specified period may be defined as (the period from timing A to timing B) + (the period from timing C to timing D).

In this case, the timer value update process for outputting a security signal for a predetermined period may not be executed during the period from timing B to timing C. Note that even in this case, the timer interrupt process may still be executed.

By configuring it this way, even if a certain error occurs midway, a security signal can be output (combined) for a certain period of time to notify the gaming establishment (or gaming establishment staff) that the game has been stopped.

<When a specific error occurs while the security signal is being output due to a halt (2)>
If a halted state is reached and a specified error (the specified error is an error that is a condition for outputting the security signal) occurs before a specified period of time has elapsed since output of the security signal started, and the specified error is cleared before the specified period of time has elapsed since output of the security signal started, the output of the security signal may be configured to be terminated when the specified period of time has elapsed since output of the security signal started.

In other words, suppose that a specified error occurs (a specified error is detected) at a timing (timing B) before a specified period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the timing (timing A) when the output of the security signal started. Then, suppose that the timing (timing C) when the specified error is released is before the specified period has elapsed from timing A (e.g., 10 seconds after timing A). Furthermore, suppose that the output of the security signal is terminated after timing C, at a timing (timing D) when the specified period has elapsed from timing A.

In this case, a security signal is output from timing A to timing D (a specified period from timing A). In other words, even if a specified error occurs, a timer value update process is executed to output a security signal for a specified period. Furthermore, even if a specified error occurs, the timer value corresponding to the specified period is not reset. Furthermore, even after the specified error is cleared, the security signal can continue to be output from timing A until the specified period (a security signal is not output when power is not being supplied).

By configuring it in this way, in a specification where a security signal is output for a specified period of time when a play-stop state is reached, if a specified error occurs within the specified period of time after the start of output of the security signal and the specified error is cleared, the output time of the security signal will not be extended due to the occurrence of the specified error (because the output time of the security signal is the specified period), so it is possible to prevent gaming establishments (and gaming establishment staff) from feeling annoyed by the security signal.

Note that the configuration is not limited to the above, and other configurations may be used.

For example, if a halted state is reached and a specified error (the specified error is an error that is a condition for outputting the security signal) occurs before a specified period of time has elapsed since output of the security signal started, and the specified error is released before the specified period of time has elapsed since output of the security signal started, the security signal may be output until the specified period of time has elapsed since the specified error was released.

If the security signal is configured to be output until a specified period of time has elapsed after the specified error is cleared, it is conceivable that, when the specified error is cleared, the timer value corresponding to the specified period of time may be reset as the timer value for outputting the security signal for the specified period of time.

By configuring it in this way, the security signal will be output until a specified period of time has passed since the specified error was cleared, allowing the gaming establishment (and gaming establishment staff) to accurately grasp that play has been stopped.

<When the system goes into a stopped state and switches to setting confirmation mode while a security signal is being output (1)>
If a stop state is reached and a transition (starts) to setting confirmation mode before a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of outputting the security signal, and if the setting confirmation mode ends after the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of outputting the security signal, the security signal may be configured to be output beyond the predetermined period.

In other words, the setting key switch is turned on and the setting confirmation mode is entered at a timing (timing B) before a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the timing (timing A) when the security signal output started. Then, the setting key switch is turned off and the setting confirmation mode ends at a timing (timing C) after the predetermined period has elapsed since timing A (e.g., 40 seconds have elapsed since timing A).

In this case, the security signal is output from timing A to timing C. In other words, the security signal can continue to be output until the setting check mode is released (the security signal is not output when power is not being supplied).

Even in the setting confirmation mode, the timer value update process for outputting a security signal for a specified period is performed.

By configuring it in this way, even if the specifications are such that a security signal is output for a specified period of time when a gaming machine reaches a stoppage state, if the machine transitions to setting confirmation mode before the specified period has elapsed, and the setting confirmation mode ends after the specified period has elapsed, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends, so that the gaming establishment (or gaming establishment staff) can be notified that some event has occurred with the gaming machine that has reached a stoppage state.

In addition, because the security signal output time is not extended when the setting confirmation mode is entered, gaming establishments (and gaming establishment staff) are not bothered by the security signal.

Note that the configuration is not limited to the above, and other configurations may be used.

For example, if the device reaches a halted state and transitions to setting confirmation mode before a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the security signal output started, and the setting confirmation mode ends after the predetermined period of time has elapsed since the security signal output started, the security signal may be output until the predetermined period of time has elapsed since the setting confirmation mode ended.

If the security signal is configured to be output until a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the setting check mode ends, it is conceivable that when the setting check mode ends, the timer value corresponding to the predetermined period of time may be reset in order to output the security signal for the predetermined period of time.

By configuring it in this way, the security signal will be output until a specified period of time has elapsed since the setting confirmation mode ended, allowing the gaming establishment (and gaming establishment staff) to accurately grasp that play has been stopped.

Also, for example, if the device is in a stopped state and transitions to setting confirmation mode before a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of security signal output, and the setting confirmation mode ends after the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of security signal output, the device may be configured to output the security signal until the remaining period of the predetermined period has elapsed since the setting confirmation mode ended.

For example, if the timing when the security signal output starts is defined as timing A, the timing when the setting check mode is entered is defined as timing B, the timing when the setting check mode is ended is defined as timing C, and the timing when the security signal output ends is defined as timing D, the specified period may be defined as (the period from timing A to timing B) + (the period from timing C to timing D).

In this case, the timer value update process for outputting a security signal for a predetermined period may not be executed during the period from timing B to timing C. Note that even in this case, the timer interrupt process may still be executed.

By configuring it this way, even if a certain error occurs midway, a security signal can be output (combined) for a certain period of time to notify the gaming establishment (or gaming establishment staff) that the game has been stopped.

<When the system goes into a stopped state and switches to the setting confirmation mode while the security signal is being output (2)>
If a stop state is reached and a transition (starts) to a setting confirmation mode before a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of outputting the security signal, and if the setting confirmation mode is ended before the predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of outputting the security signal, the output of the security signal may be configured to be ended when the predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of outputting the security signal.

In other words, the setting key switch is turned on and the setting confirmation mode is entered at a timing (timing B) before a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the timing (timing A) when the security signal output started. Then, the setting key switch is turned off and the setting confirmation mode ends at a timing (timing C) before a predetermined period has elapsed since timing A (e.g., 10 seconds after timing A).

In this case, a security signal is output for a predetermined period from timing A. In other words, even in the setting check mode, a timer value update process is performed to output a security signal for a predetermined period. In addition, even after the setting check mode ends, the security signal can continue to be output for a predetermined period from timing A (a security signal is not output when power is not being supplied).

By configuring it in this way, in a specification where a security signal is output for a predetermined period of time when a play-stop state is reached, if the setting check mode is switched to and the setting check mode is terminated within the predetermined period of time after the start of outputting the security signal, the output time of the security signal is not extended in conjunction with the switch to the setting check mode (because the security signal output time is the predetermined period of time), so gaming establishments (and gaming establishment staff) do not feel bothered by the security signal.

<When the power is turned off while the security signal is being output due to a halt, and then the power is turned on again with a change in settings>
If the power switch is turned off before a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the output of the security signal started, the power supply is stopped. If the power switch is then turned on while the setting key switch is on (also referred to as power-on with setting change), the device will transition to setting change mode after the power is restored. In this case, the device may be configured to output a security signal in the setting change mode. Note that the device may be configured to end the output of the security signal when the setting change mode ends.

In other words, the power switch is turned off before a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the security signal output started (timing A), and the power-off process is executed at timing B (e.g., 10 seconds after timing A). After that, in a situation where no power is being supplied, the power is turned on with a setting change, and the device transitions to setting change mode at timing C. Then, the conditions for terminating the setting change mode are met, and the setting change mode ends at timing D.

For example, assume that the time from timing A to timing B is 10 seconds, and the time from timing C to timing D is 8 seconds (the period of the setting change mode is 8 seconds). In this case, the total time (18 seconds) of the security signal output time from timing A to timing B and the security signal output time from timing C to timing D may be shorter than the specified period (30 seconds).

When configured in this way, the timer value corresponding to the specified period may be initialized when the power is turned on with a setting change (by the RWM initialization process executed when the power is turned on with a setting change).

For example, if the RWM initialization process executed by powering on with a setting change occurs at the start of the setting change mode, during the setting change mode, the timer value is not updated by the timer value update process for outputting a security signal for a specified period of time (the timer value remains 0). However, the security signal is output.

For example, if the RWM initialization process executed by powering on with a setting change is at the end of the setting change mode, the timer value update process is executed to output a security signal for a specified period of time even in the setting confirmation mode. In this case, the timer value update process may be executed to output a security signal for a specified period of time using a value that is a new timer value corresponding to the specified period when the power is turned on with a setting change, or the timer value update process may be executed to output a security signal for a specified period of time using the remaining period obtained by subtracting (the period from timing A to timing B) from the specified period. However, regardless of the timer value (even if it becomes the initial value (0)), the security signal is output.

In either case, when the setting change mode is ended, the output of the security signal can be terminated.

Also, for example, assume that the period from timing A to timing B is 10 seconds, and the period from timing C to timing D is 50 seconds (the period of the setting change mode is 50 seconds). In this case, the total time (60 seconds) of the security signal output time from timing A to timing B and the security signal output time from timing C to timing D may be longer than the specified period (30 seconds).

In other words, if a power outage occurs while the security signal is being output and the device is then powered on again with a setting change, the security signal is output from the start of the setting change mode until the end of the setting change mode.

In other words, the total output time of the security signal does not necessarily correspond to a specified period of time.

However, depending on the combination of the period from timing A to timing B and the period from timing C to timing D, the total output time of the security signal may be a specified period.

For example, if the period from timing A to timing B is 10 seconds, and the period from timing C to timing D is 20 seconds (the period of the setting change mode is 20 seconds), the total output time of the security signal may be a predetermined period (30 seconds).

By configuring it in this way, even if the specifications are such that a security signal is output for a specified period of time when a halted state occurs, the power is cut off before the specified period has elapsed since the start of security signal output, and then the halted state is released when power is turned on with a setting change (by the RWM initialization process executed by powering on with a setting change), so the output time of the security signal after power is restored can be set to a time that corresponds to the period of the setting change mode.

Note that not only does turning on the power with a setting change release the stopped state (by the initialization process of the RWM executed by turning on the power with a setting change), but the timer value (one of the values stored in the RWM) for outputting a security signal for a specified period of time may also be cleared.

For example, if the RWM initialization process executed by powering on with a setting change occurs at the start of the setting change mode, the timer value is not updated by the timer value update process for outputting a security signal for a specified period during the setting change mode (the timer value remains at 0). However, the security signal is output.

For example, if the RWM initialization process executed by powering on with a setting change is at the end of the setting change mode, the timer value update process is executed to output a security signal for a specified period of time even in the setting confirmation mode. In this case, the timer value update process may be executed to output a security signal for a specified period of time using a value that is reset to the timer value corresponding to the specified period by powering on with a setting change, or the timer value update process may be executed to output a security signal for a specified period of time using the remaining period obtained by subtracting (the period from timing A to timing B) from the specified period. However, regardless of the timer value (even if it becomes the initial value (0)), the security signal is output.

For example, if the period from timing A to timing B is 10 seconds and the period from timing C to timing D is 50 seconds (the period of the setting change mode is 50 seconds), a security signal may be output during the period from timing A to timing B, and a security signal may be output during the period from timing C to 20 seconds. In other words, the output period of the security signal may be constant even when the setting change mode is entered (the setting change mode may end midway).

<When the power is turned off while the security signal is being output due to a halt and then the power is turned on again without changing any settings>
If the power switch is turned off before a certain period of time has elapsed since the output of the security signal started, the power supply is cut off. If the power switch is then turned on while the setting key switch is off (also called power on without changing settings), the power supply is stopped after the power is restored.

In other words, the power switch is turned off before a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the security signal output started (timing A), and the power-off process is executed at timing B (e.g., 10 seconds after timing A). After that, in a situation where no power is being supplied, the power is turned on without changing any settings, and the device transitions to a stopped state at timing C.

Furthermore, a certain timing after timing C is defined as timing D. Timing D is defined as a timing where the sum of the period from timing A to timing B and the period from timing C to timing D corresponds to the specified period. For example, if the specified period is 30 seconds and the period from timing A to timing B is 10 seconds, then the period from timing C to timing D is 20 seconds.

A certain timing after timing D is timing E. Timing E is a timing where the period from timing C to timing E corresponds to the predetermined period. For example, when the predetermined period is 30 seconds, the period from timing C to timing E is 30 seconds.

Note that the period from timing C to timing E is considered to be a dead end.

When configured in this way, the security signal output can be one of the following (Pattern 1) to (Pattern 3).

(Pattern 1) After power is turned on, no security signal is output.
For example, a security signal is output during the period from timing A to timing B. However, a security signal is not output during the period from timing C to timing D. Similarly, a security signal is not output during the period from timing D to timing E.

For example, by executing a process to clear the timer value (one of the values stored in the RWM) for outputting a security signal for a specified period when the power is restored (setting the timer value to 0), it is possible to prevent the security signal from being output during the period from timing C to timing E.

By configuring it in this way, when power is restored after a power outage, the security signal will not be output even if the power is cut off.

In other words, the security signal is not output again when the power is restored, reducing the annoyance caused by the security signal.

If a specified error that is a condition for outputting a security signal occurs during the period from timing C to timing D, the security signal may be output from the time the specified error occurs until the specified error is cleared. Similarly, if a specified error that is a condition for outputting a security signal occurs during the period from timing D to timing E, the security signal may be output from the time the specified error occurs until the specified error is cleared.

In addition, if the setting check mode is entered during the period from timing C to timing D, a security signal may be output from when the setting check mode starts until when the setting check mode ends. Similarly, if the setting check mode is entered during the period from timing D to timing E, a security signal may be output from when the setting check mode starts until when the setting check mode ends.

By configuring it in this way, the gaming establishment (or its staff) can become aware that some kind of event has occurred with the gaming machine when the hall computer receives the security signal.

(Pattern 2) After power is turned on, the security signal is output for the remaining period.
For example, a security signal is output during the period from timing A to timing B. Also, a security signal is output during the period from timing C to timing D. However, a security signal is not output during the period from timing D to timing E.

For example, by not executing the process of clearing the timer value (one of the values stored in the RWM) for outputting a security signal for a specified period when the power is restored (continuing to use the timer value stored before the power was cut off), it is possible to output a security signal during the period from timing C to D, and not output a security signal during the period from timing D to timing E.

By configuring it in this way, when power is restored after a power outage, a security signal can be output for the amount of time corresponding to the remaining period of the specified period, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that is resistant to fraud. In addition, if the process of clearing the timer value (one of the values stored in the RWM) for outputting a security signal for a specified period is not executed when power is restored, the control process can be simplified.

In addition, if a specified error that is a condition for outputting a security signal occurs during the period from timing C to timing D, and the specified error is cleared at a certain timing before timing D, the security signal may be output from timing C to timing D.

Similarly, if the setting confirmation mode is entered (started) during the period from timing C to timing D, and the setting confirmation mode ends at a certain timing before timing D, a security signal may be output from timing C to timing D.

In addition, if a specified error that is a condition for outputting a security signal occurs during the period from timing C to timing D, and the specified error is cleared at a certain timing (timing F) after timing D, the security signal may be output from timing C to timing F.

Similarly, if the setting confirmation mode is entered (started) during the period from timing C to timing D, and the setting confirmation mode ends at a certain timing (timing F) after timing D, a security signal may be output from timing C to timing F.

By configuring it in this way, the gaming establishment (or its staff) can become aware that some kind of event has occurred with the gaming machine when the hall computer receives the security signal.

(Pattern 3) After power is turned on, the security signal is output for a predetermined period of time.
For example, a security signal is output during the period from timing A to timing B. Also, a security signal is output during the period from timing C to timing E.

For example, by executing a process to set (store) again a timer value (one of the values stored in the RWM) for outputting a security signal for a specified period when the power is restored, a security signal can be output for the period from timing C to timing E.

By configuring it in this way, when power is restored after a power outage, a security signal can be output for a period of time corresponding to a continuous predetermined period of time, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that is resistant to fraud.

In addition, if a specified error that is a condition for outputting a security signal occurs during the period from timing C to timing E, and the specified error is cleared at a certain timing before timing E, the security signal may be output from timing C to timing E.

Similarly, if the setting confirmation mode is entered (started) during the period from timing C to timing E, and the setting confirmation mode ends at a certain timing before timing E, a security signal may be output from timing C to timing E.

In addition, if a specified error that is a condition for outputting a security signal occurs during the period from timing C to timing E, and the specified error is cleared at a certain timing (timing G) after timing E, the security signal may be output from timing C to timing G.

Similarly, if the setting confirmation mode is entered (started) during the period from timing C to timing E, and the setting confirmation mode ends at a certain timing (timing G) after timing E, a security signal may be output from timing C to timing G.

By configuring it in this way, the gaming establishment (or its staff) can become aware that some kind of event has occurred with the gaming machine when the hall computer receives the security signal.

<Regarding the processing of the sub-control means based on the strike-stop difference counter>
The main control means is configured to be able to transmit information regarding the value of the hit-stop difference counter to the sub-control means, so that a notification can be given to the player before the progress of the game is stopped.

For example, if the difference of 100 coins exceeds 19,000 coins, the LCD display could display an ending message saying "100 coins remaining" or play a sound. Then, each time the difference is updated and the remaining difference gets smaller, the ending message could be updated to say "90 coins remaining" or "85 coins remaining," etc. When the difference exceeds 19,000 coins, a congratulatory message such as "Complete" or "Congratulations" could be displayed or a sound could be played to give the player a sense of accomplishment.

By doing this, the game goal can be set to stop when the difference exceeds 19,000 coins, which increases the excitement of the game.

For example, if the remaining difference exceeds 19,000 with a difference of 100 remaining coins, and an ending display of "100 remaining coins" is displayed on the LCD display, if the remaining difference increases and exceeds 100 coins, the ending display of the remaining difference can be erased (made non-display). When the remaining difference again becomes 100 coins, the ending display of "100 remaining coins" can be displayed on the LCD display.

By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing due to the difference number continuing to fall below the number and the ending display not disappearing.

For example, if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during a bonus and the game progress is not stopped until the bonus ends, once the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during the bonus and a congratulatory display is displayed, the congratulatory display will not be erased even if the difference falls below 19,000 coins. Also, the congratulatory display will continue to be displayed until the bonus ends.

By doing this, the player's sense of accomplishment will not be hindered by the disappearance of the celebration display, and a decrease in interest in the game will be prevented.

In the above example, the remaining difference was displayed as the ending display, but this is not limited to this and a story-like presentation may be displayed. Even in this case, the ending display can be terminated when the remaining difference falls below a threshold that triggers the execution of the ending display, so that the ending display is not executed more than necessary.

In addition, when the difference reaches 19,000 coins, if a congratulatory effect is suddenly displayed and play stops, there is a possibility that players who are unaware of the existence of the limiting process may lose their motivation to play. Therefore, a notification regarding the limiting process (for example, a display or audio such as "Aim for 19,000 coins!" or "Ending at 19,000 coins") may be made when the power is turned on or during play, or a notification regarding the limiting process (for example, a display or audio such as "Aim for 19,000 coins!" or "Ending at 19,000 coins") may be made on a demo screen or menu screen.

<Regarding signal output to the outside based on the value of the stop difference counter>
When the value of the stop difference counter is updated by the main control means during the stop processing or by the monitoring processing, and reaches a specific value (18,900 in this embodiment) just before the specified value (19,000 in this embodiment) at which the stop processing is executed, processing is executed to output a test interrupt request signal to the test IF board.

This allows the testing to be interrupted before the gaming machine reaches a stop state during testing and game progress stops, and when testing is interrupted, the tester can initialize the value of the stop difference counter by turning the power off and then back on to the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine testing to continue until the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000 again. In other words, by turning the power off and back on when the value of the stop difference counter is 18,900, it is possible to prevent the game from stopping until the value of the stop difference counter effectively exceeds 37,900, and stable testing can be achieved.

Note that the specific value before the predetermined value at which the stop processing is executed (19,000 in this embodiment) is set to 18,900, but this is not limited to this, and any value between 9,500, which is half the predetermined value at which the stop processing is executed, and 18,985, which is the value at which the stop processing is not executed even if it is the maximum payout number, may be set as the specific value.

In addition, in this embodiment, a process is executed to output a test interruption request signal to interrupt the test, but any signal may be output as long as it is transmitted to the tester. As a result, the signal output to the test IF board when a specific value is reached before the predetermined value at which the cut-off process is executed may be referred to as a predetermined signal (predetermined test signal), and the process for outputting to the test IF board may be referred to as a process for outputting a predetermined signal (predetermined test signal).

<Regarding the processing of the sub-control means based on the value of the strike-stop difference counter>
When the main control means executes the stop processing, information based on the value of the stop difference counter can be transmitted to the sub-control means, so that a notification can be given to the player before a notification that the game progress has stopped (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a "stop notification").

For example, when the remaining difference of 100 coins exceeds 19,000 coins, it is possible to display the remaining difference of "100 coins remaining" on the LCD display, and to play an ending effect or sound. Then, each time the remaining difference is updated and the remaining difference becomes smaller, the remaining difference display is updated to "90 coins remaining" or "85 coins remaining", etc. When the remaining difference exceeds 19,000 coins, a congratulatory display such as "Complete" or "Congratulations" or sound is played, giving the player a sense of accomplishment. A state in which such a sub-control means displays the remaining difference until the end of the game, plays an ending effect or sounds, or a state in which the remaining difference until the end of the game is not displayed but an ending effect or sound related to the end of the game is played is referred to as an operation advance notice state (related to the end of the game). Note that the operation advance notice state is a state related to the sub-control means.

By doing this, the game goal can be set to stop when the difference exceeds 19,000 coins, which increases the excitement of the game.

For example, if the remaining difference exceeds 19,000 sheets with a difference of 100 sheets remaining, and the LCD display shows the remaining difference as "100 sheets remaining," if the remaining difference increases and exceeds 100 sheets, the remaining difference display can be erased (made non-display). When the remaining difference again becomes 100 sheets, the LCD display will show the remaining difference as "100 sheets remaining."

This prevents the difference from dropping and causing the remaining difference display to not disappear, which can discourage players from playing.

For example, if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during a bonus and the game progress is not stopped until the bonus ends, once the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during the bonus and a congratulatory display is displayed, the congratulatory display will not be erased even if the difference falls below 19,000 coins. Also, the congratulatory display will continue to be displayed until the bonus ends.

By doing this, the player's sense of accomplishment will not be hindered by the disappearance of the celebration display, and a decrease in interest in the game will be prevented.

The ending performance or sound may be a continuous performance with a storyline, or may be a still image. Even in this case, the ending performance or sound can be terminated when the remaining difference falls below a threshold that triggers the execution of the ending performance or sound, so that the ending performance or sound is not executed more than necessary.

In addition, when the difference reaches 19,000 coins, if a congratulatory effect is suddenly displayed and play stops, there is a possibility that players who are unaware of the existence of the limiting process may lose their motivation to play. Therefore, a notification regarding the limiting process (for example, a display or audio such as "Aim for 19,000 coins!" or "Ending at 19,000 coins") may be made when the power is turned on or during play, or a notification regarding the limiting process (for example, a display or audio such as "Aim for 19,000 coins!" or "Ending at 19,000 coins") may be made on a demo screen or menu screen.

<Regarding processing of lamps managed by the main control means or the sub-control means based on the value of the striking difference counter>
The following describes the lighting control of the lamps managed by the main control means or the sub-control means when the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000, which satisfies the stop condition.

The lamps managed by the main control means are the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, 3 bet lamp, replay lamp, start lamp, medal insertion possible lamp, advantageous zone lamp, credit number indicator, and number of coins won indicator, and the lamps managed by the sub control means are the stop switch lamp, lower panel lamp, and frame lamp.

The MAX bed lamp may be managed by the main control means or by the sub control means.

<<Lamp state at the end of a game when the complete function is not activated>>
Here, a game in which the complete function is not activated refers to a game in which the activation condition (stop condition) of the complete function is not satisfied.

At the end of a game in which the complete function is not activated (when waiting to bet after all the reels have stopped), the bet lamp corresponding to the number of bets from the previous game will be lit. For example, if a game in which 3 bets were placed, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp will be lit at the end of the game, and the start lamp will be off.

In addition, when the completion function is not activated and the game ends in an advantageous zone where the advantageous zone lamp is lit (while waiting to bet after all the reels have stopped), and the next game is also in an advantageous zone, the advantageous zone lamp will be lit.

In addition, when the complete function is not activated and a replay is selected, the replay lamp and start lamp are lit at the end of the game (when the start switch is waiting to be operated or when a coin is waiting to be inserted after the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is displayed in a stopped state).

In addition, in a game in which the complete function is not activated, when a winning symbol combination corresponding to a minor prize is displayed at the end of the game in which a minor prize has been won (while waiting to bet after all the reels have stopped), the corresponding segment of the number of coins acquired indicator is lit. For example, in a game in which 10 gaming media have been awarded and the conditions for activating the complete function are not met, the segment corresponding to "10" is lit (10 is displayed) in the number of coins acquired indicator. Note that the number of gaming media displayed on the number of coins acquired indicator may be configured not to be displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds) after the awarding of gaming media has ended.

In addition, at the end of a game in which the complete function is not activated and a winning combination that is not a replay (for example, a small combination or a miss) is won (while waiting to bet after all the reels have stopped) and the credit number indicator shows a value equal to or greater than the number of bets required to start the next game, the MAX BET lamp is lit. Note that the number of bets required to start the next game is "3" if a game can be played by betting three gaming media (the same applies below).

In addition, when the completion function is not activated and the game ends (waiting for a bet after all reels have stopped) when a non-replay winning combination (for example, a small winning combination or a miss) is won, and the credit number indicator displays a value less than the number of bets that can be used to start the next game, the MAX BET lamp is turned off. Note that when a value of 1 or more is displayed on the credit number indicator, the MAX BET lamp may be turned on. In other words, when a value less than the number of bets that can be used to start the next game (for example, 1 or 2) is displayed on the credit number indicator, the MAX BET lamp may be turned on. When the MAX BET lamp is turned on, it may be possible to bet the number of game media according to the value displayed on the credit number indicator by operating the MAX BET switch. For example, when the MAX BET lamp is turned on when the number of credits is 1, it is possible to bet 1 by operating the MAX BET switch. Also, for example, when the MAX BET lamp is turned on when the number of credits is 10, it is possible to bet 3 (the number of bets that can be used to start the next game by operating the MAX BET switch). On the other hand, when the MAX BET lamp is off, no gaming media can be bet even if the MAX BET switch is operated. In this way, the lighting state of the MAX BET lamp can inform the player of the status of whether the operation of the MAX BET switch is valid or invalid.

In addition, when the complete function is not activated and the replay is at the end of a winning game (when waiting for the start switch to be operated after all reels have stopped, or waiting for a coin to be inserted), the MAX BET lamp is turned off regardless of the number of credits displayed on the credit number indicator.

In addition, at the end of a game where the complete function is not activated (when the start switch is waiting to be operated after all the reels have stopped, or when waiting for medals to be inserted) if the credit number display shows a value less than the upper limit, the medal insertion possible lamp will be lit.

In addition, when a value of 1 or more is displayed on the credit number indicator at the end of a game in which the complete function is not activated (while waiting to place a bet after all the reels have stopped), the corresponding segment of the credit number indicator is lit.

In addition, at the end of a game where the complete function is not activated (when waiting for bets after all the reels have stopped), the stop switch lamp is lit in a manner that indicates that the operation of the stop switch is invalid. For example, the stop switch lamp may be lit in red or may be turned off.

In addition, at the end of a game when the complete function is not activated (when waiting to place a bet after all the reels have stopped), the lower panel lamp is lit and the frame lamp is lit in a manner that corresponds to the waiting state of the game.

<<Lamp state at the end of a game when the complete function is activated>>
Here, a game in which the complete function is activated refers to a game in which the activation condition (stop condition) of the complete function is satisfied.

At the end of a game in which the complete function has been activated (while waiting to place a bet after all the reels have stopped), the bet lamps corresponding to the number of bets from the previous game are not lit and all bet lamps are off. For example, even at the end of a game in which 3 bets have been placed, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are off, and the start lamp is also off.

In addition, when the complete function is activated and the game ends in an advantageous zone where the advantageous zone lamp is lit (while waiting to bet after all the reels have stopped), the advantageous zone lamp is turned off. In other words, the complete function is activated even if the conditions for the end of the advantageous zone are not met in a game in which the complete function is activated. In addition, the advantageous zone lamp is turned off even if the conditions for the end of the advantageous zone are not met in a game in which the complete function is activated.

In addition, when the complete function is activated and a replay is selected, the replay lamp and start lamp are turned off at the end of the game (when the reels have all stopped and the start switch is waiting to be operated, or when a coin is waiting to be inserted).

In addition, in a game in which the complete function is activated, when the winning symbol combination corresponding to the minor prize is displayed at the end of the game in which the minor prize is won (while waiting to bet after all the reels have stopped), the corresponding segment of the number of coins acquired indicator is turned off. For example, if the conditions for activating the complete function are met in a game in which 10 gaming media have been awarded, the segment corresponding to "10" is lit (10 is displayed) in the number of coins acquired indicator, and thereafter, while the complete function is activated, the segment corresponding to "10" is not lit (10 is not displayed) in the number of coins acquired indicator. In other words, the segment corresponding to "10" is not lit in the number of coins acquired indicator before a predetermined period (e.g. 60 seconds) has elapsed since the awarding of the gaming media ended.

In addition, when the complete function is activated and the winning symbol combination corresponding to the minor winning combination is displayed at the end of the game in which the minor winning combination has been won (while waiting to bet after all the reels have stopped), the MAX BET lamp is turned off regardless of the number of credits displayed on the credit number display.

In addition, when a game in which the complete function has been activated and a replay has been won ends (when the start switch is waiting to be operated after all the reels have stopped, or when a coin is waiting to be inserted), the MAX BET lamp is turned off regardless of the number of credits displayed on the credit number indicator.

In addition, when a game in which the complete function has been activated ends (when the start switch is waiting to be operated after all reels have stopped, or when waiting for a medal to be inserted) and the credit number indicator shows a value less than the upper limit of credits, the medal insertion possible lamp is turned off.

In addition, when a value of 1 or more is displayed on the credit number indicator at the end of a game in which the complete function has been activated (while waiting to bet after all the reels have stopped), the corresponding segment of the credit number indicator is lit.

At the end of a game in which the complete function is activated (while waiting for a bet after all the reels have stopped), the stop switch lamp is lit in a manner indicating that the operation of the stop switch is invalid. Or, at the end of a game in which the complete function is activated (while waiting for a bet after all the reels have stopped), the stop switch lamp is lit in a manner different from the manner indicating that the operation of the stop switch is invalid (also different from the manner indicating that the operation of the stop switch is valid). An example of the stop switch lamp being lit in a manner different from the manner indicating that the operation of the stop switch is invalid (also different from the manner indicating that the operation of the stop switch is valid) is when the stop switch lamp is lit in red to indicate that the operation of the stop switch is invalid in a game in which the complete function is not activated, and when the stop switch lamp is turned off to indicate that the operation of the stop switch is invalid in a game in which the complete function is activated.

In addition, at the end of a game in which the complete function has been activated (while waiting for bets after all the reels have stopped), the lower panel lamp is lit, and the frame lamp is lit in a manner that corresponds to the activation of the complete function.

The above-mentioned configurations of the <<lamp state at the end of a game when the complete function is not activated>> and the <<lamp state at the end of a game when the complete function is activated>> can be combined.

Also, as a different aspect from the above-mentioned embodiment, at the end of a game in which the complete function is not activated (waiting for a bet after all the reels have stopped), the bet lamp corresponding to the number of bets in the previous game may be turned off. For example, if a game has been played in which 3 bets have been placed, at the end of the game, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are turned off, and the start lamp is turned off.

In addition, as an aspect different from the above-mentioned embodiment, the advantageous zone lamp may be lit at the end of a game in which the complete function is activated and the advantageous zone lamp is lit (while waiting for a bet after all the reels have stopped).

Also, as a different aspect from the above-mentioned embodiment, when a game in which the complete function is activated ends and a replay is selected (while waiting for the start switch to be operated after all reels have stopped, or while waiting for a coin to be inserted), the replay lamp may be on and the start lamp may be off.

Also, as a different aspect from the above-mentioned embodiment, when a game in which the complete function is activated is played and a winning symbol combination corresponding to a minor winning combination is displayed at the end of the game in which a minor winning combination has been won (while waiting to bet after all the reels have stopped), the corresponding segment of the winning number indicator may be lit.

Even in the different modes described above, the configurations of the <<lamp mode at the end of a game when the complete function is not activated>> and the <<lamp mode at the end of a game when the complete function is activated>> can be combined.

<Performance in the operation advance notice state>
A display mode on the display device in the operation notice state may be as shown in Fig. 60. In Fig. 60, as the effect images in the normal state (including various game states such as CZ, AT, and non-AT as game states managed by the main control means) which is neither the operation notice state nor the end state, the lion and girl character display, the heart effect display, the dialogue display "Today was fun," and the total number of acquisition display "TOTAL: 18,000 coins" are performed. In addition to the effect images displayed in the normal state, the remaining difference display "The complete function will be activated soon. 100 coins remaining until activation" is performed as the effect images in the operation notice state (including various game states such as CZ, AT, and non-AT as game states managed by the main control means). In addition, as the presentation image in the limit notification state (state where the game progress is stopped), the presentation image displayed in the normal state and the operation notice notification state is not displayed, and instead, a black background and a limit display (notification regarding the limit processing, limit notification) of "Complete function has been activated" are displayed. Note that the total number of acquisitions display in the normal state does not need to be displayed all the time, but is displayed when the total number of acquisitions reaches or exceeds a predetermined threshold value (for example, 18000 shown in FIG. 60, or 18900 which is the value for sending a test interruption request signal to the test IF board).

In the operation preview notification state, the remaining difference display prevents the player from seeing all of the total wins display, part of the girl character display, and all of the effect display. However, the display area of the remaining difference display is smaller than 50% of the full screen display area, so the player can generally see the performance image being executed. Note that in Figure 60, the transparency (transparency) of the remaining difference display is set to 0%, so the display of layers behind the remaining difference display cannot be seen, but the transparency of the remaining difference display can be set to any value between 10% and 90%. This makes it possible to see both the remaining difference display and the performance image.

The limit notification may be, in addition to the congratulatory display described above, a limit text display such as "The limit has been reached" or "The game has ended" or a sound. The limit text display may be displayed simultaneously with the congratulatory display, or the congratulatory display may be ended after the congratulatory display is displayed and the limit text display or sound may be executed. In addition, a warning display such as "Please press the settlement switch" or "Please press the counting switch" or a sound may be executed together with the limit text display.
In addition, the remaining difference display in the operation advance notification state is displayed on the upper side of the display area of the display device, but this is not limiting, and the remaining difference display may be displayed on the lower side or in the center of the display area of the display device. However, if displayed on the lower side or in the center, there is a possibility that it will overlap with the display area of various information displays (game medal number display, awarded number display, or bet number display) not shown and most of the performance images, so by setting the transparency of the remaining difference display to any value between 20% and 90%, the player can view the various information displays and performance images.

In addition, when any of the AT end conditions (for example, the number of AT play times, the difference in the AT, or the number of AT navigation times) are met during the activation notice state, the addiction prevention display is displayed in priority over the remaining difference display. This allows the player to see the addiction prevention display rather than the remaining difference display, effectively preventing addiction to the game.

Also, contrary to the above-mentioned embodiment, when any of the AT end conditions (for example, the number of AT play times, the difference during the AT, or the number of AT navigation times) is met in the operation advance notification state, the remaining difference display may be displayed in priority over the addiction prevention display. This allows the player to quickly visually confirm the remaining difference until the play is stopped.

In addition, when any of the AT termination conditions (for example, the number of AT execution plays, the difference during the AT, or the number of AT navigations) is met in the activation notice state, the remaining difference display and the anti-addiction display may be displayed in different display areas. This allows the player to view both pieces of information. Note that in this case, if the display area of the anti-addiction display and the remaining difference display are configured to be displayed in a display area that would normally overlap, the display area of the anti-addiction display may be changed, or the display area of the remaining difference display may be changed. Also, the display areas of the anti-addiction display and the remaining difference display may be predetermined to be display areas that do not overlap even when displayed simultaneously.

In addition, when the total score threshold is reached or an abnormality occurs in the total score upper limit, a notification is issued to encourage counting (counting switch prompting display), so when the total score threshold is reached or an abnormality occurs in the total score upper limit during the operation advance notification state, both the remaining difference display and the counting switch prompting display are displayed. This allows the player to be aware of both the remaining difference display and the need to operate the counting switch.

In addition, when the total score threshold has been reached or an abnormality has occurred in the total score upper limit during the activation notification state, the counting switch prompting display may be displayed in priority over the remaining difference display. In this case, when the counting switch is operated while the counting switch prompting display is being displayed and the total score falls below the threshold (15,000 in this embodiment), the remaining difference display is displayed. This allows the total score threshold reaching state to be cancelled by operating the counting switch promptly, and then allows the player to become aware of the remaining difference display.

In addition, when the total score threshold is reached or the total score upper limit is abnormal during the activation notice state, the remaining difference display may be displayed in priority over the count switch prompt display. This provides a sense of satisfaction when the player wants to prioritize recognition of the remaining difference.

<Performance in the end notification state>
In the limit notification state, the lion and girl character displays, the effect display, the dialogue display, and the total number of wins display are all invisible. Also, the limit display is displayed instead of the remaining difference display. In Fig. 60, the limit display is displayed in the center of the display area of the display device, but the performance image is not displayed (the transparency of the limit display is 0%), so it may be displayed anywhere, including the top or bottom of the display area.

The limit display in the limit notification state may be 50% or more of the display area of the entire screen. However, when other information is displayed (such as a display indicating that the menu screen can be displayed by operating the sub-switch or a warning display), it is desirable for the limit display in the limit notification state to be any value between 50% and 90% of the display area of the entire screen.

In the game limit notification state in FIG. 60, no congratulatory display is displayed, but a congratulatory display using a character may be displayed instead of a black background image. However, even when the congratulatory display is displayed, the in-game presentation image is not displayed.

In addition, when a limit notification state is reached during the AT (when any of the AT end conditions (e.g., the number of AT play times, the difference in the number of AT play times, or the number of AT navigation times) are not met but the limit conditions are met), and the limit display is displayed, an anti-addiction display may be displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the anti-addiction display that would normally be displayed on the AT end screen from not being displayed. The anti-addiction display at this time may be in the same display form and for the same display time as when it is displayed on the AT end screen, or in a different display form and for a different display time than when it is displayed on the AT end screen. In addition, the display area of the anti-addiction display is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display area of the limit display, but if the anti-addiction display is configured to be hidden (not visible) for a predetermined time, the display area of the anti-addiction display and the display area of the limit display may overlap.

Also, contrary to the above-mentioned embodiment, when a limit notification state is reached during the AT (when any of the AT end conditions (e.g., the number of times the AT is executed, the difference in number during the AT, or the number of times the AT is navigated) are not met but the limit condition is met), the addiction prevention display does not need to be displayed when the limit display is displayed. This allows the player to quickly recognize that the limit state has been reached, without reducing the visibility of the limit display.

In addition, even if a limit notification state is reached during the AT (when any of the AT's ending conditions (e.g., the number of times the AT is executed, the difference in the number of times during the AT, or the number of times the AT is navigated) are not met but the limit conditions are met), and the addiction prevention display is not displayed when the limit display is displayed, if any of the AT's ending conditions are met and the limit conditions are met (when any of the AT's ending conditions and the limit conditions are met simultaneously), the addiction prevention display may be displayed when the limit display is displayed. This allows the player to recognize that the AT has ended even when the limit state is reached, giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, when a limit notification state is reached during the AT (when any of the AT's ending conditions (e.g., the number of times the AT is executed, the difference in the number of times during the AT, or the number of times the AT is navigated) are not met but the limit conditions are met), the addiction prevention display is not displayed when the limit display is displayed, and even when any of the AT's ending conditions are met and the limit conditions are met (when any of the AT's ending conditions and the limit conditions are met simultaneously), the addiction prevention display may not be displayed when the limit display is displayed. This allows the player to quickly recognize that the limit state has been reached, without reducing the visibility of the limit display.

<Regarding the processing of the main control means or the sub-control means during the termination processing>
When the main control means executes the stop processing, the main control means and/or the sub control means notifies the player that the game progress has stopped (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a "stop notification").

The main control means may notify the user that a limit has been reached by displaying a message on a specified display device controlled by the main control means indicating that a limit has been reached.

Examples of the specified indicators controlled by the main control means include an indicator for the number of coins won and an indicator for the number of credits.

For example, if a specific error (e.g., a door open error, medal accumulation error, etc.) occurs while the number of coins acquired display is displaying a message (e.g., EE) indicating that the limit has been reached, the number of coins acquired display may be configured to display a message (e.g., E1) indicating that the specific error has occurred. Then, when the specific error is cleared by operating the reset switch, the number of coins acquired display may be configured to display again a message indicating that the limit has been reached.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to accurately notify the user that a stalled state has been reached even if there is an abnormality in the sub-control means. Furthermore, when a specified error occurs during a stalled state, it is possible to accurately notify the user that the specified error has occurred even if there is an abnormality in the sub-control means. Furthermore, when the specified error is resolved, it is possible to notify the user that the specified error has been resolved and that a stalled state has been reached.

In addition, for example, if a specific error (e.g., a door open error, a medal accumulation error, etc.) occurs while the acquired coin count display is displaying a message indicating that the limit has been reached (e.g., EE), the acquired coin count display may not display a message indicating that the specific error has occurred (e.g., E1). In other words, even if a specific error has occurred, the acquired coin count display may continue to display a message indicating that the limit has been reached.

By configuring it in this way, the player will not be confused as to whether a specific error has occurred or a play-stop state has occurred, and the player can be accurately notified that a play-stop state has occurred.

Note that although the number of coins acquired indicator is given as an example of a specific indicator controlled by the main control means, as mentioned above, a credit number indicator may also be used.

For example, the credit number display displays the number of credits. However, if the limit condition is met (if information indicating that the limit condition has been met is stored in the limit flag storage area), automatic settlement, described below, may be performed. If configured in this way, once the limit condition is met and automatic settlement has been made, the number of credits becomes 0, and a display (e.g., EE) can be executed on the credit number display to indicate that a limit state has occurred.

In addition, in gaming machines that do not automatically settle accounts when a limiting condition is met, after the player operates the settlement switch and the number of credits becomes 0, a display (e.g., EE) can be displayed on the credit number display to indicate that a limiting condition has occurred.

When the number of coins acquired is not displaying anything and the credit count display is displaying an indication that a limit has occurred, if a specified error (e.g., a door open error, a medal accumulation error, etc.) occurs, the number of coins acquired may display an indication that a specified error has occurred (e.g., E1) and the credit count display may display an indication that a limit has occurred. Then, when the specified error is cleared by operating the reset switch, the indication on the number of coins acquired indicating that a specified error has occurred disappears (terminating the display process), and the credit count display may continue to display an indication that a limit has occurred.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to accurately notify the user that a stalled state has been reached even if there is an abnormality in the sub-control means. Furthermore, when a specified error occurs during a stalled state, it is possible to accurately notify the user that the specified error has occurred even if there is an abnormality in the sub-control means. Furthermore, when the specified error is resolved, it is possible to notify the user that the specified error has been resolved and that a stalled state has been reached.

In addition, for example, if a specific error (e.g., a door open error, a medal accumulation error, etc.) occurs while the credit number display is displaying (e.g., EE) an indication that the limit has been reached, the acquired coin number display may not display (e.g., E1) an indication that the specific error has occurred. In other words, even if a specific error has occurred, the credit number display may continue to display the indication that the limit has been reached.

By configuring it in this way, the player will not be confused as to whether a specific error has occurred or the game has stopped, and the player can be accurately notified that a game has stopped.

As a notification of the end of the game by the sub-control means, in addition to the congratulatory display described above, a display or sound of the end of the game such as "The complete function has been activated", "The end of the game has been reached", or "The game has ended" as shown in FIG. 60 may be executed. The end of the game display may be displayed simultaneously with the congratulatory display, or the congratulatory display may be ended after the congratulatory display is displayed and the end of the game display or sound may be executed. In addition, a warning display (various switch prompting displays) such as "Please press the settlement switch" or a sound may be executed together with the end of the game display.

To notify the user of the limit, a limit process may be executed before the congratulatory display is executed and the congratulatory display may be displayed during the limit process, or a freeze may be executed for a predetermined period before the limit process is executed, the congratulatory display may be executed during the predetermined period, and the limit text may be displayed when the limit process is executed after the predetermined period.

In addition, when the limit character is displayed after the blessing display, the warning display will not be executed while the blessing display is being executed, but will be executed when the limit character is displayed.

This prevents players from forgetting to operate the settlement switch or counting switch, and does not hinder the sense of accomplishment that comes from executing the congratulatory display, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

During the limit notification, sounds such as background music other than the limit text sound such as "The limit has been reached" and the warning sound such as "Please press the settlement switch" and "Please press the counting switch" are not output, and the device is silent. During the limit notification, sounds such as background music other than the limit text sound such as "The limit has been reached" and the warning sound such as "Please press the settlement switch" may be output at a volume lower than the volume during error notification.

By configuring it in this way, players are less likely to have a negative impression of the dead end state and are more likely to recognize it as something to aim for, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the functions of the sub-switches managed by the sub-control means are enabled during the limit notification. For this reason, even during the limit process (limit notification), the menu screen or the volume change screen can be opened by operating the sub-switches. Note that the volume that can be changed from the volume change screen does not include the volume related to the limit notification, so the volume cannot be changed during the limit notification.

In addition, by opening a menu screen during the limit-play process and displaying a two-dimensional code including the game history, a service (a so-called "game machine linked service") can be provided to the player in which the game history is read by a mobile device and saved on a server. Note that since the limit-play display is being displayed on the display device, the two-dimensional code is displayed in a specified area in the center of the display device's screen when displayed from the menu screen except when the limit-play notification is in progress. However, since the specified area overlaps with the limit-play notification when the limit-play notification is in progress, the display area of the two-dimensional code during the limit-play notification is displayed in an area that is different from the specified area and does not overlap with the limit-play notification.

As another way of displaying the limit indication and the two-dimensional code, even if the display areas of the limit indication and the two-dimensional code overlap, the limit indication and the two-dimensional code may be displayed alternately, making it possible to read the two-dimensional code while issuing a limit notification.

In addition, when the limit process is executed, the gaming media may be automatically settled. For example, when the limit process is executed when the number of credits stored is "50," "50" gaming media will be automatically settled (discharged into the lower tray) even if the settlement switch is not operated. By configuring it in this way, the gaming media electronically stored in the gaming machine can be returned to the player even if the player does not operate the settlement switch. In other words, it is possible to avoid issuing warning sounds such as "Please press the settlement switch" or warning displays such as "Please press the settlement switch" or "Please press the counting switch."

In addition, the stop notification will not end due to the passage of time during the stop process. In other words, the stop notification will continue until the stop state is released (until a setting change process or RWM abnormality process is performed).

During the termination process, even if an event occurs that could be one of the specified recoverable errors described above, the specified error may not be detected, or the specified error may be detected but the specified error processing may not be executed. In either case, the system is configured not to notify the user of the specified error.

As mentioned above, this is because the stop processing is looped during the stop processing, so even if a specific error is detected in the interrupt processing, the specific error processing in the main loop processing is not executed. Note that if interrupt processing is prohibited during the stop processing, the specific error will not be detected.

This makes it possible to prevent the trouble of having to clear an error when the game cannot continue by executing a stop-play process, reducing the workload of game parlor staff.

Note that if the system is configured to execute a specified error process within an interrupt process, the specified error process will be executed even during stop processing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specified error process from being executed during stop processing by determining whether stop processing is in progress before executing the specified error process and not executing the specified error process if stop processing is in progress. This can also be achieved by prohibiting interrupt processing during stop processing.

In addition, considering that fraud can be detected early by executing a specified error process even during the stop process, the configuration may be such that a specified error process can be executed during the stop process.

In this case, interrupt processing is permitted even during the stop processing, and when a specified error is detected during the interrupt processing, a specified error processing is executed within the interrupt processing to notify the specified error, or when a specified error is detected during the stop processing, the specified error processing is executed, and the specified error notification processing is executed during the specified error processing in the loop processing of the stop processing after the specified error is detected during the interrupt processing.

By doing this, fraudulent processing can be carried out even during the termination process, preventing fraudulent activity.

When the stop-play process is executed, an external signal may be output. For example, an external signal may be output as a security signal for a specified period of time (e.g., 30 seconds). The security signal is a signal that is output due to a specified error. When the security signal is output, the gaming facility is able to know that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine on which the stop-play process was executed, and therefore fraudulent behavior can be deterred even if an error notification is not made during the stop-play process.

The specified error that outputs a security signal may be, for example, any or all of the following errors related to the selector (medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passing time error) and errors related to the hopper 44 (hopper retention error, abnormality detection error). In addition, it is not limited to the errors mentioned above, and other errors may also be used.

The security signal may be configured to be output not only when a specific error occurs, but also during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. For example, the security signal may be configured to be output when the setting key switch is on.

By configuring it in this way, the amusement facility can prevent not only certain errors, but also fraudulent turning on of the setting key switch (for example, fraudulent changes to setting values or fraudulent confirmation of setting values) by outputting a security signal.

<Other configurations related to the stop monitoring process or the stop process>
The end-of-period monitoring process and the end-of-period process are configured to be executed outside the usage area. Also, the end-of-period monitoring process may be configured to be executed outside the usage area and the end-of-period process may be executed within the usage area, or the end-of-period monitoring process and the end-of-period process may be configured to be executed within the usage area.

In addition, in the case of medal-less gaming machines, the stoppage monitoring process and the stoppage process may be executed outside the usage area of the main control board, or the stoppage monitoring process and the stoppage process may be executed outside the usage area of the gaming medal count control board.

It is configured to continue executing the process to output an external signal during the termination process.

By configuring it this way, it is possible to notify the outside world that the game is being stopped, allowing the amusement center manager to quickly grasp the status of the gaming machine.

The end of the game notification may be not only by the LCD display or sound output from the speaker, but also by the lighting of the LEDs such as the frame lamp, lower panel lamp, number of coins won indicator, or number of credits indicator.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to notify the player that a game has stopped even on gaming machines that do not have a liquid crystal display.

Below, a specific example of the limit monitoring process will be explained using the figures. Here, the limit monitoring process is configured to be executed at a predetermined timing after the awarding of gaming media (the winning awarding process related to the displayed symbol combination in FIG. 9) has ended. For example, the limit monitoring process may be configured to be executed as one of the processes executed in the game end check in FIG. 9.

The end-of-game monitoring process is executed in all games. Specifically, it is executed regardless of the game zone (normal zone, advantageous zone). It is also executed regardless of the game state (non-AT state, AT state, during bonus (bonus game state), inside bonus state). It is also executed regardless of the number of gaming media bet (game with one bet, game with two bets, game with three bets).

<End monitoring process (version without end difference counter)
In FIG. 55, there is a storage area for the number of inserted medals and a storage area for the number of paid out medals.

The inserted medal count memory area (also called the total IN counter) is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area capable of storing a value corresponding to the total number of gaming media inserted (total number of bets). For example, the inserted medal count memory area can be a 2-byte memory area (a memory area capable of storing values from 0 to 65535).

The number of medals paid out memory area (also called the total OUT counter) is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area capable of storing a value corresponding to the total number of gaming media paid out (total payouts). For example, the number of medals paid out memory area can be a 2-byte memory area (a memory area capable of storing values from 0 to 65535).

The value stored in the medal insertion count storage area is set to an initial value (0) when the power is turned on. Similarly, the value stored in the medal payment count storage area is set to an initial value (0) when the power is turned on. In other words, if a power outage occurs when the value stored in the medal insertion count storage area is 1000 and the value stored in the medal payment count storage area is 2000, and then the power is turned on, the initial value (0) is stored in the medal insertion count storage area and the initial value (0) is stored in the medal payment count storage area.

Note that "power-on" includes both power-on without a setting change and power-on with a setting change. However, the initial value may not be stored when the power is turned on without a setting change, and the initial value may be stored when the power is turned on with a setting change.

In addition, the values stored in the number of inserted medals memory area and the number of paid out medals memory area are not stored as initial values (0) when the RWM is cleared following the end of the favorable zone. In other words, the favorable zone ends (the RWM is cleared following the end of the favorable zone) when the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area is 1000 and the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area is 2000, and the next game (game in the normal zone) starts with 1000 stored in the number of inserted medals memory area and 2000 stored in the number of paid out medals memory area. Note that it is assumed that the power is not turned off between the end of the favorable zone and the next game.

First, in "Replay activation symbol display?", it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has been stopped and displayed as a result of the current game. In other words, in a game in which a replay role is won by the internal lottery and a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is stopped and displayed, the answer is YES. On the other hand, for example, in a game in which a push order bell role is won by the internal lottery (a game in which a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not stopped and displayed), the answer is NO. Note that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay can also be referred to as a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role (the same applies below).

In other words, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed in the current game, "Replay activation symbol display?" will answer YES, and the game end monitoring process will end.

In the "total OUT counter update process", the value stored in the number of medals paid out storage area is updated. Specifically, the number of medals paid out in the current game is added to the value stored in the number of medals paid out storage area. The result of adding the number of medals paid out in the current game to the value stored in the number of medals paid out storage area is then stored in the number of medals paid out storage area. For example, if "1000" is stored in the number of medals paid out storage area, and the number of medals paid out as a result of the current game is "9", then "1009" is stored in the number of medals paid out storage area.

In the "total IN counter update process", the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area is updated. Specifically, the number of inserted medals for the current game is added to the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area. The result of adding the number of inserted medals for the current game to the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area is then stored in the number of inserted medals storage area. For example, if "3000" is stored in the number of inserted medals storage area and the number of bets for the current game is "3", then "3003" is stored in the number of inserted medals storage area.

Note that even if the current game is bet by automatic betting, the number of bets for that automatic bet will be the number of throws in the current game. For example, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed in the previous game and "3" is bet by automatic betting, the number of throws in the current game will be "3". However, for example, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed in both the previous game and the current game (two consecutive games), "Replay activation symbol display?" will be YES in the end-of-game monitoring process for the current game, and the end-of-game monitoring process will end without executing the "total-IN counter update process".

"Total OUT counter < total IN counter?" determines whether the total number of payouts after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is less than the total number of put-in coins after being updated by the "total IN counter update process".

Specifically, a subtraction process is performed to subtract the "total number of coins inserted after being updated by the 'total IN counter update process'" from the "total number of coins paid out after being updated by the 'total OUT counter update process'". If the result of this subtraction process shows that the carry flag is 1, then a YES judgment is made and the limit monitoring process is terminated. In other words, the next process, "difference number > 19000", is not executed. On the other hand, if the result of this subtraction process shows that the carry flag is not 1 (if it is 0), then a NO judgment is made.

For example, if the total number of coins inserted after being updated by the "total IN counter update process" is "1000" and the total number of coins paid out after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is "2000", then "2000" - "1000" is executed. As a result of this subtraction process, no carry occurs, so the carry flag becomes 0. In other words, the answer is determined to be NO.

For example, if the total number of coins inserted after being updated by the "total IN counter update process" is "2000" and the total number of coins paid out after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is "1000", then "1000" - "2000" is executed. As a result of this subtraction process, a carry flag is set to 1, as a carry is carried over. In other words, the answer is YES.

For example, if the total number of coins inserted after being updated by the "total IN counter update process" is "2000" and the total number of coins paid out after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is "2000", then "2000" - "2000" is executed. As a result of this subtraction process, no carry occurs, so the carry flag becomes 0. In other words, the answer is determined to be NO.

"Difference > 19000?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media when the power is turned on is greater than 19000, starting from the point (0). Specifically, the determination is made by comparing the result of the subtraction process performed in "Total OUT counter < Total IN counter?" with the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will result in a capped state." Here, the determination is made by setting the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will result in a capped state" to "19001."

For example, if the total input number after being updated by the "total IN counter update process" is "1000" and the total output number after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is "2000", the result of subtracting "2000" from "1000" is "1000". As a result of the comparison between "1000" and "19001" (1000 - 19001), the carry flag becomes 1, so the result is NO (the difference does not exceed 19000).

For example, if the total input number after being updated by the "total IN counter update process" is "10,000" and the total output number after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is "29,000", the result of subtracting "29,000" from "10,000" is "19,000". As a result of the comparison between "19,000" and "19001" (19,000 - 19,001), the carry flag becomes 1, so the result is NO (the difference does not exceed 19,000).

For example, if the total input number after being updated by the "total IN counter update process" is "10,000" and the total output number after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is "29,005", then the result of subtracting "29005" from "10,000" is "19005". As a result of comparing "19005" with "19001" (19005 - 19001), the carry flag becomes 0, so the answer is YES (the difference exceeds 19,000).

In "Save stop flag", information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area in the RWM area of the main control board. For example, a predetermined value (e.g., "1") is stored in the stop flag storage area.

The information stored in the limit flag memory area is not initialized when the power is turned on without changing the settings, or when the power is turned off (power off process). Also, the information stored in the limit flag memory area is not initialized when the RWM is cleared at the end of the favorable period.

The information stored in the limit flag memory area can be initialized by turning on the power with a setting change (RWM clear process with setting change) (if information indicating that the limit conditions have been met has been stored, the information indicating that the limit conditions have been met can be cleared).

In other words, if the power is turned OFF after "Save Cap Flag" stores information indicating that the cap condition has been met in the cap flag memory area, and then the power is turned ON (power ON without changing settings), the values stored in the number of medals inserted memory area and the number of medals paid out memory area will be reset to their initial values (0), but the information stored in the cap flag memory area (information indicating that the cap condition has been met) will not be initialized.

Therefore, when information indicating that the conditions for the limit have been met is stored in the limit flag memory area, if the power is turned off and then turned on without changing any settings, the limit state will be reached even though the difference between the value stored in the number of medals inserted memory area and the value stored in the number of medals paid out memory area does not exceed 19,000 (the difference in the number of game media when the power is turned on as the starting point (0) does not exceed 19,000).

When information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area (when the stop state is reached), it is not possible to perform a bet operation to execute the next game. For example, the operation of the bet button is disabled, or the blocker is (set to) a position that does not form a medal flow path (a position for returning inserted medals from the return port).

In addition, in gaming machines that do not automatically settle gaming media after information indicating that the limit condition has been met is stored in the limit flag storage area, the settlement switch may be made operable after information indicating that the limit condition has been met is stored in the limit flag storage area. By configuring in this way, the number of credits can be settled.

On the other hand, in gaming machines that automatically settle gaming media after information indicating that the limiting condition has been met is stored in the limiting flag storage area, the settlement switch may be made inoperable.

In other words, the limit monitoring process in FIG. 55 performs a subtraction process to subtract the "total number of coins inserted after updated by the 'total IN counter update process'" from the "total number of coins paid out after updated by the 'total OUT counter update process'". Then, if the "total number of coins paid out after updated by the 'total OUT counter update process'" is greater than the "total number of coins inserted after updated by the 'total IN counter update process'", it is determined whether or not it is greater than a specified value (19,000). If it is determined that the value is greater than the specified value (19,000), information indicating that the limit condition has been met is stored in the limit flag storage area. Therefore, the system is configured such that the next game cannot be played unless the settings are changed.

In addition, in the limit monitoring process of FIG. 55, a subtraction process is performed to subtract the "total number of coins inserted after updated by the 'total IN counter update process'" from the "total number of coins paid out after updated by the 'total OUT counter update process'". Then, if the "total number of coins paid out after updated by the 'total OUT counter update process'" is smaller than the "total number of coins inserted after updated by the 'total IN counter update process'", no determination is made as to whether it is greater than a specified value (19,000). Therefore, information indicating that the limit condition has been met is not stored in the limit flag storage area, and the next game can be played.

In other words, if the total number of coins paid out is greater than the total number of coins put in, it is compared with the specified value, but if the total number of coins paid out is less than the total number of coins put in, it is not compared with the specified value.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being performed when the total payout number is smaller than the total input number. In other words, it is possible to shorten the processing time of the main control means and reduce erroneous decisions due to noise, etc.

Note that although the initial value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area and the initial value stored in the number of paid out medals storage area have been explained as "0" as an example, the initial value is not limited to "0." As long as the initial value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area and the initial value stored in the number of paid out medals storage area are the same, any value can be used.

In addition, the inserted medal count storage area is a 2-byte storage area, and the paid out medal count storage area is a 2-byte storage area, but the inserted medal count storage area may be a 3-byte storage area, and the paid out medal count storage area may be a 3-byte storage area.

In addition, if the difference in the number of game media when the power is turned on is set as the starting point (0), the value stored in the inserted medal count storage area and the value stored in the paid out medal count storage area may be configured not to be updated.

For example, if the lower limit is set to -10,000, and the difference in the number of game media when the power is turned on is set as the starting point (0) and the number of game media is below -10,000, the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area will not be updated based on the number of bets in that game. Also, the value stored in the number of paid out medals storage area will not be updated based on the number of paid out medals in that game.

By setting a lower limit in this way, it is possible to reach a cap when the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds a maximum of 29,000 (the absolute value of the lower limit (10,000) + 19,000). In other words, compared to when no lower limit is set, it is possible to reduce the number of gaming media that a player can potentially obtain before reaching a cap. In other words, it is possible to prevent the tendency for gambling to become excessively high.

Although the lower limit has been described as -10000, the lower limit is not limited to -10000 and may be any value.
stomach

<End monitoring process (end difference counter increment version)>
56, a hit/stop difference counter is provided. The description of the hit/stop difference counter is omitted since it is the same as described above. Note that the size of the storage area for the hit/stop difference counter is 2 bytes.

The initial value of the stop difference counter in FIG. 56 is the value obtained by subtracting the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media to be stopped" from the "value corresponding to the memory area of the stop difference counter."

The "value corresponding to the memory area of the hit difference counter" is 65,535, which is the maximum value that can be stored in the memory area of the hit difference counter if the memory area of the hit difference counter is 2 bytes. Also, if the memory area of the hit difference counter is 3 bytes, it is 16,777,215, which is the maximum value that can be stored in the memory area of the hit difference counter.

The "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will cause the game to reach a capped state" is, for example, 19,000 if the game is to reach a capped state when the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, with the time when the power is turned on being the starting point (0). Also, for example, if the game is to reach a capped state when the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 10,000, with the time when the power is turned on being the starting point (0), the value is 10,000. Also, for example, if the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed is set as the standard (0) and the game is to reach a capped state when the difference in the number of gaming media from that standard exceeds 19,000, the value is 19,000.

In Figure 56, the explanation will be given assuming that the "value corresponding to the memory area of the stop difference counter" is 65,535, the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media to be stopped" is 19,000, and the initial value is 46,535.

The initial value of the stop difference counter is stored in the stop difference counter when the power is turned on without changing the settings (not shown). Note that the initial value of the stop difference counter is also stored in the stop difference counter when the power is turned on with a change in settings (not shown).

First, in "Replay activation symbol display?", it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has been stopped and displayed as a result of the current game. In other words, in a game in which the replay role is won by the internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, it is determined as YES. On the other hand, for example, in a game in which the push order bell role is won by the internal lottery (a game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not stopped and displayed), it is determined as NO.

In other words, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed in the current game, "Replay activation symbol display?" will answer YES, and the game end monitoring process will end.

In "Set Hit Difference Counter", the value stored in the hit difference counter is stored in a specified register. For example, when the value stored in the hit difference counter is 10,000, 10,000 is stored in the HL register. Note that the value stored in the hit difference counter at this time is the value before the hit difference counter was updated using the absolute value of the difference in the number of game media in the current game.

"Is the number of coins put in < the number of coins paid out?" determines whether the number of coins paid out is greater than the number of coins put in.

For example, as a result of this game,
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 0, the determination is NO.
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 1, the determination is NO.
c) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 3, the answer is NO.
d) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the answer is YES.

Specifically, the number of inserts minus the number of payouts is calculated, and the result of this calculation is stored in a specified register (for example, the A register). Furthermore, if there is a carry over as a result of the number of inserts minus the number of payouts (if the carry flag is 1), the result is judged as YES, and if there is no carry over (if the carry flag is 0), the result is judged as NO. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is greater than the number of payouts, the carry flag is 0 and the result is judged as YES. Furthermore, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is less than the number of payouts, the carry flag is 1 and the result is judged as NO.

To give a specific example, the result of this game:
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 0, then the A register will be 3 and the carry flag will be 0.
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 1, then the A register will be 2 and the carry flag will be 0.
c) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 3, then the A register will be 0 and the carry flag will be 0.
d) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the A register will read 249 and the carry flag will read 1.

Here, if the result of the previous game shows a symbol combination corresponding to a replay stopped (on an active line), the number of bets for the current game is automatically bet (for example, "3" is set by the automatic bet), and the result of the current game shows no symbol combination corresponding to a replay stopped (on an active line), then even if the number of bets was set by the automatic bet, it will be treated as the number of bets for the current game.

On the other hand, regarding the number of inserts and the number of payouts, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the determination of "number of inserts < number of payouts?" is not made. In other words, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the number of bets for the current game is not treated as the number of inserts. Similarly, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the number of awards (or automatic bets) for the current game is not treated as the number of payouts.

Note that in "Number of Inserts < Number of Payouts?", we subtracted the number of inserts from the number of payouts, but we could also use the number of payouts minus the number of inserts. In other words, it would be sufficient to be able to calculate the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game using the number of inserts and the number of payouts.

In "stop difference counter < 0?", the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is subtracted from the value stored in the stop difference counter to determine whether the result is below the lower limit (0). Specifically, the result of subtracting the value stored in the A register (number of coins inserted in the current game - number of coins paid out in the current game) from the value stored in the HL register (value stored in the stop difference counter) is used to determine whether there is any borrowing. If there is any borrowing, the answer is YES, and if there is no borrowing, the answer is NO. If there is any borrowing, the carry flag is set to 1, and if there is no borrowing, the carry flag is set to 0. The result of this calculation is stored in the HL register.

For example, if the hit difference counter (HL register) is set to 2, the result of the current game is
A) When the input number is 3 and the output number is 0 (when the A register is 3), the HL register is 65535 and the carry flag is 1. Note that 2-3=-1, but a register cannot store negative values. Therefore, a carry occurs, resulting in 65535.
a) When the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 1 (when the A register is 2), the HL register is 0 and the carry flag is 0.
c) When the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 3 (when the A register = 0), the HL register = 2 and the carry flag = 0.

In other words, in the above example, a) if the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins output = 0, the answer is YES. Also, b) if the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 1, the answer is NO. Also, c) if the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 3, the answer is NO.

If "Is hit difference counter < 0?" is YES, the carry flag is 1, so a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. For example, the specified calculation is the exclusive OR of the value of the A register and the value of the A register. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. Note that although the exclusive OR of the value of the A register and the value of the A register is given as an example of the specified calculation, any calculation can be used as long as it sets the carry flag to 0.

In "Set Lower Limit", if a carryover occurs due to "Stop Difference Counter < 0?", a predetermined lower limit (0) is stored in the register that stores the calculation result (in this embodiment, the HL register). In the above example, in a situation where the value stored in the stop difference counter is 2, if a) the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 0, then "Stop Difference Counter < 0?" causes the HL register to = 65535. In such a case, "Set Lower Limit" stores 0 in the HL register.

In other words, if a carryover occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, the lower limit value of 0 is stored in the HL register, making it possible to calculate the difference number of gaming media as accurately as possible. Note that even if "Lower Limit Set" is executed, the next game can be played. In other words, the process in FIG. 56 is executed even in games after "Lower Limit Set" is executed.

Note that although FIG. 56 includes a "lower limit set" process, the "lower limit set" process may not be included. Specifically, if "stop difference counter < 0?" is judged to be YES, the value stored in the stop difference counter of the previous game may be set. For example, if the value stored in the stop difference counter is 2 and the number of coins inserted and the number of coins paid out in the game are a) number of coins inserted = 3 and number of coins paid out = 0, the value stored in the stop difference counter may be set to 2 (the same value as the value of the stop difference counter of the previous game). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent abnormal values (values with lower digits) from being stored in the "stop difference counter". In addition, since there is no process equivalent to the "lower limit set", the program capacity can be reduced.

In other words, when a downgrade occurs due to "stop difference counter < 0?", the stop difference counter is not updated using the value at the time of the downgrade, so that an abnormal value does not occur as the value of the stop difference counter. In other words, even if the difference number of gaming media becomes a negative value, the stop state can be generated as accurately as possible using the difference number of gaming media. In addition, for values below the lower limit, the lower limit or the previous value is set as the value of the stop difference counter, so that too many gaming media are not awarded before the stop state is reached. In other words, it is possible to prevent the tendency for gambling to become excessively high.

In "difference number update," the complement of the result of the calculation in "stop difference number counter < 0?" (number of coins inserted - number of coins paid out) (the value stored in the A register) is calculated and stored in the A register. The calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is then added to the HL register. In other words, the calculation is "value stored in the stop difference number counter" + "absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media in the current game."

Note that the complement in "difference update" refers to the smallest number that carries beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived using the value of the 0-A register, or a single instruction for deriving a complement (NEG instruction).

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the hit difference counter (the value of the HL register) is 2,
d) When the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the A register is 249, but in the "difference update", the complement of 249, 7, is derived first. Next, 2+7 is calculated, and 9 is stored in the HL register. Note that since 2+7 does not exceed 65535 (there is no carry), the carry flag is 0.

Also, for example, in a situation where the value stored in the hit difference counter (the value of the HL register) is 65530,
d) When the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the A register will be 249, but in the "update of the bet difference counter", the complement of 249, 7, is first derived. Next, 65530+7 is calculated, and 2 is stored in the HL register. Note that 65530+7 is 65537, but since it exceeds 65535 (because there is a carry), 2 is stored in the HL register. Also, since there is a carry, the carry flag becomes 1.

In "Update hit difference counter", the value stored in the HL register is stored in the hit difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Is stop difference counter < 0?" is NO, the updated value based on the absolute value of the difference between the stop difference counter for the previous game and the number of gaming media for the current game (number of inserts - number of payouts, or number of payouts - number of inserts) is stored in the HL register, so "update stop difference counter" subtracts or adds the absolute value of the difference between the number of gaming media for the current game from the value of the stop difference counter for the previous game and stores the value in the stop difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Is the stop difference counter < 0?" is YES, the lower limit (0) is stored in the HL register, so the lower limit (0) is stored in the stop difference counter by "Update stop difference counter."

"Difference > 19000?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power was turned on (starting point 0) exceeds 19000. Specifically, it determines whether the carry flag is 1. If the carry flag is 1, it judges YES, and if the carry flag is not 1 (if the carry flag is 0), it judges NO. Note that the carry flag is 1 when a carry has occurred due to "update difference". On the other hand, if a carry has occurred due to "number inserted < number paid out?", the carry flag will temporarily become 1, but then a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0, so "Difference > 19000?" can be judged as NO.

In other words, "Difference > 19,000?" makes it possible to determine whether the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power was turned on (starting point (0)) has exceeded 19,000 depending on whether the carry flag is 1. This makes it possible to reduce the program capacity compared to directly comparing the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power was turned on (starting point (0)) with a constant (19,000).

In this way, in "Difference > 19,000?", the system determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media since the power-on start point (0) has exceeded 19,000 depending on whether the carry flag is 1, so it stores 46,535 as the initial value.

As mentioned above, this 46535 is the value obtained by subtracting the value "19000", which corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media to be stopped, from the maximum value "65535" that can be stored in a 2-byte memory area (corresponding to the size of the memory area of the stop difference counter). In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media from the starting point (0) at power-on exceeds 19000, it will exceed 65535, and the carry flag will become 1.

In addition, by storing 46535 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -46535 as the difference in the number of gaming media, with the power-on time being the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 46535, a situation in which the value of the play-stop difference counter is 16535 means that the difference in the number of gaming media, with the power-on time being the starting point (0), is -30000.

In addition, by storing 46535 as the initial value and setting the lower limit to 0, the maximum difference in the number of gaming media that a player can potentially obtain before reaching a limit can be limited to approximately 65535 (the absolute value of the difference between the initial value (46535) and the lower limit (0) (46535) + 19000).

As described above, by storing 46535 as the initial value, which is "a value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the stop difference counter" - "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media to be stopped", it is possible to reduce the program capacity for determining whether the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power is turned on has exceeded 19,000. Also, by storing 46535 as the initial value, it is possible to store up to a value equivalent to -46535 as the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power is turned on. Note that although an example is given of storing 46535 as the initial value, a value other than 46535 can be used as the initial value as long as it has the same effect.

In "Save stop flag", information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area in the RWM area of the main control board. For example, a predetermined value (e.g., "1") is stored in the stop flag storage area.

The information stored in the limit flag memory area is not initialized when the power is turned on without changing the settings, or when the power is turned off (power off processing is executed). Also, the information stored in the limit flag memory area is not initialized when the RWM is cleared at the end of the favorable period.

The information stored in the limit flag memory area can be initialized by turning on the power with a change in settings (RWM clear process with a change in settings) (information indicating that the limit conditions have been met can be cleared).

In other words, if the power is turned OFF after "Save Stop Flag" stores information indicating that the stop conditions have been met in the stop flag storage area, and then the power is turned ON (power ON without changing settings), the value stored in the stop difference counter will be the initial value (46535), but the information stored in the stop flag storage area (information indicating that the stop conditions have been met) will not be initialized.

Therefore, if the power is turned off while the information indicating that the conditions for stopping have been met is stored in the stop flag storage area, and then the power is turned on again without changing any settings, the stop difference counter will return to its initial value, but the device will still be in the stopped state.

When information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area (when the stop state is reached), it is not possible to perform a bet operation to execute the next game. For example, the operation of the bet button is disabled, or the blocker is (set to) a position that does not form a medal flow path (a position for returning inserted medals from the return port).

In addition, in gaming machines that do not automatically settle gaming media after information indicating that the limit condition has been met is stored in the limit flag storage area, the settlement switch may be made operable after information indicating that the limit condition has been met is stored in the limit flag storage area. By configuring in this way, the number of credits can be settled.

On the other hand, in gaming machines that automatically settle gaming media after information indicating that the limiting condition has been met is stored in the limiting flag storage area, the settlement switch may be made inoperable.

In addition, in "Is the hit difference counter < 0?", the absolute value of the difference in the number of game media for the current game subtracted from the value stored in the hit difference counter is subtracted to determine whether it falls below the lower limit (0). However, taking into account the case where the lower limit is not 0, it can also be expressed as "Is the hit difference counter < lower limit?" instead of "Is the hit difference counter < 0?".

For example, if the lower limit is 36,535, "stop difference counter < lower limit?" determines whether the result of subtracting the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media in the current game from the value stored in the stop difference counter falls below the lower limit (36,535). If the result of subtracting the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media in the current game from the value stored in the stop difference counter falls below the lower limit (36,535), "set lower limit" may be used to store 36,535 in the HL register.

By setting the lower limit to 36,535 in this way, the game can be capped when the maximum difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 29,000 (the absolute value of the difference between the initial value (46,535) and the lower limit (36,535) (10,000) + 19,000). In other words, compared to when the lower limit is set to 0, the number of differences in gaming media that the player can potentially obtain before the game is capped can be reduced. In other words, the risk of gambling becoming too high can be prevented.

Even if the lower limit is set to 36535, if the answer to the question "Is the hit difference counter < lower limit?" is YES, the value stored in the hit difference counter from the previous game may be used.

Note that although the lower limit has been set to 36535 in the above description, the lower limit is not limited to 36535 and can be any value.

In addition, the example described above uses the time when the power is turned on as the starting point (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media exceeds 19,000. However, the present invention can also be applied to a case where the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls is set as the base (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that base exceeds 19,000.

When the point where the player's ball output is the lowest is set as the reference (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from the reference exceeds 19,000, it is possible to set the lower limit to the same as the initial value. For example, if the initial value is 46,535, which is the "value corresponding to the size of the storage area of the stop difference counter" minus the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media to be stopped", the lower limit is also set to 46,535. By doing this, when the difference in the number of game media becomes smaller than the initial value, "stop difference counter < lower limit?" (in the figure, "stop difference counter < 0?") becomes YES, and 46,535 is stored as the lower limit. Therefore, the point where the player's ball output is the lowest can be set as the reference (0), and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from the reference exceeds 19,000.

Similarly, if the point where the player has the lowest number of balls put out is set as the reference (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that reference exceeds 19,000, the initial value is set to 0 and the lower limit is also set to 0, so that when the difference in the number of game media becomes smaller than the initial value, "Stop difference counter < lower limit?" (in the figure, "Stop difference counter < 0?") becomes YES and 0 is stored as the lower limit. Then, "Difference > 19,000?" determines whether the value stored in the stop difference counter updated by "Stop difference counter update" is less than 19,001. By configuring in this way, the point where the player has the lowest number of balls put out can be set as the reference (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that reference exceeds 19,000.

<End monitoring process (subtraction version of end difference counter)>
57, a hit/stop difference counter is provided. The explanation of the hit/stop difference counter is omitted since it is the same as described above. Note that the size of the memory area for the hit/stop difference counter is 2 bytes.

The initial value of the stop difference counter in FIG. 57 is set to "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will be in the stop state."

The "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will cause the capping state" would be 19,000 if the capping state is to occur when the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, with the time when the power is turned on being the starting point (0). Also, the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will cause the capping state is to occur when the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 10,000, with the time when the power is turned on being the starting point (0), would be 10,000.

In Figure 57, the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media at which the game is capped" is set to 19,000, and the explanation will be given assuming that the initial value is 19,000.

The initial value of the stop difference counter is stored in the stop difference counter when the power is turned on (not shown). Note that the initial value of the stop difference counter is also stored in the stop difference counter when the power is turned on with a setting change (not shown).

First, in "Replay activation symbol display?", it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has been stopped and displayed as a result of the current game. In other words, in a game in which the replay role is won by the internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, it is determined as YES. On the other hand, for example, in a game in which the push order bell role is won by the internal lottery (a game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not stopped and displayed), it is determined as NO.

In other words, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed in the current game, "Replay activation symbol display?" will answer YES, and the game end monitoring process will end.

In "Set Hit Difference Counter", the value stored in the hit difference counter is stored in a specified register. For example, when the value stored in the hit difference counter is 10,000, 10,000 is stored in the HL register. Note that the value stored in the hit difference counter at this time is the value before the hit difference counter was updated using the absolute value of the difference in the number of game media in the current game.

"Is the number of coins put in < the number of coins paid out?" determines whether the number of coins paid out is greater than the number of coins put in.

For example, as a result of this game,
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 0, the determination is NO.
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 1, the determination is NO.
c) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 3, the answer is NO.
d) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the answer is YES.

Specifically, the number of inserts minus the number of payouts is calculated, and the result of this calculation is stored in a specified register (for example, the A register). Furthermore, if there is a carry over as a result of the number of inserts minus the number of payouts (if the carry flag is 1), the result is judged as YES, and if there is no carry over (if the carry flag is 0), the result is judged as NO. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is greater than the number of payouts, the carry flag is 0 and the result is judged as YES. Furthermore, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is less than the number of payouts, the carry flag is 1 and the result is judged as NO.

To give a specific example, the result of this game:
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 0, then the A register will be 3 and the carry flag will be 0.
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 1, then the A register will be 2 and the carry flag will be 0.
c) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 3, then the A register will be 0 and the carry flag will be 0.
d) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the A register will read 249 and the carry flag will read 1.

Here, if the result of the previous game shows a symbol combination corresponding to a replay stopped (on an active line), the number of bets for the current game is automatically bet (for example, "3" is set by the automatic bet), and the result of the current game shows no symbol combination corresponding to a replay stopped (on an active line), then even if the number of bets was set by the automatic bet, it will be treated as the number of bets for the current game.

On the other hand, regarding the number of inserts and the number of payouts, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the determination of "number of inserts < number of payouts?" is not made. In other words, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the number of bets for the current game is not treated as the number of inserts. Similarly, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the number of awards (or automatic bets) for the current game is not treated as the number of payouts.

Note that in "Number of Inserts < Number of Payouts?", we subtracted the number of inserts from the number of payouts, but we could also use the number of payouts minus the number of inserts. In other words, it would be sufficient to be able to calculate the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game using the number of inserts and the number of payouts.

"Exceeding upper limit?" determines whether the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is added to the value stored in the stop difference counter and whether it exceeds the upper limit (for example, 65,535). Specifically, it determines whether there is a carry when the value stored in the A register (number of coins inserted in the current game - number of coins paid out in the current game) is added to the value stored in the HL register (value stored in the stop difference counter) or not. If there is a carry, it is determined as YES, and if there is no carry, it is determined as NO. If there is a carry, the carry flag is set to 1, and if there is no carry, the carry flag is set to 0. The result of this calculation is stored in the HL register.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the hit difference counter (the value of the HL register) is 65534,
A) When the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 0, the HL register is 1 and the carry flag is 1. Note that 65534 + 3 = 65537, but a 2-byte pair register (HL register) cannot store a value greater than 65535. Therefore, a carry occurs and the value becomes 1.
a) When the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 1, the HL register is 0 and the carry flag is 1. Note that 65534 + 2 = 65536, but a 2-byte pair register (HL register) cannot store a value greater than 65535. Therefore, a carry occurs and the value becomes 0.
c) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 3, the HL register will read 65534 and the carry flag will read 0.

In other words, in the above example, a) if the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins removed = 0, the answer is YES. Also, b) if the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 1, the answer is YES. Also, c) if the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 3, the answer is NO.

If "Exceeded upper limit?" is YES, the carry flag is 1, so a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. For example, the specified calculation is the exclusive OR of the value in the A register and the value in the A register. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. Note that although the exclusive OR of the value in the A register and the value in the A register is given as an example of the specified calculation, any calculation can be used as long as it sets the carry flag to 0.

In "Upper limit set", if a carry occurs due to "Upper limit exceeded?", a predetermined upper limit (65535) is stored in the register that stores the calculation result (in this embodiment, the HL register). Note that the upper limit in this embodiment is 65535, which is the maximum value that can be stored in 2 bytes, but the upper limit is not limited to 65535 and may be any predetermined value.

In the above example, when the value stored in the hit difference counter is 65534, if a) the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 0, the HL register is set to 2 due to "exceeding upper limit?". In such a case, 65535 is stored in the HL register due to "setting upper limit."

Similarly, in the above example, when the value stored in the hit difference counter is 65534, if (a) the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 1, the HL register is set to 0 due to "exceeding upper limit?". In such a case, 65535 is stored in the HL register by "setting upper limit."

In other words, if a carry occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, the upper limit value of 65535 is stored in the HL register, making it possible to calculate the difference in the number of gaming media as accurately as possible. Note that even if "Upper limit set" is executed, the next game can be played. In other words, the process in FIG. 57 is executed even in games after "Upper limit set" is executed.

Note that although FIG. 57 includes a process for "setting the upper limit", the process for "setting the upper limit" may not be included. Specifically, if "exceeds the upper limit?" is judged to be YES, the value stored in the stop difference counter for the previous game may be set. For example, if the value stored in the stop difference counter is 65534 and the number of coins inserted and the number of coins paid out for the game are a) number of coins inserted = 3 and number of coins paid out = 0, the value stored in the stop difference counter may be set to 65534 (the same value as the value of the stop difference counter for the previous game). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent abnormal values (values that have been carried over) from being stored in the "stop difference counter". In addition, since there is no process equivalent to "setting the upper limit", the program capacity can be reduced.

In other words, when a carry occurs due to "Exceeding upper limit?", the value at the time the carry occurred is not used to update the stop difference counter, thereby preventing abnormal values from being entered as the value of the stop difference counter. In other words, even if the difference number of gaming media becomes a negative value, the stop state can be generated as accurately as possible using the difference number of gaming media.

In addition, for values that exceed the upper limit, the upper limit or the previous value is set as the value of the stop difference counter, so that it is not possible to award a difference that greatly exceeds the value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media until the stop state is reached (for example, 19,000). Specifically, by storing 19,000 as the initial value and setting the upper limit to 65,535, the maximum difference in the number of gaming media that a player can potentially obtain before the stop state is reached can be limited to approximately 65,535 (the absolute value of the difference between the initial value (19,000) and the upper limit value (65,535) (46,535) + 19,000). In other words, it is possible to prevent the tendency for gambling to become excessively high.

In "Difference Update", the complement of the result of the calculation in "Exceeding Upper Limit?" (Number of Inserts - Number of Payouts) (the value stored in the A register) is calculated and stored in the A register. The calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is then subtracted from the HL register. In other words, the calculation is "Value stored in the Stop Difference Counter" - "Value of the Difference in the Number of Game Media for the Current Game".

Note that the complement in "difference update" refers to the smallest number that carries beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived using the value of the 0-A register, or a single instruction for deriving a complement (NEG instruction).

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the hit difference counter (the value of the HL register) is 65534,
d) When the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the A register will be 249, but in the "difference update", the complement of 249, 7, is first derived. Next, 65534-7 is calculated, and 65527 is stored in the HL register. Note that since the result of 65534-7 is not less than 0 (there is no borrowing), the carry flag is 0.

Also, for example, in a situation where the value stored in the hit difference counter (the value of the HL register) is 2,
d) When the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the A register will be 249, but in the "update of the bet difference counter", the complement of 249, 7, is first derived. Next, 2-7 is calculated, and 65531 is stored in the HL register. Note that 2-7 is -5, but since this is less than 0 (because there is a borrow), 65531 is stored in the HL register. Also, because there is a borrow, the carry flag becomes 1.

In "Update hit difference counter", the value stored in the HL register is stored in the hit difference counter.

For example, if "Upper limit exceeded?" is NO, the value updated by the difference between the value of the stop difference counter from the previous game and the number of gaming media in the current game (number of inserts - number of payouts, or number of payouts - number of inserts) is stored in the HL register, so "update stop difference counter" stores the value updated (subtracted or added) by the absolute value of the difference between the value of the stop difference counter from the previous game and the number of gaming media in the current game in the stop difference counter.

For example, if "Exceeded upper limit?" is answered with YES, the upper limit (65535) is stored in the HL register, so "Update stop difference counter" stores the upper limit (65535) in the stop difference counter.

"Difference > 19000?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power was turned on (starting point 0) exceeds 19000. Specifically, it determines whether the carry flag is 1. If the carry flag is 1, it judges YES, and if the carry flag is not 1 (if the carry flag is 0), it judges NO. Note that the carry flag is 1 when a carry has been downgraded due to "difference update". On the other hand, if a carry has been upgraded due to "number inserted < number paid out?", the carry flag will temporarily become 1, but then a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0, so "Difference > 19000?" can be judged as NO.

In other words, "Difference > 19,000?" makes it possible to determine whether the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power was turned on (starting point (0)) has exceeded 19,000 depending on whether the carry flag is 1. This makes it possible to reduce the program capacity compared to directly comparing the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power was turned on (starting point (0)) with a constant (19,000).

In this way, "Difference > 19,000?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media since the power-on starting point (0) has exceeded 19,000 depending on whether the carry flag is 1, so 19,000 is stored as the initial value.

As mentioned above, this 19000 is the value "19000" that corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media at which the game is capped. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power is turned on (starting point (0)) exceeds 19000, it will fall below 0, and the carry flag will become 1.

In addition, by storing 19,000 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -46,535 as the difference in the number of gaming media from the start point (0) when the power is turned on. For example, when the initial value is 19,000, a situation in which the value of the play-stop difference counter is 49,000 means that the difference in the number of gaming media from the start point (0) when the power is turned on is -30,000.

As described above, by storing 19,000 as the initial value, which is "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media at which the limit is reached," it is possible to reduce the program capacity required to determine whether the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power is turned on has exceeded 19,000. Also, by storing 19,000 as the initial value, it is possible to store values up to the equivalent of -46,535 as the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power is turned on. Note that although an example is given of storing 19,000 as the initial value, any value other than 19,000 can be used as the initial value as long as it has the same effect.

In "Save stop flag", information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area in the RWM area of the main control board. For example, a specified value is stored in the stop flag storage area.

The information stored in the limit flag memory area is not initialized when the power is turned on without changing the settings, or when the power is turned off (power off processing is executed). Also, the information stored in the limit flag memory area is not initialized when the RWM is cleared at the end of the favorable period.

The information stored in the limit flag memory area can be initialized by turning on the power with a change in settings (RWM clear process with a change in settings) (information indicating that the limit conditions have been met can be cleared).

In other words, if the power is turned OFF after "Save Stop Flag" stores information indicating that the stop conditions have been met in the stop flag storage area, and then the power is turned ON (power ON without changing settings), the value stored in the stop difference counter will be the initial value (19000), but the information stored in the stop flag storage area (information indicating that the stop conditions have been met) will not be initialized.

Therefore, if the power is turned off while the information indicating that the conditions for stopping have been met is stored in the stop flag storage area, and then the power is turned on again without changing any settings, the stop difference counter will return to its initial value, but the device will still be in the stopped state.

When information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area (when the stop state is reached), it is not possible to perform a bet operation to execute the next game. For example, the operation of the bet button is disabled, or the blocker is (set to) a position that does not form a medal flow path (a position for returning inserted medals from the return port).

In addition, in gaming machines that do not automatically settle gaming media after information indicating that the limit condition has been met is stored in the limit flag storage area, the settlement switch may be made operable after information indicating that the limit condition has been met is stored in the limit flag storage area. By configuring in this way, the number of credits can be settled.

On the other hand, in gaming machines that automatically settle gaming media after information indicating that the limiting condition has been met is stored in the limiting flag storage area, the settlement switch may be made inoperable.

Note that, although 65,535 has been used as an example of the upper limit, if the upper limit is set to 29,000, "Exceeding Upper Limit?" determines whether the value stored in the stop difference counter plus the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media in the current game exceeds the upper limit (29,000). If the value stored in the stop difference counter plus the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media in the current game exceeds the upper limit (29,000), "Set Upper Limit" may be used to store 29,000 in the HL register.

By setting the upper limit at 29,000 in this way, the game can be stopped when the maximum difference in the number of game media exceeds 29,000 (the absolute value of the difference between the initial value (19,000) and the upper limit (29,000) (10,000) + 19,000). In other words, compared to when the upper limit is set to 65,535, the number of game media that the player can potentially obtain before the game is stopped can be reduced. In other words, the risk of gambling becoming too high can be prevented.

Even if the upper limit is set to 29,000, if the answer to "Exceeded upper limit?" is YES, the value stored in the hit difference counter from the previous game may be used.

Note that although the upper limit has been set to 29,000 in the above description, the upper limit is not limited to 29,000 and can be any value.

In addition, the example described above uses the time when the power is turned on as the starting point (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media exceeds 19,000. However, the present invention can also be applied to a case where the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls is set as the base (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that base exceeds 19,000.

When the point where the player has put out the lowest number of balls is set as the reference (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that reference exceeds 19,000, it is possible to set the upper limit to the same as the initial value. For example, if the initial value is 19,000, which is the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media that will cause the game to be stopped," the upper limit will also be set to 19,000. By doing this, when the difference in the number of game media becomes smaller than the initial value, "Upper limit exceeded?" will become YES, and 19,000 will be stored as the upper limit. Therefore, the point where the player has put out the lowest number of balls can be set as the reference (0), and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that reference exceeds 19,000.

As described above, by performing the processing shown in Figures 55, 56, and 57, an example has been shown in which, starting from the time the power is turned on (0), when the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, information (a predetermined value) indicating that the capping condition has been met can be stored in the capping flag memory area (the capping process can be executed).

In addition, by performing the processing shown in Figures 56 and 57, the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed is set as the reference (0), and when the difference in the number of game media from that reference exceeds 19,000, information indicating that the stop condition has been met (a predetermined value) can be stored in the stop flag memory area (the stop processing can be executed) as an example.

Note that the control processes shown in Figures 55, 56, and 57 are merely examples, and any order of control processes may be used as long as the same effect is achieved, even if the order of control processes is different.

Similarly, the control processes shown in Figures 55, 56, and 57 are just examples, and even if the control processes involve different additions and subtractions (for example, when addition and subtraction are reversed), any calculation process may be used as long as it produces a similar effect. In other words, "adding" and "subtracting" can be expressed as "updating."

The capping monitoring process shown in Figures 55, 56, and 57 is also executed in the bonus game state. In other words, even in the middle of the bonus game state (play before the conditions for terminating the bonus game state are met), when the number of game media exceeds 19,000, starting from the time the power is turned on (0), information indicating that the capping condition has been met (a predetermined value) is stored in the capping flag storage area, so that the capping state is reached even in the middle of the bonus game state.

Similarly, the limit monitoring process shown in Figures 56 and 57 uses the point where the player's ball output is at its lowest as the reference (0) even in the middle of a bonus game state (play before the conditions for terminating the bonus game state are met), and when the number of game media exceeds 19,000, stores information (predetermined value) indicating that the limit condition has been met in the limit flag memory area, so that the limit state is reached even in the middle of a bonus game state.

By configuring it in this way, even in a bonus game state, the game can be stopped when the number of game media exceeds 19,000, starting from the time the power is turned on (0), providing a gaming machine that does not excessively increase gambling tendency.

However, stopping the bonus game in the middle of the game can be unpleasant for the player.

Therefore, in the middle of a bonus game state (play before the conditions for terminating the bonus game state are met), even if the number of game media exceeds 19,000, starting from the time the power is turned on (0), the game is not immediately put into a halt state. Instead, when the conditions for terminating the bonus game state are met, information indicating that the halt condition has been met (a predetermined value) is stored in the halt flag memory area, and an example of putting the game into a halt state is described below.

<End-of-game monitoring process (subtraction version of end-of-game difference counter, end-of-game state after bonus game state ends due to temporary end-of-game flag)>
Fig. 58 is a modified example of Fig. 57. In Fig. 58, a temporary flag storage area is provided.

The tentative limit flag memory area is one of the RWM areas of the main control board. Specifically, it is a memory area that stores information (for example, a predetermined value such as "1") indicating that the tentative limit condition is met when the number of game media exceeds 19,000, starting from the time the power is turned on (0).

The information stored in the temporary limit flag memory area is not initialized by simply turning the power on and off. Also, the information stored in the temporary limit flag memory area is not initialized by clearing the RWM at the end of the favorable period.

In addition, the information stored in the tentative limit flag memory area can be initialized (e.g., to "0") by powering on with a setting change (RWM clear process with setting change) (information indicating that the tentative limit condition has been met can be cleared).

In addition, if a game in which information indicating that the provisional limit condition is satisfied is stored in the provisional limit flag storage area is in a bonus game state, information indicating that the limit condition is satisfied is not stored in the provisional limit flag storage area. In other words, if a game in which information indicating that the provisional limit condition is satisfied is stored in the provisional limit flag storage area is in a bonus game state, the game will not be in a limit state.

If a game in which information indicating that the provisional limiting condition is satisfied is stored in the provisional limiting flag storage area is in a bonus game state, information indicating that the limiting condition is satisfied is stored in the provisional limiting flag storage area in a game in which the bonus game state has ended. In other words, if a game in which information indicating that the provisional limiting condition is satisfied is stored in the provisional limiting flag storage area is in a bonus game state, the game will enter a limiting state after the game in which the bonus game state has ended has ended.

The following explanation will focus on the differences from Figure 57.

First, "Temporary limit flag ON?" determines whether information indicating that the provisional limit condition is met is stored in the temporary limit flag storage area.

If the answer to "Temporary limit flag ON?" is YES, the process determines whether the player is in bonus game mode.

If the answer to "Is the temporary stop flag ON?" is NO, a check is made to see if "Replay activation symbol is displayed?"

The "Replay activation symbol display?" is the same as the "Replay activation symbol display?" in Figure 57, so the explanation will be omitted.

The "stop difference counter set" is the same as the "stop difference counter set" in Figure 57, so the explanation is omitted.

Since "Number of coins inserted < number of coins paid out?" is the same as "Number of coins inserted < number of coins paid out?" in Figure 57, the explanation will be omitted.

"Upper limit exceeded?" is the same as "Upper limit exceeded?" in Figure 57, so the explanation is omitted.

The "Upper limit set" is the same as the "Upper limit set" in Figure 57, so the explanation is omitted.

Since "Difference update" is the same as "Difference update" in Figure 57, the explanation is omitted.

The "update of the difference between the number of hits and the number of stops counter" is the same as the "update of the difference between the number of hits and the number of stops counter" in Figure 57, so the explanation is omitted.

Since "Difference > 19000?" is the same as "Difference > 19000?" in Figure 57, the explanation is omitted.

In "save tentative limit flag", information indicating that the tentative limit condition is met is stored in the tentative limit flag storage area. For example, the information indicating that the tentative limit condition is met corresponds to numerical information such as a predetermined value (e.g., "1").

"Bonus game state?" determines whether the next game will be a bonus game state game. Specifically, it checks the bonus activation flag and determines whether Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB is activated.

Here, the bonus activation flag is one of the RWM areas of the main control board. For example, in a game where a symbol combination corresponding to a type 1 BB is stopped and displayed, the bit corresponding to the type 1 BB in the bonus activation flag turns on (1), and when the type 1 BB is completed, it changes from on to off (0). Similarly, in a game where a symbol combination corresponding to a type 2 BB is stopped and displayed, the bit corresponding to the type 2 BB in the bonus activation flag turns on (1), and when the type 2 BB is completed, it changes from on to off (0). Similarly, in a game where a symbol combination corresponding to an RB is stopped and displayed, the bit corresponding to the RB in the bonus activation flag turns on (1), and when the RB is completed, it changes from on to off (0).

Note that the on/off status of the bonus activation flag is stored in a process that occurs before the limit monitoring process.

For example, even if the previous game was in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB), if the current game ends in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB), the "Bonus game state?" will be judged as NO.

For example, if the previous game was in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB) and the current game did not end in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB), the answer to "Bonus game state?" will be YES.

For example, if the previous game was not in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB) (it was in a non-bonus game state), and the current game is in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB), then "Bonus game state?" will be answered with YES.

"Save stop flag" is the same as "Save stop flag" in Figure 57, so the explanation will be omitted.

As described above, by providing a temporary cap flag storage area, even if the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state, starting from the time when the power is turned on (0), information indicating that the cap condition is met is not stored in the cap flag area until the bonus ends. In other words, if the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state, starting from the time when the power is turned on (0), the cap state will occur after the game when the bonus game state ends.

In addition, after information indicating that the provisional stop condition is met is stored in the provisional stop flag storage area, the stop difference counter is not updated. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to avoid unnecessary processing.

However, the stop difference counter may be updated even after information indicating that the stop condition is met is stored in the stop flag storage area. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to standardize the processing.

In addition, after information indicating that the provisional limit condition is met is stored in the provisional limit flag storage area, no determination is made as to whether the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000. By configuring in this way, it is possible to avoid unnecessary processing.

As is also clear from FIG. 58, after information indicating that the provisional limit condition is met is stored in the provisional limit flag storage area, even if the difference in the number of gaming media falls below 19,000, the information stored in the provisional limit flag storage area is not updated (the information indicating that the provisional limit condition is met is not cleared). By configuring in this manner, if the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000 even once during the bonus game state, the game can be put into a limit state even if the difference in the number of gaming media is below 19,000 in the game in which the bonus game state ends.

<Relationship between the hours during which a gaming facility can operate and the difference in the number of gaming media until the facility is closed>
A gaming machine having a function of reaching a limiting state (also called a complete function) may be designed so that the following formula holds true.

(Difference in number of gaming media until the game reaches a dead end) / (Expected increase in gaming media per game in the most favorable game state for the player) x Minimum game time (s) / 3600 < Opening hours of an amusement establishment as stipulated by the Entertainment and Amusement Act (h)

The minimum game time (s) in the above formula is the minimum game time mentioned above, and is equivalent to 4.1 seconds. Specifically, it is the shortest time from the start of reel rotation in a certain game to the start of reel rotation in the game following that game (next game). Also, 3600 is a constant for converting seconds to hours (1 hour = 60 minutes x 60 seconds = 3600 seconds). The Entertainment and Amusement Act is a law that regulates the entertainment and amusement business and regulates its operations.

The expected increase in gaming media per game in the most advantageous gaming state for the player is generally referred to as the net increase (net increase in number of coins) per game in the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

A simple example will be used to explain the expected increase in gaming media per game in the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

For example, the most advantageous game state is the AT state (it is assumed that in the AT state, playing with a 3-coin bet is the most advantageous). Also, a 10-coin role (small role) is won by the internal lottery with a probability of 3/4, and a symbol combination corresponding to the 10-coin role can be displayed as a stop symbol. Also, a loss is determined by the internal lottery with a probability of 1/4, and a symbol combination corresponding to a loss (0 coins) is displayed as a stop symbol. In this AT state, in a game in which a small role is won by the internal lottery, the player operates the stop switch in an advantageous manner by following the advantageous operation manner notified. In other words, when a 10-coin role (small role) is won by the internal lottery, a symbol combination corresponding to the 10-coin role can be displayed as a stop symbol with a probability of 100%.

In this case, the expected increase per game in the most advantageous game state for the player is (3/4 x 10 + 1/4 x 0)/3 = 2.5. Note that in this example, games that have won a replay are not taken into consideration, but for games that have won a replay through an internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is displayed, the calculation will be done with 0 coins bet and 0 coins out.

In addition, in a gaming machine that has multiple gaming states such as bonus gaming state A, bonus gaming state B, and AT state, the gaming state that has the largest expected increase in gaming media per game among these multiple gaming states is considered to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

For example, when the expected increase in gaming media per play in bonus gaming state A is 3.5, the expected increase in gaming media per play in bonus gaming state B is 2.0, and the expected increase in gaming media per play in the AT state is 2.5, the most advantageous gaming state for the player is bonus gaming state A.

Note that the expected increase in gaming media per game in each of the above-mentioned game states is merely an example, and may be other numerical values.

The Entertainment and Amusement Business Act also stipulates that the hours (hours) that an amusement establishment may operate are 18 hours. Specifically, Article 13 of the Act states, "Entertainment and Amusement Business Operators may not operate their business late at night (meaning the hours between midnight and 6:00 a.m.; the same applies below)." In other words, the hours that an amusement establishment may operate are 18 hours a day, excluding late night hours.

The difference in the number of gaming media until the limit is reached is set at 19,000.

The conditions for reaching the stop state can be either a) when the difference in the number of game media from the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed after power-on exceeds 19,000, using the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed as the base (0), or b) when the difference in the number of game media from the point at which the power-on is used as the starting point (0) exceeds 19,000.

Therefore, when applying the numerical values to the above formula, we get 19,000/(expected increase in gaming media per game in the most advantageous gaming state for the player) x 4.1/3,600 < 18.

In other words, by setting the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit is reached to 19,000, if the expected increase in the number of gaming media per game in the most advantageous game state for the player is greater than approximately 0.83, the limit will be reached before the game establishment closes, even if the most advantageous game state for the player begins immediately after the game establishment opens and continues (when the most advantageous game state for the player is played continuously).

In other words, even if a gaming machine designed for a significantly large expected increase in gaming media per play in the most advantageous gaming state (for example, a value greater than 2.5) is installed in an amusement facility, by setting the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit is reached to 19,000, the limit can be reached within the business hours of the gaming facility even if the most advantageous gaming state for the player continues (if the most advantageous gaming state for the player is played continuously), so that a gaming machine that does not have a significantly high gambling nature can be provided.

Incidentally, since the shortest business hours set by prefectures are 13 hours, the right-hand side of the above formula, 18 (h), can be replaced with 13 (h) to make the above formula valid.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the gambling element is not significantly higher when the right-hand side of the above formula is set to 13(h) than when the right-hand side of the above formula is set to 18(h).

<Advantageous Zone Difference Counter and Stoppage Difference Counter>
We will explain again the characteristics (main differences) of the advantageous zone difference counter and the stop difference counter.

＜＜Advantageous Zone Difference Counter＞＞
(1) Overview This is a storage area for storing the difference in the number of game media related to the end (forced end) of a favorable zone. For example, when the difference in the number of game media in a favorable zone exceeds 2,400, the favorable zone is controlled to end.
(2) When counting starts, the difference in the number of game media is calculated from the game in which the advantageous zone starts, and the updating of the advantageous zone difference number counter starts. In other words, in the case where the first game after the power is turned on is in the normal zone, the counting of the advantageous zone difference number counter does not start based on the difference in the number of game media in the game in the normal zone.

In addition, if the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous zone are met during a certain game in the normal zone, it is acceptable to configure the advantageous zone difference counter to be set to an initial value (e.g., 46535) during that certain game.

(3) At the end of counting: The counting ends at the game where the advantageous zone ends. In other words, the updating of the advantageous zone difference number counter starts from the game where the advantageous zone starts, and the advantageous zone difference number counter is updated thereafter until the game where the advantageous zone ends. Note that the advantageous zone difference number counter does not need to be updated for the game where the advantageous zone ends, or the advantageous zone difference number counter may be updated.

(4) Example of initializing favorable zone difference counter a) The value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is initialized (for example, 0 is stored) by the RWM clear process associated with the end of the favorable zone.
(i) When the power is turned on with a setting change (the RWM clear process associated with the setting change mode entered by turning on the power switch while the setting key switch is on), the value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is initialized (for example, 0 is stored).

The value stored in the favorable zone difference counter by initializing the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter (initialized value) and the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter when the start condition of the favorable zone is satisfied (initial value) may be configured to be different values.

For example, an example of the value (initialized value) stored in the favorable zone difference counter by initializing the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is "0."

In addition, examples of the value (initial value) that is stored in the advantageous zone difference counter when the advantageous zone start condition is met include "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone defined as the advantageous zone end condition," or "a value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the advantageous zone difference counter" - "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone defined as the advantageous zone end condition."

Here, an example of "the value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone defined as the end condition of the advantageous zone" is "2400", and an example of "the value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the advantageous zone difference counter" - "the value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone defined as the end condition of the advantageous zone" is "63135". Note that these numerical values are merely examples and are not limited to these.

In addition, the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter by initializing the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter (initialized value) may be configured to be the value (initial value) stored in the favorable zone difference counter when the favorable zone count start condition is satisfied.

Specifically, by initializing the value stored in the advantageous zone difference number counter, the value stored in the advantageous zone difference number counter (initialized value) may be "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone defined as the end condition of the advantageous zone", or "a value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the advantageous zone difference number counter" - "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone defined as the end condition of the advantageous zone".

(5) Examples in which the value of the favorable zone difference counter is maintained: a) Even if a specified error (a recoverable error) occurs and the reset switch is operated to clear the specified error, the favorable zone difference counter is not reset to its initial value (the specified error becomes recoverable).

For example, if a specified error occurs when the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is 100, and the specified error is cleared by operating the reset switch, the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter will remain at 100. In other words, the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter will not be updated. In this case, the favorable zone will also be maintained.

a) If power is cut off (also called power cut processing) is performed, and then power is restored by turning the power on without changing any settings (turning the power switch on with the setting key switch off), the difference counter for the favorable zone will not be reset to its initial value.

For example, if the power switch is turned off and power-off processing is executed when the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is 100, and then the power is restored by turning the power on without changing any settings, the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter will remain at 100. In other words, the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is not updated. In this case, the favorable zone is also maintained.

The above-mentioned (4) example of initializing the favorable zone difference number counter and (5) example of maintaining the value of the favorable zone difference number counter are just examples. For example, some or all of the examples may be adopted. In addition, the value stored in the favorable zone difference number counter may be reset to an initial value or the value of the favorable zone difference number counter may be maintained due to the occurrence of another event.
<< Hit and Kill Difference Counter >>
(1) Overview This is a storage area for storing the difference in the number of game media related to the limit. For example, when the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000, the device controls to enter the limit state (also called the complete state).

In this embodiment, the difference in the number of game media related to the limit refers to either (a) or (b) below.
(a) The current difference in game media from when the power was turned on (0) (b) The current difference in game media from the point where the player has the lowest number of balls after the power was turned on (0) (2) When counting starts The difference in game media is calculated from the first game after the power is turned on (power on without setting change and power on with setting change), and the update of the stop difference counter begins. In other words, counting begins whether the first game after the power is turned on is a game in the normal zone or a game in the advantageous zone.

The count of the difference in the number of gaming media that is capped is configured so that the gaming machine is provided with a specific switch (a so-called cap switch) and the gaming establishment cannot choose whether to count or not by operating the specific switch (different from conventional cap functions). In other words, when playing on the same type of gaming machine (same model of gaming machine), there are cases where the cap is reached and cases where it is not reached, depending on the gaming establishment. In other words, when the difference in the number of gaming media that would result in the cap is exceeded, the cap is reached across the board.

(3) At the end of the count The count ends when the game meets the stop condition. In other words, the stop difference counter starts to be updated from the game when the power is turned on, and is then updated until the stop condition is met. Note that the stop difference counter may not be updated for a game that meets the stop condition, or may be updated.

(4) Example of initializing the strike-stop difference counter A) When a power-off process is executed and then power is restored by turning on the power with a setting change (turning on the power switch with the setting key switch on), the value stored in the strike-stop difference counter is initialized (for example, storing 0).

For example, if the value stored in the hit/stop difference counter is 200, the power switch is turned off to perform a power-off process, and then the power is restored by turning the power on with a setting change, the value stored in the hit/stop difference counter will become 0 (the value after initialization).

a) After executing the power-off process, if the power is restored by turning the power on without changing the settings (turning the power switch on with the setting key switch off), the value stored in the strike-off difference counter is initialized (for example, 0 is stored).

For example, if the value stored in the hit/stop difference counter is 200, the power switch is turned off to perform the power-off process, and then the power is restored by turning the power on without changing any settings, the value stored in the hit/stop difference counter will be 0 (the value after initialization).

In addition, when an event occurs that initializes the hit difference counter, the value stored in the hit difference counter may be initialized so that the value stored in the hit difference counter becomes the initial value of the hit difference counter.

By configuring it in this way, the process of initializing the value stored in the strike difference counter can be the same as the process of storing (setting) an initial value in the strike difference counter. Therefore, there is no need to provide two processes, one for initializing the value stored in the strike difference counter and one for storing (setting) an initial value in the strike difference counter, and the program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, when the value stored in the hit difference counter by initializing the value stored in the hit difference counter and the value for storing (setting) the initial value in the hit difference counter are the same or different, two processes may be provided: a process for initializing the value stored in the hit difference counter and a process for storing (setting) the initial value in the hit difference counter.

For example, when the value stored in the hit difference counter is initialized, if the value stored in the hit difference counter is 0, the hit difference counter may then be configured to store 0 by a process of storing (setting) an initial value.

In addition, when the value stored in the hit difference counter is initialized, when the value stored in the hit difference counter is 0, the hit difference counter may then be configured to store (set) an initial value to 19,000.

(5) Example in which the value of the hit/stop difference counter is maintained A) Even if a specified error (a recoverable error) occurs and the reset switch is operated to clear the specified error, the hit/stop difference counter is not reset to its initial value (the specified error becomes recoverable).

For example, if a specific error occurs when the value stored in the hit and stop difference counter is 200, and the specific error is cleared by operating the reset switch, the value stored in the hit and stop difference counter will remain at 200. In other words, the value stored in the hit and stop difference counter will not be updated.

a) The hit difference counter is not reset to its initial value by the RWM clear process at the end of the favorable period. In other words, the hit difference counter is not subject to RWM clearing at the end of the favorable period.

For example, even if the favorable period ends when the value stored in the hit difference counter is 200 and the RWM is cleared in response to the end of the favorable period, the value stored in the hit difference counter after the RWM is cleared in response to the end of the favorable period will remain at 200. In other words, the value stored in the hit difference counter will not be updated.

The above-mentioned (4) example of initializing the hit difference counter and (5) example of maintaining the value of the hit difference counter are just examples. For example, some or all of the examples may be adopted. In addition, the value stored in the hit difference counter may be reset to its initial value or the value of the hit difference counter may be maintained when another event occurs.

<Notification status related to cut-off>
The notification states relating to the limit include a first state, a second state, and a third state. The notification states relating to the limit are states controlled by the sub-control means.

The first state is the state before the capping condition is met. It also refers to a state in which the difference between the number of game media related to the capping and the number of game media required to reach the capping state is greater than a specific value (e.g., 100).

For example, if the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit is reached is 19,000 and the specific value is 100, then the situation in which the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is between 0 and less than 18,900 corresponds to the first state. In this embodiment, the first state is also referred to as the "normal state," the "pre-operation notice state," and the "pre-limit operation notice state."

The second state is the state before the capping condition is met. It also refers to a state in which the difference between the number of gaming media required to cap and the number of gaming media required to reach the capping state is equal to or less than a specific value.

For example, if the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit is reached is 19,000 and the specific value is 100, the second state corresponds to a situation in which the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is between 18,900 and 19,000. In this embodiment, the second state is also referred to as the "operation notice state," the "operation notice notification state," and the "limit operation notice notification state."

The third state is a state in which the conditions for stopping are met. Specifically, it refers to a state in which the conditions for stopping are met and stopping processing (stopping state) is being executed.

For example, if the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit is reached is 19,000, the situation in which the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 (the limit is reached) corresponds to the third state. In this embodiment, the third state is also referred to as the "operation state," the "operation notification state," and the "limit operation notification state."

In other words, the transition of the notification state related to the stoppage from when the power is turned on until the stoppage state is reached is the first state followed by the second state, and then the second state followed by the third state.

Note that the transition of the notification state related to the cutoff does not necessarily go from the first state to the second state to the third state. Details will be described later, but it may go, for example, from the first state to the second state to the first state to the second state to the third state.

<Notification mode according to notification state related to limit>
Next, the notification mode according to the notification state related to the limit will be described with reference to the drawings.

<<Notification status related to cutoff: normal state>>
Fig. 75 is a diagram showing an example of the effects when the notification state related to the limit is the "normal state". Below, the effects (images) displayed on the display device 32 will be described in the order of Fig. 75(1), Fig. 75(2), and Fig. 75(3).

<<<Fig. 75 (1)>>>
This is an example of a presentation in which the notification state relating to the end of the game is the "normal state" and the game is in progress (in this example, during the AT state).

PAYOUT and CREDIT are displayed on the bottom left side of the display device 32. PAYOUT displays the number of gaming media obtained as a result of one game (number of gaming media awarded). In Figure 75 (1), "00" is displayed because it shows the state before one game has ended (for example, when all reels have spun).

CREDIT also displays the current number of credits. Figure 75 (1) shows an example in which the player is playing with 50 credits, so "50" is displayed.

The letters Total and G are displayed in the upper right corner of the display device 32. Total is displayed according to the number of game media acquired in the AT state. Figure 75 (1) shows an example in which the number of game media acquired in the AT state is 2000, so "Total 2000" is displayed.

G also displays the number of games played in the AT state. Figure 75 (1) shows an example in which the number of games played in the AT state is 1000 games, so "1000G" is displayed.

An image that enhances the enjoyment of the game, including a character image, is displayed in the center of the display device 32. In the AT state, the center of the display device 32 may display an image indicating an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (not shown).

When the notification state regarding the limit is "normal state" and the power is turned off during play (in this example, during AT state), and then the power is turned on with the setting key switch off (power-on without changing settings), PAYOUT, CREDIT, Total, and G are configured to display the same information as was displayed when the power was turned off.

In addition, an example has been shown in which the notification state regarding the limit is the "normal state" and information on PAYOUT, CREDIT, Total, and G is displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state), but these do not necessarily have to be displayed.

For example, the information on Total and G may be displayed, but the information on PAYOUT and CREDIT may not be displayed. Also, while G was displayed according to the number of plays performed in the AT state, G may be displayed according to the number of plays remaining in the AT state. In this way, the notification state related to the limit is the "normal state", and the information displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) can be any information.

As described above, when the notification state related to the stoppage is the "normal state" and the game is in progress (in this example, in the AT state), no advance notification is given until the stoppage condition is met, and no notification is given indicating that the game is in a stoppage state. Note that although the AT state is given as an example, no advance notification is given until the stoppage condition is met, and no notification is given indicating that the game is in a stoppage state, regardless of the game state (in a bonus game state or in a normal game state (not in an AT, not in a bonus game state, not inside a bonus, inside a bonus)).

<<<Fig. 75 (2)>>>
This is an example of a presentation (also called a demo presentation or demo screen) during game standby when the notification state related to the end of the game is the "normal state." For example, the demo presentation is executed when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed without a new bet being made from a certain timing after the end of the game (after all reels have stopped or after a payout process).

In addition, when in a specific game state such as an AT state or a bonus game state, the demo effect may not be executed even if a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed without a new bet being made from a certain timing after the end of the game (after all reels have stopped or after a payout process).

In addition, when in menu mode (when a menu image is displayed), the demo effect may not be executed even if a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed without a new bet being made from a certain point after the end of the game (after all reels have stopped or after a payout process has been performed).

In other words, even if the menu mode is entered before a predetermined time has elapsed from a certain point after the end of a game (for example, 30 seconds after the certain point), and the menu screen remains displayed, the demo performance does not have to be executed even if the predetermined time has elapsed from a certain point after the end of a game.

When the menu mode is entered, the demo performance may be executed when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since a certain timing when the menu mode was started, or when a specific time (e.g., 120 seconds) different from the predetermined time has elapsed since a certain timing when the menu mode was started.

In addition, when the mode is switched to menu mode (when the menu image is displayed), the demo performance may not be executed.

As an example of a demo presentation, I remember a case where a character image is displayed, but corporate logo images and warning images (images to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game) are displayed in sequence.

In addition to the demo effects described above, an image indicating that the machine is equipped with a limit function may also be displayed as a demo effect. For example, an image such as "This machine is equipped with a limit function" or "This machine is equipped with a complete function" may be displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) as an image indicating that the machine is equipped with a limit function.

In this way, when an image indicating that a machine is equipped with a stop-play function is displayed as a demo effect, the player can be made aware in advance that the machine is equipped with a stop-play function. In other words, the player can select a machine to play on based on whether or not the machine is equipped with a stop-play function. Furthermore, even if a machine reaches a stop-play state, it is possible to prevent trouble between the player and the gaming facility (for example, a complaint from the player when a stop-play state occurs in the middle of an AT).

In addition, in cases where a warning image (an image to prevent players from becoming addicted to playing) and an image indicating that the game has a limit function are displayed as demo effects, if the display period of the warning image (an image to prevent players from becoming addicted to playing) is T1 and the display period of the image indicating that the game has a limit function is T2, T1 may be set to be equal to or less than T2. By configuring the device in this way, the message that the game has a limit function can be more strongly emphasized.

Also, if the display period of the warning image (an image to prevent addiction to gaming) is T1 and the display period of the image indicating that the game-stopping function is installed is T2, T1 > T2 may be set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to further emphasize the message that reduces dependency (addiction) on the gaming machine.

As another example of a form of displaying an image indicating that the machine is equipped with a limit function as a demo effect, it may be configured so that while a character image is displayed as a demo effect, or a company logo image or a warning image (an image to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game) is displayed in sequence, images such as "This machine is equipped with a limit function" or "This machine is equipped with a complete function" are also displayed at the same time.

As described above, when the notification state related to the limit is "normal state" and the demo performance is in progress, no advance notification is given until the limit condition is met, and no notification indicating that the limit state is in progress is given. However, the game may be configured to display an image indicating that the limit function is installed during the demo performance.

<<<Fig. 75 (3)>>>
This is an example of a menu image that is displayed when the notification state regarding the limit is the "normal state" and the sub-switch 20 is operated during game standby (also referred to as "menu mode").

The menu image displays the items the player can select and information about the player's game history.

The seven items that the player can select by operating a specific switch (for example, the sub-cross key switch 21) are "Member registration", "Password entry", "Quick my slot", "QR display at end", "View interim record", "Clear data", and "Volume adjustment".

For example, when the "volume adjustment" item is selected by operating a specific switch, and a specific switch (e.g., sub-switch 20) is operated, an image that allows volume adjustment is displayed.

For example, by operating a specific switch to select the "Member Registration" option, and then operating a specific switch, a two-dimensional code containing the server's URL information is displayed. (By reading the two-dimensional code with a mobile device or the like, it is possible to access the server managed by the manufacturer of the gaming machine.)

For example, by operating a specific switch to select the "Password Entry" option and then operating a specific switch (e.g., sub-switch 20), an image is displayed that allows the player to enter a password. After the password is entered, the game history is stored according to the progress of the game.

For example, by operating a specific switch to select the "QR display at end" option, and then operating a specific switch (e.g., sub-switch 20), a two-dimensional code corresponding to the game history according to the progress of the game since the player entered the password is displayed. Note that when the condition for ending the display of the two-dimensional code is met (e.g., selecting "End QR display" with a specific switch (e.g., sub-switch 20)), the game history according to the progress of the game since the player entered the password is erased.

For example, when the "View Interim Record" option is selected by operating a specific switch, and a specific switch (e.g., sub-switch 20) is operated, a two-dimensional code is displayed that corresponds to the game history according to the progress of the game since the player entered the password. Note that even if the condition for ending the display of the two-dimensional code is met (e.g., selecting "End QR Display" with a specific switch (e.g., sub-switch 20)), the game history according to the progress of the game since the player entered the password is retained. Unlike when the "Display QR at End" option is selected, this option is intended for players who intend to continue playing but would like to check the game history up to that point using a mobile device or the like.

For example, by selecting the "View progress record" option and using a mobile device or the like to check the game history that corresponds to the progress of the game after the player inputs the password, the player can estimate the setting value, estimate the current difference in the number of game media in the advantageous zone, and estimate the current difference in the number of game media related to the limit, and then continue playing without erasing the game history.

We will not go into detail about all the items, but when a menu image is displayed, the player can select an item and an image corresponding to the item selected by the player will be displayed.

Although seven items have been given as examples of items that the player can select, the number of items is not limited to these. For example, the player may select one item (e.g., volume adjustment), or the player may select two items (e.g., password entry and volume adjustment). In addition, the items that the player can select may be partially or entirely different from the seven items listed above.

Information about your game history is displayed below the menu image.

Examples of information related to game history displayed in the menu image include five items: "HBB," "BB," "RB," "Number of AT entries," and "Total number of games played."

"HBB" displays the cumulative number of times the Hyper Bonus has been executed (entered) since the settings were changed. A Hyper Bonus is the bonus that is most advantageous to the player among multiple bonuses. Figure 75 (3) displays information indicating that the HBB has been executed once.

"BB" displays the cumulative number of times a big bonus has been executed (entered) since the settings were changed. A big bonus is a bonus that is less advantageous to the player than a hyper big bonus. Figure 75 (3) displays information indicating that BB has been executed five times.

"RB" displays the cumulative number of times a regular bonus has been executed (entered) since the settings were changed. A regular bonus is a bonus that is less advantageous to the player than a big bonus. Figure 75 (3) displays information indicating that RB has been executed once.

"AT Entry" displays the cumulative number of times the AT state has been entered since the settings were changed. The AT state corresponds to a game state in which advantageous operation of the stop switch can be notified. In Figure 75 (3), information indicating that the AT has been entered five times is displayed.

"Total number of plays" displays the cumulative number of plays since the settings were changed. The total number of plays may be the number of plays in all play states, including the number of plays in states that are advantageous to the player (various bonuses, AT states, etc.), or it may be the number of plays in some play states excluding the number of plays in states that are advantageous to the player (various bonuses, AT states, etc.). In Figure 75 (3), information is displayed indicating that the total number of plays is 2000.

In this way, on gaming machines that display information about gaming history, it becomes possible for players to predict the difference in the number of gaming media until the end of the game.

For example, if the total number of plays is small but the number of times an advantageous play state such as "AT entry" has been reached is large, the player can predict that the difference in the number of game media until the end of the game is small. In other words, the player can predict that the end of the game is likely to occur soon.

On the other hand, for example, if the total number of plays is large but the number of times an advantageous play state such as "AT entry" has been reached is small, the player can predict that there will be a large difference in the number of game media until the end of the game state. In other words, the player can predict that the end of the game state will not be reached yet.

The information on the game history displayed on the menu image is the cumulative number of times since the setting was changed. Therefore, even after the power is turned off and then turned on with the setting change key off (power on without changing the setting), the number of times each type of information is displayed before the power is turned off is the same as the number of times each type of information is displayed after the power is turned on with the setting change key off. When a setting change is made, the various information is displayed as an initial value (for example, 0). After a setting change is made (after the power is turned on with the setting change key on), the hit difference counter is set to its initial value. Similarly, after the power is turned on with the setting change key off, the hit difference counter is set to its initial value.

However, the information on the game history displayed on the menu image does not have to be the cumulative number of times since the setting was changed. For example, the information on the game history displayed on the menu image may be the cumulative number of times since the power was turned on. In this case, after the power is turned off and then turned on with the setting change key off (power on without changing the setting), various information is displayed with an initial value (for example, 0). Note that after the setting is changed (after the power is turned on with the setting change key on), the hit difference counter is set to its initial value. Similarly, after the power is turned on with the setting change key off, the hit difference counter is set to its initial value.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the information on the game history displayed on the menu image does not allow the player to distinguish between a case where a setting change has been made (including setting the same setting value) and a case where a setting change has not been made (power recovery without changing the setting).

Although five items, "HBB", "BB", "RB", "Number of AT entries", and "Total number of plays" have been exemplified as information relating to game history displayed in the menu image, the information is not limited to these five items. For example, the information relating to game history displayed in the menu image may display one item (for example, total number of plays) or two items (for example, AT entry and total number of plays). Furthermore, the information relating to game history displayed in the new image may be information that is partially or entirely different from the above five items (for example, a graph showing the progress of the difference in the number of game media (a so-called slump graph)). Furthermore, the information relating to game history does not have to be displayed in the menu image.

As described above, when the notification state regarding the limit is "normal state" and you are in menu mode, there will be no advance notification until the limit condition is met, and no notification indicating that the limit state has been reached.

<<Notification status related to cutoff: Activation notice status>>
Fig. 76 is a diagram showing an example of the effect when the notification state related to the limit is the "operation notice state". The effects (images) displayed on the display device 32 will be explained below in the order of Fig. 76(1), Fig. 76(2), and Fig. 76(3). Note that explanations of parts that overlap with the explanation of Fig. 75 will be omitted, and only the characteristic configuration will be explained.
<<<Fig. 76 (1)>>>
This is an example of a presentation when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notice state" and during a game (in this example, during the AT state). This example of a presentation is an example of a case where the number of coins until the completion function is activated is notified to the display device 32.

Unlike FIG. 75 (1), an image (also called an advance notification image) of "100 remaining until the complete function is activated" is displayed on the upper side of the display device 32. In other words, it notifies the player that the limit will be reached if the difference in the number of game media increases by 100 from the current difference in the number of game media. In other words, an advance notification is given until the limit condition is met.

The content of the advance notification image changes each time the difference in the number of game media remaining until the capping state changes. For example, when the difference in the number of game media remaining until the capping state is 90, it will say "90 remaining until the complete function is activated," when the difference in the number of game media remaining until the capping state is 50, it will say "50 remaining until the complete function is activated," when the difference in the number of game media remaining until the capping state is 10, it will say "10 remaining until the complete function is activated," etc. This is not limited to the example of the advance notification image in FIG. 76 (1), but is similar to other examples of advance notification images.

The notation (message) "XX coins remaining until the complete function is activated" is just one example, and the notation in the advance notification image may be other notations such as "XX coins remaining until the limit is reached."

In addition, in games in which an image relating to an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (also called a navigation image) is also displayed while the advance notification image is displayed, the image relating to the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is configured to be visible.

For example, the image relating to the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch and the advance warning image may be configured to be displayed in a position (area) where they do not overlap. Also, for example, the image relating to the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch and the advance warning image may be configured to be displayed in a position (area) where they partially overlap. Specifically, the position (area) where the advance warning image is displayed may be a position (area) where more than half of the image relating to the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch does not overlap. In any case, by configuring it in this way, the image relating to the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is visible, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that does not disadvantage the player.

In addition, the position (area) where the advance warning image is displayed and the size of the advance warning image may be configured not to change between a game in which an image relating to an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is displayed in the AT state and a game in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not displayed in the AT state. By configuring in this way, the burden of the control process for displaying the advance warning image can be reduced.

In addition, an example was shown in which the advance notification image displayed the number of frames remaining until the limit was reached, but the number of frames remaining until the limit is reached does not have to be displayed.

For example, an image such as "The game will soon reach the limit" may be displayed as the advance warning image. In this case, the same advance warning image is displayed when the difference in the number of gaming media remaining until the limit is reached is 90 and when the difference in the number of gaming media remaining until the limit is reached is 10. Note that although the wording (message) of the advance warning image is the same depending on the number of gaming media remaining until the limit is reached, it may also be in a different form (for example, the color of the advance warning image changes depending on the number of gaming media remaining until the limit is reached).

In this way, by providing advance warning until the stop condition is met, it is possible to prevent problems between players and the gaming facility, compared to when the stop process (stop state) occurs suddenly.

The advance warning image is configured so as not to overlap with the display of PAYOUT, CREDIT, Total, and G. This configuration can prevent a decrease in visibility of the information relating to PAYOUT, CREDIT, Total, and G due to the display of the advance warning image. Note that the display of the advance warning image may overlap with some of the information relating to PAYOUT, CREDIT, Total, and G.

When a game state that is advantageous to the player, such as the AT state or bonus game state, ends, a warning image (an image to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game) is displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, until a period of time such as 3 seconds has elapsed, or until a predetermined operation for the next game (such as a bet operation or operation of the start switch) is performed).

For example, when the advance warning image is being displayed, the AT state ends and a warning image is displayed, and the image may be configured as in any one of the following a) to c).
A) At least a part of the display area of the advance warning image and the display area of the attention calling image overlap each other. In other words, there are cases where the advance warning image and the attention calling image are displayed simultaneously.

In this configuration, since the advance warning image is at least partially overlapped, the visibility of the advance warning image is lower when the advance warning image is displayed compared to when the advance warning image is not displayed. However, since the advance warning image is visible, it is possible to prevent trouble between the player and the gaming facility.
A) The display area of the advance warning image and the display area of the attention calling image do not overlap. In other words, there are cases where the advance warning image and the attention calling image are displayed simultaneously.

In this configuration, since the display areas of the attention calling image and the advance warning image do not overlap, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the advance warning image from changing between when the attention calling image is not displayed and when it is displayed (for example, the visibility of the advance warning image from decreasing due to the display of the attention calling image). In other words, since the advance warning image is visible, it is possible to prevent trouble between the player and the gaming facility.
C) The advance warning image is temporarily hidden, then the attention calling image is displayed, and once the display of the attention calling image has finished, the advance warning image is displayed (the images are displayed in the following order: advance warning image → attention calling image → advance warning image). In other words, the advance warning image and the attention calling image are not displayed at the same time.

When configured in this way, the advance warning image is not displayed when the attention-calling image is displayed, so the attention-calling image can be made more prominent. After the display of the attention-calling image has ended, the advance warning image is displayed, so any trouble between the player and the gaming facility can be prevented.

<<<Fig. 76 (2)>>>
This is an example of a case where the notification state relating to the end of the game is the "activation notice state" and a pre-notification image is displayed when a performance during game waiting (also called a demo performance) is being executed.

Unlike Figure 75 (2), an advance warning image is displayed on the upper side of the display device 32.

In addition, this advance warning image will continue to be displayed even if the images displayed as demo effects are switched sequentially.

In this way, by providing advance warning during the demo performance until the stop condition is met, players who are thinking of playing can be notified that the gaming machine is about to enter a stop processing (stop state). Therefore, compared to when the stop processing (stop state) occurs suddenly, it is possible to prevent trouble between players and the gaming facility.

The notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state", and the advance notification image displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) and the advance notification image displayed in the demo performance when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state" are configured to be the same image (image of the same size). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the memory area for storing images compared to when multiple advance notification images are provided.

On the other hand, the pre-notification image displayed when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state" and during play (in this example, during the AT state) and the pre-notification image displayed when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state" and in the demo performance may be configured to be different images (images of different sizes or images using different colors).

For example, the notification state related to the limit can be an "activation notification state", and the advance notification image displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) can be an image that is larger (the display area of the advance notification image is larger) than the advance notification image displayed in the demo performance, in which the notification state related to the limit is an "activation notification state".

By configuring it in this way, the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notice state", and the difference in the number of game media until the limit condition is reached can be emphasized during play (in this example, during the AT state). In other words, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player how much longer it will take to reach the limit during play.

In addition, for example, the notification state related to the limit can be an "activation notification state", and the advance notification image displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) can be an image that is smaller (the display area of the advance notification image is smaller) than the advance notification image displayed in the demo performance, in which the notification state related to the limit is an "activation notification state".

By configuring it in this way, the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notice state," and the demo presentation can emphasize the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit condition is reached. In other words, it is possible to clearly inform a player who is thinking of playing that the gaming machine is about to enter a limit process (limit state).

As an example where the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state" and the pre-notification image displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) is different from the pre-notification image displayed in the demo performance when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state", an example where the pre-notification images are different in size has been explained, but this is not limited to the size of the pre-notification image.

For example, the advance warning image may be configured to use different colors, to have a different shape, to display different notations (messages) on the advance warning image, or to use different fonts for the notations (messages) on the advance warning image.

In other words, the degree of emphasis of the advance notification image needs to be different between the advance notification image displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state" and the advance notification image displayed in the demo performance when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state."

Note that, although we have described a case where a pre-notification image is displayed when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notice state" and a demo performance is being performed, it is also possible not to display the pre-notification image when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notice state" and a demo performance is being performed.

In this case, when the player places a bet, the demo presentation is switched to a game screen, and when the game screen is displayed, a pre-notification image is displayed (see FIG. 76 (1)). In other words, the player is notified that the stopping condition has been met before he or she starts playing (before he or she places a specified number of bets and operates the start switch), which can prevent any trouble between the player and the gaming facility.

<<<Fig. 76 (3)>>>
This is an example of a menu image that is displayed when the notification state related to the limit is the "operation notice state" and the sub-switch 20 is operated during game standby (also called "menu mode").

Unlike Figure 75 (3), an advance warning image is displayed on the upper side of the display device 32.

In this way, by providing advance warning in menu mode until the stop condition is met, players who are thinking of playing on a gaming machine that has been left in menu mode for a long time can be notified that the gaming machine is about to enter a stop processing (stop state). Therefore, compared to when the stop processing (stop state) occurs suddenly, it is possible to prevent trouble between players and the gaming facility.

The notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state", and the advance notification image displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) and the advance notification image displayed in the menu mode when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state" are configured to be the same image (image of the same size). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the memory area in which the images are stored, compared to when multiple advance notification images are provided.

On the other hand, the pre-notification image displayed when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state" and during play (in this example, during the AT state) and the pre-notification image displayed when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state" and in the menu mode may be configured to be different images (images of different sizes or images using different colors).

For example, the notification state related to the limit can be an "activation notification state," and the advance notification image displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) can be an image that is larger (the display area of the advance notification image is larger) than the advance notification image displayed in menu mode, in which the notification state related to the limit is an "activation notification state."

By configuring it in this way, the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notice state", and the difference in the number of game media until the limit condition is reached can be emphasized during play (in this example, during the AT state). In other words, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player how much longer it will take to reach the limit during play.

In addition, for example, the notification state related to the limit can be an "activation notification state," and the advance notification image displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) can be an image that is smaller (the display area of the advance notification image is smaller) than the advance notification image displayed in menu mode, in which the notification state related to the limit is an "activation notification state."

By configuring it in this way, the notification state related to the limit is the "operation notice state", and the menu mode can emphasize the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit condition is reached. In other words, it is possible to clearly inform a player who is thinking about playing that the gaming machine is about to enter a limit process (limit state).

As an example where the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state" and the pre-notification image displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) is different from the pre-notification image displayed in the menu mode where the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state", an example where the pre-notification images are different in size has been given, but this is not limited to the size of the pre-notification image.

For example, the advance warning image may be configured to use different colors, to have a different shape, to display different notations (messages) on the advance warning image, or to use different fonts for the notations (messages) on the advance warning image.

In other words, the degree of emphasis of the advance notification image needs to be different between the advance notification image displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state" and the advance notification image displayed in menu mode when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state."

In addition, when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notice state" and the menu mode is selected, if a pre-warning image is displayed, the pre-warning image is configured so as not to overlap with the display of each item selectable in the menu mode. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a decrease in visibility of the display of each item selectable in the menu mode due to the display of the pre-warning image.

The display of the advance notification image may reduce the visibility of the images of some of the items that can be selected in the menu mode. Even in this case, the items may be configured to be identifiable by the player, although the visibility may be reduced. By configuring the items in this way, it is possible to select each item by the player.

Note that, although we have described a case where the advance warning image is displayed when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation advance warning state" and the mode is menu mode, it is also possible not to display the advance warning image when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation advance warning state" and the mode is menu mode.

<<Notification state related to cutoff: Operation notification state>>
Fig. 77 is a diagram showing an example of the effects when the notification state related to the limit is the "operation notification state". The effects (images) displayed on the display device 32 will be explained below in the order of Fig. 77(1), Fig. 77(2), Fig. 77(3), Fig. 77(4), Fig. 77(5), and Fig. 77(6). Note that explanations of parts that overlap with the explanations of Fig. 75 and Fig. 76 will be omitted, and only the characteristic configuration will be explained.

The timing at which the notification state related to the limit becomes the activation notification state is, for example, after the granting of game media for a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 (for example, processing corresponding to the determined number of game media to be granted) has ended.

Here, "processing corresponding to the determined number of game media to be awarded" refers to processing that updates the information displayed on the payout number indicator (also called the number of coins acquired indicator), processing that updates the information displayed on the credit number indicator, processing that updates the information displayed on the indicator capable of showing the total score (also called the total score indicator), and processing that pays out game media from the hopper.

Note that "the process of updating the information displayed on the display" refers to the process of sequentially updating the value displayed on the display, such as "0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "11" when paying out (awarding) 11 gaming media. For example, the time required to update the value by "1" is designed to be an average of 50 ms. Also, the time required to pay out one gaming medium from the hopper is designed to be an average of 50 ms.

When designed in this way, the notification state related to the limit is configured to become the activation notification state, for example, within 50 ms after the process of updating the information displayed on the display is completed, or after the process of dispensing the gaming media from the hopper is completed. In other words, it is preferable that the image indicating that the limit has been reached ("Complete function in operation, please call an attendant" in Figure 77) is displayed within 50 ms after the process of updating the information displayed on the display is completed, or after the process of dispensing the gaming media from the hopper is completed.

In other words, it is sufficient that the following formula is satisfied.
The time required to award one gaming medium > the time from when the awarding of gaming media is completed to when an image indicating that the awarding is over is displayed

By configuring it in this way, an image indicating that the game is over is displayed immediately after the game media has been dispensed, allowing the player to recognize that the dispense of game media for that game has ended. The player can also recognize that the game is over.

Note that the timing when the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 and the notification state related to the limit becomes the activated notification state has been described as the timing after the end of the granting of game media for the game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit becomes 19,000 (processing corresponding to the determined number of game media granted), but it may also be the timing before the end of the granting of game media for the game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 (processing corresponding to the determined number of game media paid out).

For example, the timing at which the notification state related to the limit becomes the activation notification state may be before the start of the granting of game media for a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000, or it may be at the start of the granting of game media for a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000, or it may be midway through the granting of game media for a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000.

In addition, in a gaming machine that performs automatic settlement (of the number of credits) after the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000, the notification state related to the limit may become an activated notification state after the automatic settlement is completed, or the notification state may become an activated notification state before the automatic settlement starts, or the notification state related to the limit may become an activated notification state when the automatic settlement starts, or the notification state related to the limit may become an activated notification state while the automatic settlement is starting.

<<<Fig. 77 (1)>>>
The notification state relating to the end of the game is an example of a presentation in the "operation notification state". This presentation example is an example of a case where a notification that the game has reached the end of the game is made on the display device 32 in a gaming machine that does not use physical medals as a gaming medium (also called a medalless gaming machine).

Here we will provide a brief explanation of medalless gaming machines.

A medalless gaming machine is a gaming machine that does not use physical medals as a gaming medium, but allows players to play using electronic medals as the gaming medium.

The medal-less gaming machine can communicate bidirectionally with a rental device (rental unit) that can rent out gaming media.

For example, by operating a rental switch provided on the rental device once, a predetermined number of gaming media (e.g., 50) can be sent to the medalless gaming machine, and the medalless gaming machine can store the number of gaming media received. In addition, games (betting, etc.) can be executed using the stored gaming media.

In addition, by operating (pressing and holding) a counting switch provided on the medal-less gaming machine, the medal-less gaming machine can transmit a predetermined number (50) of gaming media stored therein to the lending device at predetermined intervals (e.g., every 300 ms). The lending device then stores the received gaming media, and by operating a return button provided on the lending device, it can eject a card that stores the number of gaming media.

As described above, in a medalless gaming machine, the number of gaming media stored in the medalless gaming machine can be transmitted to the rental unit by operating the counting switch. Then, by ejecting the card on which the number of gaming media is stored, the game media can be exchanged for prizes at the gaming establishment.

Please note that unless otherwise specified, the gaming machines in this specification can also be applied to medal-less gaming machines.

Let's return to the explanation in Figure 77 (1).

The information "Complete function in operation" and "Please call an attendant" are displayed near the center of the display device 32.

In other words, the display device 32 issues a notification that play is at its limit, and a notification that a staff member (store attendant) should be called. By configuring it in this way, the player can recognize that play is at its limit. The player can also recognize that a store attendant needs to be called. Note that when a notification is being issued that play is at its limit, the advance notification image is not displayed.

In addition, among the images displayed on the display device 32, the image corresponding to "Complete function in operation" in FIG. 77 (1) may be referred to as an operation notification image, a complete function operation notification image, or a stop state notification image.

In addition, among the images displayed on the display device 32, the entire image of FIG. 77 (1) may be referred to as an operation notification image, a complete function operation notification image, or a hit-stop state notification image.

In addition, the message "Please count" is displayed in the upper center of the display device 32.

In other words, the display device 32 notifies the player to operate the counting switch. By configuring it in this way, the player can recognize that he or she needs to operate the counting switch to transmit the gaming media (number of gaming media) stored in the gaming machine to the rental device.

In addition, after the gaming media (number of gaming media) stored in the gaming machine reaches 0, the notification to the player to operate the counting switch may be terminated. By configuring it in this way, the player can recognize that the gaming media (number of gaming media) stored in the gaming machine has reached 0 (transmission to the rental device has finished) by operating the counting switch.

In addition, the information "Press PUSH to display the menu screen" is displayed at the bottom of the display device 32.

In other words, the display device 32 notifies the player that the PUSH button (sub-switch 20) is active. In addition, when the player operates the PUSH button (sub-switch 20), a notification is issued indicating that the mode will transition to menu mode. By configuring it in this way, the player can be made aware that although the game is at a standstill, it is possible to transition to menu mode by operating the PUSH button (sub-switch 20) and to obtain a two-dimensional code containing the game history, etc.

In addition, when a notification is displayed on the display device 32 indicating that play has stopped, information regarding the game (TOTAL, G, PAYOUT, CREDIT, etc.) is not displayed on the display device 32 (it cannot be seen by the player).

For example, the display device 32 is configured to display a single-color (e.g., black) image with notifications indicating that play has stopped, notifications indicating that an attendant (store attendant) should be called, notifications indicating that the player should operate the counting switch, and notifications indicating that the PUSH button (also called the sub-switch 20 or sub-button) is active.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to emphasize and notify the user that a limit has been reached.

In the above explanation, examples of notifications related to the end of a game in the "operation notification state" include notifications indicating that the game is at a limit, notifications indicating that an attendant (store clerk) should be called, notifications indicating that the player should operate the counting switch, and notifications indicating that the PUSH button (sub-switch 20, also called the sub-button) is active, but the present invention is not limited to these notifications.

For example, it may be possible to provide some notifications, such as a notification indicating that play has reached a limit, a notification indicating that an attendant (store attendant) should be called, and a notification indicating that the player should operate the counting switch, but not a notification indicating that the PUSH button (also called the sub-switch 20 or sub-button) is active.

In addition, when the notification state related to the limit is the "operation notification state", a notification different from the notifications described above may be made.

<<<Fig. 77 (2)>>>
The notification state relating to the limit is an example of a presentation in an "operation notification state." This example of a presentation is an example of a case where a notification that the limit has been reached is made on the display device 32 in a gaming machine that uses physical medals as gaming media and does not automatically settle the number of credits after the limit condition is met.

Note that we will omit the explanation of the points common to Figure 77 (1) and will only explain the distinctive parts.

Unlike Figure 77 (1), the message "Please settle your bill" is displayed in the upper center of the display device 32.

In other words, the display device 32 notifies the player to operate the settlement switch. By configuring it in this way, the player can recognize that he or she needs to operate the settlement switch to settle the gaming medium (number of credits) stored in the gaming machine.

In addition, after the gaming medium (number of credits) stored in the gaming machine becomes 0, the notification to the player to operate the settlement switch may be terminated. By configuring it in this way, the player can recognize that the gaming medium (number of credits) stored in the gaming machine has become 0 by operating the settlement switch.

<<<Fig. 77 (3)>>>
The notification state relating to the limit is an example of a presentation in an "operation notification state." This presentation example is an example of a case where a notification is made on the display device 32 that the limit has been reached in a gaming machine that uses physical medals as gaming media and in which the number of credits is automatically settled after a limit condition is met.

Note that we will omit the explanation of the points common to Figure 77 (1) and will only explain the distinctive parts.

Unlike Figure 77 (1), the information "Automatic settlement in progress" is displayed in the upper center of the display device 32.

In other words, the display device 32 notifies the player that the number of credits is being settled (notifies that automatic settlement is being performed). By configuring it in this way, the player can recognize that the number of credits is being settled even if he or she has not operated the settlement switch.

After the gaming medium (number of credits) stored in the gaming machine becomes 0 (after automatic settlement is completed), the notification to the player that the number of credits is being settled (notification that automatic settlement is being performed) may be terminated. For example, in a gaming machine that displays the information "automatic settlement in progress" when automatic settlement is being performed, the information "automatic settlement in progress" is not displayed after automatic settlement is completed. By configuring in this way, the player can recognize that the gaming medium (number of credits) stored in the gaming machine has become 0 due to automatic settlement.

<<<Fig. 77 (4)>>>
The notification state relating to the end of the game is an example of a presentation in the "operation notification state". This example of the presentation is an example of a case where a stop condition is met during a game (in this example, during the AT state) and the display device 32 notifies the player that the game has reached the end of the game state.

Explanations of points common to Figure 76 (1), Figure 77 (1) and Figure 77 (2) will be omitted, and only distinctive parts will be explained.

First, we will explain the distinctive features compared to Figure 76 (1).

Figure 76 (1) displays an image (pre-alert image) stating "100 frames remaining until complete function is activated," while Figure 77 (4) displays an image (alert image) stating "Complete function activated, please call an attendant."

In other words, while FIG. 76(1) notifies the player of the difference in the number of gaming media remaining until the end of the game, FIG. 77(4) notifies the player that the game is at its end. Also, FIG. 76(1) does not notify the player about calling a staff member (store attendant).

It is preferable that the image (activation notification image) in FIG. 77(4) "Complete function in operation, please call an attendant" be displayed more emphatically than the image (pre-notification image) in FIG. 76(1) "100 frames remaining until complete function is activated."

For example, the emphasis may be achieved by making the display area of the display device 32 occupied by the operation notification image larger than the display area of the display device 32 occupied by the advance notification image.

In this way, by highlighting the operation notification image over the advance notification image, the player can be properly notified that they have reached a dead end (the next game cannot be played).

In other words, the degree of emphasis of the advance warning image is less than the degree of emphasis of the operation warning image, so that the advance warning image does not interfere with the progress of the game.

Note that, although the difference in the size of the area that the image occupies in the display area is given as an example of emphasizing the operation notification image more than the advance notification image, this is not limited to this.

For example, the thickness of the text in the advance warning image may be different from the thickness of the text in the operation warning image. Also, the color of the text in the advance warning image may be different from the color of the text in the operation warning image.

The degree of emphasis of the advance notification image and the operation notification image may be approximately the same (approximately the same includes the same).

In addition, Figure 76 (1) does not display the image "Press PUSH to display the menu screen," whereas Figure 77 (4) displays the image "Press PUSH to display the menu screen."

In other words, FIG. 76 (1) does not notify that the operation of the PUSH button (sub-switch 20) will transition to the menu mode, but FIG. 77 (4) does not notify that the operation of the PUSH button (sub-switch 20) will transition to the menu mode.

By configuring it in this way, the player can be properly notified that a menu image can be displayed when the game is at its limit.

Next, we will explain the characteristic parts compared to Figure 77 (1) or Figure 77 (2).

Figure 77 (1) or Figure 77 (2) differs in that information related to the game (TOTAL, G, PAYOUT, CREDIT, etc.) is not displayed on the display device 32 (not visible to the player), whereas Figure 77 (4) differs in that information related to the game (TOTAL, G, PAYOUT, CREDIT, etc.) is displayed on the display device 32 (visible to the player).

In other words, Figure 77 (4) is configured to display both the effect (image) executed in a game that has reached a halt, and the image (activation notification image) that reads "Complete function in operation. Please call an attendant."

By configuring it in this manner, the operation notification image is displayed when the specified information (TOTAL or G) at the time when the game is stopped is displayed, so that, for example, a player can use the camera function of a mobile terminal owned by the player to take a commemorative image including the specified information at the time when the game is stopped.
<<<Fig. 77 (5)>>>
The notification state relating to the end of the game is an example of a presentation in the "operation notification state". This example of the presentation is another example of a case where, when a stop condition is satisfied during a game (in this example, during the AT state), the display device 32 notifies the player that the game has reached the end of the game state.

In this example, the same demo performance as that described in FIG. 75(2) is performed, but a demo performance different from that in FIG. 75(2) may also be performed.

We will omit the explanation of the points common to Figure 75 (2) and Figure 76 (2) and will explain the distinctive parts.

Figures 75 (2) and 76 (2) are demo effects that are executed when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed without a new bet being made from a certain point in time after the end of a game (after all reels have stopped or after a payout process), while Figure 77 (5) is a demo effect that is executed when a stop-play condition is met. In other words, it is a demo effect that is executed when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed from a certain point in time after the end of a game (after all reels have stopped or after a payout process).

Note that FIG. 77 (5) has been described as a demo performance that is executed when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since a certain timing after the end of a game (after all reels have stopped or after a payout process), but the demo performance may also be executed when the notification state related to the game ending becomes an activated notification state. In other words, the demo performance may be executed from a certain timing (before a predetermined time has elapsed) after the game ending (after all reels have stopped or after a payout process) of a game that satisfies the game ending condition.

By configuring it in this way, the player can be notified that they will not be able to play the next time when the game screen switches to a demo presentation.

Figure 76 (2) displays an image (pre-alert image) stating "100 frames remaining until complete function is activated," while Figure 77 (5) displays an image (alert image) stating "Complete function activated, please call an attendant."

In other words, while FIG. 76(2) notifies the player of the difference in the number of gaming media remaining until the end of the game, FIG. 77(5) notifies the player that the game is at its end. Also, FIG. 76(2) does not notify the player about calling a staff member (store attendant).

It is preferable that the image (activation notification image) of FIG. 77(5) "Complete function in operation, please call an attendant" be displayed more emphatically than the image (pre-notification image) of FIG. 76(2) "100 frames remaining until complete function is activated."

For example, the emphasis may be achieved by making the display area of the display device 32 occupied by the operation notification image larger than the display area of the display device 32 occupied by the advance notification image.

In this way, by highlighting the operation notification image over the advance notification image, the player can be properly notified that they have reached a dead end (the next game cannot be played).

In other words, the degree of emphasis of the advance warning image is less than the degree of emphasis of the operation warning image, so that the advance warning image does not interfere with the demo performance as much as possible.

Note that, although the difference in the size of the area that the image occupies in the display area is given as an example of emphasizing the operation notification image more than the advance notification image, this is not limited to this.

For example, the thickness of the text in the advance warning image may be different from the thickness of the text in the operation warning image. Also, the color of the text in the advance warning image may be different from the color of the text in the operation warning image.

The degree of emphasis of the advance notification image and the operation notification image may be approximately the same (approximately the same includes the same).

Note that while Figure 77 (5) has been described as a demo effect that is executed when the limiting condition is met, the configuration may be such that the demo effect is not executed when the limiting condition is met.

<<<Fig. 77 (6)>>>
The notification state relating to the end of the game is an example of a presentation in the "operation notification state." This example of the presentation is an example of a presentation in which, after the end of the game condition is met, the player operates the PUSH button (sub switch 20) to transition to the menu mode.

In other words, this is an example of a situation in which the player operates the PUSH button (sub-switch 20) to switch to menu mode while any of the images in Figure 77 (1), 77 (2), 77 (3), 77 (4), or 77 (5) is being displayed.

We will omit the explanation of the points common to Figure 75 (3) and Figure 76 (3) and will explain the distinctive parts.

Figure 76 (3) displays an image (pre-alert image) stating "100 frames remaining until complete function is activated," while Figure 77 (6) displays an image (alert image) stating "Complete function activated, please call an attendant."

In other words, while FIG. 76(3) notifies the player of the difference in the number of gaming media remaining until the end of the game, FIG. 77(6) notifies the player that the game is at its end. Also, FIG. 76(3) does not notify the player about calling a staff member (store attendant).

It is preferable that the image (activation notification image) of FIG. 77(6) "Complete function in operation, please call an attendant" be displayed more emphatically than the image (pre-notification image) of FIG. 76(3) "100 frames remaining until complete function is activated."

For example, the emphasis may be achieved by making the display area of the display device 32 occupied by the operation notification image larger than the display area of the display device 32 occupied by the advance notification image.

In this way, by highlighting the operation notification image over the advance notification image, the player can be properly notified that they have reached a dead end (the next game cannot be played).

In other words, the degree of emphasis of the advance warning image is less than the degree of emphasis of the operation warning image, so that the advance warning image does not interfere as much as possible with the visibility of the selection items instructed in the menu image.

Note that, although the difference in the size of the area that the image occupies in the display area is given as an example of emphasizing the operation notification image more than the advance notification image, this is not limited to this.

For example, the thickness of the text in the advance warning image may be different from the thickness of the text in the operation warning image. Also, the color of the text in the advance warning image may be different from the color of the text in the operation warning image.

The degree of emphasis of the advance notification image and the operation notification image may be approximately the same (approximately the same includes the same).

The display of the operation notification image may reduce the visibility of the images of some of the items that can be selected in the menu mode. Even in this case, the items may be configured to be identifiable by the player, although the visibility may be reduced. By configuring in this way, each item can be selected by the player.

In addition, when the notification state related to the cutoff is the "operation notification state" and the menu mode is selected, the operation notification image may not be displayed.

In addition, the items selectable on the menu screen in FIG. 77(6) are the same as the items selectable on the menu screens in FIG. 75(3) and FIG. 76(3), but they may be different.

For example, when the notification state related to the cutoff is the "operation notification state" and the mode is the menu mode, the "QR display at end" item can be selected, but the "volume adjustment" item cannot be selected (or the "volume adjustment" item may not be displayed).

By configuring it in this way, after the limit is reached, only the bare minimum of items can be selected (the number of selectable items is reduced), so items that are unnecessary for the player will not be selected.

In addition, if the push button is operated when the notification state related to the play limit is the "operation notification state", the two-dimensional code containing the play history may be displayed without transitioning to the menu mode (without displaying FIG. 77 (6)). In other words, the two-dimensional code containing the play history may be displayed without selecting the "QR display at end" item.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reduce the number of steps required to display information necessary for the player after the game has reached a limit.

When the notification state related to the cutoff is the "normal state", "activation notice state", or "activation notification state", the menu mode can be ended by satisfying a specific condition (for example, selecting the "Exit menu mode" item (not shown) and operating a specific switch (PUSH button)).

However, the control process of the sub-control means may be configured to be different when the menu mode is ended when the notification state related to the limit is the "operation notification state" from when the menu mode is ended when the notification state related to the limit is the "normal state" or the "pre-operation notification state". Below, the difference in the control process of the sub-control means (difference when ending the menu mode) is explained with an example.

(Example 1) Differences in conditions for exiting menu mode When the notification state related to the limit is the "normal state" or the "activation notice state", the menu mode can also be exited by a bet process (a bet process by operating the 1 bet button, or a bet process by operating the MAX bet button, or a bet process by inserting a medal into the slot).

For example, in menu mode when the notification state related to the limit is "normal state" or "activation notice state", if the number of bets is 0 and the number of credits is 50, and the 1 bet button or the MAX bet button is operated, or if a medal is inserted from the slot, the menu mode can be ended. Note that when the menu mode is ended under these conditions, the notification state related to the limit does not change. For example, when the notification state related to the limit is "activation notice state", the notification state related to the limit after the menu mode is ended will be "activation notice state".

On the other hand, if the menu mode is to be ended when the notification state related to the limit is the "operation notification state", the menu mode cannot be ended by betting processing (betting processing by operating the 1 bet button, betting processing by operating the MAX bet button, or betting processing by inserting medals through the slot). Specifically, when the notification state related to the limit is the "operation notification state", the betting processing is controlled not to be executed, so the menu mode cannot be ended.

For example, in the menu mode when the notification state related to the limit is "operation notification state" and the number of bets is 0 and the number of credits is 50, if the 1 bet button or the MAX bet button is operated, or if a medal is inserted through the insertion slot, the menu mode cannot be exited.

(Example 2) Differences in presentation after exiting menu mode When the notification state related to the end of the game is "normal state" or "activation notice state", after exiting menu mode, in principle, a demo screen is displayed. However, if the menu mode is entered while a specific presentation is being executed (for example, during a game in the middle of a presentation (continuous presentation) that spans multiple games), or if the menu mode is entered during a specific game state (for example, during AT), the demo screen does not have to be displayed after exiting menu mode. For example, after exiting menu mode, a screen (image) related to the presentation that was being executed before entering menu mode may be displayed.

In other words, when the notification state related to the limit is the "normal state" or the "activation notification state", a specific presentation (such as a presentation that is completed in one play) is executed, then the menu mode is entered, and after that, a specific condition is met (such as selecting the "Exit menu mode" item (not shown) and operating a specific switch (PUSH button)), and the menu mode is ended, and a demo screen is displayed. Note that the notification state related to the limit does not change even after the menu mode is ended. For example, when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state", the notification state related to the limit after the menu mode is ended is the "activation notification state".

On the other hand, after exiting the menu mode when the notification state related to the limit is the "operation notification state", a screen (image) related to the performance that was being performed when the mode was switched to the menu mode is displayed.

For example, when the image in FIG. 77(2) is displayed, the device transitions to menu mode, and then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, selecting the "Exit menu mode" item (not shown) and operating a specific switch (PUSH button)), the device ends the menu mode and displays the image in FIG. 77(2).

Similarly, for example, when the image in FIG. 77(4) is displayed, the device transitions to menu mode, and then, after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, selecting the "Exit menu mode" item (not shown) and operating a specific switch (PUSH button)), the device ends the menu mode and displays the image in FIG. 77(4).

However, it may be configured so that a demo image is displayed after the menu mode is terminated. In that case, for example, when the image in FIG. 77(2) is displayed, the menu mode may be entered, and then, after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, selecting the "Exit menu mode" item (not shown) and operating a specific switch (PUSH button)), the menu mode may be terminated, and the image in FIG. 77(5) may be displayed.

Similarly, for example, when the image in FIG. 77(4) is displayed, the menu mode may be entered, and then, after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, selecting the "Exit Menu Mode" item (not shown) and operating a specific switch (PUSH button)), the menu mode may be ended, and the image in FIG. 77(5) may be displayed.

Note that Figure 77 (6) has been described as an image displayed in the menu mode that is executed when the stop condition is met, but the system may be configured so that when the stop condition is met, the menu mode does not switch to the menu mode even if the player operates the PUSH button (sub-switch 20).

<Recovery from power outage during operation notice state>
When the notification state related to the cutoff is the operation notice state, the advance notification image can be displayed as shown in Fig. 76. In this way, when the power-off process (also called power-off process) is performed while the advance notification image is displayed, if the power is turned on without changing the settings (the power switch is turned on with the setting key switch off), the advance notification image is not displayed.

Specifically, if a power-off process is performed when the notification state related to the limit is in the activation notice state, and then the power is turned on without changing the settings, the sub-control means will return the notification state related to the limit to the normal state without receiving a command related to the limit difference counter from the main control means.

For example, if a power-off process is performed when the game state controlled by the main control means is a specified game state (e.g., AT state), and then the power is turned on without changing the settings, game play can be resumed from the specified game state (e.g., AT state). However, the value stored in the stop difference counter will be the initial value (the difference in the game media related to the stop is 0).

For example, if the power is turned off while the image in Figure 76 (1) is being displayed, and then the power is turned on without changing any settings, the message "100 sheets remaining until the complete function is activated" will not be displayed. At this time, other information (TOTAL, G, etc.) is configured to be displayed in the same way as before the power was turned off.

Similarly, if the power is turned off while the image in Figure 76 (2) or the image in Figure 76 (3) is being displayed, and then the power is turned on without changing any settings, the message "100 sheets remaining until the complete function is activated" will not be displayed.

By configuring it in this way, the advance warning image can be hidden immediately, compared to when the advance warning image is hidden based on receiving a command including the value of the stop difference counter (the difference in the number of gaming media related to the stop) after the power is restored. This prevents the player from misunderstanding that the difference between the difference in the number of gaming media related to the stop and the difference in the number of gaming media until the stop state is small due to the image displayed after the power is restored.

When the game state controlled by the main control means is a specified game state (for example, AT state), power-off processing is performed, and then when power is turned on with a setting change (power switch on with the setting key switch on), the game state becomes a specific one (for example, normal section and normal state). Also, the value stored in the stop difference counter becomes the initial value (the difference number of game media related to the stop is 0).

Even in this case, after the power is restored, the sub-control means is configured to set the notification state related to the cutoff to the normal state and not display the advance notification image.

<Checking settings when the warning is activated>
When the notification state related to the limit is the operation notice state, the pre-notification image can be displayed as shown in Fig. 76. In this way, when the pre-notification image is displayed and in a predetermined situation where the number of bets is 0 (a situation where a bet can be accepted), if the transition condition for the setting confirmation mode is satisfied (for example, the setting key switch is turned on when the front door is open), the mode can be transitioned to the setting confirmation mode.

If the notification state related to the cutoff is the activation notice state and the mode transitions to the setting confirmation mode, a notification is issued that the mode is in the setting confirmation mode. For example, an image indicating that the mode is in the setting confirmation mode is displayed, or a sound indicating that the mode is in the setting confirmation mode is output. Note that it may also be possible to display a pre-notification image during the setting confirmation mode.

First, an example of an image indicating that the device is in the setting confirmation mode is when the image "Checking settings" is displayed. An example of an audio notification indicating that the device is in the setting confirmation mode is when the audio "Checking settings" is output from a speaker.

In other words, if the notification state related to the limit is the activation notice state and the game transitions to the setting confirmation mode, both an image indicating that the game is in the setting confirmation mode and a pre-notification image may be displayed. By configuring it in this way, even during the setting confirmation, it is possible to know that there is only a small difference in the number of gaming media until the limit state is reached. In other words, the game store staff can know that the limit state will be reached soon.

At this time, the advance warning image displayed during the setting confirmation mode may be the same as the advance warning image displayed before switching to the setting confirmation mode. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to provide multiple types of advance warning images, and the ROM capacity of the sub-control means can be reduced. In addition, since there is no process for switching advance warning images, the program capacity of the sub-control means can be reduced.

However, the advance notification image may be displayed in a different manner than before the transition to the setting confirmation mode. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to immediately distinguish between playing and setting confirmation by checking the advance notification image.

Although an example of displaying a pre-notification image during the setting confirmation mode has been described, it is not necessary to display a pre-notification image during the setting confirmation mode. By configuring it in this way, the gaming store staff can concentrate on checking the setting values.

In addition, even if the advance warning image is displayed during the setting confirmation mode, or even if the advance warning image is not displayed during the setting confirmation mode, the advance warning image is also displayed when the front door is closed after the setting confirmation mode termination condition (for example, turning off the setting key switch) is met, the door open error is cleared, and the game screen is displayed. In other words, the difference in the number of game media related to the stop does not change before and after the transition to the setting confirmation mode (the value stored in the stop difference counter is maintained).

<Recovery from power failure during operation notification>
When the notification state related to the cutoff is the operation notification state, an operation notification image is configured to be displayed as shown in Fig. 77. In this manner, when a power-off process (also called a power-off process) is performed while the operation notification image is being displayed, if the power is then turned on without changing the settings (the power switch is turned on with the setting key switch off), the operation notification image is configured to continue to be displayed.

Specifically, if a power-off process is performed when the notification state related to the limit is the operation notification state, and then the power is turned on without changing the settings, the notification state related to the limit will become the operation notification state without receiving a command related to the limit difference counter from the main control means.

When the notification state related to the limit is the operation notification state, the main control means is executing the limit process (the limit state is reached). If a power-off process is performed while the main control means is in the limit state, and then the power is turned on without changing the settings (the power switch is turned on with the setting key switch off), the main control means will enter the limit state. However, the value stored in the limit difference counter will be the initial value (the difference in the number of game media related to the limit is 0).

For example, if a power-off process is performed while the image in Fig. 77(1) is displayed, and then the power is turned on without changing any settings, the image in Fig. 77(1) will be displayed. This is true not only for Fig. 77(1), but also for Fig. 77(2), Fig. 77(3), Fig. 77(4), Fig. 77(5), and Fig. 77(6).

When the notification state related to the limit is the operation notification state, the main control means is executing the limit process (the limit state is reached). When the main control means is in the limit state, a power-off process is performed, and then when the power is turned on without changing the settings (the power switch is turned on with the setting key switch off), the game enters a specific gaming state (for example, the normal section and normal state). In addition, the value stored in the limit difference counter becomes the initial value (the difference number of game media related to the limit is 0).

By configuring it in this way, although the hit difference counter stores an initial value, it is possible to notify the player of appropriate information (information indicating that the hit state is reached) corresponding to the state (the hit state) controlled by the main control state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being misled (into thinking that the hit state is no longer reached) by the image displayed after the power is restored.

When the game state controlled by the main control means is in the stop state, the power is turned off and then when the power is turned on with a setting change (the power switch is turned on while the setting key switch is on), the game moves to the setting change mode, and after the end conditions of the setting change mode are met, the game enters a specific game state (for example, the normal section and normal state). Also, the value stored in the stop difference counter becomes the initial value (the difference number of game media related to the stop is 0).

In this case, after the power is restored (during the setting change mode), the sub-control means is configured to set the notification state related to the limit to the normal state and not to notify information indicating that the limit has been reached. Similarly, after the setting change mode ends (before the first game is started), the notification state related to the limit is also configured to set the notification state related to the limit to the normal state and not to notify information indicating that the limit has been reached.

Although it has been stated that information indicating that play has been stopped is not announced after power is restored (during setting change mode), information indicating that play has been stopped may be announced after power is restored (during setting change mode). In this case, after the setting change mode ends (before the first game starts), the notification state regarding the stop is set to the normal state, and information indicating that play has been stopped is not announced.

<Checking settings when the alarm is activated>
When the notification state related to the limit is the operation notification state (limit state), an operation notification image can be displayed as shown in Fig. 77. In this way, in a specific situation where the operation notification image is displayed (a situation where no bets are being accepted), if the transition condition for the setting confirmation mode (for example, turning on the setting key switch with the front door open) is satisfied, transition to the setting confirmation mode can be made.

If the notification state related to the cutoff is an operation notification state and the mode transitions to the setting confirmation mode, a notification is issued that the mode is in the setting confirmation mode. For example, an image indicating that the mode is in the setting confirmation mode is displayed, or a sound indicating that the mode is in the setting confirmation mode is output. Note that it may also be possible to display an operation notification image during the setting confirmation mode.

First, an example of an image indicating that the device is in the setting confirmation mode is when an image that says "Checking settings" is displayed. An example of an audio notification indicating that the device is in the setting confirmation mode is when the audio that says "Checking settings" is output from a speaker.

In other words, if the notification state related to the limit is an activation notification state and the mode transitions to the setting confirmation mode, both an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress and an activation notification image may be displayed. By configuring in this way, the arcade staff can know that the limit state has been reached even during setting confirmation. In addition, since it is possible to check the setting value when the limit state has been reached, it is possible to check whether any fraud has been committed (whether the setting value is different from the setting value set by the arcade), etc.

At this time, the activation notification image displayed during the setting confirmation mode may be the same as the activation notification image displayed before switching to the setting confirmation mode. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to provide multiple types of activation notification images, and the ROM capacity of the sub-control means can be reduced. Also, since there is no process for switching the activation notification image, the program capacity of the sub-control means can be reduced.

However, the operation notification image may be displayed in a different manner than before the transition to the setting confirmation mode. By configuring it in this way, you can immediately tell whether the game is in a stalled state or in the process of confirming the settings by checking the operation notification image.

Although an example has been described in which an operation notification image is displayed during the setting confirmation mode, it is not necessary to display the operation notification image during the setting confirmation mode. By configuring it in this way, the gaming store staff can concentrate on checking the setting values.

In addition, even if the operation notification image is displayed during the setting check mode, or even if the operation notification image is not displayed during the setting check mode, the operation notification image is configured to be displayed after the front door is closed and the door open error is cleared after the setting check mode termination condition (for example, turning off the setting key switch) is met.

Also, in a specific situation where an operation notification image is displayed (a situation where a bet is not being accepted), an example has been described in which the setting confirmation mode can be entered if the transition conditions for the setting confirmation mode are met (for example, the setting key switch is turned on when the front door is open). However, the setting confirmation mode may also be configured not to be entered even if the transition conditions for the setting confirmation mode are met (for example, the setting key switch is turned on when the front door is open) in a specific situation where an operation notification image is displayed (a situation where a bet is not being accepted).

By configuring it in this way, there is no need to provide special processing to enable transition to setting confirmation mode even in a stalled state, which reduces the program capacity of the main control means.

<Transition of notification state related to termination>
Next, the transition of the notification state related to the termination in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

The game zones (1) to (7) will be described as advantageous zones. Also, (1) to (7) will be described as advantageous game states (e.g., AT states) for the player.

However, the game zones (1) to (7) are not limited to advantageous zones. The game zones (1) to (7) may be normal zones, or a part of (1) to (7) may be normal zones and another part may be advantageous zones. In addition, the game machine may be one that does not have normal zones and advantageous zones as game zones (so-called normal machines).

Let's return to the explanation in Figure 78.

As the game progresses, the status changes in the following order: (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7). In other words, the horizontal axis corresponds to the number of games played after the power is turned on.

The vertical axis corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media related to the stop (e.g., the value stored in the stop difference counter).

The dotted line indicates that the notification status regarding the cutoff is normal.

The lined portion (non-dotted portion) indicates that the notification state related to the cutoff is an activation notice state.

The first difference number corresponds to the difference number of gaming media related to the limit at which the display of the advance warning image is started. For example, the first difference number corresponds to a value such as 18,900. Note that 18,900 is an example and is not limited to 18,900. For example, the first difference number may be a numerical value such as 18,500. In addition, if the timing for starting the process to output the test signal related to the limit is when the difference number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 18,500, the timing for starting the display of the advance warning image may also be when the difference number (first difference number) of gaming media related to the limit also exceeds 18,500.

In other words, the difference number of gaming media related to the limit that will start the process to output the test signal related to the limit and the difference number of gaming media related to the limit that will start the display of the advance warning image (first difference number) may be the same value. By configuring in this way, the advance warning image is displayed when the process to output the test signal related to the limit is started, so that during the development stage of the gaming machine, it can be confirmed whether the difference number of gaming media related to the limit managed by the main control means is accurately transmitted to the sub-control means.

The second difference number corresponds to the difference number of the gaming medium related to the cutoff point at which the display of the advance notification image ends. For example, if the first difference number is 18,900, the second difference number corresponds to a value such as 18,850. Note that 18,850 is an example and is not limited to 18,850. For example, if the first difference number is 18,500, the second difference number may be a value such as 18,450.

<<Figure 78 (1)>>
In the AT state, the difference number of the game media related to the limit increases as the game progresses, and this is the period until it becomes the second difference number (less than the second difference number). The notification state related to the limit during this period is the normal state. Therefore, the advance notification image is not displayed on the display device 32.

During play in the period of FIG. 78(1), for example, an image such as that shown in FIG. 75(1) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image displayed during play in the period of FIG. 78(1) are as described in FIG. 75(1).

During game standby (demo screen) in the period of FIG. 78(1), for example, an image such as that shown in FIG. 75(2) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the demo presentation during the period of FIG. 78(1) are as explained in FIG. 75(2).

In the menu mode during the period of FIG. 78(1), for example, an image such as that shown in FIG. 75(3) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image (menu image) in the menu mode during the period of FIG. 78(1) are as described in FIG. 75(3).

<<Figure 78 (2)>>
In the AT state, the difference number of the game media related to the limit increases as the game progresses, and this is the period from the second difference number to the first difference number (the second difference number or more and less than the first difference number). During this period, the notification state related to the limit is the normal state. Therefore, the advance notification image is not displayed on the display device 32.

During play in the period of Figure 78 (2), for example, an image such as that shown in Figure 75 (1) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image displayed during play in the period of Figure 77 (1) are as described in Figure 75 (1).

During the game standby period (demo screen) in the period of FIG. 78(2), for example, an image such as that in FIG. 75(2) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the demo presentation during the period of FIG. 78(2) are as explained in FIG. 75(2).

In the menu mode during the period of FIG. 78(2), for example, an image such as that shown in FIG. 75(3) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image (menu image) in the menu mode during the period of FIG. 78(2) are as described in FIG. 75(3).

<<Figure 78 (3)>>
In the AT state, the difference number of game media related to the limit becomes equal to or greater than the first difference number as the game progresses, and then the difference number of game media related to the limit again becomes the first difference number. During this period, the notification state related to the limit is the operation notice state. Therefore, the advance notification image is displayed on the display device 32.

For example, the timing when the difference in the gaming media related to the limit becomes equal to or greater than the first difference and the notification state related to the limit becomes the activation notice state is the timing after the granting of the gaming media for the game in which the difference in the gaming media related to the limit becomes the first difference (the processing corresponding to the determined number of gaming media to be paid out) is completed.

Here, "processing corresponding to the determined number of gaming media to be paid out" refers to processing to update the information displayed on the payout number display (also called the number of coins won display), processing to update the information displayed on the credit number display, processing to update the information displayed on the display capable of showing the total score (also called the total score display), and processing to pay out gaming media from the hopper.

Note that "the process of updating the information displayed on the display" refers to the process of sequentially updating the value displayed on the display, such as "0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "11" when paying out (awarding) 11 gaming media. For example, the time required to update the value by "1" is designed to be an average of 50 ms. Also, the time required to pay out one gaming medium from the hopper is designed to be an average of 50 ms.

When designed in this way, the notification state related to the limit is configured to become the activation notice state, for example, within 50 ms after the process of updating the information displayed on the display is completed, or after the process of dispensing the gaming media from the hopper is completed. In other words, the advance notification image is configured to be displayed within 50 ms after the process of updating the information displayed on the display is completed, or after the process of dispensing the gaming media from the hopper is completed.

In other words, it is sufficient that the following formula is satisfied.
The time required to award one gaming medium>the time from the completion of the awarding of gaming media to the display of the advance notification image

By configuring it in this way, the advance notification image is displayed immediately after the dispensing of game media is completed, so the player can recognize that the dispensing of game media for that game is complete. In addition, the player can recognize that the game will soon come to an end.

The timing at which the difference in the game media related to the limit becomes equal to or greater than the first difference and the notification state related to the limit becomes the activation notice state is set to the timing after the granting of game media for the game in which the difference in the game media related to the limit becomes the first difference number (processing corresponding to the determined number of game media to be paid out) is completed, but it may also be set to the timing before the granting of game media for the game in which the difference in the game media related to the limit becomes the first difference number (processing corresponding to the determined number of game media to be paid out).

For example, the timing at which the notification state related to the limit becomes the activation notice state may be before the start of the granting of game media for a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit is the first difference number, or it may be at the start of the granting of game media for a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit is the first difference number, or it may be midway through the granting of game media for a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit is the first difference number.

In addition, even in the AT state, the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage may be small if, for example, a minor role such as a push order role is won through an internal lottery, and even though the player is notified of the operation mode of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player, the player operates the stop switch in a manner that does not follow the content of the notification.

During play in the period of FIG. 78(3), for example, an image such as that shown in FIG. 76(1) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image displayed during play in the period of FIG. 78(3) are as described in FIG. 76(1).

During game standby (also called demo performance) during the period of FIG. 78(3), for example, an image such as that shown in FIG. 76(2) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the demo performance during the period of FIG. 78(3) are as explained in FIG. 76(2). Note that, as explained in the explanation of FIG. 76(2), it is not necessary for a pre-notification image to be displayed when a demo performance is being performed.

In the menu mode during the period of Figure 78 (3), for example, an image such as that shown in Figure 76 (3) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image (menu image) in the menu mode during the period of Figure 78 (3) are as explained in Figure 76 (3). Note that, as explained in the explanation of Figure 76 (3), in the menu mode, the advance warning image does not have to be displayed.

Note that, during the period shown in FIG. 78 (3), when a specific error (e.g., some of the recoverable errors or all of the recoverable errors) occurs and the display device 32 notifies the user that the specific error has occurred, the advance notification image may be configured not to be displayed.

For example, if the front door is opened while an image such as that shown in FIG. 76(1) is displayed on the display device 32, a door open error occurs, and the advance warning image is not displayed (is not visible), but a warning image indicating that the front door is open is displayed. After that, after the front door is closed and the door open error is cleared, an image such as that shown in FIG. 76(1) is displayed on the display device 32 again.

Note that although the above description uses a door open error as the specified error, it is not limited to door open errors. As described above, the same behavior can be achieved for some or all of the recoverable errors.

By configuring it this way, the store staff can pay attention to the content of the error notification and quickly resolve the error that has occurred.

On the other hand, during the period shown in FIG. 78 (3), when a specific error (e.g., some of the recoverable errors or all of the recoverable errors) occurs and the display device 32 notifies the user that a specific error has occurred, the display device 32 may also be configured to display a pre-notification image.

For example, if the front door is opened while an image such as that shown in FIG. 76(1) is displayed on the display device 32, a door open error occurs, and a pre-alarm image and an alarm image indicating that the front door is open are displayed. After that, after the front door is closed to release the door open error, an image such as that shown in FIG. 76(1) is displayed on the display device 32 again.

Note that although the above description uses a door open error as the specified error, it is not limited to door open errors. As described above, the same behavior can be achieved for some or all of the recoverable errors.

By configuring it this way, the store staff can not only know the details of the error that has occurred, but also know that the game will soon be stopped, and can respond quickly when the game is stopped.

<<Figure 78 (4)>>
In the AT state, the difference number of game media related to the limit becomes less than the first difference number as the game progresses, and then the difference number of game media related to the limit does not fall below the second difference number (is equal to or greater than the second difference number). The notification state related to the limit during this period is the operation notice state. Therefore, the advance notification image may be displayed on the display device 32.

The difference in the number of game media related to the limit may decrease even in the AT state if, for example, a minor role such as a push order role is won by an internal lottery, and the player is notified of the operation mode of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player, but the player operates the stop switch in a manner that does not follow the notification. This is also the case in the situation in Figure 78 (5) described later, where the difference in the number of game media related to the limit decreases as the game progresses.

During play in the period of FIG. 78(4), for example, an image such as that shown in FIG. 76(1) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image displayed during play in the period of FIG. 78(4) are as described in FIG. 76(1).

During game standby (also called demo performance) during the period of FIG. 78(4), for example, an image such as that shown in FIG. 76(2) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the demo performance during the period of FIG. 78(4) are as explained in FIG. 76(2). Note that, as explained in the explanation of FIG. 76(2), it is not necessary for a pre-notification image to be displayed when a demo performance is being performed.

In the menu mode during the period of FIG. 78(4), for example, an image such as that shown in FIG. 76(3) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image (menu image) in the menu mode during the period of FIG. 78(4) are as explained in FIG. 76(3). Note that, as explained in the explanation of FIG. 76(3), in the menu mode, the advance warning image does not have to be displayed.

As described above, even if the difference number of gaming media related to the limit falls below the first difference number at which the advance warning image starts to be displayed, the advance warning image is configured to be displayed until the difference number of gaming media related to the limit reaches the second difference number.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which the advance warning image stops being displayed immediately after the difference number of game media exceeds the first difference number and the display of the advance warning image starts. In other words, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the advance warning image display is repeatedly started and ended, making it less annoying for the player.

It is preferable that the difference between the first difference number and the second difference number be greater than the maximum difference number of gaming media in one game.

The maximum difference in the number of gaming media in one game is the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the maximum number of awards (payouts) on that gaming machine. For example, if a gaming machine can pay out 15 coins with a bet of 3 coins, the maximum difference in the number of gaming media in one game is 12, which is 15 minus 3.

By configuring it in this way, for example, when the difference in the gaming media related to the limit is the first difference, if a minor role that can obtain the maximum number of awards is won by an internal lottery, but the player is unable to stop and display the predetermined pattern combination that corresponds to the minor role that can obtain the maximum number of awards by operating the stop switch, the advance notification image can continue to be displayed because the result of one game will not make the difference fall below the second difference.

Moreover, it is more preferable that the difference between the first difference number and the second difference number be greater than 1 time and less than 20 times the maximum difference number of gaming media in one game.

In this embodiment, the first difference number is 18,900, and the second difference number is 18,850. However, the first difference number and the second difference number are not limited to these values, and can be designed as appropriate.

By configuring it in this way, for example, if the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is the first difference, and a minor role that gives the maximum number of awards is won through an internal lottery over multiple plays (e.g., about 20 plays), but the player is unable to stop and display the specified pattern combination corresponding to the minor role that gives the maximum number of awards by operating the stop switch, the difference between the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit and the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit is reached becomes too large, so the advance notification image can be temporarily not displayed.

Note that, during the period shown in FIG. 78 (4), when a specific error (e.g., some of the recoverable errors or all of the recoverable errors) occurs and the display device 32 notifies the user that the specific error has occurred, the pre-notification image may be configured not to be displayed.

For example, if the front door is opened in a situation as shown in FIG. 76(1) (a situation in which an advance warning image is displayed on display device 32), a door open error occurs, and the advance warning image is not displayed (is not visible), and a warning image indicating that the front door is open is displayed on display device 32. After that, after the front door is closed and the door open error is cleared, the situation as shown in FIG. 76(1) (a situation in which an advance warning image is displayed on display device 32) occurs again.

Note that although the above description uses a door open error as the specified error, it is not limited to door open errors. As described above, the same behavior can be achieved for some or all of the recoverable errors.

By configuring it this way, the store staff can pay attention to the content of the error notification and quickly resolve the error that has occurred.

On the other hand, during the period shown in FIG. 78 (4), when a specific error (e.g., some of the recoverable errors or all of the recoverable errors) occurs and the display device 32 notifies the user that a specific error has occurred, the display device 32 may also be configured to display a pre-notification image.

For example, if the front door is opened in a situation as shown in FIG. 76(1) (a situation in which an advance warning image is displayed on the display device 32), a door open error occurs, and the advance warning image and a warning image indicating that the front door is open are displayed on the display device 32. After that, after the front door is closed and the door open error is cleared, the situation as shown in FIG. 76(1) (a situation in which an advance warning image is displayed on the display device 32) occurs again.

Note that although the above description uses a door open error as the specified error, it is not limited to door open errors. As described above, the same behavior can be achieved for some or all of the recoverable errors.

By configuring it this way, the store staff can not only know the details of the error that has occurred, but also know that the game will soon be stopped, and can respond quickly when the game is stopped.

<<Figure 78 (5)>>
The difference number of game media related to the limit becomes smaller as the game progresses, and after it becomes a value below the second difference number, it is a period until the difference number of game media related to the limit becomes the second difference number again (becomes less than the second difference number). The notification state related to the limit during this period is the normal state. Therefore, the advance notification image is not displayed on the display device 32.

During play during the period shown in FIG. 78 (5), for example, an image such as that shown in FIG. 75 (1) is displayed on the display device 32.

During the waiting period (demo screen) in Figure 78 (5), an image such as that shown in Figure 75 (2) is displayed on the display device 32.

In the menu mode during the period shown in FIG. 78(5), for example, an image such as that shown in FIG.
<<Figure 78 (6)>>
In the AT state, the difference number of the game media related to the limit increases as the game progresses, and is the period from when the difference number is equal to or greater than the second difference number until when the difference number reaches the first difference number (below the first difference number). The notification state related to the limit during this period is the normal state. Therefore, the advance notification image is not displayed on the display device 32.

During play during the period shown in FIG. 78 (6), for example, an image such as that shown in FIG. 75 (1) is displayed on the display device 32.

During the waiting period (demo screen) in FIG. 78 (6), an image such as that shown in FIG. 75 (2) is displayed on the display device 32.

In the menu mode during the period shown in Figure 78 (6), for example, an image such as that shown in Figure 75 (3) is displayed on the display device 32.

<<Figure 78 (7)>>
In the AT state, the difference number of game media related to the limit becomes equal to or greater than the first difference number again as the game progresses, and is less than the difference number of game media related to the limit state. The notification state related to the limit during this period is the operation notice state. Therefore, the advance notification image is displayed on the display device 32.

During play in the period of FIG. 78(7), for example, an image such as that shown in FIG. 76(1) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image displayed during play in the period of FIG. 78(7) are as described in FIG. 76(1).

During game standby (also called demo performance) in the period of FIG. 78(7), for example, an image such as that shown in FIG. 76(2) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the demo performance in the period of FIG. 78(7) are as explained in FIG. 76(2). Note that, as explained in the explanation of FIG. 76(2), it is not necessary for a pre-notification image to be displayed when a demo performance is being performed.

In the menu mode during the period of Figure 78 (7), for example, an image such as that shown in Figure 76 (3) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image (menu image) in the menu mode during the period of Figure 78 (7) are as explained in Figure 76 (3). Note that, as explained in the explanation of Figure 76 (3), in the menu mode, the advance warning image does not have to be displayed.

Note that, during the period shown in FIG. 78 (7), when a specific error (e.g., some of the recoverable errors or all of the recoverable errors) occurs and the display device 32 notifies the user that the specific error has occurred, the advance notification image may be configured not to be displayed on the display device 32.

For example, if the front door is opened in a situation as shown in FIG. 76(1) (a situation in which an advance warning image is displayed on display device 32), a door open error occurs, and the advance warning image is not displayed (is not visible), and a warning image indicating that the front door is open is displayed on display device 32. After that, after the front door is closed and the door open error is cleared, the situation as shown in FIG. 76(1) (a situation in which an advance warning image is displayed on display device 32) occurs again.

Note that although the above description uses a door open error as the specified error, it is not limited to door open errors. As described above, the same behavior can be achieved for some or all of the recoverable errors.

By configuring it this way, the store staff can pay attention to the content of the error notification and quickly resolve the error that has occurred.

On the other hand, during the period shown in FIG. 78 (7), when a specific error (e.g., some of the recoverable errors or all of the recoverable errors) occurs and the display device 32 notifies the user that a specific error has occurred, the display device 32 may also be configured to display a pre-notification image.

For example, if the front door is opened in a situation as shown in FIG. 76(1) (a situation in which an advance warning image is displayed on the display device 32), a door open error occurs, and the advance warning image and a warning image indicating that the front door is open are displayed on the display device 32. After that, after the front door is closed and the door open error is cleared, the situation as shown in FIG. 76(1) (a situation in which an advance warning image is displayed on the display device 32) occurs again.

Note that although the above description uses a door open error as the specified error, it is not limited to door open errors. As described above, the same behavior can be achieved for some or all of the recoverable errors.

By configuring it this way, the store staff can not only know the details of the error that has occurred, but also know that the game will soon be stopped, and can respond quickly when the game is stopped.

In other words, as explained in FIG. 78 (4), if the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit becomes equal to or greater than the first difference, but then becomes less than the first difference, and the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit becomes equal to or greater than the second difference, the advance notification image can be displayed.

On the other hand, as explained in FIG. 78 (6), the pre-notification image is not displayed during the period when the difference in the number of game media related to the limit is less than the first difference, even if it is equal to or greater than the second difference. However, as explained in FIG. 78 (7), if the difference again becomes equal to or greater than the first difference, the pre-notification image can be displayed.

By configuring it in this way, the condition for starting to display an advance warning image when no advance warning image is being displayed can be set to when the difference number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds the first difference number, thereby reducing the burden on the control processing of the sub-control means.

In this embodiment, the first difference number is 18,900 and the second difference number is 18,850 (different values), but the first difference number and the second difference number may be the same value. In other words, the difference number of the gaming media related to the limit at which the display of the advance warning image starts and the difference number of the gaming media related to the limit at which the display of the advance warning image ends may be the same value.

In other words, if the first difference number = second difference number = 18900, the advance notification image will be displayed in a game (a certain game) in which the difference number of game media related to the limit is 18901, but if the difference number of game media in a certain game is -3, after the certain game ends, the difference number of game media related to the limit will be 18898, and the advance notification image will no longer be displayed. In other words, the advance notification image will not be displayed in the next game of a certain game.

<Difference in number of gaming media related to limit in bonus gaming state and temporary limit flag>
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the difference in the number of gaming media related to the cap in the bonus gaming state and the temporary cap flag.

The temporary limit flag is as described above. To briefly explain the characteristics of the temporary limit flag, in a gaming machine equipped with a bonus (at least one of type 1 BB, type 2 BB, and RB), if the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit during the bonus game state exceeds 19,000, the temporary limit flag is turned on (a predetermined value is stored in the temporary limit flag storage area).

When the temporary limit flag is on, play can continue until the bonus game state ends, and when the bonus game state ends, the limit flag is turned on based on the temporary limit flag (a predetermined value is stored in the limit flag storage area).

Also, after the stop flag is turned on, the stop state will be entered based on the fact that the stop flag is turned on.

In this embodiment, the situation where a specified value is not stored in the temporary limit flag area is referred to as the temporary limit flag being off, and the situation where a specified value is stored in the temporary limit flag area is referred to as the temporary limit flag being on, for the sake of simplicity.

Similarly, in this embodiment, the situation in which a specified value is not stored in the stop flag area is referred to as the stop flag being off, and the situation in which a specified value is stored in the temporary stop flag area is referred to as the stop flag being on, for the sake of simplicity.

Let's return to the explanation in Figure 79.

First, we will explain an example in which the power was not interrupted during the bonus game mode (the power remained on).

<<If no power outage occurs during bonus play>>
First, the timing corresponding to (1) is a game in which a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus is stopped and displayed. In other words, a bonus game state starts from the next game of (1).

As a result of the game (1), the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is less than 19,000. For example, the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is 18,990.

In addition, as a result of the game (1), the temporary limit flag is off (remains off).

Next, the timing corresponding to (2) is during the bonus game state (not the game where the bonus game state ends) and is a game where the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000. For example, the difference in the number of game media related to the limit is 19,001.

As a result of the game (2), the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000.

In addition, as a result of the game (2), the temporary limit flag is turned on (updated from off to on).

The timing corresponding to (3) is the game in which the bonus game state ends. In other words, it is the game in which the conditions for ending the bonus game state (for example, the number of game media awarded in the bonus game state exceeds 200) are met.

In the game of (3), the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit does not exceed 19,000. For example, the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is 18,991.

In addition, in the game of (3), the temporary limit flag is on (maintaining the information that was on in the game of (2)).

In other words, after the game of (3) is completed (after the payout process of the gaming media is completed), the game will be stopped.

As described above, if the difference in the number of gaming media related to the capping exceeds 19,000 even once during a bonus gaming state, the capping state will be established after the game that ends the bonus gaming state is completed (after the payout process of the gaming media is completed). At this time, it is not determined whether the difference in the number of gaming media related to the capping exceeds 19,000 in the game that ends the bonus gaming state.

In other words, in a game in which the bonus game state ends, even if the difference in the number of game media related to the limit is 19,000, if the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 even once in the bonus game state, the system is configured to enter a limit state after the game in which the bonus game state ends is completed.

By configuring it in this way, if the difference in the number of gaming media related to the capping exceeds 19,000 even once during the bonus game state, it is not necessary to determine again after the bonus ends whether the difference in the number of gaming media related to the capping exceeds 19,000, so the processing time until the capping state is reached can be shortened.

In addition, in gaming machines that automatically settle the number of credits when a cap is reached (including immediately before a cap is reached, when a cap is reached, and immediately after a cap is reached), automatic settlement is not performed after the end of game (2), but is performed after the end of game (3).

Next, we will explain what happens if a power outage occurs while the bonus game mode is being executed.

<<If a power outage occurs during the bonus (Pattern 1)>>
When a power outage occurs during a bonus (pattern 1), this occurs during the game between (1) and (2) in FIG. 79, and then the power is restored and the bonus game continues from where it was.

First, the timing corresponding to (1) is the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus is stopped and displayed. In other words, the bonus game state starts from the next game of (1).

As a result of the game (1), the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is less than 19,000. For example, the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is 18,990.

In addition, as a result of the game (1), the temporary limit flag is off (remains off).

Next, a power outage occurs during the bonus game state. Note that a power outage here refers to a power outage event occurring (for example, the power switch being turned off) and power outage processing (also called power outage processing) being executed.

In addition, the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit when the power outage occurs is less than 19,000. For example, the value of the limit difference counter is 18,998. In other words, it is assumed that a power outage occurs when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is 18,998.

In addition, the temporary limit flag is assumed to be off when a power outage occurs. In other words, after the power is turned on, there is no game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000.

Then, by turning the power on without changing the settings (for example, turning the power switch on with the setting key switch off), the bonus game state will resume from where it left off. For example, if a power outage occurs after the first game has ended since starting the bonus game state, and then the power is turned on without changing the settings, the bonus game state can be resumed from the second game.

However, if the power is turned on without changing the settings, the bonus game state will be resumed from where it left off after the play stop difference counter is reset to its initial value (e.g., 0). In other words, the bonus game state will be resumed from where it left off when the difference in the game media related to the play stop is 0.

In other words, if a power outage does not occur during the bonus game state (between (1) and (2) in FIG. 79), the difference in the number of game media related to the limit will exceed 19,000 as a result of playing (2), and the temporary limit flag will be turned on, resulting in a limit state after the bonus game state ends. However, if a power outage occurs during the bonus game state (between (1) and (2) in FIG. 79), the difference in the number of game media related to the limit will not exceed 19,000 as a result of playing (2) (for example, the difference in the number of game media related to the limit will be 3), so the temporary limit flag will be turned off (remains off), and the limit state will not occur after the bonus game state ends.

By configuring it in this way, when the power is turned on without changing the settings, the initial value can be uniformly stored in the hit difference counter when the power is turned on (power-on process) without determining whether or not the game is in a bonus game state, simplifying the process.

In addition, by configuring it in this way, the initial value is stored in the play stop difference counter (the difference in the number of gaming media related to the play stop is 0), which can prevent problems between players and game store staff who mistakenly believe that the play stop state was caused by a power outage.

<<If a power outage occurs during the bonus (Pattern 2)>>
If a power outage occurs during a bonus (pattern 2), the power outage occurs during the game between (2) and (3) in FIG. 79, and then the power is restored and the bonus game continues from where it was.

First, the timing corresponding to (1) is the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus is stopped and displayed. In other words, the bonus game state starts from the next game of (1).

As a result of the game (1), the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is less than 19,000. For example, the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is 18,990.

In addition, as a result of the game (1), the temporary limit flag is off (remains off).

Next, the timing corresponding to (2) is during the bonus game state (not the game where the bonus game state ends) and is a game where the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000. For example, the difference in the number of game media related to the limit is 19,001.

As a result of the game (2), the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000.

In addition, as a result of the game (2), the temporary limit flag is turned on (updated from off to on).

Next, a power outage occurs during the bonus game state. Note that a power outage here refers to a power outage event occurring (for example, the power switch being turned off) and power outage processing being executed.

In addition, it is assumed that the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit at the time the power outage occurs does not exceed 19,000. For example, it is assumed that the power outage occurs when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is 18,999.

When a power outage occurs, the temporary stop flag is on.

Then, by turning the power on without changing the settings (for example, turning the power switch on with the setting key switch off), the bonus game state will resume from where it left off. For example, if a power outage occurs after the third game has finished since the start of the bonus game state, and then the power is turned on without changing the settings, the bonus game state can be resumed from the fourth game.

However, if the power is turned on without changing the settings, the bonus game state will be resumed from where it left off after the value of the stop difference counter is reset to its initial value (e.g., 0). In other words, the bonus game state will be resumed from where it left off when the difference in the game media related to the stop is 0.

On the other hand, if the power is turned on without changing any settings, the temporary limit flag remains on. In other words, if the power is turned on without changing any settings, the temporary limit flag is not cleared.

Therefore, if a power outage occurs during the bonus game state (between (2) and (3) in Figure 79), even if the stop difference counter is reset to its initial value, the temporary stop flag will be on (remain on), and the game can be stopped after the bonus game state ends.

Note that, although it has been assumed that the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit when a power outage occurs does not exceed 19,000, the same applies when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit when a power outage occurs exceeds 19,000. For example, even if a power outage occurs when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is 19,005, the limit state can be entered after the end of play that meets the conditions to end the bonus game state.

In other words, once the conditions for a halt state are met during the bonus game state (when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the halt exceeds 19,000), the bonus game state can be continued even if a power outage occurs and then the power is turned on without changing the settings, and the halt state can be entered after the end of the game that meets the conditions for ending the bonus game state.

In other words, once the conditions for a stop state are met during the bonus game state (when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the stop state exceeds 19,000), the stop state can be entered regardless of the value of the stop difference counter (the stop state can be entered using the temporary stop flag).

By configuring it in this way, we can provide a gaming machine that cannot increase gambling potential by shutting off the power.

As described above, the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit in the bonus gaming state and the temporary limit flag have been explained using Figure 79, but the same configuration may also be used in a specific state such as an AT state other than the bonus gaming state.

You can also configure it as follows:

(1) If a power outage occurs during a bonus game state, and then the power is turned on without changing the settings, the stop difference counter does not need to be set to its initial value. On the other hand, in a predetermined game state other than the bonus game state (for example, a bonus internal state (a state in which bonus winning information is carried over), etc.), the stop difference counter is set to its initial value.

In other words, the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit may be configured to be maintained in the bonus game state.

For example, if a power outage occurs when the difference in the gaming media related to the stop at the end of a certain game in the bonus game state is 18,900 (e.g., the value of the stop difference counter is 18,900), and the power is then turned on without changing the settings, game play in the bonus game state can be executed from the situation of 18,900 (e.g., the value of the stop difference counter is 18,900).

By configuring it in this way, even if a power outage occurs during the bonus game state, if the power is turned on without changing the settings, the bonus game state can be resumed with the difference in the number of gaming media related to the cap, maintained, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that does not significantly increase the player's gambling tendency.

(2) If the difference in the number of gaming media related to the halt exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state, the halt state may be established after the game ends (after the payout process is completed).

In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media related to the halt during the bonus gaming state exceeds 19,000, the halt may be set even if the game is still in progress before the bonus gaming state ends.

For example, when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the stop at the end of a certain game in the bonus game state is 18999 (e.g., the value of the stop difference counter is 18999), if the difference in the number of gaming media in the next game of the certain game (a game in the bonus game state) becomes 3 (e.g., the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 6), the game will be stopped after the next game of the certain game ends.

When configured in this way, it is not necessary to have a temporary limit flag.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not excessively increase the player's tendency to gamble.

In addition, by configuring it in this way, the capacity of the RWM of the main control means can be reduced compared to when a temporary limit flag is provided.

In addition, by configuring it in this way, it is not necessary to determine whether the current gaming state is a bonus gaming state, which reduces the program capacity of the main control means.

<Advance notification image in bonus game state>
Next, the advance notification image displayed on the display device 32 in the bonus game state will be described with reference to FIG.

In this explanation, we will omit the points that are the same as those in Figure 76 (1) and focus on the distinctive points.

<<Indicating the number of coins remaining until the completion function is activated on the game screen in the bonus game state>>
FIG. 80(1) is an example of a game screen in the bonus game state in which the number of coins remaining until the complete function is activated is notified.

Note that FIG. 80 (1) is an example of a presentation in a situation where the temporary limit flag described above is off. In other words, it is an example of a presentation displayed on the display device 32 when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit has never exceeded 19,000 during the bonus game state (the game before the game shown in FIG. 79 (2)).

As in FIG. 76 (1), PAYOUT, CREDIT, and Total are displayed on the display device 32. Note that Total may be the sum of the number of wins in the AT state and the number of wins in the bonus game state, or Total may display the number of wins in the bonus game state without taking into account the number of wins in the AT state.

An image (presentation) corresponding to the bonus game state is displayed in the center of the display device 32.

The advance notification image is displayed on the upper side of the display device 32, similar to that of FIG. 76 (1). The advance notification image of FIG. 80 (1) is an example of the case where the difference in the number of game media related to the limit is increased by +10 and the difference in the number of game media related to the limit reaches 19,000.

Therefore, the advance warning image shows "10 frames remaining until the complete function is activated."

By configuring it in this way, the player can recognize the difference in the number of gaming media remaining until the game is stopped even in the bonus game state.

The notification state regarding the end of the game when FIG. 80(1) is displayed corresponds to the activation notice state. Therefore, when the sub switch 20 is operated, the same state as FIG. 76(3) will result. The features of FIG. 76(3) are the same as those explained for FIG. 76(3), so an explanation will be omitted. Note that the menu screen may be configured not to be displayed even if the sub switch 20 is operated during a bonus.

Similarly, if a demo screen is displayed during a bonus, the display will be similar to that shown in Figure 76 (2). The features of Figure 76 (2) are the same as those explained in Figure 76 (2), so an explanation will be omitted. Note that the display may be configured so that the demo screen is not displayed during a bonus.

<<Informing that the complete function is activated on the game screen in the bonus game state>>
FIG. 80(2) is an example of notifying that the difference in the number of gaming media related to the capping out has exceeded 19,000 during the bonus game state.

In other words, this is an example of a presentation that is displayed on the display device 32 from when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the cap exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state (a predetermined timing after the end of the game, which is (2) in FIG. 79), until the bonus game state ends.

For example, when the difference in the number of game media related to the limit becomes 19001, the image display of FIG. 80 (2) starts at a predetermined timing after the temporary limit flag is turned on.

In the following explanation, we will omit the points that are the same as those in Figure 80 (1) and focus on the distinctive points.

In Figure 80 (1), the advance notification image displays "10 coins remaining until complete function is activated," whereas in Figure 80 (2), the advance notification image displays "Waiting for complete function to be activated. Complete function will be activated when bonus ends."

In other words, in FIG. 80 (1), a notification is given that allows the player to recognize the difference between the difference in the number of gaming media related to the cap and the difference in the number of gaming media that will result in the capped state, whereas in FIG. 80 (2), a notification is given that allows the player to recognize that the capped state will occur when the bonus game state ends.

By configuring it in this way, if the difference in the number of gaming media related to the termination during the bonus game state exceeds 19,000, it is possible to notify the player in advance of the timing at which the termination will occur. This allows the player to play in the bonus game state with peace of mind.

The notification state regarding the end of the game when FIG. 80(2) is displayed corresponds to the activation notice state. Therefore, when the sub switch 20 is operated, the state becomes the same as FIG. 76(3). The features of FIG. 76(3) are the same as those explained for FIG. 76(3), so an explanation will be omitted. Note that the menu screen may be configured not to be displayed even if the sub switch 20 is operated during a bonus.

Similarly, if a demo screen is displayed during a bonus, the display will be similar to that shown in Figure 76 (2). The features of Figure 76 (2) are the same as those explained in Figure 76 (2), so an explanation will be omitted. Note that the display may be configured so that the demo screen is not displayed during a bonus.

In addition, the notification state related to the end of the bonus game state after the end of the bonus game state will be the end activation notification state.

Therefore, after the bonus game state ends, one of the images in FIG. 77(1), FIG. 77(2), FIG. 77(3), or FIG. 77(4) is displayed. In other words, the image notifying the capped state when the difference in the number of game media related to the cap exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state and the image notifying the capped state when the difference in the number of game media related to the cap exceeds 19,000 in other states (for example, the AT state) are configured to be the same image.

Note that the features of Figures 77(1), 77(2), 77(3), and 77(4) are the same as those explained in Figures 77(1), 77(2), 77(3), and 77(4), and therefore will be omitted here.

If the sub switch 20 is operated during the stall state, the behavior will be the same as that shown in FIG. 77(6). The features of FIG. 77(6) are the same as those explained for FIG. 77(6), so an explanation will be omitted. Note that the sub switch 20 may be configured to be inoperable (the menu screen is not displayed) during the stall state.

Similarly, if the specifications are such that a demo screen is displayed during a pause state, the appearance will be the same as that of Figure 77 (5). The features of Figure 77 (5) are the same as those explained in Figure 77 (5), so explanations will be omitted. Note that the configuration may be such that the demo screen is not displayed during a pause state.

<When power-off processing is executed in a game where the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000>
Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85 each explain, using an example, the control processing that corresponds to the timing when the power-off processing (also referred to as power-off processing) is executed in a game in which the notification state related to the limit before the start of the game (before the specified number of bets is made and the start switch is operated) is in the activation notice state, and the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 as a result of playing the game.

81, 82, 83, 84, and 85 are, for example, predetermined game states that are not bonus states, and correspond to a situation in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit before the start of the game (before the specified number of bets is made and the start switch is operated) is 18,999. Also, in this game, the number of bets is 3, as a result of the internal lottery, a minor role in the push order role is won, the operation mode of the stop switch is operated in the correct push order, and a symbol combination with 11 awarded game media is stopped and displayed. Note that the difference in the number of game media related to the limit, the result of the internal lottery, the number of awarded game media, etc. are merely examples and are not limited to these.

In addition, the occurrence of a power outage in Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85 refers to the occurrence of an event that causes the power to the gaming machine to be turned off (power outage), such as the power switch being turned off, the power being unplugged, or the power to the gaming facility going out.

In addition, the power interruption processing in Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85 refers to the main control means detecting the occurrence of a power interruption and executing the power interruption processing. For example, the time required from the occurrence of a power interruption to the power interruption processing is designed to take an average of 1 ms to 20 ms. Also, the power interruption processing is designed to be completed in an average of 0.5 ms.

In addition, power-on in Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85 refers to the occurrence of an event that turns the power to the gaming machine on (power recovery), such as turning on the power switch, plugging a power source that has been unplugged back into the outlet, or turning on the power to an amusement parlor that has been shut down.

The power-on process in Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85 refers to power-on without changing settings. Specifically, this refers to the process that is executed when the power switch is turned on while the setting key switch is off.

The payout process in Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85 refers to the process from when the number of game media to be awarded is determined to when the process corresponding to the determined number of game media to be awarded is completed.

The "processing corresponding to the determined number of gaming media to be paid out" includes the processing of updating the information displayed on the payout number display (also called the number of coins won display), the processing of updating the information displayed on the credit number display, the processing of updating the information displayed on the display capable of showing the total score (also called the total score display), and the processing of paying out gaming media from the hopper.

Note that "the process of updating the information displayed on the display" refers to the process of sequentially updating the value displayed on the display, such as "0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "11" when paying out (awarding) 11 gaming media. For example, the time required to update the value by "1" is designed to be an average of 50 ms. Also, the time required to pay out one gaming medium from the hopper is designed to be an average of 50 ms.

Therefore, for example, when paying out (awarding) 11 gaming media, the time required for "processing corresponding to the determined number of gaming media to be paid out" is designed to be an average of 550 ms (11 x 50 ms).

As a result, the time required for the payout process corresponds to the time from when the number of gaming media to be awarded is determined to when the processing corresponding to the determined number of gaming media to be awarded is completed.

In addition, as the notification state related to the end of the game in Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85, in the case of an activation notice state, it is assumed that the device is configured to be able to execute a performance corresponding to the activation notice state described above.

Similarly, as for the notification state related to the end of the game in Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85, in the normal state, it is assumed that the above-mentioned performance corresponding to the normal state can be executed.

<<When power-off processing is executed after the end of a game payout process in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000>>
81 is a diagram showing an example of a case where a power-off process is executed after a payout process is completed for a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19000. Here, "after the payout process is completed" corresponds to, for example, a certain timing after the payout process is completed, a limit monitoring process is executed, and the limit monitoring process is completed, and before the limit state is reached (before a notification of the limit is executed), etc.

First, the notification state related to the end of the game before the start of the game (before the specified number of bets is made and the start switch is operated) is the operation notice state. The difference in the number of game media related to the end of the game at this time is assumed to be, for example, 18,999. The value stored in the stop difference counter related to the end of the game at this time is assumed to be, for example, 18,999.

Next, a bet of Y (Y is a numerical value) is placed as the number of bets, and as a result of the internal lottery, a predetermined lottery result (so-called a minor prize) is won. Then, the stop switch is operated in a manner that allows a symbol combination that can award a payout of X (X is a numerical value, satisfying Y<X) as the number of gaming media to be played to be stopped. For example, Y is 3 and X is 11. In other words, the difference in the number of gaming media for that game is 8.

Then, after the last stop switch (e.g., the third stop switch) is released, the payout process begins, awarding X gaming media as the number of awards.

A power outage occurs during the payout process to award X gaming media.

After X is awarded as the number of game media awarded, the power failure processing is started. Note that the limit monitoring processing is assumed to have ended before the power failure processing is started. Also, the notification state related to the limit is assumed to be the activation notification state.

Then, when the power is turned on and the power-on process is executed, the notification state related to the stop is the operation notification state (remains in the operation notification state). In addition, the control in the main control means is controlled so that the stop state is established after the power-on process is executed.

When the power-on process is executed, the strike-stop difference counter is configured to be set to an initial value (e.g., 0).

As described above, even if a power outage occurs during the payout process, if the stop monitoring process has ended before the power outage process begins, the notification state related to the stop after the power is turned on can be the operating notification state.

By configuring it in this way, the notification state regarding the end of play after power is restored and the control state of the main control means after power is restored can be made appropriate, reducing trouble between players and gaming facility staff.

<<When a power-off process is executed during a payout process for a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 (1)>>
82 is a diagram showing an example of a case where a power-off process is executed during a payout process of a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19000. Here, the middle of a payout process corresponds to a certain timing from when the number of game media to be awarded is determined to when the process corresponding to the determined number of game media to be awarded is completed.

First, we will explain Figure 82(a).

First, the notification state related to the end of the game before the start of the game (before the specified number of bets is made and the start switch is operated) is the operation notice state. The difference in the number of game media related to the end of the game at this time is assumed to be, for example, 18,999. The value stored in the stop difference counter related to the end of the game at this time is assumed to be, for example, 18,999.

Next, a bet of Y (Y is a numerical value) is placed as the number of bets, and as a result of the internal lottery, a predetermined lottery result (so-called a minor prize) is won. Then, the stop switch is operated in an operation mode that can stop a symbol combination that can award X (X is a numerical value, satisfying Y<X) as the number of game media to be awarded. For example, Y is 3 and X is 11. In other words, the difference in the number of game media for that game is 8.

Then, after the last stop switch (e.g., the third stop switch) is released, the payout process begins, awarding X gaming media as the number of awards.

A power outage occurs during the payout process to award X gaming media.

In addition, the power failure process is started in the middle of the payout process in which X is awarded as the number of gaming media to be awarded. In other words, the power failure process is started before the payout process ends.

Then, the power is turned on, and after the power-on process is executed, the notification state related to the halt becomes the operation advance notification state (remains in the operation advance notification state). In addition, after the power-on process is executed, the control in the main control means starts in the middle of the payout process (continuing the payout process that was being performed before the power-off process was executed).

Note that "starting from the middle of the payout process (the continuation of the payout process that was being carried out before the power outage process was executed)" refers to, for example, when the power outage process is executed between command A and command B (command B is the next command after command A is executed) among the multiple commands that make up the payout process, execution will start from command B.

In addition, when the power-on process is executed, the value stored in the strike-stop difference counter is configured to be set to an initial value (e.g., 0).

In addition, when the payout process is completed and the stop monitoring process is executed, the value stored in the stop difference counter becomes the difference in the number of game media for that game. In other words, if the number of bets is Y and the number of payouts is X, a value corresponding to X-Y is stored in the stop difference counter.

Therefore, the game will not be stopped after the game ends. In other words, the next game can be played.

As described above, if a power outage occurs during a payout process and power outage processing occurs during the payout process, the payout process can be resumed from where it left off after the power is turned back on. Furthermore, after the payout process is completed, the next game can be played without entering a stopped state. Furthermore, the notification state related to the stoppage after the payout process is completed can be the normal state rather than the operation notification state.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of trouble between players and gaming store staff, compared to gaming machines in which a power outage occurs in the middle of a payout process, and the game is stopped when the power is turned on after the power is turned off in the middle of a payout process. Specifically, it is possible to prevent trouble with players who think that the game has been stopped because a power outage occurred in the middle of a payout process.

Next, we will explain Figure 82(b). Note that we will omit the explanation of the parts that are the same as Figure 82(a).

In FIG. 82(a), the notification state regarding the termination after the power-on process is executed is the operation preview state, whereas in FIG. 82(b), the notification state regarding the termination after the power-on process is executed is the normal state.

In other words, in FIG. 82(a), during the payout process that is executed after the power is turned on, a presentation corresponding to the operation preview state is executed, whereas in FIG. 82(b), during the payout process that is executed after the power is turned on, a presentation corresponding to the normal state is executed.

By configuring it as shown in Figure 82 (b), the advance notification image is not displayed during the performance executed during the payout process, so after turning on the power, the player can immediately recognize that the game will not end and can continue playing without any doubts.

<<When a power-off process is executed during a payout process for a game in which the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 (2)>>
83 is a diagram showing an example of a case where a power-off process is executed during a payout process of a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19000. Here, the middle of a payout process corresponds to a certain timing from when the number of game media to be awarded is determined to when the process corresponding to the determined number of game media to be awarded is completed.

First, we will explain Figure 83(a).

First, the notification state related to the end of the game before the start of the game (before the specified number of bets is made and the start switch is operated) is the operation notice state. The difference in the number of game media related to the end of the game at this time is assumed to be, for example, 18,999. The value stored in the stop difference counter related to the end of the game at this time is assumed to be, for example, 18,999.

Next, a bet of Y (Y is a numerical value) is placed as the number of bets, and as a result of the internal lottery, a predetermined lottery result (so-called a minor prize) is won. Then, the stop switch is operated in an operation mode that can stop a symbol combination that can award X (X is a numerical value, satisfying Y<X) as the number of game media to be awarded. For example, Y is 3 and X is 11. In other words, the difference in the number of game media for that game is 8.

Then, a power outage occurs before the last stop switch (e.g., the third stop switch) is released. For example, a power outage occurs after the last stop switch is operated and while the last stop switch continues to be operated. In other words, at the time the power outage occurs, the symbol combination that can award X as the number of gaming media to be awarded has stopped. However, the payout process has not started.

After the last stop switch operation is released, the payout process begins, awarding X gaming media.

In addition, power outage processing is started in the middle of the payout process in which X is awarded as the number of game media. In other words, power outage processing is started before the payout process ends.

Then, the power is turned on, and after the power-on process is executed, the notification state related to the halt becomes the operation advance notification state (remains in the operation advance notification state). In addition, after the power-on process is executed, the control in the main control means starts in the middle of the payout process (continuing the payout process that was being performed before the power-off process was executed).

Note that "starting from the middle of the payout process (the continuation of the payout process that was being carried out before the power outage process was executed)" refers to, for example, when the power outage process is executed between command A and command B (command B is the next command after command A is executed) among the multiple commands that make up the payout process, execution will start from command B.

In addition, when the power-on process is executed, the value stored in the strike-stop difference counter is configured to be set to an initial value (e.g., 0).

In addition, when the payout process is completed and the stop monitoring process is executed, the value stored in the stop difference counter becomes the difference in the game media for that game. In other words, if the number of bets is Y and the number of awards is X, a value corresponding to X-Y is stored in the stop difference counter related to the stop.

Therefore, the game will not be stopped after the game ends. In other words, the next game can be played.

As described above, if a power outage occurs while the payout process has not started but the symbol combination that can award X as the number of gaming media to be awarded is stopped, and power outage processing occurs during the payout process, the payout process can be resumed from where it left off after the power is turned back on. Also, after the payout process is completed, the next game can be played without entering a stopped state. Also, the notification state related to the stoppage after the payout process is completed can be the normal state rather than the operation notification state.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of trouble between players and gaming store staff compared to a gaming machine in which a power outage occurs when the payout process has not started but the symbol combination that can award X as the number of gaming media to be awarded has stopped, the power outage process is performed in the middle of the payout process, and the game is stopped when the power is then turned on. Specifically, it is possible to prevent trouble with players who think that the game is stopped because the power outage occurred before the payout process.

Next, we will explain Figure 83(b). Note that we will omit the explanation of the parts that are the same as Figure 83(a).

In FIG. 83(a), the notification state regarding the termination after the power-on process is executed is the operation advance notification state, whereas in FIG. 83(b), the notification state regarding the termination after the power-on process is executed is the normal state.

In other words, in FIG. 83(a), during the payout process that is executed after the power is turned on, a presentation corresponding to the operation advance notification state is executed, whereas in FIG. 83(b), during the payout process that is executed after the power is turned on, a presentation corresponding to the normal state is executed.

By configuring it as shown in Figure 83 (b), the advance notification image is not displayed during the performance executed during the payout process, so after turning on the power, the player can immediately recognize that the game will not end and can continue playing without any doubts.

<<When a power-off process is executed before a payout process for a game in which the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 (1)>>
Fig. 84 is a diagram showing an example in which a power-off process is executed before a payout process of a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19000. In Fig. 84, "before the payout process" corresponds to a certain timing from when the symbol combination that awards game media stops to when the number of game media to be awarded is determined.

First, we will explain Figure 84(a).

First, the notification state regarding the end of the game before the game starts (before the specified number of bets is made and the start switch is operated) is the operation notice state. The difference in the number of game media related to the end of the game at this time is assumed to be, for example, 18,999. The value stored in the stop difference counter at this time is assumed to be, for example, 18,999.

Next, a bet of Y (Y is a numerical value) is placed as the number of bets, and as a result of the internal lottery, a predetermined lottery result (so-called a minor prize) is won. Then, the stop switch is operated in an operating mode capable of stopping a symbol combination that awards X (X is a numerical value, satisfying Y<X) as the number of game media to be awarded. For example, Y is 3 and X is 11. In other words, the difference in the number of game media for that game is 8.

Then, a power outage occurs before the last stop switch (e.g., the third stop switch) is released. For example, a power outage occurs after the last stop switch is operated and while the last stop switch continues to be operated. In other words, at the time the power outage occurs, the symbol combination that can award X as the number of gaming media to be awarded has stopped.

Also, before the last stop switch is released (while the last stop switch is still being operated), power failure processing begins.

Before the power is turned on (while the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off), the final stop switch operation is released.

Then, the power is turned on, the power-on process is executed, and then the payout process is executed. Also, the notification state regarding the halt of the payout process while the payout process is being executed is the operation notification state (it remains in the operation notification state).

When the power-on process is executed, the value stored in the strike-stop difference counter is configured to be set to an initial value (e.g., 0).

In addition, when the payout process is completed and the stop monitoring process is executed, the value stored in the stop difference counter becomes the difference in the game media for that game. In other words, if the number of bets is Y and the number of awards is X, a value corresponding to X-Y is stored in the stop difference counter related to the stop.

Therefore, the game will not be stopped after the game ends. In other words, the next game can be played.

As described above, if a power outage occurs while the payout process has not started but the symbol combination that can award X as the number of gaming media to be awarded is stopped, and power outage processing occurs before the payout process, the payout process can be started after the power is turned back on. Furthermore, after the payout process is completed, the next game can be played without entering a stopped state. Furthermore, the notification state related to the stoppage after the payout process is completed can be the normal state, not the operation advance notification state.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of trouble between players and gaming store staff, compared to a gaming machine in which a power outage occurs when the payout process has not started but the symbol combination that can award X as the number of gaming media to be awarded has stopped, the power outage process is performed before the payout process starts, and then the machine is powered on after the final stop switch operation is released, resulting in a stopped state. Specifically, it is possible to prevent trouble with players who think that the game has stopped because the power outage occurred before the payout process.

Next, we will explain Figure 84(b). Note that we will omit the explanation of the parts that are the same as Figure 84(a).

In FIG. 84(a), the notification state regarding the termination after the power-on process is executed is the operation advance notification state, whereas in FIG. 84(b), the notification state regarding the termination after the power-on process is executed is the normal state.

In other words, in FIG. 84(a), the payout process executed after the power is turned on produces an effect corresponding to the operation advance notification state, whereas in FIG. 84(b), the payout process executed after the power is turned on produces an effect corresponding to the normal state.

By configuring it as shown in Figure 84 (b), the advance notification image is not displayed during the performance executed in the payout process, so after turning on the power, the player can immediately recognize that play will not end, and can continue playing without any doubts.

<<When a power-off process is executed before a payout process for a game in which the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 (2)>>
85 is a diagram showing an example of a case where a power-off process is executed before a payout process of a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19000. In FIG. 85, "before the payout process" corresponds to a certain timing from when the symbol combination that awards game media stops to when the number of game media to be awarded is determined.

First, let us explain Figure 85(a).

First, the notification state regarding the end of the game before the start of the game (before the specified number of bets is made and the start switch is operated) is the operation advance notification state. The difference in the number of game media related to the end of the game at this time is assumed to be, for example, 18,999. The value stored in the stop difference counter at this time is assumed to be, for example, 18,999.

Next, a bet of Y (Y is a numerical value) is placed as the number of bets, and as a result of the internal lottery, a predetermined lottery result (so-called a minor prize) is won. Then, the stop switch is operated in an operating mode capable of stopping a symbol combination that awards X (X is a numerical value, satisfying Y<X) as the number of game media to be awarded. For example, Y is 3 and X is 11. In other words, the difference in the number of game media for that game is 8.

Then, a power outage occurs before the last stop switch (e.g., the third stop switch) is released. For example, a power outage occurs after the last stop switch is operated and while the last stop switch continues to be operated. In other words, at the time the power outage occurs, the symbol combination that can award X as the number of gaming media to be awarded has stopped.

Also, before the last stop switch is released (while the last stop switch is still being operated), power failure processing begins.

Next, the power is turned on. At this point, the final stop switch is still being operated.

The final stop switch operation is released while the power-on process is in progress.

After the power-on process is executed, the payout process is executed. Also, the notification state regarding the halt of the payout process while it is being executed is the operation advance notification state (it remains in the operation advance notification state).

When the power-on process is executed, the value stored in the strike-stop difference counter is configured to be set to an initial value (e.g., 0).

In addition, when the payout process is completed and the stop monitoring process is executed, the value stored in the stop difference counter becomes the difference in the number of game media for that game. In other words, if the number of bets is Y and the number of payouts is X, a value corresponding to X-Y is stored in the stop difference counter.

Therefore, the game will not be stopped after the game ends. In other words, the next game can be played.

As described above, if a power outage occurs while the payout process has not started but the symbol combination that can award X as the number of gaming media to be awarded is stopped, and power outage processing occurs before the payout process, the payout process can be started after the power is turned back on. Furthermore, after the payout process is completed, the next game can be played without entering a stopped state. Furthermore, the notification state related to the stoppage after the payout process is completed can be the normal state, not the operation advance notification state.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of trouble between players and gaming store staff, compared to a gaming machine in which a power outage occurs when the payout process has not started but the symbol combination that can award X as the number of gaming media to be awarded has stopped, the power outage process is performed before the payout process starts, and then the power is turned on and the final stop switch operation is released during the power-on process, resulting in a stopped state. Specifically, it is possible to prevent trouble with players who think that the stop state has occurred because the power outage occurred before the payout process.

Next, we will explain Figure 85(b). Note that we will omit the explanation of the parts that are the same as Figure 85(a).

In FIG. 85(a), the notification state regarding the termination after the power-on process is executed is the operation advance notification state, whereas in FIG. 85(b), the notification state regarding the termination after the power-on process is executed is the normal state.

In other words, in FIG. 85(a), the payout process executed after the power is turned on produces an effect corresponding to the operation advance notification state, whereas in FIG. 85(b), the payout process executed after the power is turned on produces an effect corresponding to the normal state.

By configuring it as shown in Figure 85 (b), the advance notification image is not displayed during the performance executed in the payout process, so after turning on the power, the player can immediately recognize that play will not end, and can continue playing without any doubts.

<Number of gaming media awarded to a player in a game that reaches a halt>
When a game is executed when the difference in the number of game media related to the limit is X, and the result of adding the difference in the number of game media (A) of the game to the difference in the number of game media related to the limit (X) exceeds the difference in the number of game media (Y) until the limit is reached, the number of game media provided to the player will be described. In other words, this is a game that satisfies X+A>Y.

In the following, we will use specific numerical values to make the technical details easier to understand.

For example, the difference in the number of gaming media related to the cap is 18,999 (corresponding to X in the above formula), the difference in the number of gaming media for the game is 8 (corresponding to A in the above formula. Note that the number of bets is 3 and the number of gaming media awarded is 11), and the difference in the number of gaming media until the cap is reached is 19,000 (corresponding to Y in the above formula). Note that the various numerical values are merely examples and are not limited to these.

<<Pattern 1: End of game after all determined game media have been awarded>>
Pattern 1 is a pattern in which, when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the cap is 18,999, three coins are bet and a game is played, as a result of which a predetermined symbol combination which can award 11 gaming media is displayed in a stopped state, and after 11 gaming media are awarded, the cap is reached after the game ends.

In other words, in pattern 1, even if the number of game media exceeds 19,000, which is the difference in the number of game media until the limit is reached, the player is awarded all of the determined number of game media. Then, after the awarding of game media has finished, the limit is reached.

By configuring it like pattern 1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not put players at an excessive disadvantage by reaching a dead end.

When the game media is being dispensed, a pre-notification image is configured to be displayed. However, when the game media is being dispensed, an operation notification image may be displayed instead of the pre-notification image.

<<<<When a specified error occurs during the dispensing of gaming media in a game that results in a stopped state of Pattern 1>>>
In pattern 1, if a specified error (e.g., a hopper empty error) occurs before the awarding of more than 19,000 game media, which is the difference in the number of game media from the start of the awarding of game media to the end of the awarding state (e.g., the difference in the number of game media related to the end of the awarding state is 18,999), the main control means executes error processing corresponding to the specified error (e.g., processing to display an error code corresponding to the hopper empty error).

When the main control means is executing an error process corresponding to a predetermined error, the sub-control means displays an image corresponding to the predetermined error. Note that when the sub-control means is displaying an image corresponding to a predetermined error, it is not necessary to display a pre-notification image. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the sub-control means to notify the occurrence of a predetermined error without requiring complex control processing.

On the other hand, when the sub-control means is displaying an image corresponding to a specified error, the sub-control means may also display a pre-notification image. By configuring it in this way, the store attendant can know that the machine is approaching a dead-end state, and can also know that a specified error has occurred.

In addition, in pattern 1, if a specified error (e.g., a hopper empty error) occurs after more than 19,000 game media, which is the difference in the number of game media from the start of the game media dispensing until the end of the dispensing state (e.g., the difference in the number of game media related to the end of the dispensing is 19,001), the main control means executes error processing corresponding to the specified error (e.g., processing to display an error code corresponding to the hopper empty error).

When the main control means is executing an error process corresponding to a predetermined error, the sub-control means displays an image corresponding to the predetermined error. Note that when the sub-control means is displaying an image corresponding to a predetermined error, it is not necessary to display a pre-notification image. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the sub-control means to notify the occurrence of a predetermined error without requiring complex control processing.

On the other hand, when the sub-control means is displaying an image corresponding to a specified error, the sub-control means may also display a pre-notification image. By configuring it in this way, the store attendant can know that the game is nearing a dead end, and can also know that a specified error has occurred.

When the sub-control means is displaying an image corresponding to a specified error, the sub-control means may display an operation notification image instead of the advance notification image. By configuring in this way, the store staff can know that the game will be stopped and can also know that a specified error has occurred.

Note that, although a hopper empty error has been used as an example of a specified error, the specified error is not limited to a hopper empty error, and may be a recoverable error such as a door open error.

<<Pattern 2-1: End of game after part of determined number of game media to be awarded>>
Pattern 2-1 is a pattern in which, when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the cap is 18,999, three coins are bet and the game is played, a predetermined symbol combination which can award 11 gaming media is displayed in a stopped state, and the cap is reached after five gaming media are awarded.

In other words, in pattern 2-1, the limit is reached when the number of gaming media reaches 19001, exceeding 19000, which is the difference in the number of gaming media required to reach the limit. In other words, not all of the determined number of gaming media to be awarded has been awarded to the player.

By configuring it as in pattern 2-1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can make the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit is reached uniform.

When the game media is being dispensed, a pre-notification image is configured to be displayed. However, when the game media is being dispensed, an operation notification image may be displayed instead of the pre-notification image.

<<Pattern 2-2: End of game after part of determined number of game media to be awarded>>
Pattern 2-2 is a pattern in which, when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the cap is 18,999, three coins are bet and the game is played, a predetermined symbol combination which can award 11 gaming media is displayed in a stopped state, and the cap is reached after four gaming media are awarded.

In other words, in pattern 2-2, the limit is reached when the difference in the number of gaming media to be awarded reaches 19,000. In other words, not all of the determined number of gaming media to be awarded has been awarded to the player.

By configuring it as in pattern 2-2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can make the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit is reached uniform.

When the game media is being dispensed, a pre-notification image is configured to be displayed. However, when the game media is being dispensed, an operation notification image may be displayed instead of the pre-notification image.

<<<<When a Prescribed Error Occurs During the Granting of Gaming Media in a Game That Ends in Pattern 2-1 or Pattern 2-2>>>
In pattern 2-1 or pattern 2-2, if a specified error (e.g., a hopper empty error) occurs before the awarding of more than 19,000 game media, which is the difference in the number of game media from the start of the awarding of game media to the end of the awarding state (e.g., the difference in the number of game media related to the end of the awarding state is 18,999), the main control means executes error processing corresponding to the specified error (e.g., processing to display an error code corresponding to the hopper empty error).

When the main control means is executing an error process corresponding to a predetermined error, the sub-control means displays an image corresponding to the predetermined error. Note that when the sub-control means is displaying an image corresponding to a predetermined error, it is not necessary to display a pre-notification image. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the sub-control means to notify the occurrence of a predetermined error without requiring complex control processing.

On the other hand, when the sub-control means is displaying an image corresponding to a specified error, the sub-control means may also display a pre-notification image. By configuring it in this way, the store attendant can know that the machine is approaching a dead-end state, and can also know that a specified error has occurred.

Note that, although a hopper empty error has been used as an example of a specified error, the specified error is not limited to a hopper empty error, and may be a recoverable error such as a door open error.

<If a specified error occurs during automatic settlement>
Next, in a gaming machine that performs automatic settlement when a game is stopped, an example of a notification when a predetermined error occurs during automatic settlement will be described with reference to Figures 86 and 87. Note that, although a hopper empty error will be used as an example of the predetermined error, the predetermined error is not limited to a hopper empty error, and may be a recoverable error such as a door open error.

For example, assume that in a non-bonus state (a specified gaming state), after a game in which the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit has exceeded 19,000 has ended (after the limit monitoring process has ended), the credit number display shows 50. Then, when automatic settlement is started, settlement of the 50 gaming media displayed on the credit number display begins. Specifically, the value displayed on the credit number display is decremented by one each time, such as 50, 49, 48, ..., 0, as a result of automatic settlement. Also, as the value displayed on the credit number display is decremented by one, gaming media are returned one by one through the return port.

If a hopper empty error occurs during this automatic settlement, the main control means executes error processing (processing to display an error code corresponding to the hopper empty error). For example, assume that a hopper empty error occurs when the credit number display shows 30 (after 20 gaming media have been automatically settled).

<<When a specified error (hopper empty error) occurs during automatic settlement (1)>>
Figure 86 (1) shows an example in which automatic settlement is performed after the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 (after the limit monitoring process is completed), and a hopper empty error occurs during this automatic settlement.

In FIG. 86 (1), the completion function operation notification period is in progress while automatic settlement is in progress. In other words, the notification state related to the stoppage during automatic settlement is an operation notification state. In other words, the system is configured to be able to execute a notification corresponding to the operation notification state while automatic settlement is in progress. Note that it is possible to adopt a notification mode such as that shown in FIG. 77 (3) as a notification mode corresponding to the operation notification state while automatic settlement is in progress. In other words, while automatic settlement is in progress, a notification is issued that the stoppage state has occurred and that automatic settlement is in progress.

When a hopper empty error occurs during the execution of this automatic settlement (for example, when the credit number display shows 30), the sub-control means can adopt any one of the following notification modes (a), (b), or (c).

(a) The normal hopper empty error (also called HE error) screen is displayed. At this time, information (images) related to the complete function cannot be seen.

The specific notification mode of the above (A) is shown in Figure 87 (A).

Figure 87 (A) shows an image that is also displayed when a hopper empty error occurs in a situation that is not at the end of the game (for example, when the difference in the number of game media related to the end of the game is 10).

In other words, the occurrence of a hopper empty error is notified in the same manner whether it occurs when the hopper is in a stalled state or when the hopper empty error occurs when the hopper is not in a stalled state.

By configuring it in this way, even if a hopper empty error occurs during a stoppage, it is possible to notify the user that a hopper empty error has occurred without requiring complex control processing.

(a) The normal hopper empty error (also called HE error) screen is displayed. At this time, information (images) related to the complete function can be seen.

The specific image display form of (a) above is shown in Figure 87 (a).

Figure 87 (a) is composed of an image that is displayed even if a hopper empty error occurs in a situation where the game is not at capacity (for example, when the difference in the number of game media related to the capacity is 10), and an image indicating that the game is at capacity (the image "Complete function is operating, please call an attendant").

In other words, the same image is used when a hopper empty error occurs in a stuck state and when a hopper empty error occurs in a non-stuck state. However, when a stuck state occurs, an image indicating that the stuck state is also displayed.

By configuring it this way, even if a hopper empty error occurs during a stalled state, it is possible to notify the player that a hopper empty error has occurred and that a stalled state has occurred without requiring complex control processing. In other words, the gaming store clerk will also be able to understand that a stalled state will occur after the hopper empty error is cleared, saving the player and the gaming store clerk the trouble (the player having to call the gaming store clerk again after the error is cleared).

(c) Information (images) related to the complete function are displayed. At this time, information (images) related to the hopper empty error can be visually confirmed.

A specific image display form for (c) above is shown in Figure 87 (c).

Figure 87 (c) shows a notification of a hopper empty error in a manner different from the image (Figure 87 (a)) that is displayed when a hopper empty error occurs in a situation where the game is not at capacity (for example, when the difference in the number of game media related to the capacity is 10). In addition, an image indicating that the game is at capacity (an image of "Complete function in operation, please call an attendant") is displayed.

The image indicating this stalled state may be the image that was displayed before the hopper empty error occurred, or it may be an image that is different from the image that was displayed before the hopper empty error occurred.

In other words, different images are used when a hopper empty error occurs in a stalled state and when a hopper empty error occurs in a non-stalled state. Also, when a stalled state occurs, an image indicating that the stalled state is displayed. Note that the image indicating that the stalled state is present may be the same as that shown in FIG. 77 (3) (however, the message "Press PUSH to display the menu screen" in FIG. 77 (3) does not need to be displayed).

By configuring it this way, if a hopper empty error occurs during a stalled state, it is possible to notify the player that a hopper empty error has occurred, and also to notify the player that a stalled state has occurred. In other words, the gaming store clerk can also understand that a stalled state will occur after the hopper empty error is cleared, which saves the player and the gaming store clerk the trouble of having to call the gaming store clerk again after the error is cleared.

In addition, if the image indicating that the supply is stalled is the image that was displayed before the hopper empty error occurred, the burden of the display process can be reduced, and a notification can be given that a hopper empty error has occurred as well as a notification that the supply is stalled.

As in (i) and (iii) above, if a hopper empty error occurs while automatic settlement is being performed, a notification will be sent to inform you that a hopper empty error has occurred and that the settlement has been halted.

In the above (a), (b), and (c), after the hopper empty error is cleared, automatic settlement will be resumed from where it left off. In this case, the same presentation as before the hopper empty error occurs will be executed. In other words, instead of notifying the user that a hopper empty error has occurred, the user will be notified that the game has been stopped and that automatic settlement is in progress.

When automatic settlement is complete, a notification that the transaction has been stopped is executed (continued). In other words, the notification that automatic settlement is being executed is terminated.

If power interruption processing (also called power off processing) is executed while automatic settlement is being performed, and then the power is turned on (setting key switch off, power switch on) without changing the settings, automatic settlement will be resumed from where it was before the power on processing was executed. In this case, the same presentation as before the power off processing was executed is executed. In other words, it notifies you that automatic settlement is being executed.

After that, when automatic settlement ends, the service will be stopped.

In addition, if a hopper empty error occurs during automatic settlement and the main control means is executing error processing (processing to display an error code corresponding to the hopper empty error), power interruption processing (also called power cut processing) is executed, and then if power is turned on (setting key switch off, power switch on) without changing settings, error processing (processing to display an error code corresponding to the hopper empty error) will be resumed after the power on processing is executed.

After that, after the hopper empty error is cleared, automatic settlement will resume from where it left off. In this case, the same presentation as before the hopper empty error occurred will be executed. In other words, there will be no notification that a hopper empty error has occurred, but rather a notification that automatic settlement is being executed.

After that, when automatic settlement ends, the service will be stopped.

In this way, if power failure processing is performed while automatic settlement is being performed, or if a hopper empty error occurs while automatic settlement is being performed and power failure processing is performed while error processing is being performed, if power is turned on without changing settings, the system is configured to resume from where it left off before power failure processing was performed after power-on processing.

In other words, the power-on process resets the stop difference counter related to the stop to an initial value (e.g., 0), but the device is configured to enter a stop state.

<<When a specified error (hopper empty error) occurs during automatic settlement (2)>>
Figure 86 (2) shows an example in which automatic settlement is performed after the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 (after the limit monitoring process is completed), and a hopper empty error occurs during this automatic settlement.

In FIG. 86 (2), the completion function operation notification period does not occur while automatic settlement is in progress. In other words, the notification state related to the termination of automatic settlement during its execution is not an operation notification state. In other words, there is no notification that termination has occurred while automatic settlement is in progress.

When automatic settlement is being performed, the effect may be, for example, an effect corresponding to the activation advance notification state as shown in FIG. 76 (A) (display of "XX coins remaining until complete function is activated"), or an effect indicating that the game is about to reach a dead end (display of "Complete function in preparation").

First, when automatic settlement begins, the effects that are displayed when automatic settlement is being performed are executed. If a hopper empty error occurs while this automatic settlement is being performed (partway through), a notification is executed to indicate that a hopper empty error has occurred.

As an example of a notification indicating that a hopper empty error has occurred, FIG. 87(A) is displayed on the display device 32. Note that FIG. 87(A) is also an image that is displayed when a hopper empty error occurs in a situation where the game is not at its limit (for example, when the difference in the number of game media related to the limit is 10).

Automatic settlement will resume after the hopper empty error is cleared.

Then, after the automatic settlement is completed, the completion function activation notification period begins. In other words, after the automatic settlement is completed, the notification state related to the limit becomes an activation notification state. In other words, after the automatic settlement is completed, it becomes possible to notify that the limit state has been reached.

Note that if power interruption processing (also called power off processing) is executed while automatic settlement is being performed, and then the power is turned on (setting key switch off, power switch on) without changing the settings, automatic settlement will resume from where it left off after power on processing is executed (after the hit difference counter is reset to its initial value). In this case, the same presentation as before the power off processing is executed is executed. In other words, it notifies you that automatic settlement is in progress.

Then, after the automatic settlement is completed, the completion function activation notification period begins. In other words, after the automatic settlement is completed, the notification state related to the limit becomes an activation notification state. In other words, after the automatic settlement is completed, it becomes possible to notify that the limit state has been reached.

In addition, if a hopper empty error occurs during automatic settlement and the main control means is executing error processing (processing to display an error code corresponding to the hopper empty error), power interruption processing (also called power cut processing) is executed, and then if power is turned on (setting key switch off, power switch on) without changing settings, error processing (processing to display an error code corresponding to the hopper empty error) will be resumed after power on processing is executed (after the striking difference counter is reset to its initial value).

After that, after the hopper empty error is cleared, automatic settlement will resume from where it left off. In this case, the same presentation will be performed as before the hopper empty error occurred. In other words, no notification will be given that a hopper empty error has occurred, and the presentation will be the same as when automatic settlement is being performed.

After automatic settlement is completed, the completion function activation notification period begins. In other words, after automatic settlement is completed, the notification state related to the limit becomes an activation notification state. In other words, after automatic settlement is completed, it becomes possible to notify that the limit state has been reached.

By configuring it this way, the player is notified that play is over after the automatic settlement is complete, preventing the player from leaving the venue in the middle of the automatic settlement, etc.

In addition, in Figures 86 (1) and (2), when automatic settlement is being performed, power interruption processing (also called power interruption processing) is executed, and then when power is turned on (setting key switch on, power switch on) with a setting change, the device transitions to setting change mode, and when the setting change mode termination conditions are met and the setting change mode is terminated, the device is configured to return to the situation before the start of play (the situation in which bets on gaming media are accepted) rather than resuming automatic settlement from the middle. In other words, automatic settlement can be terminated midway and prevented from coming to a halt. In addition, during this setting change mode and after the setting change mode, it is possible to prevent notifications from being issued that play has been halted or that automatic settlement is in progress.

By configuring it in this way, for example, if the end of business hours of the gaming establishment arrives during automatic settlement, the gaming establishment will shut off the power supplied to all gaming machines (power off), but will still be able to provide players with gaming media up until the end of business hours. After the end of business hours, the gaming establishment staff can then change the settings to return the situation to before the start of play without having to retrieve the gaming media that are in the middle of automatic settlement from the return slot, which makes it possible to operate the gaming establishment smoothly.

Note that while Figure 58 has been explained as a modified example of Figure 57, it can also be applied to Figures 55 and 56.

For example, a process corresponding to "Temporary limit flag ON?" in FIG. 58 is provided before "Display replay operation symbol?" in FIG. 55, a process corresponding to "Temporary limit flag save" in FIG. 58 is provided after "Difference number > 19000?" in FIG. 55 becomes YES, and a process corresponding to "Bonus game state?" in FIG. 58 is provided before "Save limit flag" in FIG. 55. By configuring in this way, even if the number of game media exceeds 19000 during the bonus game state, starting from the time when the power is turned on (0), information indicating that the limit condition is met is not stored in the limit flag area until the bonus ends. In other words, if the number of game media exceeds 19000 during the bonus game state, starting from the time when the power is turned on (0), the game can be put into a limit state after the bonus game state ends.

Similarly, for example, a process corresponding to "Temporary limit flag ON?" in FIG. 58 is provided before "Replay operation symbol display?" in FIG. 56, a process corresponding to "Temporary limit flag save" in FIG. 58 is provided after "Difference number > 19000?" in FIG. 56 becomes YES, and a process corresponding to "Bonus game state?" in FIG. 58 is provided before "Save limit flag" in FIG. 56. By configuring in this way, even if the number of game media exceeds 19000 during the bonus game state, starting from the time when the power is turned on (0), information indicating that the limit condition is met is not stored in the limit flag area until the bonus ends. In other words, if the number of game media exceeds 19000 during the bonus game state, starting from the time when the power is turned on (0), the game can be put into a limit state after the bonus game state ends.

In addition, FIG. 58 can also be applied to a case where the point where the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed is set as the base (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from the base exceeds 19,000.

For example, the point at which the player's ball output is at its lowest during the bonus game state is set as the reference (0), and even if the number of game media exceeds 19,000, information indicating that the condition for the game to be stopped is met is not stored in the stop flag area until the bonus ends. In other words, the point at which the player's ball output is at its lowest during the bonus game state is set as the reference (0), and if the number of game media exceeds 19,000, the game can be stopped after the bonus game state ends.

<End-of-game monitoring process (subtraction version of the end-of-game difference counter, end-of-game state after the bonus game state ends due to the end-of-game difference counter)>
Figure 59 is a modified example of Figures 57 and 58. Figure 59 is the same as Figure 58 in that, when the power is turned on during the bonus game state, the starting point (0) is set, and when the number of game media exceeds 19,000, the game is stopped after the bonus game state ends. However, unlike Figure 58, it is different in that it does not have a temporary stop flag storage area.

The "value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media to be put into the stop state" is set to 19001. In other words, when the power is turned on without changing the settings from a power-off state, the initial value stored in the stop difference counter is 19001. Similarly, when the power is turned on with a setting change from a power-off state, the initial value stored in the stop difference counter is 19001.

The following explanation will focus on the differences from Figure 58.

First, in "Is the hit difference counter = specific value?", it is determined whether the value stored in the hit difference counter is a specific value. For example, if the specific value is set to 0, it is determined whether the value stored in the hit difference counter is 0. Note that in FIG. 58, the specific value is set to 0, but it can be any value other than 0 as long as it is a predetermined value.

In addition, a game that determines YES for "Is the stop difference counter equal to a specific value?" is a game that has occurred during a bonus game state after the number of game media has exceeded 19,000, starting from the time the power was turned on (0), and is a game that has occurred until the "save stop flag" is executed. Details will be described later.

The "Replay activation symbol display?" is the same as the "Replay activation symbol display?" in Figure 58 (Figure 57), so the explanation will be omitted.

The "stop difference counter set" is the same as the "stop difference counter set" in Figure 58 (Figure 57), so the explanation is omitted.

Since "Number of coins inserted < number of coins paid out?" is the same as "Number of coins inserted < number of coins paid out?" in Figure 58 (Figure 57), the explanation will be omitted.

"Upper limit exceeded?" is the same as "Upper limit exceeded?" in Figure 58 (Figure 57), so the explanation is omitted.

The "upper limit set" is the same as the "upper limit set" in Figure 58 (Figure 57), so the explanation is omitted.

In "Difference Update", the complement of the result of the calculation in "Exceeding Upper Limit?" (Number of Inserts - Number of Payouts) (the value stored in the A register) is calculated and stored in the A register. The calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is then subtracted from the HL register. In other words, "Value stored in the Stop Difference Counter" - "Value of the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game" is executed. If the result of this calculation is below a specific value, the specific value is stored in the HL register.

Note that the complement in "difference update" refers to the smallest number that carries beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived using the value of the 0-A register, or a single instruction for deriving a complement (NEG instruction).

For example, if the value stored in the bet/stop difference counter (the value in the HL register) is 65534, and the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, then the A register will be 249, but in the "difference update" step, the complement of 249, 7, is first derived. Next, 65534-7 is calculated, and 65527 is stored in the HL register. Note that since the result of 65534-7 is not less than 0 (there is no borrowing), the carry flag is 0.

When there is no carry (when the carry flag is 0), the value of the HL register is not updated to a specific value (0). In other words, the value of the HL register is the result of the calculation "value stored in the play end difference counter" - "value of the difference in the number of game media in the current game."

For example, when the value stored in the bet/stop difference counter (HL register value) is 2, if the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the A register will be 249, but the "bet/stop difference counter update" first derives 7, the complement of 249. Next, 2-7 is calculated, and 65531 is stored in the HL register. Note that 2-7 is -5, but since this is less than 0 (because there is a carryover), 65531 is stored in the HL register. Also, because there is a carryover, the carry flag becomes 1.

When there is a carry (when the carry flag is 1), the value of the HL register is updated to a specific value (0). In other words, the value of the HL register becomes a specific value (0).

The "update of the difference between the number of hits and stops counter" is the same as the "update of the difference between the number of hits and stops counter" in Figure 58 (Figure 57), so the explanation is omitted.

"Difference > 19,000?" determines whether the difference in the number of game media from the time the power was turned on (0) exceeds 19,000. Specifically, it determines whether the value stored in the stop difference counter is a specific value (0). If the value stored in the stop difference counter is the specific value (0), it judges as YES, and if the value stored in the stop difference counter is not the specific value (0), it judges as NO.

The value stored in the stop difference counter is a specific value (0) when a) the result of the calculation performed by "difference update" of "value stored in the stop difference counter" - "value of the difference in the number of gaming media in the current game" falls below the specific value (0), or b) the result of the calculation performed by "difference update" of "value stored in the stop difference counter" - "value of the difference in the number of gaming media in the current game" becomes a specific value (0).

Specifically, the above A) corresponds to a case where the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power is turned on (starting point (0)) is greater than 19001, and the above B) corresponds to a case where the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power is turned on (starting point (0)) is 19001.

In other words, "Difference > 19,000?" can determine whether the difference in the number of gaming media since the power was turned on (0) has exceeded 19,000 depending on whether the value stored in the play-stop difference counter is a specific value (0).

In addition, by storing 19001 as the initial value when the power is turned on without a setting change or when the power is turned on with a setting change, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -46534 as the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power was turned on as the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 19001, a situation in which the value of the play-stop difference counter is 49001 means that the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power was turned on as the starting point (0) is -30000.

As described above, by storing 19001, which is the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media to be capped," as the initial value, it is possible to determine whether the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power is turned on has exceeded 19,000 by determining whether the value of the capped difference counter is "0," thereby reducing the program capacity. Also, by storing 19001 as the initial value, it is possible to store values up to the equivalent of -46534 as the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power is turned on. Note that although an example is given of storing 19001 as the initial value, values other than 19001 can be used as the initial value as long as they have the same effect.

Since "Bonus game state?" is the same as "Bonus game state?" in FIG. 58, some of the explanation will be omitted. Note that if "Bonus game state?" is judged as YES, "Save stop flag" is not executed and stop monitoring processing is executed. In other words, if "Bonus game state?" is judged as YES, a specific value (0) is stored in the stop difference counter, and the next game (game in the bonus game state) can be executed in a situation where no information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area.

In other words, when the next game is played in a situation where the specific value (0) is stored, and the stoppage monitoring process is executed, the first determination in the stoppage monitoring process, "Is the stoppage difference counter = specific value?", is judged as YES. In other words, if the number of game media since the power-on start point (0) exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state, and "save stoppage flag" has not been executed, the determination is made as YES for "stoppage difference counter = specific value?", and it is determined whether or not the game is in the bonus game state without executing processes such as "update stoppage difference counter".

"Save stop flag" is the same as "Save stop flag" in Figure 58 (Figure 57), so the explanation will be omitted.

As described above, the limit monitoring process shown in FIG. 59 does not require a temporary limit flag storage area (without taking up space in the RWM storage area), and can enter a limit state after the bonus game state ends, even if the number of gaming media since the power-on time (0) exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state.

If the number of game media, starting from the time when the power was turned on (0), exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state, the machine can be put into a stop state even if the number of game media, starting from the time when the power was turned on (0), falls below 19,000 in the game in which the bonus game state ends. By configuring the machine in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not require the player to have any strategy.

In addition, since the stoppage monitoring process in FIG. 59 does not have a temporary stoppage flag storage area, if a power outage occurs (the power is turned off) during a specific game in the bonus game state after the number of game media from the start point (0) at the time of power-on during the bonus game state exceeds 19,000 and a specific value is stored in the stoppage difference counter, and then the power is turned on without changing the settings, the stoppage difference counter will be reset from the specific value to its initial value (the bonus game state continues), and therefore the game will not be stopped after the bonus game state ends.

In other words, if a power outage occurs during a bonus game state after the number of game media, starting from the time the power was turned on (0), exceeds 19,000, and the player continues playing the bonus game state when the power is turned on again, the game will not be stopped. By configuring the game in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not give the player the misunderstanding that the game has been stopped due to a power outage that occurred during a bonus game.

Note that while Figure 59 has been explained as a modified version of Figures 57 and 58, it can also be applied as a modified version of Figure 56.

Specifically, in FIG. 59, the initial value is 19001, which is the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media to be capped", but when applied as a modified example of FIG. 56, the initial value is "value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the stop difference counter" - "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media to be capped". For example, if the memory area of the stop difference counter is 2 bytes, the "value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the stop difference counter" is 65535, the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media to be capped" is 19001, and the initial value is 46534.

In addition, in Figure 59, the specific value is set to 0, but when applied as a modified example of Figure 56, the specific value is set to 65535.

As described above, the initial values and specific values in Figure 59 can be set to any predetermined values.

In addition, while a specific example was given in Figure 59, the processing order and processing contents are not limited to this, and it is sufficient if the limit state can be reached after the bonus gaming state ends, even if the number of gaming media since the power-on start time (0) exceeds 19,000 during the bonus gaming state, without providing a temporary limit flag storage area (without putting pressure on the RWM storage area).

In addition, in FIG. 59, it is also possible to use the point where the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed as the base (0) and to stop playing when the difference in the number of game media from that base exceeds 19,000.

For example, the point where the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed during the bonus game state is set as the base (0), and if the number of game media exceeds 19,000, the game can be stopped after the bonus game state ends. However, if the power is turned off during the bonus game state and then turned on again without changing the settings, the stop difference counter will be reset from a specific value to its initial value (the bonus game state will continue), so it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped after the bonus game state ends.

<Example 1 of the configuration of the bet number display lamp 25 and the payout number display>
The configuration of the bet number display lamp 25 applicable to this embodiment will be described.
61 to 63 are diagrams showing an example of the configuration of the bet number display lamp 25 and the payout number display applicable to this embodiment. In addition, "payout in progress" in FIG. 61 to FIG. 63 is a period from the start to the end of the payout process, and "payout number not displayed" may be a state in which the payout number display is turned off (nothing is displayed), a state in which a predetermined display (for example, "0") is displayed on the payout number display, a state in which information corresponding to a predetermined recoverable error is displayed on the payout number display in a predetermined recoverable error state, or a state in which information corresponding to a setting value or information corresponding to a setting check mode is displayed in a setting check mode. In addition, in FIG. 61 to FIG. 63, it is assumed that three coins are bet by operating the MAX bet switch 18 in a state in which there are "3" or more credits, a winning combination is made on any of the push order bells, a high-ranking bell is won, and 10 game values are paid out.

In FIG. 61, first, three bets are made by operating the MAX BET switch 18 at the timing shown in FIG. 61 (1), and the 1 BET lamp 25a, 2 BET lamp 25b, and 3 BET lamp 25c are lit. Note that the 1 BET lamp 25a, 2 BET lamp 25b, and 3 BET lamp 25c are configured to light up approximately simultaneously, but this is not limiting and they may be configured to light up in the order of 1 BET lamp 25a → 2 BET lamp 25b → 3 BET lamp 25c.

Then, the start switch 12 is operated, and the reels begin to rotate at the timing shown in Figure 61 (2).

After that, all the reels are stopped by the player's stop operation at the timing of Figure 61 (3), the payout process is started by the winning of a high-point bell, and the payout number is displayed as "10" on the payout number display (it may be configured to display "0 → 1 → 2 → ... → 9 → 10" in increments of one at a time at a speed that the player can see, or it may be configured to display only the payout number, such as "0 → 10".). Also, at the timing of Figure 61 (3), a specific timer starts measuring the lighting time of the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c and the display time of the payout number on the payout number display. Note that the specific timer is a decrement timer, and when the specific timer reaches a specific value (for example, "0"), it is determined that the specific time has elapsed.

Then, at the timing shown in Figure 61 (4), the payout process ends.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 61 (5), when the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0") (when it is determined that a predetermined time has passed since all reels stopped), the 1 BET lamp 25a to the 3 BET lamp 25c go out and the payout number display becomes invisible.

In the example shown in FIG. 61, when a predetermined time has elapsed since all reels have stopped, the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c are turned off and the payout number display is hidden.

This configuration can prevent a player from accidentally assuming that another player is playing on an empty machine when he or she attempts to play on it and avoiding playing on it.

<Example 2 of the configuration of the bet number display lamp 25 and the payout number display>
Figure 62 shows an example in which a specified recoverable error (a selector-related error (medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passing time error), an error related to the hopper 44 (hopper retention error, hopper empty error, abnormality detection error), a door open error, a harness coming loose, etc.) has occurred during measurement of a specified time after all reels have stopped.

In FIG. 62, first, three bets are made by operating the MAX BET switch 18 at the timing shown in FIG. 62(1), and the 1 BET lamp 25a, 2 BET lamp 25b, and 3 BET lamp 25c are lit. Note that the 1 BET lamp 25a, 2 BET lamp 25b, and 3 BET lamp 25c are configured to light up approximately simultaneously, but this is not limiting and they may be configured to light up in the order of 1 BET lamp 25a → 2 BET lamp 25b → 3 BET lamp 25c.

After that, the start switch 12 is operated and the reels begin to rotate at the timing shown in Figure 62 (2).

After that, the player stops all the reels at the timing shown in Figure 62 (3), and the payout process begins when a high-level bell is won, and the payout number display shows "10" as the payout number. Also, at the timing shown in Figure 62 (3), a specific timer starts measuring a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute).

Then, the payout process ends at the timing shown in Figure 62 (4).

After that, a specific recoverable error occurs at the timing of Figure 62 (5), causing an error state, and the payout number display on the payout number display becomes non-displayable. At this time, the payout number display is configured to display information corresponding to the specific recoverable error. For example, if there is a hopper empty error, "HE" is displayed. Also, even during the specific recoverable error, the 1 bet lamp 25 to the 3 bet lamp 25c are configured to continue to be lit. Furthermore, even during the specific recoverable error, the specific timer is configured to continue measuring the specific time.

Then, at the timing shown in Figure 62 (6), the specified recoverable error is cleared, the machine returns to normal, and the payout number display again shows "10" as the payout number.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (7), when the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c are turned off, and the payout number display is hidden.

In addition, FIG. 62 shows a case where the value of a specific timer becomes a specific value after a specific recoverable error is cleared, but if the value of the specific timer becomes a specific value during a specific recoverable error, the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c are turned off when the value of the specific timer becomes a specific value even during the specific recoverable error, and then when the specific recoverable error is cleared, the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c remain turned off and the payout number display remains hidden without displaying the payout number again.

In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 62, the specific timer is configured to continue measuring the specific time even during a specific recoverable error. Also, even during a specific recoverable error, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c are configured to remain lit until the value of the specific timer reaches a specific value. Also, the payout number display is configured to hide the payout number and display information corresponding to the specific recoverable error during a specific recoverable error, and if the value of the specific timer reaches a specific value during the specific recoverable error, it becomes hidden without displaying the payout number again after the specific recoverable error is cleared, and if the value of the specific timer does not reach a specific value during the specific recoverable error, it displays the payout number again after the specific recoverable error is cleared, and when the value of the specific timer reaches a specific value, it becomes hidden.

By configuring it in this way, if a specific recoverable error occurs, an error notification can be properly executed, and the bet number display lamp 25 can be kept lit to maintain the notification of the number of bets from the previous game. In addition, even if the payout number is displayed again after the specific recoverable error is cleared, it is possible to prevent excessive payout numbers from being displayed.

In addition, when a predetermined recoverable error occurs and an error state occurs, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is interrupted, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c remain lit, the payout number display does not display the payout number, and displays information corresponding to the predetermined recoverable error, and when the predetermined recoverable error is then released, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is resumed from the middle, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c remain lit, the payout number display displays "10" as the payout number again, and when the value of the specific timer then reaches a predetermined value, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c turn off, and the payout number display does not display the payout number. In this case, it should be noted that the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c remain lit until the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value, even if a predetermined time has actually passed since all the reels have stopped. Specifically, at a predetermined timing during the predetermined recoverable error, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c remain lit even if a predetermined time has actually passed since all the reels have stopped.

By configuring it in this way, even if an error occurs before a certain amount of time has elapsed since all the reels stopped, the number of bets and the amount of payouts from the previous game can be notified for an appropriate period of time.

Also, when a predetermined recoverable error occurs and an error state occurs, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is interrupted, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c are turned off, the payout number display is hidden and displays information corresponding to the predetermined recoverable error, and when the predetermined recoverable error is subsequently released, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is newly started, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c are turned on again, and the payout number display is again displayed as the payout number "10", and when the measurement of the predetermined time is subsequently started again and the value of the specific timer becomes a predetermined value, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c are turned off, and the display of the payout number on the payout number display is hidden. In this case, it should be noted that even if a predetermined time has already passed since all the reels stopped at the timing when the predetermined recoverable error is released, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c will remain lit until the value of the specific timer becomes a predetermined value.
By configuring in this manner, during an error, the type of error can be properly notified by the payout amount, and the number of bets and the payout amount of the previous game can be properly notified to the player.

Also, when a specific recoverable error occurs and an error state occurs, the measurement of the specific time by a specific timer is terminated (the value of the specific timer is cleared), the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c are turned off, and the payout number display does not display the payout number and displays information corresponding to the specific recoverable error, and then when the specific recoverable error is released, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c remain turned off and the payout number display remains hidden.

By configuring it in this way, the lighting state of the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c and the payout number display can be made constant after the error is cleared.

<Example 3 of the configuration related to the bet number display lamp 25 and the payout number display>
63 shows an example of transition to the setting confirmation mode during the measurement of the predetermined time after all reels have stopped. Note that, in this embodiment, the setting confirmation mode can be transitioned to when the setting key switch signal is turned on while the door open signal is on and no bet has been placed.

In FIG. 63, first, three bets are made by operating the MAX BET switch 18 at the timing shown in FIG. 63(1), and the 1 BET lamp 25a, 2 BET lamp 25b, and 3 BET lamp 25c are lit. Note that the 1 BET lamp 25a, 2 BET lamp 25b, and 3 BET lamp 25c are configured to light up approximately simultaneously, but this is not limiting and they may be configured to light up in the order 1 BET lamp 25a → 2 BET lamp 25b → 3 BET lamp 25c.

Then, the start switch 12 is operated, and the reels begin to rotate at the timing shown in Figure 63 (2).

After that, all the reels are stopped by the player's stop operation at the timing shown in Figure 63 (3), and the payout process is started when a high-level bell is won, and the payout number display shows "10" as the payout number. Also, at the timing shown in Figure 63 (3), a specific timer starts measuring a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute).

Then, the payout process ends at the timing shown in Figure 63 (4).

Then, at the timing of FIG. 63 (5), the mode changes to the setting confirmation mode, the 1 bet lamp 25a, the 2 bet lamp 25b, and the 3 bet lamp 25c remain lit, and the payout number display continues to display the payout number. In addition, when the mode changes to the setting confirmation mode, the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is stopped.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (6), the setting confirmation mode ends, the 1 bet lamp 25a, the 2 bet lamp 25b, and the 3 bet lamp 25c remain lit, and the payout number display continues to display the payout number. In addition, when the setting confirmation mode ends, the specific timer resumes measuring the specified time.

After that, when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value at the timing of FIG. 63 (7), the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c go out and the payout number display goes off. Note that in this case, even if a predetermined time has passed since all the reels have actually stopped, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c will remain lit and the payout number display will continue to display the payout number until the value of the specific timer reaches the predetermined value. Specifically, at a predetermined timing during the setting confirmation mode, even if a predetermined time has passed since all the reels have actually stopped, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c will remain lit and the payout number display will continue to display the payout number.

In this way, in the example shown in Fig. 63, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is suspended during the setting confirmation mode, and when the setting confirmation mode ends, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is resumed from the middle. Also, even during the setting confirmation mode, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c remain lit, the payout number indicator continues to display the payout number, and then, when the value of the specific timer after the setting confirmation mode ends becomes a predetermined value, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c are turned off, and the payout number indicator becomes non-display.
It should be noted that even if a predetermined time has passed since all the reels have stopped, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c will remain lit and the payout number display will not be hidden until the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value. Specifically, at a predetermined timing during the setting confirmation mode, even if a predetermined time has passed since all the reels have stopped, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c will remain lit and the payout number display will not be hidden.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to continue to notify the number of bets and the number of payouts from the previous game even while the settings are being confirmed.

Also, even during the setting confirmation mode, a specific timer may continue to measure a predetermined time, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c may remain lit, and the payout number display may be configured to hide the payout number and display information corresponding to the set value (displaying a number corresponding to the set value, displaying a number corresponding to the set value and lighting the DP on the payout number display, displaying a number corresponding to the set value and an alphabet such as A or C, etc.).
In this case, if the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value during the setting confirmation mode, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c will remain lit until the setting confirmation mode ends, and information corresponding to the set value will be displayed on the payout number display, and when the setting confirmation mode ends, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c will be turned off and the payout number display will be hidden.
In addition, if the value of a specific timer does not reach a specified value during the setting confirmation mode, the payout number display may be configured to display the payout number again when the setting confirmation mode ends, and then when the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c are turned off and the display of the payout number on the payout number display may be made non-display.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to continue to notify the number of bets from the previous game even during setting confirmation, and even if the payout number is displayed on the payout number display again after the setting confirmation mode ends, it is possible to prevent excessive payout numbers from being displayed.

In addition, even during the setting confirmation mode, a specific timer may continue to measure a predetermined time, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c may remain lit, and the payout number display may display a message corresponding to a door open error.
At this time, even if the setting confirmation mode is in progress, if the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c will be turned off and the payout number display will maintain a display corresponding to a door open error, and when the setting confirmation mode ends, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c will remain turned off and the payout number display will become invisible.
In addition, if the value of a specific timer does not reach a specified value during the setting confirmation mode, the payout number display may be configured to display the payout number again when the setting confirmation mode ends, and then when the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c are turned off and the display of the payout number on the payout number display may be made non-display.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to continue to notify the number of bets from the previous game even during setting confirmation, and even if the payout number is displayed on the payout number display again after the setting confirmation mode ends, it is possible to prevent excessive payout numbers from being displayed.

In addition, when the setting confirmation mode is entered, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer is terminated (the value of the specific timer is cleared), and during the setting confirmation mode, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c remain lit and the payout number display displays information corresponding to the setting confirmation mode, and when the setting confirmation mode is ended, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c are turned off and the payout number display is hidden.

By configuring it in this way, the lighting state of the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c and the payout number display can be made constant after the setting confirmation mode ends.

In the examples of Figures 61 to 63, the trigger for starting the measurement of the specific timer is set to be when all reels have stopped, but this is not limited, and the trigger may be when the payout process has started, or when the payout process has ended. In other words, it is sufficient to configure the specific timer to start measuring a specific time at a predetermined timing at least after all reels have stopped.

In the examples of Figures 61 to 63, a specific timer is used to measure the lighting time of the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c and the display time of the payout number by the payout number display, but this is not limited to the above, and a first timer that measures the lighting time of the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c and a second timer that measures the display time of the payout number by the payout number display may be provided separately. In this case, the time until the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c go out and the time until the payout number display becomes invisible may be configured to be the same or different.

<<Configuration of the bet number display lamp 25 during normal operation>>
One or more of the following configurations may be applied as the configuration of the bet number display lamp 25 in normal mode. Note that normal mode refers to a state in which the game can proceed except for a setting confirmation mode, a setting change mode, an error mode, and the like.
(1) The light goes out when it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since all reels have stopped.
(2) The light remains on even after a specified time has elapsed since all reels came to a halt.
<<Configuration of the bet number display lamp 25 during the setting confirmation mode>>
As the configuration regarding the bet number display lamp 25 during the setting confirmation mode, one or more of the following configurations can be applied.
(1) The light remains on even during the setting check mode, a specific timer continues to measure a specific time even during the setting check mode, and when the specific timer reaches a specific value, the light goes out even during the setting check mode.
(2) The light remains lit even during the setting check mode, and the specific timer continues to measure the specified time even during the setting check mode. If the setting check mode is ended after the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value during the setting check mode, the light goes out when the setting check mode ends. If the setting check mode is ended before the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value during the setting check mode, the light goes out when the specific timer reaches the specified value after the setting check mode ends.
(3) The light remains on even during the setting confirmation mode, and when the setting confirmation mode is entered, the specific timer stops measuring the specified time. After the setting confirmation mode ends, the specific timer resumes measuring the specified time. When the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value, the light goes off.
(4) The light remains on even during the setting check mode, and when the mode is switched to the setting check mode, the specific timer stops measuring the specified time, and when the setting check mode is ended, the light goes out.
(5) The light remains on even during the setting confirmation mode, and when the mode is switched to the setting confirmation mode, the specific timer stops measuring the specified time. After the setting confirmation mode is ended, the specific timer starts measuring the specified time anew. When the value of the specific timer then reaches a specified value, the light goes out.
(6) When the setting check mode is entered, the light turns off, and even during the setting check mode, the specific timer continues to measure a specific time. If the setting check mode is ended after the value of the specific timer reaches a specific value during the setting check mode, the light remains off even after the setting check mode ends. If the setting check mode is ended before the value of the specific timer reaches a specific value during the setting check mode, the light turns on again when the setting check mode ends, and then turns off when the value of the specific timer reaches the specific value.
(7) When the setting confirmation mode is entered, the light turns off, the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is suspended, when the setting confirmation mode ends, the light turns on again, the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is resumed, and then when the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value, the light turns off.
(8) When the mode is switched to the setting confirmation mode, the light is turned off, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is terminated, and the light remains off even after the setting confirmation mode is terminated.
(9) When the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, the light turns off, the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer ends, when the mode is ended, the light turns on again, the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer starts anew, and when the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value, the light turns off.

<<Configuration of the bet number display lamp 25 during a specific error>>
As a configuration regarding the bet number display lamp 25 during a predetermined error, one or more of the following configurations can be applied.
(1) The light remains on even during a specified error, a specified timer continues to measure a specified time even during the specified error, and when the specified timer reaches a specified value, the light goes out even during the specified error.
(2) The light remains lit even during a specified error, the specific timer continues to measure a specified time even during the specified error, and if the specified error is cleared after the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value during the specified error, the light goes out when the specified error is cleared, and if the specified error is cleared before the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value during the specified error, the light goes out when the specific timer reaches a specified value after the specified error is cleared.
(3) The light remains on even during a specified error, and when the specified error occurs, the measurement of the specified time by a specific timer is suspended, and after the specified error is cleared, the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is resumed, and the light is turned off when the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value.
(4) The light remains on even during a specified error, and when the specified error occurs, the measurement of a specified time by a specific timer ends, and when the specified error is resolved, the light goes out.
(5) The light remains on even during a specified error, and when the specified error occurs, the specific timer stops measuring the specified time, and after the specified error is cleared, the specific timer starts measuring the specified time again, and then turns off when the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value.
(6) When a specified error occurs, the light turns off, a specific timer continues to measure a specified time even during the specified error, and if the specified error is cleared after the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value during the specified error, the light remains off even after the specified error is cleared, and if the specified error is cleared before the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value during the specified error, the light turns on again when the specified error is cleared, and then turns off when the value of the specific timer reaches the specified value.
(7) When a specified error occurs, the light turns off, the measurement of the specified time by a specific timer is suspended, when the specified error is cleared, the light turns on again, the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is resumed, and then when the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value, the light turns off.
(8) When a specified error occurs, the light turns off, the measurement of a specified time by a specific timer ends, and the light remains off even after the specified error is resolved.
(9) When a specific error occurs, the light turns off, the measurement of the specific time by a specific timer ends, and when the specific error is cleared, the light turns on again, the measurement of the specific time by the specific timer begins anew, and then turns off when the value of the specific timer reaches a specific value.

The bet number display lamp 25 may be configured to be turned off in one or more of the following situations.
(1) When the demo screen is displayed. (2) When the checkout process is started. (3) When the checkout process is completed. (4) When the menu screen display is started. (5) When the menu screen display is completed.

<<Configuration of the payout number display during normal operation>>
As a configuration related to the payout number display in normal times, one or more of the following configurations can be applied. Note that normal times refer to a state in which a game can proceed, excluding a setting confirmation mode, a setting change mode, an error mode, and the like.
(1) The reels are hidden when it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since all reels stopped.
(2) The payout amount display is maintained even after a predetermined time has elapsed since all reels came to a halt.
<<Configuration of the payout number display during setting confirmation mode>>
One or more of the following configurations can be applied as the configuration for the payout number display during the setting confirmation mode.
(1) The number of dispensed balls is maintained on display even during the setting confirmation mode, and a specific timer continues to measure a specific time even during the setting confirmation mode. When the specific timer reaches a specific value, the number of dispensed balls is no longer displayed even during the setting confirmation mode.
(2) The number of dispenses is maintained on display even during the setting confirmation mode, a specific timer continues to measure a specific time even during the setting confirmation mode, and if the setting confirmation mode is ended after the value of the specific timer reaches a specific value during the setting confirmation mode, the number of dispenses is hidden when the setting confirmation mode ends, and if the setting confirmation mode is ended before the value of the specific timer reaches a specific value during the setting confirmation mode, the number of dispenses is hidden when the specific timer reaches a specific value after the setting confirmation mode ends.
(3) The number of dispenses is maintained on display even during the setting confirmation mode, and when the mode is switched to the setting confirmation mode, the specific timer is suspended from measuring the specified time. After the setting confirmation mode is ended, the specific timer is resumed measuring the specified time. When the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value, the number of dispenses is hidden.
(4) The number of dispensed coins is maintained on display even during the setting confirmation mode. When the mode is switched to the setting confirmation mode, the measurement of the specified time by a specific timer is stopped, and when the setting confirmation mode is ended, the number of dispensed coins is hidden.
(5) The number of dispensed balls is maintained on display even during the setting confirmation mode, and when the mode is switched to the setting confirmation mode, the specific timer stops measuring the specified time. After the setting confirmation mode is ended, the specific timer starts measuring the specified time anew. When the value of the specific timer then reaches a specified value, the number of dispensed balls is no longer displayed.
(6) When transitioning to setting confirmation mode, the display of the payout number is discontinued, and the specific timer continues to measure the specified time even during the setting confirmation mode. If the setting confirmation mode is terminated after the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value during the setting confirmation mode, the number of payouts will be displayed again when the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and will then be hidden once the value of the specific timer reaches the specified value.
(7) When the mode is switched to the setting confirmation mode, the display of the payout number is terminated and the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is suspended. When the setting confirmation mode is ended, the payout number is displayed again and the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is resumed. Then, when the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value, the display is hidden.
(8) When the mode is switched to the setting confirmation mode, the display of the payout number is terminated, the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is terminated, and the display is turned off after the setting confirmation mode is terminated.
(9) When the mode is switched to the setting confirmation mode, the display of the payout number is terminated, the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is terminated, and when the setting confirmation mode ends, the payout number is displayed again, the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is newly started, and then when the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value, the display is no longer displayed.
In the above (6) to (9), during the setting confirmation mode, the display may be hidden, or a display corresponding to the setting value may be displayed, or a display corresponding to the setting confirmation mode may be displayed, or a display corresponding to a door open error may be displayed.

<<Configuration regarding payout number display during a specified error>>
As a configuration regarding the payout amount display during a specified error, one or more of the following configurations can be applied.
(1) When a specified error occurs, a display corresponding to the specified error is displayed, and even during the specified error, a specific timer continues to measure a specified time, and if the error is cleared after the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value during the specified error, the display is hidden when the specified error is cleared, and if the error is cleared before the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value during the specified error, the display is hidden again when the specified error is cleared, and then the display is hidden when the value of the specific timer reaches the specified value.
(2) When a specified error occurs, a display corresponding to the specified error is displayed, and the measurement of the specified time by a specific timer is suspended. When the specified error is cleared, the number of payouts is displayed again, the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is resumed, and then when the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value, the display is turned off.
(3) When a specific error occurs, a display corresponding to the specific error appears, and when the measurement of a specific time by a specific timer ends and the specific error is cleared, the display disappears.
(4) When a specified error occurs, a display corresponding to the specified error is displayed, the measurement of the specified time by a specific timer is terminated, and when the specified error is cleared, the number of dispensed coins is displayed again, the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is newly started, and then when the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value, the display is turned off.

The payout number display may be configured to turn off in one or more of the following situations:
(1) When the demo screen is displayed. (2) When the checkout process is started. (3) When the checkout process is completed. (4) When the menu screen display is started. (5) When the menu screen display is completed.

The configurations relating to the bet number display lamp 25 and the payout number display described above can be combined as appropriate.

<Configuration Regarding the Gap Between the Medal Selector 34 and the Chute Member>
The configuration regarding the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member that is applicable to this embodiment will be described.

Figure 64 shows the positional relationship when the medal selector 34, chute member, and return member are attached to the back surface of the front panel PS2 applicable to this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 64, a chute member is provided on the back surface of the front panel PS2 adjacent to the medal selector 34 to guide medals that are permitted to pass through by the medal selector 34 to the hopper 44.

The medal selector 34 requires regular maintenance, such as having a staff member at the game arcade check whether there are any abnormalities in the sensor when an error related to the selector occurs, and removing dirt that has accumulated due to the passage of medals. For this reason, in this embodiment, a gap is provided between the medal selector 34 and the chute member to make maintenance work on the medal selector 34 easier.

In addition, on the back surface of the front panel PS2, below the medal selector 34, a return member is provided for returning medals paid out from the hopper 44 and medals rejected from the medal selector 34 to the receiving tray 28 from the medal payout outlet 45.
The return member has a medal return receiving opening (sometimes referred to as the entrance to the return passage) that receives medals rejected from the medal selector 34 , and a medal payout receiving opening that receives medals paid out from the hopper 44 .
Furthermore, when the return member is attached to the front panel PS2, a return passage is formed in the space between the return member and the front panel PS2.

64, the chute member has a medal guide passage for guiding medals permitted to pass by the medal selector 34 to the hopper 44. The medal guide passage has a gentle downward slope from the upstream (the medal selector 34 side) to the downstream (the hopper 44 side). The medal guide passage is curved gently at approximately 90 degrees from the middle of the medal guide passage toward the hopper 44 side in order to guide medals permitted to pass by the medal selector 34 to the hopper 44 side.
The chute member has a bottom surface that forms the bottom surface of the medal guide passage, an outer wall portion that forms the outer side surface of the medal guide passage, and an inner wall portion that forms the inner side surface of the medal guide passage, and the top of the medal guide passage is open. The chute member also has a step portion at a position approximately halfway along the medal guide passage on the bottom surface that is higher on the upstream side than on the downstream side.
The chute member also has a fixing portion for fixing the chute member to the rear surface of the front panel PS2 with a specific locking part (screw). The fixing portion is provided at a position protruding upward from near the end of the outer wall portion on the medal selector 34 side, and is configured so that when the chute member is attached to the rear surface of the front panel PS2, the fixing portion and the specific locking part are located above the medal guide passage.

In addition, the specified locking parts that secure the chute member to the rear surface of the front panel PS2 are made of metal and configured to conduct electricity, so that when the specified locking parts come off and enter the auxiliary tank, the full detection electrode of the auxiliary tank 46 can become electrically conductive via the specified locking parts.
The predetermined locking parts are made of a magnetic material such as iron, and are configured to be attracted to a magnet. On the other hand, the medals used in the game are made of stainless steel, and are configured not to be attracted to a magnet.
By configuring in this manner, even if a predetermined locking part comes off due to deterioration over time or an action such as hitting the surface of the front panel PS2 by a player and falls into the hopper 44 or the auxiliary tank 46, only the predetermined locking part can be easily taken out by the magnet.

Although not shown, a locking portion is provided at a predetermined position on the chute member for locking the chute member to the rear surface of the front panel PS2. The chute member can be fixed to the rear surface of the front panel PS2 by inserting a screw through a screw hole in the fixing portion while the chute member is locked to the rear surface of the front panel PS2 by hooking the claw of the locking portion onto the front panel PS2. Therefore, even if the screw that fixes the chute member becomes loose, the chute member is configured not to fall off the rear surface of the front panel PS2.

Figures 65 and 66 are diagrams explaining the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.

As shown in FIG. 65, an upper edge portion that corresponds to the edge portion surrounding the upper return receiving opening of the return member is located vertically below the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member. In other words, the configuration is such that no return receiving opening is located vertically below the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 65, when the thickness of the medal is "A", the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member is "B", and the width of the upper edge is "C", it is configured to satisfy the following configuration.
(1) B>A
In other words, the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member is larger than the thickness of one medal.
(2) B ≒ 2 × A
In other words, the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member is approximately equal to the thickness of two medals.
(3) C>A
That is, the width of the upper edge is greater than the thickness of one medal.
(4) C>B
That is, the width of the upper edge is greater than the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.

For this reason, it is configured so that medals can be inserted into the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member. In addition, since an upper edge is located vertically below the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, it is configured so that a medal can be placed on the upper edge and retained in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.

Also, as shown in FIG. 66, a medal placed on the upper edge and inserted into the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member will block the exit of the medal passage. Therefore, when a medal is present in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, a medal inserted through the medal insertion port 17 will collide with a medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member as it moves from the exit of the medal passage toward the medal guide passage of the chute member, and will be stopped and become stuck at the exit of the medal passage. At this time, insertion sensor 1 and insertion sensor 2 will remain on due to the inserted medal (it may be configured so that only insertion sensor 2 remains on), so that an error related to the selector is detected by the main control means, and a medal retention error will be reported as an error related to the selector.

As shown in FIG. 66, when an inserted medal collides with a medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member and becomes stuck at the exit of the medal passage, the upper end of the medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member is positioned higher than the center of the inserted medal. Therefore, the inserted medal cannot pass over the medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.

By configuring it in this way, it is not possible to directly detect the presence of a medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, but by being notified of an error related to the selector, it is possible to indirectly know that a medal is present in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.

In addition, with this configuration, when an amusement arcade staff member checks whether the medal selector 34 is properly detecting an error related to the selector, if the staff member inserts a medal through the medal insertion port 17 with the medal inserted in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, the inserted medal will not be able to pass through the exit of the medal passage due to the medal inserted in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, so a situation can be created in which the inserted medal remains detected by insertion sensor 1 and insertion sensor 2, making it easy to check whether the selector error is being properly detected.

As mentioned above, the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member is larger than the thickness of one medal, so that a medal placed by an arcade staff member in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member will not get stuck and become impossible to remove.

Figure 67 shows the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, and the positional relationship with the hopper 44 when the front panel PS2 is closed.

As shown in Figure 67, when the front panel PS2 is closed, a hopper 44 is arranged below the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.
Therefore, even if the front panel PS2 is closed while a medal is resting on the upper edge and remaining in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, and the medal falls from the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member due to the impact at that time, the fallen medal can be stored in the hopper 44.

By configuring it in this way, even if an amusement store employee forgets that they have placed a medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member to check whether the medal selector 34 is properly detecting an error related to the selector, and closes the front panel PS2, causing the medal to fall, the fallen medal will enter the medal return receiving port and will not be discharged from the medal payout outlet 45 to the tray 28, so it is possible to prevent the amusement store employee from mistakenly giving the medal used in the operation to a player.

In addition, by lowering the position where the return member is attached, the medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member will not block the medal passage even when the medal is placed on the upper edge and remains in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member (the top of the medal will be discarded below the medal passage between the medal selector 34 and the chute member even when the medal is placed on the upper edge), and the medal that has been inserted and allowed to pass by the medal selector 34 can pass beyond the exit of the medal passage and pass through the medal guide passage. By configuring it in this way, even if a store employee accidentally drops a medal while replenishing medals and the medal gets stuck in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, it is possible to insert the medal, so that the progress of the game is not hindered.

Figure 68 is a diagram explaining the radius of the medal, the height of the medal guide passage, the height of the step of the medal guide passage, and the width of the medal guide passage.

As described above, the medal guide passage is gently curved at approximately 90 degrees in order to guide the medals that have been permitted to pass by the medal selector 34 toward the hopper 44 .
Therefore, a medal that is permitted to pass by the medal selector 34 is decelerated as it passes through the medal guide passage by coming into contact with the outer wall portion and the inner wall portion of the medal guide passage.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a step portion is provided at a position approximately halfway along the medal guide passage on the bottom surface, with the upstream side being higher than the downstream side.
The medal is dropped as it passes through the step portion, and is configured so that the medal, which has decelerated due to contact with the outer wall portion and the inner wall portion of the medal guide passage, can be accelerated.

By configuring it in this way, even if multiple medals are inserted at once through the medal insertion port 17, the inserted medals can be stored in the hopper 44 without becoming stuck in the medal guide passage.

Furthermore, when the thickness of the medal is "A" as shown in Figure 65, the radius of the medal is "D" as shown in Figure 68, the height of the medal guide passage is "E", the height of the step portion of the medal guide passage is "F", and the maximum width of the medal guide passage is "G", it is configured to satisfy the following configuration.
(1) G>A
In other words, the maximum width of the medal guide passage is greater than the thickness of the medal.
(2) G < 2 × D
In other words, the maximum width of the medal guide passage is smaller than the diameter of the medal.
(3) F<D
In other words, the height of the step in the medal guide passage is smaller than the radius of the medal.
(4) F < E
In other words, the height of the step portion of the medal guide passage is smaller than the height of the medal guide passage.

By configuring as in (1) and (2) above, when a medal passes through the medal guide passage, it can pass through while rolling in an upright position, instead of stopping halfway through the medal guide passage lying sideways.

Furthermore, by configuring as in (3) and (4) above, it is possible to accelerate the medal by the step in the medal guide passage, while preventing the medal from flying out of the medal guide passage due to the impact of the medal falling when passing through the step in the medal guide passage. In addition to the configurations in (3) and (4), it is also possible to make E>D (the height of the medal guide passage is greater than the radius of the medal). In this case, it is possible to more reliably prevent the medal from flying out of the medal guide passage due to the impact of the medal falling when passing through the step in the medal guide passage.

Figure 69 is a diagram explaining the position and dimensions of the locking parts that secure the chute member when the fixing portion of the chute member is fixed to the front panel PS2 by a specified locking part (screw).

As shown in Figure 69, when the chute member is fixed to the front panel PS2 with screws, a medal guide passage is located vertically below the screws that secure the chute member, and no medal return receiving opening is located.
Therefore, even if the screw fixing the chute member comes loose and falls, the screw fixing the chute member is configured not to come out of the tray 28 through the medal return receiving port, the return passage and the medal payout port 45.

By configuring it in this way, even if the screw that secures the chute member comes loose and falls, it is possible to prevent a player from cutting their hand by grabbing the screw that secures the chute member together with the medal with too much force. It is also possible to prevent the screw that secures the chute member from flying out of the gaming machine due to the impact of the fall and being lost.

As described above, the chute member is configured so that it can be engaged with the rear surface of the front panel PS2 by the engaging portion of the chute member, so that the chute member will not fall off the rear surface of the front panel PS2 even if the screw that secures the chute member comes loose.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 69, when the maximum width of the medal guide passage is "G", the total length of the screw (also referred to as the longitudinal length) is "H", and the diameter of the screw head (also referred to as the transverse length) is "I", it is configured to satisfy the following configuration.
(1) G<H
In other words, the maximum width of the medal guide passage is smaller than the overall length of the screw that fixes the chute member.
(2) G<I
In other words, the maximum width of the medal guide passage is smaller than the diameter of the head of the screw that fixes the chute member.

By configuring it in this way, even if the screw that secures the chute member comes loose and falls, the screw that secures the chute member will not get into the medal guide passage, so the screw that secures the chute member will not obstruct the passage of medals.

Alternatively, it may be configured so that "G<H" and "G>I". In other words, the maximum width of the medal guide passage may be configured so that it is smaller than the overall length of the screw that secures the chute member and larger than the diameter of the screw head that secures the chute member.

When configured this way, if the screw that secures the chute member comes loose and falls, there is a possibility that it may get caught in the medal guide passage. However, even if the screw does get caught in the medal guide passage, it will get caught midway through the guide passage and stop, so the loose screw will not get lost.

Alternatively, it may be configured so that "G>H" and "G>I". In other words, the maximum width of the medal guide passage may be configured to be larger than the overall length of the screw that secures the chute member and larger than the diameter of the screw head that secures the chute member.

When configured in this way, if the screw that secures the chute member comes loose and falls, it will get into the medal guide passage, but the loose screw will pass through the medal guide passage and fall, so it is possible to prevent the passage of medals being impeded.

In addition, in this embodiment, the fixing portion of the chute member is configured to be located at a position that protrudes upward from the outer wall of the medal guide passage, but this is not limited to this. The outer wall of the medal guide passage may be configured to have a recess that is recessed toward the front panel PS2 side, and a screw hole may be provided in the recess to serve as the fixing portion. In this case, it is preferable that the depth of the recess is greater than the overall length "H" of the screw that fixes the chute member. By configuring it in this way, even if the screw that fixes the chute member becomes loose, it will not get into the medal guide passage and obstruct the passage of medals.

The medal insertion port 17 also has a placement section that can hold multiple medals stacked and vertically oriented, and is configured so that multiple medals stacked and vertically oriented on the placement section can be inserted continuously from the medal insertion port 17.

If the thickness of a medal is "A", the maximum width of the medal guide passage is "G", and the number of medals that can be stacked and placed vertically on the placement section is "J", then the structure is such that "G < (A x J) ÷ 2". In other words, the maximum width of the medal guide passage is configured to be smaller than half the thickness of the number of medals that can be stacked and placed vertically on the placement section.

In addition, the return member may be configured so that the upper edge is gently inclined toward the hopper 44 when attached to the rear surface of the front panel PS2.
By configuring it in this manner, even if a medal rests on the upper edge and gets stuck in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, it will roll down, so that medals in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member do not obstruct the passage of the inserted medal and errors related to the selector are less likely to occur.

Figure 70 shows another form of positional relationship when the medal selector 34, chute member, and return member are attached to the back surface of the front panel PS2 applicable to this embodiment. The size of the medal return receiving opening is different from that in Figure 64, but the other configurations are the same as in Figure 64.

As shown in Figure 70, a medal return receiving opening is located vertically below the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, rather than at the upper edge.
In the example shown in FIG. 70, the vertical and horizontal lengths of the medal return slot are designed to be larger than the diameter of the medal.
By configuring it in this manner, even if an amusement store employee accidentally drops a medal while replenishing medals and the medal gets stuck in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, the medal will pass through the medal return receiving port, pass through the return passage, and be discharged from the medal payout outlet 45 to the tray 28. This prevents the medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member from obstructing the passage of the inserted medal, and makes it less likely that an error will occur regarding the selector.

<Explanation about error history>
The display of the error history applicable to this embodiment will be described.
The error history can be displayed on the liquid crystal during the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, when the setting confirmation mode is entered, an administrator menu screen (sometimes referred to as a setting confirmation screen) is displayed on the liquid crystal. On this administrator menu screen, a plurality of administrator menus are displayed, and "error history" is provided as one of the items of the administrator menu. When the sub switch 20 is operated (when the sub switch 20 is turned on) in a state in which "error history" is selected by operating the sub cross key switch 21, the error history is displayed on the liquid crystal. In this embodiment, the setting confirmation mode can be entered when the setting key switch signal is turned on in a state in which the door open signal is on and no bet is made.

In addition, in this embodiment, when an error notification start command is received from the main control means, the sub-control means notifies an error, and the error content and the time when the error occurred are linked and stored as an error history in a specified storage area of the sub-control RAM controlled by the sub-control means. Note that information regarding the time when the error occurred is configured to be obtained, for example, using an RTC (real-time clock) function provided in the gaming machine.

The error history is configured so that it will not be erased when the power is turned on or off or when settings are changed. The error history is also configured so that a specified number of histories (e.g., 120) can be stored, and when the specified number is exceeded, the oldest error history will be erased.

In addition, in this embodiment, the error history can be displayed in the setting confirmation mode, but it may also be configured to allow the error history to be checked in the setting change mode.

The error history may be displayed on the LCD when the sub-switch 20 is operated on the administrator menu screen, or the error history may be displayed on the LCD when a transition to setting confirmation mode is initiated, or the LCD may be used as a touch panel so that the error history is displayed on the LCD when the error history item is touched on the administrator menu screen.

In addition, the operation sound output from the speaker S when the sub cross key switch 21 is operated to select an item displayed on the administrator menu screen is configured to be different from the operation sound output from the speaker S when the sub cross key switch 21 is operated to select an item displayed on the user menu screen.
Note that the sound output on the administrator menu screen may be different from that on the user menu screen by not outputting the operation sound of the sub cross key switch 21. Also, the operation sound output from the speaker S when the sub cross key switch 21 is operated on the administrator menu screen may be a sound that is not output at all on any screen other than the administrator menu screen. Furthermore, a configuration may be made in which predetermined background music is output from the speaker S on the user menu screen, but no background music is output on the administrator menu screen, resulting in a silent state.
With this configuration, the difference between the user menu screen and the administrator menu screen can be easily recognized, and operational errors by the administrator can be prevented.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of the error history screen.
In addition, in FIG. 71, the door open state corresponds to a state in which the door open signal is on, and the door closed state corresponds to a state in which the door open signal is off.

As shown in Figure 71, the error history screen displays each error along with the time it occurred.

The error history screen is also configured to display the most recent errors in descending order.

In addition, opening/closing the front door, turning the power on/off, starting/ending a setting change, and starting/ending a setting check are not errors, but are configured to be displayed in the error history.

The system is also configured to display the start and end points of each error content, such as the occurrence and release of an error, the start and end of a setting change, and the start and end of a setting check, as an error history. However, the system is not limited to this, and may be configured to display only the start point of an error content as an error history.

The error history is also configured to be able to display up to 12 errors per page, and the pages of the error history screen can be switched by operating the sub-cross key switch 21.

In this embodiment, the "occurrence time" of each error is displayed on the error history screen, such as "007 Medal retention error occurred 2021/11/11 10:01:01" in FIG. 71, but in reality, the "time when notification started" of each error is stored in the error history as the "occurrence time" and displayed on the error history screen. Also, the content of the error and the time when the error occurred are stored as the error history at the time when notification of the error started (the time when the sub-control means received the error notification start command), rather than at the time when the error occurred (the time when the error was detected).

The reason for this configuration is that there may be cases where an error is detected but no error notification is initiated, such as while the reels are rotating, in other words, there may be a time lag between the detection of an error and the notification of the error.
For example, if a specified error (such as an error related to the hopper 44 or an error related to the selector) is detected during the rotation of the reels in one game, the error is not notified at the timing when the specified error is detected (when the specified error occurs), but at a specified timing after the end of the game (when all the reels have stopped, when the payout process has ended, etc.), the specified error state is entered, the game cannot proceed, and the specified error is notified. In this case, if a player leaves his seat while the reels are spinning and it takes about three minutes to stop all the reels, there will be a delay of about three minutes between the detection of the error and the notification of the error.
Even in such a case, by displaying the time when the error notification began as the time when the error occurred, there is no difference between the timing of the error notification and the time when the error occurred on the error history screen, which prevents game store staff from mistakenly thinking that there is a malfunction in the game machine or that some kind of fraud has occurred.

Furthermore, if a predetermined error is detected during the rotation of the reels in one game as described above, and the power is turned off before the end of the game, the power outage occurs before the end of that one game, and the power is turned off without the predetermined error and the time when the predetermined error occurred being stored in the error history. If the power is subsequently restored and the game transitions to the setting change mode, the information regarding the predetermined error is erased in the initialization process in the setting change process, so that the predetermined error is not notified even after the setting change mode ends, and is not stored in the error history.
With this configuration, errors that have not been reported are not stored as error history and are not displayed on the error history screen, so that the reported errors can be consistent with the error history, and it is possible to prevent game store staff from mistakenly assuming that there is a malfunction in the game machine or that some kind of fraud has occurred.

In addition, the error history screen may be configured to display error history in a predetermined color (e.g., red), and other history (power on/off, start/end of setting change, etc.) in a specific color (e.g., white or black).
By configuring in this way, the error history can be displayed more prominently than other histories, making it easier to check the error history.

In addition, instead of displaying the start/end of setting changes and the start/end of setting checks in the error history, a separate item called "setting change history" may be set up so that the history of the start/end of setting changes and the start/end of setting checks is displayed along with the time in the setting change history.
By configuring it in this manner, the content displayed on the error history screen can be simplified, so that arcade staff will not overlook anything when checking the error history or setting change history.

In addition, as a history of the completion of the setting change, for example, “Setting change completed (6)” (where (6) indicates the setting value) may be displayed so that the setting value set in the setting change process can also be confirmed in the setting change history.
By configuring in this manner, if it is suspected that the setting value has been tampered with, it is possible to check the setting value set in the immediately preceding setting change process, thereby making it possible to confirm whether or not there has been any tampering.

Also, the time elapsed since the power was turned on may be displayed in the error history, starting from the timing of power-on. Specifically, when the error contents occur in the order of "power on" → "door open" → "door close" → "medal retention error occurred", the error history screen may be configured to display the following in order (from the most recent history) from the top of the screen: "medal retention error occurred: 0 hours 10 minutes 0 seconds elapsed" → "door close: 0 hours 0 minutes 10 seconds elapsed" → "door open: 0 hours 0 minutes 1 second elapsed" → "power on: 0 hours 0 minutes 0 seconds elapsed". The time elapsed since the power was turned on is calculated by performing a predetermined arithmetic process using the time when the power was turned on and the time when each error content occurred, which are stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub-control RAM.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to intuitively grasp the time from when the power was turned on to when the error occurred.

The time that has elapsed since the error occurred may be displayed in the error history. When the error occurred in the order of "power on" → "door open" → "door close" → "medal accumulation error occurred" ..., the error history may be displayed in the following order (from the most recent to the most recent) as "medal accumulation error occurred: 0 hours 0 minutes 0 seconds ago" → "door close: 0 hours 9 minutes 50 seconds ago" → "door open: 0 hours 9 minutes 59 seconds ago" → "power on: 0 hours 10 minutes 0 seconds ago". The time that has elapsed since the error occurred is calculated by performing a predetermined calculation process using the time when each error occurred, which is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub-control RAM, and the current time acquired by the RTC function.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to intuitively grasp the amount of time that has passed since the error occurred.
In this case, if a predetermined period of time (for example, 31 days) has passed since the occurrence of the error, it is preferable to display "predetermined period of time has passed."

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of the error history screen when the front door is opened or closed while the error history screen is being displayed.
In FIG. 72 (1), the front door is open, and "Start setting confirmation" is displayed in 001 (latest error content).
After that, when the front door is closed, the door open signal turns off, the error history is updated, and "Door Closed" is displayed in 001.
After that, when the front door is opened again, the door open signal turns on, the error history is updated, and "Door Open" is displayed in 001.

In this way, if the front door is opened or closed while the error history screen is displayed, the error history related to opening and closing of the front door is updated in real time each time the opening/closing of the front door is detected, and the error history screen is also updated.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to accurately determine whether the error history display is working correctly.

While the error history screen is displayed, the error history is updated each time the opening/closing of the front door is detected, but the error history screen may be configured not to be updated, and then the display of the error history screen may be ended and the error history screen may be displayed again, at which point the error history screen may be updated.
By configuring it in this manner, the error history screen will not be updated even if the front door is opened or closed while checking the error history, so that when you want to check old error history, old error history will not be unintentionally erased from the error history screen by opening or closing the front door.

In addition, while the error history screen is displayed, the opening/closing of the front door is detected, but if the opening/closing of the front door is detected less than a predetermined time (approximately one minute) after the previous error history update, no error history is recorded, and if a predetermined time has passed since the previous error history update, the error history is updated and the error history screen is also updated.
In other words, opening and closing the front door while the error history screen is displayed may be configured so that it will not be recorded in the error history unless a predetermined time has passed since the previous error history update, but will be recorded in the error history if the predetermined time has passed.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to accurately determine whether the error history display is working correctly. Also, since opening and closing of the front door before a predetermined time has elapsed since the error history was updated is not recorded in the error history, old error history can be prevented from being erased from the error history screen even if the front door is unintentionally opened and closed repeatedly.

Also, while the error history screen is displayed, the opening/closing of the front door may not be detected, or may be detected but not stored as error history.
By configuring it in this manner, the error history screen will not be updated even if the front door is opened or closed while checking the error history, so that when you want to check old error history, old error history will not be unintentionally erased by opening or closing the front door.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the opening of the front door is detected (when the door open signal is turned on), a predetermined image is displayed on the liquid crystal as a display corresponding to a door open error (such as "The door is open"), "dE" is displayed on the payout number display, and a door open sound is output from the speaker S. However, when the setting confirmation mode is entered, the display of the predetermined image is ended and the output of the door open sound is stopped (or the volume is set to "0"). Note that the payout number display may be configured to continue displaying the door open error even after entering the setting confirmation mode, or the display corresponding to the door open error by the payout number display may be ended when entering the setting confirmation mode.
In addition, the device may be configured to continue outputting the door-opening sound when the setting confirmation mode is entered and the administrator menu screen is displayed, and to stop outputting the door-opening sound when the error history screen is displayed.
With this configuration, administrator menu settings and error history can be checked in the setting check mode in a quiet environment.

The door opening sound may be continuously output from the speaker S even during the setting confirmation mode or while the error history screen is being displayed.
With this configuration, even if a store clerk forgets to end the setting change mode and leaves the gaming machine, the clerk can be alerted by the door opening sound.

In addition, in this embodiment, "Time setting" is provided as one of the setting items in the administrator menu, and when "Time setting" is selected by operating the sub-cross key switch 21 and the sub-switch 20 is operated (when the sub-switch 20 is turned on), a time setting screen is displayed on the LCD, and the time can be changed on the time setting screen.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of the time setting screen.
Figure 73 shows an example in which a time setting screen is displayed when the current time on the gaming machine is 11:11:11 on November 11, 2021.

As shown in FIG. 73, when the time setting screen is displayed, the current time is displayed on the LCD.
The time setting screen is configured so that the values of each of the items "year", "month", "day", "hour", "minute", and "second" can be changed, and the time setting screen is displayed with the "year" item selected initially. On the time setting screen, the cursor can be moved to the item to be changed by operating (pressing) the left switch and right switch of the sub cross key switch 21, and the value of the item to be changed can be changed by operating (pressing) the up switch and down switch of the sub cross key switch 21. The change to the current time is then confirmed by operating the sub switch 20, and the changed time is set as the current time.

The current time displayed when switching to the time setting screen is configured not to be updated even as time passes on the time setting screen, but internally the current time is kept track of continuously.

In addition, when the changed time is confirmed on the time setting screen, the number of seconds in the current time is reset to "0" when the changed time is confirmed, and then the clock starts counting the current time.

The system is also configured to be able to detect the opening and closing of the front door even during time setting, and to store this in the error history. Here, if the front door is opened before the change to the current time is confirmed on the time setting screen, the change to the current time has not been confirmed, so the door open history is stored based on the current time before the change. Also, if the front door is closed before the change to the current time is confirmed on the time setting screen, the change to the current time has not been confirmed, so the door close history is stored based on the current time before the change.
With this configuration, even if the time setting is ended without confirming the change to the current time, the correct time can be stored as an error history.

The error history screen is configured to display the errors in descending order from the most recent error according to the order in which they were stored in the error history. For example, suppose that a first error occurs when the error history is not displayed, and the first error is notified at the current time "t1", and then, after the first error is cleared, a time earlier than "t1" is set as the current time on the time setting screen, and then, a second error occurs and the second error is notified at the current time "t2" (a time earlier than t1). In this case, the time when the first error occurred is "t1", and the time when the second error occurred is "t2", both of which are stored in the error history, but the error history screen is configured to display the second error as the most recent error.
With this configuration, the order of the error history cannot be intentionally changed by setting the time, so that the history of any illegal actions can be recorded reliably.

FIG. 74 shows a list of display patterns of the error history when multiple errors occur.
In the setting check mode, errors are detected in the same way as when the reels are rotating, but the error is not notified. For example, if a specific error (such as an error related to the hopper 44 or an error related to the selector) is detected during the setting check mode, the specific error is not notified at the time when the specific error is detected (occurred), but is notified at a specific time after the setting check mode ends, and the error content and the time when the error occurred (the time when the error was notified) are stored as an error history.
In addition, the system is configured so that the error cannot be cleared even if the reset switch is operated during the setting confirmation mode.

In Figure 74, "Checking" corresponds to the setting check mode, and "Normal" corresponds to a state in which errors can be reported when the reels are spinning or when not in setting check mode. "Combined and reported" corresponds to reporting multiple errors that have not been reported together, for example, "First error and second error occurred." "Combined and displayed" corresponds to the error history when errors are reported together, for example, "First error and second error occurred." "First error" and "second error" correspond to errors related to the hopper 44 and errors related to the selector, respectively, and the first error is set to have a higher priority in error reporting than the second error.

Pattern 1 in FIG. 74 will be described.
First, if errors occur in the order of a first error → a second error during confirmation, the first error is notified after the setting confirmation mode ends, and then the second error is notified when the first error is released. In this case, the error history is stored in the order of occurrence of the first error → occurrence of the second error, and the error history screen is also configured to display from the top (from the newest history) the second error occurrence → occurrence of the first error.

Next, if errors occur during confirmation in the order of second error → first error, the first error is notified after the setting confirmation mode ends, and then the second error is notified when the first error is cleared. In this case, the error history is stored in the order of first error occurrence → second error occurrence, and the error history screen is also configured to display second error occurrence → first error occurrence from the top (starting with the most recent history).

Next, if errors occur in the order of first error → second error during normal operation, the first error is notified immediately after the first error occurs, and then the second error is notified after the first error is cleared. In this case, the error history is stored in the order of first error occurrence → second error occurrence, and the error history screen is also configured to display the second error occurrence → first error occurrence from the top (starting with the most recent history).

Next, if errors occur in the order of second error → first error during normal operation, the second error is notified immediately after the second error occurs, and then the first error is notified after the second error is cleared. In this case, the error history is stored in the order of second error occurrence → first error occurrence, and the error history screen is also configured to display the first error occurrence → second error occurrence from the top (starting with the most recent history).

In this way, in pattern 1 of Figure 74, if multiple errors are detected during the setting check mode, the errors are notified in order of highest priority after the setting check mode ends, and if multiple errors occur during normal operation, the errors are notified in the order in which they occurred.
Even in this configuration, the error history is stored in the order in which the errors were reported, not in the order in which the errors occurred, so that the order in which the errors were reported can be made consistent with the order in which the error history is stored, and it is possible to prevent staff at the game arcade from mistakenly assuming that there is a malfunction in the game machine or that some kind of fraud has occurred.

Pattern 2 in FIG. 74 will now be described.
First, if errors occur in the order of a first error and then a second error during confirmation, the first error and the second error are combined and notified after the setting confirmation mode ends. In this case, the error history stores the combined error contents of the first error and the second error, and the error history screen also displays the combined contents of the first error and the second error.

Next, if errors occur during confirmation in the order of second error → first error, the first error and second error are combined and notified after the setting confirmation mode ends. In this case, the error history stores the combined error content of the first error and second error, and the error history screen is also configured to display the combined content of the first error and second error.

When multiple errors are reported in combination, the system may be configured so that a single error clearing operation (operation of the reset switch) can clear the multiple errors reported in combination, or the system may be configured so that an error clearing operation is required for each error reported in combination.

In addition, if errors occur in the order of a first error → a second error during normal operation, or if errors occur in the order of a second error → a first error during normal operation, the situation is the same as pattern 1 in Figure 74.

When configured in this way, multiple errors can be reported at once, simplifying the content of the error reports.

For example, if errors occur in the order of third error → fourth error (with the same error notification priority as the third error) during the setting check mode, the third error is notified after the setting check mode ends, and then the fourth error is notified when the third error is cleared. In this case, the error history is stored in the order of occurrence of the third error → occurrence of the fourth error, and the error history screen is also configured to display the fourth error → occurrence of the third error from the top (starting with the most recent history). In this way, even if multiple errors occur during setting check, if the error notification priorities are the same, the errors are notified in the order in which they occurred, and are stored in the error history in the order in which they occurred.

Also, the configuration may be such that error detection is not performed during the setting check mode.
In this configuration, even if an error occurs, the error will not be notified and the error will not be recorded in the error history.
By configuring it in this manner, it is possible to prevent an administrator from mistakenly assuming that an unreported error remains in the error history, and that the gaming machine is broken or that some kind of fraud has occurred.

Also, if an error is detected while the error history screen is displayed during the setting confirmation mode, the error history may be updated in real time, and the error history screen may also be updated.
With this configuration, the administrator can immediately know that an error has occurred even while the error history is being displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a specific error occurs, the specific error and a monitoring error of the sensor that detects the specific error may be notified. Note that the "specific error" is an error whose detailed cause can be identified, and the "monitoring error of the sensor that detects the specific error" is an error whose detailed cause cannot be identified.
For example, when a hopper backlog error occurs, the device may be configured to notify a hopper backlog error and a dispensing sensor monitoring error indicating that either an error related to the hopper 44 has occurred.

Here, if a hopper blockage error occurs under normal circumstances (a state in which errors can be reported when the reels are not rotating or in setting confirmation mode), a hopper blockage error and a payout sensor monitoring error will be reported, and the error history will be stored in the order of payout sensor monitoring error occurrence → hopper blockage error occurrence, and the error history screen may be configured to display from the top (starting with the most recent history) as hopper blockage error occurrence → payout sensor monitoring error occurrence.
In addition, at this time, the error history when the hopper congestion error is cleared is stored in the order of Hopper congestion error cleared → Hopper congestion error cleared, and the error history screen may be configured to display Hopper congestion error cleared → Dispensing sensor monitoring error cleared from the top (starting from the newest history).
In other words, if a hopper congestion error occurs under normal circumstances and the error history screen is displayed after the hopper congestion error is cleared, the screen may be configured to display, from the top (starting with the most recent history), the following: Hopper congestion error cleared → Dispensing sensor monitoring error cleared → Hopper congestion error occurs → Dispensing sensor monitoring error occurs.

On the other hand, if a hopper congestion error occurs while the error history screen is displayed during the setting confirmation mode, a hopper congestion error and a dispensing sensor monitoring error will be notified after the setting confirmation mode ends, and the error history will be stored in the order of hopper congestion error occurrence → dispensing sensor monitoring error occurrence, and when the error history screen is displayed again, the error history screen will also display from the top (starting from the most recent history) as dispensing sensor monitoring error occurrence → hopper congestion error occurrence.
In addition, at this time, the error history when the hopper congestion error is cleared is stored in the order of dispensing sensor monitoring error cleared → hopper congestion error cleared, and the error history screen may be configured to display hopper congestion error cleared → dispensing sensor monitoring error cleared in that order from top to bottom.
In other words, if a hopper congestion error occurs during setting confirmation mode and the error history screen is displayed again after the hopper congestion error is cleared, the screen may be configured to display, from the top (starting from the most recent history), the following: Hopper congestion error cleared → Dispensing sensor monitoring error cleared → Dispensing sensor monitoring error occurs → Hopper congestion error occurs.

By configuring it in this way, if a specific error occurs while the error history screen is displayed, when the error history screen is displayed again, it will be displayed from the top (starting with the most recent history) as follows: specific error → monitoring error of the sensor that detected the specific error. This makes it possible to prevent the type of error from being discovered instantly even if fraud is attempted in order to learn the type of error.

In addition, by configuring it in this way, the error resolution history on the error history screen will be the same both under normal circumstances and when the error history screen is displayed, so an accurate history can be kept.

<Time required for various processes>
The time required for various processes to realize various operations in this embodiment will be described.

The clock frequency of the main control CPU included in the main control chip mounted on the main control board in this embodiment is 10 MHz, so the time associated with one cycle, which is the smallest unit of the number of cycles indicating the execution time of various instructions, is 0.0001 ms. In other words, the time that elapses due to the execution of an instruction is determined according to the number of cycles required to fetch and execute the instruction.

For example, in the LD instruction (LD_r,n) for storing a value n in a register r, the number of cycles is 2, which means that 0.0002 ms will elapse when the LD instruction is executed.

To execute a software module consisting of multiple instructions, the total time required is equal to the number of cycles defined for each instruction, so the number of cycles is an important parameter when creating a software module.

<<Explanation regarding the lighting control of the bet number display lamp>>
Here, regarding the lighting process of the bet number display lamp, we will explain the case where a replay is determined as the internal drawing result by the internal drawing means of a specified game that has been started with three bets placed in a specified game state, and three bets are automatically bet as a process for granting a replay after the specified game has ended.

The lighting control of the bet number display lamp is controlled by dynamic lighting control. Specifically, the execution cycle of the interrupt process is 2.235 ms, the parts to be lit are changed for each interrupt process, and the parts to be lit are rotated through multiple interrupt processes (five interrupt processes in this embodiment). For example, when the value of the LED display counter is 1, the upper and lower digits of the credit number display are lit and the other LEDs are not lit; when the value of the LED display counter is 2, the upper and lower digits of the number of acquired coins display are lit and the other LEDs are not lit; when the value of the LED display counter is 3, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are lit and the other LEDs are not lit; when the value of the LED display counter is 4, the replay lamp is lit and the other LEDs are not lit; when the value of the LED display counter is 5, the start lamp and the medal insertion possible lamp are lit and the other LEDs are not lit.

By dynamically controlling all lamps managed by the main control means, power consumption can be reduced and lamp wear can be reduced compared to static lighting, in which the lamps are always on. In the case of dynamic lighting control, the various lamps will blink at high speed, but because the various lamps are periodically turned on again before they are completely turned off, it feels to the human eye like they are still on. In other words, 11.175 ms (2.235 ms x 5 interrupts) after a specific lamp (e.g., bed 1 lamp, bed 2 lamp, bed 3 lamp) is turned off by interrupt processing, the specific lamp is not yet completely turned off. It takes approximately 20 ms from when the specific lamp is turned off until it is completely turned off.

Note that the combination of the LED display counter value and the target lamp is just an example, and the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp do not have to be lit when the LED display counter value is the same (the 1 BET lamp may be lit when the LED display counter value is 1, the 2 BET lamp may be lit when the LED display counter value is 2, and the 3 BET lamp may be lit when the LED display counter value is 3, etc.). Lamps lit by such dynamic lighting control are also treated as "lit" here.

The lighting control of the bet number display lamps may also be controlled by static lighting control. In this case, while the 1 to 3 bet lamps are lit, the value of the RWM area for lighting display of the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp will not become 0 in the interrupt process, but when the 1 to 3 bet lamps are turned off as in the dynamic lighting process, the value of the RWM area for lighting display of the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is stored as 0 in the interrupt process. Furthermore, as in the case of dynamic lighting control, it takes about 20 ms for the bet lamps to be completely turned off after the value of the RWM area for lighting display of the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is stored as 0 in the interrupt process.

The bet number display lamp remains lit during the above-mentioned specified game. In other words, during a game that has started with three bets, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are lit. When the specified game ends, the game end check process of the main game progress in FIG. 9 is executed. The game end check process may be referred to as the process related to the end of one game. Furthermore, the game value input process executed thereafter may be referred to as the process related to the start of one game. Furthermore, when indicating either the game end check process or the game value input process, it may be referred to as the predetermined process executed at a predetermined timing after all the reels have stopped.

There are multiple possible patterns for how the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp will light up after a given game has ended, so each pattern will be explained below.

<<Pattern 1: The input number display data clear process included in the game end check process clears (initializes) the values in the RWM 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp lighting memory areas to 0, and then the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are simultaneously lit by the automatic input process included in the game value input process>>

In the game end check process, a process is executed to clear (initialize) the values in the RWM memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 0 (inserted number display data clear process). In this way, by once clearing the values in the RWM area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 0, the bet lamps corresponding to the next automatically inserted number can be lit.

Note that even if the game end check process executes a process to clear (initialize) the value of the RWM memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 0, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp will not turn off immediately. This is because the interrupt process executes control over the lighting of various LEDs, and the interrupt process checks the value of the RWM area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp, and if it is 0, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are turned off. Note that even if the control over the lighting of various LEDs is executed and a certain lamp switches from on to off, it takes time for the signal to be transmitted and for the lamp to be turned off, so there will be a slight lag before a person actually feels that the lamp has been turned off.

For this reason, even if the game end check process executes a process to clear (initialize) the values in the RWM 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp lighting display memory area to 0 (turning them off), in order for the lights to actually be turned off, it will take a total of the time from the time the game end check process executes the process to clear (initialize) the values in the RWM 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp lighting display memory area to 0 until the interrupt process stops outputting the lighting signal for the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp, plus the time until the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp are actually completely turned off.

After the game completion check process is executed in the game progress main process, the game value insertion process is executed. In the automatic insertion process executed in the game value insertion process, if replay is activated, the number of inserted medals is stored and the value of the memory area for displaying the RWM 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp is set to 1 (a value indicating lighting) (lighting process).

Note that even if the automatic insertion process sets the value of the memory area for indicating the lighting of the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp to 1, the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp will not light up immediately. Instead, the interrupt process checks the value of the RWM area for indicating the lighting of the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp, and if it is 1, the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp will light up. Similarly, there is a slight lag until the lamps are fully lit depending on the signal transmission time and the lighting time of the lamps.

In this way, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp that were lit during the game end check process for the game in which the replay was won are turned off, and then the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are turned on during the automatic insertion process.

In this configuration, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp start to light up due to an interrupt process after the automatic insertion process is executed before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely turned off due to the execution of the game end check process for the game in which the replay is won. In other words, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp start to light up due to an interrupt process after the automatic insertion process is executed before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely turned off due to the execution of the game end check process for the game in which the replay is won.

Here, Figure 90 shows the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp of the RWM, and the lighting state of the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp. Note that there is no correlation between the length of the horizontal axis in Figure 90 and the elapsed time.

Timing T1 in Figure 90 is the timing when the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp of the RWM becomes 0 during the game end check process.

Timing T2 in Figure 90 is the timing when the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp start to turn off in the interrupt process executed after the game end check process.

Timing T3 in Figure 90 is the timing when the value of the memory area for lighting the RWM 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp becomes 1 during the automatic insertion process.

Timing T4 in Figure 90 is the timing when the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp start to light up due to the interrupt processing executed after the automatic insertion processing.

Timing T5 in Figure 90 is the timing when the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp are fully lit.

The time from T1 to T2 and the time from T3 to T4 in FIG. 90 vary depending on the timing of starting the interrupt process. For example, the time from T1 to T2 is the time until control of the lighting of various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed if the interrupt process is started immediately after the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamps of the RWM is set to 0 in the game end check process. Also, for example, the time from T1 to T2 is the time until control of the lighting of various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed plus 2 ms if the interrupt process is started 2 ms after the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamps of the RWM is set to 0 in the game end check process. Also, for example, the time from T3 to T4 is the time until control of the lighting of various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed if the interrupt process is started immediately after the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is set to 1 in the automatic insertion process. For example, if the interrupt process is started 2 ms after the value of the memory area for lighting the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp is set to 1 in the automatic insertion process, the time from T3 to T4 is the time until control related to lighting the various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed plus 2 ms.

As shown in FIG. 90, when a replay is won, the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is stored as 1 in the automatic insertion process before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely turned off after the game end check process, making it possible to turn on the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp before they are completely turned off.

To achieve this, the time from when the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp of the RWM is set to 0 in the game end check process until the game value input process (cycle number A x 0.0001 ms), the time from when the game value input process starts until the process for setting the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp of the RWM to 1 by the automatic input process executed when replay is activated (cycle number B x 0.0001 ms), and the maximum value of 4.47 ms (2.235 ms x 2 times) for two interrupt processes must be designed to be less than the time it takes for the lamp to be completely turned off, which is approximately 20 ms. In order to make the lamp appear to be continuously lit (not turned off), it is preferable to design it to be less than 11.175 ms (2.235 ms x 5 interrupts), which is the time for one cycle of dynamic lighting control. The maximum value for two interrupt processes is the maximum delay time for the interrupt process when turning off the lamp and the interrupt process when turning on the lamp.

In other words, the following holds: cycle number A x 0.0001 ms + cycle number B x 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 20 ms. In other words, the total number of cycles A + B must be less than 155,300. In order to make the lamp appear to be continuously lit (appear not to be turned off), the following holds: cycle number A x 0.0001 ms + cycle number B x 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 11.175 ms. In other words, the total number of cycles A + B must be less than 67,050. In this embodiment, the total number of cycles A + B is set to approximately 1,000, so both relationships hold.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to turn on the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp before the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp are completely turned off.

<<Pattern 2: The input number display data clear process included in the game end check process clears (initializes) the values in the RWM 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp lighting memory areas to 0, and then the automatic input process included in the game value input process lights up the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp in order>>

In the game end check process, a process is executed to clear (initialize) the values in the RWM memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 0 (inserted number display data clear process). In this way, by once clearing the values in the RWM area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 0, the bet lamps corresponding to the next automatically inserted number can be lit.

Note that even if the game end check process executes a process to clear (initialize) the value of the RWM memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 0, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp will not turn off immediately. This is because the interrupt process executes control over the lighting of various LEDs, and the interrupt process checks the value of the RWM area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp, and if it is 0, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are turned off. Note that even if the control over the lighting of various LEDs is executed and a certain lamp switches from on to off, it takes time for the signal to be transmitted and for the lamp to be turned off, so there will be a slight lag before a person actually feels that the lamp has been turned off.

For this reason, even if the game end check process executes the process of clearing (initializing) the values in the RWM 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp lighting display memory area to 0, in order for the lights to actually be turned off, it will take the time from the time the game end check process executes the process of clearing (initializing) the values in the RWM 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp lighting display memory area to 0 until the interrupt process stops the output of the lighting signal for the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp, plus the time until the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp are actually completely turned off.

After the game completion check process is executed in the game progress main process, the game value insertion process is executed. In the automatic insertion process executed in the game value insertion process, if replay is activated, the number of inserted medals is stored and the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the RWM 1 bet lamp is set to 1 (a value indicating that it is lit), the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 2 bet lamp is set to 1 (a value indicating that it is lit), and the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 3 bet lamp is set to 1 (a value indicating that it is lit).

Note that even if the automatic insertion process sets the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bed lamp to 1, the memory area for displaying the 2 bed lamp to 1, and the memory area for displaying the 3 bed lamp to 1, the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp will not light up immediately; instead, the value of the RWM area for displaying the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp is checked using the control related to the lighting of various LEDs by interrupt processing, and if it is 1, the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp will be turned on. Similarly, there will be a slight lag until the lamps are fully lit depending on the signal transmission time and the lighting time of the lamps.

In this way, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp that were lit during the game end check process for the game in which the replay was won are turned off, and then the 1 bet lamp, the 2 bet lamp, and the 3 bet lamp are turned on during the automatic insertion process.

In this configuration, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp start to light up due to an interrupt process after the automatic insertion process is executed before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely turned off due to the execution of the game end check process for the game in which the replay is won. In other words, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp start to light up due to an interrupt process after the automatic insertion process is executed before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely turned off due to the execution of the game end check process for the game in which the replay is won.

Here, Figure 91 shows the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp of the RWM, and the lighting state of the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp. Note that there is no correlation between the length of the horizontal axis in Figure 91 and the elapsed time.

Timing T1 in Figure 91 is the timing when the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp of the RWM becomes 0 during the game end check process.

Timing T2 in Figure 91 is the timing when the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp start to turn off in the interrupt process executed after the game end check process.

Timing T3 in Figure 91 is the timing when the value of the memory area for displaying the RWM 1 bed lamp becomes 1 during the automatic insertion process.

Timing T4 in Figure 91 is the timing when the value of the memory area for displaying the RWM 2 bed lamp becomes 1 during the automatic insertion process.

Timing T5 in Figure 91 is the timing when the value of the memory area for displaying the RWM 3 bed lamps becomes 1 during the automatic insertion process.

Timing T6 in Figure 91 is the timing when the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp start to light up due to the interrupt processing executed after the automatic insertion processing.

Timing T7 in Figure 91 is the timing when the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp are fully lit.

The time from T1 to T2 and the time from T3 to T6 in FIG. 91 vary depending on the start timing of the interrupt process. For example, the time from T1 to T2 is the time until the control of the lighting of various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed if the interrupt process is started immediately after the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamps of the RWM is set to 0 in the game end check process. Also, for example, the time from T1 to T2 is the time until the control of the lighting of various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed plus 2 ms if the interrupt process is started 2 ms after the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamps of the RWM is set to 0 in the game end check process. Also, for example, the time from T3 to T6 is the time until the control of the lighting of various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed if the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 1 bet lamp is set to 1 in the automatic insertion process, the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 2 bet lamp is set to 1, and then the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 3 bet lamp is set to 1, in the case where the interrupt process is started immediately after the interrupt process is started. For example, if the automatic insertion process sets the value of the memory area for displaying the illumination of the 1st lamp to 1, the value of the memory area for displaying the illumination of the 2nd lamp to 1, and then the value of the memory area for displaying the illumination of the 3rd lamp to 1, and then the interrupt process is started 2 ms later, the time from T3 to T6 is the time until the control related to the illumination of the various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed plus 2 ms.

As shown in FIG. 91, when a replay is won, the automatic insertion process stores a value of 1 in the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp as lit before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely turned off from the game end check process, stores a value of 1 in the memory area for displaying the 2 bet lamp as lit, and stores a value of 1 in the memory area for displaying the 3 bet lamp as lit, making it possible to light the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp before they are completely turned off.

In order to configure in this manner, it is necessary to design the system so that the total of the time from when the values in the memory area for displaying the lighting of the RWM's 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are set to 0 in the game end check process until the game value input process (number of cycles A x 0.0001 ms), the time from the start of the game value input process until the process for setting the value in the memory area for displaying the lighting of the RWM's 1 bet lamp to 1 by the automatic input process executed if re-play is activated in the game value input process (number of cycles B x 0.0001 ms), the time until the process for setting the value in the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 2 bet lamp to 1 (number of cycles C x 0.0001 ms), the time until the process for setting the value in the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 3 bet lamp to 1 (number of cycles D x 0.0001 ms), and the maximum value of 4.47 ms (2.235 ms x 2 times) for two interrupt processes is less than the approximately 20 ms time it takes for the lamps to be completely turned off. In order to make the lamp appear to be continuously lit (appear not to be turned off), it is preferable to design it so that it is less than 11.175 ms (2.235 ms x 5 interrupts), which is the time for one cycle of dynamic lighting control. Note that the maximum value for two interrupt processes is the maximum delay time for the interrupt process when turning the lamp off and the interrupt process when turning the lamp on.

In other words, the following relationship holds: number of cycles A x 0.0001 ms + number of cycles B x 0.0001 ms + number of cycles C x 0.0001 ms + number of cycles D x 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 20 ms. In other words, the total number of cycles A + B + C + D must be less than 155,300. In order to make the lamp appear to be continuously lit (not turned off), the following relationship holds: number of cycles A x 0.0001 ms + number of cycles B x 0.0001 ms + number of cycles C x 0.0001 ms + number of cycles D x 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 11.175 ms. In other words, the total number of cycles A + B must be less than 67,050. In this embodiment, the total number of cycles A + B + C + D is approximately 1,500, so both relationships hold.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to turn on the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp before the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp are completely turned off.

Although the time from T3 to T4 and from T4 to T5 is extremely short (shorter than the interrupt processing cycle), it is possible that the interrupt processing will be executed between T3 and T5. In such a case, the 2 BET lamp and the 3 BET lamp may be completely turned off. However, because the time from T3 to T4 and from T4 to T5 is shorter than the interrupt processing, it is possible to immediately turn on the turned-off lamps with the next interrupt processing, making it possible to quickly turn on the lamps even in the rare event that occurs, and maintain the tempo of the game.

<<Pattern 3: The input number display data clear process included in the game value input process clears (initializes) the values in the RWM's 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp display memory areas to 0, and then the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp light up simultaneously during the automatic input process>>

During the game value insertion process, a process is executed to clear (initialize) the values in the memory area of the RWM for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 0 (inserted number display data clear process). In this way, by once clearing the values in the RWM area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 0, the bet lamps corresponding to the next automatically inserted number can be lit.

Note that even if the value of the RWM memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is cleared to 0 (initialized) in the input number display data clear process of the game value input process, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp do not turn off immediately. This is because the interrupt process controls the lighting of various LEDs, and the interrupt process checks the value of the RWM area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp, and if it is 0, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are turned off. Note that even if the control of the lighting of various LEDs is executed and a certain lamp switches from on to off, it takes time for the signal to be transmitted and for the lamp to be turned off, so there will be some lag before a person actually feels that the lamp has been turned off.

For this reason, even if the process of clearing (initializing) the values in the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp of the RWM to 0 in the process of clearing the data displaying the number of inserted coins in the process of inserting gaming value is executed, in order for the lights to actually be turned off, it will take a total of the time from the process of clearing (initializing) the values in the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp of the RWM to 0 in the process of clearing the data displaying the number of inserted coins in the process of inserting gaming value, until the output of the light-up signal for the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is stopped by the interrupt process, and the time until the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are actually completely turned off.

The game value insertion process in the game progress main process includes an automatic insertion process (which is executed after the process for clearing the data displaying the number of inserted medals). In the automatic insertion process, when replay is activated, the number of inserted medals is stored and the value of the memory area for displaying the illumination of the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp of the RWM is set to 1 (the value indicating illumination).

Note that even if the game value input process executes a process to set the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 1, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp will not light up immediately. Instead, the interrupt process checks the value of the RWM area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp, and if it is 1, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp will light up. Similarly, there is a slight lag until the lamps are fully lit, depending on the signal transmission time and the lamp lighting time.

In this way, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp that were lit during the input coin count display data clear process of the game value input process after a game in which a replay is won are turned off, and then the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are turned on during the automatic input process of the game value input process.

In this configuration, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp start to light up due to an interrupt process after the automatic insertion process of the gaming value insertion process is executed, before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely turned off due to the execution of the insertion number display data clear process of the gaming value insertion process after a game in which a replay is won. In other words, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp start to light up due to an interrupt process after the automatic insertion process of the gaming value insertion process is executed, before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely turned off, after the value of the RWM's memory area for displaying the illumination of the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is cleared to 0 due to the execution of the insertion number display data clear process of the gaming value insertion process after a game in which a replay is won.

Here, Figure 92 shows the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp of the RWM, and the lighting state of the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp. Note that there is no correlation between the length of the horizontal axis in Figure 90 and the elapsed time.

Timing T1 in Figure 92 is the timing when the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp of the RWM becomes 0 during the input number display data clear process of the game value input process.

Timing T2 in Figure 92 is the timing when the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp start to turn off in the interrupt process executed after the input number display data clear process of the gaming value input process.

Timing T3 in Figure 92 is the timing when the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp of the RWM becomes 1 during the automatic insertion process of the game value insertion process.

Timing T4 in Figure 92 is the timing when the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp start to light up in the interrupt process executed after the automatic insertion process of the game value insertion process.

Timing T5 in Figure 92 is the timing when the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp are fully lit.

The time from T1 to T2 and the time from T3 to T4 in FIG. 92 vary depending on the timing of the interrupt process. For example, if the interrupt process is started immediately after the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp of the RWM is set to 0 in the input number display data clear process of the game value input process, the time from T1 to T2 is the time until control over the lighting of the various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed. Also, for example, if the interrupt process is started 2 ms after the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp of the RWM is set to 0 in the input number display data clear process of the game value input process, the time from T1 to T2 is the time until control over the lighting of the various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed plus 2 ms. For example, the time from T3 to T4 is the time until control over the lighting of the various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed if the interrupt process is started immediately after the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is set to 1 in the automatic input process of the gaming value input process. For example, the time from T3 to T4 is the time until control over the lighting of the various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed plus 2 ms if the interrupt process is started 2 ms after the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is set to 1 in the automatic input process of the gaming value input process.

As shown in FIG. 92, when a replay is won, the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is stored as 1 in the automatic insertion process of the gaming value insertion process before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely turned off from the insertion number display data clear process of the gaming value insertion process. This makes it possible to turn on the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp before they are completely turned off.

To achieve this configuration, the time (cycle number A x 0.0001 ms) from when the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp of the RWM is cleared to 0 by the input number display data clear process of the game value input process until the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp of the RWM is cleared to 1 by the automatic input process of the game value input process, plus the maximum value of 4.47 ms (2.235 ms x 2 times) for two interrupt processes must be designed to be less than the time it takes for the lamp to be completely turned off, which is approximately 20 ms. Note that in order to make the lamp appear to be continuously lit (appear not to be turned off), it is preferable to design it to be less than 11.175 ms (2.235 ms x 5 interrupts), which is the time for one cycle of dynamic lighting control. Note that the maximum value for two interrupt processes is the maximum delay time for the interrupt process when turning off the lamp and the interrupt process when turning on the lamp.

In other words, the number of cycles A x 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 20 ms holds. In other words, the number of cycles A must be less than 155,300. Note that to make the lamp appear to be continuously lit (appear not to be turned off), the number of cycles A x 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 11.175 ms holds. In other words, the number of cycles A must be less than 67,050. In this embodiment, the number of cycles A is set to approximately 800, so both relationships hold.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to turn on the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp before the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp are completely turned off.

<<Pattern 4: The input number display data clear process included in the game value input process clears (initializes) the values in the RWM 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp display memory areas to 0, and then the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp light up in order during the automatic input process>>

In the game value insertion process, the insertion number display data clear process executes a process to clear (initialize) the values in the RWM memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 0 (inserted number display data clear process). In this way, by once clearing the values in the RWM area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 0, the bet lamps corresponding to the next automatically inserted number can be lit.

Note that even if the value of the RWM memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is cleared to 0 (initialized) in the input number display data clear process of the game value input process, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp do not turn off immediately. This is because the interrupt process controls the lighting of various LEDs, and the interrupt process checks the value of the RWM area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp, and if it is 0, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are turned off. Note that even if the control of the lighting of various LEDs is executed and a certain lamp switches from on to off, it takes time for the signal to be transmitted and for the lamp to be turned off, so there will be some lag before a person actually feels that the lamp has been turned off.

For this reason, even if the process of clearing the inserted number display data in the game value insertion process clears (initializes) the values in the RWM's memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamps to 0, in order for them to actually be turned off, it will take the time from the process of clearing the inserted number display data in the game value insertion process clearing (initializing) the values in the RWM's memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamps to 0 until the interrupt process stops the output of the lighting signal for the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp, plus the time until the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are actually completely turned off.

The game value insertion process in the game progress main process includes an automatic insertion process (which is executed after the process of clearing the inserted number display data). In the automatic insertion process, when replay is activated, the number of inserted medals is stored, and the value of the memory area for displaying the illumination of the RWM's 1 bet lamp is set to 1 (a value indicating that it is lit), the value of the memory area for displaying the illumination of the 2 bet lamp is set to 1 (a value indicating that it is lit), and the value of the memory area for displaying the illumination of the 3 bet lamp is set to 1 (a value indicating that it is lit).

Note that even if the automatic insertion process sets the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bed lamp to 1, the memory area for displaying the 2 bed lamp to 1, and the memory area for displaying the 3 bed lamp to 1, the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp will not light up immediately; instead, the value of the RWM area for displaying the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp is checked using the control related to the lighting of various LEDs by interrupt processing, and if it is 1, the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp will be turned on. Similarly, there will be a slight lag until the lamps are fully lit depending on the signal transmission time and the lighting time of the lamps.

In this way, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp that were lit during the input number display data clearing process of the game value input process for the game in which the replay was won are turned off, and then during the automatic input process, the 1 bet lamp, the 2 bet lamp, and the 3 bet lamp are turned on.

In this configuration, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp start to light up due to an interrupt process after the automatic insertion process is executed before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely turned off due to the execution of the insertion number display data clear process of the game value insertion process of the game in which the replay is won. In other words, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp start to light up due to an interrupt process after the automatic insertion process is executed before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely turned off due to the execution of the insertion number display data clear process of the game value insertion process of the game in which the replay is won.

Here, Figure 93 shows the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp of the RWM, and the lighting state of the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp. Note that there is no correlation between the length of the horizontal axis in Figure 93 and the elapsed time.

Timing T1 in Figure 93 is the timing when the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp of the RWM becomes 0 during the input number display data clear process of the game value input process.

Timing T2 in Figure 93 is the timing when the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp start to turn off in the interrupt process executed after the input number display data clear process of the gaming value input process.

Timing T3 in Figure 93 is the timing when the value of the memory area for displaying the RWM 1 bet lamp becomes 1 during the automatic insertion process of the game value insertion process.

Timing T4 in Figure 93 is the timing when the value of the memory area for displaying the RWM 2 bet lamp becomes 1 during the automatic insertion process of the game value insertion process.

Timing T5 in Figure 93 is the timing when the value of the memory area for displaying the RWM 3 bet lamp becomes 1 during the automatic insertion process of the game value insertion process.

Timing T6 in Figure 93 is the timing when the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp start to light up in the interrupt process executed after the automatic insertion process of the gaming value insertion process.

Timing T7 in Figure 93 is the timing when the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp are fully lit.

The time from T1 to T2 and the time from T3 to T6 in FIG. 93 vary depending on the timing of the interrupt process. For example, if the interrupt process is started immediately after the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp of the RWM is set to 0 in the input number display data clear process of the game value input process, the time from T1 to T2 is the time until control over the lighting of the various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed. Also, for example, if the interrupt process is started 2 ms after the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp of the RWM is set to 0 in the input number display data clear process of the game value input process, the time from T1 to T2 is the time until control over the lighting of the various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed plus 2 ms. For example, the time from T3 to T6 is the time until control regarding the lighting of various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed if an interrupt process is started immediately after the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 1st bet lamp is set to 1 in the automatic input process of the game value input process, the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 2nd bet lamp is set to 1, and then the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 3rd bet lamp is set to 1. For example, the time from T3 to T6 is the time until control regarding the lighting of various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed plus 2 ms in the case where an interrupt process is started 2 ms after the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 1st bet lamp is set to 1 in the automatic input process of the game value input process, the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 2nd bet lamp is set to 1, and then the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 3rd bet lamp is set to 1.

As shown in FIG. 93, when a replay is won, the automatic insertion process of the gaming value insertion process stores a value of 1 in the memory area for displaying the illumination of the 1 bet lamp, stores a value of 1 in the memory area for displaying the illumination of the 2 bet lamp, and stores a value of 1 in the memory area for displaying the illumination of the 3 bet lamp, before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely turned off after the insertion number display data clear process of the gaming value insertion process. This makes it possible to light up the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp before they are completely turned off.

In order to configure in this manner, it is necessary to design the total time (number of cycles A x 0.0001 ms) from when the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the RWM's 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is set to 0 in the input number display data clear process of the gaming value input process until the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the RWM's 1 bet lamp is set to 1 by the automatic input process of the gaming value input process, the time until the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 2 bet lamp is set to 1 (number of cycles B x 0.0001 ms), the time until the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 3 bet lamp is set to 1 (number of cycles C x 0.0001 ms), and the maximum value of 4.47 ms (2.235 ms x 2 times) for two interrupt processes, to be less than the time it takes for the lamps to be completely turned off, which is approximately 20 ms. In order to make the lamp appear to be continuously lit (appear not to be turned off), it is preferable to design it so that it is less than 11.175 ms (2.235 ms x 5 interrupts), which is the time for one cycle of dynamic lighting control. Note that the maximum value for two interrupt processes is the maximum delay time for the interrupt process when turning the lamp off and the interrupt process when turning the lamp on.

In other words, the following relationship holds: number of cycles A x 0.0001 ms + number of cycles B x 0.0001 ms + number of cycles C x 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 20 ms. In other words, the total number of cycles A + B + C must be less than 155,300. In order to make the lamp appear to be continuously lit (appear not to be turned off), the following relationship holds: number of cycles A x 0.0001 ms + number of cycles B x 0.0001 ms + number of cycles C x 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 11.175 ms. In other words, the total number of cycles A + B + C must be less than 67,050. In this embodiment, the total number of cycles A + B + C is set to about 900, so both relationships hold.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to turn on the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp before the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp are completely turned off.

Although the time from T3 to T4 and from T4 to T5 is extremely short (shorter than the interrupt processing cycle), it is possible that the interrupt processing will be executed between T3 and T5. In such a case, the 2 BET lamp and the 3 BET lamp may be completely turned off. However, because the time from T3 to T4 and from T4 to T5 is shorter than the interrupt processing, it is possible to immediately turn on the turned-off lamps with the next interrupt processing, making it possible to quickly turn on the lamps even in the rare event that occurs, and maintain the tempo of the game.

The above-mentioned patterns 1 to 4 were explained on the assumption that dynamic lighting control was used, but the same relationship between the number of cycles and the time it takes for the bed lamp to turn off applies even with static lighting control. This is because the time it takes from when the bed lamp starts to turn off until it is completely turned off is the same (20 ms) whether dynamic lighting control or static lighting control is used.

In the above-mentioned Pattern 2 and Pattern 4, the bet number is incremented by 1 in the automatic insertion process, but it appears as if the bets are being incremented simultaneously. However, this is not limited to the above. A timer can be set to indicate the waiting time each time the bet number is incremented by 1, and when the timer value reaches 0 in the timer update process for each interrupt process, the bet number can be updated from 1 to 2 and the timer can be set again, allowing the player to visually perceive the bet lamps as being lit sequentially.

In this case, the memory area for displaying the 1 bed lamp is set to store 1 after being cleared until the 1 bed lamp is completely turned off, and the memory area for displaying the 2 bed lamp and the memory area for displaying the 3 bed lamp may be set to be completely turned off after being cleared, or the 1 bed lamp may be set to be completely turned off. Note that the timer value set when visually indicating the number of bets one by one in order must be longer than the interrupt period of 2.235 ms in the case of static lighting control, and longer than the dynamic lighting period of 11.175 ms in the case of static lighting control or dynamic lighting control. As an example, the timer value of the timer is 30 ms.

Next, we will explain how the bet number display lamp is turned on and off when the bet switch is operated.

When the game is in a waiting state (waiting to bet) with 0 bets, and the bet switch (a concept that includes the MAX bet switch and 1 bet switch) is operated, the 1 bet lamp can be lit (when the MAX bet switch is operated, the 1 to 3 bet lamps can be lit).

Whether or not the bet switch has been operated is determined by executing the input port reading process and the input port data generation process, which are executed in the interrupt process. When the bet switch is operated, data regarding the operation of the bet switch is generated.

The game value input process, which is the main part of game progress, determines whether data relating to the operation of the bet switch has been stored, and if data relating to the operation of the bet switch has been stored, determines whether a bet is possible, and if a bet is possible, executes a process to add game medals one by one.

In the process of adding medals one by one, 1 is added to the RWM area that stores the number of bets, and then data displaying the number of inserted medals is generated and saved. Also, if the MAX bet switch is operated, the bet-related process is repeated until the number of bets reaches 3 or until it is determined that a bet is no longer possible.

In such a situation, the time from when the bet switch operation is accepted to when the value of the data displaying the number of coins inserted for one bet is stored is configured to be shorter than the cycle of the interrupt process. Also, the time from when the bet switch operation is accepted to when the value of the data displaying the number of coins inserted for one bet is stored may be configured to be shorter than the cycle of the dynamic lighting control.

To realize such a configuration, A should be set so that the number of cycles from the start of the game value input process to the saving of the input number display data is A x 0.0001 ms < 2.235 ms. In other words, the number of cycles A from the start of the game value input process to the saving of the input number display data is configured to be less than 22,350. In addition, in the case where the time from when the operation of the bet switch is accepted to when the value of the input number display data for one bet is stored is configured to be shorter than the period of the dynamic lighting control, A should be set so that the number of cycles A from the start of the game value input process to the saving of the input number display data is A x 0.0001 ms < 11.175 ms. In other words, the number of cycles A from the start of the game value input process to the saving of the input number display data is configured to be less than 111,750.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to light up the 1 bet lamp in the shortest cycle of interrupt processing or dynamic lighting processing, so the tempo of play is not hindered from operating the bet switch until the 1 bet lamp lights up, improving the enjoyment of the game.

Even if the lighting control of one bed lamp is static lighting control, there is no problem in comparing it with the shortest period of dynamic lighting control.

In addition, when the number of bets is 0 and the MAX bet switch is operated, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are displayed to light up in sequence, the time between storing the value of the inserted coin count display data for 1 bet and storing the value of the inserted coin count display data for 2 bets is configured to be longer than the dynamic lighting period.

To configure in this way, if the number of cycles is set so that the number of cycles from storing the value of the inserted number display data for 1 bet until storing the value of the inserted number display data for 2 bets x 0.0001 ms > 11.175 ms, the bet processing becomes redundant and this leads to a strain on the program capacity of the main control means, so the number of cycles from storing the value of the inserted number display data for 1 bet until storing the value of the inserted number display data for 2 bets x 0.0001 ms + standby time > 11.175 ms is configured. In other words, the number of cycles and standby time are determined so that the number of cycles from storing the value of the inserted number display data for 1 bet until storing the value of the inserted number display data for 2 bets x 0.0001 ms < 11.175 ms and the standby time > 11.175 ms - (the number of cycles from storing the value of the inserted number display data for 1 bet until storing the value of the inserted number display data for 2 bets x 0.0001 ms).

The waiting time is set after the value of the inserted coin count display data for 1 bet is stored and before the value of the inserted coin count display data for 2 bets is stored. During this time, the waiting time is updated, and when the waiting time becomes 0, the process for 2 bets is executed.

In this case, the number of cycles from storing the value of the inserted number display data for 1 bet to storing the value of the inserted number display data for 2 bets is approximately 120, which is 120 (number of cycles) x 0.0001 ms < 11.175 ms, and 0.012 ms < 11.175 ms, satisfying the above relationship. Also, the waiting time is 15 ms, which is 15 ms (waiting time) > 11.175 ms - (number of cycles from storing the value of the inserted number display data for 1 bet to storing the value of the inserted number display data for 2 bets x 0.0001 ms), and 15 ms > 11.163 ms, satisfying the above relationship.

In the case of static lighting control, the time between storing the value of the inserted number display data for one bet and storing the value of the inserted number display data for two bets can be configured to be longer than the interrupt processing cycle.

To achieve this configuration, the number of cycles from storing the value of the inserted number display data for 1 bet until storing the value of the inserted number display data for 2 bets × 0.0001 ms + standby time > 2.235 ms. In other words, the number of cycles and standby time are determined so that the number of cycles from storing the value of the inserted number display data for 1 bet until storing the value of the inserted number display data for 2 bets × 0.0001 ms < 2.235 ms, and the standby time > 2.235 ms - (the number of cycles from storing the value of the inserted number display data for 1 bet until storing the value of the inserted number display data for 2 bets × 0.0001 ms).

In this case, the number of cycles from storing the value of the inserted number display data for 1 bet to storing the value of the inserted number display data for 2 bets is approximately 120, which is 120 (number of cycles) x 0.0001 ms < 2.235 ms, and 0.012 ms < 2.235 ms, satisfying the above relationship. Also, the waiting time is 15 ms, which is 15 ms (waiting time) > 2.235 ms - (number of cycles from storing the value of the inserted number display data for 1 bet to storing the value of the inserted number display data for 2 bets x 0.0001 ms), and 15 ms > 2.223 ms, satisfying the above relationship.

Regardless of whether dynamic lighting control or static lighting control is used, as long as the above-mentioned relationship is satisfied, the number of cycles and waiting time from when the value of the inserted number display data for one bet is stored until when the value of the inserted number display data for two bets is stored can be changed as appropriate.

The process between 1 bet and 2 bets described above is the same as the process between 2 bets and 3 bets.

By configuring it this way, when the 1 to 3 bet lamps are lit in sequence, it is possible to prevent the bet lamps from lighting up simultaneously at the timing of the interrupt process, allowing the game to proceed at a good tempo and increasing the interest of the game.

It is also conceivable that the waiting time is set by the lighting process of the interrupt process. In this case, the process of storing the values of the inserted coin count display data for 1 to 3 bets is executed at the same interval or at shorter intervals than the interrupt process, but it is conceivable that the 2 bet lamp will not be lit if the waiting time has not elapsed after the 1 bet lamp is lit by the interrupt process, and the 3 bet lamp will not be lit if the next set waiting time has not elapsed after the 2 bet lamp is lit after the waiting time has elapsed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the bet lamps from being lit simultaneously at the timing of the interrupt process in a specification that lights up the 1 to 3 bet lamps in sequence, so that the game can be played at a good tempo and the interest of the game is increased.

<<Explanation regarding the lighting control of the credit number display>>
Here, regarding the lighting process of the credit number display, we will explain the case where, when a minor winning combination is determined as the internal drawing result by the internal drawing means of a specified game that has been started with three bets in a specified game state, eight game medals are added to the credits as a process of awarding game medals after all reels have stopped.

For example, if the credit data "10" is stored in a specified memory area of the RWM and a symbol combination that pays out eight gaming medals stops, the credit number display will increment to show 11 → 12 → 13 → ... → 18.

The process of displaying the credit number on the credit number display is a control related to the lighting of various LEDs in interrupt processing, and for each interrupt processing, the value of the credit data stored in a specified memory area of the RWM is obtained and the corresponding segment is lit up.

At this time, the credit data is updated by 1 as a credit addition process, from 10 to 11 to 12 to ... to 18.

The update interval for the credit data is configured to be longer than the cycle of the interrupt process. Specifically, the update interval for the credit data is 60 ms, and the cycle for the interrupt process is 2.235 ms. When the credit number display is lit using dynamic lighting control, it is desirable to set the update interval for the credit data > one cycle of dynamic lighting.

In this embodiment, the number of cycles of the program to add 1 credit is approximately 120, so 120 x 0.0001 ms = 0.012 ms, which is shorter than the period of the interrupt process. For this reason, in the credit addition process, a timer is set that becomes the waiting time after the credit data is changed from 10 to 11 in a specified memory area of the RWM, and if the timer value becomes 0 in the timer update process for each interrupt process, it is updated from 11 to 12 and the timer is set again. The timer value to be set is 60 ms.

In this way, during the credit data addition process to increment the credit display, a timer is set each time one credit is added, and if the timer value becomes 0 as a result of the timer update, the process of adding one to the credit data again is repeated.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reduce the size of the program, improve the readability of the program, and make it possible to display updates to the credit count display in increments, improving the tempo of the game and making it more interesting to play.

In addition, regarding the lighting process of the credit number display, we will explain the process when the settlement switch is operated while the credit number display shows 10, causing the credit number display to become 0.

For example, when the number of bets is 0 and "10" is stored as credit data in a specified memory area of the RWM, if the settlement switch is operated to execute the settlement process, the credit number display will decrement as follows: 9 → 8 → 7 → ... → 0.

The process of displaying the credit number on the credit number display is a control related to the lighting of various LEDs in interrupt processing, and for each interrupt processing, the value of the credit data stored in a specified memory area of the RWM is obtained and the corresponding segment is lit up.

At this time, as part of the settlement process, the credit data is updated by 1, from 10 → 9 → 8 → ... → 0.

The update interval for the credit data is configured to be longer than the cycle of the interrupt process. Specifically, the update interval for the credit data is 40 ms, and the cycle for the interrupt process is 2.235 ms. When the credit number display is lit using dynamic lighting control, it is desirable to set the update interval for the credit data > one cycle of dynamic lighting.

In this embodiment, the number of cycles of the program that subtracts 1 credit in the settlement process is approximately 120, so 120 x 0.0001 ms = 0.012 ms, which is shorter than the cycle of the interrupt process. For this reason, in the settlement process, a timer is set that becomes the standby time after the credit data is changed from 10 to 9 in a specified memory area of the RWM, and if the timer value becomes 0 in the timer update process for each interrupt process, it is updated from 9 to 8 and the timer is set again. The timer value to be set is 40 ms.

In this way, in order to cause the credit display to decrement, during the settlement process, a timer is set each time one credit is subtracted, and if the timer value becomes zero as a result of the timer update, the process of subtracting one from the credit data again is repeated.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reduce the size of the program, improve the readability of the program, and make it possible to display updates to the credit count display in decrements, improving the tempo of the game and making it more interesting to play.

<<Explanation about the start ramp>>
Here, regarding the lighting process of the start lamp, a case will be described in which the MAX BET switch is operated to place a bet of 3 after a predetermined game ends in a predetermined game state, and the start lamp lights up.

For example, when the number of bets is 0 and "10" is stored as credit data in a specified memory area of the RWM, if the MAX BET switch is operated, the 3 BET lamp will light up and then the START lamp will light up. Note that if the previous game is a replay and 3 bets are placed by the automatic insertion process, the 3 BET lamp will light up and then the START lamp will light up.

At this time, the system is designed so that the time from when "1" indicating that the 3 bed lamps are on is stored in the memory area for displaying the lighting to when "1" indicating that the start lamps are on is stored in the memory area for displaying the lighting is less than the interrupt period.

To achieve this design, the number of cycles of processing from the processing after storing "1" indicating that the lamp is on in the memory area for displaying the 3 bed lamps on until storing "1" indicating that the lamp is on in the memory area for displaying the start lamp on x 0.0001 ms < 2.235 ms. In other words, the number of cycles of processing from the processing after storing "1" indicating that the lamp is on in the memory area for displaying the 3 bed lamps on until storing "1" indicating that the lamp is on in the memory area for displaying the start lamp on is less than 22,350.

Note that even if "1" indicating lighting is stored in the 3 bed lamp display memory area, it will take time until the LED lighting process is executed in the next interrupt process and time until the 3 bed lamp is fully lit before it lights up. Therefore, by setting the number of cycles of processing from the processing after storing "1" indicating lighting in the 3 bed lamp display memory area to storing "1" indicating lighting in the start lamp display memory area x 0.0001 ms < 2.235 ms, it is possible for the 3 bed lamp and the start lamp to light up simultaneously or with a delay of one interrupt. In other words, if "1" indicating lighting is stored in the start lamp display memory area after storing "1" indicating lighting in the 3 bed lamp display memory area and before the start of the next interrupt process, the 3 bed lamp and the start lamp will light up simultaneously, and if "1" indicating lighting is stored in the start lamp display memory area after executing the interrupt process after storing "1" indicating lighting in the 3 bed lamp display memory area, the 3 bed lamp and the start lamp will light up with a delay of one interrupt.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to inform the player that they can play without delay after the 3-bet lamp comes on, improving the tempo of the game and increasing the interest of the game.

Here, we will also explain the process of turning on the start lamp, which occurs when the start switch is operated while the start lamp is on and the start lamp goes off.

For example, when the start switch is operated while the start lamp is on, the internal lottery process is executed to determine the internal lottery result. The start lamp also turns off.

At this time, the system is designed so that the time from when the start switch is operated to when the internal lottery result is determined is less than the time from when the start switch is operated to when the start lamp is completely turned off.

To achieve this design, the number of processing cycles from when the start switch is operated to when the internal lottery result is determined x 0.0001 ms < the time from when the start switch is operated to when the start lamp is completely turned off (20 ms). In other words, the number of processing cycles from when the start switch is operated to when the internal lottery result is determined is less than 200,000.

By configuring it in this way, the internal lottery result can be determined before the start lamp goes out, so even if someone tries to obtain the internal lottery result fraudulently, it will be difficult to tell when the internal lottery process was executed, making it possible to prevent fraudulent activity.

<Bet and start related game sounds>
Gaming machines output game sounds in response to various triggers, but here we will explain the bet sound that can be output by operating the bet switch or inserting a game medal, the wait sound that can be output by operating the start switch, and the reel start sound that can be output when the reels begin to spin.

The bet sound is output for each bet, and when three bets are made by operating the MAX bet switch, the same bet sound is output three times.

The betting sound is a "dap" sound that is output for 0.13 seconds per bet. If 3 bets are made, the betting sound is output for 0.13 seconds x 3 = 0.39 seconds.

The bet sound can be output when a command related to a bet is sent from the main control means and the sub-control means receives the command related to a bet, and the sub-control means executes the process related to outputting the bet sound. In addition, since the bet sound is output in one shot, once the bet sound is output, it will not be output repeatedly for that bet.

The wait sound is a sound that notifies the player of the minimum time of one game, which is 4.1 seconds. If it is less than 4.1 seconds from the start of reel rotation based on the operation of the start switch of a certain game to the start of reel rotation based on the operation of the start switch of the next game of the certain game, a waiting period (wait period) occurs during which the player waits for the start of reel rotation of the next game of the certain game to begin, from the start of reel rotation based on the operation of the start switch of the certain game until 4.1 seconds have elapsed, and the wait sound is configured to be output during this waiting period.

The output period of the wait sound changes depending on the remaining waiting period, but because it takes a minimum of about 1.1 seconds from when the reels start to spin until the start switch for the next game is operated, the waiting period may be output for a maximum of about 3 seconds. Also, the wait sound is output as "Tero, tero, tero..." during the waiting period, but this is because the sound data "terror" is output in a loop during the waiting period. The sound "terror" is output for 0.2 seconds. In the case of "tero, tero," it is output for 0.2 seconds x 3 = 0.6 seconds.

The wait sound can be output when a command regarding start switch acceptance is sent from the main control means and the sub-control means receives the command regarding start switch acceptance, and can be stopped when a command regarding starting reel rotation is sent from the main control means and the sub-control means receives the command regarding starting reel rotation, and the sub-control means executes the process regarding output of the wait sound. For this reason, the wait sound is output in a loop, so the wait sound does not stop from when the command regarding start switch acceptance is received until the command regarding starting reel rotation is received. Note that if a command regarding starting reel rotation is received between "te" and "ro" of the wait sound "tero", the output of the wait sound is stopped at that point, so "te" is output but "ro" is not output.

The reel start sound is the sound that is output when the reels start to rotate based on the operation of the start switch. If there is a waiting period, the reel start sound is configured to be output when the reels start to rotate after the start switch is operated.

The reel start sound is a "bang" sound that is output for 0.1 seconds each time the reel spins. Even if there are multiple reels, the reel start sound is only output once. In other words, the reel start sound can be output when all reels that stopped in the previous game start to spin by operating the start switch for the current game.

The reel start sound can be output when a command to start the reel rotation is sent from the main control means and the sub-control means receives the command to start the reel rotation, and the sub-control means executes the process to output the reel start sound. In addition, since the reel start sound is output in one shot, once the reel start sound is output, it is not output repeatedly for the start of the reel rotation.

The reel start sound is output when the reels start to spin, allowing the player to gauge the time between when the reels start to spin and when the stop switch is activated. For this reason, the reel start sound provides necessary information for the player to comfortably press the buttons.

The output times of the bet sound, wait sound, and reel start sound mentioned above do not indicate the playback time of each data, but the time from when the first sound is output until the last sound can no longer be heard. For example, if there is 0.1 seconds of silence before and after the sound "da-da" as bet sound data, the playback time of the bet sound data will be 0.1 seconds + 0.13 seconds + 0.1 seconds = 0.33 seconds, which indicates that the output time of the bet sound is 0.13 seconds.

Here, we will explain the volume of various sounds based on Figure 94.

The administrator volume in FIG. 94 is a volume that cannot be changed by players and can only be changed by the administrator. For example, conditions for adjusting the administrator volume include operation of a specific sub-switch (sub-switch 20, sub-cross key switch 21, or a switch for effects) while checking settings, operation of a specific sub-switch (sub-switch 20, sub-cross key switch 21, or a switch for effects) while changing settings, and operation of a specific sub-switch (rotary switch) inside the cabinet (behind the front door or inside the cabinet). In other words, the conditions for adjusting the administrator volume include device conditions that cannot be operated by players. FIG. 94 shows that three levels (low, normal, high) can be selected.

The player volume in FIG. 94 is the volume that can be changed by the player. For example, it is the volume that can be changed on a volume adjustment screen that can be selected on a menu screen that can be displayed by operating a sub-switch, or the volume that can be changed by pressing the left or right arrow on the directional pad. FIG. 94 shows that there are 10 levels to choose from.

The numbers assigned to each sound in Figure 94 indicate the volume, measured in decibels. For example, when the administrator volume is "low" and the player volume is "1," the volume of the betting sound is 12 decibels.

In this embodiment, both the administrator volume and the player volume are adjustable, but it is also possible to have only one of them be adjustable. In that case, the volume relationship between the game sounds and system sounds will not change.

Here, we will explain the relationship between the weight sound and the reel start sound.

The wait sound and reel start sound can be triggered by operating the start switch. As mentioned above, the wait sound can be output when the start switch acceptance command is received, and the reel start sound can be output when the reel rotation start command is received after operating the start switch. In other words, the wait sound and reel start sound are output at very close intervals.

And under certain volume conditions (when the administrator volume and player volume are set to certain levels), the wait sound is made quieter than the reel start sound.

This configuration makes it easier for players to hear the reel start sound that is output after the wait sound, making it easier for them to recognize when the reels have started to spin. This makes it clearer when the reels start to spin, and easier to understand when to operate the stop switch, improving the tempo of the game and increasing the player's interest in the game.

As mentioned above, one loop of the wait sound is output for 0.2 seconds, and the reel start sound is output for 0.1 seconds.

This configuration allows the player to intuitively determine which sound was output when the start switch was turned on. In other words, the wait sound may be output for a maximum of approximately three seconds, but the reel start-up sound is output for only 0.1 seconds. Therefore, by making the time for one loop of the wait sound longer than the time for the reel start-up sound, the player can intuitively determine that the wait sound was output, for example, 0.2 seconds after the start switch was operated. This improves the tempo of the game and increases the interest in the game.

Here, we will explain the relationship between the weight sound and the bed sound.

The bet sound can be output in response to the operation of the bet switch, and the wait sound can be output in response to the operation of the start switch. When the operation of the bet switch results in a bet number that allows play, the operation of the start switch is validated. For this reason, the bet sound and the wait sound are output at very close times.

And under certain volume conditions (when the administrator volume and player volume are set to certain levels), the volume of the wait sound is lower than the bet sound.

If things continue as they are, there is a possibility that the wait sound will be drowned out by the bet sound, but since the bet sound is an important sound that allows the player to determine whether or not a bet has been placed as a result of the player's operation of the bet switch, it would not be wise to make the bet sound quieter than the wait sound.

To solve this problem, the bet sound output period and the wait sound output period are designed not to overlap. For example, when three bets are made by operating the bet switch, "dadda dadda" is output for 0.39 seconds, but even if the start switch is operated and the wait sound is output the shortest time after the start switch operation becomes effective after the bet switch operation, the output of the final "dadda" of the bet sound will end before the "te" sound that starts the wait sound is heard, and it will no longer be audible.

This configuration makes it possible to prevent the betting sound from blocking the sound of the waiting, and also makes the volume of the betting sound louder than the sound of the waiting, improving the tempo of the game and increasing the interest of the game.

Note that there are cases where game sounds other than the bet sound are output when placing a bet, but since these game sounds are not bet sounds, they do not fall under the above-mentioned function of the bet sound. Game sounds other than the bet sound output when placing a bet are, for example, a congratulatory sound that is output when notifying the player of a favorable result, such as winning the AT, when the MAX bet switch is operated while the LCD screen is displaying "Press the MAX bet switch!!" when waiting for a bet and the result of a lottery related to instruction functions such as the AT is announced. In other words, game sounds when the bet switch is used for anything other than betting game medals are not bet sounds.

The volume of each game sound shown in FIG. 94 increases in proportion to the increase in the player volume, but it is not limited to this and may be configured so that the increase in the volume of a specific game sound is smaller. For example, with regard to the wait sound, when the player volume is "1" and the administrator volume is "low", the volume is 8, and when the player volume is "2" and the administrator volume is "low", the volume is 12, and the volume of the wait sound is 1.2 times when the player volume is "1" and when it is "2", the volume is 8 when the player volume is "1" and the administrator volume is "low", and when the player volume is "2" and the administrator volume is "low", the volume is 9, so that the increase in the volume of the wait sound may be smaller (other bet sounds and reel start sounds increase by the same amount).

In addition to the game sounds shown in FIG. 94, there is also background music (Background Music), voices, and sound effects (Sound Effects) that are played during gameplay. The volume of the background music, voices, and sound effects is set higher than the bet sounds, wait sounds, and reel start sounds. For example, when the player volume is "1" and the administrator volume is "low," the volume of the bet sounds is "12," the volume of the wait sounds is "8," and the volume of the reel start sounds is "10," but in this situation the volume of a certain background music is "30," the volume of a certain voice is "45," and the volume of a certain sound effect is "50." Note that under certain volume conditions, not all BGM, voices, and sound effects are louder than the bet sounds, wait sounds, and reel start sounds, but rather, more than half of all BGM, voices, and sound effects are set to volumes louder than the bet sounds, wait sounds, and reel start sounds. Note that the volume of BGM, voices, and sound effects also increases proportionally, or simply increases, as the player volume or administrator volume increases.

Also, we have already mentioned the output time and volume of the bet sound, wait sound, and reel start sound, but we will now explain the data capacity of each sound.

The relationship between the data capacity of bet sound data that can be output for one bet, the data capacity of wait sound data for one loop of wait sound, and the data capacity of the reel start sound data for the reel start sound is wait sound data > reel start sound data > bet sound data. In this way, the reel start sound has a shorter output period than the bet sound data, but has a larger data capacity. This is because the reel start sound is not composed of a simple sound, so that it makes a stronger impression on players than the bet sound. This makes it easier for players to remember the reel start sound, which can improve the tempo of the game.

<<About game sounds in simulated games>>
Various game sounds that occur during simulated play will now be described.

As mentioned above, simulated play is a freeze effect that is triggered by operating the start switch. In particular, during the freeze effect, all reels spin, and the corresponding reel stops when the stop switch is operated.

Although this type of pseudo game executes a swing fluctuation process and a random delay process, it operates in the same manner as the actual game, making it difficult for the player to tell whether a pseudo game or an actual game is being played. In particular, since the pseudo game and the actual game operate in a similar manner when the reels start to spin, players who are unable to predict that it is a pseudo game can be surprised and delighted by the unique stopping mode of the pseudo game as a result of operating the stop switch, which is an element that increases the interest of the game.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the difference between the actual game and the simulated game is made harder to distinguish than in the past, further increasing the interest.

In this game, a wait sound can be output. The wait sound is output during the wait period. Since the pseudo game starts before the acceleration process, the pseudo game is executed for a period equivalent to the wait period. If the pseudo game is started without setting a wait period when there is still some wait period remaining, the player will feel uncomfortable when the reels start to spin. Therefore, if there is still some wait period remaining, the reels do not start to spin for the period equivalent to the wait period when the pseudo game starts, and the reels start to spin when the period equivalent to the wait period ends. Note that the system is configured to output the same wait sound as in this game during the period equivalent to the wait period.

In this case, the timer value for the wait period is obtained when the pseudo game starts, the timer value for the wait period obtained at the beginning of the pseudo game operation is set, the timer value for the wait period that has been set is updated, and when it is determined that the timer value is 0, the reel spin start process related to the pseudo game is executed.

In this case, when switching from the actual game to the pseudo game, the pseudo game is started before determining whether the wait period has elapsed. Also, the timer value for the wait period is either continued to be updated during the pseudo game, or initialized after the pseudo game starts. Then, by making the shortest play time in the actual game + the shortest play time in the pseudo game longer than 4.1 seconds, the shortest play time can be guaranteed, and since there is no wait period remaining when the actual game starts after the pseudo game ends, the actual game can be started smoothly.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to tell whether a real game or a pseudo game has started, creating a sense of surprise when it turns out to be a pseudo game.

Note that, while an example of managing a period equivalent to a wait period during a pseudo game has been described above, this is not limiting, and the reel spin start process for the pseudo game may be executed when the wait for the actual game ends. In other words, before the pseudo game starts, it is determined whether or not it is in a wait period, and if it is determined that it is in a wait period, the determination process is repeated until it is determined that it is not in a wait period, and if it is determined that it is not in a wait period, the reel spin start process for the pseudo game is executed.

In addition, when two pseudo games are executed consecutively, a timer is set at the start of reel rotation (the timer's initial value is 4.1 seconds) to determine whether 4.1 seconds have elapsed between the start of reel rotation in the previous pseudo game and the start of reel rotation in the current pseudo game, and if the timer value is not 0 and the operation of the start switch that marks the start of the current pseudo game is accepted, the reel rotation start process for the current pseudo game is not executed until the timer value becomes 0.

Between the previous and current simulated games, a simulated bet sound will be output when the bet switch is operated, but no credits will be subtracted.

When the start switch operation is accepted in this simulated game, random delay processing may or may not be performed.

Even if a random delay is not implemented, the wait period and betting sounds are expressed through effects, so it is possible to some extent to prevent the fact that the game is a pseudo game from being discovered in advance. Note that when a random delay is implemented, it is more difficult to tell whether the game is a pseudo game or a real game than when a random delay is not implemented.

When a random delay is implemented after the simulated game, the reel start sound is output when the reels start spinning. In this case, the timing of outputting the reel start sound may be in response to the first reel to start spinning, in response to the last reel to start spinning, for each reel that starts spinning, or no reel start sound is output at all.

When outputting the reel start sound in accordance with the reel that starts spinning first, the reel start sound is output when the first reel spins after the delay time caused by the random delay process has run out. In other words, the reel start sound is output for the reel that starts spinning first among the left reel, center reel, and right reel.

When outputting the reel start sound in accordance with the reel that last started spinning, the reel start sound is output when the reel that last rotated after the delay time caused by the random delay process has run out. In other words, the reel start sound is output for the reel that last started spinning among the left reel, center reel, and right reel.

When outputting the reel start sound for each reel that starts spinning, the reel start sound is output each time a reel spins after the delay time caused by the random delay process has run out. In other words, the reel start sound is output when all reels, the left reel, center reel, and right reel, have started spinning.

When the reel start sound is output in this way even with a random delay, the reel start sound is output at the same timing as in the actual game, which reduces the sense of discomfort felt by the player when transitioning from the pseudo game to the actual game, improves the tempo of the game, and increases the enjoyment of the game.

When the reel start sound is not output, the reel start sound is not output even if the reel spins after the random delay process has eliminated the delay time. In other words, the reel start sound is not output regardless of whether the left reel, center reel, or right reel starts spinning. In this case, the absence of a reel start sound makes the player feel more uncomfortable than if a reel start sound were present, but since it is possible to prevent the reel start sound from being output at a time that is not intended by the player, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable in that respect.

When transitioning from a pseudo game to a main game, the reel spin start process for the main game may be executed after waiting for the wait period from when the reels start spinning in the pseudo game to when the reels start spinning in the main game. The reels start spinning in the main game is executed after executing a random delay process. In other words, a wait period can be created by operating the start switch for the main game when transitioning from a pseudo game to a main game, and a wait sound can be output.

When configured in this way, it is possible to minimize changes when transitioning from the actual game to the pseudo game, when transitioning from the pseudo game to the pseudo game, and when transitioning from the pseudo game to the actual game, so it is possible for the player to play without being aware of whether he is playing a pseudo game or an actual game, improving the tempo of the game and increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, while an embodiment in which a wait period is set at the start of a simulated game has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and there are cases in which a wait period is set at the start of a simulated game and cases in which a wait period is not set, and it may be possible to increase the rate at which a result advantageous to the player is awarded as a lottery result related to an instruction function such as an AT when a wait period is not set. With such a configuration, the player feels a sense of discomfort due to the lack of a wait, and at the same time, can hope for a favorable lottery result, which increases the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, although an embodiment in which a wait period is set at the start of a simulated game has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and no wait period may be set at the start of a simulated game.

In addition, when starting a pseudo game even if there is still a waiting period remaining from the start of reel rotation in the main game when transitioning from the main game to the pseudo game, the wait sound may not be looped during the maximum remaining waiting period (the period when playing in the shortest time from the start of reel rotation in the main game to the start of reel rotation in the pseudo game). For example, if the maximum remaining waiting period is 2.1 seconds, one loop of the wait sound is set to 2.1 seconds or more. By configuring in this way, the wait sound does not loop when transitioning from the main game to the pseudo game in the shortest period, so it is possible to reduce boredom with the game caused by continually hearing the same sound.

<Measures against fraudulent gaming machines and prevention of dangerous installations>
In recent years, due to the fact that the installation ratio of each type of gaming machine in an arcade has been set, there have been cases where gaming machines are installed in a manner different from the usual installation method in order to increase the installation ratio of a certain type of gaming machine.

In addition, in order to differentiate themselves from neighboring stores, the layout of the gaming machines in each store is becoming more diverse.

In addition, there has been an increase in cases where players purchase gaming machines and play at home. These players are not necessarily skilled in operating gaming machines, and this raises the risk of creating dangerous installation situations.

The purpose of the gaming machine in this embodiment is to prevent some extreme installation methods in order to allow safe play in a variety of installation situations.

First, the correct installation of a gaming machine is as shown in Figure 1, with the bottom plate resting on a horizontal surface (or placement space) and the top plate positioned horizontally above the bottom plate. In addition, the left and right side plates and the back plate stand at approximately right angles to the horizontal surface (or placement space).

If the machine is properly installed like this, it is safe to play.

Next, we will explain dangerous installation situations using Figure 95.

As shown in Figure 95, dangerous installation conditions for gaming machines include those in which the bottom plate is installed so that it touches an inclined surface (for example, a surface that is inclined 45 degrees downward to the left). Or, the left side plate is installed so that it touches a horizontal surface (in other words, the left side plate is the bottom, the top plate and bottom plate are standing at approximately right angles to the horizontal surface, and the right side plate is installed so that it is positioned horizontally above the left side plate). Note that Figure 95 shows the bottom plate installed on a surface that is inclined 45 degrees downward to the left when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and when the inclination of the surface becomes 90 degrees, the left side plate is installed so that it touches a horizontal surface.

In such dangerous installation conditions, there is a risk that the gaming machine may fall over, making it impossible to guarantee safe play.

<<Prevention of dangerous installation situations with selectors>>
For this reason, when the gaming machine is tilted to the left (45 degrees to 90 degrees), an error occurs in the gaming machine and the progress of the game is stopped. When the gaming machine is in a normal installation state, it is said that the gaming machine is installed in the normal position, or that the selector is installed in the normal position. In the following explanation of this example, it is assumed that the gaming machine is powered on and is in a waiting state after one game has ended and no bet has been placed.

Specifically, one method for indicating an error in a gaming machine is for the movable piece of the aisle sensor mounted on the selector to swing when the gaming machine is tilted to the left (45 degrees to 90 degrees), inducing a selector error and halting game progress. Note that if the aisle sensor detects a situation where it is not in its initial position for a specified period of time, it will be deemed a selector error.

Figure 96 shows a movable piece mounted on a selector and a sensor that detects the movable piece, where Figure 96(A) is a diagram of the selector when the gaming machine is in a normal installation state, and Figure 96(B) is a diagram of the selector when the gaming machine is in a dangerous installation state.

For example, the sensor in FIG. 96 is a passage sensor, and has a selector on which a movable piece constituting the passage sensor mounted on a selector is supported by an axis, and when the selector is installed in the correct position, the movable piece is configured to pop out onto the medal passage so that it can come into contact with medals, etc. When a medal, etc. comes into contact with the movable piece, the movable piece rotates, and the sensor constituting the passage sensor changes on or off due to the oscillation of the movable piece, thereby detecting medals, etc.

As shown in FIG. 96(A), in the case of such a selector, when no medals or the like have been inserted through the medal insertion slot and the selector is set in the correct position, the movable piece is prevented from swinging by a resilient member such as a spring, so that the movable piece is set in its initial position. Also, when no medals or the like have been inserted through the medal insertion slot and the selector is set in the correct position, the movable piece is not prevented from swinging by a resilient member such as a spring, but the swing of the movable piece may be restricted by gravity acting on the movable piece, so that the movable piece is set in its initial position. In such a case, if the selector is set at an angle so that the movable piece faces downward, it will be more susceptible to the effects of gravity, and the movable piece will be able to stably exist in its initial position.

In a gaming machine equipped with such a selector, when the gaming machine is installed in the correct position, the movable piece of the selector is in the initial position, and in this situation the passage sensor does not determine that there is an abnormality, so the progress of the game is not stopped.

As shown in FIG. 96(B), in the case of such a selector, when no medals or the like have been inserted through the medal insertion slot and the gaming machine is installed in a dangerous installation condition, the elastic member such as a spring and the gravity vector received by the movable piece are made different from those in a normal gaming machine condition so that the movable piece will swing, and the movable piece will be displaced to a position different from its initial position. Also, when no medals or the like have been inserted through the medal insertion slot and the selector is installed in the correct position, the swing of the movable piece is not restricted by an elastic member such as a spring, and the swing of the movable piece can be restricted by gravity acting on the movable piece so that the movable piece is set to its initial position, the point at which the movable piece is subjected to gravity changes, and the movable piece is displaced to a position different from its initial position.

In a gaming machine equipped with such a selector, if the gaming machine is installed in a dangerous installation condition, the movable piece will swing due to the different points at which the movable piece receives gravity, and when the power is turned on, the sensor will no longer detect the movable piece moving from its initial position, and the passage sensor will determine that there is an abnormality, making it possible to stop the progress of the game.

Another dangerous situation in which an amusement machine can be installed is when the back panel of the machine is placed on a surface that is horizontal to the ground, and the bottom panel, top panel, or left and right side panels are at approximately right angles to the surface.

Even if such a gaming machine is installed in a dangerous installation condition, the operating mode of the selector's movable piece is the same as that described above, and the operation of the movable piece as shown in Figure 96 (B) makes it possible to detect a selector error and stop the progress of the game when the power is turned on.

In addition, since using a dedicated sensor to determine whether the gaming machine is in a dangerous installation situation would increase the number of parts and costs, the situation of the gaming machine can be detected using a sensor equipped in the selector. Therefore, when the gaming machine is in a normal installation situation and the power is on, if the orientation of the selector is the same as when the gaming machine is in a dangerous installation situation, the above-mentioned selector error can occur. For example, if the selector is tilted 45 to 90 degrees to the left from the normal position or tilted 90 degrees backward from the normal position, a selector error can be detected and the progress of the game can be stopped.

This configuration makes it possible to prevent gameplay from progressing when the gaming machine is placed in a dangerous installation state, thereby making it possible to prevent dangerous installation methods for gaming machines. In addition, tilting the selector in a direction similar to a dangerous installation state will result in a selector error, so it is expected that this will also have the effect of detecting fraud when a selector that has been removed due to fraudulent activity is reinstalled in the wrong direction.

If the gaming machine is installed in a dangerous condition and the selector error is prevented from occurring, when the start switch is operated with three bets, the reels will spin and can be stopped by operating the stop switch (play can proceed).

<<Prevention of dangerous installation conditions related to medal payout>>
Dangerous installation conditions of gaming machines will be explained using Figure 97.

Figure 97 shows the rear view of the front door when the left side panel of the gaming machine is placed on a horizontal surface. Although not shown, the front door is actually in a closed state. Note that the black arrow in Figure 97 indicates an enlargement of the area surrounded by the dotted line.

In machines that do not stop play because a specified error occurs when the left side panel of the gaming machine is placed on a horizontal surface, or that do not stop play even when the situation in Figure 97 occurs because a specified error is not detected during play, if the situation in Figure 97 occurs during play and a symbol combination that can result in a specified number of payouts after all reels have stopped is stopped, the payout process can be executed.

When a predetermined number of payout processes are executed in the situation shown in Figure 97 (a situation in which more than a predetermined number of medals are stored in the hopper), medals are not discharged into the tray 28, and are configured to be able to be stored in the receiving section of Figure 97.

In addition, under normal installation conditions, the hopper discharge outlet and the medal payout outlet 45 of the return passage are a specified distance apart even when the front door is closed. In other words, medals paid out from the hopper fly out from the hopper discharge outlet, pass through the medal payout outlet 45 of the return passage and are guided to the tray 28. The medals remain in the air for at least a specified distance from when they fly out from the hopper discharge outlet until they pass through the medal payout outlet 45 of the return passage.

When a dangerous installation situation occurs, as shown in Figure 97, the gravity vector acting on the medals in the air differs from that of a normal installation situation, but the medals flying out of the hopper's discharge outlet do not collide with the edge of the medal payout outlet 45 of the return passage, but pass through the medal payout outlet 45 of the return passage and are stored in the receiving section of the return passage.

In addition, the receiving section of the return passage is designed to be wide and deep enough to hold 15 25Φ medals (the maximum number of medals that can be paid out under gaming machine regulations) in a dangerous installation situation, so even if the specifications are such that 15 medals can be paid out, they can still be stored in the receiving section of the return passage.

Also, medals can be stored in the receiving section of the return passage that protrudes forward as shown in <the right side view of the area enclosed by the dotted line> in Figure 97. Since game medals are generally about 1.6 mm thick and 25 mm in diameter, the capacity of the receiving section of the return passage (the capacity of the protruding part around the medal payout opening of the return passage) must be ⁶⁰⁰ mm2 or more in order to store 15 medals.

By configuring it in this way, when medals are paid out in a dangerous installation situation, they do not come out to the tray 28 but are instead stored in the receiving section of the return passage. This means that the progress of the game can essentially be stopped by not paying out medals, making it possible to prevent playing in a dangerous installation situation.

In addition, when the payout process is executed with the back plate of the gaming machine placed on a horizontal surface, the medals collide with the edge of the medal payout outlet 45 of the return passage, preventing them from being guided to the receiving tray 28.

Even with this configuration, gameplay cannot progress, so dangerous installation situations can be prevented.

<< Measures against fraudulent use of speakers >>
In recent years, there have been cases of fraudsters committing fraud against speakers in order to intentionally make it harder to hear error sounds and unusual sounds that are generated when performing fraudulent operations (such as the same sound being output repeatedly or a specified sound being output in a situation where it cannot be output).

The aim of the gaming machine of this embodiment is to make it possible to hear as much sound as possible even if tampering is performed on the speaker.

Figure 98 shows the front view of the gaming machine, which is equipped with lower and upper speakers. The speakers are fixed to the back side of the front door.

The area indicated by the dashed line in Figure 98 is the entire circumference of the lower speaker's cone paper, so that the entire speaker cannot be seen from the front of the gaming machine. The diameter of the speaker's cone paper is 70 mm.

A cover member is placed on the front door of the gaming machine to cover the speaker's cone paper and center cap, and the cover member has many holes formed in it to output the speaker's sound to the player. The cover member is made of a non-magnetic metal. Note that Figure 98 is an image, and the number of holes in the cover member is not as shown in the figure.

The holes in the cover have a diameter of 2 mm, and there are 300 holes in the cover corresponding to one of the lower speakers.

In other words, the total area of the holes in the cover member is 942 square millimeters ((2/2) x (2/2) x 3.14 x 300). In contrast, the area of the cone paper and center cap is 3,846.5 square millimeters ((70/2) x (70/2) x 3.14). In other words, the total area of the holes in the cover member is less than 1/4 of the area of the cone paper and center cap.

By configuring it in this way, even if a wire or the like penetrates through all the holes in the cover member and creates holes in the cone paper and center cap equal to the total area of the holes in the cover member, more than 3/4 of the area of the cone paper and center cap will remain.

As a result, even if the cone paper and center cap are torn by wire or the like entering through all the holes in the cover member, at least 3/4 of the area of the cone paper and center cap will remain. The volume reduction rate when at least 3/4 of the area of the cone paper and center cap remains is set to less than 20%, so error sounds and game sounds from the gaming machine can be heard adequately even through a torn speaker.

In addition, in a situation where the cone paper and center cap are torn by wire or the like entering through all the holes in the cover member, even if the volume that the player can set is the lowest (excluding silence), the game sound will be above 50 decibels on average and will be sufficiently audible. Note that the volume of the error sound cannot be changed by the player.

In addition, the above explanation describes a situation in which the cone paper and center cap are torn by wires or the like entering through all the holes in the cover member, but all the holes in the cover member are only on the front surface of the cone paper, and even if only the cone paper is torn and holes are made in the cone paper equal to the total area of the holes in the cover member, more than 3/4 of the area of the cone paper will remain.

And because the volume reduction rate is less than 20% when more than 3/4 of the cone's surface area remains, error sounds and game sounds from the gaming machine can be heard clearly.

The number of holes in the cover member, the size of the holes, the size of the cone paper, and the center cap mentioned above are examples, and as long as the cone paper and center cap are configured so that the wire or the like can be inserted through all the holes in the cover member and more than 3/4 of the area of the cone paper remains, the design of each can be any value.

In the upper speaker in Figure 98, the area of the speaker's cone paper and center cap is approximately the same as the area of the cover member. In addition, a hole in the cover member is formed on approximately the front surface of the cover member. The speaker's cone paper and center cap are approximately rectangular, measuring 100 mm in length and 30 mm in width.

The diameter of the holes in the cover member is 2 mm, and there are 480 holes in the cover member corresponding to one of the upper speakers.

In other words, the total area of the holes in the cover member is 1507.2 square millimeters ((2/2) x (2/2) x 3.14 x 480). In contrast, the area of the cone paper and center cap is 3000 square millimeters (100 x 30). In other words, the total area of the holes in the cover member is approximately 1/2 (1/1.99) of the area of the cone paper and center cap.

In the case of such an upper speaker, even if wire or the like penetrates through all the holes in the cover member and holes are created in the cone paper and center cap equal to the total area of the holes in the cover member, the structure is such that 1/1.5 or more and less than 1/2.5 of the area of the cone paper and center cap remains.

The design is such that when 1/1.5 to 1/2.5 of the cone paper and center cap area remains, the volume reduction rate is less than 50%.

With this configuration, the area of the speaker's cone paper and center cap is approximately the same as the area of the cover member, and even if wire or the like penetrates through all the holes in the cover member and creates holes in the cone paper and center cap equal to the total area of the holes in the cover member, the error sounds and game sounds from the gaming machine can be heard sufficiently, making it possible to prevent fraudulent play on the gaming machine.

In the case of the upper speaker, similar to the case of the lower speaker, if the cone paper and center cap are torn by wire or the like entering through all the holes in the cover member, even if the volume that the player can set is the minimum (excluding silence), the game sound will be above 40 decibels on average and will be sufficiently audible. Note that the volume of the error sound cannot be changed by the player.

The number of holes in the cover member, the size of the holes, the size of the cone paper, and the center cap mentioned above are examples, and as long as the cone paper and center cap are configured so that wires or the like can be inserted through all the holes in the cover member and 1/1.5 or more and less than 1/2.5 of the area of the cone paper remains, the design of each can be any value.

Although not shown, the volume reduction rate is set to less than 40% when 1/2.5 to less than 3/4 of the area of the cone paper and center cap remains. Therefore, even if wire or the like penetrates through all the holes in the cover member and the cone paper and center cap are made with holes in the cone paper and center cap as many as the total area of the holes in the cover member, the error sounds and game sounds from the gaming machine can be heard sufficiently, and fraudulent acts against the gaming machine can be prevented.

<<Prevention of problems caused by liquid flowing in from the inlet>>
In recent years, there have been a number of incidents in which tea and other beverages have been poured into the medal slot.

The medal slot has holes to allow medals to be inserted into the gaming machine. If the medal slot has a large hole, it is easier to insert all the medals at once, and if the medal slot has a small hole, it is easier to insert medals one at a time.

In addition, medals inserted through the medal insertion port may be guided through a selector to a hopper, or from the selector through a return passage to the tray 28.

This is because the medal specifications are actually fixed, and because the medal slot is designed to guide the medals to a predetermined location inside the gaming machine, it is designed not to guide the medals to any other location than the predetermined location (although there may be irregular instances where medals spill out).

However, when liquid is poured into the medal slot, it can splash into unexpected places, causing fires or breakdowns.

The aim of the gaming machine of this embodiment is to prevent malfunctions from occurring even if liquid is poured into the medal insertion port.

Figure 99 is a view of the front door from the back, and Figure 100 is a view of the selector from the right side.

The liquids that may be poured in first are likely to be tea, water, coffee, or juice sold in stores, and their volumes are generally 150 ml to 500 ml. Of these, water has the lowest kinetic viscosity of 1.004×10 ⁻⁶ m ² /S (20° C.).

The following explanation uses water as an example, as it has the lowest kinetic viscosity of any liquid that may be added, but it goes without saying that the configuration will still be satisfactory if water is replaced with tea, coffee, or juice, which has a higher kinetic viscosity than water.

If the liquid inserted through the medal slot were to flow into the power box, it could cause an electrical short circuit and result in a fire. Also, if the liquid inserted through the medal slot were to flow into the hopper, it could cause the hopper to break down.

For this reason, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is configured to guide as much of the liquid inserted through the medal insertion port as possible into the tray 28.

First, the size of the medal insertion hole, which is the entrance through which the liquid flows in, is roughly rectangular, with a length of 1.7 mm to less than 3 mm and a width of 25 mm to less than 30 mm. This is to make it smaller than the 30 mm diameter of a typical plastic bottle.

This configuration prevents the liquid from flowing out of the medal slot all at once, keeping the liquid flow speed below a certain level. This prevents the liquid from increasing in speed and splashing into the gaming machine cabinet.

Next, since the liquid flowing in from the medal insertion port enters the selector, the width of the passage through which the medals roll from the selector to the hopper (width A in Figure 100) is made less than 3 mm so that it is not led from the selector to the hopper.

By configuring it in this way, medals can be passed through the selector, but the liquid can spill out of the passage and be led to the return passage. This makes it difficult for the liquid to be led to the hopper, preventing damage to the hopper. In addition, because the passage to the hopper is provided with a chute member as shown in Figure 99, even if some liquid is led to the hopper, it is possible for it to be stopped by the chute member.

The liquid that has been guided to the return passage is then guided through the return passage to the tray 28. The return passage is fixed to the back surface of the front door with screws in multiple places (not shown) and is configured to prevent liquid from leaking around the return passage. In addition, the medal payout outlet is configured so that it is not positioned in the liquid's flow path, preventing liquid from splashing out from the medal payout outlet. In addition, the area behind the front door that is covered by the return passage is configured so that there are no gaps as it is made of a single member.

This configuration allows the liquid guided from the selector to the return passage to flow down the return passage and into the tray 28. This makes it difficult for the liquid to spill into the housing, and therefore makes it difficult for the liquid to be guided towards the power supply box, preventing fires and breakdowns.

The tray 28 is designed to prevent liquid from spilling out of the tray 28. Specifically, the tray has a volume of 500 ml or more.

By configuring it in this way, even if liquid the size of a typical plastic bottle is poured into the medal insertion port, it can be received in the tray 28 and is less likely to spill onto the store, reducing the cleaning burden on the store.

It should be noted that 100% of the liquid poured from the medal insertion port does not have to be guided to the tray. This is because, as the liquid normally flows down, some of it remains in each passageway and on the walls, so even if 500 ml of liquid is poured from the medal insertion port, less than 500 ml of liquid will accumulate in tray 28. Also, since a small amount of liquid spilling onto the bottom of the housing is unlikely to cause a fire or malfunction, the objective can be achieved by configuring the device so that 50% or more of the liquid poured from the medal insertion port accumulates in tray 28.

In this embodiment, a slot machine (reel type gaming machine) is used as an example of the gaming machine, but the invention can be applied to various gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, jankyu gaming machines, Parrot, or casino machines.

The technical details of the present embodiment described above for the purpose of explaining the present invention can be combined as appropriate.

PS1: Slot machine PS2: Front panel PS3: Cabinet S: Speaker 100: Main control board 1000: Sub control board 4: Display window 5: Lower panel 6: Reel unit 7: Reel base 8a: Left reel 8b: Center reel 8c: Right reel 11: Operation panel 12: Start switch 13: Stop switch 13a: Left stop switch 13b: Center stop switch 13c: Right stop switch 17: Medal insertion slot 18: MAX bet switch 19: 1 bet switch 20: Sub switch 21: Sub cross key switch 22: Eject switch 24: Operation indicator lamp 24a: Left operation indicator lamp 24b: Center operation indicator lamp 24c: Right operation indicator lamp 25: Number of bets display lamp 25a: 1 bet lamp 25b: 2 bet lamp 25c: 3 bet lamp 26: Number of credits display 26a : Segment display 26b : Segment display 27 : Acquired coin number display 27a : Segment display 27b : Segment display 28 : Tray 29 : Cigarette ashtray 30 : Sticker storage section 32 : Display device 34 : Medal selector 37 : Setting key switch 38 : Setting switch 39 : Power supply unit 40 : Power switch 44 : Hopper 45 : Medal payout outlet 46 : Auxiliary tank 47 : External output terminal board

Claims (1)

a game medium number storage means capable of storing the number of game media;
a game medium number display means capable of displaying the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means,
The lighting and extinguishing of each segment constituting the game media number display means can be controlled by an interrupt process that can be executed at a predetermined cycle;
when a predetermined number of payout processes are executed in a certain game, a predetermined number of game media can be added one by one to the game media number storage means, and the number of game media displayed on the game media number display means can be updated every time the game medium is added one by one to the game media number storage means,
A gaming machine in which an interval at which a predetermined number of game media are added one by one to a game media number storage means when a predetermined number of payout processes are executed in a certain game is longer than a predetermined cycle of an interrupt process.

Images